4 01 Electrical and Starting System

Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Product: TRACK-TYPE TRACTOR
Model: D6R II TRACK-TYPE TRACTOR AAX
Configuration: D6R SERIES II Track-Type Tractor XL Differential Steering AAX00001-UP (MACHINE) POWERED BY C-9 Engine
Systems Operation
30SI Series and 34SI Series Alternator
Media Number -SENR7508-01 Publication Date -01/12/1999 Date Updated -09/10/2001

i01171434
General Information
SMCS - 1405
The alternator is an electrical component that is belt driven. The alternator charges the storage battery
during engine operation and the alternator supplies electrical power for the machine electrical system.
The alternators that are covered by this manual are internally cooled. Air is drawn through baffles.
The baffles are located in the rear cover. The air exits from the drive end frame behind the fan.
The alternator converts mechanical energy to electrical energy. This is done by rotating a direct
current electromagnetic field on the inside of a three-phase stator. The alternating current and voltage
are generated by the stator. The current and the voltage are changed to direct current by a three-phase
full wave rectifier. The rectifier uses six silicon rectifier diodes.
The alternator is a brushless unit. The voltage regulator is located inside the alternator. The only
movable part in the assembly is the rotor. The rotor is mounted on a ball bearing at the drive end. The
rotor is mounted on a roller bearing at the end with the rectifier. The conductors that carry current are
stationary. These conductors are in the field winding, the stator windings, the six rectifying diodes,
and the regulator circuit components.
The voltage regulator limits the voltage that is produced by the alternator at the output terminal. This
is done by controlling the magnetic field that is present in the stationary field coil. The regulator
allows current to flow. The current satisfies the electrical loads that are placed on the electrical system
and the current charges the batteries.
An internal sense lead is used in order to control voltage. The lead is installed between the "B"
terminal and the regulator.
Some of the alternators use a 6.35 mm (0.25 inch) threaded stud as a "B" terminal. This type of
terminal is not insulated. When the alternator is connected to the battery, the stud will be energized.
An "R" terminal is located on the end of the alternator next to the "B" terminal. This terminal may be
used by one of the following components:
• A Charge Indicator
• A Tachometer
• VIMS, CMS, EMS, etc.

• An Hourmeter
The component is provided voltage pulses at a frequency of 8 pulses for each revolution of the
alternator. The current draw across the "R" terminal must not exceed 2 amperes.
The "I" terminal is located on the end of the 34SI alternator. The terminal is the second terminal from
the output terminal. This terminal may be used to operate an indicator light. The terminal may also be
used in order to ensure when the alternator starts. The "I" terminal is a threaded stud.
The "I" terminal is connected internally to the field circuit. An indicator light that is connected in
series with the terminal will glow when there is a difference in potential between the terminal and
battery voltage. When the system is charging properly, the light is off.
An isolated ground terminal is located on the end of the 34SI alternator. An isolated ground terminal
is also located on the end of the isolated 30SI marine alternator. The terminal is on the opposite side
from the "B" terminal. The isolated ground terminal is provided in order to connect a ground lead.
A ground terminal for the case is located on the side of the non-marine 30SI alternator housing. A
screw and a lockwasher should be installed in the hole for the case ground. The screw prevents the
entry of dirt and water.
Copyright 1993 - 2020 Caterpillar Inc. Sun Sep 20 18:18:19 UTC+0700 2020
All Rights Reserved.
Private Network For SIS Licensees.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01171464
Normal Operation
SMCS - 1405
The alternator is a brushless, heavy-duty integral charging system. The alternator has a built-in diode
rectifier and a voltage regulator. The system produces DC current for electrical systems.
The solid state integrated circuit voltage regulator that is built into the alternator limits the system
voltage by switching the ground circuit for the field coil on and off. This is done rapidly in order to
control the current that is in the field coil. When the ground circuit for the alternator field is turned
ON by the voltage regulator, the field current passes from the diode trio and through the stationary
field coil. Nominal regulated voltages of 13.5 to 14.5 volts are available for 12 volt systems. The
nominal regulated voltage for the 24 volt system is between 27 and 29 volts.
After the engine is started and rpm rises, the excitation circuit is turned on all the time, and generated
voltage rises rapidly. If the "I" terminal is not used, the initial field voltages at start-up are generated
by residual magnetism. The residual magnetism can be lost. This results in no output. Loss of the
residual magnetism can be caused by extended downtime or a severe shock to the alternator. Refer to
Troubleshooting, "T6 Residual Magnetism Restoration". As the speed increases and the output
increases, the voltage that is available at the diode trio becomes sufficient to supply field current for
normal operation. When the voltage at the "B" terminal exceeds the battery voltage current flows into
the battery.
The 34SI model has an "I" terminal. The terminal CAN be used in order to supply excitation current.
The current flows from a source that has a keyswitch through an indicator light. The indicator light
provides a verification for alternator excitation and the light also provides a indication of faults. The
"I" terminal must have an indicator or a resistor in series between the current source and the "I"
terminal. This maintains the normal field current around 0.17 amperes. Once the alternator begins
charging, the field current is supplied from the diode trio. Current stops flowing through the "I"
terminal and the indicator lamp turns OFF.
The voltage regulator cycles the field current ON and OFF many times per second. This maintains the
alternator output voltage at a preset level.
For 12 volt systems, an output rating of 105 to 110 amperes is standard. For 24 volt systems, output
ratings of 60 to 100 amperes are available. The output ratings of a specific model are located in
Specification, "Alternator".
The output of the alternator must be connected to the positive terminal of the battery through the
charging circuit for the machine. A ground path is also required. The ground path should run between
the alternator ground terminal and the ground terminal for the battery.
While the system voltage is below the setting of the voltage regulator, the regulator turns ON the field
current. This allows the alternator to produce the maximum output. When the voltage setting is
reached, the regulator turns OFF the field current. When the field current is off, the magnetic field in
the rotor collapses and the alternator output voltage begins to fall. The falling voltage causes the
regulator to turn on the field current and the current rebuilds the magnetic field. This cycle continues
rapidly. The cycle keeps the output and the system voltage very close to the voltage setting. The cycle
will continue unless the electrical demands of the system cause the system voltage to fall below the
voltage setting. If the system voltage falls below the voltage setting, the regulator will allow full field
current to flow so that the alternator's maximum output is realized. Maximum output is dependent on
the alternator speed. At low speeds, the maximum output of the alternator is significantly reduced.
Illustration 1 g00651653
(1) Alternator Case Ground
(2) Internal Ground
(3) "I" Terminal
(4) "R" Terminal
(5) Output Terminal

(1) Output Terminal
(2) "R" Terminal
(3) Alternator Case Ground
External connections to the alternator are made to the terminals that are shown in illustration 1 and
illustration 2. The standard output terminal is a male type. The connecting bolt is not insulated.
All of the electronic parts of the alternator are dipped in varnish in order to keep out the moisture and
the dirt.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01216334
Component Description
SMCS - 1405
Rotor
The rotor provides a magnetic field. The rotor rotates on a shaft. Therefore, this alternator is called a
rotary magnetic field alternator. A rotor consists mainly of the following parts: pole core (magnetic
pole), field coil and shaft.
The rotor contains the field coil. When current flows in the field coil, one side of the core is
magnetized. This side becomes the "N" pole. The other side becomes the "S" pole. With this form
(pawl pole), all poles are magnetized by one field coil.
Stator
The stator consists of a stator core and stator coil. The stator is supported by the front and rear frames
of the alternator. The stator core is made of a number of thin iron plates. The stator has many slots on
the inner surface. The slots accommodate the stator coil. Three independent coils are provided. The
coils generate AC voltage during rotation of the rotor. A hydraulic press is used to insert the stator
into the front frame. This arrangement allows heat to easily dissipate through the frame. Cooling
efficiency is increased.
Pulley
These alternators are usually equipped with a pulley with two slots. Tighten the pulley nut to 102 ± 7
N·m (75 ± 5 lb ft).
Frame
The frame supports the stator and the rotor. The frame also provides mounting points in order to
mount the alternator on the engine. Holes for ventilation are provided on all sides of the frame for
efficient cooling. The rectifier, and the regulator are fastened to the rear end frame by screws. The
stator is pressed into the front end frame.
Rectifier
Rectifier Bridge 34-SI
Rectifier Bridge 30-SI
The rectifier is a one-piece design. The rectifier changes the three-phase AC into direct current.
Regulator
The regulator controls the output of the alternator. The regulator limits the alternator voltage to a
preset value by controlling the field current. The regulator operates electronically in order to turn on
the voltage across the field winding. The regulator then switches off the voltage. The switching can
occur at a low rate such as 10 times in one second. The switching can occur at a high rate such as
several thousand times in one second.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
37-MT, 41-MT, and 42-MT Series Starting Motors

i03334642
General Information
SMCS - 1453
42-MT Starting Motor
The heavy-duty starting motors are offered in 24Vand 12V versions. The 37-MT and 41-MT are
similar in operation and appearance. The significant differences between the 37-MT, 41-MT, and 42-
MT starting motors are noted. A list of starting motors that are covered in this manual is located in the
Specifications section.
The starting motor rotates the engine flywheel. The engine will run when the engine flywheel has
reached an adequate speed. The starting motor has a solenoid. Electricity will cause the solenoid to
move the pinion drive toward the flywheel ring gear of the engine when the key start switch is
activated on the 37-MT and 41-MT starting motors. The electrical contacts in the solenoid close the
circuit between the battery and the starting motor before the pinion engages the ring gear. This will
cause the starting motor to rotate. This is a positive shift starting motor. Electricity will cause the
solenoid to move the pinion drive in order to engage the flywheel ring gear of the engine when the
key start switch is activated on the 42-MT starting motors. The electrical contacts in the solenoid
close the circuit between the battery and the starting motor. This causes the starting motor to rotate.
This is a positive engagement starting motor.
Damage to the armature can be caused by excessive speeds. The overrunning clutch portion of the
pinion drive prevents damage to the armature when the engine begins to run. This is done by breaking
the mechanical connection. The pinion will stay meshed with the ring gear however, until the key start
switch is released. A return spring in the overrunning clutch returns the clutch assembly to the rest
position.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01362348
SMCS - 1453
(1) Rear Housing
(2) Solenoid
(3) Plunger
(4) Shift Lever Housing
(5) Shift Lever
(6) Drive Housing

(7) Pinion Drive
(8) Brushes
(9) Brush Holder
(10) Pole shoes
(11) Field Winding (Coil)
(12) Armature
(13) Starting Motor Housing
The major components of the starting motor are the following items:
• Starting motor housing (13)
• Field winding (coil) (11)
• Pole shoes (10)
• Armature (12)
• Brushes (8)
• Brush holder (9)
• Pinion drive (7)
• Shift lever (5)
• Plunger (3)
• Solenoid (2)
• Housings (1), (4), and (6)
Field Winding and Starting Motor Housing

(10) Pole Shoes
(11) Field Winding (Coil)
(13) Starting Motor Housing
The starting motor housing (13) supports the field winding (coil) (11), the pole shoes (10), the brush
holder (9), and the brushes (8). These parts are removable. The field winding (11) and the pole shoes
(10) provide the magnetic field for the armature. The field winding also contains a shunt coil on 37-
MT starting motors. The armature rotational speed is limited by the shunt coil during engagement.
This prevents damage to the pinion drive.
Armature
(12) Armature
Armature (12) consists of a laminated iron core which is assembled on the armature shaft. The
armature also has a commutator on one end. The commutator is made of copper segments (bars)
insulated from each other and insulated from the armature shaft. The armature windings are wound in
the slots of the core. The armature windings are also connected to the commutator segments.
The armature is positioned in the field winding and the pole shoes. The armature is supported by the
brushings in the drive housing (6), the shift lever housing (4), and the rear housing (1) .
The armature and the field winding are connected in series. The same current flows through each
component. This generates high torque primarily when the motor is first started.
Brush Holder
(9) Brush Holder
(14) Brush Springs
The brush holder (9) is mounted over the commutator to the starting motor housing. Four brushes are
held against the commutator. Brush springs (14) keep pressure on the brushes so the brushes stay in
contact with the commutator. Two brush holders are connected to the field winding positive (+) leads.
The two negative brush holders are not insulated from the brush holder assembly onthe 37-MT and 41
-MT starting motors. The two negative brush holders are connected to the negative terminal on the 42
-MT starting motors.
Brushes
(8) Brush
The brushes (8) are made of carbon. The brushes (8) conduct electricity. The brushes transmit current
from the field winding to the commutator. There are four brushes. Two brushes are positive and two
brushes are negative.
37-MT Pinion Drive
(7) Pinion Drive
(15) Pinion Gear
41-MT and 42-MT Pinion Drive
(7) Pinion Drive
(15) Pinion Gear
As the engine starts to run, the speed eventually exceeds the starting motor speed. The overrunning
clutch portion of the pinion drive (7) protects the starting motor from this overspeed condition. The
mechanical connection between the engine flywheel and the starting motor is disengaged.
The pinion drive (7) has a pinion gear (15) that engages the flywheel ring gear. The pinion gear will
stop in case of butt engagement on the 37-MT starting motors. The pinion drive spring is compressed
by the shift lever until the solenoid contacts meet the solenoid terminals as a result. The starting motor
is now turned on. The starting motor turns the pinion until the pinion meshes with the ring gear. The
pinion gear will stop in case of butt engagement on the 41-MT and 42-MT starting motors. The clutch
assembly continues to rotate. This rotation will allow the pinion gear to rotate and the pinion gear will
engage onto the flywheel ring gear.
Solenoid
(2) Solenoid
(3) Plunger
(5) Shift Lever
(16) Windings
(17) Solenoid Contacts
(18) Return Spring
Solenoid assembly (2) contains the following components: windings (16), plunger (3) and solenoid
contacts (17). When the key start switch is closed, the pull-in winding and the hold-in winding are
energized. The energized windings (16) will pull the plunger (3) to the left. The plunger movement
pulls the shift lever assembly (5) which will allow the pinion to engage. When the solenoid contacts
(17) close, full battery current is sent to the motor and the engine begins to crank.
When the engine starts, the pinion drive protects the armature from excessive speed until the key start
switch is released. After the switch is released, the return spring (18) moves shift lever (5) to the right
which will disengage the pinion.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01362622
Normal Operation
SMCS - 1453
General Information
Rest Position
(1) Return Spring
(2) Solenoid
(3) Pull-In Winding
(4) Start (S) Terminal
(5) Hold-In Winding
(6) Battery (Bat) Terminal
(7) Key Start Switch
(9) Motor (Mtr) Terminal
(10) Shift Lever
(11) Field Winding
(12) Pinion Drive
(13) Pinion
(14) Armature
(15) Battery
A DC series wound motor is used as the starting motor. The starting motor has field winding (11) and
armature (14). The excitation and armature windings are connected in series. The pinion end of the
armature shaft has splines for pinion drive (12) .
The solenoid is an integral part of the starting motor. The solenoid pushes the pinion drive (12) with
the pinion (13) forward through the shift lever (10) and the plunger. The end of the plunger is a spool
which is connected to the shift lever. Return spring (1) helps return pinion drive (12) and shift lever
(10) to the rest position after key start switch (7) is released and solenoid contacts (8) have been
opened. A semi-solid link mechanism prevents welding of the solenoid contacts.
The starting motor has a two-stage mechanical pinion drive (12) that protects armature (14) from an
overspeed condition. The pinion drive also allows a smooth engagement of pinion (13) into the
flywheel ring gear. The pinion drive is held on the splines of the armature shaft. The pinion drive is
connected to the pinion (13) through the teeth of the integral overrunning clutch. Shift lever (10)
moves the pinion drive (12) axially in the direction of the ring gear.
37-MT And 41-MT Operation

Partial Engagement
(1) Return Spring
(2) Solenoid
(3) Pull-In Winding
(5) Hold-In Winding
(10) Shift Lever
(11) Field Winding
(12) Pinion Drive
(13) Pinion
(14) Armature
(15) Battery
When the key start switch (7) is closed, the following components are energized: start (S)terminal (4),
pull-in winding (3) and hold-in winding (5). The solenoid plunger pulls the shift lever (10) against the
force of the spring (1). The shift lever pushes the pinion drive (12) toward the engine flywheel. The
armature (14) has not yet turned. The solenoid contacts (8) have not closed. This sends starting motor
current to the excitation windings and the armature windings. If the pinion (13) can immediately
engage the flywheel ring gear, the pinion moves forward. When the pinion reaches the end of the
drive pinion shaft and the solenoid contacts (8) close. The starting motor is now in partial
engagement.
Blocked Engagement
(1) Return Spring
(2) Solenoid
(3) Pull-In Winding
(5) Hold-In Winding

(10) Shift Lever
(11) Field Winding
(12) Pinion Drive
(13) Pinion
(14) Armature
(15) Battery
If a pinion tooth meets a ring gear tooth, the pinion cannot immediately mesh with the ring gear. The
solenoid contacts (8) close as the meshing spring is compressed through the shift lever (10). The
starting motor is now turned on. The operation turns the pinion (13). The pinion initially meshes with
the teeth of the ring gear. The pressure from the meshing spring causes the pinion (13) to fully mesh.
The pressure from the meshing spring causes the ring gear to fully mesh.
Full Engagement
(1) Return Spring
(2) Solenoid
(3) Pull-In Winding
(5) Hold-In Winding
(10) Shift Lever
(11) Field Winding
(12) Pinion Drive
(13) Pinion
(14) Armature
(15) Battery
At the end of solenoid armature travel, solenoid contacts (8) close. This allows full battery voltage to
be applied to battery (Bat) terminal (6) and motor (Mtr) terminal (9). The starting motor current
energizes the field winding (11). The starting motor current powers the starting motor. Armature (14)
now begins to rotate and the helical spline forces the pinion farther into the ring gear until the pinion
contacts the stop ring of the armature shaft.
The pull-in winding (3) is turned off when the starting circuit is closed. Hold-in winding (5) remains
energized. The hold-in winding magnetic force is enough to hold the solenoid plunger in the pull-in
position until the engine is started.
When the engine starts and the ring gear turns pinion (13) faster than the starting motor, the clutch
section of the pinion drive (12) breaks the connection between the pinion and the armature shaft. This
prevents damage to the armature from being rotated too fast. The pinion remains meshed with the ring
gear while the shift lever (10) is held in the engaged position. The shift lever assembly and pinion
drive are returned to the rest position by the return spring (1) only when the key start switch is
released. The return spring also keeps the pinion in the rest position until the starting motor is again
operated.
42-MT Operation
Partial Engagement
(1) Return Spring
(2) Solenoid
(3) Pull-In Winding
(5) Hold-In Winding
(10) Shift Lever
(11) Field Winding
(12) Pinion Drive
(13) Pinion
(14) Armature
(15) Battery
When the key start switch (7) is closed, the following components are energized: start terminal (4),
pull-in winding (3) and hold-in winding (5). The activation of the pull-in winding (3) and the hold-in
winding (5) produces a magnetic force. The magnetic force will pull the plunger to the right. The
plunger will pull the shift lever (10) which will compress the return spring (1). The shift lever will
push the pinion assembly along the armature shaft toward the flywheel ring gear.
Blocked Engagement
(1) Return Spring
(2) Solenoid
(3) Pull-In Winding
(5) Hold-In Winding
(10) Shift Lever

(11) Field Winding
(12) Pinion Drive
(13) Pinion
(14) Armature
(15) Battery
The pinion gear (13) may meet a tooth of the flywheel ring gear as the pinion gear tries to move
forward. The other drive components will continue to be pushed forward. The helical spline of the
overrunning clutch portion of the pinion drive assembly (12) rotates the pinion gear in the cranking
direction. The spring of the pinion drive assembly is being compressed. The pinion tooth will slide
past the tooth on the flywheel ring gear until the next gap is found. The pinion gear will then engage
onto the flywheel due to the pressure that is built up in the compressed spring. At the same time, the
overrunning clutch rotates in the overspeed direction.
The pinion gear may also meet a damaged ring gear tooth or a notched ring gear tooth. While the
pinion drive assembly (12) is being pushed forward, the armature assembly (14) is being rotated in the
opposite direction. This is due to the helical spline. The spring of the pinion drive assembly is also
becoming compressed. Due to the forces that are being applied to the drive components onto the
damaged tooth, the starting motor current may not have force enough to turn the armature. The
starting attempt must be stopped. When the key start switch is released, the pinion drive assembly will
release the compression of the spring. This will cause the pinion gear to rotate. The pinion gear is now
ready to mesh with the flywheel ring gear. The starting attempt can now be retried.
Full Engagement
(1) Return Spring
(2) Solenoid
(3) Pull-In Winding
(5) Hold-In Winding
(10) Shift Lever
(11) Field Winding
(12) Pinion Drive
(13) Pinion
(14) Armature
(15) Battery
When the pinion gear (13) meshes completely with the flywheel ring gear, solenoid contacts (8) close.
Full battery voltage is then applied to the battery terminal "Bat" (6) and the motor terminal "Mtr" (9).
Starting motor current will then energize the field winding (11) and the armature (14). The pull-in
winding (3) will become de-energized. The hold-in winding (5) will still have enough force to hold in
the plunger assembly until the solenoid contacts (8) are open. The starting motor starts to crank the
engine with full torque.
As soon as the engine starts, the flywheel ring gear turns the pinion gear (13) faster than the starting
motor's normal speed. The overrunning clutch breaks the mechanical connection between the two
gears. The pinion gear turns on the helical spline which will compress the spring in the pinion drive
assembly. The pinion gear will then be pulled from the flywheel gear. Flyweights also help to break
the mechanical connection between the two gears. This process must take place in order to prevent the
starting motor from being rotated at speeds higher than maximum permissible speed. When the key
start switch (7) is released, the shift lever assembly and pinion drive assembly will return to the rest
position. The solenoid contacts open and the starting motor turns off. The rotating armature is quickly
stopped by a mechanical brake disc.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
561N, 572R Series II and 572R Pipelayers and D10R, D11R, D5M, D5N, D6M, D6N, D6R,
D6R Series II, D7R, D7R Series II and D8R Series II Track-Type Tractors Power Train
Electronic Control System

i03529766
General Information
SMCS - 4800
Block diagram of the power train electronic control system
The power train electronic control system electronically performs three main functions for track-type
tractors.
• Transmission shifting
• Braking
• Steering
Note: The steering function is not performed on machines that have differential steering .
The power train electronic control system also performs the following functions:
• Parking brake function
• Neutral start function
• Warning function
• Backup alarm function
For proper operation, the ECM must determine the sales model and the configuration of the power
train of the machine. Two harness connectors (harness code plugs) are used to tell the information to
the ECM. The inputs of the harness code plug are left open or the inputs of the harness code plug are
grounded. The ECM interprets the status of the inputs to the harness code plug. The inputs of the
harness code plug are open or grounded. The ECM uses the inputs of the harness code plug in order to
determine the configuration of the machine.
Sales Model Harness Code - The harness code informs the ECM of the sales model of the machine.
The parameters for shifting are different on various sales models. The parameters for braking are
different on the various sales models. In order to get the best performance, the power train ECM must
know the sales model. The information from the sales model harness code is determined by a harness
code plug that is wired to the inputs of the Caterpillar Monitoring System. The power train ECM
receives the information from the sales model harness code from the Caterpillar monitoring system
ECM over the CAT data link.
Power Train Configuration Harness Code - This harness code informs the power train ECM of the
configuration of the power train of the machine. The configuration can be one of the following types:
• Clutch/brake steering
• Differential steering
• ECPC
• A transmission with electronic clutch selection
• Pipelayer
The power train ECM needs the information about the configuration of the power train. The
information for the power train configuration harness code is determined by a harness code plug that
is wired to the inputs of the power train ECM.
Table 1
Sales Steer Trans Track Pefix Prefix Prefix Prefix
Model Type Type Type - G H X
D5 TTT TRACTORS MODEL INDEX
D5M Clt/Brk PSDD LGP 7LR
D5M Clt/Brk PSTC XL 6GN 5ES
D5M Clt/Brk PSTC LGP 3CR 6AS
D5N Clt/Brk PSTC XL AGG CFH
D5N Clt/Brk PSTC LGP AKD CKT
D6 TTT TRACTOR MODEL INDEX
D6M Clt/Brk PSTC XL 6LR 3WN 4HS
D6M Clt/Brk PSTC LGP 4JN 5NR
D6N Clt/Brk PSTC XL CBJ ALH CBF
D6N Clt/Brk PSTC LGP ALR CCG
D6N Diff/Steer PSTC XL CCK AKM CBL
D6N Diff/Steer PSTC LGP ALY CCS
D6R Clt/Brk PSDD LGP AFD
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC XW AEP DAE BRE
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC LGP ADE BNC BPZ
D6R Clt/Brk PSTC LGP ACJ BPP
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC XL AAX FDT BMY BRZ
D6R Clt/Brk PSTC XL AGM CAD BMJ BNL
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC STD AFM BPM BLT BNL
D6R Clt/Brk PSTC STD AEM BRJ BLE BMK
D6R Clt/Brk PSDD LGP 6GR
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC XW DMP
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC LGP 9PN 8TM 4TR
D6R Clt/Brk PSTC LGP 8LN 4HN 7AR
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC XR 7KN 9MN 7DR
D6R Clt/Brk PSTC XR 6JN 8XN 6HR
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC XL 5LN 7GR 9BM 5RR
D6R Clt/Brk PSTC XL 4MN 6MR 4JR 4WR
D6R Diff/Steer PSTC STD 3ZN 1RW 4FM 5PR
D6M Clt/Brk PSTC STD 2YN 9ZS 2HM 6FR
D7R Diff/Steer PSTC LGP ABJ BNX
D7R Diff/Steer PSTC XR AGN BPT
D7R Diff/Steer PSTC STD AEC BRM
D7R Clt/Brk PSTC LGP AFG BNM
D7R Clt/Brk PSTC XR ADW BPK
D7R Clt/Brk PSTC STD ACS BRP
D7R Diff/Steer PSTC LGP 3DN 6ER
D7R Diff/Steer PSTC STD 2EN 5MR
D7R Clt/Brk PSTC LGP 9HM 4SR
D7R Clt/Brk PSTC STD 2HR 3ZR
Sales Steer Trans Track Prefix Prefix
Model Type Type Type - G
D8R Diff/Steer PSTC STC 6YZ AKA
Sales Steer Trans Track Prefix
Model Type Type Type -
D10R Clt/Brk PSTC STD 3KR
Sales Steer Trans Track Prefix
Model Type Type Type -
D11R Clt/Brk PSTC STD 9TR
D11R Clt/Brk PSTC STD 8ZR
D11N Clt/Brk PSTC STD 4HK
PIPELAYER TRACTOR MODEL INDEX
Sales Steet Trans Track Prefix Prefix
Model Type Type Type - X
561N Clt/Brk PSTC STD CPH
572R Clt/Brk PSTC STD 2HZ AAC
572R Clt/Brk PSTC STD DSC
Table 2
Power Train Configuration Harness Code
ECM Connector J1-15, J1-
J1-14 J1-36 J1-32 J1-26 J1-25
Contact 16
G939-PK
280-BK 279-BK 278-BK 277-BK 276-BK
Wire Identification (Pink)
(Black) (Black) (Black) (Black) (Black)
(Ground)
Harness Code Plug
5 4 3 2 1 6
Contact (Pin #)
Harness Code Circuit
4 3 2 1 0 Ground
Name
Power Train
Status
Configuration
Finger Tip Control
Electronic Clutch
Selection Open Open Open Open Ground
(Such as: D10R and
D11R)
Finger Tip Control
Electronic Clutch Pressure
Control
Power Shift Torque
Converter
Ground Ground Ground Open Open
(Such as: PSTC D5M,
D5N, D6M, D6N, D6R,
D6R Series II, D7R, D7R
Series II, 572R Series II
and 561N)
Finger Tip Control
Control
Open Ground Open Ground Ground
Power Shift Direct Drive
(Such as: PSDD D5M and
D6R and D6R Series II)
Differential Steer
Control
Power Shift Torque Ground Ground Open Ground Open
Converter
(Such as: DS D6R and
D7R)
Differential Steer
Control
Power Shift Torque
Open Ground Ground Ground Open
Converter
(Such as: D6R Series II,
D7R Series II, D8R Series
II, D6N)
Lever and Pedal
Control
Ground Open Ground Ground Open
Power Shift Torque
Converter
572R Pipelayer
Finger Tip Control and
Pedal
Control Open Ground Ground Open Ground
Power Shift Torque
Converter
572R Pipelayer
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03526440
System Operation
SMCS - 4800
Transmission Shifting Operation

Table 1
Transmission Gear and Solenoid Valve Logic
Gear Solenoid Clutches
Engaged Valves On Engaged
1F 5 and 2 5 and 2
2F 4 and 2 4 and 2
3F 3 and 2 3 and 2
Neutral 3 3
1R 5 and 1 5 and 1
2R 4 and 1 4 and 1
3R 3 and 1 3 and 1
The direction switch , the upshift switch, the downshift switch, and the position sensor for the
direction lever informs the ECM of the shifting that is requested from the operator. The requests are
"FORWARD", "NEUTRAL", "REVERSE", "UPSHIFT", or "DOWNSHIFT". The ECM activates the
transmission solenoid valves in order to shift the transmission. Each transmission clutch has a
corresponding transmission solenoid valve. The transmission solenoid valves control the hydraulic
circuits that engage the transmission clutch pressures. The ECM applies electrical current to the
appropriate transmission solenoid valve. For the movement of the machine, two clutch solenoids are
activated. One solenoid is activated for the direction and one solenoid is activated for speed. Under
normal conditions, the ECM shifts the transmission. The shifting is based on the information from the
sensor and from the switches.
The power train electronic control system performs the function for the transmission shifting on two
different types of transmissions. Each type of transmission has a different method of engaging the
transmission clutches. The two methods of clutch engagement are listed below:
• Electronic Clutch Selection
• Electronic Clutch Pressure Control (ECPC)
Electronic Clutch Selection (D10R and D11R)

The ECM selects the transmission clutches that must be engaged. The clutch pressure is modulated
hydraulically. A common hydraulic valve controls the modulation of clutch pressure.
The solenoid valves turn ON the selector spools. The solenoid valve also turns off the selector spools.
The selector spools control the engagement of the clutches. The ECM supplies an electrical current
that turns on or turns off the solenoid completely. The electrical current is not modulated.
The ECM responds to the request for shifting by turning off the solenoid valves that are on. This
causes the pressure to go down on the corresponding transmission clutch. The ECM then turns on the
solenoid valves for the requested shift. Then, the common hydraulic valve controls the modulation of
clutch pressure.
Electronic Clutch Pressure Control (ECPC)

The ECM selects the transmission clutches that must be engaged. The clutch pressure is modulated
electronically. The ECM controls the modulation of clutch pressure. The ECM uses the transmission
speed, the torque converter output speed and the transmission temperature in order to control the
smooth engagement of the clutches.
The ECM uses the transmission solenoid valves to directly modulate the oil pressure to each
transmission clutch. The solenoid valves are the proportional type. The ECM uses a pulse width
modulated signal (PWM) in order to vary the current to the solenoid. The current to the solenoid
determines the amount of oil pressure that is applied to the clutch. The distance of travel of the
plunger is proportional to the electrical current of the solenoid. The position of the plunger controls
the amount of oil pressure and the amount of clutch engagement. An increase in electrical current will
open the solenoid valve further. This causes an increase in oil pressure and an increase in clutch
engagement.
The ECM responds to a request for shifting by opening the appropriate solenoid valves. The solenoid
valves are opened to a position which initially fills the corresponding clutches with oil. Then, the
ECM opens the valve gradually in order to increase the pressure to the clutches. The pressure is
increased until the clutches are fully engaged.
The solenoid valve for the priority valve of the power train oil system is an additional component for
the machines that have electronic clutch pressure control. The ECM controls the priority valve in
order to increase the pressure in the low pressure oil system which will then provide additional high
pressure pump flow. The ECM activates this function when one of the following conditions exist:
• A transmission shift is in progress.
• The transmission oil temperature is below 40 °C (104 °F).
• The engine speed is below 1300 rpm.
• A calibration of the transmission is in progress.

Braking Operation
The brakes are spring applied and hydraulically released. The service brake pedal and the parking
brake switch tell the ECM the braking requests of the operator. The left brake solenoid and the right
brake solenoid on the brake control valve are de-energized. When the solenoid valves are de-
energized, the brake control valve closes. The pressure for power train oil is not available in order to
release the brake. The brakes are fully engaged. When no braking is requested, both brake solenoid
valves are energized and the brakes are hydraulically released.
The brakes assist in the function for steering machines that have clutch/brake steering. For more
information, refer to "Steering Operation".
The function of the brake acts independently of any other function of the power train electronic
control system on machines that have differential steering.
On D5M and D6R machines that have a power shift direct drive transmission (PSDD), the brakes are
also used as part of the inching operation. For more information, refer to "Inching Operation".
Machines also have a backup system to the ECM and the brake pedal position sensor. An additional
solenoid valve and an additional switch are used. When the operator pushes the service brake pedal to
near full travel, the service brake pedal switch closes and a +battery signal activates the secondary
brake solenoid. The secondary brake solenoid engages the left and right brakes. The fuse for the dump
valve is the source of the +battery signal. This ensures that the brakes can be applied even if the ECM
would lose power.
Note: The brakes of the machine are also activated by the parking brake solenoid. See the related
topics.
Note: On 561N and 572R Pipelayers that are equipped with the two pedal brake attachment, there is a
brake pedal switch on the left brake pedal and the right brake pedal. Each switch applies both brakes.
The right brake pedal switch activates the secondary brake solenoid. The secondary brake solenoid
engages the left and right brakes. The left brake pedal switch activates the parking brake solenoid.
The parking brake solenoid engages the left and right brakes.
Steering Operation
The power train electronic control system does not have a function for steering machines that have
differential steering.
The power train electronic control system performs the function for steering machines with
clutch/brake steering. The functions for steering and for braking work together. When the machine is
turned to the right, the right steering clutch is disengaged in order to slow the right track. When the
machine is turned to the left, the left steering clutch is disengaged in order to slow the left track.
The brake is only engaged if the operator pulls the steering lever to the full rearward position. For a
gradual turn, the operator pulls the lever rearward halfway. This disengages the steering clutch, but
the brakes are still released. For a sharp turn, the operator pulls the lever fully rearward. The clutch is
disengaged and the brake is engaged.
The steering levers of the finger tip controller inform the ECM of the requests from the operator for
steering. The ECM acts upon the requests for steering by modulating or by de-energizing the
appropriate solenoid valve for steering and for braking on the control valve.
Note: On 572R Pipelayers that are not equipped with finger tip control, the steering clutch levers are
mounted on the floorplate. The floorplate is mounted in front of the operator's seat. These levers are
the input devices to the ECM. When the operator requests a turn by pulling one of the levers, either
the left steering clutch or the right steering clutch is disengaged. The brakes are still released. This
slows the track for a gradual turn. To stop the track, the operator must first release the steering clutch
by pulling a lever. Then, press the left brake pedal or the right brake pedal halfway. The brake will
engage and the track will stop.
The steering and the braking solenoid valves operate in a proportional manner. The ECM acts upon
steering requests by modulating ectrical current of the appropriate solenoid valves. The modulation of
the solenoid valves controls the oil pressure of power train for the corresponding clutches. When the
operator requests a change in steering, the ECM responds with a corresponding change in the
modulation of the appropriate solenoid valve. A decrease in electrical current causes a decrease in oil
pressure which increases the brake engagement. When more current is applied to a solenoid for a
steering clutch, the valve opens further. This causes more oil pressure to be applied to the steering
clutch. The steering clutch engages as more oil pressure is applied.
Parking Brake Operation

The power train electronic control system performs the parking brake function on all machines.
Whenever the operator places the parking brake switch in the ON position, the ECM deactivates the
left brake solenoid and the right brake solenoid. This will engage the left brake and the right brake.
The ECM also shifts the transmission to NEUTRAL and First Speed.
The machine also has a backup system to the ECM and the ON/OFF pole of the parking brake switch.
An additional solenoid valve and an additional pole of the parking brake switch are used. Whenever
the operator places the parking brake switch in the ON position, the brake backup pole of the parking
brake switch activates the parking brake solenoid. This will engage the left brake and the right brake.
Note: On the 572R Pipelayer, the backup pole of the parking brake switch does not connect directly
to the parking brake solenoid. The backup pole connects to an input to the ECM. The ECM controls
the parking brake solenoid.
Neutral Start Operation

The power train electronic control system and the parking brake switch perform the neutral start
function on all machines. The starting motor will not activate unless the parking brake switch is in the
ON position. Whenever the operator places the parking brake switch in the ON position, the ECM
will shift the transmission to Neutral and Third Speed (clutch 3). The ECM also engages the left brake
and the right brake.
Backup Alarm Operation

The backup alarm alerts the surrounding personnel that the machine is backing up. Whenever the
transmission direction control lever is in the REVERSE position, the ECM activates the backup
alarm.
Autoshift Operation
The Autoshift Operation is used on Machines that have Electronic Clutch Pressure Control.
The autoshift function allows the operator to preset the gear speed for directional shifting. The
autoshift function allows a directional shift that differs from a normal shgift. Normally, the machine
shifts from 1F to 1R.
With the autoshift switch, the operator can select either 1F to 2R or 2F to 2R. D6R Series II, D7R
Series II and D8R Series II machines also have 2F to 1R. The autoshift indicator displays the status of
the autoshift function to the operator. The indicator is on the left side of the dash. The indicator is near
the autoshift switch. The operator selects the autoshift operation with the autoshift switch. The
autoshift indicator shows the selected mode. The modes are 1F2R or 2F2R or 2F1R. When all LED
indicators are off, the autoshift function is off. Autoshift indicators are located on the gear/direction
module on all Series II tractors.
Auto Kickdown Operation

Note: The auto kickdown operation is used on the machines that have electronic clutch pressure
control only.
When the ECM detects that the transmission output speed has fallen below a gear dependent pre-set
shift point, the ECM will automatically downshift the transmission.
There are several auto kickdown setpoints. The operator can scroll through the set points or the
operator can turn the auto kickdown function on or off by depressing the auto kickdown switch. For
example. if the auto kick down function is off when the operator presses the auto kickdown switch,
the function will be turned on and the first setpoint is activated. When the auto kickdown switch is
pressed again, a different setpoint is activated. On some models, a third setpoint can be activated.
When the auto kickdown switch is pressed after all of the setpoints have been scrolled, the auto
kickdown function is turned off. The auto kickdown indicator displays the status of the auto kickdown
operation to the operator. The indicator is located on the right side of the dash near the auto kickdown
switch.
Note: The auto kickdown operation is inhibited when the brakes are applied.
Air Inlet Heater Operation

D5M and D6M Only
Table 2
Air Inlet Heater Cycle Time
Preheat Time Postheat Time
Engine Coolant
Key On, Engine Off Key On, Engine Running
Temperature
(seconds) (seconds)
−4 °C (24.8 °F) 30 120
−4 °C (24.8 °F) 29 114
−3 °C (26.6 °F) 27 107
−2 °C (28.4 °F) 26 101
−1 °C (30.2 °F) 24 94
0 °C (32.0 °F) 22 87
1 °C (33.8 °F) 21 81
2 °C (35.6 °F) 19 74
3 °C (37.4 °F) 18 68
4 °C (39.2 °F) 16 61
5 °C (41.0 °F) 14 54
6 °C (42.8 °F) 13 47
7 °C (44.6 °F) 11 41
8 °C (46.4 °F) 0 35
9 °C (48.2 °F) 0 28
10 °C (50.0 °F) 0 21
11 °C (51.8 °F) 0 15
12 °C (53.6 °F) 0 8
13 °C (55.4 °F) 0 1
> 13 °C (55.4 °F) 0 0
The power train electronic control system performs the air inlet heater function on D5M and D6M
machines. A preheat mode and postheat mode are automatically controlled by the power train ECM.
When the key start switch is turned from OFF to ON, the ECM checks the engine coolant
temperature. If the temperature is low, the ECM energizes the relay for the air inlet heater. The relay
activates the air inlet heater. Also, the indicator is turned on for the air inlet heater on the Caterpillar
monitoring system. After the engine is started, the air inlet heater remains activated for a postheat
period of time. The ECM uses the engine coolant temperature to determine the length of preheat time
and postheat time. See table 2.
The operator can initiate additional heat cycles after a cold start. The cycles are 30 seconds long. The
heat cycles are initiated by pressing the air inlet heater switch. After a heat cycle is completed, the
ECM disables the air inlet heater function for 30 seconds. If the switch is activated and the air inlet
heater function is disabled, the additional heat cycle will be activated automatically.
Inching Operation
Note: The inching operation is only used on the D5M and D6R machines that have PSDD.
When the inching pedal is pressed, the ECM decreases the pressure that is applied to the transmission
directional clutch. This operation reduces the torque that is transferred from the transmission to the
tracks. The inching function can be used to slow the speed of the machine. The inching operation
prevents the engine from stalling when the load on the blade is sufficient enough to stop the motion of
the machine.
The inching pedal can also work as a brake pedal. In the last half of inching pedal travel, the brakes
are applied. This operation will slow the machine. This operation will also keep the machine from
rolling backward when the machine is inching up a slope.
Note: Only partial brake capacity is available from the inching pedal. The service brake pedal must be
used for full braking force.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02124961
Warning Operation
SMCS - 4800
Table 1
Warning Operation
Warning Indications(1)
Action Action
Alert
Lamp Alarm
Indicator
Warning Flashes Sounds Required Operator
Flashes(3) (4) (4)
Category Action Possible Result(2)
No immediate
action is required. There are no harmful effects
1 X
The system needs or damaging effects.
attention soon.
Change the machine
operation or
There may be severe damage
2 X X perform
to the components.
maintenance to the
system.
Immediately An injury to an Operator may
3 X X X perform a safe occur or severe damage to the
engine shutdown. components may occur.
(1)
The warning Indications that are active are marked with a "X".
(2)
The Possible Result if no operator action is taken
(3)
The Alert Indicator flashes 10 times a second.
(4)
The Action Lamp flashes and the Action Alarm sounds 1 time a second.
Warning Operation with the Caterpillar Monitoring System
Alert Indicators For D6R, PSDD D6R, D7R D/S, D7R C/B, And 572R
(1) Low Engine Oil Pressure
(2) Charging System Status
(3) Low Fuel Level
(5) Steering System Status
(6) Braking System Status
(7) Transmission Status
(8) Power Train Filter Restriction
(9) Parking Brake Status
Alert Indicators For The 561N
(1) Low Fuel Level
(2) Starting Aid
(3) Low Coolant Level
(4) Implement Lockout Status
(5) Air Inlet Heater
(6) Bidirectional Shift Switch 1
(9) Auto Kick-Down
Alert Indicators For D5M, PSDD D5M, And D6M
(3) Low Fuel Level
Alert Indications For D8R
(10) Air Filter Restriction
(11) Coolant Flow Status
(8) Power Train Oil Filter
(12) Starting Aid
(13) Hydraulic Oil Filter
(6) Braking System
(7) Transmission System
(14) Engine Status
(15) Implement Status
Alert Indicators For D10R and D11R
(5) Restriction in the Fuel Filter or Low Fuel Level
(9) Low Coolant Flow
(10) Check Engine Status
Note: The Lamp/Gear Module is not available on all machines.
Note: The status of the oil temperature for the Torque Converter is shown on one of the gauges. A
problem with the power train oil filter is shown on alert indicator for the power train oil filter (8). The
information for the oil filter and for the oil temperature is not provided by the power train ECM. The
Caterpillar Monitoring System has a temperature sensor for torque converter oil temperature and a
pressure switch for the power train filter.
The power train ECM uses the Caterpillar Monitoring System to show warning information to the
operator. Warning information that concerns the power train system is sent on the CAT data link to
the Caterpillar Monitoring System. The warning information is shown on the main display module of
Caterpillar Monitoring System.
The problems with the Power Train are classified into three warning categories. The categories are 1,
2, and 3. The categories are based on the severity of the problem. The categories dictate the required
response of the operator. Warning category 1 represents the least severe problem and warning
category 3 represents the most severe problem. The warning categories are identified for the operator
according to the combination of warning indications that are active. This is the same method that has
been used in the past on most machines. See the Warning Operation in table 1.
Note: For complete information about the warning operation, see the Operation And Maintenance
Manual for the machine that is being serviced.
The power train ECM reports four conditions to the operator. Each of the four conditions has a
separate alert indicator on the main display module. The pictograph symbol that is nearest to an alert
indicator identifies the condition.
The four conditions and the alert indicators are listed below:
• Steering System Status (5)
• Braking System Status (6)
• Transmission Status (7)
• Parking Brake Status (9)
• Implement System (D6R Series II, D7R Series II, D8R Series II)
Steering System (1) - The power train ECM activates a warning for the steering system. The warning
categories are listed below:
A Warning category 1 is activated when the steering clutches are out of calibration. This will occur
when new software has been flashed or when the ECM has been replaced. The alert indicator for
steering system status (5) will FLASH. This informs the operator in order to perform the high
pressure calibrations and the low pressure calibrations for the steering clutches at the earliest
opportunity. See Testing and Adjusting, "Calibration". The electrical circuit that can cause this
warning is listed below:
• ECM (CID 0254)
Warning category 3 is activated when a diagnostic code is present for an input of the steering system
or an output of the steering system. The alert indicator for steering system status (5) will FLASH. The
action lamp will FLASH and the action alarm will SOUND. The operator should immediately stop the
machine. The operator should shut off the engine. A diagnostic code will be logged for the problem
that is present. The diagnostic code must be corrected before the operation of the machine is resumed.
See Testing and Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". The electrical circuits that can cause
this warning are listed below:
• Solenoid valve for the left steering clutch (CID 0698)
• Solenoid valve for the right steering clutch (CID 0699)
• Solenoid valve for the left brake (CID 0689)
• Solenoid valve for the right brake (CID 0690)
• Position sensor for the left steering lever (CID 0676)
• Position sensor for the right steering lever (CID 0677)

• Harness code (CID 0650)
• ECM (CID 0254)
Braking System Status (6) - The power train ECM activates a warning for the brake system. The
warning categories are listed below:
Warning category 1 is activated when the brakes are out of adjustment. The alert indicator for braking
system status (6) will FLASH. The operator must check the brakes or the operator must check the
service brake pedal switch at the earliest opportunity. The electrical circuits that can cause this
warning are listed below:
• The brake backup pole of the parking brake switch (CID 0618)
• The temperature sensor for the steering system oil (CID 0075)
• The parking brake solenoid (CID 0681)
• ECM (CID 0254)
• Transmission oil temperature sensor (CID 0177)
Warning category 3 is activated when a diagnostic code is present for an input of the brake system or
for an output of the brake system . The indicator for the brake system (6) will FLASH. The action
lamp will FLASH and the action alarm will SOUND. The operator should immediately stop the
machine. The operator should immediately shut off the engine. A diagnostic code will be logged for
the problem that is present. The diagnostic code must be corrected before machine operation is
resumed. See Testing and Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". The electrical circuits that
can cause this warning are listed below:
• Service brake switch (CID 0298)
• Position sensor for the brake pedal (CID 0468)
• Secondary brake solenoid (CID 0722)
• ON/OFF pole of the parking brake switch (CID 0070)
• Solenoid valve for the left brake (CID 0689)
• Solenoid valve for the right brake (CID 0690)
• ECM (CID 0254)
Transmission System (7) - The power train ECM activates a warning for the transmission system.
The warning categories are listed below:
Warning category 1 is activated when a diagnostic code is present for an input of the transmission
system or for an output of the transmission system. The alert indicator for transmission status (7) will
FLASH. The operator must check the transmission system at the earliest opportunity. A diagnostic
code will be logged for the problem that is present. See Testing and Adjusting, "Troubleshooting
Diagnostic Codes". The electrical circuits that can cause this warning are listed below:
• Downshift switch (CID 0621)

• Upshift switch (CID 0622)
• Direction switch (CID 0623)
• Transmission oil temperature sensor (CID 0177)
• Solenoid valve for first gear (CID 0695)
• Solenoid valve for second gear (CID 0694)
• Solenoid valve for third gear (CID 0693)
• Priority valve solenoid (CID 0697)
system or for an output of the transmission system. Transmission system indicator (7) will FLASH.
The action lamp will FLASH. The operator should change the machine operation or the operator
should perform maintenance to the system. A diagnostic code will be logged for the problem that is
present. See Testing and Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". The electrical circuits that
• Transmission shift lever (CID 0668)
system or for an output of the transmission system. The alert indicator for the transmission system (7)
will FLASH. The action lamp will FLASH and the action alarm will SOUND. The operator should
immediately stop the machine. The operator should immediately shut off the engine. A diagnostic
code will be logged for the problem that is present. The diagnostic code must be corrected before
machine operation is resumed. See Testing and Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". The
electrical circuits that can cause this warning are listed below:
• Position sensor for the transmission direction control lever (CID 0299)
• ECM (CID 0254)
• Reverse clutch solenoid valve 1 (CID 0691)
• Forward clutch solenoid valve 2 (CID 0692)
• Transmission system (CID 0718)
Implement Lockout Switches - The power train ECM activates a warning for the implement lockout
switches. The warning categories are listed below:
Warning category 1 is activated when a diagnostic code is present for the implement lockout switches.
The indicator for the implement system will FLASH. The operator must check the implement system
at the earliest opportunity. A diagnostic code will be logged for the problem that is present. See
Testing and Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". The electrical circuits that can cause this
warning are listed below:
• Implement Lockout Switches (CID 0490)
Detent Coil For The Implement Lever - The power train ECM activates a warning for the detent
coil. The warning categories are listed below:
Warning category 1 is activated when a diagnostic code is present for the detent coil for the
implement lever. The indicator for the implement system will FLASH. The operator must check the
implement system at the earliest opportunity. A diagnostic code will be logged for the problem that is
present. See Testing and Adjusting, "Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". The electrical circuits that
• Detent Coil for the Implement Lever (CID 1488)
Parking Brake Status (9) - The power train ECM activates a warning for the parking brake. The
warning categories are listed below:
Warning category 1 is activated whenever the parking brake is engaged. The alert indicator for
parking brake status (9) will FLASH. The operator must disengage the parking brake before the
operator places the machine in gear.
Warning category 3 is activated if the parking brake is engaged and the transmission is NOT in
NEUTRAL. The alert indicator for the parking brake status (9) will FLASH. The action lamp will
FLASH and the action alarm will SOUND. The operator should check that the parking brake switch is
in the OFF position. If the indications for the warning continue, immediately stop the machine and
shut off the engine .
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02003739
Calibration Operation
SMCS - 4800
Table 1
Calibration Modes
Parking
Submode(1)
Brake
Number
Status Submode Description
Steering/Braking Calibration Mode
Mode No. 6... D5N, D6N, D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 561N, 572R Series II, D8R Series II,
D10R, and D11R
Mode No. 5...D5M, D6M, D6R, and D7R, 572R
ON 01 Set Application
OFF 02 Left Brake Adjustment
OFF 03 Right Brake Adjustment
ON 04 Left Steer Clutch High Pressure Adjustment
ON 05 Right Steer Clutch High Pressure Adjustment
OFF 06 Left Brake Low Pressure Adjustment
OFF 07 Right Brake Low Pressure Adjustment
ON 08 Left Steer Clutch Low Pressure Adjustment
ON 09 Right Steer Clutch Low Pressure Adjustment
Transmission Calibration Mode
Mode No. 7... D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 572R Series II, D8R Series II, D10R, and D11R
Mode No. 6... D5M, D5N, D6M, D6N, D6R, D7R and 561N
ON 20 Set Forward High Speed Lockout
ON 21 Set Reverse High Speed Lockout
ON 22 Transmission Direction Lever Adjustment
ON 31(2) Clutch 1 Engagement Calibration
ON 40(2) Clutch Fill Calibration
Component Data Display Mode
Mode No. 8... D6R Series II, D7R Series II, D8R Series II, D10R, and D11R
Mode No. 7... D5M, D5N, D6M, D6N, D6R, D7R and 561N
ON None Component Data
(1)
Only the submodes that are required for a particular machine will appear. Ex: right brake adjustment is not available
on a D/S machine. Submodes 10 through 19, 23 through 30, and 36 through 39 are not used at this time.
(2)
Not available on D10r (3KR) and D11R.
Note: The submodes 01 through 40 are used to perform actual tests and adjustments. Only enter the
submodes when the procedures that are described in the Testing and Adjusting, "Calibration" are
performed.
The power train ECM uses the main display module on the Caterpillar Monitoring System for
showing calibration information to service personnel. Calibration information concerning the power
train system is sent on the CAT data link to the Caterpillar Monitoring System. Service personnel
must be familiar with the Caterpillar Monitoring System in order to calibrate the Power Train
Electronic Control System.
For calibrating the Power Train Electronic Control System, service personnel must place the
Caterpillar Monitoring System in one of the three Calibration Modes. The calibration modes provide
access to the power train ECM. The information for the calibration of the power train is shown in the
display area of the monitor. The 4C-8195 Control Service Tool is used for changing the display mode
of the monitor. See Testing and Adjusting, "Calibration".
The calibration modes are used to perform several adjustments to the Power Train Electronic Control
System. The system will function without most of these adjustments, but the best performance will
result only after these adjustments are made. Status information which may be helpful during
troubleshooting is also provided. The calibration modes and submodes are listed in the preceding
chart. The scroll switch on the 4C-8195 Control Service Tool is used for changing the submodes.
The power train ECM determines the submodes that are required for the specific machine. Only the
submodes that are required for the particular machine will appear. Some of the submodes are
available only when the parking brake is ON. These submodes will not appear when the parking brake
is OFF.
The component data display mode will show the values of the data that is received by the ECM. The
data is received from system components of the power train. Each of the components is referenced by
a unique CID (Component Identifier). Use the "+" and the "-" on the clear switch of the service tool in
order to scroll through the component list. The CID for a component will be displayed for 2 seconds.
The parameter value for that component will be displayed after the CID is displayed. The components
are in numerical order by the CID. For a list of component identifiers, see Testing and Adjusting,
"Troubleshooting Diagnostic Codes". The values for different types of components appear in the
following forms:
The data for the position sensor is displayed in "%" duty cycle.
The data for the temperature sensor is displayed in °C.
Data for switches is displayed by using "O" and "C" for each throw of the switch. "O" stands for
"Open". "C" stands for "Closed". The normally open contact is displayed by the left character for
double-throw switches. The normally closed contact is displayed by the right character.
Currents for proportional solenoids are shown on a 0 - 255 scale. "0" represents no current and "255"
represents full current.
Currents for On/Off solenoids are displayed by using "0" for OFF and "1" for ON.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i06274157
Related Operations of the Caterpillar Monitoring System

SMCS - 7490
Alert Indicators For D5M, PSDD D5M, And D6M
(3) Low Fuel Level
(22) Service Code Indicator ("SERV CODE")
(23) Display Area
Alert Indicators For D6R, PSDD D6R, D7R D/S, D7R C/B, And 572R (S/N: 2HZ)
(3) Low Fuel Level
Alert Indications For D8R
(12) Starting Aid
(6) Braking System
(14) Engine Status
(15) Implement Status
Alert Indicators For D8R And 572R (S/N: DSC1-301)
(1) Engine Oil Pressure
(2) Charging System
(16) High Inlet Manifold Temperance
(3) Fuel Level
(20) Auto Kickdown Switch
Alert Indicators For D10R And D11R
(1) Low Fuel Level
(2) Starting Aid
(9) Auto Kick-Down
Alert Indicators For The 572R (S/N: DSC301-UP)
(2) Power Train Oil Filter Restriction
(3) Starting Aid
(6) Transmission System Check
(7) Engine System Check
The Caterpillar Monitoring System is an input and an output of the power train ECM. These two
electronic controls communicate back and forth on the CAT data link. The Caterpillar Monitoring
System provides alert indicators, gauges, and numerical readouts for the power train ECM to use.
The Caterpillar Monitoring System receives information from the power train ECM. Then, the
Caterpillar Monitoring System displays the following information:
• Problems with the steering system that are shown on the alert indicator for steering system
status (5)
• Problems with the braking system that are shown on the alert indicator for braking system
status (6)
• Problems with the transmission system that are shown on the alert indicator for the transmission
system (7)
• Status of the parking brake that is shown on the alert indicator for parking brake status (9)
• The Status of the gears ("1R", "N", and "1F") that are shown in display area (23)
• Diagnostic codes that are shown in display area (23)
• Implement L.O.
• Problem with the implement system.
The status of the oil temperature for the outlet of the torque converter is displayed on one of the
gauges. A problem with the power train oil filter is shown on alert indicator (8). The information for
the oil filter and for the oil temperature is not provided by the power train ECM. The Caterpillar
Monitoring System has a temperature sensor for the oil temperature of the outlet of the torque
converter. The Caterpillar Monitoring System also has a pressure switch for the power train filter.
The Caterpillar Monitoring System sends the information about the harness code to the power train
ECM. This information informs the power train ECM of the sales model of the machine. The
Caterpillar Monitoring System also sends service commands to the power train ECM. The service
commands cause the power train ECM to change operating modes. The service commands also cause
the power train ECM to read diagnostic codes and clear diagnostic codes that are stored in the
memory of the power train ECM.
The power train ECM uses the main display module on the Caterpillar Monitoring System for
showing diagnostic information to service personnel. Diagnostic information concerning the power
train system is sent on the CAT data link to the Caterpillar Monitoring System. Service personnel
must be familiar with the Caterpillar Monitoring System in order to troubleshoot the Power Train
Electronic Control System.
The Caterpillar Monitoring System has several different modes of operation. For troubleshooting and
calibrating the Power Train Electronic Control System, service personnel must place the Caterpillar
Monitoring System in certain modes of operation. The operator mode selector switch and the 4C-
8195 Control Service Tool are used for changing the display modes of the monitor.
The operator mode selector switch allows personnel to view certain machine information. The
operator mode selector switch is on the front dash. Pressing the operator mode selector switch will
change display area (23). Display area (23) will display different information that is available. The
operator mode selector switch is functional only when the monitor is in normal mode. The operator
mode selector switch must be pressed and HELD until the desired information is showing. The
information that is available by using the operator mode selector switch is listed below:
Hour meter - This is the normal information that is showing in the display area (23).
Gear Indicator - This is the normal information that is showing in display area (23) (D5M, D6M,
D6R and D7R).
Odometer - This is the information for the travel distance of the machine. This information is shown
on the following machines: D6R Series II, D7R Series II, D8R Series II, D10R and D11R.
Tachometer - This is the information for the engine speed (RPM).
Engine Oil Pressure - This information is shown on the following machines: D6R Series II, D7R
Series II, D8R Series II, D10R and D11R only.
Diagnostic Scrolling - This information is provided so that personnel can view diagnostic codes that
have been detected. Diagnostic codes from all systems are shown. Service code indicator (22)
functions during diagnostic scrolling. When "SERV CODE" is ON, the diagnostic code that is being
shown is present. If the diagnostic code is not present "SERV CODE" is OFF. If no diagnostic codes
are detected, "---" is shown. Diagnostic codes cannot be cleared and calibration procedures cannot be
performed by using the operator mode selector switch.
The 4C-8195 Control Service Tool allows personnel to access information that is related to service.
The service tool attaches to a 4 pin connector. The connector is located at the fuse panel on the D10R
and the D11R. The connector is located below the dash on the D5M, D6M, D6R and the D7R. The
connector is located behind the operator seat on the following machines: D6R Series II, D7R Series II
and D8R Series II.
A unique mode number is used to represent each mode of operation. The mode number is shown in
the display area (23). The modes are listed below:
• Normal Mode
A mode number is not shown. Normal mode can be recognized when the display area (23) is showing
normal information (hour meter or gear indicator).
• Harness Code Mode
Mode 1 ... All Machines
• Numeric Readout Mode
Mode 2 ... D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 572R Series II, D8R Series II, D10R and D11R
• Service Mode
Mode 3 ... D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 572R Series II, D8R Series II, D10R and D11R
• Tattletale Mode
• Units Mode ("English/Metric")
Mode 5 ... D5N, 561N, D6N,D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 572R Series II, D8R Series II, D10R
and D11R
• Steering Braking Calibration Mode
and D11R
Mode 5 ... D5M, D6M, D6R, D7R, and 572R
• Transmission Calibration Mode
and D11R
Mode 6 ... D5M, D6M, D6R, D7R, and 561N
• Component Data Display Mode
Mode 8 ... D5N, 561N, D6N,D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 572R Series II, D8R Series IID10R
and D11R
• Charging System Display Mode
Mode 9 ... D5N, 561N, D6N,D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 572R Series II, D8R Series IID10R
and D11R
The Service Mode (mode 3), Calibration Modes, and the Component Data Display are the modes that
allow access to the Power Train Electronic Control System for the service personnel. Service mode
(mode 3) provides the information for the diagnostic codes. The calibration modes provide the means
for adjusting certain parameters of the Power Train Electronic Control System. For more information
regarding calibration mode, see System Operation, "Calibration Operation".
Note: Changing modes on the Caterpillar Monitoring System does not change the operation of the
power train system except when a calibration mode is entered. Calibration modes are special modes
that adjust certain system parameters for the power train. For more information, see System
Operation, "Calibration Operation".
When the Caterpillar Monitoring System is set to the diagnostic scrolling mode or the service mode,
the power train ECM sends service code information to the Caterpillar Monitoring System over the
CAT data link. The diagnostic information is shown in the display area (23).
Lamp/Gear Module
Lamp/Gear Module
(9) Operation mode and Alert indicators
(10) Tachometer
(11) Transmission gear readout and direction
The lamp/gear module has the following outputs:
• Alert indicators
• Operation mode indicators

• Display area (LCD)
The alert indicators notify the operator of abnormal conditions with the machine. The main display
module uses the status of the uncommitted switch inputs, sender inputs and/or sensor inputs in order
to determine when an abnormal condition is present. The main display module then FLASHES the
appropriate alert indicator. The symbol of the FLASHING alert indicator identifies the responsible
machine system. When an alert indicator FLASHES, an abnormal condition exists. For more
information, see System Operation, "Warning Operation".
The operation mode indicators notify the operator of special conditions or modes that the machine is
operating in. An example would be the Autoshift mode. The amber indicators will remain ON while
the Autoshift function is active. The tachometer and gear display will show the current RPM and the
current gear of the machine in numeric values. While power is supplied to the machine, these numeric
values will remain displayed at all times.
Reference: For more information on the Caterpillar Monitoring System for a particular machine
model, refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting, RENR2014-08,
"Caterpillar Monitoring System".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01186125
Related Operations of the Vital Information Display System

SMCS - 7603
S/N - AAX1-UP
S/N - ABJ1-1499
S/N - ACJ1-UP
S/N - ACS1-UP
S/N - ADE1-UP
S/N - ADW1-UP
S/N - AEC1-1499
S/N - AEM1-UP
S/N - AEP1-UP
S/N - AFG1-UP
S/N - AFM1-UP
S/N - AGM1-UP
S/N - AGN1-1499
S/N - BLE1-UP
S/N - BLT1-UP
S/N - BMJ1-UP
S/N - BMY1-UP
S/N - BNC1-UP
S/N - DAE1-UP
S/N - DJA1-UP
S/N - DJY1-UP
S/N - DSC1-301
S/N - JAH1-UP
S/N - TAD1-UP
VIDS Message Center
(1) Alert indicator. (2) Universal gauge. (3) Message area.
VIDS Keypad for the D11RCD
VIDS Keypad for the D11R
The Vital Information Display System (VIDS) is an integral part of all electronic machine operations.
The following list describes the keys that are related to the functions of the power train.
"MORE" - The "MORE" key allows the operator or service personnel to toggle the display of an
active diagnostic code between a display of text and a display of the MID/CID/FMI. The "MORE"
key will also toggle the information that is displayed when a list of an active event or logged events is
viewed. The "MORE" key will display a parameter value when a data event occurs.
GAUGE - The "GAUGE" key allows the operator or service personnel to view the value of any
parameter. The parameter name and the numeric value are shown on the message area (3). An analog
value is shown on the universal gauge (2) if the type of data is applicable.
The "GAUGE" key may be used in three different ways in order to access information.
• The "GAUGE" key is used to scroll to the desired parameter from the entire list of parameters.
Press and release the "GAUGE" key one time. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the
available parameters.
• The "GAUGE" key is used to scroll to the desired parameter from a category of parameters.
The categories are "ALL", "ENGINE", "POWERTRAIN", "IMPLEMENT", "SERVICE", and
"OPERATOR". Press and release the "GAUGE" key two times. Use the arrow keys to scroll
through the categories. Select the desired category by pressing the "OK" key. Use the arrow
keys to scroll through the available parameters within a category.
• The "GAUGE" key is used to go directly to the parameter that is desired. Press and release the
"GAUGE" key three times. Enter the number of the parameter that is desired. Press the "OK"
key.
A parameter will remain displayed on the message center when the "OK" key is depressed and a
parameter is being viewed. The selected parameter may be replaced at any time. On powerup, the
system defaults to "ENG SPD".
The power train is configured to contain the following gauge parameters:
Table 1
Gauge Parameters
Number Display Description
304 "PT OIL TEMP" Power Train Oil Temperature
311 "TCO SPEED" Torque Converter Output Speed
348 "BIDIR SHIFT ST" Status of the Bidirectional AUTO Shift Mode
453 "PARKBK" Parking Brake Status
725 "TRACK SPEED" Track Speed
734 "FWD DISTANCE" Forward Distance
735 "REV DISTANCE" Reverse Distance
736 "TOTAL DISTANCE" Total Distance
OK - The "OK" key is used during the following tasks: acknowledgment of events, completion of
entries and selection of options.
CANCEL - The CANCEL key is used to cancel the current selection.
"<" and ">" - The arrow keys are used to scroll through lists of information. The right arrow is the
Forward direction. The left arrow is the Backward direction.
MENU - The "MENU" key is used to access the Main Menu of standard functions.
SETUP - The "SETUP" key is used in order to access the menu for the "ID menu". Use the numeric
keypad or use the arrow keys in order to select an option. The options are listed below:
"Select Operator" (1) - This option allows the selection of an operator ID from a list.
"Save Operator" (2) - This option records the settings for an operator ID.
"Recall Operator" (3) - This mode recalls the settings that were previously stored to an operator ID.
"Operator Setup" (4) - This mode records a new operator ID or this mode erases an existing
operator ID.
"ServiceToggle Mode" (5) - This mode allows the service technician to toggle the service mode on
and off.
Note: The service mode must be in the ON position in order to perform calibrations with the Vital
Information Display System (VIDS).
The following message is displayed when a calibration procedure is entered and the service mode is
not enabled.
Table 2
ERROR - PRESS [OK]
SERV MODE NOT ENABLD
The VIDS will display the following message once the service mode is selected from the "ID menu".
Table 3
SELECT SERVICE MODE
#OFF ON
Note: The VIDS will prompt you for a password when the service mode is entered.
Table 4
ENTER PASSWORD
XXXXX
The VIDS will display the following message if the password is correct.
Table 5
ENTER PASSWORD
PASSWORD ACCEPTED
Note: A password can be displayed and a password can be set with the Caterpillar ET service tool.
"Factory Defaults" (6) - This mode is used to reset the current settings to the factory defaults.
SET MACH - The "SET MACH" key is used to configure the features for the control of the machine.
The "SET MACH" is also used to view the Operator's settings.
HELP - The "HELP" key provides information that is associated with the current operation.
Note: An active event needs to be acknowledged with the "OK" key before any other key can be used.
Note: For a more detailed description of VIDS, refer to Service Manual, SENR9413, "Vital
Information Display System" .
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02005138
Electronic Control Module (Power Train)

SMCS - 7610-DTN
Electronic Control Module (ECM)
(1) Connector J1. (2) Connector J2.
The electronic control module (ECM) is the main component of the Power Train Electronic Control
system. The ECM makes decisions based on input information and memory information. Then, the
corresponding response is made through the outputs. The inputs of the ECM and the outputs of the
ECM are connected to the machine harness by two connectors. Both connectors have 40 contacts. The
ECM is located on the bottom of the left console near the operator seat. There are no visual indicators
on the ECM. Information for the Power Train Electronic Control System is shown on the Caterpillar
Monitoring System. The ECM sends the information to the Caterpillar Monitoring System on the
CAT data link.
Table 1
Contact Description Of Connector J1(1)
For The Electronic Control Module (Power Train)
Active(2)
Type Function State No.
Power +Battery +Battery 1
Power +Battery +Battery 6
Power Solenoid Driver 13 Power +Battery 40
Ground Ground Ground 2
Ground Ground Ground 5
Ground Switch/Sensor Return Ground 15
Ground Switch/Sensor Return Ground 16
Ground Solenoid Return Ground 7
Input/Output CAT Data Link − − 3
Input/Output CAT Data Link + + 9
Input Harness Code 0 25
Varies by
Input Harness Code 2 machine: 32
See Table 3
Input Upshift Switch N/O Ground 30
Input Upshift Switch N/C Floating 24
Input Downshift Switch N/O Ground 20
Input Downshift Switch N/C Floating 29
Input Direction Switch N/O Ground 23
Input Direction Switch N/C Floating 35
Input Autoshift Switch N/O Ground 21
Input Autoshift Switch N/C Floating 38
Input Parking Brake Switch N/O Ground 19
Input Parking Brake Switch N/C Floating 13
Input Auto Kickdown Switch Ground 37
Air Inlet Heater Switch
Input Implement Lockout Switch (D6R Series II, D7R Series +Battery 34
II, D8R Series II)
Implement Lockout Switch 2
Input Floating 22
(D6R Series II, D7R Series II, D8R Series II)
Output Secondary Brake Solenoid On/Off 8
Output Forward Clutch Solenoid Proportional(3) 4
Output Reverse Clutch Solenoid Proportional(3) 10
Output First Gear Clutch Solenoid Proportional(3) 17
Output Second Gear Clutch Solenoid Proportional(3) 11
Output Left Steer Clutch Solenoid Proportional 12
Output Right Steer Clutch Solenoid Proportional 18
Not Used Not Used - 27
(1)
The actual usage of a connector contact depends on the machine. For Example, on the D10R and the D11R, there is
not an Auto Kickdown Switch. Therefore, J1-37 is not connected to a component.
(2)
The ECM responds to an active input only when all the necessary conditions are satisfied.
(3)
This output can be the proportional or the On/Off type. For the D5M, D6M, D6R Series II, D7R Series II, 572R Series
IIand the (D8R Series II) the output is the proportional type. For the D10R and the D11R, the output is the On/Off
type.
Table 2
Contact Description Of Connector J2(1)
For The Electronic Control Module (Power Train)
Active(2)
Type Function State No.
Ground Solenoid Return Ground 3
Input Left Steering Sensor PWM 11
Input Right Steering Sensor PWM 5
Input Brake Pedal Sensor PWM 18
Input Trans Direction Lever Sensor PWM 4
Inching Pedal Sensor
Input PWM 6
Brake Pedal Sensor-2 (561N, 572R Series II)
Transmission Temp Sensor
Input PWM 10
or Steering Oil Temp Sensor
Input Engine Speed Freq 38
Input Torque Cnvrtr Output Spd + Freq 29
Input Torque Cnvrtr Output Spd - Freq 23
Input Trans Intermediate Speed 1+ Freq 24
Input Trans Intermediate Speed 1- Freq 35
Input Trans Intermediate Speed 2+ Freq 36
Input Trans Intermediate Speed 2- Freq 30
Input Trans Output Speed 1+ Freq 20
Input Trans Output Speed 1- Freq 14
Input Trans Output Speed 2+ Freq 25
Input Trans Output Speed 2- Freq 31
Output Parking Brake Solenoid On/Off 1
Output +8V Sensor Supply +8V 12
Output Backup Alarm On/Off 37
Output Priority Valve Solenoid On/Off(3) 7
Proportional
Output Third Gear Clutch Solenoid (4) 2
Proportional
Output Left Brake Solenoid (5) 19
Proportional
Output Right Brake Solenoid (5) 13
Output 2F-1R Shift Indicator Ground 34

Output Auto Kickdown Indicator Ground 28
Air Inlet Heater Relay
Output Implement Lever Detent (D6R Series II, D7R Series II, D8R On/Off 8
Series II)
Not
Not Used - 17
Used
Not
Not Used - 21
Used
Not
Not Used - 15
Used
Not
Not Used - 26
Used
Not
Not Used - 27
Used
Not
Not Used - 32
Used
Not
Not Used - 33
Used
Not
Not Used - 9
Used
Not
Not Used - 39
Used
Not
Not Used - 16
Used
(1)
The actual usage of a connector contact is machine dependant. For Example, on the D10R and the D11R, there is not a
solenoid valve on the priority valve. Therefore, J2-7 is not connected to a component.
(2)
(3)
With the priority solenoid valve ON, the low pressure oil system is at NORMAL pressure. With the priority solenoid
valve OFF, the low pressure oil system is at HIGH pressure
(4)
This output can be the proportional or the On/Off type. For the D5M, D6M, D6R, D7R and the 572R, the output is the
proportional type. For the D10R and the D11R, the output is the On/Off type.
(5)
An increase in current causes a decrease in brake engagement.
Inputs
Numerous inputs inform the ECM of the status of the conditions of the machine. Two types of inputs
exist. There are switch type inputs and sensor type inputs. Switches provide an open signal, a
grounded signal, or a +battery signal to the inputs of the ECM. Sensors provide a signal to the ECM
that changes in a proportional manner in order to reflect changing machine conditions. The inputs are
listed on the Contact Description charts.
Outputs
The power train ECM responds to decisions by sending electrical signals through the various outputs.
The outputs are pulse width modulated (PWM). The ECM operates the PWM outputs in an on/off
manner or in a proportional manner. This depends on the requirements of the output device. The
outputs either create an action or the outputs provide information. The outputs are listed on the
Contact Description charts.
Input/Output
The CAT data link is bidirectional. The ECM can receive information and the ECM can send
information. The data link communicates with other electronic control modules on the machine. The
data link also communicates with service tools. The communication permits information to be shared.
The data link is not a visible component. The data link consists of internal ECM circuits and the
connecting harness wiring. For more information, see System Operation, "CAT Data Link".
Power Train Configuration Harness Code Plug
The power train configuration harness code plug
Table 3
Power Train Configuration Harness Code
J1-15, J1-
ECM Connector Contact J1-14 J1-36 J1-32 J1-26 J1-25
16
G939-PK
280-BK 279-BK 278-BK 277-BK 276-BK
Wire Identification (Pink)
(Black) (Black) (Black) (Black) (Black)
(Gnd)
Harness Code Plug
5 4 3 2 1 6
Contact (Pin #)
Harness Code Circuit
4 3 2 1 0 Ground
Name
Power Train
Status
Configuration
Finger Tip Control
Electronic Clutch Selection Open Open Open Open Ground
(Such as: D10R and D11R)
Finger Tip Control
Control
Power Shift Torque Ground Ground Ground Open Open
Converter
(Such as: PSTC D5M, D5N,
D6M, D6N, D6R, D6R
Series II, D7R, D7R Series
II, 572R Series II and 561N
Pipelayers)
Finger Tip Control
Control
Open Ground Open Ground Ground
Power Shift Direct Drive
(Such as: PSDD D5M and
D6R and D6R Series II)
Differential Steer
Control
Power Shift Torque Ground Ground Open Ground Open
Converter
(Such as: DS D6R and
D7R)
Differential Steer
Control
Power Shift Torque
Open Ground Ground Ground Open
Converter
(Such as: D6R Series II,
D7R Series II, D8R Series
II)
Lever and Pedal
Control
Ground Open Ground Ground Open
Power Shift Torque
Converter
572R Pipelayer
Finger Tip Control and
Pedal
Control Open Ground Ground Open Ground
Power Shift Torque
Converter
572R Pipelayer
The power train harness code plug informs the ECM of the configuration of the power train for the
machine. The harness code plug is connected to the five inputs to the ECM. The inputs are J1-25, J1-
26, J1-32, J1-36 and J1-14. The operation of the ECM corresponds to the state of the harness code
inputs. The harness code plug opens a combination of the harness code inputs and the harness code
plug grounds a combination of the harness code inputs. The ECM interprets the status of the five
inputs.
Note: The ECM requires the identification of the machine in order to determine the application
number of the machine. The ECM receives a machine code from the Caterpillar Monitoring System or
the implement ECM through the CAT data link. A harness code plug that is connected to the
Caterpillar Monitoring System or the implement ECM defines the machine information for
identification. For more information, refer to System Operation, RENR2014, "Caterpillar Monitoring
System".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01860804
Switches
SMCS - 1435; 7332
Switches will provide one of the following types of inputs to the ECM:
• Open
• Ground
• +Battery
Switches are devices that have two states. Switches are opened or the switches are closed.
• When a switch is open, no signal is provided to the corresponding input of the ECM. This "no
signal" condition is also referred to as floating.
• When a switch is closed, either a ground signal or +battery signal is provided to the
corresponding input of the ECM.
Push Button Switch (Upshift)

Push Button Switch (Downshift)
Limit Switch (Direction)
Finger Tip Controller
(1) Push Button Switch (Upshift). (2) Push Button Switch (Downshift). (3) Limit Switch (Direction). (4) Transmission
direction control lever.
Tiller Handle
(1) Push Button Switch (Upshift). (2) Push Button Switch (Downshift). (3) Secondary Reverse Switch. (4) Transmission
direction control lever.
Note: The tiller handle is used only on Machines that have Differential Steering.
The upshift switch (1), the downshift switch (2), and the secondary reverse switch (3) are components
of the finger tip controller or the tiller handle. The switches are inputs to the ECM.
The upshift switch informs the ECM that the operator wants the transmission to upshift one gear. The
upshift switch is a single-pole double-throw switch that is wired as a SPDT switch. The upshift switch
has two input connections to the ECM. The connections are Normally Closed at connector contact J1-
24 and Normally Open at connector contact J1-30. When the operator presses the upshift switch, the
Normally Closed circuit is open and the Normally Open circuit is closed to ground. When the switch
is not activated, the Normally Closed circuit is closed to ground and the Normally Open circuit is
open.
The downshift switch informs the ECM that the operator wants the transmission to downshift one
gear. The downshift switch is a single-pole double-throw switch that is wired as a SPDT switch. The
downshift switch has two input connections to the ECM. The connections are Normally Closed at
connector contact J1-29 and Normally Open at connector contact J1-20. When the operator presses
the downshift switch, the Normally Closed circuit is open and the Normally Open circuit is closed to
ground. When the switch is not activated, the Normally Closed circuit is closed to ground and the
Normally Open circuit is open.
Note: The status of the inputs (upshift and downshift) must be correct in order for the ECM to
perform the shifting at the correct time.
The direction switch informs the ECM that the operator wants the transmission to shift to the reverse
direction. The transmission direction control lever (4) actuates the direction switch. The direction
switch is a backup to the position sensor for the transmission direction control lever, which normally
tells the ECM when reverse is requested. The ECM only responds to the status of the direction switch
when a failure in the position sensor for the transmission direction control lever is detected. The
direction switch is a limit switch. The direction switch is single pole double throw. The direction
switch has two input connections to the ECM. The connection for the reverse Normally Closed input
is at connector J1-35. The connection for the reverse Normally Open input is at connector J1-23.
When the operator turns the transmission direction control lever to the REVERSE position, the
reverse Normally Closed circuit is open. When the operator turns the transmission direction control
lever to the REVERSE position, the Normally Closed is open and the reverse Normally Open circuit
is closed to ground. When the transmission direction control lever is NOT in the REVERSE position,
the switch is not activated. When the switch is not activated, the reverse Normally closed circuit is
closed to ground and the reverse Normally Open circuit is open.
Note: The ECM only responds to the direction switch when the signal from the position sensor for the
transmission direction control lever is not correct.
Note: Two circuits for each switch are used for diagnostic purposes. The circuits are Normally Closed
and Normally Open. If the two circuits are the same state, a circuit failure is present and a diagnostic
code for the switch is logged. See System Operation, "Diagnostic Operation".
Rocker Switch (Parking Brake)
Parking Brake Switch
The parking brake switch is a four-pole double-throw rocker switch. One of the poles of the switch is
not used. The purposes of the three poles are listed below:
"ON/OFF" - This pole informs the ECM that the switch is ON or that the switch is OFF. When the
switch is ON, the ECM shifts the transmission to neutral and the ECM activates the left brakes and
the right brakes.
"BRAKE BACKUP" - This pole provides the backup for the activation of the brakes. When the
switch is ON, the brake backup pole activates the parking brake solenoid which engages the left and
right brakes.
"NEUTRAL START" - This pole performs the neutral start function. When the switch is OFF, the
starting motor can not be activated.
The parking brake switch applies the parking brake in two separate ways through the "ON/OFF" pole
and the "brake backup" pole.
ON/OFF Pole
The ON/OFF pole of the parking brake switch is an input of the ECM. The ON/OFF pole informs the
ECM that the operator wants the parking brake engaged. The ECM shifts the transmission to 1st
Speed and the ECM activates the left brake and the right brake.
The ON/OFF pole has two input connections to the ECM. The normally closed contact of the park
brake switch is at connector J1-13. The Normally Open contact of the park brake switch is at
connector J1-19. When the operator places the parking brake switch in the ON position, the Normally
Closed circuit is open and the Normally Open circuit is closed to ground. When the switch is in the
OFF position, the Normally Closed circuit is closed to ground and the Normally Open circuit is open.
Note: The two circuits are used for diagnostic purposes. If the two circuits are ever in the same state,
a circuit failure is present and a diagnostic code for the ON/OFF pole is logged. See System
Operation, "Diagnostic Operation".
Brake Backup Pole

The brake backup pole of the parking brake switch operates independently of the ECM. The pole is a
backup to the ECM and the ON/OFF pole of the parking brake switch. Normally, the ECM applies the
left and right brakes according to the status of the ON/OFF pole. The brake backup pole ensures that
the brake is engaged if either the ON/OFF pole or the ECM are not functioning properly.
When the parking brake switch is in the ON position, the brake backup pole sends a +battery signal to
the parking brake solenoid. The parking brake solenoid engages the left and right brakes. The fuse for
the ECM is the source of the +battery signal.
Note: The parking brake solenoid is also connected to the ECM. The ECM will send +battery voltage
to the parking brake solenoid if the signal for the brake backup pole is not at +battery voltage and the
parking brake switch is ON.
Note: The ON/OFF pole diagnoses an INCORRECT condition of the brake backup pole. The ECM
periodically checks the status of the ON/OFF pole and the output for the parking brake solenoid. The
ON/OFF pole tells the ECM whether the parking brake switch is ON or OFF. If the ECM does not
detect +battery voltage at the output for the parking brake solenoid and the parking brake switch is in
the ON position, a diagnostic code for the brake backup pole is logged. See System Operation,
"Diagnostic Operation".
Note: On the 572R Pipelayer, the backup pole of the parking brake switch does not connect directly
to the parking brake solenoid. The backup pole of the parking brake switch connects to an input to the
ECM. The ECM controls the parking brake solenoid.
Neutral Start Pole

The neutral start pole of the parking brake switch operates independently of the ECM. The neutral
start pole ensures that the parking brake switch is ON before the engine will crank. When the parking
brake switch is in the ON position, the ECM shifts the transmission to NEUTRAL and the ECM
activates the brakes. When the parking brake switch is in the OFF position, the neutral start pole
opens the start circuit between the key start switch and the start relay. This prevents turning the
starting motor. When the parking brake switch is in the ON position, the neutral start pole closes the
start circuit from the key start switch to the start relay. This completes the circuit and the starting
motor can turn.
Service Brake Pedal Switch
Service Brake Pedal Switch
The service brake pedal switch operates independently of the ECM. The switch is a backup to the
ECM and the brake pedal position sensor. Normally, the ECM applies the left and right brakes
according to the position of the brake pedal position sensor. The switch ensures that the brakes are
engaged if either the brake pedal position sensor or the ECM are not functioning properly.
When the operator pushes the service brake pedal to near full travel, the switch closes and a +battery
signal activates the secondary brake solenoid. The secondary brake solenoid engages the left and right
brakes. The fuse for the dump valve is the source of the +battery signal. This ensures that the brakes
can be applied even if the ECM would lose power.
Note: On the 572R Pipelayer, there is a brake pedal switch on the left brake pedal and the right brake
pedal. Each switch applies both brakes. The secondary brake solenoids are energized or the parking
brake solenoids are energized.
The service brake pedal switch is a single pole double throw. Only the Normally Open contact is
used. The switch has two conditions. The two conditions are OFF or ON. The Normally Open contact
of the switch is open when the brake pedal is not pushed. The switch closes when the operator pushes
the brake pedal to the full travel position. The Normally Open contact of the switch connects to the
secondary brake solenoid and connector contact J2-1 of the ECM. The pole connects to +battery at the
fuse for the dump valve.
Note: The secondary brake solenoid is also connected to the ECM. The ECM will send +battery
voltage to the secondary brake solenoid if the ECM detects the following conditions: The solenoid
signal is not at +battery voltage. The brake pedal position sensor is at full travel.
Note: The brake pedal position sensor is used to diagnose an INCORRECT condition of the service
brake pedal switch. The ECM periodically checks the position of the sensor and the output of the
secondary brake solenoid. The sensor tells the ECM when the brake pedal is at full travel. If the ECM
does not detect +battery voltage at the output for the secondary brake solenoid and the brake pedal is
at full travel, a diagnostic code for the service brake pedal switch is logged. See System Operation,
Push Button Switch (Autoshift)

Push Button Switch (Auto Kickdown)
Push Button Switch (Air Inlet Heater)
Push Button Switch (Autoshift)
Push Button Switch (Auto Kickdown)
Push Button Switch (Air Inlet Heater)
This switch is a single pole double throw switch. This switch is a momentary push button switch with
two circuits.
Autoshift Switch
Note: This switch is used on machines that have Electronic Clutch Pressure Control (ECPC).
The autoshift switch informs the ECM that the operator wants the autoshift function to operate. The
following selections can be made when the switch is activated sequentially:
• 1F2R
• 2F2R
• 2F1R (D6R Series II, D7R Series II, D8R Series II)
• OFF
The switch has two input connections to the ECM. The Normally Closed input is at connector J1-38.
The Normally Open input is at connector J1-21. When the operator presses the switch to the ON
position, the Normally Closed circuit is open and the Normally Open circuit is closed to ground.
When the switch is in the released position, the Normally Closed circuit is closed to ground and the
Normally Open circuit is open.
Note: Two circuits are used for diagnostic purposes. The circuits are Normally Open and Normally
Closed. If the two circuits are ever in the same state, a diagnostic code for the autoshift switch is
logged. See System Operation, "Diagnostic Operation".
Auto Kickdown Switch

Note: The Auto Kickdown Switch is used on machines that have Electronic Clutch Pressure Control
(ECPC) only.
The auto kickdown switch informs the ECM that the operator wants the function for the auto
kickdown to operate. With the sequential activations of the switch, the operator can select ON or
OFF. The switch has one input connection to the ECM. The input is at connector J1-37. When the
operator presses the switch to the ON position, the circuit is closed to ground. When the switch is in
the released position, the circuit is open.
Air Inlet Heater Switch

Note: The Air Inlet Heater Switch is used on the D5M and D6M only.
The air inlet heater switch allows additional heat cycles after a cold start is performed. The heat cycle
lasts for 30 seconds. There is a time delay between each heat cycle. The time delay lasts for 30
seconds. The time delay is necessary in order to prevent excessive draining on the battery and on the
alternator. If the heater switch is pressed during the off time, the ECM will initiate an additional heat
cycle as soon as possible. The switch has one input connection to the ECM. The input is at connector
J1-22. When the operator presses the switch to the ON position, the circuit is closed to the return
circuit for switches and sensors of the ECM. When the switch is in the released position, the circuit is
open. The return contact of the switch connects to ECM connector J1-15 or J1-16.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02274794
Sensors
SMCS - 1408-NS; 4800-NS
Sensors provide information to the ECM about changing conditions. Some of the types of information
are about the speed or the position. The signal changes in a proportional manner in order to reflect the
changing condition. The types of signals that are recognized by the ECM are listed below:
Frequency (Hz) - The sensor produces a signal that varies the frequency as the condition changes.
Pulse width modulation (PWM) - The sensor produces a signal that varies the duty cycle as the
condition changes. The frequency of this signal is constant.
Speed Sensor (Torque Converter Output)

Speed Sensor (Engine)
Speed Sensors (Transmission)
Speed Sensor (Torque Converter Output)
Speed Sensor (Engine)
Speed Sensors (Transmission Intermediate)
Speed Sensors (Transmission Output).
Note: The torque converter output speed sensor is part of the Power Train Electronic Control System
of all machines. On machines that have the ECPC, the engine and transmission speed sensors are part
of the Power Train Electronic Control System. On machines that have the electronic clutch selection,
the engine and the transmission speed sensors are NOT part of the Power Train Electronic Control
System.
The speed sensors are inputs to the ECM. The sensor informs the ECM about the speed of the system.
These speed sensors are frequency sensors. Frequency sensors produce a signal that varies the
frequency (Hz) as the condition changes. The sensor generates an sine wave by passing gear teeth.
The ECM measures the frequency and the ECM determines the speed on the machines that have the
ECPC. The ECM uses this information in order to operate the transmission shifting. Each speed
sensor has two connections to the ECM ("+" and "-"). The power train ECM sends speed information
to other electronic control modules on the Cat Data Link. On all speed sensors, connector contact 2 is
the signal. Connector contact 1 is the return line.
Two speed sensors measure the transmission intermediate speed and two speed sensors measure the
transmission output speed. Information about the direction of the machine is obtained from each of
these speeds. This is accomplished by using the two sensors.
Note: The transmission intermediate speed sensors are no longer used on late model N Series and R
Series Tractors. Refer to the Electrical System Schematic for your machine to check the speed sensor
configuration.
Note: The transmission intermediate speed sensor and the transmission output speed sensor are not
used on the D10, 3KR, and all D11.
Note: The speed sensors are used to diagnose each other during normal operation. The ECM
periodically checks and the ECM compares the value from the speed sensor. A problem is present if
an incorrect value is found. A diagnostic code for the speed sensor is logged. See System Operation,
Note: When the ECM is in component data display mode, a value for the frequency of the sensor is
shown to service personnel. For more information, see System Operation, " Calibration Operation".
Position Sensor (Brake Pedal)

Position Sensor (Right Steer)
Position Sensor (Left Steer)
Position Sensor (Direction Selector)
Position Sensor (Inching Pedal)
These sensors continuously inform the ECM of the position of a particular lever or pedal that is
controlled by the operator. The operator selects the position and the sensor tells the ECM. Each
position sensor sends a pulse width modulated signal (PWM) to the ECM. The sensor continuously
generates a signal that varies the duty cycle in proportion to the position of the item that is actuating
the sensor. The ECM receives the signal and the ECM measures the duty cycle in order to determine
the position of the actuator. The frequency of this signal is constant at 5000 Hz. The machine
electrical system provides +battery voltage to the sensor for operating power.
Note: When the ECM is in component data display mode, a value for the position of each sensor is
shown to service personnel. For more information, see System Operation, " Calibration Operation".
The Top View of The Brake Pedal For The D10R and D11R
(1) Position Sensor (Brake Pedal).

Brake Pedal For The D6R Series II, D7R Series II, D8R Series II
(4) Brake Pedal Position Sensor.
Brake Pedal For The D5M, D6M, D6R, and D7R
(1) Brake Pedal Position Sensor.
This sensor continuously informs the ECM of the position of the brake pedal. The brake pedal
position sensor is located on the linkage of the brake pedal. The ECM uses the duty cycle of the signal
in order to determine the rate of modulation for the left brakes and the right brakes. On the D10R and
D11R, the duty cycle decreases as the pedal is pressed. On the D6, D7, and D8R Series II, the duty
cycle increases as the pedal is pressed.
Note: When the brake pedal is fully pressed, an additional brake function is activated. The service
brake switch on the brake pedal closes and the secondary brake solenoid is energized. This relieves
hydraulic pressure to both brakes (left and right) and the brakes are applied.

Finger Tip Controller
(1) Position Sensor (Right Steer). (2) Position Sensor (Left Steer). (3) Position Sensor (Direction Selector).
The position sensor for the right steer lever continuously informs the ECM of the position of the right
steer lever. The sensor is located within the finger tip controller. The ECM uses the duty cycle of the
signal in order to determine the rate of modulation for the right steer clutch and the right brake. The
ECM decreases the engagement of the right steer clutch and the ECM increases the engagement of the
right brake when the machine is turning right. The duty cycle of the sensor signal increases as the
right steer lever is pulled.
The position sensor for the left steer lever continuously informs the ECM of the position of the left
steer lever. The sensor is located within the finger tip controller. The ECM uses the duty cycle of the
signal in order to determine the rate of modulation for the left steer clutch and the left brake. The
ECM decreases the engagement of the left steer clutch and the ECM increases the engagement of the
left brake when the machine is turning left. The duty cycle of the sensor signal increases as the left
steer lever is pulled.
The position sensor for the selection of the direction of the transmission continuously informs the
ECM of the position of the transmission direction control lever. The following list contains the
positions of the lever: FORWARD, NEUTRAL and REVERSE. The sensor is located within the
finger tip controller. The ECM uses the duty cycle of the signal in order to determine the transmission
directional clutch that must be engaged. The duty cycle of the sensor signal increases as the direction
lever is turned to the FORWARD position. The duty cycle of the sensor signal decreases as the
direction lever is turned to the REVERSE position. The direction switch backs up the position sensor
for the transmission direction control lever.
Position Sensor (Inching Pedal)

The position sensor for the inching pedal is used only on PSDD machines: D5M, D6R and D6R
Series II.
Inching Pedals For PSDD Machines ( D6R Series II)
(5) Position Sensor (Inching Pedal).

Inching Pedals For PSDD Machines ( D5M and D6R)
(1) Position Sensor (Inching Pedal).
This sensor continuously informs the ECM of the position of the inching pedal on machines that have
a power shift direct drive transmission (PSDD). The inching pedal position sensor is located on the
linkage of the inching pedal. The ECM uses the duty cycle of the sensor signal to determine the
modulation for the inching function. During the first half of pedal travel, the direction clutch is
modulated. During the last half of pedal travel, the brakes are also modulated. For more information,
see System Operation, "System Operation". The duty cycle of the sensor signal increases as the
inching pedal is pressed.
Temperature Sensor (Steering Oil)

Temperature Sensor (Transmission Oil)
Temperature Sensor
Note: A machine is equipped with either a transmission oil temperature sensor or a steering oil
temperature sensor. Both sensors are similar, but the location is different. The D10R and the D11R
use the temperature sensor for the steering oil which attaches to the steering valve. Other machines
use the transmission oil temperature sensor which is located below the pump on the suction side. Only
one of these sensors will be on a given machine.
The temperature sensor for the steering oil informs the ECM of the temperature of the steering system
oil. The ECM uses the information about the temperature in order to adjust the commands for braking
control. The adjustment compensates for the effect of cold oil on the brake valve. The ECM reduces
the command for the brake pressure for full retraction when the steering oil temperature is below a
certain temperature.
The transmission oil temperature sensor informs the ECM of the temperature of the transmission oil.
The ECM uses the information for the temperature to adjust shifting time of the transmission. The
adjustment will provide smooth shifting over the full range of the transmission oil temperature. On
some machines, the ECM also uses transmission oil temperature in order to perform adjustments on
the commands for brake control.
The temperature sensor is a pulse width modulated signal (PWM) that is an input to the ECM. This
sensor continuously generates a signal that varies the duty cycle in proportion to the temperature of
the oil. The frequency of this signal is constant at 5000 Hz. The ECM receives the signal and the
ECM measures the duty cycle in order to determine the temperature. A low duty cycle (0 to 20%)
corresponds to a low temperature. A high duty cycle (80 to 100%) corresponds to a high temperature.
The power train ECM provides +8 VDC to the temperature sensor for operating power.
Note: When the ECM is in component data display mode, a value for the temperature of the
transmission or steering system oil is shown to service personnel. For more information, see System
Operation, " Calibration Operation".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01993561
Solenoid Valves
SMCS - 4800-JV; 5479
Solenoid Valves for the Transmission

Identification of the Solenoid Valves for the Transmission on the D10R
Identification of the Solenoid Valves for the Transmission on the D11R
Identification of the Solenoid Valves for the Transmission on the D5M, D6M, D6R, D6R Series II, D7R, D7R Series II,
and the D8R Series II
Solenoid Valves for the Transmission on the D10R and the D11R
Solenoid Valves for the Transmission on the D5M, D6M, D6R, D6R Series II, D7R, D7R Series II, and the D8R Series II
The transmission solenoid valves are outputs of the ECM. The ECM uses these solenoid valves to
shift the transmission. The solenoids control the hydraulic circuits that modulate transmission clutch
pressures. Each transmission clutch solenoid has a connector with two contacts. One contact receives
a signal from one of the following connector contacts of the ECM: J1-4, J1-10, J1-17, J1-11 or J2-2.
The other contact of each solenoid is connected to the return circuit of the solenoid at J1-7 and J2-3.
Note: The solenoid coils are not designed for the operation of 24 VDC directly. The ECM sends a 24
volt PWM signal at a duty cycle which provides the necessary current to the solenoid coils. Do NOT
activate the coils with 24 VDC (+battery). This will cause the life of the coils to be reduced
drastically. Use 12 VDC if the coils must be activated without the ECM.
The ECM applies electrical current to the appropriate transmission clutch solenoids. This is based on
the operator's request from the upshift switch, the downshift switch or the transmission direction
control lever. For the movement of the machine, two clutch solenoids are activated. One solenoid is
activated for direction and one solenoid is activated for speed. For NEUTRAL operation, only the
solenoid for the third gear clutch is activated. None of the solenoids for the direction clutch are
activated while the transmission is in NEUTRAL.
Note: When the ECM is in component data display mode, a value for the current that is being sent to
the solenoid is shown to service personnel. For more information, see System Operation, "Calibration
Operation".
The Power Train Electronic Control System performs the function for the shifting of the transmission
on two different types of transmissions. Each type of transmission has a different method of
modulating the transmission clutch engagement. The two methods of modulating the clutch
engagement are listed below:
• Electronic Clutch Selection
• Electronic Clutch Pressure Control (ECPC)
Electronic Clutch Selection (D10R and D11R)

For the Electronic Clutch Selection method, the ECM uses the transmission solenoid valves to operate
hydraulic modulating valves which control transmission clutch pressures. These solenoid valves are
the on/off type. However, the ECM uses a pulse width modulated signal (PWM) in order to energize
the solenoid and the ECM uses a PWM signal in order to de-energize the solenoid. The ECM
energizes these solenoids with a PWM signal of sufficient duty cycle. The electrical current is not
modulated. The ECM de-energizes these solenoids with a PWM signal which has very little duty
cycle.
Electronic Clutch Pressure Control (ECPC) for the D5M, D5N, D6M, D6N, D6R,
D6R Series II, D7R, 572R, D7R Series II, 572R Series II and the D8R Series II
For the Electronic Clutch Pressure Control (ECPC), the ECM uses the transmission solenoid valves in
order to modulate the oil pressure to each transmission clutch directly. The solenoid valves are the
proportional type. The ECM uses a pulse width modulated signal (PWM) in order to vary the current
to the solenoid. The solenoid current determines the amount of oil pressure that is applied to the
clutch. The distance of travel of the plunger is proportional to the electrical current of the solenoid.
The position of the plunger controls the amount of oil pressure and the amount of clutch engagement.
An increase in electrical current will open the solenoid valve further. This causes an increase in oil
pressure and an increase in clutch engagement.
Solenoid Valves for Steering and Braking

Solenoid Valves for Steering and Braking on fingertip-control machines and electronic clutch brake machines
(1) Solenoid Valve (Parking Brake)
(2) Solenoid Valve (Right Steering Brake)
(3) Solenoid Valve (Right Steering Clutch)
(4) Solenoid Valve (Secondary Brake)
(5) Solenoid Valve (Left Steering Brake)
(6) Solenoid Valve (Left Steering Clutch)
Solenoid Valves for Steering and Braking on finger tip control machines and electronic clutch brake machines for the M
series track-type tractor
(1) Solenoid Valve (Parking Brake)
(2) Solenoid Valve (Left Brake).
(3) Solenoid Valve (Left Clutch)
(4) Solenoid Valve (Secondary Brake)
(5) Solenoid Valve (Right Brake)
(6) Solenoid Valve (Right Clutch)
Note: During normal operation, the solenoid valves for the parking brake (1) and the solenoid valves
for the secondary brake (4) are not controlled by the ECM. These solenoid valves are controlled by
the parking brake switch and the service brake pedal switch.
Solenoid Valve (Left Steering Clutch)
Solenoid Valve (Right Steering Clutch)
Solenoid valves for the left steering clutch and the right steering clutch
The solenoid valves for the left steering clutch and the right steering clutch are outputs of the ECM.
The ECM uses these solenoid valves to steer the machine. The solenoids control the amount of oil
pressure that is applied to the corresponding steering clutch. Each solenoid for the steering clutches
has a connector with two contacts.
One contact receives a signal from the corresponding J1-12 or J1-18 connector contact of the ECM.
The other contact of each solenoid is connected to the return circuit of the solenoid at J1-7 and J2-3.
drastically. Use 12 VDC if the coils must be activated without the ECM.
The solenoids are the proportional type. The ECM uses a pulse width modulated signal (PWM) in
order to vary the current to the solenoid. The distance of travel of the plunger is proportional to the
electrical current that is sent by the ECM. The position of the plunger controls the amount of oil
pressure and the amount of clutch engagement. A DECREASE in electrical current causes a decrease
in oil pressure which DECREASES the clutch engagement.
The operator selects the amount of clutch disengagement with the steering levers of the finger tip
control. As the steering lever is pulled, the clutch is disengaged more. The steering of the machine
will be in the direction that has the most clutch disengagement.
Note: Machines that have differential steering do not use solenoid valves for the left steering
clutch and the right steering clutch. There are no steering clutches on machines that have
differential steering. Only brake solenoids are used on machines with differential steering.
Operation".
Solenoid Valve (Left Brake)
Solenoid Valve (Right Brake)
Solenoid valve for the left steering brake and the right steering brake
The left and right brake solenoid valves are outputs of the ECM. The ECM uses these solenoid valves
for braking and steering of the machine. The solenoids control the amount of oil pressure that is
applied to the corresponding brake. The brakes are spring applied and hydraulically released. Each
brake solenoid has a connector with two contacts. One contact receives a signal from the
corresponding J2-13 or J2-19 connector contact of the ECM. The other contact of each solenoid is
connected to the return circuit of the solenoid at J1-7 and J2-3.
drastically . Use 12 VDC if the coils must be activated without the ECM.
The solenoids are the proportional type. The ECM uses a pulse width modulated signal (PWM) in
order to vary the current to the solenoid. The distance of travel of the plunger is proportional to the
electrical current that is sent by the ECM. The position of the plunger controls the amount of oil
pressure and the amount of brake engagement. A DECREASE in electrical current causes a decrease
in oil pressure which INCREASES the brake engagement.
The operator selects brake engagement with the service brake pedal or with the parking brake switch.
On machines that have clutch/brake steering, the ECM controls the engagement of the left brake or
the right brake. While no braking or steering is being requested, the ECM sends the maximum amount
of electrical current to the brake solenoid valves in order to keep the brakes released. For maximum
braking, the ECM sends no electrical current to the brake solenoid valves.
The brakes are used as part of the inching operation on D5M and D6R machines that have a power
shift direct drive (PSDD).
Note: The brakes of the machine are also activated by the parking brake solenoid and the secondary
brake solenoid. See the related topics.
Operation".
Solenoid Valve (Parking Brake)
Solenoid Valve (Secondary Brake)
Solenoid Valves for the Parking Brake and the Secondary Brake
Solenoid Valve (Parking Brake)
During normal operation, the solenoid valve for the parking brake operates independently of the
ECM. Normally, the solenoid valve is actuated by the parking brake switch. The solenoid valve
engages the brakes. The solenoid valve redirects the hydraulic oil pressure that keeps the brakes
disengaged. Without hydraulic oil pressure, the brakes will engage. The brakes are spring applied and
hydraulically released.
The solenoid for the parking brake has a connector with four contacts, but the solenoid only uses two
contacts. One contact receives a +battery signal from the brake backup pole of the parking brake
switch. The other contact is connected to the return circuit of the solenoid at J1-7 and J2-3. The
solenoid is rated at 24 VDC.
The parking brake solenoid is also connected to the ECM at J2-1. When the parking brake switch is
ON, the signal should measure 24 VDC. If the signal is incorrect, the ECM will energize the parking
brake solenoid. The solenoid is the on/off type.
Note: On the 572R Pipelayer, the parking brake solenoid is controlled by the ECM. The condition of
the backup pole of the parking brake determines the operation. The parking brake solenoid is also
used for the function of the secondary brake for the left brake pedal. The function of the secondary
brake solenoid operates independently of the ECM.
Note: The brakes are also activated by the secondary brake solenoid, the left brake solenoid, and the
right brake solenoid. See the related topics.
Note: When the ECM is in component data display mode, a value that indicates whether the parking
brake solenoid is ON or OFF is shown to service personnel. For more information, see System
Solenoid Valve (Secondary Brake)
When the machine is in normal operation, the secondary brake solenoid operates independently of the
ECM. Normally, the solenoid valve is actuated by the service brake pedal switch. The solenoid valve
engages the brakes. The solenoid valve redirects the hydraulic oil pressure that keeps the brakes
disengaged. Without hydraulic oil pressure, the brakes will engage. The brakes are spring applied and
hydraulically released.
The secondary brake solenoid has a connector with four contacts. The solenoid only uses two
contacts. One contact receives a +battery signal from the service brake pedal switch. The other
contact is connected to the return circuit of the solenoid at J1-7 and J2-3. The solenoid is rated at 24
VDC.
The secondary brake solenoid is also connected to the ECM at J1-8. When the service brake pedal is
fully depressed, the signal should read +battery voltage. If the signal is not correct, the ECM will send
+battery voltage to the secondary brake solenoid. The electrical current is not modulated.
Note: The brakes of the machine are also activated by the parking brake solenoid, the left brake
solenoid, and the right brake solenoid. See the related topics.
Note: When the ECM is in component data display mode, a value that indicates whether the
secondary brake solenoid is ON or OFF is shown to service personnel. For more information, see
System Operation, "Calibration Operation".
Solenoid Valve (Priority)

Solenoid valve (priority)
The priority valve is found on the machines that have the ECPC.
The priority valve is an output of the ECM. The solenoid opens the priority valve and the solenoid
closes the priority valve. The solenoid has a connector with two contacts. One contact receives a
signal from the J2-7 connector contact of the ECM. The other contact of the solenoid is connected to
the return circuit of the solenoid at J1-7 and J2-3. The solenoid valve is located on the priority valve.
The ECM uses the solenoid valve to operate the priority valve. This increases the pressure in the low
pressure oil system in order to provide additional high pressure pump flow when the flow is needed.
The solenoid valve is the on/off type.
When the ECM energizes the solenoid valve, the priority valve maintains NORMAL pressure in the
low pressure oil system. When the ECM de-energizes the solenoid valve, the priority valve allows
additional HIGH pressure in the low pressure oil system. The machine conditions which require
additional high pressure flow are listed below:
• The transmission shift is in progress.
• The transmission oil temperature is below 40 °C (104 °F).
• The engine speed is below 1300 RPM. (For the D6N, engine speed is below 900 RPM.)
• The calibration of the transmission is in progress.
If any of these conditions exist, the solenoid valve will be OFF and the pressure of the low pressure
oil system will be raised in order to provide additional high pressure flow.
Note: When the ECM is in component data display mode, a value that indicates whether the priority
valve solenoid is ON or OFF is shown to service personnel. For more information, see System
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01783925
Relays
SMCS - 1408-R7; 4493
Air Inlet Heater Relay
Note: The air inlet heater relay is found on the D5M and the D6M only.
The air inlet heater relay is an output of the ECM. This relay activates the air inlet heater and the relay
deactivates the air inlet heater. When the ECM determines that the operation of the air inlet heater is
required, the ECM energizes the relay and the relay activates the heater with +battery voltage. When
the ECM determines that the operation of the air inlet heater is no longer required, the ECM de-
energizes the relay and the relay deactivates the heater.
The ECM uses a pulse width modulated signal (PWM) in order to energize the relay and the ECM
uses the PWM signal to de-energize the relay. The ECM energizes the relay with a PWM signal of
sufficient duty cycle. The ECM de-energizes the relay with a PWM signal which has very little duty
cycle. All four of the relay terminals are used. One coil terminal receives the output signal from the
ECM and the other coil terminal returns the signal to the ECM at the solenoid return. One contact
terminal of the relay connects to +battery at the starting motor. The other contact terminal connects to
the air inlet heater that is in the intake of the engine. The relay is located in the engine compartment
on the right side.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01663943
Indicators
SMCS - 1408-IND; 4800-IND
Autoshift Indicator
Autoshift Indicator
Note: The autoshift indicator is for machines that have the ECPC.
The autoshift indicator is an output of the ECM. The indicator displays the status of the autoshift
function to the operator. The autoshift indicator is a printed circuit board that has three light emitting
diodes. The light emitting diodes are on the left side of the inside of the dash. The LED aligns with
holes in the dash. A film that identifies the function on the face of the dash covers the light emitting
diodes. The operator selects the autoshift mode with the autoshift switch. The autoshift indicator
shows 1F2R, 2F1R, or 2F2R and 2F1R on Series II machines. The indicators are located on the lamp
gear on Series II machines. When all LED indicators are OFF, the autoshift function is OFF.
The ECM continuously provides +8 VDC to each LED of the autoshift indicator. The other side of
each LED connects to a separate output of the ECM. The output is either floating or the output is
grounded. When the output is floating, the corresponding LED is OFF. While the ECM grounds the
output, the corresponding LED is ON.
Auto Kickdown Indicator
Auto Kickdown Indicator
Note: The auto kickdown indicator is only on machines that have the ECPC.
The auto kickdown indicator is an output of the ECM. The indicator displays the status of the auto
kickdown operation to the operator. The auto kickdown indicator is a printed circuit board with one
LED. The LED is mounted inside the dash on the right side. The LED aligns with a hole in the dash.
A film with the identification of the LED is mounted on the face of the dash. The operator selects the
auto kickdown operation with the auto kickdown switch. The auto kickdown indicator shows the
status. When the LED is ON, the auto kickdown operation is ON. When the LED is OFF, the auto
kickdown operation is OFF. The LED indicators are located on the gear/direction module on Series II
machines.
The ECM continuously provides +8 VDC to the LED of the auto kickdown indicator. The other side
of the LED connects to an output of the ECM. The output is either floating or the output is grounded.
When the output is floating, the LED is OFF. When the output is grounded, the LED is ON.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01118392
Backup Alarm
SMCS - 7406
Backup Alarm
The backup alarm is an output of the ECM. The backup alarm alerts nearby personnel that the
machine is backing up. When the operator selects REVERSE, the ECM activates the backup alarm.
The backup alarm has a connector with two contacts. One contact receives power from the J2-37
connector contact of the ECM. The other contact of the alarm is connected to the circuit for the
solenoid return of the ECM at J1-7 and J2-3.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02672639
Cat Data Link

SMCS - 1408
The CAT Data Link is an input and an output of the power train ECM. The data link communicates
with other electronic control modules on the machine. The data link also communicates service tools.
The data link is bidirectional. The power train ECM can input information and the power train ECM
can output information. The data link is not a visible component. The data link consists of internal
ECM circuits, the related harness wiring, and the service tool connector. The CAT data link connects
to J1-3 and J1-9 of the ECM.
Much information is available on the CAT data link. The power train ECM, the engine ECM, and the
Caterpillar Monitoring System require the use of certain data that is sent back and forth on the CAT
data link. The information that is shared between the electronic control modules is listed below:
• The power train ECM receives commands from the Caterpillar Monitoring System in order to
change the operating modes of the Power Train Electronic Control System. The power train
ECM receives commands from the Caterpillar Monitoring System to read diagnostic codes and
to clear diagnostic codes.
• The power train ECM receives information for the harness code from the Caterpillar
Monitoring System. This information informs the power train ECM of the proper sales model.
• The power train ECM sends signals concerning the condition of the Power Train Electronic
Control System to the Caterpillar Monitoring System. The Caterpillar Monitoring System alerts
the operator of the condition by illuminating the corresponding alert indicator.
• The power train ECM sends the status of the parking brake, the direction of the transmission,
and the gears to the Caterpillar Monitoring System. The Caterpillar Monitoring System displays
the direction of the transmission and gear that is selected for the operator.
Note: All electronic control modules that use the CAT data link have a module identifier (MID). The
module identifiers for the electronic control modules are listed below.
Power Train Electronic Control System ... 113

Caterpillar Monitoring System ... 30
Engine Electronic Control ... 36
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®
AccuGrade Laser (CD610)
Media Number -KENR6329-00 Publication Date -01/08/2007 Date Updated -17/08/2007

i02634965
General Information
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade Laser system is a high technology earthmoving tool that allows the operators to grade
and fill with increased accuracy without the use of traditional stakes, stringers or grade checkers. With
traditional grading, grade information is typically provided by engineers via a wooden stake in the
ground with elevation markings. A grid pattern of stakes covers the site, typically on a 8 m (25 ft)
grid. With either conventional surveying methods or lasers, stakes are manually placed by the
engineers. The machine operator then grades using hand to eye coordination by looking at the mark
on the nearest stake and attempting to place the cutting edge of the blade to that elevation, carrying
the grade to the next stake. Typically, a grade checker on foot walks along with the machine. The
grade checker acts as an inspector, measures how close the operator achieved grade and indicates
verbally or via hand signals, or by marking with spray paint where grade is too high as a "cut", and
where the grade is too low as a "fill". Work progresses until the desired grading tolerance is achieved.
The AccuGrade Laser system simplifies the grading processes. Using advanced laser technology,
machine mounted components and an off-board laser transmitter, this state-of-the-art blade control
system provides precise elevation information on the display in order to achieve accurate blade
positioning. The advantages of the AccuGrade Laser system are listed here:
• Increase accuracy
• Save time
• Reduce the amount of material
Laser Grading
Setup and operation is easy with the AccuGrade Laser system. An off-board tripod mounted laser
transmitter emits a thin beam of light that rotates 360°, creating a grade reference over the work area.
Grade information is transferred to the machine via the laser beam.
A digital laser receiver, mounted on an electronic telescopic mast above the machine's cutting edge,
detects the laser beam's elevation and sends the information to the Display.
The AccuGrade Laser system is available with a single mast or a dual mast. The single mast and the
dual mast both provide single dimensional (elevation) control. For example, a flat plane or single
sloped plane. The dual mast system provide two-dimensional control. For example, a sloped plane
with cross slope (elevation and tilt).
The Display informs the operator of the blade's position relative to grade and indicates cut or fill
requirements of the work area.
An automated blade control feature allows the operator to automatically control the lift function
(single mast) or both the lift and tilt (dual mast) functions by placing the cutting edge to the precise
elevation needed for fine grading.
The AccuGrade Laser system provides valve drive signals for automatic blade control. The valve
automatically raises or lowers the cutting edge based on the correction signals to maintain elevation
for precise grade control and optimum productivity.
Unique control functions allow the system to be user configured to suit operator preference and
specific job site requirements.
System Overview
The AccuGrade Laser system consists of the following onboard devices:
• Display
• Laser receivers (1 for a single mast system or 2 for a dual mast system)
• Implement/Valve Control ECM (A4:M1)
• Power Supply Module
• Electronic Masts (1 for a single mast system or 2 for a dual mast system)
• Cable Harness
• Hydraulic Control Valves
• Joystick Control (Auto/Manual/Offset Switch)
Note: A laser transmitter that is designed for machine guidance is required in order to operate the
AccuGrade Laser system. The laser transmitter is not included with the AccuGrade Laser system.
Caterpillar recommends the use of a laser transmitter with the following features: Automatic Self-
Leveling Mode, 600 rpm min rotational speed and Automatic Out of Level Shutoff. Read the operator
manual and follow the operator manual that is supplied with the laser transmitter.
The off-board tripod-mounted laser transmitter emits a thin beam of light that rotates 360°, creating a
grade reference over the work area. Grade information is transferred to the machine via the laser
beam.
Display
(1) Arrow Keys
(2) Liquid Crystal Display
(3) Elevation Select Key
(4) Increment/Blade Slope Direction Key
(5) Manual Key
(6) Menu Key
(7) "Esc" Left Reset/Left Bench Key
(8) "OK" Right Reset/Right Bench Key
(9) Grade Indicators
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®

i02635199
Modes of Operation
SMCS - 7220
There are three operating modes for the dual mast system:
• Linked Elevation
• Independent Elevation
• Dual Cut/Fill
There are two operating modes for the single mast system:
• Reference Elevation
• Cut/Fill
The operating mode that is configured will determine the look of the display. The operating mode also
affects the operation of the keys on the display.
The following sections describe each of the guidance screens that appear when one of the "Modes of
Operation" is selected.
Table 1 describes the items that are shown on the guidance screen.
Guidance screen (Linked Elevation Mode)
(1) Left Laser Receiver Strike Window
(2) Guidance Sensor Icon
(3) Right Laser Receiver Strike Window
(4) Reference Elevation
(5) Elevation Display Icon
(6) Device Status Icons
Table 1
Description of the Display
Callout
Feature Function
Left Laser This represents the strip of photocells in the left laser receiver. The
1 Receiver Strike laser strike window shows the position of the on-grade set point and
Window the point at which the laser is detected on the left laser receiver.
Guidance Sensor This indicates the guidance sensor that is used by the AccuGrade -
2
Icon Laser System. For the AccuGrade - Laser System, the guidance
sensor is always the laser receiver. This icon disappears if the laser
receiver is not detected on powerup.
Right Laser This represents the strip of photocells in the right laser receiver. The
Window the point at which the laser is detected on the right laser receiver.
Reference This indicates the reference elevation that is set. This is shown in the
4
Elevation units set.
Elevation
5 This represents the current display mode reference, or the cut/fill.
Display Icon
Device Status This shows the status of the devices that are used by the AccuGrade
6
Icons - Laser System.
Linked Elevation Mode

The following items describe the operation of the AccuGrade Laser system in linked elevation mode:
• Linked elevation mode only operates with a dual mast system. This mode requires only one
reference elevation. This means that the blade is benchmarked over only one point. In linked
elevation mode, if either receiver is blocked, the valve drive module will prevent further drive
to the hydraulic control valve (lift and tilt) until the blockage is removed.
• The display shows the reference elevation.
• Toggle the mast elevation keys in order to move both the masts upward or downward the same
amount. This means that the same elevation offset is applied to both sides of the blade.
• Press either the "ESC/left reset" key or the "OK/right reset" key in order to start a search for the
laser beam. If the left mast is over the benchmark, press the "ESC/left reset" key. The search for
the laser beam stops when the left laser receiver is on-grade. If the right mast is over the
benchmark, press the "OK/right reset" key. The search for the laser beam stops when the right
laser receiver is on-grade.
• The elevation select key is inactive in linked elevation mode. This means that both sides of the
machine must use automatic mode or manual mode together.
• The linked elevation adjustment option is available in the "Configuration" menu. Refer to
Operation and Maintenance Manual, "Configuration" for more information.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 1 is shown when you are in Linked Elevation mode.
Independent Elevation Mode

• Independent Elevation mode operates with a dual mast system. Independent Elevation mode
requires the reference elevation for each mast to be set independently. This means that the blade
must be benchmarked under the left and the right mast separately. Refer to Operation and
Maintenance Manual, "Setting the Reference Elevation (Dual Mast System)" in order to
benchmark the blade in Independent Elevation Mode.
• The display shows the two reference elevations that are being worked toward.
• Press the left arrow keys in order to move the left mast upward or downward. The elevation
offset is applied only to the left side of the blade.
• Press the right arrow keys in order to move the right mast upward or downward. The elevation
offset is applied only to the right side of the blade.
Note: Toggling the remote increment/decrement switch that controls (Elevation Offset) applies
the same elevation offset to both masts.
• Pressing the "ESC/left reset" key searches for the laser beam and locks on to the laser beam on
the left receiver.
• Pressing the "OK/right reset" key searches for and locks on to the laser beam on the right
receiver.
• The "elevation select" key is active in Independent Elevation Mode. This means the following:
1. Pressing the "Elevation Select" key ensures that both sides of the machine use automatic mode
or manual mode together.
2. Pressing the "Elevation Select" key again permits the left side of the machine to use automatic
mode or manual mode. The right side is always in manual mode.
3. Pressing the "Elevation Select" key again permits the right side of the machine to use automatic
mode or manual mode. The left side is always in manual mode.
If one of the laser receivers is blocked when the system is in dual mast and made inactive then the
other laser receiver is also made inactive.
If one of the laser receivers is blocked when the system is in single mast, the active receiver is not
affected when the other side is blocked.
• The Linked Elevation Adjustment option in the "Configuration" menu is not available.
Guidance screen (Independent Elevation mode)
(7) Left Reference Elevation
(8) Right Reference Elevation
A screen that is similar to Illustration 3 is shown when you are in Independent Elevation mode:
Dual Cut/Fill Mode

The dual cut/fill mode is only operated with a dual mast system.
The following items describe the operation of the AccuGrade Laser system in dual cut/fill mode:
• The display shows the cut/fill that is required to reach each mast's reference elevation. A
positive value is cut and a negative value is fill.
• Both of the Arrow Keys are disabled.
• The remote offset key on the joystick control is disabled.
• The "Elevation Select" key is active in Dual Cut/Fill Mode. This means the following:
1. Pressing the "Elevation Select" key (3) ensures that both sides of the machine use automatic
mode or manual mode together.
2. Pressing the "Elevation Select" key (3) again permits the left side of the machine to use
automatic mode or manual mode. The right side is always in manual mode.
3. Pressing the "Elevation Select" key (3) again permits the right side of the machine to use
automatic mode or manual mode. The left side is always in manual mode.
The Reference Elevation option in the "Configuration" menu is not available.
Guidance screen (Dual Cut/Fill Mode)
(18) Left Cut/Fill
(19) Right Cut/Fill
A screen that is similar to Illustration 4 is shown when you are in dual cut/fill mode.
Reference Elevation Mode

Reference Elevation Mode operates with a single mast only.
The following items describe the operation of the AccuGrade Laser system in Reference Elevation
mode:
• The display shows the reference elevation.
• Press either the right or the left Arrow Keys in order to apply an offset to the reference
elevation.
• Press the "ESC/left reset" key in order to start a search for the laser beam. The search for the
laser beam stops when the laser receiver is on-grade.
Note: The "OK/right reset" key does not work when the system is in single receiver mode.
• The "Elevation Select" key does not work in the single mast system.
Guidance screen (Reference Elevation mode)
(1) Laser Receiver Strike Window
(5) Elevation Display icon
A screen that is similar to Illustration 5 is shown when "Reference Elevation " mode is selected.
Single Mast System - Cut/Fill Mode
The Cut/Fill mode only operates with a single mast system.
The following items describe the operation of the AccuGrade Laser system in Cut/Fill mode:
• The display shows the cut/fill that is required in order to reach the mast's reference elevation. A
positive value is a cut. A negative value is a fill.
• Both Arrow Keys are disabled.
• The "ESC/left reset" key is disabled.
• The remote offset key is disabled.
• The elevation select key does not work in the single mast system.
Guidance Screen (Cut/Fill) mode
A screen that is similar to Illustration 6 is shown when the cut/fill mode is selected.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®

i02635346
Display Icons
SMCS - 7220
For each mode of operation the information that is shown on the Display is represented with icons.
The following sections discuss the icons that are used on the Display.
Elevation Display Icon

The type of elevation display icon that is shown on the display depends on the operating mode that is
configured. Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual, "Modes of Operation" for more
information.
The elevation display icon indicates the type of elevation information that is shown on the Display.
There are two elevation display icons.
• The reference display icon indicates that the information for the reference elevation is shown.
• The cut/fill display icon indicates that the cut/fill to grade is shown.
(1) Dual Mast system display screen Elevation Display Icon for Reference Mode
(2) Single Mast system display screen Elevation Display Icon for Reference Mode
(3) Dual Mast system display screen Elevation Display Icon for Dual Cut/Fill Mode
(5) Single Mast system display screen Elevation Display Icon for Cut/Fill Mode
Device Status Icons

Device status icons indicate the status of every device on the AccuGrade Laser system. The following
device status icons may appear on the LCD of the Display:
Black Icons - Indicate detected devices.
Missing Icons - Indicate that the devices are not detected on powerup.
Simulated Gray Icons - Indicates devices that are connected but have lost communications since
system powerup.
Note: The AccuGrade - Laser System will not give grade guidance if any of the required devices are
not detected.
The following illustrations describe the device status icons for the AccuGrade - Laser System.
(6) The laser receiver is connected. The electric mast is connected.
(7) The laser receiver is connected. The electric mast is not connected. The connection was lost since powerup.
(8) The laser receiver is not connected at powerup or the device is not supported by the configuration.
(10) The auto/manual remote switch is connected.
(11) The auto/manual remote switch is connected. The communication was lost since powerup.
The Machine Interlock Icon

The machine interlock icon indicates the status of the machine interlock system for automatic
operation. The display receives the status of the interlocks from the machine ECM.
"Auto Allowed" - The icon indicates that the automatic implement control is available and that the
machine ECM is able to receive commands from the AccuGrade control.
"Auto Not Allowed" Icon flashes - The icon indicates that the parking brake is on. The flashing icon
also indicates that a fault condition exists on the machine ECM.
"Disconnected" Icon is Grayed Out - The icon indicates that the machine ECM is no longer
communicating with the display.
"Service Mode" - The icon indicates that the hydraulics are available for servicing only.
"No Operator Detected" - The system was deactivated because the machine was in NEUTRAL gear
for more than 60 seconds without operator input.
Guidance Sensor Icon

The guidance sensor for the AccuGrade Laser system is the laser transmitter. The guidance sensor
icon is shown in Illustration 8 and 9.
(13) Dual Mast system display screen Guidance Sensor Icon

(13) Single Mast system display screen Guidance Sensor Icon
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®

i02635616
Menus
SMCS - 7220
The Display has menus that allow you to configure the AccuGrade Laser system via Setup. In order to
access "Setup", press the Menu Key. This causes the "Configuration" menu to be shown on the
display. From the "Configuration" menu, the "Installation" menu may be accessed in order to
customize the AccuGrade Laser system.
When a menu is accessed use the arrow keys in order to scroll through the menu items and to increase
or decrease values when you are in a menu that requires data to be entered.
Use the OK/right reset keyin order to select a specific menu, step forward one level in the menus, or
save changes that you have made.
Use the ESC/left reset key in order to step back one level in the menus or to cancel changes that you
have made.
Use the Increment key in order to move the cursor horizontally and position the cursor on the digit
that requires the value to be changed.
Configuration menu
Table 1 explains the features of the menu screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
Table 1
Menu Features
Callout
Feature Function
Menu
1 Indicates which menu screen is open.
heading
Menu items Indicates which menu items are available for selection. The menu item
2
that is highlighted has green text and a black background.
Sub-menu
3 Indicates that there is a sub-menu item within the menu item.
icon
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®

i02635699
Configuration Menu
SMCS - 7220
Menu Selections
Reference Elevation
The "Reference Elevation" menu allows you to set the reference elevation for the cutting edge of the
blade. The options that are listed below are available under this menu:
• Left and right reference elevation (Linked Elevation mode and Independent Elevation mode
only) dual mast system
• Left (center) reference elevation (Independent Elevation mode only) dual mast system or single
mast system
• Right reference elevation (Independent Elevation mode only) dual mast system
Note: The "Reference Elevation" menu item is not available in the Dual Cut/Fill mode for the dual
mast system or the Cut/Fill mode for the single mast system.
In order to access the "Reference Elevation" menu item, perform the following procedure:
1. Press the "Menu" key.
2. Press the Arrow keys until "Reference Elevation" is highlighted on the display.
3. Press the "OK/right reset" key.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 1 appears for a dual mast system.

Reference Elevation Menu for the Dual Mast system

Reference Elevation Menu for the Single Mast system
Valve Speed
The "valve speed" menu for the dual mast system has three options that are available in order to allow
you to change the speed of the lift valve and the tilt valve. The lift valve and the tilt valve control the
automatic blade movement.
The "valve speed" menu for a single mast system has one option available. The user may only change
the speed of the lift valve. The menu options are listed below:
"<- Valve Speed ->" - This option allows you to set the speed for both the Lift valve and the Tilt
valve. (dual mast system)
"<- Valve Speed" - This option allows you to set the speed for the Lift valve only. single mast
system and dual mast system
"Valve Speed ->" - This option allows you to set the speed for the Tilt valve. (dual mast system)
NOTICE
If the valve speed is adjusted too high the AccuGrade system will over
correct during blade movement and produce an uneven grade.
If the valve speed is adjusted to low the AccuGrade system will not
correct blade movement fast enough resulting in an uneven grade.
Refer to Illustration 3 for an example of the profile of the grade versus

the valve speed adjustment.
Adjustment of the "<- Valve Speed ->" is needed when both the lift valve and the tilt valve appear to
be too slow or too fast.
Increase the "<- Valve Speed ->" if both the lift valve LEDs and the tilt valve LEDs remain in the
raise or lower amber color for a long duration of 2 seconds or more.
Decrease the "<- Valve Speed ->" if both the lift valve LEDs and the tilt valve LEDs pass through the
green on grade and go into the amber color and both the lift and tilt functions are erratic.
Adjust the valve speed in incremental changes of 2 percent.
Adjustment of the "<- Valve Speed" is needed when the lift function appears to be too slow or too
fast.
Increase the "<- Valve Speed" if the lift LEDs remain in the raise or lower amber color for a long
duration of 2 seconds or more.
Decrease the "<- Valve Speed" if the lift LEDs pass through the green on grade and go into the amber
color and the lift function is erratic.
Adjust the valve speed in incremental changes of 2 to 5 percent.
Adjustment of the "Valve Speed ->" is needed when the tilt function appears to be too slow or too
fast.
Increase the "Valve Speed ->" if the tilt LEDs remain in the raise or lower amber color for a long
Decrease the "Valve Speed ->" if the tilt LEDs pass through the green on grade and go into the amber
color and the tilt function is erratic.
In order to customize the valve speed, Refer to Testing and Adjusting, "Blade Reaction Time - Adjust
(Valve Speed)".
Customize Menu
The "Customize" menu allows you to customize the following settings:
• Operating mode
• Offset
• On grade deadband
• Units of measure
• Audio
• Brightness
• Contrast
In order to change the settings under the "Customize" menu, complete the following steps:
1. Press the "Menu" key.
2. Press the Arrow keys until "Customize" is highlighted on the display.
3. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to enter the "Customize" menu.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 4 appears.

Operating Mode
The "Operating Mode" menu allows you to select one of the operator modes.
The following operator modes are available on machines that are equipped with a single mast system.
• Cut/Fill
The following operator modes are available in a dual mast system.
• Cut/Fill
For more information on Operating modes, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual,
"Operating Modes" section.
In order to select the Operating mode, perform the following steps:
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, press the Arrow keys until "Operating Mode" is highlighted on
the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to select "Operating Mode".
A menu that is similar to Illustration 6 appears for a single mast system.
"Operating Mode" Menu for the Dual Mast system

"Operating Mode" Menu for Single Mast system
3. Press the Arrow keys until the proper operating mode is highlighted on the display.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to select the required operating mode. Press the
"OK/right reset" key in order to store the required operating mode.
5. Press the "Menu" key in order to return to the Guidance Mode.
Offset
In order to customize the "Offset" menu, follow the procedure that is listed below.
Elevation Offset
Use the "Elevation Offset" Menu in order to set the amount that each toggle of the Remote Offset
switch, increases or decreases the displayed reference elevation. The right or left offset switch is
dependent on which side of the blade is controlled by the elevation device.
Note: This setting only affects the offset change caused by the remote "Elevation Offset" switch.
Pressing the "Arrow" Keys on the Display when in Guidance Mode always changes the elevation
offset by 0.001 m or 0.01 ft.
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, press the Arrow Keys until "Offset" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" key. A screen that is similar to Illustration 7 will appear.
3. Use the Arrow Keys in order to select "Elevation".
4. Press the "OK/right reset" key. A screen that is similar to Illustration 8 will appear.
5. In order to Edit the "elevation offset increment", follow the procedure that is listed below.
a. Press the "ESC/left reset" key and the "OK/right reset" key simultaneously in order to
reset the elevation offset to 0.030 m (0.1 ft), (1.18in).
b. Press the "Increment" key in order to move the cursor to the right and highlight the digit
that needs to be changed.
Press the Arrow Keys UP in order to increase the highlighted value.
Press the Arrow Keys DOWN in order to decrease the highlighted value.
6. When the required elevation offset is entered, press the "OK/right reset" key in order to return
to the "Customize" menu.
7. Press the "Menu" Key in order to return to Guidance Mode.
Slope Offset
Slope offset is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
On Grade Deadband
Use the "On Grade Deadband" Menu to change the "display deadband" settings for "Elevation" or
"Slope", and the "control valve deadband" settings on the system.
To customize the "on-grade deadband" settings, complete the following steps:
1. From the "Customize" Menu, press the Arrow Keys until "On Grade Deadband" is highlighted.
2. Press "OK" .

3. Press the Arrow Keys in order to make your selection.
4. Press "OK" .
If you select "Elevation", proceed to Step 5.
If you select "Slope", proceed to Step 9.
5. Press the Arrow Keys until the desired "On Grade Deadband" is highlighted.
The default setting for elevation is "5/3 mm" which provides a 5.0 mm display deadband for the
on-grade LED indicators and a 3.0 mm control deadband for the automatic hydraulic valve
control. This setting suits most applications.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 11 will appear.
Note: Smaller valve deadband values increase the valve movement sensitivity. This can cause
unstable system performance.
6. Press "OK".
7. Press "OK" in order to save the setting and return to the "On Grade Deadband" Menu. Select
another deadband option or press "ESC" in order to return to the "Customize" Menu.
8. Proceed to Step 11.
9. Press the Arrow Keys until the desired "On Grade Deadband" is highlighted.
The default setting for slope is "0.15/0.10%" which provides a 0.15% display deadband for the
on-grade LED indicators and a 0.10% control deadband for the automatic hydraulic valve
control. This setting suits most applications.
Note: Smaller valve deadband values increase valve movement sensitivity. This can cause
unstable system performance.
10. Press "OK" in order to save the setting and return to the "On Grade Deadband" Menu. Select
another deadband option or press "ESC" in order to return to the "Customize" Menu.
11. Press the Menu Key in order to return to Guidance Mode.
Units of Measure
The Units of "Measure" menu allows you to select one of the units that are listed here:
• Feet
• Meters
• Inches
In order to select the units of measure, perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, press the Arrow Keys (1) until "Units of Measure" is highlighted
on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" key (8). A screen that is similar to Illustration 12 appears.
3. Press the Arrow Keys (1) in order to highlight the required units.
4. Press the "OK/right reset"key (8) in order to store the selection and return to the "Customize"
menu.
5. Press the Menu Key (6) in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Audio
Use the "Audio" Menu to change the volume level of the audio alert. The audio alert sounds when a
button or a switch is used or a system warning is given. Audio alerts can also be configured for
elevation and slope.
To customize the volume of the audio alert, complete the following steps:
Audio Volume
In order to customize the volume of the audio alert, perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, press the Arrow Keys (1) until "Audio Volume" is highlighted on
the display. A screen that is similar to Illustration 13 will appear.
2. Select "Audio Volume".
3. Press the "OK/right reset" key (8). A screen that is similar to the following appears on the
display:
Note: The range of the audio volume is 0 to 100 percent. 0 percent is the lowest volume and
100 percent is the loudest volume. The number that is shown in the middle of the screen is the
current setting for the audio volume. Refer to Illustration 14.
4. Press the Arrow Keys UP in order to increase the volume. The percentage and the length of the
bar graph increase and a pulsed audible tone sounds. Press the Arrow Keys DOWN in order to
decrease the volume. The percentage and the length of the bar graph decrease and a pulsed
audible tone sounds.
5. Press the "OK/right reset" key (8) in order to store the audio volume level and return to the
"Customize" menu.
6. Press the Menu Key (6) in order to return to Guidance Mode.
Elevation Alert
The elevation alert provides an audible alert when the system is off grade.
In order to customize the elevation alert, perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, press the Arrow Keys (1) until "Elevation Alert" is highlighted
on the display.
2. Select "Elevation Alert" and Press "OK".
3. Press the "OK/right reset" key (8). A screen that is similar to Illustration 15 appears.
4. Press the Arrow Keys (1) in order to turn the "Elevation Alert" On and Off. Refer to Illustration
16.
5. Press the "OK/right reset" key (8) in order to store the Elevation Alert selection and return to
the "Audio" menu.
6. Press the Menu Key (6) in order to return to Guidance Mode.
Slope Alert
Slope Alert is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
Brightness
The "Brightness" menu allows you to adjust the brightness of the following:
• Display keys
• Display screen
In order to adjust the brightness, perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, press the Arrow Keys until "Brightness" is highlighted on the
display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" key. A screen that is similar to Illustration 17 appears.
3. Press the Arrow Keys in order to select the item that requires adjustment.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" key. A screen that is similar to the following appears on the display:
Note: The range of the brightness level is 0 to 100 percent. 0 percent is the lowest brightness
level and 100 percent is the brightest. 50 percent is the default contrast level. The number that is
shown in the middle of the screen is the current setting for the brightness level. Refer to
Illustration 18.
5. Press the Arrow Keys UP in order to increase the brightness. The percentage and the length of
the bar graph increase. Press the Arrow Keys DOWN in order to decrease the brightness. The
percentage and the length of the bar graph decrease.
6. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to store the brightness level and return to the
"Customize" menu.
Contrast
The "Contrast" menu allows you to adjust the contrast of the display.
In order to adjust the brightness, perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, press the Arrow Keys until "Contrast" is highlighted on the
display.
Note: The range of the contrast level is 0 to 100 percent. 0 percent is the lowest contrast level
and 100 percent is the highest contrast level. 50 percent is the default contrast level. The
number that is shown in the middle of the screen is the current setting for the contrast level.
Refer to Illustration 19.
3. Press the Arrow Keys UP in order to increase the contrast. The percentage and the length of the
bar graph increase. Press the Arrow Keys DOWN in order to decrease the contrast. The
percentage and the length of the bar graph decrease.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to store the contrast level and return to the "Customize"
menu.
Linked Elevation Adjustment (Dual Mast System Only)

The "Linked Elevation Adjustment" menu allows you to fine tune the blade tilt. This adjustment
should only be performed if an error exists on the surface due to incorrect blade tilt. The amount of
error is entered into the Linked Elevation Adjustment menu in order to solve the problem. A blade tilt
error can be caused by uneven wear on the blade.
Note: Blade tilt errors can be detected by cutting a pass to grade, turning the machine around 180
degrees, and seeing if the blade is still parallel to the grade.
ST300 Configuration
ST300 Configuration is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
Linked Elevation Adjustment for the Dual Mast System Only
The "Linked Elevation Adjustment" menu allows you to fine tune the blade tilt. This adjustment
error is entered into the "Linked Elevation Adjustment" menu in order to solve the problem. A blade
tilt error can be caused by uneven wear on the blade.
Note: Ensure that the laser transmitter is set up for a flat level plane before the following procedure is
performed.
Perform the following steps in order to complete the Linked Elevation Adjustment.
1. Raise the blade so that there is enough room in order to use a level under the edge of the blade.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" key (8) or the "ESC/left reset" key (7) in order to perform a search
for the laser beam so that the laser receivers locate the plane of the laser beam.
3. Once the search has been completed, switch the system into automatic mode.
The system will now attempt to level the blade.
Once the system is placed in automatic mode, blade movement may

occur.
Ensure that all personnel are clear of the blade before you place the
system in automatic mode.
Personal injury or death from crushing could occur.
4. When the blade movement stops, switch the system back into manual mode.
Note: Do Not Move The Blade.
5. Place blocks under the blade before checking the blade level.
6. Use a level in order to check that the cutting edge of the blade is level.
7. If the blade is not level, determine if the left side of the blade is high or low.
8. Enter the "Configuration" menu.
9. Press the Arrow Keys (1) until "Linked Elevation Adjustment" is highlighted on the display.
10. Press the "OK/right reset" key (8) in order to enter the "Linked Elevation Adjustment" menu. A
screen that is similar to Illustration 21 appears.
Note: The number is always zero when you enter this screen. The maximum value that may be
added to the screen is plus 0.1 or minus 0.1.
11. Enter a positive value in order to lift the left side of the blade. Enter a negative value in order to
lower the left side of the blade.
Use the steps that are outlined below:
a. Press the "cursor scroll" switch in order to move the cursor to the right. Continue to move
the cursor until the digit that you want to change is highlighted. Do one of the following:
■ Press the Arrow Keys (1) UP in order to increase the elevation offset adjustment to
the required value.
■ Press the Arrow Keys (1) DOWN in order to decrease the elevation offset
adjustment to the required value.
Accept or cancel change by doing one of the following:
■ Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to save the changes and exit to the
"Configuration" menu.
■ Press the "ESC/left reset" key (7) in order to cancel the changes and exit to the
Sensor Calibration
"Sensor Calibration" is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
Diagnostics
The diagnostics menu allows you to choose from the diagnostic items that are listed below.
• "Test valves"
• "Hour Meter"
• "Software Versions"
• "Sensor Data"
• "Fault History"
• "Machine Voltage"
• "Test Control Box"
In order to enter the "Diagnostics" menu, complete the procedure that is listed here:
1. Press the Menu key.
2. Press the Arrow keys until "Diagnostics" is highlighted on the LCD.
4. Press the Arrow keys in order to select a diagnostics menu item to access.
Test Valves
Do not operate or work on this machine unless you have read and
understand the instructions and warnings in the Operation and
Maintenance Manuals. Failure to follow the instructions or heed the
warnings could result in injury or death. Contact your Caterpillar
dealer for replacement manuals. Proper care is your responsibility.

occur.
The "Test Valves" menu allows the hydraulic control valves to be driven manually in order to verify
correct operation of the display, and the hydraulic control valve. In order to access the "Test Valves"
menu, perform the procedure that is listed here:
Hour Meter
The "Hour Meter" menu shows the length of time that the Display has been operating. The "Hour
Meter" menu also shows the length of time that the automatic controls have been used with the
display.
Software Versions
The "Software Versions" menu identifies which AccuGrade - Laser System components are currently
being used. The "Software Versions" menu also shows the versions of software that are loaded into
the AccuGrade - Laser System components.
"Software Versions" Menu
Sensor Data
Use the "Sensor Data" menu in order to view the current sensor data that is generated by the system.
Fault History
The "Fault History" menu shows the AccuGrade - Laser System faults.
Note: The last five faults are stored. These faults can be retrieved even if power to the system is lost.
Machine Voltage
The "Machine Voltage" menu shows the system voltage.
Test Box Control

The "Test Control Box" menu allows you to test the switches that are configured in the display for
proper operation. The "Test Control Box" menu also allows you to test the display for proper
operation. The keys that are available for testing include the keys on the display and the remote
switches. All keys are available for testing except for the "ESC/left reset" key, and the "OK/right
reset" key.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®

i02636728
System Setup
SMCS - 7220
Language Selection
The AccuGrade Laser system supports the following languages:
Note: The menu for language selection is located in the "Installation" menu. The language selections
are shown in the untranslated form.
• "Chinese"
• "Dutch"
• "English - U.S."
• "English - U.K."
• "Finnish (Suomi)"
• "French"
• "German"
• "Italian"
• "Norwegian"
• "Portuguese"
• "Russian"
• "Spanish"
• "Swedish"
In order to select the preferred language, complete the following steps.

1. Perform the following procedure in order to enter the "Installation" menu.
a. Press and hold down the "ESC/left reset" key.
b. Press and hold the right down Arrow key.
c. Press and hold down the "Increment" key.
d. Release all of the keys simultaneously.
This causes the "Installation" menu to be shown on the LCD of the display.
2. Use the Arrow keys in order to toggle through the "Installation" menu until "Language" is
selected.
3. Use the Arrow keys in order to scroll through the "Language" menu.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to select the highlighted language.
Configuration of the AccuGrade Laser System
NOTICE
The AccuGrade Laser system default settings are configured for the
dual mast system. If you are installing a dual mast system continue
with this procedure.
If you are installing a single mast system you must first proceed to
"Configure the Display for Single Mast Operation" and follow the
setup procedure in order to configure the display for use with the
single mast system.
The Display has a set of menus and menu options that are used in order to configure the settings of the
AccuGrade Laser system. These menus are accessed via Setup mode.
1. In order to access the Setup mode, press the "menu" key. A screen that is similar to Illustration
3 will appear.
Valve Calibration
In order to ensure proper performance of the hydraulic system on the machine, the valves must be
calibrated.
If this procedure was not completed during the initial installation of the AccuGrade Laser system,
Refer to Testing and Adjusting, "Bank Valve (Grade Control) - Calibrate".
If the valve calibration has been previously completed, press the Arrow keys in order to scroll to the
next menu.
Customize the AccuGrade Laser System

The menu for "Customize" is located within the "Configuration" menu. The menu allows the user to
customize the AccuGrade Laser with the items in the following menus:
Select the Operating Mode
1. Press the Arrow keys until "Customize" is highlighted on the Display.

2. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to access the "Customize" menu. A screen that is similar
to Illustration 4 appears.
Display screen for Dual Mast system

Display screen for Single Mast system
3. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to access the "Operating Mode" menu.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 5 appears for the Dual Mast System.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 6 appears for the Single Mast System.
4. Press the Arrow keys until the mode that is required is highlighted on the Display.
5. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to save the changes and return to the "Customize" menu.
In order to exit back to the "Customize" menu without saving any changes, press the "ESC/left
reset" key.
Set The Elevation Offset
The "Elevation Offset" menu allows you to set the amount each toggle of the Elevation Offset switch
on the remote switch assembly increases or decreases the reference elevation. This allows you to
move the blade a certain distance in the upward or downward direction with the toggle of a switch.
1. Press the Arrow keys until "Elevation Offset" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to access the "Elevation Offset" menu. A screen that is
similar to Illustration 7 appears.
3. Press the "Increment" key in order to move the cursor. This allows the user to highlight the
digit.
4. In order to edit the "elevation offset increment", perform one of the following procedures that is
listed below:
a. Press the "ESC/left reset" key and the "OK/right reset" key simultaneously in order to
reset the elevation offset to 0.030 m (0.1 ft).
b. Press the "Increment" key in order to move the cursor to the right and highlight the digit
that needs to be changed.
Press the Arrow keys UP in order to increase the highlighted value.
Press the Arrow keys DOWN in order to decrease the highlighted value.
5. When the required elevation offset is entered, press the "OK/right reset" key in order to return
to the "Customize" menu.
reset" key.
Guidance screen for Dual Mast system

Guidance screen for Single Mast system
6. Press the "Menu" key in order to return to Guidance mode.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 8 will be shown for the Dual Mast system.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 9 will be shown for the Single Mast system.
Configuring the Display for Single Mast Operation

1. Use the Arrow keys in order to scroll through the "Installation" menu until "Machine Setup" is
selected.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" key.
3. Use the Arrow keys in order to scroll through the "Machine Setup" menu until "Control Mode"
is selected.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" key. This will bring up the "Control Mode" menu.
5. Use the Arrow keys in order to select "Single" from the "Control Mode" menu.
6. Press the "OK/right reset" key in order to save the changes and exit back to the Installation
menu.
The system is now configured for the single mast system. Continue with the configuration
procedure.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®

i02637517
Display
SMCS - 7220
Display
Display
(1) Arrow Keys
(2) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

(3) Elevation Select Key
(4) Increment/Blade Slope Direction Key
(5) Manual Key
(6) Menu Key
(7) "Esc" Left Reset/Left Bench Key
(8) "OK" Right Reset/Right Bench key
(9) Grade Indicators
The Display is an onboard computer for the AccuGrade Laser system. The Display is mounted in the
cab of the machine.
Features and Functions

The display allows you to set up and operate the AccuGrade Laser system via the LCD panel, LED
grade indicators and keys. Refer to Illustration 1 for the layout of the display.
Table 1
Features of the Display
Callout
Feature Description
Raise or lower the reference elevation. Scroll through the menus, or

1 Arrow Keys
set the desired cross slope.
Liquid Crystal
Guidance is displayed in normal operation. Selectable Menus are
2 Display (LCD)
shown in the Setup mode.
The Elevation Select Switch allows the operator to select the side of
Elevation Select
3 the blade used for elevation control. The Elevation Select Switch will
Key
not operate in the dual position for Linked mode.
Increment
Key/Slope Selects the digits when in the units of measurement screens. Selects
4
Direction Key between left and right slope direction.
5 Manual Key Places the system in Manual Mode.

This button is used to switch between the setup menu and the
6 Menu Key
Guidance screen.
This button permits the left elevation control to identify the on-grade
benchmark.
"ESC "Left
This button allows changes made in the setup menu to be rejected.
7 Reset/Left
When the "ESC" button and the "OK" button are pressed
Bench Key
simultaneously, the displayed value will be reset to the default value.
This button allows you to step back one level in the setup menu.
This button permits the right elevation control to identify the on-grade
benchmark.
"OK"Right
This button allows changes made in the setup menu to be accepted.
8 Reset/Right
Bench Key
simultaneously, the displayed value will be reset to the default value.
This button allows you step forward one level in the setup menu.
Colored lights that indicate when the cutting edge of the machine is
above or below grade. The lights show the direction the cutting edge
Grade
9 needs to move. A green light indicates that the cutting edge under the
Indicators
mast is on-grade. The left indicators represent the left side of the
blade. The right indicators represent the right side of the blade.
Rear Panel of the Display

The following items are located on the rear panel of the Display. These items and the corresponding
functions are listed below:
70 pin CAN Data Link / power connector - Connects the display to the rest of the system.
Machine Interlock
There are three conditions utilized by theAccuGrade - Laser System that will disable the Automatic
Grade Control. The interlocks are listed below:
• Park Brake Engaged
• Neutral Status for 60 seconds without operator input
• Fault condition on machine Electronic Control Module (ECM)
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
®

i02637774
Data Link
SMCS - 7220
Data Link
The following components communicate with the CAN data link.
• The Display
• The Interface Module (Valve)
• The Power Supply Module
• The Laser Receivers
• The Electronic Masts
• The Lift/Tilt Valve
• The Transmission ECM
All of the components send and receive information through the CAN data link.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade Laser System
Media Number -RENR8128-01 Publication Date -01/04/2005 Date Updated -26/04/2005

i02188970
General Information
SMCS - 7220
• Save time
Laser Grading
System Overview
• Display
• Implement/Valve Control ECM (A4:M1)
• Cable Harness
• Single Adapter (Attached to the back of the receiver)

beam.
Display
(2) Left Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll switch
(3) Right Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll switch
(4) Auto/Manual Light Emitting Diodes (LED)

(5) Elevation Select switch
(6) Cursor Scroll button
(7) Power/Setup switch
(8) ESC/Left Reset/Left Bench button
(9) OK/Right Reset/Right Bench button
(10) Left Grade indicators
(11) Right Grade indicators
(12) Sensor (Ambient light)
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02049679
Modes of Operation
SMCS - 7220
• Dual Cut/Fill
• Cut/Fill
affects the operation of the buttons and switches on the display.
Table 1
Callout
Feature Function
This indicates the guidance sensor that is used by the AccuGrade -
Guidance Sensor Laser System. For the AccuGrade - Laser System, the guidance
2
Icon sensor is always the laser receiver. This icon disappears if the laser
receiver is not detected on power-up.
4
Elevation
Display Icon
6

• The display shows the reference elevation that is being worked toward.
• You can toggle the mast elevation switches to move both masts upward or downward by the
same amount. This means that the same elevation offset is applied to both sides of the blade.
• Press either the ESCL/left reset button or the OK/right reset button in order to start a search for
the laser beam. If the left mast is over the benchmark, press the ESCL/left reset button. The
search for the laser beam stops when the left laser receiver is on-grade. If the right mast is over
the benchmark, press the OK/right reset button. The search for the laser beam stops when the
right laser receiver is on-grade.
• The elevation select switch is inactive in linked elevation mode. This means that both sides of
the machine must use automatic mode or manual mode together.
• The linked elevation adjustment option is available in the "Configuration" menu. Refer to
Guidance screen (Linked Elevation mode)

Maintenance Manual, "Setting the Reference Elevation (Dual Mast System)" for more
information on the process that is used to benchmark the blade using Independent Elevation
Mode.
• Toggle the left mast elevation/menu scroll switch in order to move the left mast upward or
downward. The elevation offset is applied only to the left side of the blade.
• Toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch in order to move the right mast upward or
downward. The elevation offset is applied only to the right side of the blade.
Note: Toggling the remote increment/decrement rocker switch that controls (Elevation Offset)
applies the same elevation offset to both masts.
• Pressing the ESCL/left reset button searches for the laser beam and locks on to the laser beam
on the left receiver.
• Pressing the OK/right reset button searches for and locks on to the laser beam on the right
receiver.
• The elevation select switch is active in Independent Elevation Mode.
Toggling the elevation select switch to the center position ensures both sides of the machine to use
automatic or manual mode together.
Toggling the elevation select switch to the right position permits the right side of the machine to use
effected when the other side is blocked.

Dual Cut/Fill Mode

• Both mast elevation/menu scroll switches are disabled.
• Both the OK/right reset button and the ESC/left reset button are disabled.
• The remote offset switch is disabled.
• The elevation select switch is active in dual cut/fill mode.
Toggling the elevation select switch to the center position allows both sides of the machine to use
automatic mode or manual mode.
Toggling the elevation select switch to the left position permits the left side of the machine to use
The Linked Elevation Adjustment option and the Reference Elevation option in the "Configuration"
menu are not available.
Guidance screen (dual Cut/Fill ) mode
(9) Left Cut/Fill
(10) Right Cut/Fill
Reference Elevation Mode only operates with a single mast system.
mode:
• Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu scroll
switch in order to apply an offset to the reference elevation.
• Press the ESC/left reset button in order to start a search for the laser beam. The search for the
laser beam stops when the laser receiver is on-grade. This fine tunes the on-grade position in
the laser receiver.
Note: The OK/right reset button does not work in the single receiver system.
• The Elevation Select switch does not work in the single mast system.
Cut/Fill Mode
• Both mast elevation/menu scroll switches are disabled.
• The ESC/left reset button is disabled.
• The elevation select switch does not work in the single mast system.
Most of the information that is shown on the display is represented with icons. The following sections
discuss the icons that are used on the display.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02173696
Display Icons
SMCS - 7220

information.
(1) Dual Mast system display screenElevation Display Icon for Reference Mode
Device Status Icons

Simulated Gray Icons - Indicate devices that were previously detected, but have stopped
communication while the display was powered ON.
not detected.
(7) The laser receiver is connected. The electric mast is not connected. The connection was lost since power-up.
(9) The laser receiver is not connected. The connection was lost since power-up. The electric mast is connected.
(10) The laser receiver is not connected. The electric mast is not connected. The connections were lost since power-up.
(12) The auto/manual remote switch is not connected. The connection was lost since power-up.
Hydraulics Available Icon

The "Hydraulics Available" icon indicates the status of the "Hydraulic Control System" for automatic
operation. The display receives the hydraulic control status from the "Implement/Valve Control"
ECM.
implement control "ECM" is able to receive commands from the AccuGrade control.
also indicates a fault condition that has disabled the automatic implement control.
"Disconnected" Icon is Grayed Out - The icon indicates that the implement control "ECM" is no
longer communicating with the display.
"No Operator Detected" - The automatic implement control was deactivated because the machine
was in NEUTRAL gear for more than 60 seconds without operator input.

icon is shown in Illustration 9.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02282889
Menus
SMCS - 7220
access "Setup", toggle the power/setup switch to the "i" position. This causes the "Configuration"
menu to be shown on the display. From the "Configuration" menu, the "Installation" menu may be
accessed in order to customize the AccuGrade Laser system.
When a menu is accessed use the left mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the right mast
elevation/menu scroll switch in order to scroll through the menu items and to increase or decrease
values when you are in a menu that requires data to be entered.
Use the OK/right reset button in order to select a specific menu, step forward one level in the menus,
or save changes that you have made.
Use the ESC/left reset button in order to step back one level in the menus or to cancel changes that
you have made.
Use the cursor scroll button in order to move the cursor horizontally and position the cursor on the
digit that requires the value to be changed.

Typical example of the features of the Configuration menu
Table 1
Menu Features
Callout
Feature Function
Menu
heading
2
Sub-menu
icon
Arrow -
4 Indicates that there is additional information on the page.
up/down
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02282800
Configuration Menu
SMCS - 7220
Menu Selections
Reference Elevation
The reference elevation menu allows you to set the reference elevation for the cutting edge of the
blade. The options that are listed below are available under this menu:
• Left and right reference elevation (Linked Elevation mode and Independent Elevation mode
only) dual mast system
• Left (center) reference elevation (Independent Elevation mode only) dual mast system or single
mast system
• Right reference elevation (Independent Elevation mode only) dual mast system
Note: The Reference Elevation menu item is not available in the Dual Cut/Fill mode for the dual mast
system or the Cut/Fill mode for the single mast system.
In order to access the Reference Elevation menu item, perform the following procedure:
1. Toggle the power/setup switch to the "i" position.
2. Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu scroll
switch until Reference Elevation is highlighted on the display.
3. Press the OK/right reset button.
A menu similar to Illustration 1 appears for a dual mast system.

Reference Elevation Menu for the Dual Mast system
Reference Elevation Menu for the Single Mast system
Valve Speed
The valve speed menu for the dual mast system has three options that are available in order to allow
automatic blade movement.
The valve speed menu for the single mast system has one option available in order to allow you to
change the speed of the lift valve only. The menu options are listed below:
valve. (dual mast system)
"<- Valve Speed" - This option allows you to set the speed for the Lift valve only. single mast
system and dual mast system
"Valve Speed ->" - This option allows you to set the speed for the Tilt valve. (dual mast system)
NOTICE

Increase the "<- Valve Speed ->" if both the lift valve LEDs and the tilt valve LEDs remain in the
Decrease the "<- Valve Speed ->" if both the lift valve LEDs and the tilt valve LEDs pass through the
green on grade and go into the amber color and both the lift and tilt functions are erratic.
fast.
Increase the "<- Valve Speed" if the lift LEDs remain in the raise or lower amber color for a long
Decrease the "<- Valve Speed" if the lift LEDs pass through the green on grade and go into the amber
fast.
Increase the "Valve Speed ->" if the tilt LEDs remain in the raise or lower amber color for a long
Decrease the "Valve Speed ->" if the tilt LEDs pass through the green on grade and go into the amber
In order to customize the valve speed, Refer to Testing and Adjusting, "Blade Reaction Time - Adjust
(Valve Speed)".
Customize Menu
The Customize menu allows you to customize the following settings:
• Operating mode
• Elevation offset
• Audio volume
In order to change the settings under Customize, complete the following steps:
1. Turn the power/setup switch to the "i" position.
switch until Customize is highlighted on the display.
3. Press the OK/right reset button in order to enter the Customize menu.
A screen similar to Illustration 4 appears.

Operating Mode
The Operating Mode menu allows you to select one of the operator modes.
The following operator modes are available on machines that are equipped with a single mast system.
• Cut/Fill
The following operator modes are available in a dual mast system.
• Dual Cut/Fill
For more information on Operating modes, refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual,
"Operating Modes" section.
1. Inside the Customize menu, toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast
elevation/menu scroll switch until Operating Mode is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button in order to select Operating Mode.
A menu similar to Illustration 6 appears for a single mast system.
Operating Mode Menu for the Dual Mast system

Operating Mode Menu for Single Mast system
switch until the proper operating mode is highlighted on the display.
4. Press the OK/right reset button in order to select the required operating mode.
5. Turn the power/setup switch to the "ON" position in order to return to the Guidance mode.
Elevation Offset
The Elevation Offset menu allows you to set the amount that each toggle of the remote offset switch
increases or decreases the reference elevation.
Note: Toggling either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu
scroll switch always changes the elevation offset by 3.0 mm (0.01 ft).
In order to adjust the elevation offset increment perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the Customize menu, toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left
mast elevation/menu scroll switch until Elevation Offset is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button. A screen similar to Illustration 7 will appear.
3. In order to Edit the elevation offset increment, do one of the following listed below:
a. Press the ESC/left reset button and the OK/right reset button simultaneously in order to
reset the elevation offset to 0.030 m (0.1 ft), (1.18in).
b. Press the cursor scroll button in order to move the cursor to the right and highlight the
digit that needs to be changed.
Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu
scroll switch UP in order to increase the highlighted value.
Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu
scroll switch DOWN in order to decrease the highlighted value.
4. When the required elevation offset is entered, press the OK/right reset button in order to return
to the Customize menu.
On Grade Deadband
The On Grade Deadband menu allows you to change the display deadband settings and the control
valve deadband settings on the display.
In order to customize the On Grade Deadband settings, perform the procedure that is listed here:
1. Inside the Customize menu, toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast
elevation/menu scroll switch until ON Grade Deadband is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button. A screen similar to Illustration 8 appears on the display:
Note: The default is 5/3 mm. This provides a 5 mm display deadband for the on-grade LED
indicators and a 3 mm control deadband for the automatic hydraulic valve control. This setting
suits most applications.
switch until the required display and control deadband is highlighted.
Note: Smaller valve deadband values increase the sensitivity of the valve movement. This can
cause unstable system performance.
4. Press the OK button in order to save the setting and return to the Customize menu.
5. Turn the power/setup switch to the ON position in order to return to the Guidance mode.
Audio Volume
The Audio Volume menu allows you to change the volume level of the audio alert. The audio alert
sounds when a button is pressed or a system warning is given.
mast elevation/menu scroll switch until Audio Volume is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button. A screen similar to the following appears on the display:
current setting for the audio volume. Refer to Illustration 9.
switch UP in order to increase the volume. The percentage and the length of the bar graph
increase and a pulsed audible tone sounds. Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll
switch or the left mast elevation/menu scroll switch DOWN in order to decrease the volume.
The percentage and the length of the bar graph decrease and a pulsed audible tone sounds.
4. Press the OK/right reset button in order to store the audio volume level and return to the
Customize menu.
5. Turn the"power/setup" switch to the ON position in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Units of Measure
The Units of Measure menu allows you to select one of the units that are listed here:
• Feet
• Meters
• Inches
In order to select the units of measure, perform the following procedure:
mast elevation/menu scroll switch until Units of Measure is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button. A screen similar to Illustration 10 appears.
switch in order to highlight the required units.
4. Press the OK/right reset button in order to store the selection and return to the Customize menu.
Linked Elevation Adjustment (Dual Mast System Only)

The Linked Elevation Adjustment menu allows you to fine tune the blade tilt. This adjustment should
only be performed if an error exists on the surface due to incorrect blade tilt. The amount of error is
entered into the Linked Elevation Adjustment menu in order to solve the problem. A blade tilt error
can be caused by uneven wear on the blade.
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics menu allows you to choose from the diagnostic items that are listed below.
• "Test valves"
• "Hour Meter"
• "Fault History"
In order to enter the Diagnostics menu, complete the procedure that is listed here:
1. Turn the power/setup switch to the i position.
switch until Diagnostics is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button. A screen similar to Illustration 11 appears.
switch in order to select the diagnostics item that you want to access.
Test Valves
The Test Valves menu allows the hydraulic control valves to be driven manually in order to verify
correct operation of the display, interface module (valve) and the hydraulic control valve. In order to
access the Test Valves menu, perform the procedure that is listed here:
1. Inside the Diagnostics menu, toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast
elevation/menu scroll switch until Test Valves is highlighted.
2. Press the OK/right reset button in order to select this item. A screen similar to Illustration 12
appears:
3. Press the cursor scroll button in order to change the percentage of power that will drive the
valves.
Note: Pressing the cursor scroll one time will reduce the percentage of power to 1%.

occur.
4. Toggle the left mast elevation/menu scroll switch UP in order to move the lift valve UP.
Similarly, toggle the left mast elevation/menu scroll switch DOWN in order to move the lift
valve DOWN.
5. Toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch UP in order to move the tilt valve up.
Similarly, toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch DOWN in order to move the tilt
valve DOWN.
6. Press the OK/right reset button in order to return to the Diagnostics menu.
Hour Meter
The Hour Meter menu shows the length of time that the display has been operating. The Hour Meter
menu also shows the length of time that the automatic controls have been used with the display.
To access the Hour Meter menu, perform the procedure that is listed here:
1. Inside the Diagnostics menu, toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the
left mast elevation/menu scroll switch until Hour Meter is highlighted.
appears:
3. Observe the Operating Hours and the Control Hours times.
Software Versions
The Software Versions menu identifies which AccuGrade - Laser System components are currently
being used. The Software Versions menu also shows the versions of software that are loaded in to the
AccuGrade - Laser System components.
In order to access the Software Versions menu, perform the procedure that is listed here:
left mast elevation/menu scroll switch until "Software Versions" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button.
A menu similar to Illustration 14 appears for a dual receiver system.
The information shown in the "Software Versions" menu includes the following items:
The devices that are connected.
The arrow showing whether the device is the left or right device A 0 means that the device is
neither left nor right.
The version of application software for each device.
The version of loader software for each device.
Software Versions Menu for the Dual Mast System
Fault History
The Fault History menu shows the AccuGrade - Laser System faults.
In order to observe the fault history, perform the procedure that is listed here:
left mast elevation/menu scroll switch until Fault History is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button in order to access additional information about the highlighted
fault. A screen similar to Illustration 15 appears:
3. Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the "left mast elevation/menu
scroll" switch in order to scroll through the list of recorded system faults.
4. Press the OK/right reset button in order to access additional information about the highlighted
fault. A screen similar to Illustration 16 appears:
Fault History screen
(1) The device that caused the fault
(2) The fault code
(3) The fault count
The fault count is the number of instances that a fault condition has been received from a particular device.
(4) The time that the last fault condition occurred.
(5) A description of the problem.
5. Press the ESC/left reset button in order to return to the previous menu.
6. Press the ESC/left reset button in order to return to the Diagnostics menu.
Machine Voltage
The Machine Voltage menu shows the voltage that the system is receiving. To access the Machine
Voltage menu complete the following steps:
left mast elevation/menu scroll switch until Machine Voltage is highlighted.
appears:
3. Observe the measured machine voltage. The machine voltage is shown in volts.
Test Control Box
The test control box menu allows you to test the switches configured in the display for proper
operation. The Test Control Box menu also allows you to test the display for proper operation. The
switches available for testing include the switches on the display and the remote switches. All
switches are available for testing except for the power/setup switch, the ESC button, and the OK
button.
left mast elevation/menu scroll switch until Test Control Box is highlighted on the display.
appears:
Note: When you enter the Test Control Box menu, all LED indicators on the display are
checked to ensure that the LED indicators are functioning properly.
3. Test each switch that is configured in the display. Remote switches are labeled "A", "B", "C",
"D", and "E". Panel switches are labeled "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", and "P7".
The arrow shown next to a Remote switch identifier determines which switch is pressed and
whether the switch is up or down.
A Remote switch that has a short to power is represented by a flashing identifier and the "+"
symbol.
A Remote switch that has a short to ground is represented by a flashing identifier and the "-"
symbol.
A Remote switch that is not detected by the system is represented by a flashing identifier and
the "?" symbol.
4. Test that the complete display is working by performing the following steps:
a. Simultaneously toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch and the left mast
elevation/menu scroll switch UP in order to turn on all the LCD pixels. The display
should turn black.
b. Simultaneously toggle the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch and the left mast
elevation/menu scroll switch DOWN in order to turn off all the LCD pixels. The display
should turn green.
5. Press the OK button in order to return to the Diagnostics menu.
6. Toggle the power/setup switch to the "ON" position in order to return to the Guidance mode.
Menu Foldouts
Configuration Menu (Dual Mast System)
Configuration Menu (Single Mast System)

Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02282925
Installation Menu
SMCS - 7220
Menu Selections
Language
The Language menu allows you to choose a language from the languages that are supported by the
software.
• "English"
• "Spanish"
• "German"
• "French"
• "Italian"
• "Dutch"
• "Portuguese"
• "Finnish"
• "Swedish"
• "Norwegian"
Valve Calibration
The Valve Calibration menu allows you to set the lift and tilt valve's upper and lower limits by
manually adjusting the blade.
This calibration wizard will guide the user through the required actions for performing an automatic
valve calibration. The following menus are used.
• "Set Lower Limit"
• "Set Upper Limit"
• "Confirm Start"
• "Calibration Status"
• "Exit-Success"
• "Exit-Error"
The Exit-Success screen will be displayed after a successful automatic calibration of the valve has
been completed. The Exit-Error screen will show a description of the error that occurred during the
automatic calibration of the valve.
Format of the Screen
(5) "Laser Strike Indicator"
(6) "Laser Strike Window"

(7) "Laser Strike Limit Range"
(8) "Laser Strike Value"
(9) "Success Indicator"
(10) "Number of screens"
The top banner of the of the display will show the text that is listed below:
"<- Auto Valve Cal" - This message is displayed when the lift valve is calibrated. (dual mast system
and single mast system)
"Auto Valve Cal ->" - This message is displayed when the tilt valve is calibrated. (dual mast system
only)
The information displayed is for the sensor that is used during calibration. After selection, both the
upper calibration and the lower calibration limits are displayed.
The OK / right reset button is used to continue the process of calibration.
The ESC / left reset button is used to abort the calibration process.
The activity indicator is activated in order to convey to the user that a sensor signal is available and
that the calibration is in progress even if you do not observe any blade motion.
Press the ESC / left reset button from any screen of the Automatic Valve Calibration Wizard in order
to terminate the calibration in progress. If the user is in the Calibration Status screen, this action
shows the Exit-Error Screen, with the text Abort. In all other screens, the user is returned to the Auto
Valve Cal screen.
Linked Elevation Calibration (Dual Mast System Only)

The Linked Elevation Calibration menu allows for the height difference (offset) between the mounts
for the electric masts .
Linked Elevation Calibration is necessary in order to measure the difference between the right mast
mount and the left mast mount. Linked elevation calibration is also necessary in order to record the
difference of the elevation between the right mast mount and the left mast mount. The AccuGrade
Laser System uses this measurement in order to compensate for the height difference between the
mast mounts.
The Linked Elevation Calibration menu is available only when the Linked Elevation operating mode
is active.
Note: A laser transmitter and a carpenter's level are required in order to complete the Linked
Elevation Calibration.
Remote Switches
The Remote Switches menu is not operational. This menu is reserved for future use.
Reset to Defaults
The Reset to Defaults menu allows the user to reset all of the factory settings to the default value
except for valve calibration, manual tune, and linked elevation calibration.
Menu Foldouts
Installation Menu (Dual Mast System)
Installation Menu (Single Mast System)

Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02162753
System Setup
SMCS - 7220
Language Selection
• "English"
• "Spanish"
• "German"
• "French"
• "Italian"
• "Dutch"
• "Portuguese"
• "Finnish"
• "Swedish"
• "Norwegian"

1. Place the power/setup switch in the ON position.
When the AccuGrade Laser system is powered on, a self test will be initiated. During the self
test, the CAT trademark and information for the software version will be shown on the display.
2. While the self test is running, simultaneously press and then release both the ESC/left reset
button and the OK/right reset button .
The language menu will be shown on the display. Refer to Illustration 2.
Note: The language selection menu is one of the menu selections found in the Installation
menu. The language selections are shown in the untranslated form.
switch until the preferred language is highlighted.
4. Press the OK/right reset button in order to select the highlighted language.

NOTICE
If different icons are observed on the Display, the system may be using
an older version of software. Contact your dealership's Technical
Communicator for a possible consultation with Caterpillar.
NOTICE
single mast system.
1. In order to access the Setup mode, move the power/setup switch to the "i" position.
This will cause the Configuration menu, as shown in Illustration 3, to be shown on the Display.
Valve Calibration
calibrated.
If the valve calibration has been previously completed, toggle either the right mast elevation/menu
scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu scroll switch in order to scroll to the next menu selection.

The Customize menu is contained within the Configuration menu. This menu lets you customize the
AccuGrade Laser with the items in the following menus:
switch until Customize is highlighted on the Display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button in order to access the Customize menu. Operating Mode is
highlighted by default. A screen similar to Illustration 4 appears.

3. Press the OK/right reset button in order to access the Operating Mode menu.
A screen similar to Illustration 5 appears for the Dual Mast System.
A screen similar to Illustration 6 appears for the Single Mast System.
switch until the mode that is required is highlighted on the "Display".
5. Press the OK/right reset button in order to save the changes and exit back to the Customize
menu.
In order to exit back to the Customize menu without saving any changes, press the ESC/left
reset button.
The Elevation Offset menu allows you to set the amount each toggle of the Elevation Offset switch on
the remote switch assembly increases or decreases the reference elevation. This allows you to move
the blade a certain distance in the upward or downward direction with the toggle of a switch.
switch until Elevation Offset is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the OK/right reset button in order to access the Elevation Offset menu. A screen similar to
Illustration 7 appears.
3. Press the cursor scroll button in order to move the cursor to the right and highlight the digit that
you want to change.
4. Do one of the following.
◦ Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu
scroll switch UP in order to increase the highlighted value.
◦ Toggle either the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the left mast elevation/menu
scroll switch DOWN in order to decrease the highlighted value.
◦ Press the OK/right reset button and the ESC/left reset button simultaneously in order to
set the elevation offset to the default value of 0.030m.
Repeat step 3 and step 4 until the elevation offset is set to the desired value.
5. Press the OK/right reset button in order to save the changes and exit to the Customize menu.
In order to exit back to the Customize menu without saving any changes, press the ESC/left
reset button.
6. Move the power/setup switch to ON position. This causes the guidance screen to be shown on
the Display
A screen similar to Illustration 8 will be shown for the Dual Mast system.
A screen similar to Illustration 9 will be shown for the Single Mast system.
Configure the Display for Single Mast Operation
1. Use the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch in order to toggle through the Installation menu
until Control Mode is selected.
2. Press the OK/right reset button. This will bring up the Control Mode menu.
3. Use the right mast elevation/menu scroll switch in order to select Single from the Control Mode
menu.
4. Press the OK/right reset button in order to save the changes and exit back to the Installation
menu.
procedure.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02051990
Display
SMCS - 7220
Display
Display
(2) "Left Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll" switch
(3) "Right Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll" switch
(4) "Auto/Manual" Light Emitting Diodes (LED)
(5) "Elevation Select"switch
(6) "Cursor Scroll" button
(7) "Power/Setup" switch
(8) "ESC/Left Reset/Left Bench" button
(9) "OK/Right Reset/Right Bench" button

cab of the machine.

grade indicators, toggle switches, and buttons. Refer to Illustration 1 for the layout of the display.
Table 1
Callout
Feature Description
Liquid Crystal Guidance is displayed in normal operation. Selectable Menus are

1
Display (LCD) shown in the Setup mode.
"Left Mast
Raise or lower the reference elevation. Scroll through the menus.
2 Elevation/ Menu
Scroll" switch
"Right Mast
3 Elevation/ Menu
Scroll" switch
"Auto/Manual" These indicators show the operator which control mode the
4 Light Emitting system is in.
Diodes (LED) Automatic (green) or Manual (amber).
The elevation switch is used in order to select "Lift" only, "Lift
"Elevation Select" and Tilt", or "Tilt" only. The Elevation Select switch is functional
5
switch only on a dual mast system with the Operation Mode set to
"Independent" or "Cut/fill".
"Cursor scroll" This button advances the cursor horizontally through numeric
6
button values.
"Power/Setup" Switches the Display on or off.
7
switch Accesses the setup menu when the switch is in the "I" position.
Permits the left laser receiver, when connected to an electric mast,
to search for and lock onto the center of the laser beam. With the
electric mast, the on-grade location is always at the center of the
"ESC/Left receiver.
8 Reset/Left Bench" Allows changes made in the setup menu to be rejected.
button When the ESC key and the OK key are pressed simultaneously,
the displayed value will be reset to zero. Refer to Operation and
Maintenance Manual, "Set Reference Elevation"
Allows you step back one level in the setup menu.
"OK/Right Permits the right laser receiver, when connected to an electric

9 Reset/Right Bench" mast, to search for and lock onto the center of the laser beam.
button With the electric mast, the on-grade location is always at the
center of the receiver.
Allows changes made in the setup menu to be accepted.
When the ESC key and the OK key are pressed simultaneously,
Allows you step forward one level in the setup menu.
Amber colored arrows indicate when the machine's cutting edge
under the left mast is above or below grade. The arrows show the
Left Grade direction the cutting edge needs to move. A green line indicates
10
indicators that the cutting edge under the left mast is on-grade. Note: The
LED grade indicators on the Display are easily visible when
illuminated.
under the right mast is above or below grade. The arrows show
Right Grade the direction the cutting edge needs to move. A green line
11
indicators indicates that the cutting edge is on-grade under the right mast.
Note: The LED grade indicators on the Display are easily visible
when illuminated.
Sensor (Ambient Measures the ambient light and automatically adjusts the
12
light) brightness of the LEDs for optimal viewing.

Audio alert - Sounds when any remote switch is selected. A single tone is emitted with each
selection. Two short tones alert you to any error messages. Three short tones indicate that the
machine's cutting edge has not moved to the correct elevation (grade and/or slope) within three
seconds of going off-grade.
The Lockout Functions

The "Hydraulics Available" icons indicate the status of the "Hydraulic Control System" for automatic
ECM.
There are three hydraulic lockout functions that are utilized by theAccuGrade Laser system. The
display will show a message to the operator in order to explain the reason for the lockout. The
hydraulic lockout functions are listed below:
Auto Not Allowed (Icon Flashing) - The icon indicates the parking brake is ON. The flashing icon
also indicates a fault condition that has disabled the "Automatic Implement Control".
No Operator Detected - "Automatic Implement Control" was deactivated because the machine was
in NEUTRAL gear for more than 60 seconds without operator input.
Service Mode - The parking brake is ON or a fault condition has disabled "Automatic Control".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02117535
Electronic Control Module (ECM)

SMCS - 7610
Implement ECM (Grade Control)

The implement ECM provides valve control for the lift/tilt control valve, the "pilot supply" valve and
the "counterbalance" valve.
The "Implement ECM" reads the switches and provides switch status information to the display and
also provides the machine interlock status in order to ensure that the AccuGrade - Laser System is
disabled when the machine is in park or stationary without an operator.
The implement ECM stores the calibration values and the machine information for the display in
order to allow the display to be moved from one machine to another.
Implement ECM
(32) J1 Connector (70 Pin)
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02052011
Laser Receiver
SMCS - 7220
Laser Receiver
The AccuGrade - Laser System uses one or two Laser Receivers. The Laser Receivers are 360 degree
omni-directional receivers that detects the laser beam and send information about the elevation of the
laser beam to the AccuGrade - Laser System.
To prevent possible personal injury during installation and removal of

the laser receivers, lower the mast to the minimum height and use an
approved access system to reach the mounting locations of the laser
receivers at the top of the mast. Do not climb on the blade.
Laser Receiver
Table 1
Features and functions of the Laser Receiver
Callout
Feature Function
Grade LEDs Arrows indicate when the machine's cutting edge is above or below
(Arrows = grade. The arrows show the direction that the cutting edge must move in
13 Amber) order to reach the correct elevation. A green line indicates that the
(On-grade = cutting edge is on-grade. (The LEDs also show the distance from on-
Green) grade.)
The Display shows power status, on-grade band, mode selection, and
Grade grade information. The Display also shows when the receiver has lost
14
Display the laser beam, and the direction to move the receiver to find the beam.
The LED shows whether the receiver is on or off. The LED is lit when
Power LED
15 the receiver is on and the Grade LEDs are off. The LED also flashes
(Amber)
when the voltage to the receiver is low.
Use this button to select one of the receiver's three Display modes.
These modes are 5-Position, 7-Position, and Offset On-Grade.
Mode button
16 Note: When connected to a complete AccuGrade - Laser System, the
mode button is inactive. The laser receiver uses the 7-Position Display
mode. Control is linear.
Use this button to turn the receiver on/off and change the sensitivity of
Power/On-
the on-grade band (narrow, standard, and wide). Note - When connected
17 Grade button
to a complete AccuGrade - Laser System, the switches on the receiver
are not functional. Instead, all switches are controlled by the Display.
Photo
18 The detectors sense the laser beam when it hits the receiver.
detectors
Single Adapter
The Single Adapter connects the laser receiver to the AccuGrade - Laser System. The Single Adapter
provides power to the laser receiver and a CAN interface to the other components in the system.
Refer to Table 2 for the features and functions of the Single Adapter:
Table 2
Features and Functions of the Single Adapter
Callout Feature Function
19 6-pin connector Connects the Laser Receiver to the electric mast
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02052021
Electric Mast
SMCS - 7220
Electric Mast
The AccuGrade Laser system uses two Electric Masts. The Electric Mast is a telescopic receiver
mount that is driven by an electric motor. The mast vertically raises and lowers the laser receivers to
locate the laser beam.
Electric Mast
Electric Mast with Block Adapter
(20) Inner Mast Tube
(23) Block Adapter
Refer to Table 1 shows the features and functions of the electric mast:
Table 1
Features and Functions of the Electric Mast
Callout
Feature Function
Raises and lowers the laser receiver to locate the laser beam
20 Inner mast tube
and to change an existing elevation setting
6-socket receiver cable Connects the coiled cable from the laser receiver to the
21
connector electric mast
10-pin control cable
22 Connects the electric mast to the main harness
connector
23 Block Adapter The receiver clamp attaches to the block adapter.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02052032
Power Supply Module

SMCS - 7220
Power Supply Module

The Power Supply Module supplies power to the Display, the electric masts, the laser receivers and
the interface module (valve). The Power Supply Module includes power conditioning and control
circuits, as well as overcurrent and load dump protection.
Table 1 shows the features and functions of the Power Supply Module:
Table 1
Features and Functions of the Power Supply Module
Callout
Feature Function
8-socket power input Connects the Power Supply Module to the machine
29
connector power
8-pin main harness connector Connects the Power Supply Module to the main
30
harness
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02112075
Switches
SMCS - 7220
Joystick Control
Switch (A) is a trigger switch that allows the operator to set an elevation offset. In order to Increase
the offset, press and hold the trigger switch (A) and then press the "Auto" button (B). In order to
Decrease the offset, press and hold the trigger switch (A) and then press the "Manual" button (C).
Joystick Control Switch
(A) Trigger Switch
(B) Increase/Auto Button
(C) Decrease/Manual Button
Table 1
AUTO MAN TRIGGER FUNCTION
X Request Automatic Mode
X Request Manual Mode
X X Increase Elevation Offset
X X Decrease Elevation Offset
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02052040
Data Link
SMCS - 7220
Data Link
• The Display
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02439272
General Information
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade® System is designed for earthmoving equipment in the construction application. The
AccuGrade System uses the Global Positioning System (GPS) and a base station in order to provide
operators with accurate horizontal and vertical blade guidance.
The idea behind the AccuGrade System is very simple. Computers and design software produce
accurate 3D models of project designs. In the past, these models stayed in the office with the engineer.
The engineer gave information to the surveyor. The surveyor then put stakes in the ground in order to
guide the machine operators.
With the AccuGrade System, the 3D model comes into the field as a design surface. By adding GPS,
you can accurately determine the position of the blade on your machine in both horizontal direction
and the vertical direction on the design surface. The cut or the fill that is to be applied to the design
surface can then be computed on the machine in order to provide guidance for the machine.
When all of the hardware is installed on the machine you need to configure the AccuGrade System.
You can configure all system components with the Display. The Display is the onboard computer.
The default settings support most of the conditions, but the settings can be changed as required.
Items that need to be configured in order to make the AccuGrade System work properly include the
following.
• GPS Receiver Configuration (Site Coordinates)
• Light Bar Configurations
• Radio Network Or Frequency
• Machine Settings
• Units Of Measurement
• Machine Dimension Information
• Pitch Sensor Calibration
• Valve Calibration
• Operator Configuration
At the start of any new project or work area the site calibration, and the design are required.
GPS data is needed in order to position the blade. GPS signals are received through the GPS
Receivers. At the same time, base station data is received through the data radio and sent to the left
hand GPS Receiver. The GPS data from each GPS Receiver on the blade is combined with the slope
information in the Display to produce a blade position and blade cross slope. The system uses the
design in conjunction with the GPS information in order to compute the cut or the fill at the blade tips
in respect to the design. The design can be in the form of a DTM (TIN or Grid), road, level or sloping
surface.
The Display has a color LCD that has brightness control in order to allow the operator to see the LCD
in both day light and at night. Information on the screen is available in the following views:
• Plan
• Cross section
• Profile
• Text
The operator will be able to switch between these views at any time. The Display uses the GPS
positions and the machine dimensions in order to compute the position of each blade tip. The Display
compares the blade tips to the design elevation to calculate the cut or fill needed to be on-grade. The
cut or fill data is also displayed on light bars, which act as another visual indication to the operator.
When horizontal alignments are defined, the center light bar provides left and right guidance to the
selected alignment.
Process map of required items to get a functional AccuGrade® System on site.
If the design does not change, the AccuGrade System does not need any other inputs. If changes do
occur to the design, the site manager and operator can respond quickly once the updated design is
provided, without waiting for surveyors and stakes. The AccuGrade System is also easily expanded
onto other machines. Since the base station can support any number of machines, adding GPS grade
control to other machines is simply a matter of installation.
Block diagram of the AccuGrade System
The Global Positioning System (GPS)

GPS is a system of satellites that orbit the earth twice a day at very high altitudes. The radius of the
orbit is approximately 26600 km (16528 miles). GPS was set up by the government of the United
States. GPS provides precise timing and positioning anywhere on earth, 24 hours per day with no
charge to users.
The GPS Receiver computes a position that is based on radio signals that are received from several
different satellites. The satellites have highly reliable clocks, so the timing of these satellite signals is
known very accurately. The GPS Receiver calculates the relative distance to each of the satellites.
This calculation is based on the travel time of the signal and the speed of light (speed of the signal).
The receiver then uses these distances in order to calculate the receiver's location on earth.
As a broadcast only radio system, GPS supports an unlimited number of users. The broadcast
frequencies penetrate clouds, rain, and snow. GPS can also accurately guide operations in fog or dust
as well as at night. There are different levels of precision and accuracy available from GPS. These
levels depend on the GPS Receivers and the methods that you use.
The four basic levels of position accuracy (1 sigma) that are available in real time from GPS are as
follows:
• Autonomous, 10 m (30 ft) to 15 m (50 ft)
• DGPS, 0.3 m (1.0 ft) to 1.0 m (3.0 ft)
• RTK (Float), 0.2 m (0.7 ft) to 1.0 m (3.0 ft)

• RTK (Fixed), .02 m (.07 ft) to .03 m (.10 ft)
Illustration 3 shows the accuracy levels of the GPS.
Accuracy Levels Of The GPS
(1) "Autonomous"
(2) "DGPS"
(3) "RTK Fixed"
(4) "RTK Float"
The method that is used for machine grade control in construction is the same as that used by
surveyors for stakeout in construction. The method is called "Real-Time Kinematic" (RTK), GPS.
This method provides RTK Fixed (centimeter level) solution.
In order to produce RTK positions two GPS Receivers are required. One receiver is known as the
GPS Base Station and is fixed in one place. The other GPS Receiver is known as the rover. This
receiver can be stationary or mobile. The AccuGrade System utilizes two GPS Receivers on the
machine (rover).
The base station communicates to the rovers through a wireless data link using a data radio.
Illustration 4 shows this setup.
GPS and the AccuGrade System
(1) GPS satellites
(2) GPS Base Station and data radio
(3) Repeater radio (optional)
(4) Machine equipped with the AccuGrade System
Both GPS Receivers make observations (measurements) of the GPS signals at the same time. The
base station broadcasts the observed information together with the location and other information
across the data radio to the rover, using a format called "CMR". The rover then combines the data
from the base station in order to compute a very accurate position relative to the base station.
A single base station can support an unlimited number of rovers, provided the rovers are within about
20 km (12.4 miles) of the base station. Normally, the range of the data radio link is the more limiting
factor. You can use radio repeaters in order to extend the radio coverage.
In areas where the 900 MHz band is available, the TC900C data radio is recommended. In areas
where 900 MHz is not available, the TC450C radio is recommended.
Both of the radios have a rugged housing and brackets that are specifically designed for heavy
machinery and construction applications.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02439506
System Components
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System consists of the following components:
• An onboard Display with a Data Card and a design
• Three Light Bars
• Auto/Manual blade control switches
• Location Sensors (GPS Receivers)
• Angle Sensor
• Radio
• Pressure Sensor
• Bank Valves
• Valve Modules
Display
AccuGrade GPS Display
(1) LCD Screen
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) Zoom-In Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) Zoom-Out Key
(10) OK Key
(11) Menu Key
(12) Slot for Data Card
The AccuGrade Display is a computer that runs the AccuGrade software in order to display the
information that is obtained from the GPS Receivers. The Display has a color LCD screen in order to
show guidance and other information, and push button controls to operate the AccuGrade System. In
addition, the Display has a slot for a Data Card. When the Data Card is placed in the slot, the Data
Card can be used for loading and saving machine and Display configuration data, and for loading and
saving designs.
Illustration 2 shows the pinout information for the connector on the Display.
Connector that is located on the back of the Display
Power Key
Press the Power Key (6) in order to turn on the Display.
Note: If the AccuGrade System detects upgrade files or other system files on the Data Card, press the
"ESC" key to continue without updating software.
Press the Power Key and hold the Power Key (6) for several seconds in order to shut down the
Display. This delay reduces the risk of inadvertently shutting off the power. You can turn off the
AccuGrade System from any screen or from any dialog.
Soft Key Labels And Soft Keys

The Soft Key Labels (2) are graphical "keys" that appear at the bottom of the screen. Refer to
Illustration 1.
The Soft Keys (3) are the six physical keys that are located immediately below the screen of the
Display. The function of these physical keys depend on the information that is shown on the Soft Key
Label that is displayed above the key.
By convention, this manual will refer to a Soft Key/function combination by the Soft Key Label.
In order to activate the displayed function, press the appropriate Soft Key that is located directly
below the Soft Key Label. For example, in order to change the bucket focus, press the Soft Key that is
located below the "Bucket: Left" Soft Key Label.
The text on a Soft Key Label can show one of the following details:
• A description of the Soft Key function, for example, "Zoom Machine", enlarges the view in
order to show the machine.
• The option or the setting that has been selected
Some Soft Key Labels appear in more than one screen, in which case the function of the Soft Key that
the Soft Key Label identifies is always the same.
As a function (Soft Key) relates to particular screens or dialogs, that functionality is only available
when the appropriate screen or dialog is displayed. For example, the New Level function is only
available when the Design Selection screen is shown, as that function relates only to that screen.
If a Soft Key has no function in a screen or a dialog, the Soft Key Label is blank.
The text changes when you press the Soft Key in order to select options. The top line of this Soft Key
ends with a colon ":" and the bottom line shows the current option or setting. For example, the Soft
Keys "Blade Tip:Left" and "Blade Tip:Right" show the side of the blade that has focus. The focus
(Left or Right) shows on the bottom line of the Soft Key.
Arrow keys
Use the arrow keys (8) to perform the following actions:
• Move within menus and lists.
• Enter text or numbers into the data fields in the dialogs.
• Pan the "Plan View".
• Pan the "Cross Section View".
• Pan the "Profile View".
Navigating Within Menus And Lists
In order to choose an item from a menu or a list, complete the following steps:
1. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to highlight the desired option.
2. Press the "OK" key (10) .
Entering Data
In text and number fields in any of the dialogs, complete the following actions:
• Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to scroll through the available characters.
• Press the left arrow in order to delete the last character.
• Press the right arrow in order to add additional characters.
Panning Around The Screen
Press the arrow keys in order to control the position of the "Plan View" screen, "Cross Section View"
screen, or the "Profile View" screen:
• Press the right arrow in order to move the view to the right.
• Press the left arrow in order to move the view to the left.
• Press the up arrow in order to move the view up.
• Press the down arrow in order to move the view down.
Working With Display Information

Before you can begin work you must enter the configuration and setup information into the
AccuGrade System, and view the current system state. You do this by working with screens that are
called menus and dialogs. Menus allow you to select a dialog. Dialogs permit you to specify setup and
configuration information. Dialogs allow you to view information about the state of system
components.
(1) LCD Screen
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) Zoom-In Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) Zoom-Out Key

(10) OK Key
(11) Menu Key
When you are working with the Display, you will be using a mix of keys, Soft Keys, menus, dialogs
and guidance screens. The availability of many of these items is determined by the following factors:
• The sensors that are installed on the machine
Some configuration screens, for example, are only available when particular sensors are installed.
• The guidance configuration of the AccuGrade System
Your selection of guidance method will affect the guidance information available on the Display and
the guidance configuration options you get.
• The operator configuration of the AccuGrade System
The site manager's selection of menus and screens that can be accessed will affect the items the
operator can view and modify.
Working With Dialogs
The following screens are called dialogs:
• "Setup Menu-Configuration"
• "Select Design File"
• "Guide to Horizontal Alignment"
• "Horizontal Offset"
• "Elevation Offset"
• "Vertical Guidance Set"
• "Vertical Offset"
• "Bucket Selection"
• "GPS" option screens
Use the dialogs in order to enter data. Use the dialogs in order for the AccuGrade System to be set up
according to your requirements. The selected field in a dialog is identified by the blue background
color.
Press the arrow keys on the Display in order to enter data:
• Upper case letters
• numbers "0" through "9"
• the decimal point "."

• the negative sign "–"
• the positive sign "+"
• a space
• back to "A"
Note: Available values will depend on the type of field that is selected. For example, the only values
that are available for number fields are 0 through 9, the decimal point ".", "–", and "+".
The down arrow is used in order to step through the same set of characters, but in reverse.
When you change a character in a field, the up arrow and the down arrow start stepping from the
existing character.
The right arrow steps to the next character to the right. In fields that allow spaces, press the right
arrow twice in order to insert a space.
The left arrow is used in order to move back one character to the left. This deletes the character in the
space to the left.
Dialogs may contain any of the following items:
Text fields - Use the text fields in order to enter your own information. For example, when you set up
the name of your level surface design or sloping surface design, use the arrow keys in order to enter
this data.
Number fields - Use the number fields in order to enter required values. For example, when you set
up the vertical and horizontal offset, use the arrow keys in order to enter values into these fields.
List boxes - Lists of options or possible selections Use the arrow keys in order to select the listed
item.
Warnings
An error such as the loss of GPS data will cause inaccurate guidance. When an error occurs, a
warning message flashes on the screen. Guidance via the Light Bars is not provided under these
conditions. For more information, refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual, "Flashing Messages".
Illustration 4 is an example of a warning message.
The "NO GPS Receiver Data" warning appears when the receiver has stopped outputting data for at
least 1.5 seconds.
Hourglass
When the AccuGrade System performs an operation that takes more than a few seconds, an hourglass
appears.
• The hourglass appears in the "Plan View", the "Cross Section View", or the "Profile View",
while the software updates the Display after a pan or zoom.
• The hourglass will appear in the "Select Design File" dialog while a design is being loaded
from the Data Card.
The following dialog shows the hourglass while the AccuGrade System loads a design file:
Data Card And Data Storage
NOTICE
When the Data Card is in use, a small orange LED indicator beside the
slot is illuminated. Wait until this light goes out before you remove the
Data Card, otherwise the Data Card may be corrupted.
Construction Designs are developed in the office with design software. AccuGrade Office Software is
used to convert the design software to be used on the AccuGrade System. The Construction Designs
are saved onto a Data Card in order to be read by the AccuGrade System.
Note: SiteVision Office Software can be used in place of AccuGrade Office Software.
A Data Card is a memory chip that can store large amounts of data without the need for a permanent
Power Supply.
Data Cards are used in order to transfer designs between the office, where the designs are created, and
the field, where the designs are used in order to generate guidance information.
You can use AccuGrade Office software in order to view and retrieve the files on a Data Card.
Data Cards also store the following configuration files:
• Machine configuration
• Display settings
When the Data Card is active, a small amber LED indicator beside the slot is illuminated. Do not
remove the Data Card until this light is off. The Data Card may be corrupted.
In order to insert a Data Card, complete the following steps:
1. Open the access door in order to access the slot for the Data Card. The slot is below the keypad
on the Display. Refer to Item (12) in Illustration 1.
2. Insert a Data Card (14) .
(14) Data Card
(15) Adapter for Data Card
3. Close the access door.
You can use the AccuGrade Office Software in order to view files that are on a Data Card (14).
You can use the AccuGrade Office Software in order to retrieve the files that are on a Data
Card (14) .
Machine Configuration Files
Information about specific machines can be saved to a Data Card (14). This information is held in a
machine settings file, and is used in order to configure the AccuGrade System for a specific machine,
if the Display is being shared with several machines.
The machine settings file includes information about the following settings:
• the machine type
• the machine dimensions
• the sensors installed on the machine
Ensure that you restore the correct machine settings file for your machine.
Note: When you restore Display settings or Machine settings, the GPS Receiver configuration
settings and brightness settings of the Display are not changed.
Display Settings Files
Information about the guidance methods and configuration dialogs that can be accessed by the
operators can be saved to a Data Card (14). This information is held in a Display settings file, and is
used to configure the Display for a specific operator if the machine is being used by several operators.
The Display settings file includes information about the following settings:
• the text items that are displayed in the guidance screens
• configuration tasks that can be performed
• guidance settings that can be changed
Light Bars
The Light Bars are mounted on the inside of the cab. If the machine is equipped with an OROPS, the
Light Bars are mounted within the envelope of the canopy.
The AccuGrade System uses three Light Bars. Each of the Light Bars show different information for
your blade position:
• Two vertically mounted Light Bars give the cut/fill guidance to the blade tip on each side.
• A horizontally mounted light bar gives horizontal guidance when a horizontal alignment is
selected. Horizontal guidance is given to the blade tip that has focus. Guidance is relative to the
currently selected alignment or a defined horizontal offset.
There are seven sets of LED indicators on each light bar. Refer to Illustration 8.
Table 1
Light Bar Connector
PIN SIGNAL
A POWER
B GND
C RS232-RX
D RS232-TX
Switches
Automatic Blade Control Lever Switches For N Series, R Series, And T Series
The blade control lever incorporates two push button switches and a trigger switch. The functions of
the push button switches change, depending on the state of the trigger switch. Table 2 describes the
functions of the push button switches, relative to the state of the trigger switch.
Blade Control Lever Switches
(A) Trigger Switch
(B) Decrement/Auto Button
(C) Increment/Manual Button
Table 2
Blade Control Lever Button Functions
Trigger (A)
Left Button (B) Right Button (C)
De-activate Auto Controls (Manual
Out Activate Auto Controls (Auto button)
button)
Decrement vertical offset (Decrement Increment vertical offset (Increment
In
button) button)
Typical schematic section for T Series machines. Refer to the machine specific electrical schematic for more detail
Typical schematic section for N Series machines and R Series machines. Refer to the machine specific electrical
schematic for more detail
Remote Switch Assembly For G Series

A set of remote switches plug into the Display so that the controls for the AccuGrade System can be
placed in a more convenient location. Switch (A) is a pushbutton that allows the operator to switch
between "Auto" and "Manual" control.
Switch (B) is a toggle switch that allows the operator to set an elevation offset.
Pressing the switch towards the UP arrow increases the offset. Pressing the switch towards the
DOWN arrow decreases the offset.
Remote Switch Assembly
(A) Auto/Manual pushbutton switch
(B) Elevation Offset toggle switch
Simple Schematic of the Switch

MWT Module
Sensors
Location Sensors
Location sensors are able to determine position in 3 dimensional space. In order to position the
machine blade, the AccuGrade System uses two GPS Receivers. The GPS Receivers are able to
calculate the location of their position with information broadcast from satellites that are orbiting the
earth. The GPS Receivers must be configured into the AccuGrade System before the information the
receivers provide can be used for machine guidance. A GPS Receiver is mounted on a mast at each
end of the machine's blade.
Illustration 16 shows the pinout information for the connector (16) on the GPS Receiver.
Connector
Status LED Indicators

(17) Power
(18) Data Link
(19) Satellite
The GPS Receivers have three LED indicators that are located next to the harness connector. The
behavior of these LED indicators will provide the status of the receiver(s). These LED indicators are
shown in Illustration 17.
Table 3
GPS Receiver Status LED Indicator Activity
LED
Off Slow Flash Fast Flash On Solid
Indicator
Power (17)
No Power Power on
Left receiver
Data Link No CMRs received or Right receiver
receiving CMRs
(18) too few satellites receiving CMRs
Tracking 4 Tracking 3
Satellite No satellites being
Satellites or more satellites or less Monitor Code (2)
(19) tracked
(2)
In addition to the satellite LED indicator, the power LED indicator will also be on solid, and the data link LED
indicator will be flashing.
Angle Sensor
The Angle Sensor (20) is mounted on the blade. The Angle Sensor measures the forward/aft pitch of
the blade in order to determine the position of the blade for Manual mode operation. The Angle
Sensor is also used for valve calibrations.
Illustration 19 shows the pinout information for the connector on the Angle Sensor.
6 - Pin Socket Receiver Cable Connector
Pressure Sensors (N Series & R Series Only)
Lower Float Circuit Pressure Sensor
This pressure sensor is used to monitor the hydraulic pilot pressure for the lower float circuit. When
pressure is seen in this circuit, the AccuGrade system will disable the Automatic controls. When the
Automatic control is disabled, any unwanted motion is prevented. The hydraulic system is in the float
position.
Pressure Sensors (N Series)

Hydraulic Pump Pressure Sensor
This Pressure Sensor is located on the hydraulic pump. When pressure is absent in this circuit, the
AccuGrade system will disable the Automatic controls. When the Automatic control is disabled, any
unwanted motion is prevented.
Valve Module Interface (For G Series)

The Valve Module Interface electrically controls the valves that positions the cutting edge of the
machine. Control signals are provided to proportional valves.
Table 4
Connector "A" (24) Connections
PIN Circuit ID Function
A L874 OR Switched Power
B NC
C L854 YL CAN HI
D L855 GN CAN LO
E NC
F T748 PK Power GND
G NC
H NC
I NC
J NC
Table 5
Connector "B" (28) Connections
SOCKET Circuit ID Function
A L875 BR Valve #1 Power
B L876 WH Valve #1 Gnd
C L879 GN Valve #1 Control
D L881 PU Valve #1 Fault
E L877 YL Valve #2 Power
F L878 PK Valve #2 Gnd
G L880 PK Valve #2 Control
H L882 GY Valve #2 Fault
I NC
J NC
Table 6 shows the features and functions of the Valve Module Interface:
Table 6
Features and Functions of the Valve Module Interface
Callout
Feature Function
10-pin valve connector "A" Connects the Valve Module Interface to the main
24
harness.
Slow Blinking LED Indicater: NO Signal Applied to the
lift valve.
25 Drive Signal Indicator
Rapid Bblinking LED Indicater: Signal Applied to the
lift valve.
tilt valve.
Rapid Blinking LED Indicater: Signal Applied to the tilt
valve.
Indicates power is available to the Valve Module
27 Power Indicator
Interface.
10-socket network
28 Allows connections to proportional voltage valves.
connector
Power Supply Module

The Power Supply Module supplies power to the following components: the Display, the GPS
Receivers, the Radio, the Angle Sensor and Valve Module Interface. The Power Supply Module
includes power conditioning and control circuits, as well as overcurrent and load dump protection.
Table 7
A A101 GN/OR Battery 1+
B 200 BK Battery 1-
C A102 BL Battery 2+
D 200 BK Battery 2-
E H899 OR Overcurrent Fault Indication
F NC
G A103 YL Battery 3+
H 200 BK Battery 3-
Table 8
A L872 BU Switched Power
B T744 WH Power Gnd
C L873 GY Switched Power, Electric Masts
D T745 YL Power Gnd, Electric Masts
E L870 YL Awake
F L871 BU Awake Gnd
G L874 OR Switched Power, Valve Drive Module
H T748 PK Power Gnd, Valve Drive Module
Table 9
Callout
Feature Function
8-socket power input connector Connects the Power Supply Module to the machine
29
"A" power
30
"B" harness
Grade/Slope Control ECM (for N Series and R Series)

The Implement Grade Control ECM provides valve control for the lift/tilt control valve, the "pilot
supply" valve and the "counterbalance" valve.
The Implement Grade Control ECM reads the switches and provides switch status information to the
Display and also provides the machine interlock status in order to ensure that the AccuGrade System
is disabled when the machine is in park or stationary without an operator.
The Implement Grade Control ECM stores the calibration values and the machine information for the
Display in order to allow the Display to be moved from one machine to another.
Implement Grade Control ECM
Table 10
Contact Description J1 (1)
No. (2) Function Type
1 Key Switch On
10 Cat Data Link + CDL +
11 5V Sensor Power Power
13 Battery - Machine Ground
20 Cat Data Link - CDL -
21 "5V Sensor Return" Return
26 "Trigger Switch N/C" SWG
27 "Trigger Switch N/O" SWG
31 Battery + Power
32 "Auto Mode Sw N/O" SWG
33 "Auto Mode Sw N/C" SWG
34 "Manual Mode Sw N/O" SWG
35 Manual Mode Sw N/C SWG
36 Hydraulic Pilot Pressure Sensor Active 1
37 Pump Pressure Sensor Active 2
39 Battery + "Power"
45 Switch Return Return
55 Proportional Solenoid (s) Return PWM Driver Return
65 Blade Tilt Right Sol PWM Driver
66 Blade Tilt Left Sol PWM Driver
67 Blade Raise Sol PWM Driver
68 Blade Lower Sol PWM Driver
(1)
(2)
The connector contacts that are not listed are not used.
Table 11
2 Counter Balance Sol On/Off
3 Boost Sol 2A On/Off
4 Sol Return Load Return
5 Counter Balance Sol 2 2A On/Off
67 CAN Data Link + CAN A+
68 CAN Data Link - CAN A-
(1)
(2)
Implement Control ECM (T series)

The AccuGrade system signals the Implement ECM for the machine in order to control blade
movement. Refer to the Systems Operation Manual for the machine for more details.
Radio
Data Radio
A data radio is used to receive data from a GPS reference station. The GPS position sensors require
the data radio to be working correctly in the AccuGrade System.
Data Radio Status Indicator

The data radio bottom cap is fitted with a power and I/O connector (41) and an LED indicator (40).
See Illustration 26.
(40) Data/Power LED Indicator
(41) Power I/O connector
The LED indicator can be orange and/or green depending on the situation, as shown in Table 12.
Table 12
Radio Status LED Indicator Activity
Color of LED Indicator
Status
(40)
Orange (solid) Power is available.
Orange and Green (both
With the TCxxxC configured as a radio.
solid)
Orange and green (both Radio is in flashloader mode. To resolve this, turn the power off and
flashing at 1 Hz together) on. If this mode returns when the radio is turned back on, contact the
site manager.
Hydraulic Lift/Tilt For The G Series

The lift/tilt valve is an additional hydraulic valve that is in parallel with the machine's existing
hydraulic system. This valve is used in order to control the operation of the blade when the
AccuGrade System is in Automatic Mode. The valve is controlled by the Display and Valve Module
Interface via the CAN data link.
(34) Lift Valve
(35) Lift Valve Solenoid
(36) Lift Valve Fault Monitoring LED
(37) Tilt Valve Fault Monitoring LED
(38) Tilt Valve Solenoid
(39) Tilt Valve
The lift/tilt valve is used to control the blade movement
Bank Valve (Grade Control) For The N Series Machines

(50) Bank valve
(51) Tilt right solenoid
(52) Blade raise solenoid
(53) Tilt left solenoid
(54) Blade lower solenoid
(55) Pilot lockout solenoid
Bank valve (50) for the AccuGrade System consists of five solenoids. Four of the five solenoids send
pilot oil to the main control valves in order to actuate the control valve spools. The fifth solenoid acts
as a pilot lockout solenoid.
(50) Bank valve
Bank valve (50) for the AccuGrade System is located in the right hand console underneath the main
control valve. Bank valve (50) is accessed by removing the cover and the plate in the cab.
The bank valve in auto grade mode

(56) Signal to pump compensator
When the auto grade mode is active, pilot lockout solenoid (55) is energized. This allows pilot oil to
flow to each of the four solenoids in the bank valve. When blade movement is necessary, the
corresponding solenoid is energized. Pilot oil is then sent to the main control valve.
Load sensing signal (56) sends the pilot oil for the AccuGrade bank valve to the pump compensator.
The additional pilot pressure from the bank valve combines with the margin pressure which makes the
standby pressure higher in the hold position. The higher standby pressure allows the AccuGrade
System to make fine corrections easier because the pump is already pre-stroked. For more information
regarding low pressure standby, see the System Operation, "Hydraulic Pump - Piston".
Blade Lift
The bank valve in blade lift
(50) Bank valve
(56) Resolver
(57) Lift control valve
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers
(60) Tilt control valve
(61) Pressure Sensor

When the AccuGrade System commands the blade to be raised, pilot valve (58) remains in the neutral
position. The blade raise solenoid (52) in bank valve (50) sends pilot signal to the side for lift on the
lift control valve (57). Pump oil is then sent to the lift cylinders in order to raise the blade.
Signal oil from bank valve (50) is directed to resolver (56). Resolver (56) determines the highest
pressure between pilot valve (58) and bank valve (50). The highest pressure is then directed to the
resolver network in the main control valve. Refer to System Operation, "Signal Resolver Network"
for more information on this subject.
Manual Blade Lower In Auto Grade Mode
Bank valve in manual lower of the blade
(50) Bank valve

(56) Resolver
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers
If pilot valve (58) is activated and the AccuGrade System is in the auto grade mode, resolvers (59)
will only allow the highest oil pressure to pass to the main control valve. The higher pressure from the
pilot valves can override the AccuGrade System.
If the blade is manually lowered with the pilot valve and the auto grade mode is active, the
AccuGrade System will de-energize. This function only happens when the blade is manually lowered,
in the auto grade mode.
Pressure Sensor (61) senses pilot pressure from pilot valve (58) for the blade lower. Pressure Sensor
(61) sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then disables the AccuGrade System on the machine
hydraulic system. When pressure is not sensed from Pressure Sensor (61) in the pilot circuit for the
blade lower, the AccuGrade System is then enabled. This function permits the operator to use the float
function while the AccuGrade System is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt
The function of the blade tilt left and blade tilt right is nearly identical to the function of the blade
raise. When the AccuGrade System commands the blade to be tilted right or tilted left, pilot valve
(58) remains in the neutral position. Tilt left solenoid (53) and tilt right solenoid (51) for the blade in
bank valve (50) sends pilot signal to the tilt control valve (60). Pump oil is then sent to the tilt
cylinders in order to tilt the blade to the left or right.
Bank Valve (Grade Control) For The R Series Machines

(65) Bank valve
(50) Bank valve
Bank valve (65) for the AccuGrade System is located on the front of the main control behind the
access door on the right fender.

Blade Lift
(65) Bank valve

(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
(65) Bank valve
(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
blade lower, the AccuGrade System is then enabled. This function permits the operator to use the
valve for the quick drop and the float while the AccuGrade System is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt
GPS Base Station

The AccuGrade System requires a GPS Base Station somewhere near the project.
Note: GPS Base Stations are not supplied by Caterpillar.
A GPS Base Station consists of the following components.
• GPS Receiver
• GPS Antenna
• Radio
• Cables
• Power Supply
There may also be a tripod or mast for the GPS Antenna and the radio, depending on the particular
site. For construction sites where work can continue for a long time, use a semi-permanent location
such as the roof of the site office. A reliable Power Supply is needed.
Make sure that the base GPS Antenna is clear of obstructions, reflected GPS signals (multipath), and
sources of electro-magnetic interference such as power lines.
The base station's data radio must be elevated several meters off the ground in order to provide
optimum coverage.
The GPS Base Station requires a starting location. For best results set up the base GPS Receiver on a
surveyed point. In order to establish this survey point, use a site calibration or a professional surveyor
experienced with GPS equipment.
You must correctly set the GPS Antenna type at your base station. If you do not, the GPS position is
degraded.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02439506
System Components
SMCS - 7220
• An onboard Display with a Data Card and a design
• Three Light Bars
• Location Sensors (GPS Receivers)
• Angle Sensor
• Radio
• Pressure Sensor
• Bank Valves
• Valve Modules
Display
(1) LCD Screen
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) Zoom-In Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) Zoom-Out Key
(10) OK Key
(11) Menu Key
The AccuGrade Display is a computer that runs the AccuGrade software in order to display the
information that is obtained from the GPS Receivers. The Display has a color LCD screen in order to
show guidance and other information, and push button controls to operate the AccuGrade System. In
addition, the Display has a slot for a Data Card. When the Data Card is placed in the slot, the Data
Card can be used for loading and saving machine and Display configuration data, and for loading and
saving designs.
Illustration 2 shows the pinout information for the connector on the Display.
Connector that is located on the back of the Display
Power Key
Press the Power Key (6) in order to turn on the Display.
Note: If the AccuGrade System detects upgrade files or other system files on the Data Card, press the
"ESC" key to continue without updating software.
Press the Power Key and hold the Power Key (6) for several seconds in order to shut down the
Display. This delay reduces the risk of inadvertently shutting off the power. You can turn off the
AccuGrade System from any screen or from any dialog.

The Soft Key Labels (2) are graphical "keys" that appear at the bottom of the screen. Refer to
Illustration 1.
The Soft Keys (3) are the six physical keys that are located immediately below the screen of the
Display. The function of these physical keys depend on the information that is shown on the Soft Key
Label that is displayed above the key.
By convention, this manual will refer to a Soft Key/function combination by the Soft Key Label.
In order to activate the displayed function, press the appropriate Soft Key that is located directly
below the Soft Key Label. For example, in order to change the bucket focus, press the Soft Key that is
located below the "Bucket: Left" Soft Key Label.
The text on a Soft Key Label can show one of the following details:
• A description of the Soft Key function, for example, "Zoom Machine", enlarges the view in
order to show the machine.
Some Soft Key Labels appear in more than one screen, in which case the function of the Soft Key that
the Soft Key Label identifies is always the same.
As a function (Soft Key) relates to particular screens or dialogs, that functionality is only available
when the appropriate screen or dialog is displayed. For example, the New Level function is only
available when the Design Selection screen is shown, as that function relates only to that screen.
If a Soft Key has no function in a screen or a dialog, the Soft Key Label is blank.
The text changes when you press the Soft Key in order to select options. The top line of this Soft Key
ends with a colon ":" and the bottom line shows the current option or setting. For example, the Soft
Keys "Blade Tip:Left" and "Blade Tip:Right" show the side of the blade that has focus. The focus
(Left or Right) shows on the bottom line of the Soft Key.
Arrow keys
Navigating Within Menus And Lists
Entering Data
In text and number fields in any of the dialogs, complete the following actions:
Panning Around The Screen

Before you can begin work you must enter the configuration and setup information into the
AccuGrade System, and view the current system state. You do this by working with screens that are
called menus and dialogs. Menus allow you to select a dialog. Dialogs permit you to specify setup and
configuration information. Dialogs allow you to view information about the state of system
components.
(1) LCD Screen
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) Zoom-In Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) Zoom-Out Key

(10) OK Key
(11) Menu Key
When you are working with the Display, you will be using a mix of keys, Soft Keys, menus, dialogs
Some configuration screens, for example, are only available when particular sensors are installed.
• The guidance configuration of the AccuGrade System
Your selection of guidance method will affect the guidance information available on the Display and
the guidance configuration options you get.
• The operator configuration of the AccuGrade System
The site manager's selection of menus and screens that can be accessed will affect the items the
operator can view and modify.
Working With Dialogs
• "Bucket Selection"
Use the dialogs in order to enter data. Use the dialogs in order for the AccuGrade System to be set up
color.
Press the arrow keys on the Display in order to enter data:

• a space
• back to "A"
existing character.
space to the left.
this data.
item.
Warnings
An error such as the loss of GPS data will cause inaccurate guidance. When an error occurs, a
warning message flashes on the screen. Guidance via the Light Bars is not provided under these
conditions. For more information, refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual, "Flashing Messages".
Illustration 4 is an example of a warning message.
least 1.5 seconds.
Hourglass
When the AccuGrade System performs an operation that takes more than a few seconds, an hourglass
appears.
while the software updates the Display after a pan or zoom.
from the Data Card.
NOTICE
When the Data Card is in use, a small orange LED indicator beside the
slot is illuminated. Wait until this light goes out before you remove the
Data Card, otherwise the Data Card may be corrupted.
Construction Designs are developed in the office with design software. AccuGrade Office Software is
used to convert the design software to be used on the AccuGrade System. The Construction Designs
are saved onto a Data Card in order to be read by the AccuGrade System.
Note: SiteVision Office Software can be used in place of AccuGrade Office Software.
A Data Card is a memory chip that can store large amounts of data without the need for a permanent
Power Supply.
Data Cards are used in order to transfer designs between the office, where the designs are created, and
You can use AccuGrade Office software in order to view and retrieve the files on a Data Card.
Data Cards also store the following configuration files:
When the Data Card is active, a small amber LED indicator beside the slot is illuminated. Do not
remove the Data Card until this light is off. The Data Card may be corrupted.
In order to insert a Data Card, complete the following steps:
1. Open the access door in order to access the slot for the Data Card. The slot is below the keypad
on the Display. Refer to Item (12) in Illustration 1.
2. Insert a Data Card (14) .
(14) Data Card
You can use the AccuGrade Office Software in order to view files that are on a Data Card (14).
You can use the AccuGrade Office Software in order to retrieve the files that are on a Data
Card (14) .
Information about specific machines can be saved to a Data Card (14). This information is held in a
machine settings file, and is used in order to configure the AccuGrade System for a specific machine,
if the Display is being shared with several machines.
• the machine type
• the machine dimensions
• the sensors installed on the machine
Note: When you restore Display settings or Machine settings, the GPS Receiver configuration
settings and brightness settings of the Display are not changed.
operators can be saved to a Data Card (14). This information is held in a Display settings file, and is
used to configure the Display for a specific operator if the machine is being used by several operators.
The Display settings file includes information about the following settings:
• the text items that are displayed in the guidance screens
• configuration tasks that can be performed
• guidance settings that can be changed
Light Bars
The Light Bars are mounted on the inside of the cab. If the machine is equipped with an OROPS, the
Light Bars are mounted within the envelope of the canopy.
The AccuGrade System uses three Light Bars. Each of the Light Bars show different information for
• Two vertically mounted Light Bars give the cut/fill guidance to the blade tip on each side.
• A horizontally mounted light bar gives horizontal guidance when a horizontal alignment is
selected. Horizontal guidance is given to the blade tip that has focus. Guidance is relative to the
currently selected alignment or a defined horizontal offset.
There are seven sets of LED indicators on each light bar. Refer to Illustration 8.
Table 1
Light Bar Connector
PIN SIGNAL
A POWER
B GND
C RS232-RX
D RS232-TX
Switches
Automatic Blade Control Lever Switches For N Series, R Series, And T Series
Blade Control Lever Switches
(A) Trigger Switch
Table 2
Trigger (A)
button)
In
button) button)

A set of remote switches plug into the Display so that the controls for the AccuGrade System can be
Pressing the switch towards the UP arrow increases the offset. Pressing the switch towards the
DOWN arrow decreases the offset.

MWT Module
Sensors
Location Sensors
machine blade, the AccuGrade System uses two GPS Receivers. The GPS Receivers are able to
calculate the location of their position with information broadcast from satellites that are orbiting the
earth. The GPS Receivers must be configured into the AccuGrade System before the information the
receivers provide can be used for machine guidance. A GPS Receiver is mounted on a mast at each
end of the machine's blade.
Connector

(17) Power
(18) Data Link
(19) Satellite
The GPS Receivers have three LED indicators that are located next to the harness connector. The
behavior of these LED indicators will provide the status of the receiver(s). These LED indicators are
shown in Illustration 17.
Table 3
GPS Receiver Status LED Indicator Activity
LED
Off Slow Flash Fast Flash On Solid
Indicator
Power (17)
No Power Power on
Left receiver
receiving CMRs
(19) tracked
(2)
Angle Sensor
The Angle Sensor (20) is mounted on the blade. The Angle Sensor measures the forward/aft pitch of
the blade in order to determine the position of the blade for Manual mode operation. The Angle
Sensor is also used for valve calibrations.
Illustration 19 shows the pinout information for the connector on the Angle Sensor.
6 - Pin Socket Receiver Cable Connector
pressure is seen in this circuit, the AccuGrade system will disable the Automatic controls. When the
Automatic control is disabled, any unwanted motion is prevented. The hydraulic system is in the float
position.

This Pressure Sensor is located on the hydraulic pump. When pressure is absent in this circuit, the
AccuGrade system will disable the Automatic controls. When the Automatic control is disabled, any

The Valve Module Interface electrically controls the valves that positions the cutting edge of the
Table 4
A L874 OR Switched Power
B NC
C L854 YL CAN HI
D L855 GN CAN LO
E NC
F T748 PK Power GND
G NC
H NC
I NC
J NC
Table 5
A L875 BR Valve #1 Power
B L876 WH Valve #1 Gnd
C L879 GN Valve #1 Control
D L881 PU Valve #1 Fault
E L877 YL Valve #2 Power
F L878 PK Valve #2 Gnd
G L880 PK Valve #2 Control
H L882 GY Valve #2 Fault
I NC
J NC
Table 6 shows the features and functions of the Valve Module Interface:
Table 6
Callout
Feature Function
24
harness.
lift valve.
lift valve.
tilt valve.
valve.
27 Power Indicator
Interface.
10-socket network
connector
Power Supply Module

The Power Supply Module supplies power to the following components: the Display, the GPS
Receivers, the Radio, the Angle Sensor and Valve Module Interface. The Power Supply Module
includes power conditioning and control circuits, as well as overcurrent and load dump protection.
Table 7
A A101 GN/OR Battery 1+
B 200 BK Battery 1-
C A102 BL Battery 2+
D 200 BK Battery 2-
E H899 OR Overcurrent Fault Indication
F NC
G A103 YL Battery 3+
H 200 BK Battery 3-
Table 8
A L872 BU Switched Power
B T744 WH Power Gnd
C L873 GY Switched Power, Electric Masts
D T745 YL Power Gnd, Electric Masts
E L870 YL Awake
F L871 BU Awake Gnd
G L874 OR Switched Power, Valve Drive Module
H T748 PK Power Gnd, Valve Drive Module
Table 9
Callout
Feature Function
29
"A" power
30
"B" harness

The Implement Grade Control ECM provides valve control for the lift/tilt control valve, the "pilot
The Implement Grade Control ECM reads the switches and provides switch status information to the
Display and also provides the machine interlock status in order to ensure that the AccuGrade System
is disabled when the machine is in park or stationary without an operator.
The Implement Grade Control ECM stores the calibration values and the machine information for the
Display in order to allow the Display to be moved from one machine to another.
Table 10
1 Key Switch On
31 Battery + Power
(1)
(2)
Table 11
(1)
(2)

The AccuGrade system signals the Implement ECM for the machine in order to control blade
movement. Refer to the Systems Operation Manual for the machine for more details.
Radio
Data Radio
Data Radio Status Indicator

Table 12
Status
(40)
solid)
site manager.

AccuGrade System is in Automatic Mode. The valve is controlled by the Display and Valve Module
Interface via the CAN data link.
(34) Lift Valve
(39) Tilt Valve
The lift/tilt valve is used to control the blade movement

(50) Bank valve
(50) Bank valve
Bank valve (50) for the AccuGrade System is located in the right hand console underneath the main
control valve. Bank valve (50) is accessed by removing the cover and the plate in the cab.

Blade Lift
(50) Bank valve
(56) Resolver
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers

(50) Bank valve

(56) Resolver
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers
blade lower, the AccuGrade System is then enabled. This function permits the operator to use the float
function while the AccuGrade System is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt

(65) Bank valve
(50) Bank valve
Bank valve (65) for the AccuGrade System is located on the front of the main control behind the

Blade Lift
(65) Bank valve

(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
(65) Bank valve
(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
blade lower, the AccuGrade System is then enabled. This function permits the operator to use the
valve for the quick drop and the float while the AccuGrade System is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt
GPS Base Station

The AccuGrade System requires a GPS Base Station somewhere near the project.
Note: GPS Base Stations are not supplied by Caterpillar.
A GPS Base Station consists of the following components.
• GPS Receiver
• GPS Antenna
• Radio
• Cables
• Power Supply
There may also be a tripod or mast for the GPS Antenna and the radio, depending on the particular
such as the roof of the site office. A reliable Power Supply is needed.
Make sure that the base GPS Antenna is clear of obstructions, reflected GPS signals (multipath), and
optimum coverage.
The GPS Base Station requires a starting location. For best results set up the base GPS Receiver on a
You must correctly set the GPS Antenna type at your base station. If you do not, the GPS position is
degraded.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02215762
Modes of Operation
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System has three different operating modes.
• Normal mode
• Service mode
• Training mode
The operating modes let you perform different functions within the software. You select a mode when
you turn on the Display. The mode that is selected remains active until you turn off the Display.
Normal Mode
The AccuGrade System automatically operates in Normal mode when you start up the Display. In
order to do this, turn on the machine's ignition. Press the "POWER" key.
By default, the following softkeys are available when the Display is in Normal Mode.
• Select or create a design file ("Select Design<name>")
• Select blade tip focus ("Blade:Left or Blade: Right")
• Select alignments for guidance ("Alignment<name>")
• Set the horizontal offsets ("H. Offset:")
• Set the vertical offsets ("V. Offset:")
• Turn map recording on or off (if enabled)
• Set the Vertical Guidance (Version 6.1)
• Zoom and pan
• Set the GPS Accuracy (Version 6.1)

You can also use the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog to perform the following when you are in
Normal mode.
• Edit the blade wear value
• Set the Vertical Guidance (Version 5.5)
• Set the vertical offset switch increment.
• Select the GPS Accuracy (Version 5.5)
• Set the light bar scales and on-grade tolerance
• Select and reset map recording
• Set the valve speed.
• Restore Display settings or machine settings
• View basic diagnostic information
Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual, SEBU8002 for more details on Normal mode
operation.
Service Mode
NOTICE
If you lack experience with the AccuGrade System, use extreme care
when you are in Service Mode so that you do not accidentally change
the AccuGrade System settings.
Service Mode allows you to have access to all available options that the AccuGrade System offers.
Use Service Mode in order to change the settings that affect the operation of the AccuGrade System.
Additionally, use Service Mode for the installation of the AccuGrade System.
In order to turn on Service Mode, turn off the Display if the Display is ON. Press and hold down the
"OK" key as you press the "POWER" key. Make sure that you hold down the "OK" key until the
Display shows the opening screen.
In order to turn off Service Mode, turn off the Display.
Use the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog in order to perform the following when you are in
Service mode:
• Blade Wear
• Vertical Guidance (Version 5.5)
• GPS Accuracy Mode (Version 5.5)

• Vertical Offset Increment Switch
• Lightbar Scales
• Display and Lightbar Brightness
• Map Recording
• Valve Speed
• Avoidance Zones
• Text Items
• Plan View Rotation
• Beeper Configurations
• Sensor Calibrations (Version 6.1)
• Save and Restore Settings
• GPS Receiver Configuration
• Diagnostics
Use the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog to perform the following when you are in Service mode:
• Set the Machine Settings
• Set Units
• Set Machine Dimensions
• Radio Port of the Display
• Light bar Connections
• Pitch Sensor Calibration (Version 5.5)
• Upgrade Firmware
• Software Option
• Launch RadioLink (Version 6.1)
Turn the Display off in order to exit Service Mode after editing the settings or performing tests on the
GPS Receiver. This ensures that inexperienced users will not inadvertently change the AccuGrade
System settings.
Training Mode
Use the Training Mode in order to simulate the AccuGrade System. This mode is designed as a
training or system demonstration tool. This mode will allow you to practice using the system without
doing any real construction work.
In order to turn on "Training" mode, turn on the machine's ignition. Press and hold down the "ESC"
key as you press the "POWER" key. Ensure that you hold down the "ESC" key until the opening
screen is displayed.
In order to turn off "Training" mode, turn off the Display. In order to do this press and hold down the
"POWER" key.
In order to turn on "Training" Mode and Service Mode at the same time, press and hold down the
"ESC" key and the "OK" key together as you press the "POWER" key.
Make sure that you hold down the "ESC" key and the "OK" key until the Display starts the opening
screen.
Using Training Mode

Training mode allows you to use most of the normal system functions. However, you cannot update
the GPS Receiver configuration or view or perform any system diagnostics.
Training mode does not use the signals from a GPS Receiver. You can operate Training mode without
any other equipment attached to the AccuGrade System. In order to do this you need a 12 or 24 DCV
power supply, a data card that contains the design, a cable harness, and the Display.
Training Mode Hard Keys
Use the keys in the table below in order to drive the machine around the screen. This takes some
practice as the machine symbol response is not instantaneous. Table 1 lists the actions. Press the
arrows two or three times in order to see the response.
Table 1
Training Mode Hard Keys
Press this
To ...
key ...
speed up if the machine is moving forward or to slow down if the machine is
Up arrow key
moving backward
Down arrow key slow down if the machine is moving forward or to speed up if the machine is
moving backward
Right arrow key
turn the machine clockwise by a few degrees
Left arrow key

turn the machine counterclockwise by a few degrees
"MENU" key
and the right increase the slope of the machine (1)
arrow key
"MENU" key
and the left decrease the slope of the machine (1)
arrow key
alternates the arrow keys between moving the machine and panning around the
screen. Panning is faster than moving the machine. Use panning in order to look
"ESC" key
at features on the screen, such as the background map. When you are panning,
make sure that you turn off Autopan.
(1)
In Training Mode, the slope of the machine will not change unless the machine is moving.
Machine Symbol Starting Position

When you are in Training mode and you load a *.svd file, the machine symbol is positioned at the
first triangle that is loaded.
When you are in Training mode and you load a Digital Terrain Model (DTM) - Grid or Triangular
Irregular Network (TIN), road, or sloping surface design - the machine symbol is positioned at the
start of the design.
When you are in Training mode and you load a level surface design, the machine symbol is positioned
at the first point in the defined polygon extents. If no polygon extents exist, then the machine symbol
is positioned at the origin (0, 0, 0).
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02215011
Guidance Terms
SMCS - 7220
In order to get the most out of the AccuGrade System you must understand the following terms.
Heading - The direction in which the machine is moving.
Slope - The forward and aft grade (or mainfall) of the machine.
Orientation - The direction that the blade is facing.
Cross slope - The cross fall of the blade, orthogonal to the direction of travel.
The GPS receivers accurately calculate the positions of the GPS antennas, but cut / fill information to
reach design grade is required at the blade tips. Using the CD550A Display and on-board software,
the AccuGrade System reduces the GPS positions and applies the machine dimensions in order to
compute accurate positions at the blade tips. These positions are then compared to the design
elevation at the same locations to compute cut /fill information.
Heading
The heading is the direction the machine is traveling, measured clockwise in degrees from grid north.
0 degrees equals North, 180 degrees equals South. The heading is calculated from successive
positions of the antennas as the machine is moving. The machine must therefore move or have been
moving for the heading to be calculated correctly. If there is not enough information to calculate the
heading, guidance is not given. This occurs when the machine has: · Just started up, lost the GPS
signal The message "Low Accuracy (Move)" or "Direction Unknown" then flashes on the Display. In
either of these cases, wait until the system recovers sufficient satellite signals and move the machine
forward in a straight line.
Pitch
On the track type tractor, pitch is the forward /aft angle of the blade, calculated in degrees from the
horizontal (0°). Pitch is considered positive when the angle is above the horizontal (up at the front)
and negative when the angle is below the horizontal (down at the front). The AS400 tilt sensor is
mounted directly on the blade, near the base of the left mast. In Manual mode, the AS400 is used to
directly measure the pitch of the left mast and blade, so the blade can be at any pitch and correct blade
tip positions are calculated. In Auto mode, the blade and mast are considered perpendicular to the
design surface, so it is critical that the blade be in the as-measured pitch. If there is not enough
information to calculate the pitch of the machine and blade, then the computed offsets to the blade tips
are also wrong. If the AS400 is not connected, the message "Low Accuracy (Pitch)" flashes on the
CD550A Display. In this situation, verify that the pitch sensor is connected to the CAN bus. After
connecting, the flashing message should disappear. Pitch may also become inaccurate in any of the
following situations:
• System is just started up
• System is reporting low accuracy GPS.
• Machine turns sharply
• Machine changes pitch drastically over a short distance
In any of these cases, the message "Low Accuracy Move" flashes on the CD550A Display. Move the
machine slowly forward to resume accurate positioning.
Orientation
Orientation is the direction in which the blade is facing. The orientation is calculated from the vector
between the two antennas and is perpendicular to this vector.
Cross Slope
Cross slope is the cross fall of the blade, orthogonal to the direction of travel (machine heading). This
is significant when the machine has a blade that can be angled with respect to the body of the
machine, such as a dozer with a six-way blade. For example, if a dozer has the blade angled, the cross
slope reported by the AccuGrade System will be the same as the design cross slope when the blade is
on grade only if the machine travel is parallel to an alignment. The actual tilt of the blade will be
different to this. Positive cross slope rises to the right. With respect to the left blade tip, the cross
slope is considered positive when the right blade tip is high, and negative when the right blade tip is
low.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02215020
Data Card
SMCS - 7220
Office Computers
The Display uses industry-standard data cards ("CompactFlash") in order to store all of the designs
and other information required for the AccuGrade System. Illustration 1 shows the physical size of the
data card.
(1) Data Card
(2) Adapter For The Data Card

In order to transfer the data to and from a data card the office computer needs an appropriate reader
for the data card. The type of reader depends on the type of computer available and the operating
system the computer is running. There is no limit to the size of card that may be used.
Notebook Computers
A PC card (PCMCIA) slot is available on most notebook computers. Place the data card into a PC
card adapter and insert the adapter into the PCMCIA slot.
Desktop Computers
Usually, no data card or PC card interface is available on desktop computers. However, there are
numerous third-party solutions available.
Contact your office computer supplier for data card reader solutions.
Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows XP

When an office computer running Microsoft Windows 98, Microsoft Windows 2000, or Microsoft
Windows XP detects a data card (plug and play), the computer assigns the data card the next available
drive letter.
Some office computers may perform an autodetect routine the first time the data card is inserted.
Note: You must stop the data card before removing the data card from the computer. Failure to do so
can corrupt the data.
Data Card Errors

Note: Data card errors occur if you pull the data card out of the Display while the data card is in use.
Do not remove the data card when the amber LED indicator next to the data card slot is illuminated or
flashing.
The AccuGrade System checks the integrity of the data card every five seconds. If the system detects
an error the system records the error in the ProgramLog.txt file. A dialog that explains the problem
appears on the screen. The data card may need to be reformatted. Alternatively, replace the data card
and copy the data card's contents to a new card.
Root Folder
The root folder on the data card will contain some of the following file types or all of the following
file types:
• A Site Map
• Site Avoidance Zone
• Terrain Logging
• Map Recording
• Program log
• Display Settings
• Design folders
The following files may be in the root folder in order to upgrade the firmware for the device.
• Upgrade Firmware for the Display
• Upgrade Firmware for the GPS Receiver
• Upgrade firmware for the Angle Sensor
The file for software support option may be in the root folder. This file is loaded into the Display in
order to enable the license support agreement.
Site Map (Name.svl, Site.dxf or Name.bg.dxf)

This file is stored in the root folder of the data card. If this file is present, this file is always loaded.
The site map provides a framework map of the whole site and contains the linework that is always
visible. When a design is loaded, the design is placed in conjunction with the site. You can also
choose to guide horizontally to the lines that are displayed in this file.
The site map can be in two different formats. The file can be in SV Linework format (.svl) or in a
valid DXF format. The SV Linework format is a proprietary format that is produced by the
AccuGrade Office Software.
Name the file with one of the following names, depending on the format used.
• *.svl
• Site.dxf
• *.bg.dxf
The site map is loaded when you power up the system. There should be only one file for the site map
in the root folder. The software will search and load the first *.svl file that is found. If an *.svl is not
present, the software searches the root folder for a Site.dxf file. The software will load the first file
that is found. If the software does not find a Site.dxf file, then the software will search the root folder
for a background DXF (*.bg.dxf) file. The software will load the first file that is found.
Note: When possible, use the SV Linework (*.svl) format. These files will load in seconds rather than
minutes.
Site Avoidance Zone

Site Avoidance Zone files provide information about general areas on the site that must be avoided.
One or more *.avoid.dxf or *. avoid.svl files may be stored in the root folder of the data card. Site
Avoidance Zone files must be in a valid DXF or SVL format. All *.dxf and *.svl avoidance zone files
that are in the root directory are loaded.
Map Recording (Map recording type no design.cat)
Map Recording files contain data for coverage mapping. Different types of coverage are recorded into
different *.cat files. The files can be identified by the type of coverage that is included in the name of
the file. The following are types of Map recording coverage.
• Coverage
• Ripper
• Cut/Fill
• Terrain
• Radio Coverage
Terrain Logging (Current Terrain NoDesign.st)

The Terrain Logging file contains recorded terrain data. This data can be used in order to build a
current terrain model of the area that is covered by the machine. The data can also be used in order to
build a radio coverage map.
Log (ProgramLog.txt and ProgramLog.old)

The AccuGrade System automatically creates two log files in the root folder. Log files contain
information about the operation of the system.
When the ProgramLog.txt file reaches 512 KB in size, the file is copied to the ProgramLog.old file. If
there is already a ProgramLog.old file in the root folder, then the program will overwrite this file. The
data in the older file is lost.
Note: Always leave 1 MB of free storage on the data card so that the system can create these two log
files.
If a problem occurs with the system, you must E-mail these files to your support person for analysis.
Display Settings file (Display**.DSP)

When the AccuGrade System creates this file, the file is placed in the root folder of the data card.
Refer to Systems Operation, "Display Settings" for more information.
The system uses the Display files for the Display Settings in order to save and restore the following
settings:
• "Auto Pan"
• "Blade Focus"
• "Beeper"
• "Cross Section View"
• "Design Info - but not restored"
• "Layered Lift"
• "Lightbar Brightness"
• "Lightbar Scales"
• "Map Recording"
• "On grade Tolerance"
• "Operator Configuration"
• "Overcut Protection"
• "Perpendicular Lift"
• "Plan View Rotation"
• "Profile View"
• "Reference Surface"
• "Text Views - all"
• "Training Mode"
• "Units"
• "Vertical Lift"
• "Vertical Offset Increment"
• "Working Surface"
• "Alignment Selection"
The default name for Display Setting is Display**.DSP. ** represents the sequential number that
starts 01. The system creates the sequential number in order to distinguish between the different
Display Settings. Files for the Display Settings can be used on all machine types. The file for the
Display Settings may be assigned a unique name by using the arrow keys in order to enter text.
Note: The Display Configuration can be set up for different operators or for different sites such as
roads versus jobs on a site. Keep the appropriate Display Configuration for your machine in the root
folder of the data card.
Machine Settings (name.MCH)

When the AccuGrade System creates this file, the system places the file in the root folder of the data
card. The system uses the AccuGrade GPS machine settings files in order to save and restore the
following settings:
The MCH File contains:
• "Avoidance Zones"
• "Blade Wear"
• "FTP Support"
• "GPS Accuracy"
• "GPS Port"
• "CD550A Radio Port"
• "GPS Receiver Configuration"
• "Machine Dimensions"
• "Valve Calibration"
• "Vertical Guidance"
• "Valve Speed"
The default name for a dozer is "DOZER**.MCH".** represents a sequential number that starts at 01.
The system creates the sequential number in order to distinguish between different machine settings.
Note: Keep the appropriate Display Configuration for your machine in the root folder of the data
card.
GPS Receiver Configuration (*.cfg)

The "GPS Receiver Configuration" file contains the site coordinate system and the GPS calibration
parameters. Store the "GPS Receiver Configuration" file in the design folder so that the file is
automatically loaded with the design. "GPS Receiver Configuration" files that are in the root directory
must be manually loaded.
Display Upgrade (AccuGrade GPS V5.50 ccc.sg1)

When you upgrade or change the language of the firmware on the Display, copy the *.sg1 file to the
root folder of the data card.
The file follows the format AccuGrade GPS V5.50 ccc.SG1 where ccc represents the country code for
the language translation. For example, AccuGrade GPS V5.50 USA.SG1 is for American English.
Note: Do not leave these files on the data card after use. Otherwise, each time you start the
AccuGrade System the system asks if you want to upgrade the Display firmware.
Refer to Systems Operation, "Display Firmware Upgrade" for more information.
GPS Receiver Firmware Upgrade

In order to perform a GPS Receiver firmware upgrade from the Display you need the following files:
• GPS Receiver upgrade software - the executable files (oemapp.exe and PanFlashCE.exe)
• New GPS Receiver firmware file.elf extension
These files are part of the GPS Receiver firmware upgrade kit.
Copy these files to the root folder of the data card only when you must upgrade the GPS Receiver.
AccuGrade System the system asks if you want to upgrade the GPS Receiver.
Note: AccuGrade GPS version 5.50 will not work unless the GPS Receiver firmware is version 1.52
or greater.
Refer to Systems Operation, "Receiver Firmware Upgrade" for more information.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02215279
Design Folder
SMCS - 7220
Design folders are placed under the root folder. The design folder must contain a design surface file.
The design folder can also contain the following:
• A Reference surface file
• A Background Plan file
• Design Avoidance Zone files
• Map Recording files
• A Terrain Logging file
• A GPS Receiver Configuration file
Design Surfaces
The design surface file can be one of several different file types.
• Road (.dc)
• TIN (.svd or .ttm)
• Grid (.dtx)
• Slope (.tsd)
• Level (.tsd)
Note: Use SiteVision Office in order to convert designs to (.svd and .svl) formats. The files will load
and operate more efficiently.
The cut or fill calculation is the vertical difference from the blade tip and the design elevation at that
point for both blade tips. The design grade is based on a defined design surface, which can be either
planar or irregular. The design surface is created in one of the following ways:
• From the keypad of the AccuGrade System. Normally you use this method for planar on-site
designs such as extra building pads or temporary access ramps.
• From an external source such as a computer that has software packages capable of creating
design surfaces that the AccuGrade System or SiteVision Office supports.
SV Design Files
SV design and linework files (*.svd and *.svl) were developed in order to maximize the efficiency of
the AccuGrade System. These files allow very large designs to be loaded without subdividing the
files. This allows the machine to work over a greater area without changing design. Use the
SiteVision Office software in order to convert your digital design to the .svd format and the .svl
format.
Road Files
Road files describe a road surface by horizontal and vertical alignments. A series of templates or
standard cross sections have been applied to the alignments.
Road files use the Data Collector (*.dc) file format (versions 6.5, 7.0 and 7.5) or SDR file format
(version 4). Refer to Systems Operation, "Data Collector File" for a description of these formats.
If your road design is not in one of the above formats, use Table 1 for available options for converting
a design to a format that AccuGrade System software supports.
Table 1
Road files
If the format is a road in ... use the ...
SiteVision Office software
a data format that the SiteVision Office software supports
SiteVision Office or
a paper plan
Terramodel software
an electronic format that the SiteVision Office software does not Trimble Exchange software
support but the Trimble Exchange software supports
TIN Files
Triangular Irregular Network (TIN) files describe a design surface with a mesh of triangles.
A TIN is a better format than a grid for modeling design surfaces. A TIN more accurately represents
sharp edges and uses fewer points in order to model the same design. In order to transfer a TIN into
the AccuGrade System, create the TIN as a .ttm file.
The AccuGrade System can use these formats directly. Alternatively, use the SiteVision Office
software to convert the TIN or ttm files to a svd file format.
Grid Files
A grid file is a rectangular grid of points normally derived from other digital elevation information or
field survey data. An elevation is assigned to each point in the grid.
In order to transfer grid DTM data into the AccuGrade System, create the grid in .dtx file format. The
AccuGrade System can read this format directly.
Alternatively, use the SiteVision Office software to convert the DTM or dtx files to a .svd file format.
Sloping Surfaces Files

Sloping surfaces are defined by a master alignment and a slope on either side. Working with sloping
surfaces is similar to working with a dual slope level laser. The difference is that with a sloping
surface design, two different planes are defined at the same time.
You can enter sloping surface designs in the office. The operator can also enter new sloping designs
and edit existing sloping designs in the field using the Display. Refer to Operation and Maintenance
Manual, "Sloping Surface Design" for more information.
A sloping surface can be defined in two ways.
• Point / Direction method - one set of coordinates, direction, grade, and left/right cross slope
• 2 Point method - two sets of coordinates and left/right cross slope
Use the method that is most convenient. Both operate in the same way for guidance.
In order to create a new sloping surface design in the office, use the SiteVision Office software.
With the sloping surface designs created in the office, you can also define a polygon in order to
indicate the extents of the surface design.
Level Surfaces Files

A level surface design contains a name and an elevation.
You can enter level surface designs in the office. The operator can also enter new level designs, and
edit existing designs in the field using the Display. Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual,
"Level Surface Design" for more information.
In order to create a new level surface design in the office, use the SiteVision Office software. With
level designs that are created in the office you can also define a polygon in order to indicate the
extents of the surface design.
Reference Surface File

Another type of file in the design folder can be the Reference Surface file. A reference surface
modifies one of the previous design types. This file is used in order to give vertical guidance at
predetermined distances that are above or below the design surface.
A number of reference surfaces can be held in the same Reference Surface file.
In order to create a Reference Surface file in the office, use the SiteVision Office software.
Note: An .ofs file will not be used if the .ofs file is in a design folder with a .svd file. This is because
the .svd files include reference surfaces as part of the design.
Background Plan File
The Background Plan file is stored in a folder with a design. The Background Plan file is loaded when
the design is loaded. The Background Plan file shows any detail that is applicable to the design that
the file is associated with. You can select any line in this file for horizontal guidance.
Typical Background Plan files may contain the following items:
• Contour lines
• Building pad outlines
• Lines required for horizontal guidance
• Road alignments
• Other significant points of interest
The file can also show features by color. Hazards such as buried pipes and overhead wires are colored
red in order to alert the operator. Water features can be blue.
The AccuGrade System supports two different Background Plan file formats. The system can be in
SiteVision Linework format (.svl) or DXF format.
The background plan file needs to be named one of the following:
• *.svl
• Background.dxf
• *.bg.dxf
The Background Plan loads when the design is loaded. There should be only one Background Plan
file in the design folder. The software searches for a *.svl file and loads the first *.svl file found. If a
*.svl is not present, the software searches for a Background.dxf file. If the software does not find a
Background.dxf file, the software searches for a *.bg.dxf.
Note: Use the SV Linework (*.svl) format. These svl formats are the most efficient for theAccuGrade
System.
Design Avoidance Zone Files

Design Avoidance Zone files provide information about specific areas on the design that must be
avoided. One or more *.avoid.dxf or *.avoid.svl files are stored in the design folder of the data card.
The files are always loaded when present. Design Avoidance Zone files must be in *.svl or a valid
DXF format.
Map Recording Files

Map recording files are created in the field during machine operation. Unlike most other files in the
design folder the Map Recording files are not prepared in the office.
Map Recording files such as Ripper Coverage, contain position information and attribute information
that can be displayed on the plan view. Map Recording can be configured in order to record and
display different types of information such as position information.
The Map Recording files are stored within the current design directory or in the root directory if no
design is selected. Individual Map Recording files are created for the different map recording types.
The Map Recording file name includes the design name and the map recording type. All of the Map
Recording files have a *.cat extension. The AccuGrade System loads the appropriate Map Recording
file if one exists when the design or map recording type is changed.
The following is the naming convention for the Map Recording files.
• "<Map recording type><Design file name>.cat"
Refer to Systems Operation, "Map Recording" for more information.
Terrain Logging File

Terrain logging files are created in the field during machine operation. Unlike most other files in the
design folder the Terrain logging files are not prepared in the office.
The Terrain Logging file contains the recorded terrain data. This data can be used in order to build
current terrain models of the area that are covered by the machine.
This file also logs the age of the correction data in order to indicate radio coverage in the area. This
file is saved to the appropriate design folder. However, if no design is loaded then the .st file is saved
to the root folder. The file in the design folder is called Current Terrain <Designname>.st. You must
import this file into the SiteVision Office software in order to build the current terrain model and the
radio coverage map.
Note: You can also use METSmanager software in order to build a current terrain model of the area
covered by the machine.
GPS Receiver Configuration File

Note: Always check the coordinates of your blade against a surveyed stake after you load a new .cfg
file.
The .cfg file is stored in either the design folder or the root folder of the data card. When the .cfg file
is in the design folder the AccuGrade System automatically sends the .cfg file to the MS980C GPS
receivers when the design is loaded. A .cfg file in the root folder will be applied to any design that
does not a .cfg file.
The .cfg file contains the local coordinate system parameters and the GPS calibration parameters.
In order to create the .cfg file, use the SiteVision Office software or the Configuration Toolbox
software.
Note: Always put this file in each design folder on the data card.
Design Size Problem and Solution
If you do not use the SiteVision Design formats (.svd and .svl), the size of the design, "DXF Site
Map", "Avoidance Zones", and/or "Background Plan" files may be too large for the AccuGrade
System to load from the data card.
If this occurs, a message states that the combined size of the files is too large for the system. With
SiteVision Office, convert the design files to .svd format and the DXF linework files to .svl format
where possible. Alternatively, review and reduce the size of the design and/or DXF files.
Use the SiteVision Office version 5.50 software with Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP in
order to guarantee that the design, "Site Map", "Avoidance Zones", and "Background Plan" files will
load into the AccuGrade System.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02506849
Radio Utility
SMCS - 7220
GPS
The RadioLink utility allows you to change the network number or the frequency channel on a
TC900C or a TC450C radios. The RadioLink utility runs on the AccuGrade Display. You can only
configure radios that have firmware version 1.4.
Starting RadioLink and Connecting to the Radio

1. For machines running Version 5.5 firmware, proceed to Step 5.
2. For AccuGrade systems running 6.1 firmware, select the "Installation" soft key from the
"Setup" menu.
Note: By default, the "Installation" soft key is not available to the operator. This option can be
turned on by your site manager or Caterpillar.
3. Press the up arrow or the down arrow until "Launch RadioLink" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. The utility automatically attempts to connect to the radio.
A dialog similar to the dialog in Illustration 2 appears.
Proceed to Step 12.
5. Power down the system.
6. Press the 3rd and 4th softkeys while powering up the display. Hold the keys down until the
splash screen appears.
7. Press the "NEXT" key twice.
8. Select the "Windows" folder by using the arrow keys.
9. Press "OK".
10. Press the "NEXT" key twice.
11. Select the "RadioLink.exe" file by using the arrow keys and press "OK".
12. For TC900C Radios, use the arrow keys to select the same network (1-40) as the base station.
13. For TC450C Radios, use the arrow keys to select the same freguency as the base station.
TC900C Data Radios

RadioLink only works with radios that have firmware versions 1.40 or later.
1. If RadioLink detects a TC900C radio, the dialog in Illustration 3 appears.
The network number that is shown defaults to "Unknown".
2. Use the down arrow key and the up arrow key in order to select the required network channel
(Network 1–40).
3. Press the "OK" key in order to save the radio network changes and power down the Display, or
press the "ESC" key in order to cancel the changes.
Note: The radio must have the same network number as the base station radio that you want to
receive GPS corrections.
Failed Connection
Do the following if the connection fails.
1. Check that the radio is connected to the system the machine harness.
2. Press the soft key "Connect to radio" in order to reconnect to the radio when the dialog in
TC450C Data Radio
1. If RadioLink detects a TC450C radio, the screen shown in Illustration 5 appears.
Note: The TC450C has a selection of up to twenty preset frequency channels.
Note: The current radio frequency channel is displayed on start up.

2. Use the down arrow key and the up arrow key in order to select the channel that is desired.
3. Press the "OK" key in order to save the radio frequency channel and power down the Display,
or press the "ESC" key in order to cancel the changes.
Note: The radio must have the same frequency channel as the base station radio that you want to
receive GPS corrections. In most areas, licensing is required for 450 Mhz frequencies. Be sure the
frequency that is selected is licensed with the customer.
Configuring The Radio Port Of The Display For A Third Party Radio
The AccuGrade System can be configured for use with a third party radio. For additional information
refer to Systems Operation, "Customer Supplied Radio".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02221414
Receiver Firmware Upgrade

SMCS - 7220
The CAN device firmware files allow you to upgrade the GPS Receivers and the Angle Sensor to the
current firmware versions. In order to complete the upgrade, use the Display. The controls device
firmware files are available on the AccuGrade System software CD in the CAN Device Firmware
folder. The controls device firmware files are also available on SISWeb.
In order to upgrade the firmware of each device, complete the following steps:
1. Use a computer to copy the upgrade files to the root folder of a data card. There are two types
of firmware upgrade files:
MS980 loader files - MSMONnnn.s (where nnn is the version number). This loader upgrade
file is available on SISWEB.
Application upgrade files - AAAAA nnn.S, where AAAAA is the unit type, and nnn is the
version number. This upgrade file is available on the AccuGrade System software CD in the
CAN Device Firmware folder that is named "MS980100.S".
2. Place the data card, with the firmware on the root directory, into the Display.
Note: For the latest version of firmware, use SISWeb.
3. Start the Display in Service mode.
4. From the "Setup Menu" dialog, press the "Installation" softkey in order to list the items under
the Setup Menu - Installation dialog.
5. Press the up arrow or the down arrow until "Upgrade Firmware" is highlighted.
6. Press the "OK" key. If at least one device was detected on the CAN bus a dialog similar to
Illustration 1 will appear.
This dialog lists all the correctly named .s files in the root folder of the data card, that are
applicable for the machine type selected. The version of each file is also shown.
7. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to highlight either the "MS980" file or the
"MS980 Loader" file.
8. Press the "OK" key.
A dialog similar to Illustration 2 will appear.
The dialog displays the current application and loader version of the two GPS Receivers. It also
prompts you to select which receiver to upgrade.
9. Disconnect all components in the AccuGrade System including the opposite GPS Receiver,
Slope Sensor, and Radio.
10. Press the down arrow or the up arrow in order to select "MS980 - Left" or "MS980 - Right".
Note: You must upgrade both the left GPS Receiver and right GPS Receiver to the same
application and loader firmware versions.
The firmware upgrade begins. A progress bar appears.
Note: Do not remove the card or turn off the display during the firmware upgrade.
When the upgrade is completed, a text message appears informing you of the success or failure
of the upgrade.
If the upgrade is successful, the device version is updated to reflect the change.
If the upgrade is unsuccessful, you can retry the upgrade.
12. Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 for the other GPS receiver.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02215720
Display Firmware Upgrade

SMCS - 7220
The Display firmware files are on the AccuGrade System software CD. These files are used in order
to upgrade the Display.
Upgrade the Display firmware only if you want a more recent version or want to change the Display
language.
NOTICE
The upgrade procedure returns the AccuGrade System settings to

factory defaults. Ensure that you save your settings before you start to
upgrade the firmware.
After you upgrade the Display firmware to AccuGrade Office V 5.51 or newer, you may need to
enable the option keys (password) in order to get the software to work.
Display Firmware - Language Configuration

The Display firmware is translated into the languages that are listed below. The translations that are
available on this CD can be found in the AccuGrade GPS Firmware folder.
• US English (USA)
• UK English (GBR)
• Dutch (NLD)
• Finnish (FIN)
• French (FRA)
• German (DEU)
• Spanish (ESP)
• Swedish (SWE)
• Portuguese (PRT)
• Italian (ITA)
The AccuGrade System is installed with the US English firmware already installed. Use the firmware
upgrade procedure in order to change the language, or to upgrade to a more recent version of the
firmware.
You can use the upgrade procedure as many times as needed. You can reinstall the US English
version after you have changed to any other language version.
Note: Ensure that you save your machine dimensions and settings.
Location of the Upgrade Files

Table 1 shows an example of the Display firmware files that are available on the on the AccuGrade
CD that is supplied in the Electronics Kit.
Table 1
Location of firmware files
Language Location
UK English AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) GBR.SG1
US English AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) USA.SG1
Dutch AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) NLD.SG1
Finnish AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) FIN.SG1
French AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) FRA.SG1
German AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) DEU.SG1
Spanish AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) ESP.SG1
Swedish AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) SWE.SG1
Portuguese AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) PRT.SG1
Italian AccuGrade Vx.xx (1) ITA.SG1
(1)
x.xx refers to the version release of the firmware.
Table 2
Firmware Versions
Version 5.5 TTT only
Version 6.0 MG, HEX only
Version 6.1 TTT, MG and HEX
You may have to apply the option keys file in order to make the software work. In order to find out,
check the "Software Support Option" item in the Display "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog for the
expiry date of your option keys.
If the expiry date is on or after 1May 2004, you do not have to renew your option keys file. However,
if the expiry date is before 1May 2004, you will need to obtain a new file from your dealer Technical
Communicator.
Required Equipment
You need the following equipment in order to upgrade your Display firmware and enable the option
keys.
• The Display and your power supply
• The AccuGrade System software CD or the Display firmware upgrade file
• If applicable, an option keys file that is provided by your technical communicator
• A Data Card
• A PC card adapter
• A PC that can communicate with the Data Card.
Upgrade Procedure
When you upgrade the Display firmware, the process clears all of your machine dimensions.
Before Starting the Upgrade

Before you start, ensure that you save your machine settings to a file and make a permanent paper
record of the system settings for the machine.
Perform the following steps in order to save the Display settings and the machine settings:
1. Press and Hold down the "OK" key while powering on the Display in order to enter Service
mode.
2. Press the "OK" while holding down the "Power" key.
3. In the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, select the "Save Settings" option.
4. Select "Machine Settings".
Change the name of the file in order to make the name unique for that machine.
Note: The serial number for the machine may be used.
Upgrading the Display Firmware and Option Keys

Do the following in order to upgrade the Display firmware and enable the option keys.
• Copy the .SG1 files to the Data Card

• Update the Display firmware
• Update the option keys, if required
• Restore the Display settings
• Restore the machine settings
• Update the GPS Receiver configuration
Copying the Files to the Data Card
1. Use an office PC in order to copy the appropriate AccuGrade VN.NN AAA.SG1 files from the
Software CD to the root folder of a Data Card. N.NN is the version number and AAA is the
language code. For example, AccuGrade Vx.xx USA.SG1 is version 5.51 in US English.
Note: x.xx refers to the version release of the firmware.
Note: You can copy as many different .SG1 files to the Data Card as necessary. For example,
the Spanish and Portuguese versions can all be copied onto the Data Card at the same time.
However, only one file can be loaded onto the Display.
2. If required, copy the Option key<serial number>.txt file to the root directory of the Data Card.
3. Turn off the Display.
4. Insert the Data Card into the Display.
5. Press the "POWER" key in order to turn on the Display.
Note: Do not turn off the Display until Step 8.
The Display detects all .SG1 files and lists them on the "Select Display Software File for
Upgrade" screen.
6. Use the up arrow key and the down arrow key in order to select the file you want to upgrade to.
Press the "OK" key in order to continue.
7. The "Update Display Software - New Version Detected" confirmation screen appears. Press the
"OK" key in order to start the upgrade process. Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel the
upgrade.
Stage 1 of the firmware upgrade starts automatically. The upgrade firmware is copied into
temporary memory.
Stage 2 then starts automatically. The upgrade firmware is verified in internal memory, and the
temporary memory is erased.
8. When prompted, turn off the external power to the Display.
9. Wait at least 30 seconds before you reconnect power to the Display.
Upgrading the Option Keys (If Required)
1. Turn on the Display. You are again asked to select an image file for upgrade. Press the "ESC"
key.
2. The system detects the option keys file on the Data Card and the option keys file is
automatically applied. A message appears indicating the success or the failure of the process.
3. Press the "OK" key in order to exit from the dialog.
If the option keys file is enabled successfully, a message appears informing you that the Display
settings have been restored to the factory defaults.
If the option keys file is not enabled successfully, or the file was not detected, the "Software
Support Option" dialog appears. Follow the instructions in the dialog. The option keys can be
manually entered using the arrow keys.
4. Press the "OK" key. The plan view appears.
Restore the Display Configuration
1. Restore the Display settings.
2. With the Display in Service mode, select "Restore Settings" from the "Setup menu -
Configuration" dialog.
3. Restore the machine settings.
4. Check all AccuGrade System settings.
The Display automatically uses the new firmware.
Update the GPS Receiver Configuration
Update the GPS receiver configuration. Refer to Systems Operation, "Receiver Configuration" for
more information.
After Upgrading
On a PC, remove the .SG1 files and the option keys file from the Data Card.
Ensure that you always keep the most updated files from SISWeb. You may need the files in order to
install the firmware again at a later date.
Note: You do not have to recalibrate the Angle Sensor or the control valves after you have upgraded
the Display firmware.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02499712
Sensor Firmware Upgrade

SMCS - 7220
The CAN device firmware files allow you to upgrade the Angle Sensor to the current firmware
versions. The controls device firmware files are available on the AccuGrade System software CD in
the CAN Device Firmware folder.
These files are also available on SISWeb. Use the Display in order to upgrade the firmware of each
device, completing the following steps:
1. Use a computer to copy the upgrade files to the root folder of a data card.
2. Place the data card, with the firmware on the root directory, into the Display.
Note: For the latest revision of firmware, use SISWeb.
3. Press the "OK" key while pressing the "Power" key in order to start up the Display in the
Service mode.
4. From the Setup Menu dialog, press the "Installation" softkey in order to list the items under the
Setup Menu - Installation dialog.
7. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to highlight the "AS400" firmware.
A dialog box displays the current application file of the Angle Sensor.
9. Disconnect all components in the AccuGrade System including the two GPS Receivers.
Note: Do not remove the card or turn off the Display during the firmware upgrade.
of the upgrade.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02215783
Setup Menu
SMCS - 7220
Use the "Setup Menu" dialogs in order to access the AccuGrade System setup items. The "Setup
Menu" dialogs are available in Normal, Service, and Training mode. However, different dialogs and
items become available for the mode you select. Service Mode provides access to all of the
Configuration and Installation options. In Normal Mode, the dialogs and options are predefined and
may only be changed by reverting to Service Mode. In Training Mode, menus and options relating to
control devices are not displayed. Refer to Table 1 for more details.
Note: Changes to the items in the "Setup Menu" dialogs take effect as soon as you exit the Setup
menu.
Note: All of the AccuGrade System setup parameters are reset to defaults whenever you load a new
version of the firmware for the Display.
Perform the following steps in order to access the "Setup Menu" dialogs.
1. Press the "MENU" key until the "Setup Menu" Soft Key is displayed.
2. Press "Setup Menu" Soft Key.
The following menus are available in the Service Mode: Setup Menu - Configuration and Setup Menu
- Installation.
Setup Menu - Configuration

Items in the Setup Menu – Configuration dialog include troubleshooting items as well as system
variables and settings. By default, some of these items are visible in Service Mode only, while others
are visible in all modes. The options are as shown in Table 1.
Table 1
This Setup Menu - Is Available In These
For more information, refer to ...
Configuration Item ... Modes (by default) ...
Blade Wear All modes Systems Operation, "Blade Wear"
Systems Operation, "Vertical Guidance
Vertical Guidance (1) All modes
Method"
Vertical Offset Switch Systems Operation, "Vertical Offset
Service mode
Increment Increment"
Systems Operation, "GPS Accuracy
GPS Accuracy Mode (1) All modes
Mode"
Systems Operation, "Light Bar Scales"
Lightbar Scales All modes
Display and Lightbar Systems Operation, "Display and Light

Service mode
Brightness Setting Bar Brightness (Display and Lightbar)"
Map Recording Service mode Systems Operation, "Map Recording"
Normal and Service Testing and Adjusting, "Blade Reaction
Valve Speed
mode Time - Adjust"
Testing and Adjusting, "Angle Sensor -
Calibrate Sensors (2) Service Mode
Calibrate"
Avoidance Zone Service mode Systems Operation, "Avoidance Zone"
Text Items Service mode Systems Operation, "Text Items"
Systems Operation, "Plan View Rotation"
Plan View Rotation Service mode
Beeper Service mode Systems Operation, "Beeper"

Save Settings Service mode Systems Operation, "Display Settings"
Restore Settings All Modes Systems Operation, "Display Settings"
GPS Receiver Systems Operation, "Receiver
All Modes
Configuration Configuration"
Normal and Service Troubleshooting, " Diagnostic
Diagnostics
mode Capabilities"
(1)
Version 5.5 only
(2)
Version 6.1 only
Setup Menu - Installation

Items listed under the Setup Menu - Installation dialog include items used when you install or reinstall
an AccuGrade System, or to update the device firmware. In order to access the Setup Menu -
Installation dialog, press the Soft Key (Installation). By default the Setup Menu - Installation dialog is
only available in Service mode. However the operator configuration can be customized so that some
or all of the Setup Menu - Installation dialog is available in Normal mode.
Depending on the current machine configuration, different options are available from the Setup Menu
- Installation dialog. The options are shown in table 2.
Table 2
This Setup Menu in these modes (by
For more information, refer to ...
item ... default) ...
Machine Settings Service Mode Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Type"
Service Mode
Units Systems Operation, "Display Units"
Machine
Service Mode Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Dimensions - Set"
Dimensions
Lightbar
Service Mode Testing and Adjusting, "Light Bar - Set"
Connections
Slope Calibration (1)
Service Mode Testing and Adjusting, "Angle Sensor - Calibrate"
Valve Calibration Testing and Adjusting, "Bank Valve (Grade Control) -

Service Mode
Calibrate"
FTP Support Service Mode This option is for future use.
Systems Operation, "Receiver Firmware Upgrade,
Upgrade Firmware
Service Mode Display Firmware Upgrade, Angle Sensor Firmware
Upgrade"
Software Support
Service Mode Systems Operation, "Software Support Option"
Option
Guidance Hours Service Mode
Operator
Service Mode Systems Operation, "Operator Access"
Configuration
Launch
Service Mode Systems Operation, "Radio Utility"
RadioLink (2)
(1)
Version 5.5 only
(2)
Version 6.1 only
Working with the Setup Menu

You can do the following within any of the Setup Menu items.
1. Press the "OK" key in order to save any setup changes.
2. Press the "ESC" key in order to close the dialog without changing any setup options. The
Display shows a warning.
3. Do one of the following:
Press the "OK" key in order to confirm that you want to abandon your changes.
Press the "ESC" key in order to return to the dialog.
You can do the following within the Setup Menu.

• In Service Mode, press the "Config." Soft Key in order to list the items under the Setup Menu -
Configuration dialog.
• In Service Mode, press the "Installation" Soft Key in order to list the items under Setup Menu -
Installation dialog.
• When all of your changes are made to the items in either Setup Menu dialog, press the "ESC"
key in order to exit from the "Setup Menu". The changes will automatically take effect.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216305
Avoidance Zone
SMCS - 7220
You can set the warning zone distance for avoidance zones using the "Avoidance Zone" dialog. This
allows you to configure the distance from an avoidance zone when you need to be warned. This varies
for different machine types and applications.
DXF files or SVL files can be used for avoidance zones guidance. DXF files must be given a name
using the following convention: *.avoid.dxf. SVL files that are generated by the AccuGrade Office
Software must use the following convention: *.avoid.svl. The avoidance zone files must contain one
or more polygons in order to define the area to avoid.
Note: SiteVision Office Software can also be used instead of AccuGrade Office Software.
The *.avoid.dxf or *.avoid.svl files must reside in the root folder of the data card. The files load and
display in the plan view when the Display is turned on. Warnings are given to the site avoidance
zones until the Display is turned off.
When the DXF file or an SVL file is created for an avoidance zone, the file does not need to have the
polygon boundary color or the fill color set defined. This is automatically done by the AccuGrade
System. When the boundary color is defined in the DXF file, the AccuGrade System displays this
color.
A measurement for the "Ripper back from the cutting edge" can be set in the "Machine Dimensions"
dialog. The "Ripper back from cutting edge" measurement is used in avoidance zone proximity
detection. Avoidance zone proximity detection uses the two blade tip points and the "Ripper back
from cutting edge" measurement. The proximity of any one of the four points to an avoidance zone
triggers a warning alarm. The "Avoid. Dist" text item displays the shortest distance between any point
and the closest avoidance zone.
Warnings start when it has been detected that the machine is within three times of the warning
distance that has been set. The following actions occur in a warning at this level:
• The avoidance zones within the detection zone turn magenta in color.
• The "Avoid. Dist." text item gives the distance and direction to the closest avoidance zone.
When the machine is detected to be within the set warning distance, the following extra warning
measures are implemented.
• A sequence of three beeps sound.
• In the plan view, a warning symbol is displayed on the machine icon.
• The avoid indicator appears in the bottom right corner of the main views.
Finally, when a machine enters an avoidance zone the following warning measures occur:
• A flashing message "Avoid. Zone Entered" appears. The message has a yellow background.
• Constant beeping sounds until you exit the avoidance zone.
• The "Avoid. Dist." text item shows a negative value.
If the avoidance zone guidance is not available, the "No Avoid" indicator appears in the bottom right
hand corner of the main views.
Note: Use AccuGrade Office Software in order to review and test that the avoidance zones are
correctly defined before exporting the data to a data card.
Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the AccuGrade System for more details on
avoidance zones.
Setting the Warning Distance

You need to be in Service Mode in order to access the avoidance zone setting in the "Setup Menu"
dialog.
Perform the following steps in order to access the "Avoidance Zone" dialog.
1. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the down arrow key or the up arrow key
until "Avoidance Zone" is highlighted.
2. Press the "OK" key. A dialog that is similar to Illustration 1 appears.

◦ Press the arrow keys in order to set the warning distance.
◦ Press the "Default <value>" soft key in order to set the default warning distance for the
selected machine type.
4. Press the "OK" key in order to confirm the setting.
5. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog. The changes
take effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216419
Beeper
SMCS - 7220
Setting The Beeper

The AccuGrade System includes a beeper. The beeper can be configured to provide an audible signal
when any of the events that are listed in Table 1 occur.
Table 1
Event Sounds when...
the blade is more than one times the vertical tolerance and less than four times
Above Grade
the vertical tolerance above grade.
On Grade the blade is within the vertical tolerance of grade.
Below Grade
the vertical tolerance below grade.
Warning a warning message appears and when a warning message automatically
Messages disappears.
GPS Accuracy
the GPS accuracy mode changes.
Auto/Manual
the guidance mode changes to Auto, Manual or Inactive Auto.
States
Key/Switch
a key or a switch is pressed.
Beeps
the machine is within the warning distance of an avoidance zone or if the No
Avoidance Avoid message is displayed. The beeper also sounds in a continuous pattern
Zone when the machine is within the avoidance zone. Avoidance zone beeper tones
cannot be disabled.
Perform the following steps in order to access the "Beeper" dialog.

1. The AccuGrade System must be in Service Mode in order to access the beeper setup. From the
"Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the down arrow key or the up arrow key until
"Beeper" is highlighted.
2. Press the "OK" key. The "Beeper" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration 1.
Events that are disabled are identified by an X in the box. Events that are enabled are identified
by a check mark. Events that cannot be disabled are identified by a grayed-out check mark.
Subevents that cannot be disabled independent of their master event are also identified by a
grayed-out check mark.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select different events.
4. Press the first soft key on the right hand side of the Display in order to enable or disable an
event.
The different events emit different beeper patterns. To hear the pattern for a particular event,
press the "TEST" soft key when the event is selected.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to confirm the setting. The beeper setup is saved. The
"Beeper" dialog is closed and the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog appears. The
changes take effect immediately.
◦ Press the "ESC" key and then press the "OK" key in order to return to the "Setup Menu -
Configuration" dialog without saving the changes.
6. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02442942
Blade Wear
SMCS - 7220
Entering the Blade Wear

The cutting edge of the blade wears away during the operation of the machine. Enter the information
for the blade wear so that the AccuGrade System can adjust for the wear of the cutting edge.
The height of the blade is measured from the center of the retaining bolts to the cutting edge. If the
blade wear is not even, use an average value. However, guidance will never be better than the range
of the differences.
In order to set the "Blade Wear Height", complete the following steps:
1. Measure the height of the cutting edge to the center of the bolt holes. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, select the "Blade Wear" option. Refer to
Illustration 2.
Note: Be aware of the units. If the Display is set up in metric units, the blade measurement
must be entered in metric units. If the Display is set up in feet, the blade measurement must be
entered in tenths of feet.
3. Use the arrow keys in order to enter a value into the "Cutting Edge Height" field.
4. Perform one of the following actions:
a. Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the "Setup Menu -
b. Press the "Esc" key in order to cancel any changes and return to the "Setup Menu -
Configuration" dialog. If you do not want to save any of the changes, acknowledge the
confirmation message.
5. Press the "Esc" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. The changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02442977
Brightness (Display and Light Bar)

SMCS - 7220
The "Display and Light Bar Brightness" dialog sets the brightness of the LCD and the Light Bars.
1. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the up arrow or the down arrow until
"Adjust Brightness" is highlighted.
The "Display and Light Bar Brightness" dialog appears. Refer to Illustration 1.
The default "Display brightness" dialog is shown.
3. In order to adjust the brightness of the LCD, press the "Display" soft key. The field changes to
"Display brightness". In order to adjust the brightness of the Light Bar, press the "Light Bar"
soft key.
The default "Display Brightness" dialog is shown.
Do one of the following:

4. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to increase or decrease the brightness.
5. Press the "Set Maximum" in order to select the maximum brightness.
6. Press the "OK" key in order to save the settings and return to the "Setup Menu - Configuration"
dialog. Press the "ESC" key and then press the "OK" key in order to cancel the changes.
7. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu-Configuration" dialog. All changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02518247
Customer Supplied Radio

SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System for GPS includes a radio that must be compatible with the local GPS base
station radio. Caterpillar currently offers the TC900C and TC450C for the AccuGrade System. These
radios require Trimble infrastructure radios for compatibility. For sites that are using non-Trimble
infrastructure, Customer Supplied Radios may be connected to the AccuGrade System. However, the
Customer Supplied Radio will need to be configured for use with the AccuGrade System. This
document outlines the wiring issues that must be addressed in order to provide communication with
the AccuGrade System. Caterpillar makes no claim to compatibility with all radios. Additionally,
Caterpillar assumes no responsibility for the performance of the system integrating Customer
Supplied Radios.
• 18-gauge wire is recommended for all lines. Avoid narrower gauge wire.
• Machine pinouts may vary, consult the Electrical Schematic for each machine to determine
correct pinouts.
• These instructions do not address any unique power requirements that may apply to individual
Customer Supplied Radios.
Power to a Customer Supplied Radio is provided through the AccuGrade harness at a nominal 24
VDC (15 amp max). Power may vary from 22 VDC to 28 VDC during radio operation. If regulated
power is required by the Customer Supplied Radio, it is the responsibility of the customer to provide a
power converter to the radio. Additionally, it is the responsibility of the customer to wire the power
converter to the radio.
1. Locate the schematic for the connector for your Customer Supplied Radio.
Refer to the owner's manual or the documentation from the manufacturer.
a. Verify that 24 VDC nominal power is acceptable.
Note: If there are any limitations on input power, find a suitable converter, this should be
wired between the AccuGrade connection and the connection for the Customer Supplied
Radio.
b. Find the required power and communications pins on the radio.

These pins may vary for each Customer Supplied Radio. The pins that are listed below
are the minimum that are required:
■ + PWR
■ GRND
■ TX
■ RX
2. Locate electrical schematic for the AccuGrade System and the specific Caterpillar machine.
Schematics are available at SISWeb.
a. Find the 8-pin connector for the GPS radio.
b. Trace back from the 8-pin connector to the 12-pin Deutsch connector.
Note the pin number for the following connections:
■ + PWR
■ GRND
■ COM 2 TX
■ COM 2 RX
3. Wire the new cable.
Use the pinouts that are noted in Steps 1 and 2.
Customer Supplied Radio Example
Field Conditions
• Existing AccuGrade compatible GPS base station
• Customer Supplied Radio at the GPS base station
Required
• Create a cable that connects a compatible Customer Supplied Radio to the AccuGrade System.
1. Can the Customer Supplied Radio communicate CMR data over RS-232.
Yes - The Customer Supplied Radio is compatible with the AccuGrade System.
No - The Customer Supplied Radio is not compatible with AccuGrade System.
2. Will the machine radio operate within 9 VDC to 32 VDC.
Note: Verify all necessary connections can operate at machine voltages.
Answer - By looking in the radio documentation found that radio can run on 9 VDC to 32
VDC, but in order for radio to function the DTR line needs to be tied high and it has a
limitation of 25 VDC.
Solution - Use a 240-2735 DC - DC power Converter to step the voltage down to 12 VDC.
3. Using the radio manufactures information, make all necessary connections.
◦ Power
◦ Ground
◦ TXD
◦ RXD
◦ DTR
Note: DTR is required by this example radio in order to make radio active.
4. Using the referenced pinouts for the machine harness, wire the following for the machine
harness connector.
◦ Power
◦ Ground
◦ COM2 TXD
Note: For G-series TTT, COM2 TXD should be COM1 TXD
◦ COM2 RXD
Note: For G-series TTT, COM2 RXD should be COM1 RXD.

5. Configure the machine radio and AccuGrade System to communicate over RS232.
ReferenceReference Systems Operation, RENR8083, "Radio Utility"
a. Change the settings in the Customer Supplied Radio and the Display to match.
Default Settings For The Display
Baud rate ... 38400

Data Bits ... 8 (Fixed setting on Display)
Parity ... None
Stop Bits ... 1 (Fixed setting on Display)
6. Verify that the over-the-air data/communications rate are set the same in both the base and
machine radio.
The optimal rate may vary depending on the radio. Typically the rate is between 4800 bps and
38400 bps. The same rate must be set in both the base radio and the machine radio. If the same
rate is set, you may proceed. If the rates are not the same, use the radio configuration software
to set both radios to the same over-the-air data/communications rate.
7. Connect the new adapter harness to the main harness and to the machine radio.
8. Apply power to the system and verify the communication to base.
Use the Display in order to check the Left data link. Should be increasing for the integrity. If
not see the Troubleshooting section.
Third Party Radio Information Checklist
Table 1
Obtain the manual from the radio manufacturer.
Verify that the radio communicates Compact Measurement Records (CMR)s over RS232.
Verify that the settings can be changed to match the Display.
Review the power requirements for the radio. Review any special requirements. machine power
may run to 28VDC
Radio channel
Validate the radio settings in order to communicate with base radio.
Over-the-air data rate
Find pin out information for manufauturer's radio.
Find drawing or pin out for correct machine. Refer to "Radio Pin-Out Tables and Schematics"
for additional information.
Create a simple schematic from the information that was collected in order to show which pin
on the radio maps to the pin on machine connector.
Create the harness based from simple schematic.
Install harness on machine. Verify the power to the radio when system is turned on.
Verify that AccuGrade System is receiving CMR's from Base Station.
Troubleshooting
No Power To Radio
• Verify connections to power and ground pins
• Verify input power required for radio
• If converter has been added, ensure +PWR and Ground from AccuGrade connector are
connected to converter, and that +PWR and Ground from converter are connected to radio
No Communication Through Radio
• Verify that the radio is a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device.
• If the radio is a Data Communications Equipment (DCE) device, modify the TX and the RX
connections as shown in Illustration 2.
Note: It is critical to follow the documentation from radio manufacturer in order to ensure the proper
handshake and/or other communications startup procedure is properly executed. Additionally,
Customer Supplied Radios may require additional pins to be grounded or to be tied to voltage, and
these will also be identified in the manufacturer's documentation.
Radio Pin-Out Tables and Schematics

D5N
Table 2
8-PIN Connector
12-PIN Deutsch Connector
Pin Description Wire Number Pin

A + Battery A101 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 11
D COM 2 RXD N958 10
D6N
Table 3
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery A101 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 11
D COM 2 RXD N958 10
D6R
Table 4
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 184 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N960 10
D COM 2 RXD N957 7
D8T
Table 5
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 122 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 3
D COM 2 RXD N958 4
D9T
Table 6
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 122 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 3
D COM 2 RXD N958 4
D3G, D4G, D5G

Table 7
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery L872 1
B Ground T744 2
C COM 1 TX N957 3
D COM 1 RX N960 4
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216465
Display Settings
SMCS - 7220
Save Settings
Use the "Save Settings" dialog to save the Display settings, machine settings, or both to a data card.
From this dialog, you can save all the settings in the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog.
You can customize and save the text items that are shown on the guidance screens by saving the
Display settings.
In order to access the "Save Settings" dialog complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that a data card is inserted in the Display.
2. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the Down arrow or the Up arrow until
"Save Settings" is highlighted. Press the "OK" key in order to continue.
3. The "Save Settings" dialog appears. Press the Down arrow or the Up arrow in order to select
either "Display Settings" or "Machine Settings".
4. Press the "OK" key. The dialog shown in Illustration 2 appears.
The default file name for the Display settings is "DISPLAY NN". The default file name for
machine settings is "DOZER(TTT) NN".
"NN" is a two digit number starting at 01 and incrementing with each new settings file that is
saved.
The number assigned to a new Display settings file is one more than any similarly named
settings file already on the data card. For example, if there is already a dozer machine settings
file (called DOZER(TTT) 01) on the card, the AccuGrade System assigns the name DOZER
(TTT) 02.
You can also save the settings to a file name that is more descriptive. For example, you can use
a name such as "D9 DOZER". Use the arrow keys to edit the default name.
Note: You cannot use the Display to overwrite or delete an existing settings file.
5. In order to save the settings to the data card, press the "OK" key. After saving, the "Save
Settings" dialog appears. Press the "Esc" key in order to go back to the Setup Menu dialog.
In order to close the dialog without saving the configuration to the data card, press the "Esc"
key. The "Save Settings" dialog appears.
Note: If you change the default name, and then press the "Esc" key, you are prompted to
confirm that you want to abandon your changes.
Restore Settings
The "Restore Settings" dialog allows you to restore the previously saved Display settings and/or
machine settings. From this dialog you can restore all the settings in the "Setup Menu" dialogs except
the GPS Receiver configuration settings sent from the .cfg file.
Perform the following steps in order to access the "Restore Settings" dialog.
1. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the down arrow key or the up arrow key
until "Restore Settings" is highlighted.
Make sure that a data card is inserted in the Display.
2. Press the "OK" key. A dialog similar to Illustration 3 appears.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select either "Display Settings",
"Machine Settings", or "Old Version".
A dialog similar to Illustration 4 appears.
5. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the settings file you require.
If you attempt to restore an invalid settings file, or a machine settings file for a different
machine type, a warning message appears. This text appears on the "Setup Menu -
A dialog warns you to check the "Blade Wear" setting.

Depending of what file was selected in the "Settings" type selection dialog, one of the following
messages shown in Table 1 will appear.
Table 1
File Type Message
Display settings "Restoring Settings. Please wait..."
Machine settings "Restoring Machine Settings. Please wait..."
Old version "Restoring Display and Machine Settings. Please wait..."
The relevant updates are automatically sent to the GPS Receiver (if required). A dialog appears
telling you that the GPS Receiver is being configured.
Note: If you restore a settings file that turns on FTP support, a dialog warns you that the
Display must be restarted in order for the changes to take effect. Press the "OK" key in order to
turn off the Display.
If restoring a settings file changes the automatic controls status, the relevant updates are
automatically sent to the GPS Receiver. A dialog appears telling you that the GPS Receiver is
being configured.
If the changes are successful, you return to the "Settings" type selection dialog.
If the changes are not successful, a dialog appears. The dialog indicates that the operation failed
to update the GPS Receiver configuration. To solve this problem:
◦ Make sure that the GPS Receiver is being recognized by the system. In order to do this,
check the "Diagnostics" dialog.
◦ Send a GPS configuration file by reselecting the current design (if it contains a coordinate
system).
◦ Send a GPS configuration file using the "Update GPS Receiver Configuration" item on
the "Setup Menu - Configuration" (in Service Mode).
8. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. The changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216099
Display Units
SMCS - 7220
The "Units" menu has five dialogs which allow you to select the units to show distance, speed, grade,
cross slope, and station. In each dialog the current setting is highlighted.
Perform the following steps in order to set the units.
1. Start the Display in Service Mode.
2. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the "Installation" soft key in order to list
the items under the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog.
3. Use down arrow key or the up arrow key until "Units" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. By default, the "Distance Units" dialog is selected. The dialog in
5. Do the following as necessary from any of the "Units" dialogs.
◦ Press the "Distance" soft key in order to select the distance units.
◦ Press the "Speed" soft key in order to select the speed units.
◦ Press the "Grade" soft key in order to select the grade units.
◦ Press the "Cross Slope" soft key in order to select the cross slope units.
◦ Press the "Station Format" soft key in order to select the station (chainage) format for a
road design.
◦ Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel and return to the "Setup Menu - Installation"
dialog.
6. When any or all of the units have been set, press the "OK" key in order to save the settings and
return to the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog. You can begin to enter details such as the
machine dimensions, in those units immediately.
7. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog.
The Units are saved in the Display Settings file.
Distance
Distance values appear on the screen in the following formats.
• Meters - as "m" (default for all Display firmware files except for US English)
• International feet - as "ft"
• US survey feet - as "FT" (default for US English Display firmware)
Perform the following steps in order to change the distance units.
1. If any other unit setup dialog is shown, press the "Distance" soft key.
2. Use the down arrow key and the up arrow key in order to choose the required distance units.
NOTICE
The DXF file format does not contain any information on the units
used (feet or meters). As all DXF drawing files are unitless, use the
SiteVision Office software in order to ensure that the correct units are
set.
Note: If you change your units, any currently displayed Site Map and Background Plan files are
reloaded. Then the Site Map and Background Plan files are displayed in the new units.
Speed
Speed can be shown in the following formats.
• Kilometers per hour - as "km/h" (default for all Display firmware files except for US English)
• Miles per hour - "mph"
Perform the following steps in order to change the speed units.
1. Press the "Speed" soft key .
2. Use the down arrow key and the up arrow key in order to choose the required units.
Grade
Grade values can be shown in the following formats:
• Percentage - as "%"
• Ratio - as "rise: run" (default)
Perform the following steps in order to change the grade units.
1. Press the "Grade" soft key .
2. Use the down arrow key and the up arrow key in order to choose the required format.
Cross Slope
Cross slope values can be shown in the following formats:
• Percentage - as "%" (default)
• Ratio - as "rise: run"
Perform the following steps in order to change the cross slope units.
1. Press the "Cross Slope" soft key .
A positive value indicates a rising cross slope as you move away from the master alignment. A
negative value indicates a falling cross slope as you move away from the master alignment.
Station Format
Station (chainage) values can be shown in the following formats:
• 1000.00 (default)
• 1+000.00
• 10+00.00
• 1/000.00
Perform the following steps in order to change the station format.
1. Press the "Station Format" soft key .

3. When this has been completed and the other units are set, press the "OK" key in order to save
the settings and return to the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog.
4. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog. The changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216159
GPS Accuracy Mode

SMCS - 7220
The GPS Accuracy Mode is used in order to filter the GPS antenna positions that are used for
machine guidance.
If the accuracy of the GPS position is not within the limits set, a "Low Accuracy GPS" message is
displayed.
The AccuGrade System has three modes of accuracy available.
• Fine
• Medium
• Coarse
Each mode has a GPS error limit. The GPS error limit is defined to suit the application or project.
The GPS Accuracy mode offers the following advantages.
• Allows you to specify the GPS error limits that are suitable for your application or project.
• Provides confidence that you are working within the GPS error limits that you have specified.
• Increases the efficiency of the machine use by allowing the operator to quickly switch GPS
Accuracy Modes so that different applications can be carried out.
Note: GPS Accuracy Modes and GPS error limits apply to the GPS antenna position only. GPS error
limits do not take into account measure up errors. GPS error limits do not take into account base
station coordinate errors.
GPS Position Error

The accuracy of a GPS position varies according to many different conditions. An RTK position is
normally accurate enough for construction work. However, this is not always the case.
When a GPS antenna is placed in a stationary position and the position output is monitored, there are
small changes in the position. The position change is caused by noise in the solution. This results in a
small error in the GPS position.
The GPS error is an estimate of the amount of noise in the GPS positions.
The Role of the GPS Receiver

The satellites are above the antenna so the horizontal and vertical accuracies are different. The vertical
position is less accurate than the horizontal position. You can display vertical position error and
horizontal position error as text items. Refer to "GPS Accuracy Mode Text Items" for more
information.
Blade guidance will only occur when the GPS accuracy for the antenna position is within the GPS
error limit set for the GPS Accuracy Mode.
GPS Accuracy Mode Text Items

Three text items that are related to GPS accuracy mode are available for display.
• The "H. GPS Err." text item shows the GPS error in the horizontal plane.
• The "V. GPS Err." text item shows the GPS error in the vertical plane.
• The "GPS Acc. Mode" text item shows the currently selected GPS Accuracy Mode.
The "H. GPS Err." text item and the "V.GPS Err." text item change color in order to indicate the
current GPS error relative to the configured GPS Error Limit. The color coding that is used is shown
in table 1.
Table 1
Text Color GPS Error Indication
Black The GPS error is within 90% of the GPS error limit.
Blue The GPS error is within 10% of exceeding the GPS error limit.
Red The GPS error has exceeded the GPS error limit.
Setting the GPS Accuracy Mode and Limits

The operator can select a GPS Accuracy Mode. You can change the Accuracy mode in Normal mode,
but you must be in Service mode in order to change the GPS Error Limits.
Perform the following steps in order to access the "GPS Accuracy Mode" dialog.
1. Turn the AccuGrade System on.
For AccuGrade Systems running Version 5.5 firmware, proceed to Step 2.
For AccuGrade Systems running Version 6.1, proceed to Step 5.
until the "GPS Accuracy Mode" is highlighted.
3. Press the "OK" key. The dialog in Illustration 1 appears.
4. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select the mode for operation.
Proceed to Step 7.
5. From any guidance screen, press the "GPS" Soft Key.
6. Press the Change Mode Soft Key (6) in order to swap between the following modes: Fine
Accuracy, Medium Accuracy and Course Accuracy.
7. Press "OK" in order to confirm the settings, or "ESC" in order to exit without saving.
Note: If you press "ESC", you are asked to confirm that you do not want to save any changes.
Editing The GPS Accuracy Modes
The AccuGrade System will need to be in Service Mode in order to edit the limits for the GPS
Accuracy Mode.
2. Press and hold the "OK" key when powering up the Display.
Note: Hold the "OK" key until the splash screen is displayed.
For AccuGrade Systems that are running Version 6.1 Software, proceed to Step 5.
3. For AccuGrade Systems running Version 5.5 firmware, select "GPS Accuracy Mode" within
the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog.
The dialog screen in Illustration 3 will appear.
Note: The "Mode" column lists the GPS Accuracy Modes that are currently enabled for
selection. The "Limit" column shows the current GPS Error Limit that is set for the GPS
Accuracy Modes. The "Auto" column is shown if the automatics are enabled or if the
automatics are disabled for the GPS Accuracy Modes.
4. Use the arrow keys in order to select the mode to edit.
Proceed to Step 11.
5. For AccuGrade Systems running Version 6.1, select the "GPS" Soft Key from any guidance
screen.
6. Press the "Edit Modes" Soft Key.
The "GPS Accuracy Mode Settings" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration 5.
Note: By default, the "Edit Modes" Soft Key is only available when the AccuGrade System is
started in Service mode.
7. The group box within the "GPS Accuracy Mode Settings" dialog is labeled in order to indicate
the GPS accuracy mode that is currently selected for change.
Use the "Fine Mode" Soft Key, the "Medium Mode" Soft Key, or the "Coarse Mode" Soft Key
in order to select the GPS accuracy mode that you wish to change.
8. Use the arrow keys in order to enter a value in the "GPS Error Limit" field. The GPS Error
Limit defines the maximum allowable GPS error for the selected GPS accuracy mode.
◦ In order to set the GPS Accuracy mode to Unused, press the "Set Unused" Soft Key or
enter a GPS Error Limit of 0.
Note: When the GPS Error Limit is set to Unused for a particular mode, the mode is no longer
available to the operator for selection.
◦ In order to set the field to the default value press the Soft Key ("Default Set 0.050"). The
limit value on the Soft Key ("Default Set 0.050") changes depending on the system Units
and the GPS Accuracy Mode selected for change.
9. Press the "NEXT" key in order to enter the "Allow Automatics" field.
10. Press the arrow keys in order to toggle between "YES" and "NO".
This setting will allow the use of automatics in the selected GPS accuracy mode.
11. Press "OK" in order to confirm the settings. Press "ESC" in order to exit without saving.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02500105
Increment Switch - Adjustment

SMCS - 7220
The "Increment Switch Adjustment" dialog is used in order to set the value for the vertical offset
buttons. The vertical offset will increase with this value when the vertical offset button is pressed. The
vertical offset will decrease with this value when the vertical offset button is pressed.
Complete the following steps in order to modify the value for the "Increment Switch Adjustment"
dialog.
1. Press the "Menu" key until the "Setup Menu – Configuration" is highlighted.
2. Press "Setup Menu – Configuration".
Press the up arrow or the down arrow until "Vertical Offset Switch Increment" is highlighted.
The dialog that is shown in Illustration 1 is shown.
Complete one of the following steps:

a. Press the arrow keys in order to enter the value for the vertical offset button.
b. Press the "Default 0.010" soft key in order to set the "system default". The "system
default" is 0.010 m (0.05 ft).
4. Press the "OK" key in order to save the settings and return to the "Setup Menu-Configuration"
dialog.
5. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Plan View". The changes take effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02443028
Light Bar Scale

SMCS - 7220
Tolerance Range
The tolerance range for the vertical Light Bars is the distance off grade when two of the LED
indicator lights on the Light Bar are illuminated. A tolerance range for horizontal Light Bars is the
distance off the line when two of the LED indicator lights on the Light Bar will be illuminated.
When the blade is on grade and the blade is within half of the tolerance range, the center green LED
indicator light on the appropriate Light Bar is illuminated. As the blade moves off grade, additional
LED indicator lights are illuminated.
When the blade is on-line and the blade is within half of the tolerance range, the center green LED
indicator light on the appropriate Light Bar is illuminated. As the blade moves off-line, additional
Other distances for the LED indicator lights are automatically adjusted from the tolerance range.
The vertical tolerance range also determines the on-grade tolerance. The on-grade tolerance is the
vertical range when the blade is considered to be on-grade. When the blade is in the on-grade range,
the "Cut/Fill" text field and the associated direction arrow are green.
When the blade is out of the on-grade range, one of the following events will occur:
• The "Cut" text field and the down arrow will be red.
• The "Fill" text field and the up arrow will be blue.
Setting the Light Bar Scales

In order to set the tolerance ranges, complete the following steps:
1. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the Down arrow or the Up arrow until
"Light Bar Scales" is highlighted.
2. Press the "OK" key. Refer to Illustration 1.
3. In the "Light Bar Scales" dialogs, press "Vertical" in order to set the vertical light bar scale. Use
any of the following tools in order to edit the value for the vertical tolerance:
◦ If you work in meters, press "Default Set 0.050" in order to set the tolerance to the default
value of "0.050 m". If you work in US FT or feet, press "Default Set 0.200".
◦ Use the arrow keys in order to enter the distance off grade when two of the LED indicator
lights on the vertical Light Bar are illuminated. The remaining values of the range are
automatically calculated. The values appear in the dialog.
◦ Press "Half Set 0.025" in order to set the tolerance to half of the current tolerance.
◦ Press "Double Set 0.100" in order to set the tolerance to double the current tolerance.
This value for the vertical tolerance is used as the AccuGrade System off grade limit when the
automatic controls are turned on. If the "cut" or "fill" value at either blade tip exceeds this
tolerance for more than three seconds, then the blade will be considered to be off grade.
4. Press the "Horizontal" soft key in order to set the horizontal light bar scale. Use any of the
following tools in order to edit the value for the horizontal tolerance:
◦ If you work in meters, press "Default Set 0.100" in order to set your tolerance to the
default value of "0.100 m". If you work in US FT or feet, press "Default Set 0.400".
◦ Use the arrow keys in order to enter the off-line distance when two of the LED indicator
lights on the horizontal Light Bar are illuminated. The remaining values of the range are
◦ Press "Half Set 0.050" in order to set your tolerance to half of the current tolerance.
◦ Press "Double Set 0.200" in order to set your tolerance to double the current tolerance.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
◦ Press the "Esc" key in order to cancel any changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
After changing the "Light Bar Scales" dialog, you can change any of the other items in the
"Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog before you complete Step 6.
6. Press the "Esc" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog. The changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216300
Map Recording
SMCS - 7220
The main purpose of map recording is to display on the plan view position and attribute information.
Terrain logging files (.st) are also recorded when you are using certain map recording types. Terrain
logging files are used in the AccuGrade Office Software or the METSmanager software.
Map recording can be configured in order to record and display the types of site information that is
shown in table 1.
Table 1
Map Recording Types
Type Description
None No map recording or display
Record and display the number of passes a machine makes over a particular
Coverage
section of ground
Ripper Record and display the ground that has been covered by the machine's ripper
Radio Coverage
Record and display the radio signal latency
Terrain Record and display the current ground elevation

Cut/Fill Record and display the cut or fill that is required
Only one map type can be active. By default, the map recording menu is available in the Service
mode.
Map recording information is stored in files on the data card. The files are stored in the current design
folder or in the root folder if no design is selected. Individual map recording files are created for the
different map recording types. The map recording filename includes the design name and the map
recording type. All map recording files have a *.cat extension. The AccuGrade System loads the
appropriate map recording file, if one exists, when the design or map recording type is changed.
Note: Map recording files in the root directory are automatically archived when a design is loaded
and map recording is commenced.
The following is the file naming convention for map recording.
• <Map recording type><Design file name>.cat
• <Map recording type>NoDesign.cat
Reset map is available within map recording. Reset map archives the selected map recording file and
creates a new map recording file within the same folder on the card. The map recording files use grid
cells in order to store information.
For all map recording types except ripper, the machine blade position is used in order to determine the
cells that are to be updated with map recording information. Blade width can be set for all machine
types.
Background shading on the plan view may not coincide exactly with the blade or the ripper tips. The
extent of the cell rather than the position of the blade and the ripper tips decides where the color
background is shaded.
When you zoom out, the background shading that is displayed on the plan view is automatically
changed to a coarse presentation format. The coarse presentation format shades the whole grid block
rather than the individual cells. An average of all of the cell values within the block is used in order to
determine the color of the block. The block is not shaded if there are not enough cells containing data
within the block. The coarse presentation format reduces system loading.
Terrain Logging Files

The AccuGrade System records a terrain log file (*.st) as well as a map recording file when cut/fill,
terrain or radio coverage type map recording is active. The terrain logging file and the SiteVision
Office software can be used for the following purposes.
• Build a current terrain model of the area that is covered by the machine. The .st file logs the
position of the ground that is directly under the GPS antenna.
• Build a map in order to indicate the quality of the radio coverage in the area. The .st file logs
the age of the correction data that is received from the GPS base station.
Note: METSmanager can use the Terrain Logging file in order to build a current terrain model of the
area that is covered by the machine.
The *.st file is saved to the current design folder. The file is called Current Terrain <Design name>.st.
If no design is loaded, the AccuGrade System saves the file to the root folder of the data card. The file
that is saved to the root folder is called Current Terrain NoDesign.st.
In order to build both the current terrain model and the radio coverage map, you must import the *.st
file into the AccuGrade Office Software version 4 and later.
Map Recording Type Selection

By default, the map recording type is set to "None". A map recording type must be selected before the
recording and the display feature can be used.
Perform the following steps in order to access the "Map Recording" dialog.
until "Map Recording" is highlighted.
2. Press the "OK" key. The "Map Recording" dialog is opened. This dialog is used in order to
select a map recording type.
Coverage Map Recording

Coverage map recording uses 1 x 1 m grid cells. The pass number for a cell is incremented each time
the machine blade passes over the cell. The number of passes over a cell determines the color of the
cell on the plan view.
Note: Elevation is not used in coverage map recording.
Perform the following steps in order to set up the Coverage map recording.
1. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Coverage" map
recording type. The "Map Recording" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration 1.
Use the "Required" field in order to specify the number of passes that are required. The default
is 5 passes. The maximum number of passes that can be set is 7. The minimum number of
passes that can be set is 1.
Table 2 shows the color code for the coverage map recording.
Table 2
Color Passes to meet number required
Gray 6
Dark Gray 5
Cyan 4
Blue 3
Red 2
Yellow 1
Green 0
2. Press the "NEXT" key in order to highlight the "Required" field.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to change the required number of passes.
Green is always the final color indicating that the desired number of passes have been made.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to confirm the setting and in order to return to the "Setup
Menu - Configuration" dialog.
5. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. The plan view
appears.
Any data from an existing coverage map file is displayed on the plan view when a design is loaded. A
color key indicating color coding for the required passes is displayed in the plan view.
The "Coverage: Off" soft key indicates that the Coverage map recording is Off.
Press the "Coverage: Off" soft key in order to begin Coverage map recording. The "Coverage: On"
soft key indicates that the Coverage map recording is On.
Coverage map recording is updated as the machine blade moves backward and forward.
The required number of passes for Coverage map recording can be changed at any time. The plan
view coverage background and the color key are updated on return to the plan view.
The "Coverage: Full" soft key indicates when the data card has less than 100 KB of memory
available. When this occurs map recording is suspended.
Ripper Map Recording

Ripper map recording provides a plan view background of the ground that has been covered by the
machine rippers.
You must make sure that the distance from the machine blade or from the truck fender to the ripper is
correctly specified in the machine dimensions. Refer to Systems Operation, "Machine Dimensions"
for instructions on defining the ripper dimension for different machine types.
Ripper map recording uses 1 x 1 m grid cells. A cell is marked as ripped when the machine's ripper
passes over the cell and the cell is shaded grey on the plan view.
Perform the following steps in order to set up the ripper map recording.
1. Open the "Map Recording" dialog from the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog.
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Ripper" map recording
type The "Map Recording" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration 2.
Use the "Ripped width" field in order to specify the width of ground that is ripped by the
machine rippers. The default is 2.5 m (8.202 ft). The "Ripped width" can be changed at any
time. The change is not applied to ripper data that is already recorded.
3. Press the "NEXT" key in order to highlight the "Ripped width" field.
4. Use the arrow keys in order to change the "Ripped width".
6. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. The plan view is
opened.
Any data from an existing ripper map recording file is displayed on the plan view when a design is
loaded.
The "Ripper: Up" soft key indicates that the ripper is up and therefore map recording is off.
Press the "Ripper: Up" soft key in order to begin ripper map recording. The "Ripper: Down" soft key
indicates that the ripper is down signifying that ripper map recording is in progress.
Ripper map recording is only updated as the machine ripper moves forward. Ripper map recording
does not occur when the machine moves backward.
The "Ripper: Full" soft key indicates when the data card has less than 100 KB of memory available.
When this occurs map recording is suspended.
Radio Coverage Recording
Radio coverage map recording shades the plan view in order to show the latency of the radio
reception. Radio coverage map recording also creates a *.st file that you can view in SiteVision
Office.
Radio coverage recording uses 2 x 2 m grid cells. The radio latency is stored for the cell as the
machine blade passes over a cell.
Table 3 shows the color code for the radio coverage recording.
Table 3
Color Radio signal latency
Blue <= 2 seconds
Dark Green >2 seconds and <=3 seconds
Dark Yellow >3 seconds and <=4 seconds
Yellow >4 seconds and <=5 seconds
Red >5 seconds
Perform the following steps in order to set up the radio coverage recording.
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Radio coverage"
recording type.
Any data from an existing radio coverage recording file is displayed on the plan view map when a
design is loaded.
The "Radio Map: Off" soft key indicates that the radio coverage recording is Off.
Press the "Radio Map: Off" soft key in order to begin radio coverage recording. The "Radio Map: On"
soft key indicates that the radio coverage recording is On.
Radio coverage recording is updated as the machine moves forward and backward.
Note: Unlike other map recording types, radio coverage recording continues when low accuracy is
indicated for GPS positioning.
The "Radio Map: Full" soft key indicates when the data card has less than 100 KB of memory
Terrain Map Recording
Terrain map recording shades the plan view in order to show the ground that has been covered by the
machine while collecting a terrain logging file (*.st).
Terrain map recording uses 1 x 1 m grid cells. A cell is marked as covered when the machine blade
passes over the cell. A cell that is marked as covered is shaded grey on the plan view.
Perform the following steps in order to set up the terrain map recording.
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Terrain" map recording
type.
opened.
Any data from an existing terrain map recording file is displayed in the plan view when a design is
loaded.
The "Terrain: Off" soft key indicates that the terrain map recording and terrain logging is Off.
Press the "Terrain: Off" soft key in order to begin terrain map recording and terrain logging. The
"Terrain: On" soft key indicates that terrain map recording and terrain logging is in progress.
Terrain map recording is updated as the machine moves forward and backward.
The "Terrain: Full" soft key indicates when the data card has less than 100 KB of memory available.
When this occurs map recording is stopped.
Cut/Fill Map Recording

Cut/Fill map recording provides a plan view background that is color coded according to the
quantities of cut and the quantities of fill required in the areas passed over by the machine blade.
Cut/Fill map recording also creates a *.st file that can be viewed in AccuGrade Office Software.
Cut/Fill map recording uses 1 x 1 m grid cells. Cut/Fill map recording requires a design to be loaded.
The difference between the blade elevation and the design elevation is stored for the cells below the
blade as the blade passes over the ground.
The vertical tolerance that is used for the light bar scales is used in order to determine the cut/fill color
coding for the background on the plan view.
Vertical offsets and reference surfaces can be applied to the design at anytime. The elevation
differences that are stored in the cells are adjusted for the offsets. The cut/fill background color
coding is updated.
Note: Reference surfaces and vertical offsets are not automatically loaded with a design. In order to
ensure that the cut/fill color coding is consistent, make sure that the vertical offsets and the reference
surface configurations are consistent with the original configuration after reloading a design.
Note: If you change any of the design elevations the cut/fill map recording must be reset. Cut/Fill
map recording data that is recorded before the change will not be consistent with the changed design.
Note: If you create a cut/fill map on a sloping design or a level design, and then edit the design, the
previously recorded cut/fill map will still apply to the old design.
Table 4 shows the color code for the cut/fill map recording.
Table 4
Color Cut/Fill
Dark Red Cut > 4 x Vertical Tolerance
Cut > 2 x Vertical Tolerance
Red
Cut < = 4 x Vertical Tolerance
Light Red
Green Cut/Fill is within Vertical Tolerance
Fill > 1 x Vertical Tolerance
Light Blue
Fill < = 2 x Vertical Tolerance
Blue
Dark Blue Fill > 4 x Vertical Tolerance
Perform the following steps in order to set up the cut/fill map recording.
1. Confirm that light bar scale's vertical tolerance is configured as required. Vertical tolerance can
be changed at anytime. The cut/fill background is updated for the new vertical tolerance as soon
as the plan view is next displayed.
2. Confirm that the required design has been loaded. Cut/Fill map recording is not possible
without a design.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the cut/fill map recording
type.
opened.
The AccuGrade System is now ready to begin the cut/fill map recording and the cut/fill display.
Any data from an existing cut/fill map recording file is displayed in the plan view when a design is
loaded.
The "C/F Map: Off" soft key indicates that the cut/fill map recording is Off. If the "C/F Map: Off"
soft key is not visible check that a design has been loaded.
Press the "C/F Map: Off" soft key in order to begin the cut/fill map recording. The "C/F Map: On"
soft key indicates that the cut/fill map recording is On.
For all machine types the cut/fill map recording is only updated as the machine moves forward.
The "C/F Map: Full" soft key indicates when the data card has less than 100 KB of memory available.
Reset Map
Map recording reset map closes the selected map recording file and creates a new map recording file
in the same directory.
If you reset the map recording file that is currently set for showing on the plan view, the plan view is
cleared of all shading. The color key, if any, remains visible on the plan view.
The following is the renaming convention for the map recording files.
• <Map recording type><Design file name>nnn.cat, where n increments for each newly renamed
file.
A renamed map recording file cannot be displayed by the AccuGrade System unless the renamed file
is manually renamed in the office in order to remove the nnn.
Individual map recording files are created for each map recording type within the different design
folders or in the root directory. The design, if any, and the map recording type must be selected as
required before reset map is used.
Perform the following steps in order to close and rename a map recording file.
1. Load the required design. Reset map searches the loaded design folder on the data card for the
map recording files. If no design is loaded, reset map searches the root directory of the data
card for the map recording files.
2. Open the "Map Recording" dialog from the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the map recording type that
is to be closed. The map recording type currently in use is highlighted by default.
◦ Press the "Reset Map" soft key. The "Confirm Reset Map" dialog appears. This is shown
in Illustration 3.
◦ Press the "ESC" key and then press the "OK" key in order to return to the "Setup Menu –
5. Press the "Confirm Reset" soft key. A resetting message indicates that the map recording file
resetting is in progress. When the reset map process is complete, the "Map Recording" dialog is
displayed.
◦ Map recording detects map recording type changes when you use reset map. Press the
"ESC" key and then press the "OK" key in order to exit the "Map Recording" dialog and
return to the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog without saving the map recording type
change. Map recording remains as setup before map reset.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to save the map recording type change and return to the
"Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog.
7. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog. The plan view
appears.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216400
Plan View Rotation

SMCS - 7220
The plan view can be set in order to rotate in one of the following ways.
• Machine heading up - the machine always travels upward on the Display
• North up - the machine travels in any direction on the Display
Use the "Plan View Rotation" dialog in order to configure the Display to either north up or machine
heading up. You can access the "Plan View Rotation" dialog from the "Setup Menu – Configuration"
dialog.
Setting the Plan View Rotation

Perform the following steps in order to configure the "Plan View Rotation" dialog.
until "Plan View Rotation" is highlighted.

3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select "Yes" or "No".
If you select "Yes", the Display plan view rotates in order to keep the machine heading up the
Display.
If you select "No", the Display plan view is always shown North-up.
◦ Press the "ESC" key in order to abandon any changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
Configuration" dialog. You are asked to confirm that you do not want to save any
changes.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02218342
Receiver Configuration
SMCS - 7220
Note: This is not the preferred method to configure the GPS Receiver. It is recommended that you
place the appropriate configuration file in each design folder. The system automatically sends the .cfg
file when the design is loaded. This option remains in the system so that the original method of
configuring the GPS Receiver and data cards can still be used.
The Configuration file contains the site coordinate system.
Perform the following steps in order to configure the GPS Receiver.
1. Insert a data card with a GPS Receiver configuration file in the root folder into the Display.
until "GPS Receiver Configuration" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. The "GPS Receiver Configuration" dialog appears. This is shown in
Illustration 1.
All GPS Receiver configuration files in the root folder of the data card are listed on the Display.
5. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select the correct .cfg file.
6. Press the "OK" key. The AccuGrade System sends the .cfg file to the system and provides
status information. The following text shows on the dialog in Illustration 1.
◦ "Loading. Please wait ..."
You then return to the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog.
You may have to wait a few minutes while the GPS Receiver gains lock.
Make sure that you check the GPS configuration file was properly sent. In order to do this,
position the center of the blade on a known point and compare the coordinates that appear on
the Display with the known coordinates of the point.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216144
Software Support Option

SMCS - 7220
Before you can load new software, you must have a valid option keys file (password), and a Display
software that is older than the option keys file expiration date.
Accessing the Software Support Option

The "Software Support Option dialog" shows you information about the Display, the software version
and the expiration date for supporting the software.
Perform the following steps in order to access the "Software Support Option" dialog.
2. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog press the "Installation" soft key in order to list
the items under the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog. Refer to Systems Operation, "Setup
Menu" for more information on the Setup Menu.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key until the "Software Support Option" item is
highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. A dialog similar to the one in Illustration 1 appears.
Updating the Software Support Option

Note: You cannot upgrade to the Display firmware that was created after the expiry date of the
software support option.
The "Software Support Option" dialog lets you update the option keys in order to change the current
support agreement.
Perform the following steps in order to update the option keys.
1. Copy a valid option keys file to the root folder of the data card. The file is named "Option keys
<serial number >.txt", where "<serial number>" is the serial number of your Display. Obtain
this file from your Technical Communicator.
2. Insert the data card into the Display.
◦ Open the "Software Support Option" dialog. The option keys file is detected on the data
card, and the option keys are automatically applied. A message reporting the success or
failure of the process appears.
◦ If the option keys file is not on the data card use the arrow keys in order to enter the
option keys details. Press the "OK" key in order to enable the option keys.
4. Press the "OK" key in order to return to the "Setup Menu Installation" dialog.
5. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu Installation" dialog.
Note: This procedure does not need to be completed again until the software support expires
and you want to update the Display firmware. It is recommended that you delete the option
keys file from your data card.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02216316
Text Items
SMCS - 7220
The Display can display different text items on the profile view, plan view, cross-section view, and
text views. The following table lists the available text items.
Table 1
Text View Options
Items Details
If a Ripper back from cutting edge measurement is entered then 4 points based on
Avoid. Dist. blade tip position and the ripper back from cutting edge measurement are used for
avoidance zone proximity detection. The Avoid. Dist is the shortest distance
between the any one point and the closest avoidance zone.
Cross Slope Cross slope of the blade orthogonal to the direction of travel. This is not the
measured tilt of the blade.
When overcut protection is Off, the text field indicates "N/A". When overcut
Cut Adjust
protection is On and adjustment is applied, the text field shows the larger of the
applied cut adjustments for the blade tips.
Shows either Cut Left or Fill Left, as appropriate, for the left blade tip. If a vertical
Cut/Fill Left
offset to the design elevation is specified, the Cut or Fill is to the vertically offset
position.
Cut/Fill Shows either Cut Right or Fill Right, as appropriate, for the right blade tip. If a
Right vertical offset is specified, the Cut or Fill is to the vertically offset position.
Design Elev
Design elevation at the blade tip with focus.
Easting Easting at the blade tip with focus.

Elevation Elevation at the blade tip with focus.
GPS Acc. The selected GPS Accuracy mode is displayed. GPS Accuracy modes are fine,
Mode medium and coarse.
A measure of the horizontal GPS Accuracy. The text is red if the value exceeds the
H. GPS
current GPS error limit. The text is blue if the value is close to the limit. Otherwise
Error
the text is black.
Heading Direction the machine is moving. Shown in degrees clockwise from the north.
Vertical Offset between the master alignment and the working surface when a
Layered Lift layered lift is defined. Value is positive if the layered lift is above the master
alignment, negative if the layered lift is below the master alignment and "N/A"
when no layered lift is defined.
MA Offset Offset from the blade tip with focus to the master alignment. Also see the item
"Offline" in this table.
Northing Northing at the blade tip with focus.
Offline distance from the blade tip with focus to the selected alignment. If a
Offline horizontal offset is specified, the offline distance is to the horizontally offset
position. Also see the item "MA Offset" in this table.
Orientation
Direction the blade is pointing. Shown in degrees clockwise from north.
Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) at the blade tip with focus. PDOP must be
PDOP
below 7.0 for guidance.
Perpendicular offset between the master alignment and the working surface when a
perpendicular lift is defined. Value is positive if the perpendicular lift is above the
Perp. Lift
master alignment, negative if the perpendicular lift is below the master alignment
and N/A when no perpendicular lift is defined.
Front / back pitch of the machine. Pitch (Mach.) is the pitch of the machine's body.
Pitch This is used to approximate the pitch of the blade. (You must be moving or have
moved for this value to be meaningful.)
Position
Position Status: No Position, Low Accuracy, High Accuracy.
Status
Satellites Number of satellites used by the GPS receiver to calculate a position
Machine speed. If the speed is less than
Speed
0.5 km/h (0.31 mph) the text field indicates 0.
Station Station (or chainage) at the blade tip with focus.
A measure of the vertical GPS Accuracy. The text is red if the value exceeds the
V. GPS
current GPS error limit. The text is blue if the value is close to the limit. Otherwise
Error
the text is black
Shows the amount of vertical offset applied to the working surface, using the
vertical offset soft key. The vertical offset will be relative to the layered lift,
Vert. Offset
perpendicular lift, or vertical lift if any of these are defined. The value is positive if
the vertical lift is above the master alignment, negative if the vertical lift is below
the master alignment and 0.000 when no vertical lift is defined.
Vertical Lift Vertical offset between the master alignment and the working surface when a
vertical lift is defined. The value is positive if the vertical lift is above the master
alignment, negative if the vertical lift is below the master alignment and N/A when
no vertical lift is defined.
Note: All items appear in the currently selected units. Meters (m) are shown to two decimal places.
US Survey Feet (FT) and International Feet (ft) are shown to one decimal place.
Customizing Text Items

You can customize the Display in order to show text on the plan view, cross section view, and text
views. Alternatively, you can choose to show no text at all.
By default, you must be in Service Mode in order to access the text items setting in the "Setup Menu –
The "Text Items" dialog allows you to select up to five items of information to appear on each of the
views. If you choose to select only one or two items on a view screen, then the text uses a larger font
than if three to five text items are selected. A text view screen is not shown if the screen has no items
selected.
If you select one to three items of information on the plan view, profile view, or cross section view,
the items appear along the top of the view. If you select four or five items, then all of the items appear
down the right side of the view.
Perform the following steps in order to set up the text Items.
1. In Configuration Mode select the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the down arrow
key or the up arrow key until "Text Items" is highlighted. Then press the "OK" key.
2. Press the "Text View 1" soft key. A dialog similar to Illustration 1 appears.
The "Available Items" list shows all of the items that can appear in the plan view, cross section view,
text view 1, and text view 2. The items are described in table 1.
The following is a list of information for the "Text Items" dialog.
• The opening screen shows the list of items that are selected to appear on the plan view.
• Press the "Cross-section" soft key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear
on the cross section view.
• Press the "Text View 1" soft key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear on
text view 1.
text view 2.
• If there are fewer than five items selected for a selected view, and the highlighted option in the
"Available Items" list is not selected, the "Add"soft key is available as soft key 6.
• If the highlighted option in the "Available Items" list is already selected, the "Remove" soft key
is available as soft key 6.
• If there are already five items selected to appear on the selected view, and the highlighted
option in the "Available Items" list is not selected, soft key 6 is blank.
Perform the following steps in order to remove an item from any of the views.
1. Press the "Plan View" soft key, the "Cross-section" soft key, the "Text View 1" soft key, or the
"Text View 2" soft key in order to show the appropriate view list.
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the item to be removed.
3. Press the "Remove" soft key.
Perform the following steps in order to add an item to any of the views.
1. Press the "Plan View" soft key, the "Cross-section" soft key, the "Text View 1" soft key, or the
"Text View 2" soft key in order to show the appropriate view list.
2. Make sure that there are less than five items already selected.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the item to add.
4. Press the "Add" soft key.
Note: Items appear in the order that you select the items. You can remove the items and then
add the items in a different order in order to change their position on the screen.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to save the settings and return to the "Setup Menu –
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02443129
Vertical Guidance Method

SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System uses either one or two vertical guidance points to calculate the cut and fill at
the blade tips.
The machine icon in the Plan View and the blade icon in the Cross-section View have green lines that
show the vertical guidance point settings.
Vertical Guidance Methods

The vertical guidance of the blade tips is calculated in two different ways. The vertical guidance can
determine the cut or fill of the blade from a single vertical guidance point, or the vertical guidance can
be determined from dual vertical guidance points. From the vertical guidance point or points, a
vertical guidance plane is calculated and projected to the blade tips to calculate cut and fill values.
The blade displayed in the Plan View and in the Cross-section View shows the location of the vertical
guidance point (or points) as a green vertical line. The vertical guidance of the blade tips is calculated
by determining the cut or fill of the blade at two points.
The flexibility of the vertical guidance method improves guidance so that:
• hanging the blade tip over the crown of a road will not cause the crown to be cut off
• hanging the blade tip over the side slope will not cause vertical guidance to the road surface to
start being erroneously elevated or lowered
• you can cut narrow ditches that are smaller than your blade
• for irregular design surfaces the blade can create a smooth cut
1 Point Vertical Guidance

Illustration 1 shows how the AccuGrade System projects the vertical guidance plane from the single
vertical guidance point to the blade tips to determine the cut or fill for the blade tips.
Vertical Guidance Point
2 Point Vertical Guidance

The vertical guidance of the blade tips is calculated by determining the cut or fill of the blade at two
points inset from the blade tips. These two points define a line which is then used to calculate the cut
or fill values at the blade tips.
Illustration 2 shows how the AccuGrade System projects the vertical guidance plane from the vertical
guidance points to the blade tips in order to determine the cut or fill for the blade tips.
Vertical Guidance Inset Points
Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut

The "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" option gives cut/fill guidance that prevents over-cutting.
Overcutting occurs when the blade tip cuts through the design surface.
For each vertical guidance mode, you can enable the "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" option. This
feature prevents the blade tip guidance from over-cutting the design surface. To enable or disable the
"Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" option, change the setting from any of the vertical guidance method
dialogs.
In order to change the "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" option complete the following steps:
1. Press the "Next" key until the "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" field has focus.
2. Press the Down arrow or the Up arrow in order to change the setting. Select:
◦ Yes - to adjust the cut.
◦ No - to disable the adjustment.
The changes are saved as you exit the vertical guidance method selection dialog.
Note: The "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" setting is not specific to the current vertical guidance
method. If you make changes to the "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" setting in any vertical guidance
dialog, the changes affect all vertical guidance methods.
In order to see when the "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" option is active, configure the "Adjust Cut to
Avoid Overcut" text item. The "Adjust Cut to Avoid Overcut" value is the amount that the vertical
guidance plane must be raised if the design is not to be overcut. If a value is displayed for the "Adjust
Cut to Avoid Overcut" text item, the blade is not following the vertical guidance plane under the
vertical guidance points. Check the position of the vertical guidance method selected and reposition
your blade.
If you prefer to follow the design surface below the vertical guidance points, disable the"Adjust Cut to
Avoid Overcut" option.
Selecting a Vertical Guidance Method (Version 5.5 Firmware)

In order to select a vertical guidance method, complete the following steps:
"Vertical Guidance" is highlighted.
A Vertical Guidance dialog shown in Illustration 3 will appear.
The soft keys at the base of the Vertical Guidance dialog provide three methods for one point
vertical guidance and two methods for two point vertical guidance:
◦ 1 Point Center
◦ 1 Point Focus
◦ 2 Points Tips
◦ 1 Point Custom
◦ 2 Points Custom
3. Press a soft key in order to select a vertical guidance method. Each time you select a method a
graphic is presented showing a blade. The blade is drawn as viewed from the machine cab. The
green lines on the blade represent the location of the guidance points on the blade. The red solid
fill box represents a blade tip with focus.
Method: 1 Point Center

The "1 Point Center" method sets one vertical guidance point to the center of the blade.
Use this method when you are working on a wide section of the design where the cross slope does not
change (for example, the lane of a road).
Guidance does not change with respect to the blade tip focus.
1. Press "1 Point Center" in order to select the "1 Point Center" method. The dialog is shown in
Illustration 3.
Method: 1 Point Focus

The "1 Point Focus" method sets one vertical guidance point 0.2 m (0.6 ft) in from the blade tip that
has focus.
Use this method when you are working on a narrow section of the design where the cross slope does
not change (for example, the shoulder of a road).
Guidance changes with respect to the blade tip focus.
1. Press "1 Point Focus" in order to select the "1 Point Focus" method. The dialog is shown in
Illustration 5.
Method: 2 Points Tips

The "2 Points Tips" method sets two vertical guidance points 0.2 m (0.6 ft) in from each blade tip.
Use this method when you are working on an irregular design surface, where the cross slope changes
across the width of the blade (for example, a golf course).
Guidance does not change with respect to the blade tip focus.
1. Press "2 Points Tip" in order to select the "2 Points Tip" method. The dialog is shown in
Illustration 6.
Method: 1 Point Custom

The "1Point Custom" method lets you set one vertical guidance point at a customized distance from
the blade tip with focus.
In order to configure the "1 Point Custom" method, complete the following steps:
1. Press the "1Point Custom" soft key.
The Vertical Guidance dialog for the 1 Point Custom method will appear.
2. Press the "NEXT" key in order to highlight a field.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to enter a value into the field.
"A" is the horizontal distance from the blade tip with focus to the guidance point. The vertical
guidance point will change sides of the blade when the focus point changes.
A must be a value between zero and the blade width.
Method: 2 Points Custom

Use the 2 Points Custom method when a design surface requires extra control over the positioning of
the vertical guidance points along the blade.
The "2 Points Custom" method allows you to set two vertical guidance points at specified distances
along the blade edge.
In order to configure the "2 Points Custom" method, complete the following steps:
1. Press the "2 Points Custom" soft key.
The Vertical Guidance dialog for the "2 Points Custom" method will appear.
guidance point will change sides of the blade when the focus point changes.
"A" must be a value between zero and the blade width.
4. Press the "NEXT" soft key in order to highlight the "C" field.
"C" is the horizontal distance from the blade tip without focus to the second guidance point.
"C" must be a value between zero and the blade width minus "A".
"B" updates automatically. B = blade width – (A+C).
5. Press the arrow keys in order to enter the value.

Saving the Vertical Guidance Method
In order to save the selected vertical guidance method complete the following steps:
1. Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
Alternatively, press the "Esc" key in order to cancel any changes and return to the "Setup Menu
– Configuration" dialog. You are asked to confirm that you do not want to save any changes.
effect immediately.
Selecting A Vertical Guidance Method (Version 6.1 Firmware)

In order to select a vertical guidance method, complete the following steps:
1. From any guidance screen, press "V. Setup" soft key.

The Vertical Guidance Setup dialog appears. Refer to Illustration 14.
2. Press "Change Method".
A dialog similar to Illustration 13 appears.
3. Highlight the vertical guidance method you want to use.
Each time you select a method a graphic is presented showing a blade. The blade is drawn as
viewed from the machine cab. The green lines on the blade represent the location of the
guidance points on the blade. The red solid fill box represents a blade tip with focus.
4. Press the "OK" key to confirm the selection.

Method: "1 Point Center"
The "1 Point Center" method sets one vertical guidance point to the center of the blade. Use this
method when you are working on a wide section of the design where the cross slope does not change
(for example, the lane of a road). Guidance does not change with respect to the blade tip focus.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the "3D, 1 Point Center" method.
2. Press the "OK" key to confirm selection.

Method: "1 Point Focus"
The "1 Point Focus" method sets one vertical guidance point 0.2 m (0.6 ft) in from the blade tip that
has focus. Use this method when you are working on a narrow section of the design where the cross
slope does not change (for example, the shoulder of a road). Guidance changes with respect to the
blade tip focus.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the "3D, 1 Point Focus" method.

Method: "2 Points Tips"
The "2 Points Tips" method sets two vertical guidance points 0.2 m (0.6 ft) in from each blade tip.
Use this method when you are working on an irregular design surface, where the cross slope changes
across the width of the blade (for example, a golf course). Guidance does not change with respect to
the blade tip focus.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the "3D, 2 Point Tips" method.

Method: "1 Point Custom"
The "1Point Custom" method lets you set one vertical guidance point at a customized distance from
the blade tip with focus.
In order to configure the "1 Point Custom" method, complete the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the "3D, 1 Point Custom" method.
guidance point will change sides of the blade when the focus point changes. A must be a value
between zero and the blade width.
Method: "2 Points Custom"

Use the "2 Points Custom" method when a design surface requires extra control over the positioning
of the vertical guidance points along the blade. The "2 Points Custom" method allows you to set two
vertical guidance points at specified distances along the blade edge. In order to configure the "2 Points
Custom" method, complete the following steps:
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the "3D, 2 Points Custom" method.

guidance point will change sides of the blade when the focus point changes. "A" must be a
value between zero and the blade width.
7. Press the "NEXT" key in order to highlight the "C" field.
"C" is the horizontal distance from the blade tip without focus to the second guidance point. "C"
must be a value between zero and the blade width minus "A".
"B" updates automatically.
Note: B = blade width – (A+C)
9. Press the "OK" key to save the Vertical Guidance Method.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® (GPS)

i02566184
Wireless Communication
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System can communicate to the office via the AccuGrade Office software. This
option can be turned on by entering the "Setup Menu - Installation". Refer to the following procedure
in order to set up wireless communications
1. Select "FTP Support" for Version 5.5 firmware. Select "Wireless Communication Support" for
later versions of firmware.
2. Select "Yes" to enable wireless communication.
When "Yes" is selected, the radio will need to be configured for "EZ IP" or "IP". Use MCG
Flash in order to configure the radio.
The IP address will have to match the Office radio. The Radio network will be disabled.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® - CD700 Grade Control System (GPS/ATS/Laser)

i02942088
General Information
SMCS - 7220
Introduction
The AccuGrade ® System is designed for earthmoving equipment in the construction application. The
system can be used with a wide variety of sensors in order to provide conventional control or 3D
machine control.
Safety
This warning label is located on the electric masts. The warning label is placed to the rear of the masts
at eye level.
Warning decal that is located on the electric masts


occur.

Do not operate this system unless you are fully trained on this
equipment. To avoid injury, the machines park brake must be engaged
prior to starting the calibration. Maintain adequate clearance from
people and objects as the blade may move abruptly during automatic
hydraulic valve calibration.
This warning label is located on the tripod. The label is placed in a location on each leg of the tripod
in order to be easily seen.
Warning decal that is located on the legs of the laser transmitter
Movement of the transmitter could cause unexpected blade movement.

Death or serious injury could occur. Turn off the transmitter before you
move the transmitter or before you adjust the transmitter.
Safety (Laser)
The IEC and the United States Government Center of Devices for Radiology Health (CDRH) has
classified this laser as a Class II laser product. The maximum radiant power output of this laser is less
than 5 milliwatts.
Refer to the operator's manual of the laser transmitter for installation and operating instructions.
The laser that is supplied with the AccuGrade - Laser System complies with all applicable portions of
"Title 21" of the "Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Health and Human Services, Food and
Drug Administration, Federal Register, Volume 50, Number 161, 20August 1985".
This laser complies with "OSHA Standards Act, Section 1518.54" for use without eye protection. Eye
protection is not required or recommended. The following safety rules should be observed:
• Never look into a laser beam or point the beam into the eyes of other people. Set the laser at a
height that prevents the beam from flashing directly into people's eyes.
• Do not remove any warning signs from the laser.
• Use of this product by personnel that are not trained on this product may result in exposure to
hazardous laser light.
• If initial service requires the removal of the outer protective cover, removal of the cover must
be performed by trained personnel.
Crushing Prevention and Cutting Prevention

Support the equipment properly when you work beneath the equipment. Do not depend on the
hydraulic cylinders to hold up the equipment. An attachment can fall if a control is moved, or if a
hydraulic line breaks.
Unless you are instructed otherwise, never attempt adjustments while the machine is moving. Also,
never attempt adjustments while the engine is running.
Whenever there are attachment control linkages, the clearance in the linkage area will increase or the
clearance in the linkage area will decrease with movement of the attachment. Stay clear of all rotating
and moving parts.
Keep objects away from moving fan blades. The fan blade will throw objects or cut objects. Do not
use a kinked wire cable or a frayed wire cable.
Wear gloves when you handle wire cable. When you strike a retainer pin with force, the retainer pin
can fly out. The loose retainer pin can injure personnel. Make sure that the area is clear of people
when you strike a retainer pin.
In order to avoid injury to your eyes, Wear protective glasses when you strike a retainer pin.
Chips or other debris can fly off objects when you strike the objects. Make sure that no one can be
injured by flying debris before striking any object.
Operation
Clear all personnel from the machine and from the area.
Clear all obstacles from the machine's path. Beware of hazards (wires, ditches, etc).
Be sure that all windows are clean.
Secure the doors and the windows in the open position or in the shut position.
Adjust the rear mirrors (if equipped) for the best visibility close to the machine.
Make sure that the horn, the travel alarm (if equipped), and all other warning devices are working
properly.
Fasten the seat belt securely.
Warm up the engine and the hydraulic oil before operating the machine.
Only operate the machine while you are in a seat. The seat belt must be fastened while you operate the
machine. Only operate the controls while the engine is running.
While you operate the machine slowly in an open area, check for proper operation of all controls and
all protective devices. Before you move the machine, you must make sure that no one will be
endangered.
Do not allow riders on the machine unless the machine has the following equipment:
• Additional seat
• Additional seat belt
• Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS)
Note any needed repairs during machine operation. Report any needed repairs.
Avoid any conditions that can lead to tipping the machine. The machine can tip when you work on
hills, on banks and on slopes. Also, the machine can tip when you cross ditches, ridges or other
unexpected obstructions.
Avoid operating the machine across the slope. When possible, operate the machine up the slopes and
down the slopes.
Maintain control of the machine.
Do not overload the machine beyond the machine capacity.
Be sure that the hitches and the towing devices are adequate.
Never straddle a wire cable. Never allow other personnel to straddle a wire cable.
Before you maneuver the machine, make sure that no personnel are between the machine and the
trailing equipment.
Always keep the Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) installed during machine operation.
Conventional Systems
Conventional systems provide elevation or slope control. Conventional elevation systems continually
measure the offset between a reference surface and the cutting edge of the machine. This measured
offset is compared against a design offset that has been entered into the system. If the measured
offsets and the design offsets differ, the AccuGrade System drives the cutting edge of the machine
upward or downward until the offsets match. Elevation sensors, such as a Sonic Tracer, provide
elevation control.
Conventional slope control systems use sensors that are mounted on the machine in order to measure
the cross slope of the cutting edge of the machine. This measured cross slope is compared against a
design cross slope that was entered into the system. If the measured cross slope and design cross slope
differ, one side of the blade is raised or lowered until the cross slopes match.
Conventional systems do not provide a horizontal position. So, the following items are not used in a
conventional system: design files, background maps and avoidance zones.
Laser
Laser Grading
Setup and operation is easy with the AccuGrade System. An off-board tripod mounted laser
transmitter emits a thin beam of light that rotates 360 degrees. This creates a grade reference over the
work area. Grade information is transferred to the machine via the laser beam.
A digital laser receiver, mounted on an electric telescopic mast above the cutting edge of the machine,
detects the elevation of the laser beam. Then, the information is sent to the display.
The AccuGrade System is available with a single mast system or a dual mast system. The single mast
system and the dual mast system both provide single dimensional (elevation) control. For example, a
flat plane or a single sloped plane. The dual mast system provides two-dimensional control. For
example, a sloped plane with cross slope (elevation and tilt).
The display informs the operator of the position of the that is relative to grade. The Display indicates
the cut or the fill requirements of the work area.
(single mast system) or both the lift and tilt (dual mast system) functions by placing the cutting edge
to the precise elevation needed for fine grading.
Applications
The AccuGrade Laser System is designed for fine grading of sites with flat, single or dual slope
surfaces.
3D Systems
3D Systems use sensors that can measure horizontal position and vertical position. The resulting X,Y,
Z coordinates are compared against a design that was loaded into the system. The system sends
corrections to the hydraulic valves for the machine in order to drive the cutting edge of the machine to
grade. The system uses either a Advanced Tracking System (ATS) robotic total station or Global
Positioning System (GPS) receivers as the 3D sensor.
The default settings support most of the conditions, but the settings can be changed as required. Items
that need to be configured in order to make the AccuGrade System work properly include the
following items:
At the start of any new project or work area the site calibration, and the design are required. GPS data
is needed in order to position the blade. GPS signals are received through the GPS Receivers. At the
same time, base station data is received through the data radio and sent to the left hand GPS Receiver.
The GPS data from each GPS Receiver on the blade is combined with the slope information in the
Display to produce a blade position and blade cross slope. The system uses the design in conjunction
with the GPS information in order to compute the cut or the fill at the blade tips in respect to the
design. The design can be in the form of a DTM (TIN or Grid), road, level or sloping surface. The
Display has a color LCD that has brightness control in order to allow the operator to see the LCD in
both day light and at night. Information on the screen is available in the following views:
• Plan
• Cross section
• Profile
• Text
The operator will be able to switch between these views at any time. The Display uses the GPS
positions and the machine dimensions in order to compute the position of each blade tip. The Display
selected alignment.
ATS System
With an Advanced Tracking Sensor (ATS) System, a prism and a radio are attached to the machine.
The prism is mounted on a mast above the cutting edge of the machine. The ATS robotic total station
can be set up over a known point on site. The ATS robotic station can also be set up on an unknown
point. The position of an unknown point can be determined by methods such as resection. The
position of the point must be determined before you start using the ATS for machine control.
The ATS tracks the machine as it moves. Then, the ATS broadcasts the position of the machine to the
AccuGrade System via one of the following radios: TC900C/CR900C and TC2400/CR2400. An ATS
System is usually combined with a Cross Slope System in order to provide guidance across the entire
cutting edge of the machine.
If the MT900 machine target is used with a SPSx30 total station, a 2400 MHz radio is required.

With a GPS system, one or two GPS receivers are attached to the machine. With single GPS systems,
the receiver is mounted on one of the masts that is located above the cutting edge of the machine at
either end of the blade. With a dual GPS system, the GPS receivers are mounted on masts that are
located above both ends of the cutting edge of the machine.
GPS receives data from a system of satellites that orbit the earth twice a day at very high altitudes.
The orbit radius is approximately 26600 km (16528 miles). GPS was set up by the government of the
United States. GPS provides precise timing and positioning anywhere on earth, 24 hours per day with
no charge to users.
Newer GPS receivers will be able to also receive data from the Global Navigation Satellite System
(GLONASS). GLONASS consists of 21 satellites in 3 orbital planes, with 3 on-orbit spares. The three
orbital planes are separated 120 degrees, and the satellites within the same orbit plane by 45 degrees.
Each satellite completes an orbit in approximately 11 hours 15 minutes. This allows more GPS
satellites to used to for the solution.
In very general terms, a GPS receiver computes a position based on radio signals received from
several different satellites. The satellites have highly reliable clocks, so the timing of these satellite
signals is known very accurately. The GPS receiver calculates the relative distance to each of the
satellites. This calculation is based on the travel time of the signal and the speed of light (speed of the
signal). The receiver then uses these distances in order to calculate the receiver's location on earth.
levels depend on the GPS receivers and the methods that you use.
The four basic levels of position accuracy (1 sigma) that are available in real time (that is,
instantaneously) from GPS are as follows:
• SBAS, 1.0 m (3.3 ft) to 2.0 m (6.6 ft)
• DGPS, 0.3 m (1.0 ft) to 1.0 m (3.0 ft)

Illustration 5 shows the GPS accuracy levels.
GPS accuracy levels
(1) Autonomous
(2) DGPS
(3) RTK Fixed
(4) RTK Float
(5) SBAS
surveyors for stakeout in construction. The method is called Real-Time Kinematic (RTK), GPS.
In order to produce RTK positions two GPS receivers are required. One receiver is known as the GPS
base station and is fixed in one place. The other GPS receiver is known as the rover. This receiver can
be stationary or mobile.
The base station communicates to the rover ('s) through a wireless data link using a data radio.
GPS and the AccuGrade® System
(1) GPS satellites
(2) GPS base station and data radio
Both GPS receivers make observations (measurements) of the GPS signals at the same time. The base
station broadcasts the observed information together with the location and other information across
the data radio link to the rover. The rover then combines the data from the base station together with
its own data in order to compute a very accurate position relative to the base station.
In areas where the 900 MHz band is available, the TC900C or CR900 data radio is recommended. In
areas where the 900 MHz band is not available, one of the following radios is recommended:
• TC450 (450 Mhz)
• TC2400 (2.4 Ghz)
Low accuracy corrected GPS (SBAS)
If low accuracy GPS positions are adequate for the required site work, you can use Satellite-Based
Augmentation System (SBAS) error corrections. SBAS corrected systems do not require additional
site infrastructure.
Satellite-Based Augmentation Systems are free-to-air GPS correction services. SBAS networks
consist of ground stations that are set at known positions around the world, and geo-stationary
satellites that maintain a fixed position above the Earth. The ground stations receive GPS signals from
all GPS satellites in view. The GPS data is then sent to a master control site, which then transmits
GPS corrections to the geostationary satellites. These satellites broadcast the information to all SBAS
enabled GPS receivers.
The following SBAS networks are currently available:
WAAS - Wide Area Augmentation System (United States)
EGNOS - European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (Europe)
MSAS - Multi-Functional Satellite Augmentation System (Japan)
GPS receivers use a GPS receiver configuration file (.cfg) to convert from WGS84 coordinates to the
site coordinate system. High accuracy (RTK) GPS systems use a configuration file generated from the
site calibration. Inaccuracies in the entered position of the base station for the site calibration will
result in a shift of the site coordinate system away from the local circuit coordinate system. When this
configuration file is used by a GPS receiver using RTK, the shift is not exposed, as the relative
positions of points on the site are still accurately known, and the accuracy of RTK positioning is
unaffected. However, if the same configuration file is used by a GPS receiver using SBAS
corrections, the shift in the site coordinate system away from the local circuit is exposed, and results
in additional positioning errors.
To avoid additional errors, do one of the following:
• Make sure the base station antenna position used for the RTK site calibration is accurate to
within about 1 m (3.3 ft). This accuracy can be achieved via traditional surveying methods or
long autonomous GPS occupations. Speak to your site surveyor for more information.
• Use a configuration file generated by the AccuGrade Office software using the local circuit
coordinate system, instead of the configuration file produced by the site calibration.
GPS Site Calibration
Note: A poor quality GPS site calibration will result in poor quality guidance information from the
AccuGrade Grade Control System.
A GPS site calibration is a mathematical relationship between a grid coordinate system (northing,
easting, and elevation) of a project and the GPS coordinate system (latitude, longitude, and ellipsoidal
height - also known as WGS84 coordinates ).
This relationship is determined by using GPS to measure points with known grid coordinates, and
then calculating the calibration parameters.
A surveying or civil engineering company should be employed to establish the control points around a
site. Make sure that you locate the control points where they will not be destroyed during
construction. Five or more control points located at, or near, the corners and center of the project will
normally give good results.
Note: If you employ a GPS surveyor to create the GPS site calibration, make sure that you clearly
specify the requirements. Caterpillar recommends that you give them a copy of this section of the
manual.
Some survey software can do both a full site calibration and a single point calibration.
A single point calibration cannot provide any guarantee of accuracy as the parameters that define a
site calibration will be default values that may have no resemblance to the real values obtained
through a full calibration. A single point calibration should only be employed on small sites with no
existing control. Caterpillar recommends that you carry out a full site calibration to guarantee the
required accuracy all over the site.
When doing a site calibration, pay attention to the following points:
• A minimum of five 3D local grid coordinates (north, east, elevation) and five observed GPS
coordinates (latitude, longitude, height) to provide enough redundancy.
• The set of GPS coordinates must be independently obtained from the set of grid coordinates.
• The selected calibration points should be around the perimeter of the site. Do not work outside
of the area enclosed by the calibration points, as the calibration is not valid beyond this
perimeter.
• When defining the acceptable accuracy limits, the calibration tolerances should not be larger
than the accuracy tolerance for the site.
• When measuring points, use a bipod on a staff or a tripod to maintain stability.
• Check the accuracy of the calibration by visiting other control points that were not used in the
calibration.
Converting The Site Calibration To A GPS Configuration File
When the site calibration is complete, the site surveyor uses a surveying software package to convert
the site calibration data to a calibration file, for example Site.dc.
Once the site calibration file is generated, use AccuGrade Office to convert the calibration to a GPS
configuration file which can then be copied to the data card. For information on how to do this, refer
to the AccuGrade Office Help file.
The site calibration files are stored in the Display rather than the GPS receiver. For this reason, each
time you change site, make sure you update the site calibration files.
To ensure the correct files for each design are in use, do one of the following:
• Make sure there is a valid configuration (.cfg) file for the design in each design folder. When
you load the design the associated configuration file is sent to the receiver.
• Use the GPS Receiver Configuration item in the Setup Menu. This sends the site calibration to
the GPS receiver and updates the parameters held in the Display.
When a GPS receiver configuration (.cfg) file is sent to a GPS receiver, the system resets the receiver
to factory defaults before applying new settings.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02938874
System Components
SMCS - 7220
• Display
• Lightbars
• Location Sensors (GPS Receivers/ATS Target)
• Electric Mast (Laser)
• Angle Sensor
• Radio (GPS/ATS)
• Pressure Sensor
• Bank Valves
• Valve Modules
The components of the AccuGrade system are described below.
Display
The display is a computer that runs the AccuGrade software. The display has a LCD screen that is
used to show guidance information and information about the system. The display also has buttons
that are used to operate the AccuGrade system. In addition, the display has a slot for a data card. The
data card is used to load the data and the data card is used to save the following data:
• Machine configuration data
• Display configuration data

• Design files
Illustration 2 shows the pinout information for the connector on the display.
(1) LCD
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) "+" Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) "-" Key
(10) "OK" Key
(11) Menu Key
(12) "Data Card Slot"
Contact Description Of The Display

Table 1
Pin Function
A BEEPER GND
B SWTCH INPUT 0
C RESERVED
D BATTERY +
E BATTERY +
F BATTERY
G BATTERY -
H RESERVED
J CAN L0
K CAN H0
L CAN H1
M CAN LL
N RS232-TXD 2
P RS232-RXD 2
R RS232-SGND 2
S RS232-SGND 1
T RS232-RXD 1
U RS232-TXD 1
V RESERVED
W RESERVED
X BEEPER
Y SWITCH INPUT 1
Z RESERVED
a RESERVED
b RESERVED
c RESERVED
d CAN SHIELD 0
e CAN SHIELD 1
f RS-232 RTS 0
g RS-232 CTS 0
h RS-232 RXD 0
I RS-232 TXD 0
j RESERVED
k SWITCH INPUT 2
m CHASSIS GND
n AWAKE GND
p AWAKE
q RS-232 SGND 0
r CHASSIS GND
Power Key
Press the power key (6) in order to turn on the display.
Note: If the system detects upgrade files or other system files on the data card, press the escape key in
order to continue without updating the software.
Press the power key and hold the power key (6) for several seconds in order to shut down the display.
This delay reduces the risk of inadvertently shutting off the power. You can turn off the AccuGrade
system from any screen or from any dialog.

The soft key labels (2) are graphical keys that appear at the side of the screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
The soft keys (3) are the six physical keys that are located to the right of the screen of the display. The
function of the physical keys depends on the information that is displayed on the screen of the display.
The function of the physical key is identified by the soft key label that is displayed to the left of the
key.
By default, this manual will refer to a "soft key/function" combination by the soft key label.
In order to activate the displayed function, press the appropriate soft key that is located to the right of
the soft key label. For example, in order to change the blade focus, press the soft key that is located to
the right of the "Blade: Left" soft key label.
The text on a soft key label can show one of the following details:
• When the soft key is pressed one time, a description of the soft key function will be shown.
As a function (soft key) relates to particular screens or dialogs, that functionality is only available
when the appropriate screen or dialog is displayed. For example the new level function is only
available when the design selection screen is displayed, as that function relates only to that screen.
If a soft key has no function in a screen or a dialog, the soft key label is blank.
The text changes when you press the soft key in order to select options. The top line of this soft key
ends with a colon ":" and the bottom line shows the current option or setting. For example, the soft
keys "Blade: Left" and "Blade: Right" show the side of the blade that has focus. The current focus
(Left or Right) shows on the bottom line of the soft key.
Arrow keys
Navigating within menus and lists
Entering data
In the text and number fields in any of the dialogs, complete the following actions:
Panning around the screen

Before you can begin work you must enter the configuration and setup information into the system
Additionally, you must view the current system state. You accomplish these tasks by working with
screens called menus and dialogs. Menus allow you to select a dialog. Dialogs permit you to perform
the following tasks:
• Specify information
• Setup information
• Configure information
Additionally, dialogs allow you to view information about the state of the system components.
(1) LCD
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) "+" Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) "-" Key
(10) "OK" Key
(11) Menu Key
When you are working with the display, you will be using a mix of keys, soft keys, menus, dialogs
• The sensors installed on the machine. Some configuration screens, for example, are only
available when particular sensors are installed.
• The guidance configuration of the system. Your selection of guidance method will affect the
guidance information available on the display and the guidance configuration options you get.
• The operator configuration of the system.
Note: The selection of menus and screens that are set up by your site manager will affect the items
that you can view and modify.
Working with Dialogs
Use the dialogs in order to enter data. Use the dialogs in order for the AccuGrade system to be set up
color.
Press the arrow keys on the display in order to enter data:
• a space
• back to "A"
existing character.
space to the left.

this data.
item.
Warnings
An error, such as the loss of GPS data, will cause inaccurate guidance. When an error occurs, a
warning message flashes on the screen. Guidance via the light bars is not provided under these
conditions. For more information, refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and
Adjusting, KENR5965, "Flashing Messages". Illustration 4 is an example of a warning message.
least 1.5 seconds.
Hourglass
When the system performs an operation that takes more than a few seconds, an hourglass appears.
while the software updates the display after a pan or zoom.
from the data card.
NOTICE
When the data card is in use, a red screen will warn the user not to
remove the card. Wait the screen returns to normal before you remove
the data card, otherwise the data card may be corrupted.
Construction designs are developed in the office with AccuGrade Office software. The construction
designs are saved onto a data card in order to be read by the AccuGrade system. The software
interprets the designs. The software uses the light bars in order to guide your position while you are
working.
A data card is a microchip that can store large amounts of data without the need for a permanent
power supply.
Data cards are used in order to transfer designs between the office, where the designs are created, and
You can use AccuGrade Office software in order to view and retrieve the files on a data card.
Data cards also store the following configuration files:
When the data card is active, a small amber LED indicator beside the slot is illuminated. Do not
remove the data card until this light is off. The data card may be corrupted.
In order to insert a data card, complete the following steps:

(15) Data Card
1. Open the access door in order to access the slot for the data card. The slot is below the keypad
on the display. Refer to Item (12) in Illustration 6.
2. Insert a data card.
(15) Data Card

(15) Data Card
You can use the AccuGrade Office software in order to view files that are on a data card. You
can use AccuGrade Office software in order to retrieve the files that are on a data card.
Information about specific machines can be saved to a data card. This information is held in a
machine settings file, and is used in order to configure the AccuGrade system for a specific machine,
if the display is being shared with several machines.
• The machine type
• The machine dimensions
• Valve calibrations
• Vertical guidance method
• Valve speed
• Blade wear
• Avoidance zones
• GPS accuracy
Note: When you restore display or machine settings, the GPS receiver configuration settings and
brightness settings of the display are not changed.
operators can be saved to a data card by your site manager. This information is held in a display
settings file, and is used to configure the display for a specific operator if the machine is being used
by several operators.
The display settings file includes information about the following settings:
• Alignment selection
• Auto pan
• Blade focus
• Beeper
• Cross section view
• Design information - but not restored
• Horizontal offset
• Layered lift
• Lightbar brightness
• Lightbar scales
• Map recording
• On grade tolerance
• Operator configuration
• Overcut protection
• Perpendicular lift
• Plan view rotation
• Profile view
• Reference surface
• Text views - all
• Units
• Vertical lift
• Vertical offset
• Vertical offset increment
• Working surface
• The text items that are displayed in the guidance screens
• Configuration tasks that can be performed
• Guidance settings that can be changed
Light Bars
The light bars are mounted on the inside of the cab.
The AccuGrade system uses three light bars. Each of the light bars show different information for
• Two vertically-mounted light bars give cut/fill guidance to the blade tip on each side.
• A horizontally-mounted light bar gives horizontal guidance. Horizontal guidance is given to the
blade tip that has focus. Guidance is relative to the currently selected alignment or a defined
horizontal offset.
There are seven sets of LEDs on each light bar. Refer to Illustration 9.
Table 2
Light Bar Connector
PIN SIGNAL
1 POWER
2 GROUND
3 RS232 RX
4 RS232 TX
Switches
Blade Control Lever Switches On R Series and T Series Machines
(A) Trigger Switch
(B) Decrement/"Auto" Button (B)
(C) Increment/"Manual" Button (C)

Table 3
Trigger (A)

button)
In
button) button)
Blade Control Lever Switches On N Series Machines

(A) Trigger Switch
Table 4
Trigger (A)
Activate Auto Controls ("Auto" Button De-activate Auto Controls ("Manual"

Out
(B) ) Button (C) )
In
button) button)
Note: In the remainder of this section, the push button switches on the blade control lever will be
referred to by their function. For example, when you are asked to push the auto button (B), push the
left button while the trigger switch is out.

A set of remote switches plug into the display so that the controls for the AccuGrade system can be
Pressing the switch towards the up arrow increases the offset. Pressing the switch towards the down
arrow decreases the offset.

MWT Module
Automatic Blade Control Lever Switches For K Series
(D) Auto/Manual Switch
(E) Decrement Button
(F) Increment Button

In order to enter auto mode press the auto button (D). Refer to Illustration 18.
In order to increase the offset, press switch (F) . This action will raise the blade. In order to decrease
the offset, press switch (E) . This action will lower the blade.
Table 5
Joystick Switch funcition (1)
Auto (D) Man (E) Man (F) Function
X Decrease Elevation Offset. Lower the blade
X Increase Elevation Offset. Raise the blade.
(1)
"X" denotes switch is activated
Location Sensors
Location sensors are able to determine their location in three dimensional space. The following
sensors are used by the AccuGrade system.
• Global Positioning System (GPS) Receiver
• Advanced Tracking System (ATS)
GPS Receiver
GPS receivers are able to calculate their location using information broadcast from satellites that are
orbiting the earth. GPS receivers must be configured into the system before the information they
provide can be used for guidance.
machine blade, the AccuGrade system uses one or two GPS receivers. The GPS receivers are able to
calculate the location of the machine blade with information broadcast from satellites that are orbiting
the earth. The GPS receivers must be configured into the system before the information the receivers
provide can be used for machine guidance. A GPS receiver is mounted on a mast at each end of the
machine's blade.
Connector
Table 6
Contact Description Of GPS Receiver
Pin Function
A SPARE
B Ground
C CAN 2 L
D CAN 2 S
E Spare
F RS232-TX1
G Power
H Spare
J RS232-RX1
K CAN 1 S
L CAN 1 L
M ID PIN
N CAN 2 H
P CAN 1 H
R RX232-RX2
S RX232-TX2
(17) Power
(18) Data Link
(19) Satellite
The GPS receivers have three LEDs next to the harness connector. The behavior of these LEDs
indicate the status of the receiver. These LED indicators are shown in Illustration 21.
Table 7
Status LED Activity On The GPS Receiver
LED Off Slow Flash Fast Flash On Solid
Power (17)
No Power Power on
Left receiver
receiving CMRs
(19) tracked
(2)
Coil Cable for GPS Receiver
Advanced Tracking Sensor (ATS)

MT900
(25) LED Unit
(26) Prism Unit
The ATS system uses a robotic theodolite in order to track an ATS target that is attached to the blade
of the machine. The ATS system reports the location of the ATS target over a wireless link. An ATS
must be configured into the system before the information it provides can be used for guidance. Refer
to Systems Operation, Testing And Adjusting, Troubleshooting, "Connector Contact Description" for
information about the connectors on the ATS.
A single ATS system, used with cross slope sensors, is able to provide high precision 3D guidance to
both cutting edge tips. An ATS based system is able to provide higher accuracy positioning than GPS,
and can continue to work in circumstances that would degrade GPS performance.
How ATS Works
There are three main parts to an ATS system. These are as follows:
• ATS Target
• ATS Robotic Station
• A Data Radio Link
The ATS Target

MT600
MT900
(25) LED Unit
(26) Prism Unit

MT600
(35) Connector on the ATS Target
The ATS target is mounted on the part of the machine for which you need position information.
Typically, this will be a point at one end of the blade. The ATS target has two sections:
An LED unit - which acts as the target for the ATS robotic station
A prism unit - which acts as a target for the electronic distance measuring (EDM) system
ATS Total Station

ATS Robotic Station
The ATS robotic station is capable of making high precision measurements of the azimuth, altitude
and distance of the ATS target. Specially designed servomotors work with the tracking software to
allow the ATS robotic station to track the ATS target moving at typical machine speeds. If the ATS
target is lost, then the ATS robotic station will try to predict how the ATS target is moving, so that it
can attempt to reacquire the ATS target.
A Data Radio Link
The data radio link consists of two data radios, one at the ATS robotic station, and one on the
machine. The link carries the position of the ATS target, as measured by the ATS robotic station, back
to the AccuGrade system on the machine. The system combines the position of the ATS target,
relative to the ATS robotic station, with the known position of the ATS robotic station, to generate 3D
target positions.
The link also lets the AccuGrade system send commands back to the ATS robotic station.
In order to track the ATS target reliably over a wide range of machine operating speeds, the ATS
robotic station should be no closer than 15.0 m (49.0 ft) to the machine, nor farther than 300.0 m
(984.0 ft) from the machine.
The ATS robotic station must be mounted so that it is free from vibration due to wind or vehicle
movements, and with a clear line of sight to the ATS target over the full work area.
The ATS target is mounted so that the prism unit is vertically above the LED unit.
Contact Descriptions Of The MT600
Connector (ATS)
Table 8
Contact Description Of The ATS
A BAT +
B SELECT A
C CAN HI
D CAN LO
E SELECT B
F BAT -

Table 9
Contact Description Of The ATS
A BAT +
B SELECT A
C CAN HI
D CAN LO
E SELECT B
F BAT -
Laser Receiver
The AccuGrade - Grade Control System uses one or two Laser Receivers. The Laser Receivers are
360 degree omni-directional receivers that detects the laser beam and send information about the
elevation of the laser beam to the AccuGrade - Grade Control System.

Each Laser Receiver is mounted on an electric mast. Illustration 31 shows a Laser Receiver.
Laser Receiver
Table 10
Callout
Feature Function
Photo
Detectors
The power LED will illuminate when power is applied to the Laser
25 Power receiver. The LED will flash slowly if below grade is detected and flash
quickly if above grade is detected.
Electric Mast
The AccuGrade system uses one electric mast. The electric mast is a telescopic receiver mount that is
driven by an electric motor. The mast vertically raises and lowers the ATS target in order to locate the
laser beam from the ATS robotic station.
Electric Mast
Refer to Table 11 for the features and functions of the electric mast:
Table 11
Callout
Feature Function
Raises and lowers the ATS target in order to locate the laser
20 Inner mast tube
beam and to change an existing elevation setting
6-Pin socket receiver Connects the coiled cable from the ATS target to the electric
21
cable connector mast
connector
Contact Description Of The Electric Mast
Connector 1
Table 12
Contact Description Of Electric Mast
Connector 1
A Switched Power
B Switched Power Return
C CAN High
D CAN Low
E Switched Power Return
F Switched Power Return
Connector 2
Table 13
Contact Description Of Electric Mast
Connector 2
A Switched Power
C CAN High
D CAN Low
G Switched Power Return
H Switched Power
I NC
J NC
Angle Sensor
The angle sensor (20) is mounted on the blade. The angle sensor measures the forward/aft pitch of the
blade in order to determine the position of the blade for manual mode operation. The angle sensor is
also used for valve calibrations.
Illustration 36 shows the pinout information for the connector on the angle sensor.
Angle Sensor Connection
Table 14
Contact Description Of The Angle Sensor
A BAT +
B SELECT A
C CAN HI
D CAN LO
E SELECT B
F BAT -
pressure is seen in this circuit, the AccuGrade system will disable the automatic controls. When the
automatic control is disabled, any unwanted motion is prevented. The hydraulic system is in the float
position.
This pressure sensor is located on the hydraulic pump. When pressure is absent in this circuit, the
AccuGrade system will disable the automatic controls. When the automatic control is disabled, any

The valve module interface electrically controls the valves that positions the cutting edge of the
Valve Module Interface
Table 15
A L874-OR Switched Power
B NC
C L854-YL CAN HI
D L855-GN CAN LO
E NC
F T748-PK Power GND
G NC
H NC
I NC
J NC
Table 16
A L875-BR Valve #1 Power
B L876-WH Valve #1 Gnd
C L879-GN Valve #1 Control
D L881-PU Valve #1 Fault
E L877-YL Valve #2 Power
F L878-PK Valve #2 Gnd
G L880-PK Valve #2 Control
H L882-GY Valve #2 Fault
I NC
J NC
Table 17 shows the features and functions of the valve module interface.
Table 17
Callout
Feature Function
24
harness.
lift valve.
lift valve.
tilt valve.
valve.
27 Power Indicator
Interface.
10-socket network
connector
Power Supply Module

The power supply module supplies power to the following components:
• Display
• ATS Target
• Electric Mast
• GPS Receivers
• Radio
• Angle Sensor
• Valve Module Interface
The power supply module includes power conditioning and control circuits, as well as overcurrent
and load dump protection.
Table 18
A L872-BU Switched Power
B T744-WH Power Gnd
C L873-GY Switched Power, Electric Masts
D T745-YL Power Gnd, Electric Masts
E L870-YL Awake
F L871-BU Awake Gnd
G L874-OR Switched Power, Valve Drive Module
H T748-PK Power Gnd, Valve Drive Module
Table 19
A A101-GN/OR Battery 1+
B 200-BK Battery 1-
C A102-BL Battery 2+
D 200-BK Battery 2-
E H899-OR Overcurrent Fault Indication
F NC
G A103-YL Battery 3+
H 200-BK Battery 3-
Table 20
Callout
Feature Function
29
"A" power
30
"B" harness

The implement grade control ECM provides valve control for the lift/tilt control valve, the "pilot
The implement grade control ECM reads the switches and provides switch status information to the
display and also provides the machine interlock status in order to ensure that the AccuGrade system is
The implement grade control ECM stores the calibration values and the machine information for the
display in order to allow the display to be moved from one machine to another.
Table 21
1 Key Switch On
31 Battery + Power
(1)
(2)
Table 22
(1)
(2)

The AccuGrade system signals the implement ECM for the machine in order to control blade
movement. Refer to the Systems Operation Maual of the machine for more details.
Radio
TC Series Data Radio
CR Series Data Radio
The 2400 MHz band radios are used in order to communicate location information for the ATS and
commands from a base station to a machine for precise positioning.
TC Series Data Radio Status Indicator

Table 23
Status
(40)
solid)
site manager.
CR Series Data Radio Status Indicator

The CR Series radio has antenna connections on the top, an electrical connector on the bottom, and a
LED on the front. Refer to Table 24 for the LED states.
Table 24
LED Status Description
LED Off No Power
LED On Solid The Radio has power, but is not synced with the base station.
The Radio has power.
1 Hz flashing LED
The Radio is synchronized and receiving data.
Irregular flashing LED
The Radio is synchronized, but the data is incomplete.

AccuGrade system is in automatic mode. The valve is controlled by the display and valve module
interface via the CAN data link.
(34) Lift Valve
(39) Tilt Valve
The lift/tilt valve is used to control the blade movement.

(50) Bank valve
The bank valve (50) for the AccuGrade system consists of five solenoids. Four of the five solenoids
send pilot oil to the main control valves in order to actuate the control valve spools. The fifth solenoid
acts as a pilot lockout solenoid.
(50) Bank valve
The bank valve (50) for the AccuGrade system is located in the right hand console underneath the
main control valve. The bank valve (50) is accessed by removing the cover and the plate in the cab.

system to make fine corrections easier because the pump is already pre-stroked. For more information
regarding low pressure standby, refer to the System Operation Manual for your machine.
Blade Lift
(50) Bank valve
(56) Resolver
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers

When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be raised, pilot valve (58) remains in the neutral
resolver network in the main control valve. Refer to the System Operation of your machine for more
information.
(50) Bank valve

(56) Resolver
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers
pilot valves can override the AccuGrade system.
AccuGrade system will de-energize. This function only happens when the blade is manually lowered,
The pressure sensor (61) senses the pilot pressure from the pilot valve (58) for the blade lower. The
pressure sensor (61) sends a signal to the ECM. The ECM then disables the AccuGrade system on the
machine hydraulic system. When pressure is not sensed from the pressure sensor (61) in the pilot
circuit for the blade lower, the AccuGrade system is then enabled. This function permits the operator
to use the float function while the AccuGrade system is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt
raise. When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be tilted right or tilted left, pilot valve (58)
remains in the neutral position. Tilt left solenoid (53) and tilt right solenoid (51) for the blade in the
bank valve (50) sends the pilot signal to the tilt control valve (60). Pump oil is then sent to the tilt

(65) Bank valve
(50) Bank valve
The bank valve (65) for the AccuGrade system is located on the front of the main control behind the

regarding low pressure standby, refer to the System Operation Manual for your machine.
Blade Lift
(65) Bank valve

(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be raised, the pilot valve (73) remains in the
neutral position. The blade raise solenoid (69) in the bank valve (65) sends the pilot signal to the side
for lift on the lift control valve (72). Pump oil is then sent to the lift cylinders in order to raise the
blade.
Signal oil from the bank valve (65) is directed to the resolver (71). The resolver (71) determines the
highest pressure between pilot valve (73) and bank valve (65). The highest pressure is then directed to
the resolver network in the main control valve. Refer to the System Operation Manual for your
machine.
(65) Bank valve
(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
If the pilot valve (73) is activated and the AccuGrade system is in the auto grade mode, the resolvers
(74) will only allow the highest oil pressure to pass to the main control valve. The higher pressure
from the pilot valves can override the AccuGrade system.
The pressure sensor (75) senses pilot pressure from the pilot valve (73) for the blade lower. The
circuit for the blade lower, the AccuGrade System is then enabled. This function permits the operator
to use the valve for the quick drop and the float while the AccuGrade system is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt
raise. When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be tilted right or tilted left, the pilot valve
GPS Base Station

The AccuGrade system requires a GPS base station somewhere near the project.
Note: GPS base stations are not supplied by Caterpillar.
A GPS base station consists of the following components.
• GPS Receiver
• GPS Antenna
• Radio
• Cables
• Power Supply
There may also be a tripod or mast for the GPS antenna and the radio, depending on the particular
such as the roof of the site office. A reliable power supply is needed.
Make sure that the base GPS antenna is clear of obstructions, reflected GPS signals (multipath), and
optimum coverage.
The GPS base station requires a starting location. For best results set up the base GPS receiver on a
You must correctly set the GPS antenna type at your base station. If you do not, the GPS position is
degraded.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02977455
Modes of Operation
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade system has three different operating modes.
• Normal mode
• Service mode
The operating modes let you perform different functions within the software. You select a mode when
you turn on the display. The mode that is selected remains active until you turn off the display.
Normal Mode
The AccuGrade system automatically operates in Normal mode when you start up the display. To
start the display, turn the key start switch to the ON position. Press the power key on the display.
By default, the following softkeys are available when the display is in "Normal Mode".
• Select blade tip focus ("Blade:Left or Blade: Right")
• Set the horizontal offsets ("H. Offset:")
• Set the vertical offsets ("V. Offset:")
• Turn map recording on or off (if enabled)
• Set the GPS Accuracy
• Enter Laser screen
• Setup ATS
Normal mode.
• Select Design
• Bench (Laser and Sonic only)
• Vertical Offset
• Horizontal Offset
• GPS Accuracy
• Edit the blade wear value
• Vertical Setup
• Set the light bar scales and on-grade tolerance
• Calibrate Sensors
• Set the valve speed
• Restore the Display settings or the machine settings
• View basic diagnostic information
Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual, SEBU8281 for more details on "Normal" mode
operation.
Service Mode
NOTICE
If you lack experience with the AccuGrade system, use extreme care
when you are in "Service Mode" so that you do not accidentally change
the AccuGrade system settings.
"Service Mode" allows you to have access to all available options that the AccuGrade system offers.
Use "Service Mode" in order to change the settings that affect the operation of the AccuGrade system.
Additionally, use "Service Mode" for the installation of the AccuGrade system.
In order to place the display in the "Service Mode", turn the display "OFF" if the display is "ON".
Press the "OK" key and hold the "OK" key down then press the "POWER" key. Make sure that you
hold down the "OK" key until the display begins to initialize.
In order to disable the "Service" mode, turn the display off.
Use the "Setup Menu - Configuration" screen in order to perform the following when you are in
Service mode:
• Select Design
• Bench (Laser only)

• Vertical Offset
• GPS Accuracy
• Blade wear
• Vertical Offset Increment Switch
• Lightbar Scales
• Map recording
• Valve speed
• Calibrate sensors
• Adjust Bolt hole
• Avoidance Zones
• Text items
• Beeper configurations
• Save and restore settings
• Diagnostics
Use the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog to perform the following when you are in Service mode:
• Set the machine settings
• Set units
• Set machine dimensions
• Set the Radio Network
• Light Bar connections
• Valve calibration
• Turn on Wireless Communication Support
• Turn on Production Recording
• Upgrade firmware
• Software Option
• Enter Software Support Option
• Guidance Hours
• Select Language
Turn the display off in order to exit Service Mode after editing the settings or performing tests on the
GPS Receiver. This ensures that inexperienced users will not inadvertently change the settings of the
AccuGrade system.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02625372
Guidance Terms
SMCS - 7220
Pitch - The forward and aft grade (or mainfall) of the machine.
The GPS receivers accurately calculate the positions of the GPS antennas by utilizing GPS signals
and correction signals from the base station. However, the position of the cutting edge at the blade
tips are the position that the AccuGrade System requires to make cut or fill information.
The Display calculates the position of the cutting edge by utilizing the machine dimensions and the
GPS antenna positions. The position of the blade tips are then compared to the design in order to
calculate cut and fill information.
Heading
The heading is the direction that the machine is traveling, shown in degrees, clockwise from grid
north. 0 degrees equals North, 180 degrees equals South. The heading is calculated by comparing the
left GPS antenna with the right GPS antenna.
Guidance for a single antenna system is not given when the machine has just been started or when the
machine has lost the GPS signal.
The message "Low Accuracy (Move)" flashes on the Display (only if the Mainfall Sensor is not seen).
Otherwise the "Low Accuracy GPS" message will be shown on the Display.
In this situation, wait until you are receiving high accuracy GPS signals again, move in a straight line,
or do both.
Pitch
Pitch is the forward / aft angle of the machine, calculated in degrees from the horizontal (0 degrees).
Pitch is expressed in percentage or Rise:Run depending on the unit settings. The pitch is considered
positive when the angle is above the horizontal (up at the front). The pitch is considered negative
when the angle is below the horizontal (down at the front).
The pitch is calculated with the information from the GPS antenna. The AccuGrade System uses the
pitch of the machine body in order to calculate the blade pitch. In Manual mode, the blade can be at
any pitch and correct blade tip positions are calculated. In Auto mode the blade must be in the as-
measured pitch. The pitch is derived from the design surface. If there is not enough information to
calculate the pitch of the machine, the angle from the horizontal in which to apply the "antenna to
blade" offsets is also unknown. Thus, unless the machine is sitting on a level surface, the blade tip
coordinates are wrong.
The pitch may become inaccurate if one of the following occurs:
• The system is Started up
• The system is reporting low accuracy GPS
• The machine turns sharply
• The machine changes pitch drastically over a short distance
The message "Low Accuracy (Move)" flashes on the Display.
With an AccuGrade System and controls enabled, this occurs when an angle sensor is not connected.
The message Low Accuracy (Pitch) flashes on the Display. In this situation, make sure that the pitch
sensor is connected to the CAN bus. The flashing message disappears.
Orientation
between the two antennas.
Cross Slope
machine. Positive cross slope rises to the right. With respect to the left blade tip, the cross slope is
considered positive when the right blade tip is high, and negative when the right blade tip is low.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02940898
Data Card
SMCS - 7220
Office Computers
The Display uses industry-standard data cards ("CompactFlash") in order to store all of the designs
and other information required for the AccuGrade System. Illustration 1 shows the physical size of the
data card.
(1) Data Card

In order to transfer the data to and from a data card the office computer needs an appropriate reader
for the data card. The type of reader depends on the type of computer available and the operating
system the computer is running. There is no limit to the size of card that may be used.
Notebook Computers
A PC card (PCMCIA) slot is available on most notebook computers. Place the data card into a PC
card adapter and insert the adapter into the PCMCIA slot.
Desktop Computers
numerous third-party solutions available.
Contact your office computer supplier for data card reader solutions.

When an office computer running Microsoft Windows 98, Microsoft Windows 2000, or Microsoft
Windows XP detects a data card (plug and play), the computer assigns the data card the next available
drive letter.
Data Card Errors

Note: Data card errors occur if you pull the data card out of the Display while the data card is in use.
Do not remove the data card until the full screen message has expired.
The AccuGrade System checks the integrity of the data card every five seconds. If the system detects
appears on the screen. The data card may need to be reformatted. Alternatively, replace the data card
Root Folder
file types:
• A Site Map
• Terrain Logging
• Map Recording
• Program log
• Design folders
• Display
• GPS Receiver
• Angle Sensor
• Rotation Sensor
• Sonic Tracer
• Laser Receiver
The file for software support option may be in the root folder. This file is loaded into the Display in
Site Map ("Name.svl", "Site.dxf" or "Name.bg.dxf")

The site map can be in two different formats. The file can be in SV Linework format (".svl") or in a
• "*.svl"
• "Site.dxf"
• "*.bg.dxf"
in the root folder. The software will search and load the first "*.svl" file that is found. If an "*.svl" is
not present, the software searches the root folder for a "Site.dxf" file. The software will load the first
file that is found. If the software does not find a "Site.dxf" file, then the software will search the root
folder for a background DXF ("*.bg.dxf") file. The software will load the first file that is found.
Note: When possible, use the SV Linework ("*.svl") format. These files will load in seconds rather
than minutes.
Site Avoidance Zone
One or more "*.avoid.dxf" or "*. avoid.svl" files may be stored in the root folder of the data card. Site
Avoidance Zone files must be in a valid DXF or SVL format. All "*.dxf" and "*.svl "avoidance zone
files that are in the root directory are loaded.

Map Recording files contain data for coverage mapping. Different types of coverage are recorded into
different "*.cat" files. The files can be identified by the type of coverage that is included in the name
of the file. The following are types of Map recording coverage.
• Coverage
• Ripper
• Cut/Fill
• Terrain
• Radio Coverage
Terrain Logging (Current Terrain "NoDesign.st")

The Terrain Logging file contains recorded terrain data. This data can be used in order to build a
Log Files
The AccuGrade System automatically creates two log files in the root folder. Log files contain
When the "LOG_*.txt" file reaches 512 KB in size, the file is copied to the "LOG_*.old" file. If there
is already a "LOG_*.old" file in the root folder, then the program will overwrite this file. The data in
the older file is lost.
Note: "*" represents the serial number and time stamp.
files.
If a problem occurs with the system, you must E-mail these files to your support person for analysis.
Display Settings file ("Display**.DSP")

When the AccuGrade System creates this file, the file is placed in the root folder of the data card.
The system uses the Display files for the Display Settings in order to save and restore the following
settings:
• "Auto Pan"
• "Blade Focus"
• "Beeper"
• "Layered Lift"
• "Map Recording"
• "Profile View"
• "Training Mode"
• "Units"
• "Vertical Lift"
The default name for Display Setting is "Display**.DSP". "**" represents the sequential number that
Display Settings. Files for the Display Settings can be used on all machine types. The file for the
Display Settings may be assigned a unique name by using the arrow keys in order to enter text.
Note: The Display Configuration can be set up for different operators or for different sites such as
roads versus jobs on a site. Keep the appropriate Display Configuration for your machine in the root
Machine Settings ("name.MCH")
following settings:
The "MCH" File contains:
• "Blade Wear"
• "FTP Support"
• "GPS Accuracy"
• "GPS Port"
• "Machine Radio Network"
• "Valve Calibration"
• "Valve Speed"
The default name for a Motor Grader is "GRADER**.MCH". "**" represents a sequential number
that starts at 01. The system creates the sequential number in order to distinguish between different
machine settings.
Note: Keep the appropriate Display Configuration for your machine in the root folder of the data
card.
GPS Receiver Configuration ("*.cfg")

Display Upgrade
When you upgrade the display, copy the "*.sg2" file to the root folder of the data card.
AccuGrade system, the system asks if you want to upgrade the display firmware.

In order to perform a GPS Receiver firmware upgrade from the display you need the following files:
• New GPS receiver firmware "file.s" extension
Copy this file to the root folder of the data card only when you must upgrade the GPS receiver.
AccuGrade system, the system asks if you want to upgrade the GPS Receiver.
Note: The required file may also be available in the "Upgrade Firmware" menu.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02982740
Design Folder
SMCS - 7220
Design folders are placed in the root folder. The design folder must contain a design surface file. The
design folder can also contain the following:
• A Reference surface file
Design Surfaces
• Road (.dc)
• TIN (.svd or .ttm)
• Grid (.dtx)
• Slope (.tsd)
• Level (.tsd)
Note: Use the AccuGrade Office design formats (.svd and .svl). These files will load and operate
more efficiently.
The cut or fill calculation is the vertical difference from the blade tip and the design elevation at that
point for both blade tips. The design grade is based on a defined design surface, which can be either
planar or irregular. The design surface is created in one of the following ways:
• From the keypad of the AccuGrade System. Normally you use this method for planar on-site
design surfaces that the AccuGrade Office software supports.
SV Design Files
SV design and linework files (*.svd and *.svl) were developed in order to maximize the efficiency of
the AccuGrade System. These files allow very large designs to be loaded without subdividing them.
This allows the machine to work over a greater area without changing design. Use the AccuGrade
Office Software in order to convert your digital design to the .svd format.
Road Files
Road files use the Data Collector (*.dc) file format (versions 6.5, 7.0 and 7.5) or SDR file format
a design to a format that AccuGrade Software supports.
Table 1
Road files
If the format is a road in ... use the ...
AccuGrade Office
a data format that the AccuGrade Office Software supports
Software
AccuGrade Office
a paper plan
Software
an electronic format that theAccuGrade Office Software does not support Trimble Exchange
but the Trimble Exchange software supports software
TIN Files
the AccuGrade System, create the TIN as a .ttm file.
The AccuGrade System can use these formats directly. Alternatively, use the AccuGrade Office
Software to convert the TIN or ttm files to a svd file format.
Grid Files
A grid file is a rectangular grid of points. A height is assigned to each point in the grid. Normally this
grid of points is derived from a TIN or contour model.
In order to transfer grid DTM data into the AccuGrade System, create the grid in .dtx file format. The
Alternatively, use the AccuGrade Office Software to convert the DTM or dtx files to a .svd file
format.

and edit existing sloping designs in the field using the Display. Refer to Operation and Maintenance
In order to create a new sloping surface design in the office, use the AccuGrade Office Software.

A level surface design contains a name and a height.
In order to create a new level surface design in the office, use the AccuGrade Office Software. With

Another type of file in the design folder can be the Reference Surface file. A reference surface
modifies one of the previous design types. This file is used in order to give vertical guidance at
predetermined distances above or below the design surface.
A number of reference surfaces can be held in the same Reference Surface file.
In order to create a Reference Surface file in the office, use the AccuGrade Office Software or a text
editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
Note: An .ofs file will not be used if the .ofs file is in a design folder with a .svd file. This is because
the .svd files include reference surfaces as part of the design.
The Background Plan file is stored in a folder with a design. The Background Plan file is loaded when
the design is loaded. The Background Plan file shows any detail that is relevant to the design that the
file is associated with. You can select any line in this file for horizontal guidance.
Typical Background Plan files contain the following items:
• Contour lines
• Road alignments
The file can also show features by color. Hazards such as buried pipes and overhead wires are colored
red to alert the operator. Water features can be blue.
The AccuGrade System supports two different Background Plan file formats. The system can be in
AccuGrade Office Software Linework format (.svl) or .dxf format.
The background plan file needs to be named one of the following:
• *.svl
• Background.dxf
• *.bg.dxf
The Background Plan loads when the design is loaded. There should be only one Background Plan
file in the design folder. The software searches for a *.svl file and loads the first *.svl file found. If a
*.svl is not present, the software searches for a Background.dxf file. If the software does not find a
Background.dxf file, the software searches for a *.bg.dxf.
Note: Use the SV Linework (*.svl) format. These svl formats are the most efficient for the
AccuGrade System.

Design Avoidance Zone files provide information about specific areas on the design that must be
avoided. One or more *.avoid.dxf or *.avoid.svl files are stored in the design folder of the data card.
The files are always loaded when present. Design Avoidance Zone files must be in *.svl or a
valid .dxf format.
Map Recording Files

Map recording files are created in the field during machine operation. Unlike other files in the design
folder the Map Recording files are not prepared in the office.
Map Recording files such Ripper Coverage contain position information and attribute information that
can be displayed on the plan view. Map Recording can be configured in order to record and display
different types of information such as position information.
The Map Recording files are stored within the current design directory or in the root directory if no
design is selected. Individual Map Recording files are created for the different map recording types.
The Map Recording file name includes the design name and the map recording type. All of the Map
Recording files have a *.cat extension. The AccuGrade System loads the appropriate Map Recording
The following is the naming convention for the Map Recording files.

Terrain logging files are created in the field during machine operation. Unlike other files in the design
folder the Terrain logging files are not prepared in the office.
The Terrain Logging file contains the recorded terrain data. This data can be used in order to build
file is saved to the relevant design folder. However, if no design is loaded then the .st file is saved to
the root folder. The file in the design folder is called Current Terrain <Designname>.st. You must
import this file into the AccuGrade Office Software in order to build the current terrain model and the
radio coverage map.

Note: Always check the coordinates of your blade against a surveyed stake after you load a new .cfg
file.
The .cfg file is stored in either the design folder or the root folder of the data card. When the .cfg file
is in the design folder the AccuGrade System automatically sends the .cfg file to the GPS Receivers
when the design is loaded.
The .cfg file contains the local coordinate system parameters and the GPS calibration parameters.
In order to create the .cfg file use the AccuGrade Office Software or the Configuration Toolbox
software.
DXF Files
AccuGrade System projects can contain three types of DXF files:
• The Site Map (.bg.dxf) file

• The Site and Design avoidance zone (.avoid.dxf) files
• The Background Plan (.bg.dxf) file
Note: Caterpillar recommends that you use the .svd and .svl file types, in preference to DXF format
files. These file types load faster.
Creating DXF Files

Caterpillar recommends that you use AccuGrade Office Software to convert your DXF files to .svl
files. Typical Computer Aided Design (CAD) systems use hundreds of megabytes of RAM and
sometimes multiple processors to manage the large data files with which they work. In contrast, for
the AccuGrade System, the DXF files should be as small as possible since the system must provide
real-time guidance five times a second to an operator. Smaller files load, zoom, and pan more quickly.
When you create the DXF files with the CAD process, you can make the files smaller with very little
effort.
Note: When you create a DXF file for the AccuGrade System, do not include layers which are turned
off (or frozen) in your CAD package.
Note: The DXF file format does not contain any information on the units used (feet or meters). As all
DXF drawing files do not have units, make sure that the AccuGrade System uses the same units that
were used when the DXF file was created.
When you create a DXF file, complete the following steps:
1. Make a copy of your CAD design and decide on the information that you need in the
AccuGrade System.
2. Delete all information that you do not want to see in the AccuGrade System.
3. Make sure that all layers are turned on (and are thawed) in your CAD package. Delete all
duplicate points and other duplicate entities.
4. Only have simple closed polygons defined in your avoidance zone DXF.
5. Create the DXF file.
6. Use the AccuGrade Office Software to convert the DXF file to a .svl file.
Note: You can create a file using any design software that can make a DXF file in the CAD .dxf
format, but the file must also conform to the requirements of Caterpillar. AccuGrade Office Software
checks that the file is small enough and shows you what it will look like on the Display.
Note: If you use AutoCAD® 2000 to produce your DXF file, make sure that you explode any AEC
entities before you save the file as an AutoCAD® R14 DXF file.
If the file is not small enough, try the following actions:
• Save the file as an .svl format file from AccuGrade Office Software.
• Check any curving polylines. You may be able to delete every second point that describes a
curve and still keep the shape accurate enough for the AccuGrade System. There is usually a
parameter in the design software that you can set to control the number of points.
• If you show contour lines, you may be able to show every second contour line and still show
enough information to the operator.
• Check that you do not show more of a work area than you need. You may be able to make the
file smaller by showing a work area in two parts. The parts can include a small overlap rather
than a hard cutoff between adjacent designs. Use AccuGrade Office Software to subset files
easily.

If you do not use .svd and .svl file types, a large design size, large DXF Site Map, avoidance zones,
and/or Background Plan files can cause problems in the AccuGrade System.
The AccuGrade System may not have enough memory to load a design, DXF Site Map, avoidance
zones, or Background Plan file from the data card.
When this occurs, a message states that the combined size of the design, DXF Site Map, avoidance
zones, and Background Plan files is too large for the system. To solve this issue, convert the design
files to .svd files and the DXF linework files to .svl format where possible. Alternatively, review and
reduce the size of your design and/or DXF files.
Note: To guarantee that your design, Site Map, avoidance zones, and Background Plan files will load
in the AccuGrade System, use the AccuGrade Office Software on a computer that is running the
Windows® 2000 or Windows® XP operating system.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02942132
Flashing Messages
SMCS - 7220
General Warning Messages

Table 1
Message Problem Solution
You have entered an Avoidance
"Avoid. Zone Zone. This is an area that has Use plan view to guide your machine out of
Entered" been designated as unsuitable for the Avoidance Zone.
machine operation.
The set of dimensions that has
been entered is incomplete, or Refer to Systems Operation, KENR5965,
"Check
inconsistent with a machine "Display Settings" in order to restore a
Machine
dimension that can be measured machine settings file. Otherwise, ask your
Dimensions"
by the system (e.g., the distance site manager to enter the correct machine
between the two receivers in a measurements.
dual-GPS system).
Refer to Special Instruction, REHS3269,
"Check "Installation of AccuGrade ® GPS Version
The stored machine settings are 10.8 For All Track-Type Tractors" in order
Machine
invalid. install a suitable machine settings file.
Type"
Otherwise, ask your site manager to correct
the system configuration.
View the "Diagnostics Menu" in order to
check the status of the sensors. Otherwise,
The vertical guidance method
follow the procedure described in Systems
"Check V. selected is not compatible with
Operation, SEBU8290, "Vertical Guidance
Setup" the attached or configured
Method - Set" in order to choose a vertical
sensors.
guidance method supported by the available
sensors.
Move the machine for a short distance. If the
"Direction The system is unsure of the message still appears, refer to
Unknown" direction the machine is facing. Troubleshooting, KENR5966, "Machine
Position".
The control box is loading the
"Loading Wait for the message to stop. The message
current design information or
Data" will disappear after a short period.
Layered Lift surface.
You have tried to use a feature
"Option Not Ask your site manager to provide an option
that needs a valid option key
Installed" key for the feature you want to use.
entered.
"Unknown The system has encountered an
Status" unexpected error.
ATS Warning Messages

Table 2
ATS Warning Messages
"No ATS The ATS is not currently operating as Start the ATS and check that it is locked
Data" part of the AccuGrade System. onto the target.
"Check The system cannot communicate with
Check that the radio is powered. Check
Machine the data radio on the machine.
the cable to the radio.
Radio"
"Check ATS The system cannot communicate with Check that the radio is powered. Check
Radio" the data radio for the ATS. the cable to the radio.
"Check ATS The system detected that the ATS Replace the battery with a fully charged
Battery" battery is low. one.
"Level ATS" The tilt compensator on the ATS is out
Level the ATS mount.
of range.
Check that there is a clear line of sight
to between the ATS and the target, that
the target is within range of the ATS,
"Search For The ATS lost lock on the target, or was
and that the machine is within the search
Machine unable to acquire the target after
window.
Target" searching.
Inspect the rubber isolators on the shock
mount for wear (cracks or tears).
Replace the rubber isolators.
The target needs to be benched because
"Bench ATS"
the ATS height was not entered when Bench the target.
the instrument was set up.
"Multiple The radio network ID/channel number
ATS combination setup for your machine Contact your site supervisor.
Detected" and instrument is also being used by
another instrument within radio range.
The radio network ID/channel number

Check Radio combination setup for your system is
Contact your site supervisor.
Channel also being used by another machine that
is within radio range.
GPS And Survey Laser Receiver Warning Messages

Table 3
GPS And Survey Laser Receiver Warning Messages
The survey laser receiver has not
"Bench Laser"
been benched, and is not providing
elevation data.
"Check Laser The system cannot communicate
Receiver" with the survey laser receiver.
View the Diagnostics dialog to check that
"Check
The system cannot communicate all devices are responding.
Machine
with the machine's data radio. Refer to Troubleshooting, KENR5966,
Radio"
"Machine Radio".
The measured height of the laser
"GPS - Laser plane is different from the height
Mismatch" calculated using the laser setup
information.
Perform one or more of the following
There is a problem with a GPS
actions:
receiver output configuration. The
"Invalid GPS - Restore the correct machine settings file.
coordinate system may be missing
Config." - Ask the site manager to enter the correct
from a GPS receiver configuration.
measurements.
- Perform a machine measure up.
The measured height of the laser
"Laser Out Of plane is very different from the
Range" height calculated using the laser
setup information.
Refer to Systems Operationl, KENR5965,
"Low The GPS error estimate has
"GPS Accuracy Mode".
Accuracy exceeded the limit set by the GPS
Refer to Systems Operation, KENR5966,
(GPS)" Accuracy Mode.
"Diagnostic Capabilities".
Re-initialize the machine orientation.
The machine has not travelled far
"Low Initialize single-3D sensor orientation and
enough in its current direction to
Accuracy pitch for the machine. For dual-GPS
determine machine pitch and
(Move)" machines, Initialize a dual-GPS pitch for the
heading.
machine.
Check the cable, power, and connections.
Check the physical condition of the GPS
No positions are being generated
"No GPS Data receivers.
for a GPS receiver on a single-GPS
(Center)" Turn off the Display and then turn the
bulldozer.
Display back on. If problems continue,
contact your supervisor.
Check the cable, power, and connections for
the left receiver.
Positions are being generated for Turn off the Display and then turn the
"No GPS Data
the right GPS receiver but not for Display back on. If problems continue,
(Left)"
the left. contact your supervisor.
If problems continue, contact your
supervisor.
Check the cable, power, and connections for
the right receiver.
Positions are being generated for Turn off the Display and then turn the
"No GPS Data
the left GPS receiver but not for Display back on. If problems continue,
(Right)"
the right. contact your supervisor.
If problems continue, contact your
supervisor.
"No Laser The laser transmitter you want to
Transmitter work with has not been selected
Setup" and/or configured.
The system can communicate with Check that the laser receiver is receiving
the survey laser receiver, but the laser strikes. Check the laser transmitter is
"No Laser"
laser receiver is not generating visible to the laser receiver. Check that the
data. laser transmitter is turned on.
The survey laser receiver is tilted Reduce the tilt of the machine or the slope
"No Laser
too far out of vertical to give of the blade, so that the survey laser receiver
(Tilt)"
accurate elevation readings. is less than 10 degrees out of vertical.
There has been no GPS data
coming from one or both GPS
receivers for at least 1.5 seconds.
This could be caused by one of the Check the cable, power, and connections.
"No GPS following reasons: Check the physical condition of the GPS
Receiver different firmware versions on the receivers. Turn off the control box and turn
Data" GPS receivers of a dual GPS it back on. If problems continue, contact
system your site manager.
a problem with a GPS receiver
a cabling fault, or a problem with a
GPS receiver configuration
Check the cable, power, and connections.
"Old Position" A position is not being generated
Check the physical condition of the GPS
by one, or both, GPS receivers.
receivers.
"V. Low The system is receiving Check that the radio is powered and
Accuracy autonomous GPS positions from synched.Check the data radio cable. Ask
(GPS)" one or both GPS receivers. your site manager to check the GPS base
station and any repeaters in the radio
network are working correctly.
Conventional Laser Receiver Warning Messages

Table 4
Conventional Laser Receiver Warning Messages
"Bench The laser will not generate lift Bench the laser receiver. Refer to Operation and
Center information until the system is Maintenance Manual, SEBU8290,
Laser" benched. "Configuration (Benching the Laser)".
"Bench The laser will not generate lift Bench the laser receiver. Refer to Operation and
Left Laser" information until the system is Maintenance Manual, SEBU8290,
benched. "Configuration (Benching the Laser)".
Bench The laser will not generate lift Bench the laser receiver. Refer to Operation and
Right Laser information until the system is Maintenance Manual, SEBU8290,
benched. "Configuration (Benching the Laser)".
"Check
Check that the laser receiver is powered. Check
Center
The system cannot communicate the laser receiver cable. Refer to Systems
Laser
with the laser receiver. Operation, KENR5966, "Diagnostic
Receiver"
Capabilities".
"Check Check that the laser receiver is powered. Check

Left Laser The system cannot communicate the laser receiver cable. Refer to Systems
Receiver" with the laser receiver. Operation, KENR5966, "Diagnostic
Capabilities".
"Check Check that the laser receiver is powered. Check
Right Laser The system cannot communicate the laser receiver cable. Refer to Systems
Receiver" with the laser receiver. Operation, KENR5966, "Diagnostic
Capabilities".
Move the blade up or down to return the laser
strike to within ±
10.0 cm (4.0 inch) of the benched position.
For systems using a survey laser
"Laser Otherwise, the Increment/Decrement offset
for lift guidance, the laser strike
Outside switches moves the bench window as the offset
is no longer within ±
Bench is increased or decreased. Otherwise, use the
10.0 cm (4.0 inch) of the benched
Window" procedure in Bench a survey laser receiver.
position.
Refer to Operation and Maintenance Manual,
SEBU8290, "Configuration (Benching the
Laser)".
"No Center Check the laser transmitter is visible to the laser
The center laser receiver is not
Laser receiver. Check that the laser transmitter is
detecting any laser strikes.
Strikes" turned on.
"No Left Check the laser transmitter is visible to the laser
The left laser receiver is not
Strikes" turned on.
"No Right Check the laser transmitter is visible to the laser
The right laser receiver is not
Strikes" turned on.
When using manual masts, the Use the increment/decrement switch to move the
increment/decrement switch has laser receiver into the laser beam. Bench the
"Offset Too
changed the vertical offset value laser receivers. Refer to Operation and
Large"
such that the laser receiver is no Maintenance Manual, SEBU8290,
longer receiving laser strikes. "Configuration (Benching the Laser)".
Electric Mast Warning Messages

Table 5
Electric Mast Warning Messages
The center electric mast has been
"Center EM You can return the masts to their benched
moved from its benched extension
Not At Bench height by pressing the Return button to
using the Raise and Lower Mast(s)
Height" bench softkey in the Laser dialog.
softkeys.
When changing the vertical offset Ask your site manager to change the
"Center EM
using the remote switches, the center elevation of the laser transmitter to a
Out of Range"
electric mast is cannot be raised or suitable height for the working position of
lowered any further. the blade. Bench the laser receivers.
"Check Center The system cannot communicate
"Diagnostic Capabilities"
EM" with the center electric mast.
Check the cables.
"Check Left The system cannot communicate
EM" with the left electric mast.
Check the cables.
"Check Right The system cannot communicate
EM" with the right electric mast.
Check the cables.
The left electric mast has been
"Left EM Not
moved from its benched extension Return Masts to Bench height in order to
At Bench
using the Raise and Lower Mast(s) return the mast to its benched extension.
Height"
softkeys.
Ask your site manager to change the
When changing the vertical offset
elevation of the laser transmitter to a
"Left EM Out using the remote switches, the left
suitable height for the working position of
Of Range" electric mast is cannot be raised or
the blade. Then bench the laser receivers.
lowered any further.
The right electric mast has been
"Right EM Return the Masts to their Bench height in
moved from its benched extension
Not At Bench order to return the mast to its benched
using the Raise and Lower Mast(s)
Height" extension.
softkeys.
When changing the vertical offset Ask your site manager to change the
"Right EM
using the remote switches, the right elevation of the laser transmitter to a
Out Of
electric mast is cannot be raised or suitable height for the working position of
Range"
lowered any further. the blade, then bench the laser receivers.
Automatic Controls Warning Messages

Table 6
Automatic Controls Warning Messages
"Check
The system cannot communicate with "Diagnostic Capabilities". Check to ensure
Valve
the valve module. that the valve module has been detected.
Module"
Check the cables.
The left blade lift ram automatic
Restore a machine settings file with a
control valve has not been calibrated.
"Calibrate complete valve calibration for the valve
Valve calibration has not been
Left Valve" module installed on your machine.
completed, or an incomplete valve
Otherwise, as your site manager to
calibration was loaded when machine
complete the valve calibration.
settings were restored.
The blade lift ram automatic control
valve has not been calibrated. Valve
calibration has not been completed, or
Lift Valve" module installed on your machine.
an incomplete valve calibration was
loaded when machine settings were
restored.
The right blade lift ram automatic
Right Valve" module installed on your machine.
The blade sideshift ram automatic
Sideshift module installed on your machine.
Valve" Otherwise, as your site manager to
"Calibrate The blade tilt ram automatic control

Tilt Valve" valve has not been calibrated. Valve
complete valve calibration for the valve
calibration has not been completed, or
module installed on your machine.
an incomplete valve calibration was
loaded when machine settings were Otherwise, as your site manager to
restored. complete the valve calibration.
The automatic control valves for two complete valve calibration for the valve
"Calibrate
or more blade rams have not been module installed on your machine.
Valves"
calibrated. Otherwise, as your site manager to
"Low Re-initialize the machine pitch data.
The system does not have any reliable
Accuracy Initialize the single-3D sensor machine's
machine pitch data.
(Move)" orientation and pitch.
Automatic control of sideshift is only
The machine is moving backwards available when the machine is moving
"Move
with automatic sideshift control forwards. Deactivate automatic control of
Forward"
activated. sideshift.
Otherwise, drive the machine forwards.
No design is loaded. The previously
loaded design may not be on the data
"No Design Load a design, or check that the card
card.
Loaded" containing the design is still inserted.
The card has been removed while the
file is loading.
"No Automatic sideshift control was Set sideshift control to Manual.
Alignment activated, but no horizontal alignment Select horizontal alignment.
Selected" has been selected. Set sideshift control to Auto.
While in the Auto state, one or both
"Off Design"
blade tips are outside the area covered Drive back onto the design. (1)
by the design.
A blade tip that is in the Auto state is Manually adjust the position of the blade
"Off Grade" above or below the working surface by tip(s). Adjust the vertical offset to a
more than half the vertical tolerance suitable setting. Pass over the area again.
for longer than 3 seconds.
Adjust the vertical offset to move the
The one or both blade tips have moved working surface closer to the blade
"Out of Auto above or below the working surface by position. Otherwise, move the blade closer
Range" more than to the working surface. Otherwise, ask
20.0 cm (7.9 inch) your site manager to set the Auto Controls
Range Limit to "None". (2)
(1)
After 60 seconds off design, automatic controls go to the Inactive-Auto state.
(2)
After 60 seconds out of range, automatic controls go to the Inactive-Auto state.
ARO Warning Messages

Table 7
ARO Warning Messages
"Check A4:M1 The machine management controller is not
Contact your site manager.
Options" configured to operate with the system.
The following conditions apply:
1. Automatic controls are active
1. Return the automatic
2. You have not operated any switches or
controls to manual.
"Check Gear" buttons for more than 60 seconds
2. Re-activate automatic
3. The machine has been in Neutral gear for
controls.
more than 60 seconds and the Park brake is off

controls to manual.
"Check You have tried to use automatic controls when 2. Check the state of the
Hydraulics the implement lockout switch is on. Otherwise, implement lockout switch.
System" the hydraulic system has failed. 3. Re-activate automatic
controls. Otherwise, talk to
your site manager.
controls to manual.
You have tried to use the automatic controls 2. Check the state of the Park
"Check Park
with the Park brake on. Otherwise, there is a brake.
Brake"
minor system fault. 3. Re-activate automatic
controls. Otherwise, talk to
your site manager.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02625559
Radio Utility
SMCS - 7220
"Machine Radio Configuration"

The "Machine Radio Configuration" utility allows you to change the network number or the
frequency channel on Data Radios. The "Machine Radio Configuration" utility runs on the Display.
To open the "Machine Radio Configuration" dialog, complete the following steps:
1. In Service mode, select the "Installation" Soft Key from the "Setup" menu.
2. Press the up arrow or the down arrow until "Machine Radio Configuration" is highlighted.
4. Use the Arrow Keys (8) in order to select the same network as the base station for TC900C
Radios. Use the Arrow Keys (8) to select the same frequency as the base station for TC450C
Radios.
"Display's Radio Port"

When a third party radio is used, the Display for the AccuGrade System allows the user to adjust the
following communication parameters:
• Baud Rate
• Parity
The "Display's Radio Port" settings sets the speed at which the Display communicates with the radio.
These settings do not affect the speed of data transfer though the air between radios. Refer to the
following Steps in order to adjust the "Display's Radio Port" settings.
(1) LCD
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) "+" Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) "-" Key
(10) "OK" Key
(11) Menu Key
1. To view all options in the "Setup Menu" dialog you must start the AccuGrade System in
"Service" mode.
Note: Hold the "OK" Key (10) while pressing the Power Key (6) in order to start the
AccuGrade System in "Service" mode.
2. Press the Menu Key (11) until the Soft Key Label "Setup Menu" is shown. Press the Soft Key
(3) beside the "Setup Menu" Soft Key Label.
3. Select the Soft Key that is located beside the "Installation" Soft Key Label from the "Setup"
menu.
4. Press the up arrow or the down arrow until "Display's Radio Port" is highlighted.
5. Press the "OK" Key (10) .
6. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to adjust the "Baud Rate". Press the Next Key (5)
in order to toggle between the Display Radio Port fields
7. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to adjust the "Parity".
8. Press the "OK" Key (10) .
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02625557
Receiver Firmware Upgrade

SMCS - 7010
The "CAN" device firmware files allow you to upgrade the GPS receivers and the Angle Sensor to the
current firmware versions. In order to complete the upgrade, use the display. The controls device
firmware files are available on the AccuGrade system software CD in the "CAN Device Firmware"
folder. The controls device firmware files are also available on SISWeb.
1. Use a computer in order to copy the upgrade files to the root folder of a data card. There are
two types of firmware upgrade files:
MS980 loader files - MSMONnnn.s (where nnn is the version number). This loader upgrade
file is available on SISWEB.
Application upgrade files - AAAAA nnn.S, where AAAAA is the unit type, and nnn is the
version number. This upgrade file is available on the AccuGrade system software CD in the
"CAN Device Firmware" folder that is named "MS980100.S".
2. Place the data card, with the firmware on the root directory, into the display.
Note: For the latest version of firmware, use SISWeb.
3. Start the display in "Service" mode.
4. From the "Setup Menu" screen, press the "Installation" softkey in order to list the items that are
under the "Setup Menu - Installation" menu.
7. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to highlight either the "MS980" file or the
"MS980 Loader" file.
A dialog that is similar to Illustration 2 will appear.
The screen displays the current application and loader version of the two GPS receivers. It also
prompts you to select which receiver to upgrade.
9. Disconnect all components that are in the AccuGrade system including the opposite GPS
receiver, slope sensor, and radio.
10. Press the down arrow or the up arrow in order to select "MS980 - Left" or "MS980 - Right".
Note: You must upgrade both the left GPS receiver and right GPS receiver to the same
application and loader firmware versions.
of the upgrade.
12. Repeat Step 1 through Step 11 for the other GPS receiver.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02953445
Display Registration and Activation

SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade display must be registered and activated by the dealer before it can be used.
When you register the display, you will receive a unique registration key to be used in order to
activate the display. This registration process will allow for display to be upgraded as software
upgrades are released.
Note: The electronic control module will also need to be activated before the AccuGrade system can
be used.
Obtaining A Registration Key

Example of the Registration Page
Refer to the following Steps in order to obtain the registration key for the activation of a new display.
1. Record the serial number that is located on the identification plate on the display.
2. Go to the following website: "www.techproductregistration.com".
Refer to Illustration 1 for an example of the registration form.
Note: If access to the web site is not available, call 888-223-7539 in order to register the
software manually.
3. Complete the registration form that is found on the website.
Note: The web screen may need to refresh after entering information into the different fields.
Refer to Special Instruction, REHS3666 for detailed information.
4. Select "Confirm".
Within 30 minutes an e-mail will be sent to the e-mail address of the dealer that was submitted
on the web form. This e-mail will have the registration key number that is needed in order to
activate the display.
5. Provide the registration key number to the appropriate person in order to enter the number into
the display.
Save this registration information for future reference.
Entering A Registration Key Into The Display

Refer to the following steps in order to enter a registration key into the display.
1. Power on the system up by turning key start switch of the machine to the ON position and
pressing the power key.
The display will power up. A screen that is similar to Illustration 2 will appear.
2. Perform one of the two options below:
◦ Copy the registration key file that was obtained to the root folder of the data card. Press
"OK".
◦ Enter the 24 character option key that was obtained. Use the arrow keys on the keypad of
the display. Press "OK" key.
If successful, the "Option Keys File Loaded" dialog appears. Refer to Illustration 4. This
indicates that one option key has been loaded successfully.
The "Plan View" appears.
Note: If the key does not activate, verify that key was entered correctly. Verify that the serial
number on identification plate is the same as electronic serial number.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02983088

SMCS - 7220
The firmware file for the display is available on SIS in the "Downloads" page. The file is used to
upgrade the display.
Upgrade the firmware for the display for the following reason only:
• You want a more recent version.
NOTICE
The upgrade procedure returns the AccuGrade system settings to

Display Firmware - Upgrade Procedure

Required Equipment
You need the following equipment in order to upgrade your display firmware and then enable the
option keys.
• The display and your power supply
• the display firmware upgrade file from SISWeb
• A data card
• A PC card adapter
• A PC that can communicate with the data card

Before Starting the Upgrade
Before you start, ensure that you save your machine settings to a file and make a permanent paper
record of the system settings for the machine.
Perform the following steps in order to save the display settings and the machine settings:
1. Press and hold down the "OK" key and power on the display in order to enter service mode.
2. In the "Setup Menu - Configuration" menu, select the "Save Settings" option.
3. Select "Machine Settings".
Change the name of the file in order to make the name unique for that machine.
Note: The serial number for the machine may be used.
Upgrading the Display Firmware

Do the following in order to upgrade the display firmware.
1. Obtain the latest firmware file from the "Downloads" page of SIS Web.
2. Copy the ".SG2" file and ".bin" files (if required) to the root directory of the data card.
3. Update the firmware for the display.
4. Update the option keys, if required
5. Restore the display settings.
6. Restore the machine settings.
Copying the Files to the Data Card
1. Use an office PC in order to copy the appropriate AccuGrade display file that was obtained
from SISWeb to the root directory of the data card.
2. Turn off the display.
3. Insert the data card into the display.
4. Press the power key in order to turn on the display.
Note: Do not turn off the display until Step 7.
If ".bin" files are required, you will be prompted to update each of the files. Press the "OK" key
in order to upgrade each ".bin" file.
The display detects all ".SG2" files and lists the files on the "Select Display Software File for
Upgrade" screen.
5. Use the up arrow key and the down arrow key in order to select the file you want to upgrade to.
Press the "OK" key in order to continue.
6. The "Update Display Software - New Version Detected" confirmation screen will appear. Press
the "OK" key in order to start the upgrade process. Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel the
upgrade.
Stage one of the firmware upgrade starts automatically. The firmware upgrade is copied into the
temporary memory.
Stage two then starts automatically. The upgrade firmware is verified in internal memory, and
the temporary memory is erased.
7. When you are prompted, press the "OK" key.
Upgrading the Option Keys (If Required)
Enter the "Setup Menu - Configuration, Software Support" option to see if the option key has expired.
Refer to Systems Operation, Testing and Adjusting, "Display Registration and Activation" if the
Option Key has expired.
Restore the Machine Settings
1. With the display in service mode, select "Restore Settings" from the "Setup menu -
Configuration" menu.
2. Check all AccuGrade system settings.
3. Select the machine settings file that you require and press the "OK" key.
The display automatically uses the new firmware.
After Upgrading
On a PC, remove the ".SG2" files and the option keys file from the data card.
Ensure that you always keep the most updated files from SISWeb. You may need the files in order to
install the firmware again at a later date.
Note: The angle sensor and the control valves do not require calibration after you have upgraded the
display firmware.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02983287

SMCS - 7220
The CAN device firmware files allow you to upgrade the sensors for the AccuGrade system to the
current firmware versions. In order to complete the upgrade, use the display. The display device
firmware files are available on SISWeb. For the latest version, download the firmware file that is
found on the "Downloads" tab on SISWeb.
The following sensors can be upgraded using a ".fls" file and Cat Electronic Technician for the
following components:
• Electric Mast
• Laser Receiver
• Angle Sensor
The AccuGrade system contains the following types of sensors:
• MT900 Target
• CRxxx Radio
• Angle Sensor
• GPS Receiver
• Laser Receiver
1. Press the "OK" key while pressing the power key in order to start-up the display in service
mode ("OK" key and power key).
2. From the "Setup Menu" dialog, press the "Installation" soft key in order to list the items under
the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog.
4. Press the "OK" key. If at least one device was detected on the CAN bus a dialog that is similar
to Illustration 1 will appear.
This dialog lists all the correctly named ".s" files on the root folder of the data card or the
internal memory of the display that are applicable for the type of machine that is selected. The
version of each file is also shown.
5. Verify that the software versions that are displayed on the screen are the latest versions.
a. Check on the "Downloads" page of SISWeb for the latest software versions.
b. If newer versions of software are available on SISWeb, copy the software to the root
directory of a data card.
c. Place the data card into the display.
6. Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to highlight the "AS400nnn.s" file or the
"RS400nnn.s" file.
The dialog displays the "current application" and "loader version" of the Sensors.
8. Disconnect all components in the AccuGrade System.

When the upgrade is completed, a text message will appear. The text message will inform you
if the upgrade was successful or failed.
If the upgrade was successful, the "device version" is updated to reflect the change.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02983383
Setup Menu
SMCS - 7220
Use the "Setup Menu" dialogs in order to access the AccuGrade system setup items. The "Setup
Menu" dialogs are available in the following modes: Normal and Service. However, different dialogs
and items become available for the mode you select. In service mode, use the "Setup Menu -
Configuration" and "Setup Menu - Installation" dialogs in order to access all of the AccuGrade system
settings.
Note: Changes to the items in the "Setup Menu" dialogs take effect as soon as you exit the "Setup
Menu".
All of the AccuGrade system setup parameters are reset to defaults whenever you load a new version
of the display firmware.
1. Press the "Menu" key until the "Setup Menu" soft key is displayed.
2. Press "Setup Menu" soft key.
Two setup menus are available in Service Mode ("Setup Menu - Configuration" and "Setup Menu -
Installation").
"Setup Menu - Configuration"

Items in the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog include troubleshooting items as well as system
variables and settings. By default, some of these items are visible in Service Mode only, while others
are visible in all modes. The options are shown in Table 1, 2 and 3.
GPS
Table 1
In These Modes, (By
This Setup Menu Item For More Information, Refer To
Default)
Operation and Maintenance Manual,
"Select Design" All Modes
SEBU8281
"GPS Accuracy" All Modes
Mode"
"Blade Wear" All Modes Systems Operation, "Blade Wear"
"Vertical Setup" All Modes
SEBU8281
"Increment Switch Systems Operation, "Increment Switch"
Service Mode
Adjustment"
Testing and Adjusting, "Light Bar
"Lightbar Scales" All Modes
Scale"
"Display and Lightbar Systems Operation, "Brightness
Service Mode
Brightness Setting" (Display and Light Bar)"
Testing and Adjusting, "Full Sensor -
"Calibrate Sensors" All Modes
Calibrate"
"Map Recording" Service Mode Systems Operation, "Map Recording"
"Valve Speed"
Mode Time -Adjust"
Systems Operation, "Avoidance Zone"
"Avoidance Zone" Service Mode
"Text Items" Service Mode Systems Operation, "Text Items"

Systems Operation, "Plan View
"Plan View" Service Mode
Rotation"
"Beeper" Service Mode Systems Operation, "Beeper"
Systems Operation, "Display Settings"
"Save Settings" Service Mode
Systems Operation, "Display Settings"

"Restore Settings" All Modes
"GPS Receiver Configuration" Systems Operation, "Receiver

All Modes
Configuration"
Normal and Service Troubleshooting, "Diagnostic
"Diagnostics"
Mode Capabilities"
Laser
Table 2
In These Modes, (By
Default)
"Bench" All Modes
SEBU8281
Vertical Offset All Modes
SEBU8281
SEBU8281
Service Mode
Adjustment"
Testing and Adjusting, "Light Bar Scale"
"Display and Lightbar Systems Operation, "Brightness (Display

Service Mode
Brightness Setting" and Light Bar)"
Calibrate"
"Valve Speed"
Mode Time -Adjust"
"Stability" All
SEBU8281
"Save Settings" Service Mode Systems Operation, "Display Settings"
"Restore Settings" All Modes Systems Operation, "Display Settings"
"Diagnostics"
Mode Capabilities"
ATS
Table 3
In These Modes, (By
Default)
SEBU8281
"Bench" All Modes
SEBU8281
SEBU8281
Service Mode
Adjustment"
Testing and Adjusting, "Light Bar Scale"
"Display and Lightbar Systems Operation, "Brightness (Display

Service Mode
Brightness Setting" and Light Bar)"
Calibrate"
"Map Recording" Service Mode Systems Operation, "Map Recording"
"Valve Speed"
Mode Time -Adjust"
Systems Operation, "Avoidance Zone"

Rotation"
"Save Settings" Service Mode Systems Operation, "Display Settings"
"Restore Settings" All Modes Systems Operation, "Display Settings"
"Diagnostics"
Mode Capabilities"
"Setup Menu - Installation"

Items listed under the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog include items that are used when you install
or reinstall a AccuGrade system or to update the device firmware. In order to access the "Setup Menu
- Installation" dialog, press the "Installation" soft key. By default the "Setup Menu - Installation"
dialog is only available in service mode. However the operator configuration can be customized so
that some or all of the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog is available in normal mode.
Depending on the current machine configuration, different options are available from the "Setup
Menu - Installation" dialog. The options are shown in table 4.
GPS
Table 4
In These
This "Setup Menu -
Modes, (By For More Information, Refer To
Installation" Item
Default)
Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Type - Configure"
"Machine Settings" Service Mode
"Units" Service Mode Systems Operation, "Display Units"

"Machine Dimensions" Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Dimensions -
Service Mode
Configuret"
"GPS Options Keys" (1)
"Machine Radio
Configuration"
"Lightbar Connections"
Service Mode Testing and Adjusting, "Light Bar - Configure"
Testing and Adjusting, "Bank Valve (Grade

"Valve Calibration" Service Mode
Control) - Calibrate"
"Wireless
Systems Operation, "Wireless Communication
Communication Service Mode
Support"
Support"
Continuously records the machine status and map
"Production Reporting"
Service Mode recording data to the data card for processing by the
office software.
"Upgrade Firmware" Service Mode Display Firmware Upgrade, Angle Sensor
Firmware Upgrade"
"Operator Configuration"
(1)
For future use
Laser
Table 5
This "Setup Menu - In These Modes,
For More Information, Refer To
Installation" Item (By Default)
Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Type -
Configure"
Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Dimensions -
"Machine Dimensions" Service Mode
Configuret"

"Wireless
Communication Support" Service Mode
Support"
Firmware Upgrade"
ATS
Table 6
In These
This "Setup Menu -
Modes, (By For More Information, Refer To
Installation" Item
Default)
Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Type - Configure"

Service Mode
Configuret"
"Machine Radio
Configuration"

"Wireless
Support"
Support"
"Production Reporting"
Service Mode recording data to the data card for processing by the
office software.
Firmware Upgrade"
Working with the "Setup Menu"

You can do the following within any of the "Setup Menu" items.
1. Press the "OK" key in order to save any changes to the setup.
Display shows a warning.
You can do the following within the "Setup Menu".
• In Service Mode, press the "Config." soft key in order to list the items under the "Setup Menu -
• In Service Mode, press the "Installation" soft key in order to list the items under "Setup Menu -
Installation" dialog.
• When all of your changes are made to the items in either "Setup Menu" dialog, press the "ESC"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02626204
Avoidance Zone
SMCS - 7220
color.
measures are carried out.
avoidance zones.

dialog.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02942265
Beeper
SMCS - 7220
Setting The Beeper

The Display includes an internal beeper. The beeper can be configured to provide an audible signal
Table 1
Above Grade
Below Grade
GPS Accuracy
ATS Tracking
the ATS loses lock on the machine target.
Laser Receiver
the laser receiver loses strikes from the laser transmitter.
Auto/Manual
States
Key/Switch
Beeps
cannot be disabled.
1. The AccuGrade System must be in Service Mode in order to access the setup for the beeper.
From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the down arrow key or the up arrow key
until "Beeper" is highlighted.
2. Press the "OK" key. The "Beeper" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration 2.
Events that are disabled are identified by an "X" in the box. Events that are enabled are
identified by a check mark. Events that cannot be disabled are identified by a grayed out check
mark. Subevents that cannot be disabled independent of their master event are also identified by
a grayed out check mark.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select different events.
4. Press the first soft key on the right hand side of the display in order to enable or disable an
event.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to confirm the setting. The setup for the beeper is saved. The
"Beeper" dialog is closed and the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog appears. The
6. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02942271
Blade Wear
SMCS - 7220

blade wear is uneven, use an average value. However, guidance will never be better than the range of
the differences.
In order to set the Blade Wear height, complete the following steps:
1. Measure the cutting edge height to the center of the bolt holes. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, select the "Blade Wear" option. Refer to
Illustration 2.
3. Press the "OK" button.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 3 will open.
Note: Be aware of the units. If the display is set up in metric units, the blade measurement must
be entered in metric. If the display is set up in feet, the blade measurement must be entered in
tenths of feet.
a. Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
b. Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel any changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
changes.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02942292

SMCS - 7220
The "Display and Lightbar Brightness" dialog sets the brightness of the LCD and the Light Bars.
1. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the up arrow or the down arrow until
"Display and Lightbar Brightness" is highlighted.
soft key.
4. Press the arrow keys in order to increase or decrease the brightness.
5. Press the "Set Maximum" key in order to select the maximum brightness.
7. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. All changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627147

SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System for GPS must use a radio that is compatible with the local GPS base station
radio. Caterpillar currently offers the TC900C and TC450C for the AccuGrade System. These radios
require Trimble infrastructure radios for compatibility. For sites that are using non-Trimble
infrastructure, Customer Supplied Radios may be connected to the AccuGrade System. However, the
Customer Supplied Radio will need to be configured for use with the AccuGrade System. This
document outlines the wiring issues that must be addressed in order to provide communication with
the AccuGrade System. Caterpillar makes no claim to compatibility with all radios. Additionally,
Caterpillar assumes no responsibility for the performance of the system integrating Customer
Supplied Radios.
The following recommendations must be considered when installing a customer supplied radio:
• 18-gauge wire is recommended for all lines. Avoid narrower gauge wire.
correct pinouts.
Customer Supplied Radios.
Power to a Customer Supplied Radio is provided through the AccuGrade harness at a nominal 24
VDC (15 amp max). Power may vary from 22 - 28 VDC during radio operation. If regulated power is
required by the Customer Supplied Radio, it is the responsibility of the customer to provide a power
converter to the radio. Additionally, it is the responsibility of the customer to wire the power
1. Locate the schematic for the connector for your Customer Supplied Radio.
Note: If there are any limitations on input power, find a suitable converter, this should be
wired between the AccuGrade connection and the connection for the Customer Supplied
Radio.
b. Find the required power and communications pins on the radio.
These pins may vary for each Customer Supplied Radio. The pins that are listed below
are the minimum that are required:
■ + BAT
■ GRND
■ TX
■ RX
2. Locate electrical schematic for the AccuGrade System and the specific Caterpillar machine.
Schematics are available at SISWeb.
b. Trace back from the 8-pin connector to the 12-pin Deutsch connector.
■ + PWR
■ GRND
■ COM 2 TX
■ COM 2 RX
Use the pinouts that are noted in Steps 1 and 2.
Field Conditions
Required
• Create a cable that connects a compatible Customer Supplied Radio to the AccuGrade System.
1. Can the Customer Supplied Radio communicate CMR data over RS-232.
Yes - The Customer Supplied Radio is compatible with the AccuGrade System.
No - The Customer Supplied Radio is not compatible with AccuGrade System.
2. Will the machine radio operate within 9-32 VDC.
Note: Verify all necessary connections can operate at machine voltages.
Answer - By looking in the radio documentation found that radio can run on 9-32 VDC, but in
order for radio to function the DTR line needs to be tied high and it has a limitation of 25 VDC.
Solution - Use a 240-2735 DC - DC power Converter to step the voltage down to 12 VDC.
3. Using the radio manufactures information, make all necessary connections.
◦ Power
◦ Ground
◦ TXD
◦ RXD
◦ DTR
Note: DTR is required by this example radio in order to make radio active.
harness connector.
◦ Power
◦ Ground
◦ COM2 TXD
Note: For G-series TTT, COM2 TXD should be COM1 TXD
◦ COM2 RXD
Note: For G-series TTT, COM2 RXD should be COM1 RXD.

5. Configure the machine radio and AccuGrade System to communicate over RS232.
ReferenceReference Systems Operation, RENR8083, "Radio Utility"
a. Change the settings in the Customer Supplied Radio and the Display to match.
Default Settings For The Display
Baud rate ... 38400

Data Bits ... 8 (Fixed setting on Display)
Parity ... None
Stop Bits ... 1 (Fixed setting on Display)
6. Verify that the over-the-air data/communications rate are set the same in both the base and
machine radio.
to set both radios to the same over-the-air data/communications rate.
8. Apply power to the system and verify the communication to base.
Use the Display in order to check the Left data link. Should be increasing for the integrity. If
not see the Troubleshooting section.
Third Party Radio Information Checklist
Table 1
Obtain the manual from the radio manufacturer.
Verify that the settings can be changed to match the Display.
may run to 28VDC
Radio channel
Validate the radio settings in order to communicate with base radio.
Find pin out information for manufauturer's radio.
Find drawing or pin out for correct machine. Refer to "Radio Pin-Out Tables and Schematics"
Create a simple schematic from the information that was collected in order to show which pin
on the radio maps to the pin on machine connector.
Create the harness based from simple schematic.
Install harness on machine. Verify the power to the radio when system is turned on.
Verify that AccuGrade System is receiving CMRs from Base Station.
Troubleshooting
No Power To Radio
• Verify connections to power and ground pins
• Verify input power required for radio
• If converter has been added, ensure +PWR and Ground from AccuGrade connector are
connected to converter, and that +PWR and Ground from converter are connected to radio
• Verify that the radio is a Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) device.
• If the radio is a Data Communications Equipment (DCE) device, modify the TX and the RX
Note: It is critical to follow the documentation from radio manufacturer in order to ensure the proper
handshake and/or other communications startup procedure is properly executed. Additionally,
Customer Supplied Radios may require additional pins to be grounded or to be tied to voltage, and
these will also be identified in the manufacturer's documentation.

D5N
Table 2
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery A101 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 11
D COM 2 RXD N958 10
D6N
Table 3
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery A101 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 11
D COM 2 RXD N958 10
D6R
Table 4
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 184 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N960 10
D COM 2 RXD N957 7
D8T
Table 5
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 122 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 3
D COM 2 RXD N958 4
D9T
Table 6
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 122 1
B Ground 200 2
C COM 2 TXD N961 3
D COM 2 RXD N958 4
D3G, D4G, D5G

Table 7
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery L872 1
B Ground T744 2
C COM 1 TX N957 3
D COM 1 RX N960 4
D6K
Table 8
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 116 1
B Ground C216 2
C COM 2 TXD N960 3
D COM 2 RXD N957 4
D3K-D5K
Table 9
8-PIN Connector

A + Battery 184 1
B Ground T744 2
C COM 2 TXD N960 3
D COM 2 RXD N957 4
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02983857
Display Settings
SMCS - 7220
Save Settings
Use the "Save Settings" dialog in order to save the display settings, machine settings, or both to a data
card. From this dialog, you can save all the settings in the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog.
The display file ("*.dsp") contains the following information:
• Alignment Selection
• Auto Pan Selection
• Blade Focus
• Beeper Configuration
• Cross Section View - Text items
• Display Brightness
• Layered Lift Selection
• Lightbar Brightness
• Lightbar Scales
• Map Recording
• On grade Tolerance
• Overcut Protection selection

• Perpendicular Lift selection
• Plan View Rotation selection
• Plan View - text items
• Profile View - text items
• Reference Surface selection
• Text Views
• Units
• Vertical Lift
• Vertical Offset
• Vertical Offset Increment
• Working Surface
The machine file (*.mch) contains the following information:
• Avoidance Zone Distance
• Blade Wear
• FTP Support selection
• GPS Accuracy mode
• GPS Port
• Machine Radio Network
• Machine Dimensions
• Vertical Guidance Method
• Valve Speed
display settings.
In order to access the "Save Settings" dialog complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that a data card is inserted in the Display.
"Save Settings" is highlighted. Press the "OK" key in order to continue.
3. The "Save Settings" dialog appears. Press the Down arrow or the Up arrow in order to select
either "Display Settings" or "Machine Settings".
4. Press the "OK" key. The dialog that is shown in Illustration 2 appears.
The default file name for the display settings is "DISPLAY NN". The default file name for
machine settings is "GRADER NN".
saved.
The number assigned to a new display settings file is one more than any similarly named
settings file already on the data card. For example, if there is already a grader machine settings
file (called GRADER 01) on the card, the AccuGrade system assigns the name GRADER 02.
a name such as "16H GRADER". Use the arrow keys to edit the default name.
Note: You cannot use the Display to overwrite or delete an existing settings file.
Settings" dialog appears. Press the "Esc" key in order to go back to the "Setup Menu" dialog.
In order to close the dialog without saving the configuration to the data card, press the "ESC"
Note: If you change the default name, and then press the "ESC" key, you are prompted to
confirm that you want to cancel your changes.
Restore Settings
The "Restore Settings" dialog allows you to restore the previously saved display settings and/or
the GPS receiver configuration settings sent from the .cfg file.
until "Restore Settings" is highlighted.
Make sure that a data card is inserted in the display.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select either "Display Settings",
"Machine Settings", or "Old Version".
A dialog that is similar to Illustration 4 appears.

5. Use the arrow keys in order to highlight the settings file that you require.
machine type, a warning message appears. This text appears on the "Setup Menu –
Depending on which file was selected in the "Settings" type selection dialog, one of the
following messages shown in Table 1 will appear.
Table 1
File Type Message
The relevant updates are automatically sent to the GPS receiver (if required). A dialog will
appear which indicates that the GPS receiver is being configured.
Note: If you restore a settings file that turns on FTP support, a dialog warns you that the
Display must be restarted in order for the changes to take effect. Press the "OK" key in order to
turn off the display.
automatically sent to the GPS receiver. A dialog appears telling you that the GPS receiver is
being configured.
to update the GPS receiver configuration. To solve this problem:
◦ Make sure that the GPS receiver is being recognized by the system. In order to do this,
system).
the "Setup Menu – Configuration" (in Service Mode).
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02983881
Display Language
SMCS - 7220
Language Configuration
The Display firmware is translated into the languages that are listed below. The languages that are
available are stored in the display.
• Czech (CZE)
• Danish (DAN)
• Dutch (NLD)
• UK English (GBR)
• Finnish (FIN)
• French (FRA)
• German (DEU)
• Icelandic (ICE)
• Italian (ITA)
• Norwegian (NOR)
• Polish (POL)
• Romanian (RUM)
• Spanish (ESP)
• Swedish (SWE)
• Russian (RU)
• Chinese (ZH)
• Japanese (JA)
Menu Method
In order to select your desired language by using the menus, complete the following steps:
1. In order to enter service mode, hold down the "OK" key while the display powers up.
2. Press the "Installation" softkey.
3. Select the "Language Select" menu.
4. Select the desired language. Press the "OK" key.
The display will be updated to the new language.
Shortcut Method
In order to select your desired language by using the shortcut method, complete the following steps:
1. Power down the display.
2. Hold down the "Menu" key while the display powers up.
A list of languages will be displayed.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627162
Display Units
SMCS - 7220
2. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the "Installation" soft key in order to list
3. Use down arrow key or the up arrow key until "Units" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. By default, the "Distance Units" dialog is selected. The dialog in
road design.
◦ Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel and return to the "Setup Menu – Installation"
dialog.
return to the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog. You can begin to enter details such as the
7. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog.
The Units are saved in the Display Settings file.
Distance
• Meters - as "m" (default for all Display firmware files except for US English)
• US survey feet – as "FT" (default for US English Display firmware)
2. Use the down arrow key and the up arrow key in order to choose the required distance units.
DXF drawing files are unitless, use the SiteVision Office software in order to ensure that the correct
units are set.
Note: If you change your units, any currently displayed Site Map and Background Plan files are
reloaded. Then the Site Map and Background Plan files are displayed in the new units.
Speed
• Kilometers per hour - as "km/h" (default for all Display firmware files except for US English)

2. Use the down arrow key and the up arrow key in order to choose the required units.
Grade
Cross Slope
Station Format
• 1000.00 (default)
• 1+000.00
• 10+00.00
• 1/000.00
the settings and return to the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog.
4. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog. The changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627187
GPS Accuracy Mode

SMCS - 7220
The GPS Accuracy Mode is used in order to filter the GPS antenna positions that are used for
machine guidance.
displayed.
• Fine
• Medium
• Coarse
• SBAS
The GPS Accuracy mode offers the following advantages.
Accuracy Modes so that different applications can be carried out.
Note: GPS Accuracy Modes and GPS error limits apply to the GPS antenna position only. GPS error
GPS Position Error


information.
error limit set for the GPS Accuracy Mode.

• The "GPS Acc. Mode" text item shows the currently selected GPS Accuracy Mode.
in table 1.
Table 1

The operator can select a GPS Accuracy Mode. You can change the Accuracy mode in Normal mode,
but you must be in Service mode in order to change the GPS Error Limits.
2. From any guidance screen, press the "GPS" Soft Key.

3. Press the Change Mode Soft Key (1) in order to swap between the following modes: Fine
Accuracy, Medium Accuracy and Course Accuracy.

The AccuGrade System will need to be in Service Mode in order to edit the limits for the GPS
Accuracy Mode.
2. Press and hold the "OK" key when powering up the Display.
3. Select the "GPS" Soft Key from any guidance screen.
4. Press the "Edit Modes" Soft Key.

Note: By default, the "Edit Modes" Soft Key is only available when the AccuGrade System is
started in Service mode.
Use the "Fine Mode" Soft Key, the "Medium Mode" Soft Key, or the "Coarse Mode" Soft Key
in order to select the GPS accuracy mode that you wish to change.
6. Use the arrow keys in order to enter a value in the "GPS Error Limit" field. The GPS Error
Limit defines the maximum allowable GPS error for the selected GPS accuracy mode.
◦ In order to set the GPS Accuracy mode to "Unused", press the "Set Unused" Soft Key or
enter a GPS Error Limit of "0".
Note: When the GPS Error Limit is set to "Unused" for a particular mode, the mode is no
longer available to the operator for selection.
◦ In order to set the field to the default value press the Soft Key ("Default Set 0.050"). The
limit value on the Soft Key ("Default Set 0.050") changes depending on the system Units
and the GPS Accuracy Mode selected for change.
7. Press the "NEXT" key in order to enter the "Allow Automatics" field.
Selecting SBAS for the GPS Accuracy Mode

When the GPS accuracy mode is set to Coarse Mode, you have the option of accepting SBAS
positions.
To allow SBAS positions, complete the following steps:
1. Press Edit Modes from the GPS dialog.
The GPS Accuracy Mode Settings dialog appears Refer to Illustration 4.
2. Select "Coarse Mode".
3. Enter a value in the "GPS error limit:" field.
For SBAS to work correctly, the value should be greater than the SBAS error of 1 m (3 ft) to 2
m (6.6 ft).
4. Press the Next key twice in order to enter the "Allow SBAS positions:" field.
5. Press the arrow keys in order to toggle between "Yes" and "No". To allow the use of SBAS
corrections, select "Yes".
6. Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the GPS dialog. Press the
Escape key in order to abandon any changes and return to the GPS dialog.
You are asked to confirm that you do not want to save any changes.
7. Press the Escape Key in order to exit the GPS dialog.
The changes take effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02628622
GPS Radio Port

SMCS - 7220
Please refer to the "Customer Supplied Radio" section of this document for GPS radio port
information.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02983922
Increment Switch
SMCS - 7220
Note: The "Increment Switch Adjustment" dialog can be configured at the site. Consult your
supervisor in order to enable this feature.
If this feature is enabled, the "Increment Switch Adjustment" dialog is used in order to set the amount
that each press of the vertical offset buttons will increase or decrease the vertical offset.
To set both the "Increment Switch Adjustment" and the "Target Cross Slope Increment" complete the
following steps:
1. Press the "Setup Menu" soft key.
2. Press "Setup Menu - Configuration".
Press the up arrow or the down arrow until "Vertical Offset Switch Increment" is highlighted.
Note: If your system is configured as a Dual GPS system, the dialog that is shown in
Illustration 2 is shown.
a. Press the arrow keys in order to enter the amount that each press of the vertical offset
buttons will increase or decrease the vertical offset.
b. Press the "Default 0.05" soft key in order to set the amount. The system default is 0.010
m (0.05 ft).
Note: If your system is configured as a Dual GPS system, skip Step 4.
4. Press the "Next" key in order to highlight the "Target Cross Slope Increment" field.
buttons will increases or decreases the vertical offset.
b. Press the "Default 0.1%" soft key in order to set the system default. The system default is
"0.1%".
dialog.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627194
Light Bar Scale

SMCS - 7220
Tolerance Range

"Light Bar Scales" is highlighted.
lights on the vertical Light Bar are illuminated. The remaining values of the range are
lights on the horizontal Light Bar are illuminated. The remaining values of the range are
◦ Press the "Esc" key in order to cancel any changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627906
Machine Dimensions
SMCS - 7220
Machine Dimensions
Illustration 1 shows the dimensions of the machine that will need to be obtained in order for the
AccuGrade system to operate correctly.
Refer to the "Machine Dimensions - Configure" section of this document in order to obtain more
information about the process to obtain the machine dimensions.
(A) Top of the lower housing height above right cutting edge bolt
(B) Top of lower housing height above left cutting edge bolts
(C) The distance that the receiver is back from the right bolts of the cutting edge.
(D) The distance the receiver is back from left bolts of the cutting edge
(E) Distance the GPS Receiver is in from right blade tip
(F) Distance the GPS Receiver is in from left blade tip
(G) Blade height
(H) Blade width
NOTICE
You must enter correct dimensions. Any errors will transfer directly
into the finished surface.
Note: Caterpillar recommends that you use the receiver measure up tool. If the measure up tool is not
available, the height measurements should be made to the top of the lower housing on the GPS
Receiver. Measure both the left and the right GPS Receivers.
NOTICE
Different offsets will be applied to the measured machine dimensions,

depending on what option is selected in the "Measure height to" field.
Selecting the wrong "Measure height to" option will introduce a
vertical error of 73 mm (2.87 inch)
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627941
Machine Type
SMCS - 7220
Refer to the "Machine Type - Configure" section of this document for information in order to select
the machine type.
Use the "Machine Settings" screen in order to access the relevant information for machine type.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02942316
Map Recording
SMCS - 7220
Terrain logging files (.cat) are also recorded when you are using certain map recording types. Terrain
shown in table 1.
Table 1
Map Recording Types
Type Description
Coverage
section of ground
Radio Coverage

Only one map type can be active. By default, the map recording menu is available in the service
mode.
The "Reset map" softkey is available within map recording. The "Reset map" softkey archives the
selected map recording file and creates a new map recording file within the same folder on the card.
The map recording files use grid cells in order to store information.
types.

The AccuGrade System records a terrain log file (*.cat) as well as a map recording file when cut/fill,
Office software can be used for the following purposes.
• Build a current terrain model of the area that is covered by the machine. The .cat file logs the
• Build a map in order to indicate the quality of the radio coverage in the area. The .cat file logs
Note: METSmanager can use the terrain logging file in order to build a current terrain model of the
The *.cat file is saved to the current design folder. The file is called Current Terrain <Design
name>.cat. If no design is loaded, the AccuGrade System saves the file to the root folder of the data
card. The file that is saved to the root folder is called Current Terrain NoDesign.cat.
In order to build both the current terrain model and the radio coverage map, you must import the *.cat

until "Map Recording" is highlighted.

Perform the following steps in order to set up the coverage map recording.
1. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Coverage" map
recording type. The "Map Recording" dialog appears. Refer to Illustration 1.
Table 2
Gray 6
Dark Gray 5
Cyan 4
Blue 3
Red 2
Yellow 1
Green 0
2. Press the "NEXT" key in order to highlight the "Required" field.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to change the required number of passes. Green is always the final
color indicating that the desired number of passes have been made.
appears.
The "Coverage: Off" soft key indicates that the coverage map recording is Off.
Press the "Coverage: Off" soft key in order to begin coverage map recording. The "Coverage: On"

machine rippers.
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Ripper" map recording
type The "Map Recording" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration 2.
3. Press the "NEXT" key in order to highlight the "Ripped width" field.
4. Use the arrow keys in order to change the "Ripped width".
opened.
loaded.
reception. Radio coverage map recording also creates a *.cat file that you can view in SiteVision
Office.
Table 3
Blue <= 2 seconds
Red >5 seconds
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Radio coverage"
recording type.
design is loaded.
machine while collecting a terrain logging file (*.cat).
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the "Terrain" map recording
type.
opened.
loaded.

Cut/Fill map recording also creates a *.cat file that can be viewed in AccuGrade Office Software.
coding is updated.
Table 4
Color Cut/Fill
Red
Light Red
Light Blue
Blue
1. Confirm that light bar scale's vertical tolerance is configured as required. Vertical tolerance can
without a design.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the cut/fill map recording
type.
opened.
loaded.
Reset Map
file.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the map recording type that
is to be closed. The map recording type currently in use is highlighted by default.
in Illustration 3.
displayed.
appears.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02628674
On-Grade Tolerance
SMCS - 7220
Tolerance Range
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02628672
Operator Access
SMCS - 7220
Use the Operator Configuration dialog in order to customize the Display in Operator mode. The
dialog allows you to enable or disable the following features: menu items, soft keys and views.
Follow the procedure in order to customize the operator configuration settings in the AccuGrade
System.
To access the "Operator Configuration" dialog, complete the following steps:
1. Turn on the Display in Service mode.
2. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press "Installation" in order to list the items
under the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog.
3. Press the up arrow or the down arrow until the "Operator Configuration" option is highlighted.
4. Press "OK".
The dialog in Illustration 1 appears.
The following information outlines the options within the dialog.
"Operator Configuration" Dialog

The "Operator Configuration" dialog shows four branch headings. Each branch heading has a check
box and an expandable tree view. These headings are as follows:
• Configuration
• Installation
• Soft Keys
• Views
Use the check box to enable or disable all the items in a heading. Use the tree view to view and select
the individual items below the heading.
"Configuration"
The "Configuration" heading contains a list of items available in the "Setup Menu - Configuration"
dialog. Enabling or disabling the items controls how the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog appears
in Normal mode. In Service Mode, menu items that are disabled in Normal mode are identified by a
red "X".
Some of the items under the Configuration heading are subheadings. These subheadings represent
Configuration menu items that, when selected, have soft keys or submenus. Edit the items under the
subheadings to control what soft keys or submenu items are visible.
"Installation"
The "Installation" heading contains a list of items available in the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog.
Enabling or disabling the items controls how the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog appears in
Normal mode. In Service Mode, menu items that are disabled in Normal mode are identified by a red
"X".
Some of the items in the "Installation" heading are subheadings. These subheadings represent
Installation menu items that, when selected, have soft keys or submenus. Edit the items under these
"Softkeys"
The "Softkeys" heading contains a list of soft keys that appear in the guidance views. It does not
include any soft keys from items in the Setup menus. Enabling or disabling items in this heading
controls what soft keys are available in Normal mode. In Service Mode, soft keys that are disabled in
Normal mode are identified by red text.
Views
The "Views" heading contains the following guidance views:
• Plan
• Profile
• Cross-section
• two text screens
Enabling items or disabling items in the "Views" heading controls what guidance screens are
available in Normal mode. In Service Mode, all guidance screens are viewable.
Customizing the Operator Configuration

Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to select an item in the "Operator Configuration"
dialog. If an item is a branch heading, press the left arrow or the right arrow in order to expand or
collapse the branch.
To enable or disable an item, select the item and press the soft key that is denoted by a check mark
and an "X".
To set the visibility of an item back to the defaults, press the "Default" soft key.
To disable all items in a branch, select the branch heading and press the "Disable All" soft key.
To enable all items in a branch, select the branch heading and press the "Enable All" soft key.
To set all the items back to their default visibility settings, select the branch heading and press the
"Default All" soft key.
After using the "Operator Configuration" dialog to customize the display settings, Caterpillar
recommends that you save the display settings. Refer to Systems Operation, Testing and Adjusting,
Troubleshooting, KENR6319, "Display Settings".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02789584
Plan View Rotation

SMCS - 7220
• Machine heading up - the machine always travels upward on the display
• North up - the machine travels in any direction on the display
The Plan View can also be configured with the "Autopan" option.
The Plan View automatically pans in order to keep the machine icon in view when "Autopan" is
enabled.
Use the "Plan View Rotation" dialog in order to configure the Display to either north up or machine
heading up. You can access the "Plan View Rotation" dialog from the "Setup Menu - Configuration"
dialog.

until "Plan View Rotation" is highlighted.

3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key until "Plan View - Rotation" is highlighted.
4. Press the soft key with a check mark and an "X" in order to enable or disable "Rotation".
If Rotation is enabled, the Plan View on the Display rotates in order to keep the machine
heading up the display. If Rotation is disabled, the Plan View on the Display is always drawn
north upward.
5. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key until "Plan View - Autopan" is highlighted.
6. Press the soft key with a check mark and an "X" in order to enable or disable "Autopan".
When Autopan is enabled, the plan view autopans in order to keep the machine icon on screen.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the "Setup Menu -
◦ Press the "ESC" key in order to abandon any changes and return to the "Setup Menu -
changes.
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627487
SMCS - 7010; 7220
Note: This is not the preferred method to configure the Receiver. It is recommended that you place
the appropriate configuration file in each design folder. The system automatically sends the .cfg file
when the design is loaded. This option remains in the system so that the original method of
configuring the Receiver and data cards can still be used.
The Configuration file contains the relationship between the site coordinate system and the coordinate
system of the GPS.
Perform the following steps in order to configure the Receiver.
1. Insert a data card with a Receiver configuration file in the root folder into the Display.
until "Receiver Configuration" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. The "Receiver Configuration" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration
1.
All Receiver configuration files in the root folder of the data card are listed on the Display.
5. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to select the correct .cfg file.
6. Press the "OK" key. The AccuGrade System sends the .cfg file to the receivers in order to
provide status information. The following text shows on the dialog in Illustration 1.
You may have to wait a few minutes while the Receiver gains lock.
the Display with the known coordinates of the point.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02628467

SMCS - 7220
Before you can load new software, you must have a valid option keys file (password), and a Display
software that is older than the option keys file expiration date.
Accessing the Software Support Option

The "Software Support Option dialog" shows you information about the Display, the software version
and the expiration date for supporting the software.
2. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog press the "Installation" soft key in order to list
Menu" for more information on the Setup Menu.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key until the "Software Support Option" item is
highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. A dialog that is similar to the one in Illustration 1 appears.
Updating the Software Support Option

Note: You cannot upgrade to the Display firmware that was created after the expiration date of the
software support option.
The "Software Support Option" dialog lets you update the option keys in order to change the current
support agreement.
1. Copy a valid option keys file to the root folder of the data card. The file is named "Option keys
<serial number >.txt", where "<serial number>" is the serial number of your Display. Obtain
this file from your Technical Communicator.
2. Insert the data card into the Display.
◦ Open the "Software Support Option" dialog. The option keys file is detected on the data
card, and the option keys are automatically applied. A message reporting the success or
failure of the process appears.
◦ If the option keys file is not on the data card use the arrow keys in order to enter the
option keys details. Press the "OK" key in order to enable the option keys.
Note: This procedure does not need to be completed again until the software support expires
and you want to update the Display firmware. It is recommended that you delete the option
keys file from your data card.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02942353
Text Items
SMCS - 7220
Text Items can be displayed on the following screens:
• Plan View
• Cross-Section View
• Profile View
• Text View
Table 1 describes the available text items.
Table 1
Text View Options
Items Details
"Alignment"
Displays description of line that is used for horizontal guidance
"Avoid. Dist." blade tip position and the ripper back from cutting edge measurement are used for
Card Time The amount of time available on the card, to record data.
"Cross Slope" Cross slope of the blade orthogonal to the direction of travel. This is not the
When Cut adjustment is Off, the text field indicates "N/A". When Cut adjustment
"Cut Adjust"
is On and adjustment is applied, the text field shows the larger of the applied cut
adjustments for the blade tips.
"Cut/Fill Left" Shows either Cut Left or Fill Left, as appropriate, for the left blade tip. If a
vertical offset is specified, the Cut or Fill is to the vertically offset position.
"Cut/Fill Shows either Cut Right or Fill Right, as appropriate, for the right blade tip. If a
Right" vertical offset is specified, the Cut or Fill is to the vertically offset position.
"Design Elev"
"Design
Mainfall of the design parallel to the direction of travel
Mainfall"
Design Name
The name of the design that is currently loaded.
"Design
Cross slope of the design orthogonal to the direction of travel
XSlope"
"Easting" Easting at the blade tip with focus.
"Elevation" Elevation at the blade tip with focus.
"GPS Acc. The selected GPS Accuracy mode is displayed. GPS Accuracy modes are fine,
Mode" medium and coarse.
A measure of the horizontal GPS Accuracy. The text is red if the value exceeds
"H. GPS
the current GPS error limit. The text is blue if the value is close to the limit.
Error"
Otherwise the text is black.
"Heading" Direction the machine is moving. Shown in degrees clockwise from the north.
Vertical Offset between the master alignment and the working surface when a
"Layered Lift" layered lift is defined. Value is positive if the layered lift is above the master
"MA Offset" Offset from the blade tip with focus to the master alignment. Also see the item
"Mainfall" Mainfall of the machine in the direction of travel
"Northing" Northing at the blade tip with focus.
"Offline" horizontal offset is specified, the offline distance is to the horizontally offset
"Orientation"
"PDOP" Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) at the blade tip with focus.
Perpendicular offset between the master alignment and the working surface when
a perpendicular lift is defined. Value is positive if the perpendicular lift is above
"Perp. Lift"
the master alignment, negative if the perpendicular lift is below the master
alignment and N/A when no perpendicular lift is defined.
Position
Status
Front / back pitch of the machine. Pitch (Mach.) is the pitch of the machine's
Pitch body. This is used to approximate the pitch of the blade. (You must be moving or
have moved for this value to be meaningful.)
"Position
Status"
"Ref. Surface"
Describes the Reference Surface that is being used
"Satellites" Number of satellites used by the GPS receiver to calculate a position

"Speed"
"Station" Station at the blade tip with focus.
A measure of the vertical GPS Accuracy. The text is red if the value exceeds the
"V. GPS Err. "
current GPS error limit. The text is blue if the value is close to the limit.
Otherwise the text is black
vertical offset Soft Key. The vertical offset will be relative to the layered lift,
Vert. Offset perpendicular lift, or vertical lift if any of these are defined. The value is positive
if the vertical lift is above the master alignment, negative if the vertical lift is
below the master alignment and 0.000 when no vertical lift is defined.
Vertical offset between the master alignment and the working surface when a
Vertical Lift vertical lift is defined. The value is positive if the vertical lift is above the master
alignment, negative if the vertical lift is below the master alignment and N/A
when no vertical lift is defined.

Note: The contents of the "Setup Menu" dialog can be configured at the site. Depending on the
"Operator Configuration" settings of your system and machine setting, the number of items in the
"Setup Menu" may vary. Refer to your Site Manager if a specific option is not available.
You can customize the Display in order to show text on the plan view, cross section view, and text
selected.
If you select one to three items of information on the plan view and the cross section view, the items
appear along the top of the view. If you select four or five items, then all of the items appear down the
right side of the view.

until "Text Items" is highlighted. Then press the "OK" key.
2. Press the "Plan View" Soft Key. A dialog that is similar to Illustration 2 appears.
profile view, text view 1, and text view 2. The items are described in table 1.
• The opening screen shows the list of items that are selected to appear on the "Plan View".
• Press the "Cross-section" Soft Key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear
• Press the "Profile View" Soft Key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear
on the profile view.
• Press the "Text View 1" Soft Key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear
on text view 1.
• Press the "Text View 2" Soft Key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear
on"Text View 2".
"Available Items" list is not selected, the "Add" Soft Key is available.
• If the highlighted option in the "Available Items" list is already selected, the "Remove" Soft
Key is available.
option in the "Available Items" list is not selected, the "Add" soft key is blank.
1. Press the "Plan View" soft key, the "Cross-section" Soft Key, the "Profile View" Ssoft key, the
"Text View 1" soft key, or the "Text View 2" soft key in order to show the appropriate view
list.
2. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the item to be removed.
3. Press the "Remove" Soft Key.
1. Press the "Plan View"Soft Key, the "Cross-section"Soft Key, the "Profile View" Soft Key, the
"Text View 1" Soft Key, or the "Text View 2" Soft Key in order to show the appropriate view
list.
3. Press the down arrow key or the up arrow key in order to highlight the item to add.
4. Press the "Add" Soft Key.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to save the settings and return to the "Setup Menu -
◦ Press the Escape Key and then press the "OK" key in order to return to the "Setup Menu -
6. Press the Escape Key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. The changes
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02948350
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System can communicate to the office via the AccuGrade Office software. This
option can be turned on by entering the "Setup Menu - Installation". Refer to the following procedure
in order to set up wireless communications.
1. Select "Wireless Communication Support". Press the "OK" Key.

2. Select "Yes" in order to enable wireless communication.
The IP address must match the Office radio. The Radio network will be disabled.
Wireless Communication Option

AccuGrade Wireless Communication is an available option for the AccuGrade V10.8 CD700 Display.
This option provides the site manager the ability to wirelessly transmit updated design information to
the machines on site, perform basic remote diagnostics and send simple test messages to the
machines. This option can be purchased and installed on each CD700 Display.
Option Key Purchase Procedure

1. Refer to the appropriate AccuGrade pricelist to order the AccuGrade CD700 Wireless
Communication Option Key.
2. Order the key per the instructions on the pricelist.
3. Record the following information: wireless key reference number, order dealer code and order
reference number.
4. Obtain and record the serial number from the identification plate on the display to have wireless
communications option activated.
5. Go to the website: "www.techproductregistration.com".
Refer to Special Instruction, REHS3666, "Software Activation for the AccuGrade® Display" for
additional information.
Within 30 minutes an email will be sent to the dealer email address submitted on the web
form. This email will have the option key number to activate the option on the requested
display. A phone call will be made to phone number submitted on web form to confirm
email with option key number was received. Provide this key to the appropriate person to
have installed on display. Save this option key information for future reference. An
invoice will be sent from Antares for the purchase of the option key.
Procedure For Entering The Registration Key Into The Display
1. Power the system up in Service Mode by turning machine key to "ON" position.
2. Press and hold the "OK" Key while pressing the Power Key.
3. Press the Menu Key.
4. Press the "Installation" Soft Key.
5. Use the Arrow Keys (14) in order to select "Software Support Option".
◦ Copy the Wireless Option key file to the root directory of a data card. Insert the Data
Card. The Display will read the key.
◦ Enter the 24 character option key that was obtained above. To do this, use the Arrow
Keys on the Display. Press the "OK" Key.
If the proceedure is successful, the Option Keys File Loaded dialog appears. This indicates that
one option key has been loaded successfully.
8. Press the "OK" Key.
The Plan View appears.
Note: If key does not activate, verify that key was entered correctly. Verify that the serial
number on identification plate is the same as electronic serial number
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® GPS v11 for CD700

i03489645
General Information
SMCS - 7220
Introduction
The AccuGrade System is designed for earthmoving equipment in the construction application. The
system can be used with a wide variety of sensors in order to provide conventional control or 3D
machine control.
Safety
This warning label is located on the electric masts. The warning label is placed to the rear of the masts
at eye level.
Warning decal that is located on the electric masts

Note: The warnings for the movement of the blade while the machine is in automatic mode have been
incorporated into this manual in order to address the portability of the display. These warnings apply
when the display has been removed from an excavator and placed on a machine that incorporates
automatic modes.
Unexpected blade movement may occur when the blade control system
is in automatic mode. Unexpected blade movements that occur while
mounting or dismounting the machine may result in injury or death.
Before dismounting the machine, always place the automatic blade
control system into manual mode and follow the machine parking
procedures specified in the machine Operation Manual.

occur. Blade movement may exceed 21 cm (8 inches). Injury or death
from crushing could occur. Ensure that all personnel are clear of the
blade before you place the system in automatic mode.
This warning label is located on the tripod. The label is placed in a location on each leg of the tripod
in order to be easily seen.
Warning decal that is located on the legs of the laser transmitter
Movement of the transmitter could cause unexpected blade movement.

Death or serious injury could occur. Turn off the transmitter before you
move the transmitter or before you adjust the transmitter.
Safety (Laser)
The IEC and the United States Government Center of Devices for Radiology Health (CDRH) has
classified this laser as a Class II laser product. The maximum radiant power output of this laser is less
than 5 milliwatts.
Refer to the operator's manual of the laser transmitter for installation and operating instructions.
The laser that is supplied with the AccuGrade - Laser System complies with all applicable portions of
"Title 21" of the "Code of Federal Regulations, Department of Health and Human Services, Food and
Drug Administration, Federal Register, Volume 50, Number 161, 20August 1985".
This laser complies with "OSHA Standards Act, Section 1518.54" for use without eye protection. Eye
protection is not required or recommended. The following safety rules should be observed:
• Never look into a laser beam or point the beam into the eyes of other people. Set the laser at a
height that prevents the beam from flashing directly into people's eyes.
• Do not remove any warning signs from the laser.
• Use of this product by personnel that are not trained on this product may result in exposure to
hazardous laser light.
• If initial service requires the removal of the outer protective cover, removal of the cover must
be performed by trained personnel.
Crushing Prevention and Cutting Prevention

Support the equipment properly when you work beneath the equipment. Do not depend on the
hydraulic cylinders to hold up the equipment. An attachment can fall if a control is moved, or if a
hydraulic line breaks.
Unless you are instructed otherwise, never attempt adjustments while the machine is moving. Also,
never attempt adjustments while the engine is running.
Whenever there are attachment control linkages, the clearance in the linkage area will increase or the
clearance in the linkage area will decrease with movement of the attachment. Stay clear of all rotating
and moving parts.
Keep objects away from moving fan blades. The fan blade will throw objects or cut objects. Do not
use a kinked wire cable or a frayed wire cable.
Wear gloves when you handle wire cable. When you strike a retainer pin with force, the retainer pin
can fly out. The loose retainer pin can injure personnel. Make sure that the area is clear of people
when you strike a retainer pin.
In order to avoid injury to your eyes, Wear protective glasses when you strike a retainer pin.
Chips or other debris can fly off objects when you strike the objects. Make sure that no one can be
injured by flying debris before striking any object.
Operation
Clear all personnel from the machine and from the area.
Clear all obstacles from the machine's path. Beware of hazards (wires, ditches, etc).
Be sure that all windows are clean.
Secure the doors and the windows in the open position or in the shut position.
Adjust the rear mirrors (if equipped) for the best visibility close to the machine.
Make sure that the horn, the travel alarm (if equipped), and all other warning devices are working
properly.
Fasten the seat belt securely.
Warm up the engine and the hydraulic oil before operating the machine.
Only operate the machine while you are in a seat. The seat belt must be fastened while you operate the
machine. Only operate the controls while the engine is running.
While you operate the machine slowly in an open area, check for proper operation of all controls and
all protective devices. Before you move the machine, you must make sure that no one will be
endangered.
Do not allow riders on the machine unless the machine has the following equipment:
• Additional seat
• Additional seat belt
• Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS)
Note any needed repairs during machine operation. Report any needed repairs.
Avoid any conditions that can lead to tipping the machine. The machine can tip when you work on
hills, on banks and on slopes. Also, the machine can tip when you cross ditches, ridges or other
unexpected obstructions.
Avoid operating the machine across the slope. When possible, operate the machine up the slopes and
down the slopes.
Maintain control of the machine.
Do not overload the machine beyond the machine capacity.
Be sure that the hitches and the towing devices are adequate.
Never straddle a wire cable. Never allow other personnel to straddle a wire cable.
Before you maneuver the machine, make sure that no personnel are between the machine and the
trailing equipment.
Always keep the Rollover Protective Structure (ROPS) installed during machine operation.
Conventional Systems
Conventional systems provide elevation or slope control. Conventional elevation systems continually
measure the offset between a reference surface and the cutting edge of the machine. This measured
offset is compared against a design offset that has been entered into the system. If the measured
offsets and the design offsets differ, the AccuGrade System drives the cutting edge of the machine
upward or downward until the offsets match. Elevation sensors, such as a sonic tracer, provide
elevation control.
Conventional slope control systems use sensors that are mounted on the machine in order to measure
the cross slope of the cutting edge of the machine. This measured cross slope is compared against a
design cross slope that was entered into the system. If the measured cross slope and design cross slope
differ, one side of the blade is raised or lowered until the cross slopes match.
Conventional systems do not provide a horizontal position. The following items are not used in a
conventional system:
• Design files
• Background maps
• Avoidance zones
Laser
Laser Grading
Setup and operation is easy with the AccuGrade System. An off-board tripod mounted laser
transmitter emits a thin beam of light that rotates 360 degrees. This creates a grade reference over the
work area. Grade information is transferred to the machine via the laser beam.
A digital laser receiver, mounted on an electric telescopic mast above the cutting edge of the machine,
detects the elevation of the laser beam. Then, the information is sent to the display.
The AccuGrade System is available as a single mast system or a dual mast system. The single mast
system and the dual mast system both provide single dimensional (elevation) control. For example, a
flat plane or a single sloped plane. The dual mast system provides two-dimensional control. For
example, a sloped plane with cross slope (elevation and tilt).
The display informs the operator of the position of the that is relative to grade. The display indicates
the cut or the fill requirements of the work area.
(single mast system) or both the lift and tilt (dual mast system) functions by placing the cutting edge
to the precise elevation needed for fine grading.
The AccuGrade laser system provides valve drive signals for automatic blade control. The valve
Applications
The AccuGrade laser System is designed for fine grading of sites with flat, single or dual slope
surfaces.
3D Systems
3D Systems use sensors that can measure horizontal position and vertical position. The resulting X,Y,
Z coordinates are compared against a design that was loaded into the system. The system sends
corrections to the hydraulic valves for the machine in order to drive the cutting edge of the machine to
grade. The system uses either a Advanced Tracking System (ATS) robotic total station or Global
Positioning System (GPS) receivers as the 3D sensor.
The default settings support most of the conditions, but the settings can be changed as required. Items
that need to be configured in order to make the AccuGrade System work properly include the
following items:
At the start of any new project or work area the site calibration, and the design are required. GPS data
is needed in order to position the blade. GPS signals are received through the GPS receivers. At the
same time, base station data is received through the data radio and sent to the left hand GPS receiver.
The GPS data from each GPS receiver on the blade is combined with the slope information in the
display to produce a blade position and blade cross slope. The system uses the design in conjunction
with the GPS information in order to compute the cut or the fill at the blade tips in respect to the
design. The design can be in the form of a DTM (TIN or Grid), road, level or sloping surface. The
display has a color LCD that has brightness control in order to allow the operator to see the LCD in
both day light and at night. Information on the screen is available in the following views:
• Plan
• Cross section
• Profile
• Text
The operator will be able to switch between these views at any time. The display uses the GPS
positions and the machine dimensions in order to compute the position of each blade tip. The display
selected alignment.
UTS System
With an Universal Total Station (UTS) system, a prism and a radio are attached to the machine. The
prism is mounted on a mast above the cutting edge of the machine. The UTS robotic total station can
be set up over a known point on site. The UTS robotic station can also be set up on an unknown point.
The position of an unknown point can be determined by methods such as resection. The position of
the point must be determined before you start using the UTS for machine control.
The UTS tracks the machine as it moves. Then, the UTS broadcasts the position of the machine to the
AccuGrade System via one of the following radios:
• TC900C/CR900C
• TC2400/CR2400
An UTS System is usually combined with a cross slope system in order to provide guidance across
the entire cutting edge of the machine.
If the MT900 machine target is used with a SPSx30 total station, a 2400 MHz radio is required.

With a GPS system, one or two GPS receivers are attached to the machine. With single GPS systems,
the receiver is mounted on one of the masts that is located above the cutting edge of the machine at
either end of the blade. With a dual GPS system, the GPS receivers are mounted on masts that are
located above both ends of the cutting edge of the machine.
GPS receives data from a system of satellites that orbit the earth twice a day at very high altitudes.
The radius of the orbit is approximately 26600 km (16528 miles). GPS was set up by the government
of the United States. GPS provides precise timing and positioning anywhere on earth, 24 hours per
day with no charge to users.
Newer GPS receivers will be able to also receive data from the Global Navigation Satellite System
(GLONASS). GLONASS consists of 21 satellites in 3 orbital planes, with 3 on-orbit spares. The three
orbital planes are separated 120 degrees, and the satellites within the same orbit plane by 45 degrees.
Each satellite completes an orbit in approximately 11 hours 15 minutes. This allows more GPS
satellites to used to for the solution.
In very general terms, a GPS receiver computes a position based on radio signals received from
several different satellites. The satellites have highly reliable clocks, so the timing of these satellite
signals is known very accurately. The GPS receiver calculates the relative distance to each of the
satellites. This calculation is based on the travel time of the signal and the speed of light (speed of the
signal). The receiver then uses these distances in order to calculate the receiver's location on earth.
levels depend on the GPS receivers and the methods that you use.
The four basic levels of position accuracy (1 sigma) that are available in real time (that is,
instantaneously) from GPS are as follows:
• SBAS, 1.0 m (3.3 ft) to 2.0 m (6.6 ft)
• DGPS, 0.3 m (1.0 ft) to 1.0 m (3.0 ft)
Illustration 5 shows the GPS accuracy levels.
GPS accuracy levels
(1) Autonomous
(2) DGPS
(3) RTK Fixed
(4) RTK Float

(5) SBAS
surveyors for stakeout in construction. The method is called Real-Time Kinematic (RTK), GPS.
In order to produce RTK positions two GPS receivers are required. One receiver is known as the GPS
base station and is fixed in one place. The other GPS receiver is known as the rover. This receiver can
be stationary or mobile.
The base station communicates to the rover ('s) through a wireless data link using a data radio.
GPS and the AccuGrade® System
(1) GPS satellites
(2) GPS base station and data radio
Both GPS receivers make observations (measurements) of the GPS signals at the same time. The base
station broadcasts the observed information together with the location and other information across
the data radio link to the rover. The rover then combines the data from the base station together with
its own data in order to compute a very accurate position relative to the base station.
In areas where the 900 MHz band is available, the TC900C or CR900 data radio is recommended. In
areas where the 900 MHz band is not available, one of the following radios is recommended:
• TC450 (450 Mhz)
• TC2400 (2.4 Ghz)
Low accuracy corrected GPS (SBAS)
If low accuracy GPS positions are adequate for the required site work, you can use Satellite-Based
Augmentation System (SBAS) error corrections. SBAS corrected systems do not require additional
site infrastructure.
Satellite-Based Augmentation Systems are free-to-air GPS correction services. SBAS networks
consist of ground stations that are set at known positions around the world, and geo-stationary
satellites that maintain a fixed position above the Earth. The ground stations receive GPS signals from
all GPS satellites in view. The GPS data is then sent to a master control site, which then transmits
GPS corrections to the geostationary satellites. These satellites broadcast the information to all SBAS
enabled GPS receivers.
The following SBAS networks are currently available:
WAAS - Wide Area Augmentation System (United States)
EGNOS - European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (Europe)
MSAS - Multi-Functional Satellite Augmentation System (Japan)
GPS receivers use a GPS receiver configuration file (.cfg) to convert from WGS84 coordinates to the
site coordinate system. High accuracy (RTK) GPS systems use a configuration file generated from the
site calibration. Inaccuracies in the entered position of the base station for the site calibration will
result in a shift of the site coordinate system away from the local circuit coordinate system. When this
configuration file is used by a GPS receiver using RTK, the shift is not exposed, as the relative
positions of points on the site are still accurately known, and the accuracy of RTK positioning is
unaffected. However, if the same configuration file is used by a GPS receiver using SBAS
corrections, the shift in the site coordinate system away from the local circuit is exposed, and results
in additional positioning errors.
To avoid additional errors, do one of the following:
• Make sure the base station antenna position used for the RTK site calibration is accurate to
within about 1 m (3.3 ft). This accuracy can be achieved via traditional surveying methods or
long autonomous GPS occupations. Speak to your site surveyor for more information.
• Use a configuration file generated by the AccuGrade Office software using the local circuit
coordinate system, instead of the configuration file produced by the site calibration.
GPS Site Calibration
Note: A poor quality GPS site calibration will result in poor quality guidance information from the
AccuGrade System.
A GPS site calibration is a mathematical relationship between a grid coordinate system (northing,
easting, and elevation) of a project and the GPS coordinate system (latitude, longitude, and ellipsoidal
height - also known as WGS84 coordinates ).
This relationship is determined by using GPS to measure points with known grid coordinates, and
then calculating the calibration parameters.
A surveying or civil engineering company should be employed to establish the control points around a
site. Make sure that you locate the control points where they will not be destroyed during
construction. Five or more control points located at, or near, the corners and center of the project will
normally give good results.
Note: If you employ a GPS surveyor to create the GPS site calibration, make sure that you clearly
specify the requirements. Caterpillar recommends that you give them a copy of this section of the
manual.
Some survey software can do both a full site calibration and a single point calibration.
A single point calibration cannot provide any guarantee of accuracy as the parameters that define a
site calibration will be default values that may have no resemblance to the real values obtained
through a full calibration. A single point calibration should only be employed on small sites with no
existing control. Caterpillar recommends that you carry out a full site calibration to guarantee the
required accuracy all over the site.
When doing a site calibration, pay attention to the following points:
• A minimum of five 3D local grid coordinates (north, east, elevation) and five observed GPS
coordinates (latitude, longitude, height) to provide enough redundancy.
• The set of GPS coordinates must be independently obtained from the set of grid coordinates.
• The selected calibration points should be around the perimeter of the site. Do not work outside
of the area enclosed by the calibration points, as the calibration is not valid beyond this
perimeter.
• When defining the acceptable accuracy limits, the calibration tolerances should not be larger
than the accuracy tolerance for the site.
• When measuring points, use a bipod on a staff or a tripod to maintain stability.
• Check the accuracy of the calibration by visiting other control points that were not used in the
calibration.
Converting The Site Calibration To A GPS Configuration File
When the site calibration is complete, the site surveyor uses a surveying software package to convert
the site calibration data to a calibration file, for example "Site.dc".
Once the site calibration file is generated, use the AccuGrade Office software in order to convert the
calibration to a GPS configuration file which can then be copied to the data card. For information on
how to do this, refer to the help file within the AccuGrade Office software.
The site calibration files are stored in the display rather than the GPS receiver. For this reason, each
time you change site, make sure you update the site calibration files.
To ensure the correct files for each design are in use, do one of the following:
• Make sure there is a valid configuration (.cfg) file for the design in each design folder. When
you load the design the associated configuration file is sent to the receiver.
• Use the "GPS Receiver Configuration" dialog within the "Setup Menu". This sends the site
calibration to the GPS receiver and updates the parameters held in the display.
When a GPS receiver configuration (.cfg) file is sent to a GPS receiver, the system resets the receiver
to factory defaults before applying new settings.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03488343
System Components
SMCS - 7220
• Display
• Lightbars
• Location Sensors (GPS Receivers/ATS Target)
• Electric Mast (Laser)
• Angle Sensor
• Radio (GPS/ATS)
• Pressure Sensor
• Bank Valves
• Valve Modules
The components of the AccuGrade system are described below.
Display
The display is a computer that runs the AccuGrade software. The display has a LCD screen that is
used to show guidance information and information about the system. The display also has buttons
that are used to operate the AccuGrade system. In addition, the display has a slot for a data card. The
data card is used to load the data and the data card is used to save the following data:
• Machine configuration data
• Display configuration data

• Design files
Illustration 2 shows the pinout information for the connector on the display.
(1) LCD
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) "+" Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) "-" Key
(10) "OK" Key
(11) Menu Key
Contact Description Of The Display

Table 1
Pin Function
A BEEPER GND
B SWTCH INPUT 0
C RESERVED
D BATTERY +
E BATTERY +
F BATTERY
G BATTERY -
H RESERVED
J CAN L0
K CAN H0
L CAN H1
M CAN LL
N RS232-TXD 2
P RS232-RXD 2
R RS232-SGND 2
S RS232-SGND 1
T RS232-RXD 1
U RS232-TXD 1
V RESERVED
W RESERVED
X BEEPER
Y SWITCH INPUT 1
Z RESERVED
a RESERVED
b RESERVED
c RESERVED
d CAN SHIELD 0
e CAN SHIELD 1
f RS-232 RTS 0
g RS-232 CTS 0
h RS-232 RXD 0
I RS-232 TXD 0
j RESERVED
k SWITCH INPUT 2
m CHASSIS GND
n AWAKE GND
p AWAKE
q RS-232 SGND 0
r CHASSIS GND
Power Key
Press the power key (6) in order to turn on the display.
Note: If the system detects upgrade files or other system files on the data card, press the escape key in
order to continue without updating the software.
Press the power key and hold the power key (6) for several seconds in order to shut down the display.
This delay reduces the risk of inadvertently shutting off the power. You can turn off the AccuGrade
system from any screen or from any dialog.

The soft key labels (2) are graphical keys that appear at the side of the screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
The soft keys (3) are the six physical keys that are located to the right of the screen of the display. The
function of the physical keys depends on the information that is displayed on the screen of the display.
The function of the physical key is identified by the soft key label that is displayed to the left of the
key.
By default, this manual will refer to a "soft key/function" combination by the soft key label.
In order to activate the displayed function, press the appropriate soft key that is located to the right of
the soft key label. For example, in order to change the blade focus, press the soft key that is located to
the right of the "Blade: Left" soft key label.
The text on a soft key label can show one of the following details:
• When the soft key is pressed one time, a description of the soft key function will be shown.
As a function (soft key) relates to particular screens or dialogs, that functionality is only available
when the appropriate screen or dialog is displayed. For example the new level function is only
available when the design selection screen is displayed, as that function relates only to that screen.
If a soft key has no function in a screen or a dialog, the soft key label is blank.
The text changes when you press the soft key in order to select options. The top line of this soft key
ends with a colon ":" and the bottom line shows the current option or setting. For example, the soft
keys "Blade: Left" and "Blade: Right" show the side of the blade that has focus. The current focus
(Left or Right) shows on the bottom line of the soft key.
Arrow keys
Navigating within menus and lists
Entering data
In the text and number fields in any of the dialogs, complete the following actions:
Panning around the screen

Before you can begin work you must enter the configuration and setup information into the system
Additionally, you must view the current system state. You accomplish these tasks by working with
screens called menus and dialogs. Menus allow you to select a dialog. Dialogs permit you to perform
the following tasks:
• Specify information
• Setup information
• Configure information
Additionally, dialogs allow you to view information about the state of the system components.
(1) LCD
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) "+" Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) "-" Key
(10) "OK" Key
(11) Menu Key
When you are working with the display, you will be using a mix of keys, soft keys, menus, dialogs
• The sensors installed on the machine. Some configuration screens, for example, are only
available when particular sensors are installed.
• The guidance configuration of the system. Your selection of guidance method will affect the
guidance information available on the display and the guidance configuration options you get.
• The operator configuration of the system.
Note: The selection of menus and screens that are set up by your site manager will affect the items
that you can view and modify.
Working with Dialogs
Use the dialogs in order to enter data. Use the dialogs in order for the AccuGrade system to be set up
color.
Press the arrow keys on the display in order to enter data:
• a space
• back to "A"
existing character.
space to the left.

this data.
item.
Warnings
An error, such as the loss of GPS data, will cause inaccurate guidance. When an error occurs, a
warning message flashes on the screen. Guidance via the light bars is not provided under these
conditions. For more information, refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and
Adjusting, KENR5965, "Flashing Messages". Illustration 4 is an example of a warning message.
least 1.5 seconds.
Hourglass
When the system performs an operation that takes more than a few seconds, an hourglass appears.
while the software updates the display after a pan or zoom.
from the data card.
NOTICE
When the data card is in use, a red screen will warn the user not to
remove the card. Wait the screen returns to normal before you remove
the data card, otherwise the data card may be corrupted.
Construction designs are developed in the office with AccuGrade Office software. The construction
designs are saved onto a data card in order to be read by the AccuGrade system. The software
interprets the designs. The software uses the light bars in order to guide your position while you are
working.
A data card is a microchip that can store large amounts of data without the need for a permanent
power supply.
Data cards are used in order to transfer designs between the office, where the designs are created, and
You can use AccuGrade Office software in order to view and retrieve the files on a data card.
Data cards also store the following configuration files:
When the data card is active, a small amber LED indicator beside the slot is illuminated. Do not
remove the data card until this light is off. The data card may be corrupted.
In order to insert a data card, complete the following steps:

(15) Data Card
1. Open the access door in order to access the slot for the data card. The slot is below the keypad
on the display. Refer to Item (12) in Illustration 6.
2. Insert a data card.
(15) Data Card

(15) Data Card
You can use the AccuGrade Office software in order to view files that are on a data card. You
can use AccuGrade Office software in order to retrieve the files that are on a data card.
Information about specific machines can be saved to a data card. This information is held in a
machine settings file, and is used in order to configure the AccuGrade system for a specific machine,
if the display is being shared with several machines.
• The machine type
• The machine dimensions
• Valve calibrations
• Vertical guidance method
• Valve speed
• Blade wear
• Avoidance zones
• GPS accuracy
Note: When you restore display or machine settings, the GPS receiver configuration settings and
brightness settings of the display are not changed.
operators can be saved to a data card by your site manager. This information is held in a display
settings file, and is used to configure the display for a specific operator if the machine is being used
by several operators.
The display settings file includes information about the following settings:
• Alignment selection
• Auto pan
• Blade focus
• Beeper
• Cross section view
• Design information - but not restored
• Horizontal offset
• Layered lift
• Lightbar brightness
• Lightbar scales
• Map recording
• On grade tolerance
• Operator configuration
• Overcut protection
• Perpendicular lift
• Plan view rotation
• Profile view
• Reference surface
• Text views - all
• Units
• Vertical lift
• Vertical offset
• Vertical offset increment
• Working surface
• The text items that are displayed in the guidance screens
• Configuration tasks that can be performed
• Guidance settings that can be changed
Light Bars
The light bars are mounted on the inside of the cab.
The AccuGrade system uses three light bars. Each of the light bars show different information for
• Two vertically-mounted light bars give cut/fill guidance to the blade tip on each side.
• A horizontally-mounted light bar gives horizontal guidance. Horizontal guidance is given to the
blade tip that has focus. Guidance is relative to the currently selected alignment or a defined
horizontal offset.
There are seven sets of LEDs on each light bar. Refer to Illustration 9.
Table 2
Light Bar Connector
PIN SIGNAL
1 POWER
2 GROUND
3 RS232 RX
4 RS232 TX
Switches
Blade Control Lever Switches on R Series and T Series Machines
(A) Trigger Switch

Table 3
Trigger (A)

button)
In
button) button)
Blade Control Lever Switches on N Series Machines

(A) Trigger Switch
Table 4
Trigger (A)
Activate Auto Controls ("Auto" Button De-activate Auto Controls ("Manual"

Out
(B) ) Button (C) )
In
button) button)
Note: In the remainder of this section, the push button switches on the blade control lever will be
referred to by their function. For example, when you are asked to push the auto button (B), push the
left button while the trigger switch is out.
Remote Switch Assembly for G Series

A set of remote switches plug into the display so that the controls for the AccuGrade system can be
Pressing the switch towards the up arrow increases the offset. Pressing the switch towards the down
arrow decreases the offset.

MWT Module
Automatic Blade Control Lever Switches for K Series
(D) Auto/Manual Switch
(E) Decrement Button
(F) Increment Button

In order to enter auto mode press the auto button (D). Refer to Illustration 18.
In order to increase the offset, press switch (F) . This action will raise the blade. In order to decrease
the offset, press switch (E) . This action will lower the blade.
Table 5
Joystick Switch funcition (1)
Auto (D) Man (E) Man (F) Function
X Decrease Elevation Offset. Lower the blade
X Increase Elevation Offset. Raise the blade.
(1)
Location Sensors
Location sensors are able to determine their location in three dimensional space. The following
sensors are used by the AccuGrade system.
• Global Positioning System (GPS) Receiver
• Advanced Tracking System (ATS)
GPS Receiver
GPS receivers are able to calculate their location using information broadcast from satellites that are
orbiting the earth. GPS receivers must be configured into the system before the information they
provide can be used for guidance.
machine blade, the AccuGrade system uses one or two GPS receivers. The GPS receivers are able to
calculate the location of the machine blade with information broadcast from satellites that are orbiting
the earth. The GPS receivers must be configured into the system before the information the receivers
provide can be used for machine guidance. A GPS receiver is mounted on a mast at each end of the
machine's blade.
Connector
Table 6
Contact Description Of GPS Receiver
Pin Function
A SPARE
B Ground
C CAN 2 L
D CAN 2 S
E Spare
F RS232-TX1
G Power
H Spare
J RS232-RX1
K CAN 1 S
L CAN 1 L
M ID PIN
N CAN 2 H
P CAN 1 H
R RX232-RX2
S RX232-TX2
(17) Power
(18) Data Link
(19) Satellite
The GPS receivers have three LEDs next to the harness connector. The behavior of these LEDs
indicate the status of the receiver. These LED indicators are shown in Illustration 21.
Table 7
Status LED Activity On The GPS Receiver
LED Off Slow Flash Fast Flash On Solid
Power (17)
No Power Power on
Left receiver
receiving CMRs
(19) tracked
(2)
Coil Cable for GPS Receiver
Target for the Universal Total Station (UTS)

MT900
(25) LED Unit
(26) Prism Unit
The UTS system uses a robotic theodolite in order to track an UTS target that is attached to the blade
of the machine. The UTS system reports the location of the UTS target over a wireless link. An UTS
must be configured into the system before the information it provides can be used for guidance. Refer
to Systems Operation, Testing And Adjusting, Troubleshooting, "Connector Contact Description" for
information about the connectors on the UTS.
A single UTS system, used with cross slope sensors, is able to provide high precision 3D guidance to
both cutting edge tips. An UTS based system is able to provide higher accuracy positioning than GPS,
and can continue to work in circumstances that would degrade GPS performance.
How the UTS Works
There are three main parts to an UTS system. These are as follows:
• ATS Target
• ATS Robotic Station
• A Data Radio Link
The UTS Target

MT600
MT900
(25) LED Unit
(26) Prism Unit

MT600
(35) Connector on the UTS Target
The UTS target is mounted on the part of the machine for which you need position information.
Typically, this will be a point at one end of the blade. The UTS target has two sections:
An LED unit - which acts as the target for the UTS robotic station
A prism unit - which acts as a target for the electronic distance measuring (EDM) system
UTS Total Station

UTS Robotic Station
The UTS robotic station is capable of making high precision measurements of the azimuth, altitude
and distance of the UTS target. Specially designed servomotors work with the tracking software to
allow the UTS robotic station to track the UTS target moving at typical machine speeds. If the UTS
target is lost, then the UTS robotic station will try to predict how the UTS target is moving, so that it
can attempt to reacquire the UTS target.
A Data Radio Link
The data radio link consists of two data radios, one at the UTS robotic station, and one on the
machine. The link carries the position of the UTS target, as measured by the UTS robotic station, back
to the AccuGrade system on the machine. The system combines the position of the UTS target,
relative to the UTS robotic station, with the known position of the UTS robotic station, to generate 3D
target positions.
The link also lets the AccuGrade system send commands back to the UTS robotic station.
In order to track the UTS target reliably over a wide range of machine operating speeds, the UTS
robotic station should be no closer than 15.0 m (49.0 ft) to the machine, nor farther than 300.0 m
(984.0 ft) from the machine.
The UTS robotic station must be mounted so that it is free from vibration due to wind or vehicle
movements, and with a clear line of sight to the UTS target over the full work area.
The UTS target is mounted so that the prism unit is vertically above the LED unit.
Contact Descriptions of the MT600
Connector (UTS)
Table 8
Contact Description of the UTS
A BAT +
B SELECT A
C CAN HI
D CAN LO
E SELECT B
F BAT -

Table 9
Contact Description of the ATS
A BAT +
B SELECT A
C CAN HI
D CAN LO
E SELECT B
F BAT -
Laser Receiver
The AccuGrade System uses one or two laser receivers. The laser receivers are 360 degree omni-
directional receivers that detects the laser beam and send information about the elevation of the laser
beam to the AccuGrade System.

LR400

LR400 Laser Receiver

(16) LEDs
(17) Grade Display
(18) Power LED
(19) Mode Button
(20) Power/On-Grade Button
(21) Photo Detectors
Table 10
Features and functions of the LR400 Laser Receiver
Feature Function
Grade LEDs
Arrows indicate when the cutting edge of the machine is above or below grade.
(Arrows =
The arrows show the direction that the cutting edge must move in order to reach
Amber)
the correct elevation. A green line indicates that the cutting edge is on-grade. (The
(On-grade =
LEDs also show the distance from on-grade.)
Green)
The Display shows power status, on-grade band, mode selection, and grade
Grade
information. The Display also shows when the receiver has lost the laser beam,
Display
and the direction to move the receiver to find the beam.
The LED shows whether the receiver is on or off. The LED is lit when the receiver
Power LED
is on and the Grade LEDs are off. The LED also flashes when the voltage to the
(Amber)
receiver is low.
Mode Use this button to select one of the three Display modes for the receiver. These
Button (1) modes are 5-Position, 7-Position, and Offset On-Grade.
Power/On-
Use this button to turn the receiver on/off and change the sensitivity of the on-
Grade Button
grade band (narrow, standard, and wide). (2)
Photo
The detectors sense the laser beam when it hits the receiver.
detectors
(1)
When connected to a complete AccuGrade - Laser System, the mode button is inactive. The laser receiver uses the 7-
Position Display mode. Control is linear.
(2)
When connected to a complete AccuGrade - Laser System, the switches on the receiver are not functional. Instead, all
switches are controlled by the Display.
LR410
Laser Receiver
LR410
Table 11
Feature Function
Photo Detectors
The detectors sense the laser beam when it hits the receiver.
The power LED will illuminate when power is applied to the Laser receiver.
Power and
The LED will flash slowly if below grade is detected and flash quickly if above
Grade LEDs
grade is detected.
The Power LEDs and Grade LEDs flash in the following patterns:
• Error - 2 flashes every 1.6 seconds
• On No Beam - 1 flash every 1.6 seconds
• Above Grade - 5 flashes every second

• On Grade - Solid on
• Below Grade - 2.5 flashes every second
Electric Mast
The AccuGrade System uses one electric mast. The electric mast is a telescopic receiver mount that is
driven by an electric motor. The mast vertically raises and lowers the UTS target in order to locate the
laser beam from the UTS robotic station.
Electric Mast
Refer to Table 12 for the features and functions of the electric mast:
Table 12
Callout
Feature Function
Raises and lowers the ATS target in order to locate the laser
20 Inner mast tube
beam and to change an existing elevation setting
6-Pin socket receiver Connects the coiled cable from the ATS target to the electric
21
cable connector mast
connector
Contact Description of the Electric Mast
Connector 1
Table 13
Connector 1
A Switched Power
C CAN High
D CAN Low
Connector 2
Table 14
Connector 2
A Switched Power
C CAN High
D CAN Low
G Switched Power Return
H Switched Power
I NC
J NC
Angle Sensor
The angle sensor (20) is mounted on the blade. The angle sensor measures the forward/aft pitch of the
blade in order to determine the position of the blade for manual mode operation. The angle sensor is
also used for valve calibrations.
Illustration 37 shows the pinout information for the connector on the angle sensor.
Angle Sensor Connection
Table 15
Contact Description Of The Angle Sensor
A BAT +
B SELECT A
C CAN HI
D CAN LO
E SELECT B
F BAT -
Pressure Sensors (N Series and R Series Only)
pressure is seen in this circuit, the AccuGrade system will disable the automatic controls. When the
automatic control is disabled, any unwanted motion is prevented. The hydraulic system is in the float
position.
This pressure sensor is located on the hydraulic pump. When pressure is absent in this circuit, the
AccuGrade system will disable the automatic controls. When the automatic control is disabled, any
Valve Module Interface (G Series)

The valve module interface electrically controls the valves that positions the cutting edge of the
Valve Module Interface
Table 16
A L874-OR Switched Power
B NC
C L854-YL CAN HI
D L855-GN CAN LO
E NC
F T748-PK Power GND
G NC
H NC
I NC
J NC
Table 17
A L875-BR Valve #1 Power
B L876-WH Valve #1 Gnd
C L879-GN Valve #1 Control
D L881-PU Valve #1 Fault
E L877-YL Valve #2 Power
F L878-PK Valve #2 Gnd
G L880-PK Valve #2 Control
H L882-GY Valve #2 Fault
I NC
J NC
Table 18 shows the features and functions of the valve module interface.
Table 18
Callout
Feature Function
24
harness.
lift valve.
lift valve.
tilt valve.
valve.
27 Power Indicator
Interface.
10-socket network
connector
Power Supply Module

The power supply module supplies power to the following components:
• Display
• ATS Target
• Electric Mast
• GPS Receivers
• Radio
• Angle Sensor
• Valve Module Interface
The power supply module includes power conditioning and control circuits, as well as overcurrent
and load dump protection.
Table 19
A L872-BU Switched Power
B T744-WH Power Gnd
C L873-GY Switched Power, Electric Masts
D T745-YL Power Gnd, Electric Masts
E L870-YL Awake
F L871-BU Awake Gnd
G L874-OR Switched Power, Valve Drive Module
H T748-PK Power Gnd, Valve Drive Module
Table 20
A A101-GN/OR Battery 1+
B 200-BK Battery 1-
C A102-BL Battery 2+
D 200-BK Battery 2-
E H899-OR Overcurrent Fault Indication
F NC
G A103-YL Battery 3+
H 200-BK Battery 3-
Table 21 shows the features and functions of the power supply module:
Table 21
Callout
Feature Function
29
"A" power
30
"B" harness

The implement grade control ECM provides valve control for the lift/tilt control valve, the pilot
supply valve and the counterbalance valve.
The implement grade control ECM reads the switches and provides switch status information to the
display and also provides the machine interlock status in order to ensure that the AccuGrade system is
The implement grade control ECM stores the calibration values and the machine information for the
Table 22
1 Key Switch On
21 5V Sensor Return Return
26 Trigger Switch N/C SWG
27 Trigger Switch N/O SWG
31 Battery + Power
32 Auto Mode Sw N/O SWG
33 Auto Mode Sw N/C SWG
34 Manual Mode Sw N/O SWG
39 Battery + Power
(1)
(2)
Table 23
(1)
(2)
Implement Control ECM (T Series)

The AccuGrade system signals the implement ECM for the machine in order to control blade
movement. Refer to the Systems Operation manual of the machine for more details.
Radio
TC Series Data Radio
CR Series Data Radio
The 2400 MHz band radios are used in order to communicate location information for the ATS and
commands from a base station to a machine for precise positioning.
TC Series Data Radio Status Indicator

Table 24
Status
(40)
solid)
site manager.
CR Series Data Radio Status Indicator

The CR Series radio has antenna connections on the top, an electrical connector on the bottom, and a
LED on the front. Refer to Table 25 for the LED states.
Table 25
LED Status Description
LED Off No Power
LED On Solid The Radio has power, but is not synced with the base station.
1 Hz flashing LED
The Radio is synchronized and receiving data.
Irregular flashing LED
The Radio is synchronized, but the data is incomplete.
Hydraulic Lift/Tilt Valve (G Series)

AccuGrade system is in automatic mode. The valve is controlled by the display and valve module
interface via the CAN data link.
(34) Lift Valve
(39) Tilt Valve
The lift/tilt valve is used to control the blade movement.
Bank Valve (N Series)

(50) Bank valve
(50) Bank valve
The bank valve (50) for the AccuGrade system is located in the right hand console underneath the
main control valve. The bank valve (50) is accessed by removing the cover and the plate in the cab.

regarding low pressure standby, refer to the System Operation manual for your machine.
Blade Lift Schematic

(50) Bank valve
(56) Resolver
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers

When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be raised, pilot valve (58) remains in the neutral
resolver network in the main control valve. Refer to the System Operation of your machine for more
information.
Manual Blade Lower In Auto Grade Mode Schematic
(50) Bank valve

(56) Resolver
(58) Pilot Valve
(59) Resolvers
pilot valves can override the AccuGrade system.
The pressure sensor (61) senses the pilot pressure from the pilot valve (58) for the blade lower. The
circuit for the blade lower, the AccuGrade system is then enabled. This function permits the operator
to use the float function while the AccuGrade system is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt
raise. When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be tilted right or tilted left, pilot valve (58)
remains in the neutral position. Tilt left solenoid (53) and tilt right solenoid (51) for the blade in the
Bank Valve (Grade Control) (R Series)

(65) Bank valve
(50) Bank valve
The bank valve (65) for the AccuGrade system is located on the front of the main control behind the

regarding low pressure standby, refer to the System Operation manual for your machine.
Blade Lift
(65) Bank valve

(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be raised, the pilot valve (73) remains in the
neutral position. The blade raise solenoid (69) in the bank valve (65) sends the pilot signal to the side
for lift on the lift control valve (72). Pump oil is then sent to the lift cylinders in order to raise the
blade.
Signal oil from the bank valve (65) is directed to the resolver (71). The resolver (71) determines the
highest pressure between pilot valve (73) and bank valve (65). The highest pressure is then directed to
the resolver network in the main control valve. Refer to the System Operation Manual for your
machine.
(65) Bank valve
(71) Resolver
(73) Pilot Valve
(74) Resolvers
If the pilot valve (73) is activated and the AccuGrade system is in the auto grade mode, the resolvers
(74) will only allow the highest oil pressure to pass to the main control valve. The higher pressure
from the pilot valves can override the AccuGrade system.
The pressure sensor (75) senses pilot pressure from the pilot valve (73) for the blade lower. The
circuit for the blade lower, the AccuGrade System is then enabled. This function permits the operator
to use the valve for the quick drop and the float while the AccuGrade system is in auto grade mode.
Blade Tilt
raise. When the AccuGrade system commands the blade to be tilted right or tilted left, the pilot valve
GPS Base Station

The AccuGrade system requires a GPS base station somewhere near the project.
Note: GPS base stations are not supplied by Caterpillar.
A GPS base station consists of the following components.
• GPS Receiver
• GPS Antenna
• Radio
• Cables
• Power Supply
There may also be a tripod or mast for the GPS antenna and the radio, depending on the particular
such as the roof of the site office. A reliable power supply is needed.
Make sure that the base GPS antenna is clear of obstructions, reflected GPS signals (multipath), and
optimum coverage.
The GPS base station requires a starting location. For best results set up the base GPS receiver on a
You must correctly set the GPS antenna type at your base station. If you do not, the GPS position is
degraded.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489503
Modes of Operation
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade system has two different operating modes.
• Normal Mode
• Service Mode
The operating modes allow you to perform different functions within the software. You select a mode
when you turn on the display. The mode that is selected remains active until you turn off the display.
Normal Mode
The AccuGrade system automatically defaults to the normal mode when you start-up the display. In
order to start the display, turn the key start switch to the ON position. Press the power key on the
display.
As a default, the following soft keys are available when the display is in "Normal Mode".
• Select Blade Tip Focus ("Blade:Left or Blade: Right")
• Set the Horizontal Offsets ("H. Offset:")
• Set the Vertical Offsets ("V. Offset:")
• Turn Map Recording On or Off (if enabled)
• Set the GPS Accuracy
• Enter laser screen
• Setup UTS
Normal mode.
• Select Design
• Bench (Laser and UTS only)
• Vertical Offset
• GPS Accuracy
• Edit the Blade Wear Value
• Vertical Setup
• Set the Light Bar Scales and On-Grade Tolerance
• Calibrate Sensors
• Set the Valve Speed
• Restore the Display Settings or the Machine Settings
• View basic Diagnostic Information
Refer to the Operation and Maintenance Manual, SEBU8502 for more details on normal mode
operation.
Service Mode
NOTICE
If you lack experience with the AccuGrade system, use extreme care
when you are in service mode so that you do not accidentally change
the AccuGrade system settings.
Service mode allows you to have access to all available options that the AccuGrade system offers.
Use service mode in order to change the settings that affect the operation of the AccuGrade system.
Additionally, use service mode for the installation of the AccuGrade system.
In order to place the display in the service mode, turn the display off if the display is on. Press and
hold down the "OK" key then press the power key. Make sure that you hold down the "OK" key until
the display begins to initialize.
In order to disable the service mode, turn the display off.
Use the "Setup Menu - Configuration" screen in order to perform the following when you are in
service mode:
• Select Design
• Bench (Laser only)

• Vertical Offset
• GPS Accuracy
• Blade Wear
• Vertical Setup
• Increment Switch Adjustment
• Lightbar Scales
• Map Recording
• Valve Speed
• Calibrate sensors
• Avoidance Zones
• Text items
• Beeper Configurations
• Save and Restore Settings
• Select Radio Band
• Diagnostics
Use the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog to perform the following when you are in service mode:
• Set the Machine Settings
• Set Units
• Set Machine Dimensions
• Set the Radio Network
• Light Bar Connections
• Turn on Wireless Communication Support
• Turn on Production Recording
• Upgrade Firmware
• Software Option
• Enter Software Support Option
• Guidance Hours
• Select Language
Turn the display off in order to exit service mode after editing the settings or performing tests on the
GPS receiver. This ensures that inexperienced users will not inadvertently change the settings of the
AccuGrade system.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489454
Guidance Terms
SMCS - 7220
Pitch - The forward and aft grade (or mainfall) of the machine.
The GPS receivers accurately calculate the positions of the GPS antennas by utilizing GPS signals
and correction signals from the base station. However, the position of the cutting edge at the blade
tips are the position that the AccuGrade System requires to make cut or fill information.
The display calculates the position of the cutting edge by utilizing the machine dimensions and the
GPS antenna positions. The position of the blade tips are then compared to the design in order to
calculate cut and fill information.
Heading
The heading is the direction that the machine is traveling, shown in degrees, clockwise from grid
north. 0 degrees equals North, 180 degrees equals South. The heading is calculated by comparing the
left GPS antenna with the right GPS antenna.
Guidance for a single antenna system is not given when the machine has just been started or when the
machine has lost the GPS signal.
The message "Low Accuracy (Move)" flashes on the display. Otherwise the "Low Accuracy GPS"
message will be shown on the display.
In this situation, wait until you are receiving high accuracy GPS signals again, move in a straight line,
or do both.
Pitch
Pitch is the forward / aft angle of the machine, calculated in degrees from the horizontal (0 degrees).
Pitch is expressed in percentage or Rise:Run depending on the unit settings. The pitch is considered
positive when the angle is above the horizontal (up at the front). The pitch is considered negative
when the angle is below the horizontal (down at the front).
The pitch is calculated with the information from the GPS antenna. The AccuGrade System uses the
pitch of the machine body in order to calculate the blade pitch. In manual mode, the blade can be at
any pitch and correct blade tip positions are calculated. In auto mode the blade must be in the as
measured pitch. The pitch is derived from the design surface. If there is not enough information to
calculate the pitch of the machine, the angle from the horizontal in which to apply the "antenna to
blade" offsets is also unknown. Thus, unless the machine is sitting on a level surface, the blade tip
coordinates are wrong.
The pitch may become inaccurate if one of the following occurs:
• The system is started up
• The system is reporting low accuracy GPS
• The machine turns sharply
• The machine changes pitch drastically over a short distance
The message "Low Accuracy (Move)" flashes on the display.
With an AccuGrade System and controls enabled, this occurs when an angle sensor is not connected.
The message "Low Accuracy (Pitch)" flashes on the display. In this situation, make sure that the pitch
sensor is connected to the CAN bus. The flashing message disappears.
Orientation
between the two antennas.
Cross Slope
machine. Positive cross slope rises to the right. With respect to the left blade tip, the cross slope is
considered positive when the right blade tip is high, and negative when the right blade tip is low.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489780
Data Card
SMCS - 7220
Computers in the Office

CompactFlash data cards are used in order to store the design data and any other information that the
system needs. Illustration 1 shows the physical size of the data card.
(1) Data Card

The computer that is located in the office needs a card reader in order to transfer the data to a data
card. The type of card reader that is required depends on the type of computer being used and the
operating system that the computer is using. There is no limit to the size of card that may be used.
Laptop Computers
A PC card (PCMCIA) slot is available on most laptop computers. Place the data card into a PC card
adapter and insert the adapter into the PCMCIA slot.
Desktop Computers
numerous aftermarket solutions available.
Contact the supplier of your computer in order to obtain a reader for the data card.

When a computer in the office is running Microsoft Windows 98, Windows 2000, or Windows XP
detects a data card, the computer assigns the data card the next available drive letter.
Data Card Errors

Note: Data card errors can occur if you pull the data card out of the display while the data card is
active. Do not remove the data card until the full screen message has expired.
The AccuGrade system checks the integrity of the data card every five seconds. If the system detects
appears on the screen. The data card may need to be formatted. Alternatively, replace the data card
Root Folder
file types:
• A Site Map
• Terrain Logging
• Map Recording
• Program log
• Design folders
• Display
• GPS Receiver
• Angle Sensor
The file for software support option may be in the root folder. This file is loaded into the display in
Site Map ("Name.svl", "Site.dxf" or "Name.bg.dxf")

The site map can be in two different formats. The file can be in SV Linework format (".svl") or in a
• "*.svl"
• "Site.dxf"
• "*.bg.dxf"
in the root folder. The software will search and load the first "*.svl" file that is found. If an "*.svl" is
not present, the software searches the root folder for a "Site.dxf" file. The software will load the first
file that is found. If the software does not find a "Site.dxf" file, then the software will search the root
folder for a background DXF ("*.bg.dxf") file. The software will load the first file that is found.
Note: When possible, use the SV Linework ("*.svl") format. These files will load in seconds, rather
than minutes.
Site Avoidance Zone

One or more "*.avoid.dxf" or "*. avoid.svl" files may be stored in the root folder of the data card. Site
Avoidance Zone files must be in a valid DXF or SVL format. All "*.dxf" and "*.svl "avoidance zone
files that are in the root directory are loaded.
Map recording files contain data for coverage mapping. Different types of coverage are recorded into
different "*.cat" files. The files can be identified by the type of coverage that is included in the name
of the file. The following are types of map recording coverage.
• Coverage
• Ripper
• Cut/Fill
• Terrain
• Radio Coverage
Terrain Logging (Current Terrain "NoDesign.cat")

The terrain logging file contains the recorded terrain data. This data can be used in order to build a
Log Files
The AccuGrade system automatically creates two log files in the root folder. Log files contain
When the "LOG_*.txt" file reaches 512 KB in size, the file is copied to the "LOG_*.old" file. If there
is already a "LOG_*.old" file in the root folder, then the program will overwrite this file. The data in
the older file is lost.
Note: "*" represents the serial number and time stamp.
files.
If a problem occurs with the system, e-mail these files to the support personnel for analysis.
Display Settings file ("Display**.DSP")

When the AccuGrade system creates this file, the file is placed in the root folder of the data card.
The system uses the display files for the display settings in order to save and restore the following
settings:
• "Auto Pan"
• "Blade Focus"
• "Beeper"

• "Layered Lift"
• "Map Recording"
• "Profile View"
• "Units"
• "Vertical Lift"
The default name for display setting is "Display**.DSP". "**" represents the sequential number that
display settings. Files for the display settings can be used on all machine types. The file for the
display settings may be assigned a unique name by using the arrow keys in order to enter text.
Note: The display configuration can be set up for different operators or for different sites such as
roads versus jobs on a site. Keep the appropriate display configuration for your machine in the root
Machine Settings ("name.MCH")

following settings:
The "MCH" File contains:
• "Blade Wear"
• "FTP Support"
• "GPS Accuracy"
• "GPS Port"
• "Machine Radio Network"
The name that is used for the machine settings file is the name that was assigned to the machine in the
"Machine Settings - Name" dialog.
Note: Keep the appropriate display configuration for your machine in the root folder of the data card.
GPS Receiver Configuration ("*.cfg")

Display Upgrade
When you upgrade the display, copy the "*.sg2" file to the root folder of the data card.
AccuGrade system, the system asks if you want to upgrade the display firmware.

In order to perform a GPS receiver firmware upgrade from the display you need the following files:
• New GPS receiver firmware "file.s" extension
Copy this file to the root folder of the data card only when you must upgrade the GPS receiver.
AccuGrade system, the system asks if you want to upgrade the GPS receiver.
Note: The required file may also be available in the "Upgrade Firmware" menu.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489783
Design Folder
SMCS - 7220
Design folders are placed in the root folder. The design folder must contain a design surface file. The
design folder can also contain the following:
• A Reference Surface file
Design Surfaces
• Road (".dc")
• TIN (".svd" or ".ttm")
• Grid (".dtx")
• Slope (".tsd")
• Level (".tsd")
Note: Use the AccuGrade Office design formats (".svd" and ".svl"). These files will load and operate
more efficiently.
The cut or fill calculation is the vertical difference from the cutting edge tip and the design elevation
at that point for both cutting edge tips. The design grade is based on a defined design surface, which
can be either planar or irregular. The design surface is created in one of the following ways:
• From the keypad of the AccuGrade system. Normally you use this method for planar on-site
design surfaces that the AccuGrade Office software supports.
SV Design Files
SV design and linework files ("*.svd" and "*.svl") were developed in order to maximize the
efficiency of the AccuGrade system. These files allow very large designs to be loaded without
subdividing them. This allows the machine to work over a greater area without changing design. Use
the AccuGrade Office Software in order to convert your digital design to the ".svd" format.
Road Files
Road files use the Data Collector ("*.dc") file format (versions 6.5, 7.0 and 7.5) or SDR file format
a design to a format that AccuGrade Software supports.
Table 1
Road files
File Type Use this Software
AccuGrade Office
A data format that the AccuGrade Office Software supports
Software
AccuGrade Office
A paper plan
Software
An electronic format that the AccuGrade Office Software does not support Trimble Exchange
but the Trimble Exchange software supports software
TIN Files
the AccuGrade System, create the TIN as a ".ttm" file.
The AccuGrade System can use these formats directly. Alternatively, use the AccuGrade Office
Software to convert the ".TIN" or ".ttm" files to a ".svd" file format.
Grid Files
A grid file is a rectangular grid of points. A height is assigned to each point in the grid. Normally this
grid of points is derived from a TIN or contour model.
In order to transfer grid DTM data into the AccuGrade system, create the grid in .dtx file format. The
Alternatively, use the AccuGrade Office Software to convert the ".DTM" or ".dtx" files to a ".svd" file
format.

and edit existing sloping designs in the field using the display. Refer to Operation and Maintenance
In order to create a new sloping surface design in the office, use the AccuGrade Office software.

A level surface design contains a name and a height.
In order to create a new level surface design in the office, use the AccuGrade Office software. With

Another type of file in the design folder can be the reference surface file. A reference surface modifies
one of the previous design types. This file is used in order to give vertical guidance at predetermined
distances above or below the design surface.
A number of reference surfaces can be held in the same reference surface file
In order to create a reference surface file in the office, use the AccuGrade Office software or a text
editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
Note: An ".ofs" file will not be used if the ".ofs" file is in a design folder with a ".svd" file. This is
because the ".svd" files include reference surfaces as part of the design.
The background plan file is stored in a folder with a design. The background plan file is loaded when
the design is loaded. The background plan file shows any detail that is relevant to the design that the
file is associated with. You can select any line in this file for horizontal guidance.
Typical background plan files contain the following items:
• Contour lines
• Road alignments
The file can also show features by color. Hazards such as pipes that are buried and overhead wires are
colored red in order to alert the operator. Water features can be blue.
The AccuGrade system supports two different background plan file formats. The system can be in
AccuGrade Office software linework format (".svl") or ".dxf" format.
Name the background plan file one of the following:
• "*.svl"
• "Background.dxf"
• "*.bg.dxf"
The background plan will load when the design is loaded. There should be only one background plan
file in the design folder. The software searches for a "*.svl" file and loads the first "*.svl" file found.
If a "*.svl" is not present, the software searches for a background.dxf file. If the software does not
find a "background.dxf" file, the software searches for a "*.bg.dxf".
Note: Use the SV Linework ("*.svl") format. These ".svl" formats are the most efficient for the
AccuGrade system.

Design avoidance zone files provide information about specific areas on the design that must be
avoided. One or more "*.avoid.dxf" or "*.avoid.svl" files are stored in the design folder of the data
card. The files will automatically load when present. Design Avoidance Zone files must be in "*.svl"
or a valid ".dxf" format.
Map Recording Files

Map recording files are created in the field during machine operation. Unlike other files in the design
folder the Map Recording files are not prepared in the office.
Map recording files such ripper coverage contain position information and attribute information that
can be displayed on the plan view. Map recording can be configured in order to record and display
different types of information such as position information.
The map recording files are stored within the current design directory or in the root directory if no
design is selected. Individual map recording files are created for the different map recording types.
The map recording file name includes the design name and the map recording type. All of the map
recording files have a "*.cat" extension. The AccuGrade system loads the appropriate map recording
The following is the naming convention for the map recording files.
• "<Map recording type><Design file name>.cat"

Terrain logging files are created in the field during machine operation. Unlike other files in the design
folder, the terrain logging files are not prepared in the office.
The terrain logging file contains the recorded terrain data. This data can be used in order to build
file is saved to the appropriate design folder. However, if no design is loaded, then the ".st" file is
saved to the root folder. The file in the design folder is called current terrain "<Designname>.st". You
must import this file into the AccuGrade Office software in order to build the current terrain model
and the radio coverage map.

Note: Always check the coordinates of your cutting edge against a surveyed stake after you load a
new ".cfg" file.
The ".cfg" file is stored in either the design folder or the root folder of the data card. When the ".cfg"
file is in the design folder the AccuGrade system automatically sends the ".cfg" file to the GPS
receivers when the design is loaded.
The ".cfg" file contains the local coordinate system parameters and the GPS calibration parameters.
In order to create the ".cfg" file use the AccuGrade Office software or the Configuration Toolbox
software.
".DXF" Files
AccuGrade System projects can contain three types of ".DXF" files:
• The Site Map (".bg.dxf") file

• The Site and Design avoidance zone (".avoid.dxf") files
• The Background Plan (".bg.dxf") file
Note: Caterpillar recommends that you use the ".svd" and ".svl" file types, in preference to ".DXF"
format files. These file types load faster.
Creating ".DXF" Files

Caterpillar recommends that you use the AccuGrade Office software in order to convert your ".DXF"
files to ".svl" files. Typical Computer Aided Design (CAD) systems use hundreds of megabytes of
RAM and sometimes multiple processors to manage the large data files with which they work. In
contrast, for the AccuGrade system, the ".DXF" files should be as small as possible since the system
must provide real-time guidance five times a second to an operator. Smaller files load, zoom, and pan
more quickly.
When you create the ".DXF" files with the CAD process, you can make the files smaller with very
little effort.
Note: When you create a ".DXF" file for the AccuGrade system, do not include layers which are
turned off (or frozen) in your CAD package.
Note: The ".DXF" file format does not contain any information on the units used (feet or meters). As
all ".DXF" drawing files do not have units, make sure that the AccuGrade system uses the same units
that were used when the ".DXF" file was created.
When you create a ".DXF" file, complete the following steps:
1. Make a copy of your CAD design and decide on the information that you need in the
AccuGrade system.
2. Delete all of the information that you do not want to see in the AccuGrade system.
3. Make sure that all layers are turned on (and are thawed) in your CAD package. Delete all of the
duplicate points and other duplicate objects.
4. Only have simple closed polygons defined in your avoidance zone ".DXF".
5. Create the ".DXF" file.
6. Use the AccuGrade Office software to convert the".DXF" file to a ".svl" file.
Note: You can create a file using any design software that can make a ".DXF" file in the CAD ".dxf"
format, but the file must also conform to the requirements of Caterpillar. The AccuGrade Office
software checks the file size and will show a preview.
Note: If you use AutoCAD® 2000 to produce your ""DXF file, make sure that you explode any AEC
entities before you save the file as an AutoCAD® R14 DXF file.
If the file is not small enough, try the following actions:
• Save the file as an ".svl" format file from AccuGrade Office software.
• Check any curving polylines. You may be able to delete every second point that describes a
curve and still keep the shape accurate enough for the AccuGrade system. There is usually a
parameter in the design software that you can set to control the number of points.
• If you show contour lines, you may be able to show every second contour line and still show
enough information to the operator.
• Check that you do not show more of a work area than you need. You may be able to make the
file smaller by showing a work area in two parts. The parts can include a small overlap rather
than a hard cutoff between adjacent designs. Use the AccuGrade Office software to subset files
easily.

If you do not use ".svd" and ".svl" file types, a large design size, large ".DXF" Site Map, avoidance
zones, and/or background plan files can cause problems in the AccuGrade system.
The AccuGrade system may not have enough memory to load a design, ".DXF" site map, avoidance
zones, or background plan file from the data card.
When this occurs, a message states that the combined size of the design, ".DXF" Site Map, avoidance
zones, and Background Plan files is too large for the system. To solve this issue, convert the design
files to ".svd" files and the ".DXF" linework files to ".svl" format when possible. Alternatively,
review and reduce the size of your design and/or ".DXF" files.
Note: To guarantee that your design, site map, avoidance zones, and background plan files will load
in the AccuGrade system, use the AccuGrade Office software on a computer that is running the
Windows® 2000 or Windows® XP operating system.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489421
Flashing Messages
SMCS - 7220

Table 1
You have entered an avoidance
"Avoid. Zone zone. This is an area that has Use plan view to guide your machine out of
Entered" been designated as unsuitable for the avoidance zone.
machine operation.
The set of dimensions that has
been entered is incomplete, or Refer to Systems Operation, KENR8978,
"Check
inconsistent with a machine "Display Settings" in order to restore a
Machine
dimension that can be measured machine settings file. Otherwise, ask your site
Dimensions"
by the system (e.g., the distance manager to enter the correct machine
between the two receivers in a measurements.
dual GPS system).
Refer to Special Instruction, REHS4649,
"Check "Installation of AccuGrade ® GPS Version 11
The stored machine settings are For All Track-Type Tractors" in order install a
Machine
invalid. suitable machine settings file. Otherwise, ask
Type"
your site manager to correct the system
configuration.
View the "Diagnostics Menu" in order to
check the status of the sensors. Otherwise,
The vertical guidance method
follow the procedure described in Operation
"Check V. selected is not compatible with
and Maintenance Manual, SEBU8502,
Setup" the attached or configured
"Vertical Guidance Method - Set" in order to
sensors.
choose a vertical guidance method supported
by the available sensors.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489677
Radio Utility
SMCS - 7220
"Machine Radio Configuration"

The "Machine Radio Configuration" menu allows you to change the number of the network or the
frequency channel on data radios.
To open the "Machine Radio Configuration" dialog, complete the following steps:
1. In service mode, select the "Installation" soft key from the "Setup" menu.
2. Press the arrow keys until "Machine Radio Configuration" is highlighted.
4. Use the arrow keys (8) in order to select the same network as the base station for CR900 radios.
Use the arrow keys (8) to select the same frequency as the base station for CR450 radios.
"Display's Radio Port"

When a third party radio is used, the display for the AccuGrade System allows the user to adjust the
following communication parameters:
• Baud Rate
• Parity
The "Display's Radio Port" settings sets the speed at which the display communicates with the radio.
These settings do not affect the speed of data transfer though the air between radios. Refer to the
following Steps in order to adjust the "Display's Radio Port" settings.
(1) LCD
(2) Soft Key Labels
(3) Soft Keys
(4) Escape Key
(5 ) Next Key
(6) Power Key
(7) "+" Key
(8) Arrow Keys
(9) "-" Key
(10) "OK" Key
(11) Menu Key
(12) Data Card Slot
1. To view all options in the "Setup Menu" dialog you must start the AccuGrade System in service
mode.
Note: Hold the "OK" key (10) and press the power key (6) in order to start the AccuGrade
System in service mode.
2. Press the menu key (11) until the soft key label "Setup Menu" is shown. Press the soft key (3)
beside the "Setup Menu" soft key label.
3. Select the soft key that is located beside the "Installation" soft key label from the "Setup" menu.
4. Press the arrow keys until "Display's Radio Port" is highlighted.

6. Press the arrow keys in order to adjust the "Baud Rate". Press the next key (5) in order to toggle
between the fields in the "Display Radio Port".
7. Press the arrow keys in order to adjust the "Parity".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489682
Display Registration and Activation

SMCS - 7220
In order to use the AccuGrade system, you must perform the registration process. A Caterpillar
dealer can perform the registration and activation process. When you register the display, you
will receive a unique registration key that is used to activate the display. This registration
process allows the display to be upgraded as software upgrades are released.
Obtaining a Registration Key

Example of the Page for Registration
Refer to the following Steps in order to obtain the registration key for activating a new display.
1. Record the serial number that is located on the identification plate on the display.
2. Go to the following web site: "www.techproductregistration.com".
Refer to Illustration 1 for an example of the registration form.
Note: If access to the web site is not available, call 888-223-7539 in order to register the
software manually.
3. Complete the registration form that is found on the web site.
Note: Press the refresh button on the internet browser after you enter the information into the
fields.
Refer to Special Instruction, REHS3666 for detailed information.

4. Select "Confirm".
Within 30 minutes after completion of the form, an e-mail will be sent to the e-mail address of
the dealer that was submitted on the form. This e-mail will have the registration key number
that is needed in order to activate the display.
5. Provide the registration key number to the appropriate person in order to enter the number into
the display.
Save this information for future reference.
Entering a Registration Key into the Display

Refer to the following steps in order to enter a registration key into the display.
1. Turn the key start switch of the machine to the "ON" position and press the power key in order
to start the system.
The display will power up. A screen that is similar to Illustration 2 will appear.
◦ Copy the file for the registration key to the root folder of the data card. Press "OK".
◦ Enter the option key that was obtained. The option key is 24 characters. Use the arrow
keys on the keypad of the display. Press "OK" key.
If the process was successful, the "Option Keys File Loaded" dialog will appear. Refer to
Illustration 4. This indicates that one option key has been loaded successfully.
The "Plan View" appears.
Note: If the key does not activate check the following:
◦ Verify that the key was entered correctly.
◦ Verify that the serial number that is located on the identification plate of the display
matches the electronic serial number of the display.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03530940

SMCS - 7220
The file for the display firmware is available on the "Downloads" page of the Service Information
System (SIS). The file is used to upgrade the display.
Upgrade the display firmware for the following reason only:
• You want a more recent version.
NOTICE
The upgrade procedure returns the AccuGrade system settings to

Procedure
Required Equipment
You need the following equipment in order to upgrade your display firmware, and then enable the
option keys.
• The display and your power supply
• The upgrade file for the display firmware from SIS
• A data card
• A adapter for a PC card
• A PC that can communicate with the data card

Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03538959

SMCS - 7220
Note: Ensure that the firmware that is being installed is for the correct component. Installation of
incorrect firmware can cause damage to the component. Example, installation of the LR400 laser
receiver firmware onto a LR410 laser receiver will damage the laser receiver.
The firmware files for CAN devices allow you to upgrade the sensors for the AccuGrade System to
the current firmware versions. In order to complete the upgrade, use the display. The firmware files
for the display are available on the Service Information System (SIS). For the latest version,
download the firmware file that is found on the "Downloads" tab on SIS.
a ".fls" file can be used with the Caterpillar Electronic Technician (ET) in order to upgrade the
following sensors:
• Electric Mast
• Laser Receiver
• Angle Sensor
The AccuGrade system contains the following types of sensors:
• MT900 Target
• CRxxx Radio
• Angle Sensor
• GPS Receiver
• Laser Receiver
1. In order to enter service mode, hold down the "OK" key and press the power key.
2. Press the menu key. Press the "Installation" soft key in order to list the items that are under the
"Installation" dialog.
3. Press the arrow keys until "Upgrade Firmware" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. If at least one device was detected on the CAN bus, a dialog that is similar
to Illustration 1 will appear.
This dialog lists all of the the correctly named ".s" files on the root folder of the data card or the
internal memory of the display that are applicable for the type of machine that is selected. The
version of each file is also shown.
5. Verify that the software versions that are displayed on the screen are the latest versions.
a. Check on the "Downloads" page of SIS for the latest software versions.
b. If newer versions of software are available on SIS, copy the software to the root directory
of a data card.
c. Place the data card into the display.
6. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the "AS400nnn.s" file or the "CR900nnn.s" file.
The dialog displays the "current application" and "loader version" of the sensors.
8. Disconnect all components in the AccuGrade System.

When the upgrade is completed, a text message will appear. The text message will inform you
if the upgrade was successful or failed.
If the upgrade was successful, the device version is updated to reflect the change.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489678
Setup Menu
SMCS - 7220
Use the "Setup Menu" dialogs in order to access the configuration menus for the AccuGrade system.
The "Setup Menu" dialogs are available in the following modes:
• Normal
• Service
In service mode, use the "Setup Menu - Configuration" and "Setup Menu - Installation" dialogs in
order to access all of the AccuGrade system settings.
Note: Changes to the items in the "Setup Menu" dialogs take effect when you exit the "Setup Menu".
All of the setup parameters for the AccuGrade system are reset to the defaults whenever you load a
new version of the display firmware.
1. Press the menu key.
Two setup menus are available in service mode ("Setup Menu - Configuration" and "Setup Menu -
Installation").
"Setup Menu - Configuration"

Items in the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog include troubleshooting items as well as
configuration settings. As a default, some of these items are visible in service mode only, while other
items are visible in all modes. The options are shown in Table 1, 2 and 3.
GPS
Table 1
Available In These For More Information, Refer to the
Setup Menu Item
Modes (As a Default) Following:
SEBU8502
"GPS Accuracy" All Modes
Mode"
SEBU8502
"Increment Switch Systems Operation, "Increment
Service Mode
Adjustment" Switch"
Scale"
Service Mode
Calibrate"
Systems Operation, "Map Recording"
"Map Recording" Service Mode
Normal and Service Mode Testing and Adjusting, "Blade

"Valve Speed"
Reaction Time -Adjust"
Systems Operation, "Avoidance
Zone"
Rotation"
Systems Operation, "Display
Settings"
Settings"
"GPS Receiver Systems Operation, "Receiver
All Modes
Configuration" Configuration"
Normal and Service Mode Troubleshooting, "Diagnostic
"Diagnostics"
Capabilities"
Laser
Table 2
Available In These Modes For More Information, Refer to the
Setup Menu Item
(As a Default) Following:
"Bench" All Modes
SEBU8502
Vertical Offset All Modes
SEBU8502
SEBU8502
Service Mode
Adjustment" Switch"
Scale"
Service Mode
Calibrate"
"Valve Speed"
"Stability" All Modes
SEBU8502
Settings"
Settings"
"Diagnostics"
Capabilities"
ATS
Table 3
Available In These Modes For More Information, Refer to the
Setup Menu Item
(As a Default) Following:
SEBU8502
"Bench" All Modes
SEBU8502
SEBU8502
Service Mode
Adjustment" Switch"
Scale"
Service Mode
Calibrate"
Systems Operation, "Map Recording"
"Map Recording" Service Mode

"Valve Speed"
Systems Operation, "Avoidance
Zone"
Rotation"
Settings"
Settings"
"Diagnostics"
Capabilities"
"Setup Menu - Installation"

Items listed under the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog include items that are used when you install
or reinstall a AccuGrade system or to update the device firmware. In order to access the "Setup Menu
- Installation" dialog, press the "Installation" soft key. By default the "Setup Menu - Installation"
dialog is only available in service mode. However the operator configuration can be customized so
that some or all of the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog is available in normal mode.
Depending on the current machine configuration, different options are available from the "Setup
Menu - Installation" dialog. The options are shown in table 4.
GPS
Table 4
Available In These
For More Information, Refer to the Following:
Setup Menu Item Modes (As a
Default)
Configure"
Service Mode
Configuret"
"GPS Options Keys" (1)
"Machine Radio
Configuration"
"Lightbar
Connections"
"Wireless
Support"
Support"
"Production
Service Mode recording data to the data card for processing by
Reporting"
the office software.
Systems Operation, "Receiver Firmware
"Upgrade Firmware"
Service Mode Upgrade, Display Firmware Upgrade, Angle
Sensor Firmware Upgrade"
"Operator
Configuration"
(1)
For future use
Laser
Table 5
Available In These
For More Information, Refer to the
Following:
Default)
Configure"
Service Mode
Configuret"
"Lightbar Testing and Adjusting, "Light Bar - Configure"
Service Mode
Connections"
"Wireless
Support"
Support"
"Upgrade Firmware" Service Mode Upgrade, Display Firmware Upgrade, Angle
"Operator
Configuration"
ATS
Table 6
Available In These
For More Information, Refer to the Following:
Default)
Configure"
Service Mode
Configuret"
"Machine Radio
Configuration"
"Lightbar
Connections"
"Wireless
Support"
Support"
"Production
Service Mode recording data to the data card for processing by
Reporting"
the office software.
"Upgrade Firmware"
Service Mode Upgrade, Display Firmware Upgrade, Angle
"Operator
Configuration"
Working with the "Setup Menu"

You can do the following within any of the "Setup Menu" items.
1. Press the "OK" key in order to save any changes to the setup.
display shows a warning.
You can do the following within the "Setup Menu".
• In service mode, press the "Config." soft key in order to list the items under the "Setup Menu -
• In service mode, press the "Installation" soft key in order to list the items under "Setup Menu -
Installation" dialog.
• When all of your changes are made to the items in either "Setup Menu" dialog, press the "ESC"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489413
Avoidance Zone
SMCS - 7220
color.
measures are carried out.
avoidance zones.

dialog.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489415
Beeper
SMCS - 7220
Setting the Beeper

The display includes an internal beeper. The beeper can be configured to provide an audible signal
Table 1
Above Grade
Below Grade
GPS Accuracy
ATS Tracking
the ATS loses lock on the machine target.
Laser Receiver
the laser receiver loses strikes from the laser transmitter.
Auto/Manual
States
Key/Switch
Beeps
cannot be disabled.
1. The AccuGrade System must be in service mode in order to access the setup for the beeper.
From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Beeper" is
highlighted.
2. Press the "OK" key. The "Beeper" dialog appears. Refer to Illustration 2.
Events that are disabled are identified by an "X" in the box. Events that are enabled are
identified by a check mark. Events that cannot be disabled are identified by a grayed out check
mark. Subevents that cannot be disabled independent of their master event are also identified by
a grayed out check mark.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to select different events.

4. Press the first soft key on the right hand side of the display in order to enable or disable an
event.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to confirm the setting. The setup for the beeper is saved. The
"Beeper" dialog is closed and the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog appears. The
6. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489710
Blade Wear
SMCS - 7220

blade wear is uneven, use an average value. However, guidance will never be better than the range of
the differences.
In order to set the "Blade Wear", complete the following steps:
1. Measure the height of the cutting edge to the center of the bolt holes. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, select the "Blade Wear" option. Refer to
Illustration 2.
3. Press the "OK" button.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 3 will open.
Note: Be aware of the units. If the display is configured in metric units, the blade measurement
must be entered in metric units. If the display is set up in feet, the blade measurement must be
entered in tenths of feet.
a. Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
b. Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel any changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
changes.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489714

SMCS - 7220
The "Display and Lightbar Brightness" dialog sets the brightness of the LCD and the light bars.
1. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Display and
Lightbar Brightness" is highlighted.
soft key.
4. Press the arrow keys in order to increase or decrease the brightness.
5. Press the "Set Maximum" key in order to select the maximum brightness.
7. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. All changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03538452

SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade System must use a radio that is compatible with the local GPS base station radio.
Caterpillar currently offers the CR900 and CR450 for the AccuGrade System. These radios require
Trimble infrastructure radios for compatibility. For sites that are using non-Trimble infrastructure,
customer supplied radios may be connected to the AccuGrade System. However, the customer
supplied radio will need to be configured for use with the AccuGrade System. This document outlines
the issues with wiring that must be addressed in order to provide communication with the AccuGrade
System. Caterpillar makes no claim to compatibility with all radios. Additionally, Caterpillar assumes
no responsibility for the performance of the system that contains customer supplied radios.
Follow the recommendations that are listed below when you install a customer supplied radio:
• Use 18 gauge wire for all lines. Avoid wire that is less than 18 gauge.
correct pinouts.
customer supplied radios.
Power to a customer supplied radio is provided through the AccuGrade harness at a nominal 24 VDC
(15 amp max). Power may vary from 22 - 28 VDC during radio operation. If regulated power is
required by the customer supplied radio, it is the responsibility of the customer to provide a power
converter to the radio. Additionally, it is the responsibility of the customer to wire the power
1. Locate the Electrical Schematic for the connector of your customer supplied radio.
Note: If there are any limitations on input power, find a suitable converter. The converter
should be wired between the AccuGrade connection and the connection for the customer
supplied radio.
b. Locate the required pins on the radio for power and communications.
These pins may vary for each customer supplied radio. The pins that are listed below are
required:
■ + BAT
■ GND
■ TX
■ RX
2. Locate the Electrical Schematic for the AccuGrade System and the specific Caterpillar
machine.
b. Trace the wires from the 8-pin connector to the 12 pin Deutsch connector.
■ + PWR
■ GND
■ COM 2 TX
■ COM 2 RX
Use the pin identification that is noted in Steps 1 and 2.
Field Conditions
Required
• Create a cable that connects a compatible customer supplied radio to the AccuGrade System.
1. Can the customer supplied radio communicate CMR data over RS-232.
Yes - The customer supplied radio is compatible with the AccuGrade System.
No - The customer supplied radio is not compatible with AccuGrade System.
2. Will the machine radio operate within 9-32 VDC.
Note: Verify that all of the necessary connections can operate at machine voltages.
Answer - By looking in the radio documentation found that radio can run on 9-32 VDC, but in
order for radio to function the DTR line needs to be tied high and it has a limitation of 25 VDC.
Solution - Use a 240-2735 Power Converter to step the voltage down to 12 VDC.
3. Use the information that is provided by the manufacturer of the radio in order make all of the
necessary connections.
◦ Power
◦ Ground
◦ TXD
◦ RXD
◦ DTR
Note: DTR is required by this example in order to make the radio active.
harness connector.
◦ Power
◦ Ground
◦ COM2 TXD
◦ COM2 RXD
5. Configure the machine radio and the AccuGrade System to communicate over RS232.
ReferenceReference Systems Operation, KENR5956, "Radio Utility".

a. Change the settings so that the customer supplied radio and the display match.
Default settings for the display
Baud rate ... 38400

Data Bits ... 8 (Fixed setting on display)
Parity ... None
Stop Bits ... 1 (Fixed setting on display)
6. Verify that the over the air data/communications rate are set the same in both the base and
machine radio.
to set both radios to the same over the air data/communications rate.
8. Apply power to the system and verify the communication to the base.
Use the display in order to check the" Left data link". The value should be increasing for the
integrity. If the value is not increasing, refer to the "Troubleshooting" section below.
Information Checklist for Third Party Radio
Table 1
Obtain the manual from the manufacturer of the radio.
Verify that the settings can be changed in order to match the display.
may run to 28VDC
Radio channel
Validate the settings of the radio in order to communicate with the base
radio.
Find the pin identification for the radio.
Find the electrical schematic for the machine. Refer to "Radio Pin-Out Tables and Schematics"
Create a simple schematic from the information that was collected. The schematic should show
which pin on the radio connects to the pin on machine connector.
Use the simple schematic in order to build the harness.
Install the harness on machine. Verify power to the radio when the system is turned on.
Verify that the AccuGrade System is receiving CMRs from the Base Station.
Troubleshooting
No Power To Radio
• Verify the connections to the power and the ground pins.
• Verify the input power that is required for the radio.
• If a converter has been added, ensure +PWR and ground from AccuGrade connector are
connected to converter, and that +PWR and ground from converter are connected to radio
• Verify that the radio is a data terminal equipment (DTE) device.
• If the radio is a data communications equipment (DCE) device, modify the TX and the RX
Note: It is critical to follow the documentation from the radio manufacturer in order to ensure the
proper handshake and/or other communications start-up procedure is properly executed. Additionally,
customer supplied radios may require additional pins to be grounded or hooked to voltage. These pins
will also be identified in the manufacturer's documentation.

Table 2
8-PIN Connector 12-Pin Deutsch Connector
A + Battery 184 1
B Ground 200 12
C COM 0 TXD N957 2
D COM 0 RXD N960 3
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489653
Display Settings
SMCS - 7220
Save Settings
Use the "Save Settings" dialog in order to save the display settings, machine settings, or both to a data
card. From this dialog, you can save all the settings in the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog.
The settings file for display ("*.dsp") contains the following information:
• Alignment Selection
• Auto Pan Selection
• Blade Focus
• Beeper Configuration
• Cross Section View - Text items
• Display Brightness
• Layered Lift Selection
• Lightbar Brightness
• Lightbar Scales
• Map Recording
• On grade Tolerance
• Overcut Protection selection

• Perpendicular Lift selection
• Plan View Rotation selection
• Plan View - text items
• Profile View - text items
• Reference Surface selection
• Text Views
• Units
• Vertical Lift
• Vertical Offset
• Vertical Offset Increment
• Working Surface
The settings file for the machine (*.mch) contains the following information:
• Avoidance Zone Distance
• Blade Wear
• FTP Support selection
• GPS Accuracy mode
• GPS Port
• Machine Radio Network
• Machine Dimensions
• Vertical Guidance Method
• Valve Speed
display settings.
In order to access the "Save Settings" dialog, complete the following steps:
1. Make sure that a data card is inserted in the display.
2. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Save Settings" is
highlighted. Press the "OK" key in order to continue.
3. The "Save Settings" dialog appears. Press the arrow keys in order to select either "Display
Settings" or "Machine Settings".
4. Press the "OK" key. The dialog that is shown in Illustration 2 appears.
The default file name for the display settings is "DISPLAY NN". The default file name for
machine settings is "TTT NN".
saved.
The number assigned to a new display settings file is one more than any similarly named
settings file already on the data card. For example, if there is already a grader machine settings
file (called GRADER 01) on the card, the AccuGrade system assigns the name GRADER 02.
a name such as "16H GRADER". Use the arrow keys to edit the default name.
Note: You cannot use the display to overwrite or delete an existing settings file.
Settings" dialog appears. Press the "Esc" key in order to go back to the "Setup Menu" dialog.
In order to close the dialog without saving the configuration to the data card, press the "ESC"
Note: If you change the default name, and then press the "ESC" key, you are prompted to
confirm that you want to cancel your changes.
Restore Settings
The "Restore Settings" dialog allows you to restore the previously saved display settings and/or
the GPS receiver configuration settings sent from the .cfg file.
1. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Restore Settings" is
highlighted.
Make sure that a data card is inserted in the display.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to select either "Display Settings", "Machine Settings", or "Old
Version".
A dialog that is similar to Illustration 4 appears.

5. Use the arrow keys in order to highlight the settings file that you require.
machine type, a warning message appears. This text appears on the "Setup Menu –
Depending on which file was selected in the "Settings" type selection dialog, one of the
following messages shown in Table 1 will appear.
Table 1
File Type Message
The relevant updates are automatically sent to the GPS receiver (if required). A dialog will
appear which indicates that the GPS receiver is being configured.
Note: If you restore a settings file that turns on FTP support, a dialog warns you that the display
must be restarted in order for the changes to take effect. Press the "OK" key in order to turn off
the display.
automatically sent to the GPS receiver. A dialog appears telling you that the GPS receiver is
being configured.
to update the GPS receiver configuration. To solve this problem:
◦ Make sure that the GPS receiver is being recognized by the system. In order to do this,
system).
the "Setup Menu – Configuration" (in Service Mode).
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03541461
Display Language
SMCS - 7220
Configuration
The display firmware is translated into the languages that are listed below. The languages that are
available are stored in the display.
• Afrikaans (AFR)
• Czech (CES)
• Danish (DAN)
• Dutch (NLD)
• Estonian (EST)
• UK English (ENG)
• Finnish (FIN)
• French (FRA)
• German (DEU)
• Hindi
• Icelandic (ICE)
• Korean (KOR)
• Latvian (LAV)
• Lithuanian (LIT)
• Italian (ITA)
• Norwegian (NOR)
• Polish (POL)
• Romanian (RUM)
• Slovak (SLK)
• Spanish (ESP)
• Swedish (SWE)
• Russian (RUS)
• Chinese (ZHB)
• Japanese (JA)
Change the Language with the Menu

In order to select your desired language by using the menus, complete the following steps:
1. In order to enter service mode, hold down the "OK" key while the display powers up.
2. Press the "Installation" soft key.
3. Select the "Language Select" menu.
Change the Language with the Shortcut

In order to select your desired language with the shortcut, complete the following steps:
1. Power down the display.
2. Hold down the menu key while the display powers up.
A list of languages will be displayed.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489652
Display Units
SMCS - 7220
1. Start the display in service mode.
3. Press the arrow keys until "Units" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. As a default, the "Distance Units" dialog is selected. The dialog in
road design.
◦ Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel and return to the "Setup Menu – Installation"
dialog.
return to the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog. You can begin to enter details such as the
7. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog.
The units are saved in the settings file for the display.
Distance
• Meters - as "m" (default for all display firmware files except for US English)
• US survey feet – as "FT" (default for US English display firmware)
2. Use the arrow keys in order to choose the required distance units.
DXF drawing files are unitless, use the SiteVision Office software in order to ensure that the correct
units are set.
Note: If you change your units, any currently displayed site map and background plan files are
reloaded. Then the site map and background plan files are displayed in the new units.
Speed
• Kilometers per hour - as "km/h" (default for all display firmware files except for US English)

2. Press the arrow keys in order to choose the required units.
Grade
2. Press the arrow keys in order to choose the required format.
Cross Slope
Station Format
• 1000.00 (default)
• 1+000.00
• 10+00.00
• 1/000.00
the settings and return to the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog.
4. Press the "ESC" key in order to exit the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog. The changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489661
GPS Accuracy Mode

SMCS - 7220
The "GPS Accuracy Mode" menu is used in order to filter the GPS antenna positions that are used for
machine guidance.
displayed.
• Fine
• Medium
• Coarse
• SBAS
The GPS accuracy mode offers the following advantages.
accuracy modes so that different applications can be carried out.
Note: GPS accuracy modes and GPS error limits apply to the GPS antenna position only. GPS error
GPS Position Error


information.
error limit set for the GPS accuracy mode.

• The "GPS Acc. Mode" text item shows the currently selected GPS accuracy mode.
in table 1.
Table 1

The operator can select a GPS accuracy mode. You can change the accuracy mode in normal mode,
but you must be in service mode in order to change the GPS error limits.
2. From any guidance screen, press the "GPS" soft key.

3. Press the "Edit Modes" soft keys in order to swap between the following modes:
◦ Fine Accuracy
◦ Medium Accuracy
◦ Course Accuracy

The AccuGrade System will need to be in service mode in order to edit the limits for the GPS
accuracy mode.
1. Turn off the display.
2. Press and hold the "OK" key when powering up the display.
3. Press the "GPS" soft key from any guidance screen.

4. Press the "Edit Modes" soft key.
Note: As a default, the "Edit Modes" soft key is only available when the AccuGrade System is
started in service mode.
Use the "Fine Mode" soft key, the "Medium Mode" soft key, or the "Coarse Mode" soft key in
order to select the GPS accuracy mode that you wish to change.
6. Use the arrow keys in order to enter a value in the "GPS Error Limit" field. The GPS error limit
defines the maximum allowable GPS error for the selected GPS accuracy mode.
◦ In order to set the GPS accuracy mode to "Unused", press the "Set Unused" soft key or
enter a GPS error limit of "0".
Note: When the GPS error limit is set to "Unused" for a particular mode, the mode is no longer
available to the operator for selection.
◦ In order to set the field to the default value press the soft key ("Default Set 0.050"). The
limit value on the soft key ("Default Set 0.050") changes depending on the system units
and the GPS accuracy mode selected for change.
7. Press the next key in order to enter the "Allow Automatics" field.
Selecting SBAS for the GPS Accuracy Mode
When the GPS accuracy mode is set to "Coarse Mode", you have the option of accepting SBAS
positions.
To allow SBAS positions, complete the following steps:
1. Press "Edit Modes" from the "GPS" dialog.
The "GPS Accuracy Mode Settings" dialog appears Refer to Illustration 4.
2. Select "Coarse Mode".
3. Enter a value in the "GPS error limit:" field.
For SBAS to work correctly, the value should be greater than the SBAS error of 1 m (3 ft) to 2
m (6.6 ft).
4. Press the next key twice in order to enter the "Allow SBAS positions:" field.
5. Press the arrow keys in order to toggle between "Yes" and "No". To allow the use of SBAS
corrections, select "Yes".
6. Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the GPS dialog. Press the
escape key in order to abandon any changes and return to the GPS dialog.
You are asked to confirm that you do not want to save any changes.
7. Press the escape key in order to exit the GPS dialog.
The changes take effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489422
Increment Switch
SMCS - 7220
Note: The "Increment Switch Adjustment" dialog can be configured at the site. Consult your
supervisor in order to enable this feature.
If this feature is enabled, the "Increment Switch Adjustment" dialog is used in order to set the amount
that each press of the vertical offset buttons will increase or decrease the vertical offset.
To set both the "Increment Switch Adjustment" and the "Target Cross Slope Increment" complete the
following steps:
1. Press the "Setup Menu" soft key.
2. Press "Setup Menu - Configuration".
Press the arrow keys until "Vertical Offset Switch Increment" is highlighted.
Note: If your system is configured as a dual GPS system, the dialog that is shown in Illustration
2 is shown.
buttons will increase or decrease the vertical offset.
b. Press the "Default 0.05" soft key in order to set the amount. The system default is 0.010
m (0.05 ft).
Note: If your system is configured as a dual GPS system, skip Step 4.
4. Press the "Next" key in order to highlight the "Target Cross Slope Increment" field.
buttons will increases or decreases the vertical offset.
b. Press the "Default 0.1%" soft key in order to set the system default. The system default is
"0.1%".
dialog.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489706
Light Bar Scale

SMCS - 7220
Tolerance Range
The tolerance range for the vertical light bars is the distance off grade when two of the LED indicator
lights on the light bar are illuminated. A tolerance range for horizontal light bars is the distance off the
line when two of the LED indicator lights on the light bar will be illuminated.
indicator light on the appropriate light bar is illuminated. As the blade moves off grade, additional

1. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Light Bar Scales" is
highlighted.
lights on the vertical light bar are illuminated. The remaining values of the range are
lights on the horizontal light bar are illuminated. The remaining values of the range are
◦ Press the "ESC" key in order to cancel any changes and return to the "Setup Menu –
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489451
Machine Dimensions
SMCS - 7220
Machine Dimensions
Illustration 1 shows the dimensions of the machine that will need to be obtained in order for the
AccuGrade system to operate correctly.
Refer to the Testing and Adjusting, "Machine Dimensions - Configure" section of this manual for
additional information on measuring the dimensions of the machine.
(A) Top of the lower housing height above right cutting edge bolt
(B) Top of lower housing height above left cutting edge bolts
(C) The distance that the receiver is back from the right bolts of the cutting edge.
(D) The distance the receiver is back from left bolts of the cutting edge
(E) Distance the GPS receiver is in from right blade tip
(F) Distance the GPS receiver is in from left blade tip
(G) Blade height
(H) Blade width
NOTICE
You must enter correct dimensions. Any errors will transfer directly
into the finished surface.
Note: Caterpillar recommends that you use the receiver measure up tool. If the measure up tool is not
available, the height measurements should be made to the top of the lower housing on the GPS
receiver. Measure both the left and the right GPS receivers.
NOTICE
Different offsets will be applied to the measured machine dimensions,

depending on what option is selected in the "Measure height to" field.
Selecting the wrong "Measure height to" option will introduce a
vertical error of 73 mm (2.87 inch)
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489715
Map Recording
SMCS - 7220
Terrain logging files (.cat) are also recorded when you are using certain map recording types. Terrain
shown in Table 1.
Table 1
Map Recording Types
Type Description
Coverage
section of ground
Radio Coverage

Only one type of map can be active. As a default, the map recording menu is available in the service
mode.
The "Reset map" soft key is available within map recording. The "Reset map" soft key archives the
selected map recording file and creates a new map recording file within the same folder on the card.
The map recording files use grid cells in order to store information.
types.

The AccuGrade System records a terrain log file (*.cat) as well as a map recording file when cut/fill,
Office Software can be used for the following purposes.
• Build a current terrain model of the area that is covered by the machine. The .cat file logs the
• Build a map in order to indicate the quality of the radio coverage in the area. The .cat file logs
Note: METSmanager can use the terrain logging file in order to build a current terrain model of the
The *.cat file is saved to the current design folder. The file is called Current Terrain <Design
name>.cat. If no design is loaded, the AccuGrade System saves the file to the root folder of the data
card. The file that is saved to the root folder is called Current Terrain NoDesign.cat.
In order to build both the current terrain model and the radio coverage map, you must import the *.cat

1. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Map Recording" is
highlighted.

Perform the following steps in order to set up the coverage map recording.
1. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the "Coverage" map recording type. The "Map
Recording" dialog appears. Refer to Illustration 1.
Table 2
Gray 6
Dark Gray 5
Cyan 4
Blue 3
Red 2
Yellow 1
Green 0
2. Press the next key in order to highlight the "Required" field.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to change the required number of passes. Green is always the final
color indicating that the desired number of passes have been made.
appears.
The "Coverage: Off" soft key indicates that the coverage map recording is Off.
Press the "Coverage: Off" soft key in order to begin coverage map recording. The "Coverage: On"

machine rippers.
2. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the "Ripper" map recording type The "Map
Recording" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration 2.
3. Press the next key in order to highlight the "Ripped width" field.
4. Use the arrow keys in order to change the "Ripped width" field.
opened.
loaded.
reception. Radio coverage map recording also creates a *.cat file that you can view in SiteVision
Office.
Table 3
Blue <= 2 seconds
Red >5 seconds
2. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the "Radio coverage" recording type.
design is loaded.
machine while collecting a terrain logging file (*.cat).
2. Press the arrow keya in order to highlight the "Terrain" map recording type.
opened.
loaded.

Cut/Fill map recording also creates a *.cat file that can be viewed in AccuGrade Office Software.
coding is updated.
Table 4
Color Cut/Fill
Red
Light Red
Light Blue
Blue
1. Confirm that light bar scales vertical tolerance is configured as required. Vertical tolerance can
without a design.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the cut/fill map recording type.
opened.
loaded.
Reset Map
file.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the map recording type that is to be closed. The map
recording type currently in use is highlighted by default.
in Illustration 3.
displayed.
appears.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489763
On-Grade Tolerance
SMCS - 7220
Tolerance Range
lights on the Light Bar are illuminated. A tolerance range for horizontal light bars is the distance off
the line when two of the LED indicator lights on the Light Bar will be illuminated.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03541480
On-Grade Tolerance
SMCS - 7220
Tolerance Range
lights on the Light Bar are illuminated. A tolerance range for horizontal Light Bars is the distance off
the line when two of the LED indicator lights on the light bar will be illuminated.
indicator light on the appropriate light bar is illuminated. As the blade moves off-line, additional LED
indicator lights are illuminated.
the "Cut/Fill" text field and the associated direction arrows are green.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489679
Operator Access
SMCS - 7220
Use the "Operator Configuration" dialog in order to customize the display in Operator mode. The
dialog allows you to enable or disable the following features: menu items, soft keys and views.
Follow the procedure in order to customize the operator configuration settings in the AccuGrade
System.
To access the "Operator Configuration" dialog, complete the following steps:
2. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press "Installation" in order to list the items
under the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog.
3. Press the arrow keys until the "Operator Configuration" option is highlighted.
The dialog in Illustration 1 appears.
The following information outlines the options within the dialog.
"Operator Configuration" Dialog

The "Operator Configuration" dialog shows four branch headings. Each branch heading has a check
box and an expandable tree view. These headings are as follows:
• Configuration
• Installation
• Soft Keys
• Views
Use the check box to enable or disable all the items in a heading. Use the tree view to view and select
the individual items below the heading.
"Configuration"
The "Configuration" heading contains a list of items available in the "Setup Menu - Configuration"
dialog. Enabling or disabling the items controls how the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog appears
in Normal mode. In Service Mode, menu items that are disabled in Normal mode are identified by a
red "X".
Some of the items under the "Configuration" heading are subheadings. These subheadings represent
"Configuration Menu" items that, when selected, have soft keys or submenus. Edit the items under the
"Installation"
The "Installation" heading contains a list of items available in the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog.
Enabling or disabling the items controls how the "Setup Menu – Installation" dialog appears in
Normal mode. In Service Mode, menu items that are disabled in Normal mode are identified by a red
"X".
Some of the items in the "Installation" heading are subheadings. These subheadings represent
Installation menu items that, when selected, have soft keys or submenus. Edit the items under these
"Softkeys"
The "Softkeys" heading contains a list of soft keys that appear in the guidance views. It does not
include any soft keys from items in the "Setup" menus. Enabling or disabling items in this heading
controls what soft keys are available in normal mode. In service mode, soft keys that are disabled in
normal mode are identified by red text.
Views
The "Views" heading contains the following guidance views:
• Plan
• Profile
• Cross-section
• two text screens
Enabling items or disabling items in the "Views" heading controls what guidance screens are
available in Normal mode. In Service Mode, all guidance screens are viewable.
Customizing the Operator Configuration

Press the up arrow or the down arrow in order to select an item in the "Operator Configuration"
dialog. If an item is a branch heading, press the left arrow or the right arrow in order to expand or
collapse the branch.
To enable or disable an item, select the item and press the soft key that is denoted by a check mark
and an "X".
To set the visibility of an item back to the defaults, press the "Default" soft key.
To disable all items in a branch, select the branch heading and press the "Disable All" soft key.
To enable all items in a branch, select the branch heading and press the "Enable All" soft key.
To set all the items back to their default visibility settings, select the branch heading and press the
"Default All" soft key.
After using the "Operator Configuration" dialog to customize the display settings, Caterpillar
recommends that you save the display settings. Refer to Systems Operation, Testing and Adjusting,
Troubleshooting, KENR8978, "Display Settings".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489680
Plan View Rotation

SMCS - 7220
• Machine heading up - the machine always travels upward on the display
• North up - the machine travels in any direction on the display
The plan view can also be configured with the "Autopan" option.
The plan view automatically pans in order to keep the machine icon in view when "Autopan" is
enabled.
Use the "Plan View Rotation" dialog in order to configure the display to either north up or machine
heading up. You can access the "Plan View Rotation" dialog from the "Setup Menu - Configuration"
dialog.

1. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Plan View Rotation"
is highlighted.

3. Press the arrow keys until "Plan View - Rotation" is highlighted.
4. Press the soft key with a check mark and an "X" in order to enable or disable "Rotation".
If Rotation is enabled, the Plan View on the Display rotates in order to keep the machine
heading up the display. If Rotation is disabled, the Plan View on the Display is always drawn
north upward.
5. Press the arrow keys until "Plan View - Autopan" is highlighted.
6. Press the soft key with a check mark and an "X" in order to enable or disable "Autopan".
When Autopan is enabled, the plan view autopans in order to keep the machine icon on screen.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to accept the changes and return to the "Setup Menu -
◦ Press the "ESC" key in order to abandon any changes and return to the "Setup Menu -
changes.
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489632
SMCS - 7010; 7220
Note: This is not the preferred method in order to configure the receiver. It is recommended that you
place the appropriate configuration file in each design folder. The system automatically sends the
".cfg" file when the design is loaded. This option remains in the system so that the original method of
configuring the receiver and data cards can still be used.
The configuration file contains the relationship between the site coordinate system and the coordinate
system of the GPS.
Perform the following steps in order to configure the receiver.
1. Insert a data card with a receiver configuration file in the root folder into the display.
3. From the "Setup Menu – Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Receiver
Configuration" is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK" key. The "Receiver Configuration" dialog appears. This is shown in Illustration
1.
All of the receiver configuration files in the root folder of the data card are listed on the display.
5. Press the arrow keys in order to select the correct ".cfg" file.
6. Press the "OK" key. The AccuGrade System sends the ".cfg" file to the receivers in order to
provide status information. The following text shows on the dialog in Illustration 1.
You must wait a few minutes while the receiver gains lock.
the display with the known coordinates of the point.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03488361

SMCS - 7220
Before new software can be loaded, you must have a valid file for the option key (password).
Firmware that has a release date that is newer than the expiration date on the option key cannot be
loaded.
Accessing the "Software Support Option" Menu

The "Software Support Option" dialog lists the following:
• Information about the display
• Software version
• Expiration date for the software
Menu" for more information on the setup menu.
3. Press the arrow keys until the "Software Support Option" dialog is highlighted.
Updating the "Software Support Option"

Note: You will not be able to load display firmware that is newer than the expiration date of the
option key.
The "Software Support Option" dialog allows you to update the option keys in order to change the
current support agreement.
1. Copy a valid file for the option keys to the root folder of the data card. The file is called
"Option keys <serial number >.txt". The "<serial number>" is the serial number of your display.
Obtain this file from your technical communicator.
2. Insert the data card into the display.
◦ Open the "Software Support Option" dialog. The file for the option key is detected on the
data card. The option keys are automatically loaded. A message that reports the success
or failure of the process appears.
◦ If the file for the option keys is not located on the data card, use the arrow keys in order
to enter the details of the option keys. Press the "OK" key in order to enable the option
keys.
Note: This procedure does not need to be completed again until the option key expires and you
want to update the firmware for the display. Delete the file for the option keys from your data
card.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489716
Text Items
SMCS - 7220
Text Items can be displayed on the following screens:
• Plan View
• Cross Section View
• Profile View
• Text View
Table 1 describes the available text items.
Table 1
Text View Options
Items Details
"Alignment"
Displays description of line that is used for horizontal guidance
"Avoid. Dist." blade tip position and the ripper back from cutting edge measurement are used for
Card Time The amount of time available on the card, to record data.
"Cross Slope" Cross slope of the blade orthogonal to the direction of travel. This is not the
When cut adjustment is off, the text field indicates "N/A". When Cut adjustment
"Cut Adjust"
is on and adjustment is applied, the text field shows the larger of the applied cut
adjustments for the blade tips.
"Cut/Fill Left" Shows either "Cut Left" or "Fill Left", as appropriate, for the left blade tip. If a
vertical offset is specified, the cut or fill is to the vertically offset position.
"Cut/Fill Shows either "Cut Right" or "Fill Right", as appropriate, for the right blade tip. If
Right" a vertical offset is specified, the cut or fill is to the vertically offset position.
"Design Elev"
"Design
Mainfall of the design parallel to the direction of travel
Mainfall"
Design Name
The name of the design that is currently loaded.
"Design
Cross slope of the design orthogonal to the direction of travel
XSlope"
"Easting" Easting at the blade tip with focus.
"Elevation" Elevation at the blade tip with focus.
"GPS Acc. The selected GPS accuracy mode is displayed. GPS accuracy modes are fine,
Mode" medium and coarse.
A measure of the horizontal GPS accuracy. The text is red if the value exceeds the
"H. GPS
Error"
Otherwise the text is black.
"Heading" Direction the machine is moving. Shown in degrees clockwise from the north.
"Layered Lift" layered lift is defined. Value is positive if the layered lift is above the master
"MA Offset" Offset from the blade tip with focus to the master alignment. Also see the item
"Mainfall" Mainfall of the machine in the direction of travel
"Northing" Northing at the blade tip with focus.
"Offline" horizontal offset is specified, the offline distance is to the horizontally offset
"Orientation"
"PDOP" Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) at the blade tip with focus.
Perpendicular offset between the master alignment and the working surface when
a perpendicular lift is defined. Value is positive if the perpendicular lift is above
"Perp. Lift"
the master alignment, negative if the perpendicular lift is below the master
alignment and "N/A" when no perpendicular lift is defined.
Position
Status
Front / back pitch of the machine. Pitch (Mach.) is the pitch of the machine's
Pitch body. This is used to approximate the pitch of the blade. (You must be moving or
have moved for this value to be meaningful.)
"Position
Status"
"Ref. Surface"
Describes the reference surface that is being used
"Satellites" Number of satellites used by the GPS receiver to calculate a position

"Speed"
"Station" Station at the blade tip with focus.
A measure of the vertical GPS accuracy. The text is red if the value exceeds the
"V. GPS Err. "
Otherwise the text is black
vertical offset soft key. The vertical offset will be relative to the layered lift,
Vert. Offset perpendicular lift, or vertical lift if any of these are defined. The value is positive
if the vertical lift is above the master alignment, negative if the vertical lift is
below the master alignment and 0.000 when no vertical lift is defined.
Vertical Lift vertical lift is defined. The value is positive if the vertical lift is above the master
alignment, negative if the vertical lift is below the master alignment and "N/A"
when no vertical lift is defined.

Note: The contents of the "Setup Menu" dialog can be configured at the site. Depending on the
"Operator Configuration" settings of your system and machine setting, the number of items in the
"Setup Menu" may vary. Refer to your site manager if a specific option is not available.
You can customize the display in order to show text on the plan view, cross section view, and text
selected.
If you select one to three items of information on the plan view and the cross section view, the items
appear along the top of the view. If you select four or five items, then all of the items appear down the
right side of the view.

1. From the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog, press the arrow keys until "Text Items" is
highlighted. Press the "OK" key.
2. Press the "Plan View" soft key. A dialog that is similar to Illustration 2 appears.
profile view, text view 1, and text view 2. The items are described in table 1.
• The opening screen shows the list of items that are selected to appear on the "Plan View".
• Press the "Cross-section" soft key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear
• Press the "Profile View" soft key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear on
the profile view.
text view 1.
• Press the "Text View 2" soft key in order to show the list of items that are selected to appear
on"Text View 2".
"Available Items" list is not selected, the "Add" soft key is available.
• If the highlighted option in the "Available Items" list is already selected, the "Remove" soft key
is available.
option in the "Available Items" list is not selected, the "Add" soft key is blank.
1. Press the "Plan View" soft key, the "Cross-section" soft key, the "Profile View" soft key, the
list.
2. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the item to be removed.
3. Press the "Remove" soft key.
1. Press the "Plan View" soft key, the "Cross-section"Soft Key, the "Profile View" soft key, the
list.
3. Press the arrow keys in order to highlight the item to add.
4. Press the "Add" soft key.
◦ Press the "OK" key in order to save the settings and return to the "Setup Menu -
◦ Press the escape key and then press the "OK" key in order to return to the "Setup Menu -
6. Press the escape key in order to exit the "Setup Menu - Configuration" dialog. The changes take
effect immediately.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03489718
SMCS - 7220
The AccuGrade system can communicate to the office via the AccuGrade Office software. This
option can be enabled by entering the "Setup Menu - Installation" dialog. Refer to the following
procedure in order to set up wireless communications.
1. Select "Wireless Communication Support".

2. Select "Yes" in order to enable the wireless communication.
The IP address must match the radio for the office. The radio network will be disabled.
Note: Only 900mhz radios support wireless communication.
AccuGrade Wireless Communication is an available option for the AccuGrade CD700 display. This
option can be purchased and installed on each CD700 display. The wireless communication option
allows the supervisor to perform the following:
• Transmit updated design information to the machines on the site.
• Perform basic remote diagnostics.
• Send simple text messages to the machines.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
AccuGrade® Laser (CB420)

i02768396
General Information
SMCS - 7220
• Save time
Laser Grading
System Overview
• Display
• Grade Control ECM (A4:M1)
• Cable Harness
• Single Adapter (LR400 only)

beam.
Technical Assistance
Contact your Caterpillar dealer if you have a problem and you are unable to find the information you
need in this manual.
Warnings

occur.
Display
The Display is an onboard computer for the AccuGrade - Grade Control System. The Display is
mounted in the cab of the machine.

The Display permits the user to set up the system. The Display permits the user to operate the system
via the components that are listed here:
• Liquid Crystal Display
• Toggle Switches
• Buttons
Refer to Illustration 3 for the layout of the Display.
Display
(2) Left Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll switch
(3) Right Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll switch
(4) Auto/Manual Light Emitting Diodes (LED)
(5) Elevation Select switch

(6) Cursor Scroll button
(7) Power/Setup switch
(8) ESC/Left Reset/Left Bench button
(9) OK/Right Reset/Right Bench button
Table 1
Callout
Feature Description

1
"Left Mast
2 Elevation/ Menu
Scroll" switch
"Right Mast
3 Elevation/ Menu
Scroll" switch
"Auto/Manual"
These indicators will show the operation state of the control mode.
4 Light Emitting
Automatic (Green) or Manual (Amber).
Diodes (LED)
Elevation Select
and Tilt", or "Tilt" only. The Elevation Select switch is functional
5 switch
only on a dual mast system with the Operation Mode set to
Cursor scroll button
6 This button advances the cursor horizontally through the menus.
Switches the Display ON or OFF.

"Power/Setup"
7 Accesses the setup menu while the switch is in the "i
switch
(information)" position.
receiver.
"ESC " Left
.
8 Reset/Left Bench
Allows the changes that are made in the setup menu to be rejected
button
simultaneously, the displayed value will be reset to zero. Refer to
Operation and Maintenance Manual, "Set Reference Elevation".
Allows you to step back one level in the setup menu.
Permits the right laser receiver, when connected to an electric
mast, to search for and lock onto the center of the laser beam.
With the electric mast, the on-grade location is always at the
"OK" right reset / center of the receiver.
9 right bench button Allows changes made in the setup menu to be accepted.
simultaneously, the displayed value will be reset to zero. Refer to
Operation and Maintenance Manual, "Set Reference Elevation".
Allows you to step forward one level in the setup menu.
Amber colored arrows indicate when the machine's left cutting
edge is above grade or below grade. The amber arrows indicate
Left Grade the direction that the cutting edge needs to move. A green line
10
indicators indicates that the cutting edge under the left mast is on-grade.
Note: The LED grade indicators on the display are visible when
illuminated.
Amber Colored arrows indicate when the machine's cutting edge
that is under the right mast is above or below grade. The arrows
Right Grade show the direction that the cutting edge needs to move. Green
11
indicators grade indicators in a horizontal line indicate that the cutting edge
is on-grade under the right mast. Note: The LED grade indicators
on the display are visible when illuminated.
12
light) brightness of the LED indicators for optimal viewing.
The Rear Panel of the Display

The following items are located on the rear panel of the display. These items and the corresponding
6 pin CAN Data Link / power connector - Connects the Display to the rest of the system.
6 socket remote switch connector - Connects the Display to optional, programmable remote
switches.

ECM.
There are three Hydraulic Lockout Functions that are utilized by theAccuGrade - Laser System. The
Hydraulic Lockout Functions are listed below:
Park Brake Lockout - The "Implement/Valve Control" ECM of the machine monitors the status of
the park brake switch of the machine. When the ECM determines that the park brake switch has been
placed in the ON position, the status of the switch is broadcast to the Display. The Display will switch
the AccuGrade - Grade Control System to Manual mode if there is no operator interaction detected by
the system. The Display will not reactivate the system until the park brake switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Stationary Lockout - The "Blade Slope Control" ECM of the machine broadcasts the status of the
transmission to the Display when the machine is in NEUTRAL. If the Display has not detected
operator interaction for a period of 60 seconds, the system will be deactivated. The Display will allow
the system to reactivate when the transmission is in NEUTRAL, unless the park brake switch is in the
ON position.
Diagnostics Lockout - If the "Implement/Valve Control" ECM of the machine detects a failure in the
park brake or the gear sensing circuits, the system will be deactivated. The system will not be allowed
to reactivate until the failures have been resolved.
Illustration 4 shows the pinout information for the Display connector.
The Laser Receiver

The AccuGrade - Laser System may be configured with one or two Laser Receivers. The Laser
Receivers are 360 degree omni-directional receivers that detects the laser beam and send information
about the elevation of the laser beam to the AccuGrade - Laser System.


Table 2
Callout
Feature Function
Arrows indicate when the cutting edge of the machine is above or below
Grade grade. The arrows show the direction that the cutting edge must move in
13
LEDs order to reach the correct elevation. A green line indicates that the cutting
edge is on-grade. (The LEDs also show the distance from on-grade.)
The Display shows power status, on-grade band, mode selection, and
Grade grade information. The Display also shows when the receiver has lost the
14
Display laser beam, and the direction to move the receiver in order to find the
beam.
The LED shows whether the receiver is on or off. The LED is lit when the
Power LED
15 receiver is on and the Grade LEDs are off. The LED also flashes when the
(Amber)
voltage to the receiver is low.
Photo
detectors

Laser Receiver LR410
Table 3
Callout
Feature Function
The power LED will illuminate when power is applied to the Laser
Power and
17 receiver. The LED will flash slowly if below grade is detected and
Grade LED's
flash quickly if above grade is detected.
Photo
Detectors
The Power and Grade LED's flash in the following patterns:
• Error - 2 flashes every 1.6 seconds
• On No Beam - 1 flash every 1.6 seconds
• Above Grade - 5 flashes every second

• On Grade - Solid on
• Below Grade - 2.5 flashes every second
6-Pin Socket Receiver For the Laser Receiver
The Single Adapter

Note: This adapter is used with the LR400 only.
The Single Adapter connects the laser receiver to the AccuGrade - Laser System. The Single Adapter
provides power to the laser receiver and a CAN interface to the other components in the system.
Refer to Table 4 for the features and functions of the Single Adapter:
Table 4
Features and Functions of the Single Adapter
Callout Feature Function
19 6-pin connector Connects the Laser Receiver to the electric mast
6-Pin Socket Receiver For the Single Adapter
The Electric Mast

The AccuGrade - Laser System uses one or two Electric Masts. The Electric Mast is a telescopic
receiver mount that is driven by an electric motor. The mast vertically raises and lowers the laser
receivers in order to locate the laser beam.
Electric Mast
Refer to Table 5 shows the features and functions of the electric mast:
Table 5
Callout
Feature Function
Raises and lowers the laser receiver to locate the laser beam
20 Inner mast tube
and to change an existing elevation setting
6-socket receiver cable Connects the coiled cable from the laser receiver to the
21
connector electric mast
connector
The receiver clamp attaches to the block adapter. The block
23 Block Adapter
adapter is not required for the LR410.
Illustration 11 shows the pinout information for the 6-Pin Socket Receiver on the Electric Mast.
6-Pin Socket Receiver Cable Connector
LR400
Electric Mast with Block Adapter

(23) Block Adapter
LR410
Electric Mast with LR410 Receiver
The Joystick Control

(A) Trigger Switch
Switch (A) is a trigger switch that allows the operator to set an elevation offset. In order to increase
the offset, press and hold the trigger switch (A) and then press the right "Increment/Manual" button
(C). This action will raise the blade. In order to decrease the offset, press and hold the trigger switch
(A) and then press the "Decrement/Auto" button (B). This action will lower the blade.
Table 6
JOYSTICK SWITCH FUNCTION (1)
AUTO (B) MAN (C) TRIGGER (A) FUNCTION
X X Decrease Elevation Offset. Lower the blade
X X Increase Elevation Offset. Raise the blade.
(1)
Remote Switch Assembly (G - Series)

A set of remote switches plug into the display so that the controls for the system can be placed in a
more convenient location. The switch (D) is a push button that allows the operator to choose between
"Auto" and "Manual" control.
Switch (E) is a toggle switch that allows the operator to set an elevation offset. Pressing the switch
toward the UP arrow increases the offset. Pressing the switch toward the DOWN arrow decreases the
offset.
(D) Auto/Manual push button switch
(E) Elevation Offset toggle switch
Grade Control ECM (Grade Control)

The ECM has different names and locations depending on machine model. Refer to Table 7 for the
different names.
Note: All references to the ECM in this manual, will be refered to as the Grade Slope Control ECM.
Table 7
ECM
Machine Model ECM
G - Series Valve Module
N - Series Grade Slope Control
R - Series Grade Slope Control
R - Series III Powertrain
The Grade Slope Control ECM provides valve control for the lift/tilt control valve, the "pilot supply"
valve and the "counterbalance" valve.
The Grade Slope Control reads the switches and provides switch status information to the display.
The Grade Slope Control also provides the machine interlock status in order to ensure that the
AccuGrade - Laser System is disabled when the machine is in park or stationary without an operator.
The Grade Slope Control ECM stores the calibration values and the machine information for the
Grade Slope Control ECM
Refer to Table 8 and Table 9 for additional information on each of the connection points for the
connectors.
Table 8
Contact Description Of Grade Slope Control ECM
J1 Connector (32)
J1 - 1 Keyswitch On
J1 - 10 Cat Data Link +
J1 - 13 -Batt
J1 - 20 Cat Data Link -
J1 - 23 -Batt
J1 - 26 Right Auto/Manual Switch (N.C.)
J1 - 27 Left Auto/Manual Switch (N.C.)
J1 - 31 + Batt
J1 - 32 Right Inc/Dec Switch (Dec)
J1 - 33 Right Inc/Dec Switch (Inc)
J1 - 34 Left Inc/Dec Switch (Dec)
J1 - 35 Left Inc/Dec Switch (Inc)
J1 - 38 + Batt
J1 - 39 + Batt
J1 - 40 Right Auto/Manual Switch (N.O.)
J1 - 41 Left Auto/Manual Switch (N.O.)
J1 - 42 Right Inc/Dec Switch (Neutral)
J1 - 43 Left Inc/Dec Switch (Neutral)
J1 - 46 + Batt
J1 - 47 + Batt
J1 - 55 Blade Solenoid Return
J1 - 56 Switch to Ground Return
J1 - 57 -Batt
J1 - 65 Blade Left Raise Solenoid
J1 - 66 Blade RightRaise Solenoid
J1 - 67 Blade Left Lower Solenoid
J1 - 68 Blade Left Lower Solenoid
J1 - 70 -Batt
Table 9
Contact Description Of Grade Slope Control ECM
J2 Connector (33)
J2 - 2 CTCT Status Indicator
J2 - 4 Indicator Return
J2 - 6 Implement Enable Relay
J2 - 8 Implement Enable Relay Return
J2 - 67 CAN 0 High
J2 - 68 CAN 0 Low
Power Supply Module
The Power Supply Module supplies power to the Display, the electric masts, the laser receivers and
the interface module (valve). The Power Supply Module includes power conditioning and control
circuits, as well as overcurrent and load dump protection.
Table 10
Callout
Feature Function
8-socket power input Connects the Power Supply Module to the machine
29
connector power
30
harness
Illustration 19 shows the pinout information for the 8-Pin Socket Connector on the Power Module.
Illustration 20 shows the pinout information for the 8-Pin Connector on the Power Module.
Interface Module (Valve)

Note: The Interface Module is only used on G-Series Track-Type-Tractors.
The Interface Module (Valve) electrically controls the valves that positions the cutting edge of the
machine. Control signals are provided to proportional valves. If necessary, control signals are also
provided to the load sensing valve.
Interface Module (Valve)
Refer to Table 11 shows the features and functions of the Interface Module (Valve):
Table 11
Features and Functions of the Interface Module (Valve)
Callout
Feature Function
Connects the Interface Module (Valve) to the main

24 10-pin valve connector
harness.
Slow blinking LED indicates NO Signal Applied to the
lift valve.
Rapid blinking LED indicates Signal Applied to the lift
valve.
Slow blinking LED indicates NO Signal Applied to the
tilt valve.
Rapid blinking LED indicates Signal Applied to the tilt
valve.
Indicates power is available to the Interface Module
27 Power Indicator
(Valve).
10-socket network
connector
Data Link
• The Display
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768424
Modes of Operation
SMCS - 7220
• Dual Cut/Fill
• Cut/Fill
affects the operation of the buttons and switches on the display.
Table 1
Callout
Feature Function
This indicates the guidance sensor that is used by the AccuGrade -
Guidance Sensor Laser System. For the AccuGrade - Laser System, the guidance
2
Icon sensor is always the laser receiver. This icon disappears if the laser
receiver is not detected on powerup.
4
Elevation
Display Icon
6

• Toggle the mast elevation switches in order to move both of the masts up or down by equal
amounts. This means that the same elevation offset is applied to both sides of the blade.
• Press either the "ESC/left reset" button or the "OK/right reset" button in order to start a search
for the laser beam. If the left mast is over the benchmark, press the "ESC/left reset" button. The
search for the laser beam stops when the left laser receiver is on-grade. If the right mast is over
the benchmark, press the "OK/right reset" button. The search for the laser beam stops when the
right laser receiver is on-grade.
• The elevation select switch is inactive in linked elevation mode. This means that both sides of
the machine must use automatic mode or manual mode together.
• The "linked elevation adjustment" option is available in the "Configuration" menu. Refer to
Guidance screen (Linked Elevation mode)

Maintenance Manual, "Setting the Reference Elevation (Dual Mast System)" for more
information on the process that is used to benchmark the blade using Independent Elevation
Mode.
• Toggle the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch in order to move the left mast up or down.
The elevation offset is applied only to the left side of the blade.
• Toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch in order to move the right mast upward or
downward. The elevation offset is applied only to the right side of the blade.
Note: Toggling the remote increment/decrement switch rocker switch that controls the
Elevation Offset, applies the same elevation offset to both masts.
• Pressing the "ESC/left reset" button searches for the laser beam and locks on to the laser beam
on the left receiver.
• Pressing the "OK/right reset" button searches for and locks on to the laser beam on the right
receiver.
• The elevation select switch is active in Independent Elevation Mode.
Toggling the elevation select switch to the center position ensures both sides of the machine use
automatic or manual mode together.
affected when the other side is blocked.

Dual Cut/Fill Mode
• Both mast "elevation/menu scroll" switches are disabled.
• Both the "OK/right reset" buttons and the "ESC/left reset" buttons are disabled.
• The elevation select switch is active in dual cut/fill mode.
Toggling the elevation select switch to the center position allows both sides of the machine to use
automatic mode or manual mode.
Toggling the elevation select switch to the left position permits the left side of the machine to use
The Linked Elevation Adjustment option and the Reference Elevation option in the "Configuration"
menu are not available.
Guidance screen (dual Cut/Fill ) mode
(9) Left Cut/Fill
(10) Right Cut/Fill

Reference Elevation Mode only operates with a single mast system.
mode:
• Toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu
scroll" switch in order to apply an offset to the reference elevation.
• Press the "ESC/left reset" button in order to start a search for the laser beam. The search for the
laser beam stops when the laser receiver is on-grade. This fine tunes the on-grade position in
the laser receiver.
Note: The "OK/right reset" button does not work in the single receiver system.
• The Elevation Select switch does not work in the single mast system.
Cut/Fill Mode
positive value is a cut and a negative value is a fill.
• Both the "elevation/menu scroll" switches for the mast are disabled.
• The "ESC/left reset" button is disabled.
• The elevation select switch does not work in the single mast system.
Most of the information that is shown on the display is represented with icons. The following sections
discuss the icons that are used on the display.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768426
Display Icons
SMCS - 7220

information.
(1) Dual Mast system display screenElevation Display Icon for Reference Mode
Device Status Icons

Simulated Gray Icons - Indicate devices that were previously detected, but have stopped
communication while the display was powered ON.
not detected.
(7) The laser receiver is connected. The electric mast is not connected. The connection was lost since power-up.
(9) The laser receiver is not connected. The connection was lost since power-up. The electric mast is connected.
(10) The laser receiver is not connected. The electric mast is not connected. The connections were lost since power-up.
(12) The auto/manual remote switch is not connected. The connection was lost since power-up.
Hydraulics Available Icon

The "Hydraulics Available" icon indicates the status of the "Hydraulic Control System" for automatic
ECM.
implement control "ECM" is able to receive commands from the AccuGrade control.
also indicates a fault condition that has disabled the automatic implement control.
"Disconnected" Icon is Grayed Out - The icon indicates that the implement control "ECM" is no
longer communicating with the display.
"No Operator Detected" - The automatic implement control was deactivated because the machine
was in NEUTRAL gear for more than 60 seconds without operator input.

icon is shown in Illustration 9.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768428
Menus
SMCS - 7220
access "Setup", toggle the power/setup switch to the "i" position. This causes the "Configuration"
menu to be shown on the display. From the "Configuration" menu, the "Installation" menu may be
accessed in order to customize the AccuGrade Laser system.
When a menu is accessed use the left mast elevation/menu scroll switch or the right mast
elevation/menu scroll switch in order to scroll through the menu items and to increase or decrease
values when you are in a menu that requires data to be entered.
Use the OK/right reset button in order to select a specific menu, step forward one level in the menus,
or save changes that you have made.
Use the ESC/left reset button in order to step back one level in the menus or to cancel changes that
you have made.
Use the cursor scroll button in order to move the cursor horizontally and position the cursor on the
digit that requires the value to be changed.

Typical example of the features of the Configuration menu
Table 1
Menu Features
Callout
Feature Function
Menu
heading
2
Sub-menu
icon
Arrow -
4 Indicates that there is additional information on the page.
up/down
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768436
Configuration Menu
SMCS - 7220
Items of the "Configuration" Menu

The items that are available in the "Configuration" menu are listed in Table 1.
Table 1
Items of the "Configuration" Menu
Menu Item Function
This item sets the "reference elevations" for the cutting edge of the
Reference Elevation
blade.
Set the "valve speed". The available options are listed here:
1. Elevation valve speed
Valve Speed
2. Lift valve speed
3. Slope valve speed
Adjust the following settings:
1. Operating mode
2. Offset
3. On grade deadband
The Customize Menu
4. Units of measure
5. Audio volume
6. Brightness
7. Contrast
ST300 Configuration Not supported for Track-Type Tractor application
Linked Elevation Allows the user to adjust the blade tilt. This is required for the
Adjustment Linked Elevation mode only.
Sensor Calibration Not supported for Track-Type Tractor application
Diagnostics Access the following diagnostic menu items:

1. Test valves
2. Hour meter
3. Software versions
4. Sensor Data
5. Fault history
6. Machine voltage
7. Test control box
Access the following menu items:
Advanced Option 1. Serial Number
2. Option Password
Reference Elevation
The "Reference Elevation" menu allows you to set the reference elevation for the cutting edge of the
blade.
The dual mast system has the following options available within the "Reference Elevation" menu.
• Left and right reference elevation for Linked Elevation mode and Independent Elevation mode
only
• Left reference elevation Independent Elevation mode only
• Right reference elevation Independent Elevation mode only
Note: The "Reference Elevation" menu item is not available in Dual Cut/Fill mode.
To open the "Reference Elevation" menu item, perform the procedure that is listed here:
1. Turn the "power/setup" switch to the "i (information)" position.
2. Toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu
scroll" switch until "Reference Elevation" is highlighted on the display.
3. Press the "OK/right reset" button.
"Reference Elevation" Menu for the Dual Mast System
Left and Right Reference Elevation

The "<-Reference Elevation->" menu allows you to set the reference elevation for the cutting edge, in
the selected units.
1. Inside the "<-Reference Elevation->" menu, toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll"
switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "<- Reference Elevation ->" is
highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 2 appears.
Note: The current value for the reference elevation and the unit appear on the display.
3. Edit the "<-Reference Elevation->", as required. Do one of the following:
a. Press the "ESC/left reset" button and the "OK/right reset" button simultaneously in order
to reset the "<-Reference Elevation->" to 0.000.
b. Press the "cursor scroll" button in order to move the cursor to the right. Highlight the
Toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the UP in order to increase the value.
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the DOWN in order to decrease the value.
Toggle either of the "mast elevation/menu scroll" switches to the UP or to the DOWN in
order to change the sign from positive to negative. The cursor must be on the left side of
the number that is entered.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to save the setting and return to the "Configuration"
menu.
5. Move the "power/setup" switch to the "ON" position in order to return the system to the
"Guidance" mode.
Left Reference Elevation

The "<- Reference Elevation" menu allows you to set the reference elevation for the cutting edge that
is located under the left mast. You can set the elevation in the selected units.
1. Inside the "<- Reference Elevation" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll"
switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "<- Reference Elevation" is
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 3 is shown on the LCD.
Note: The current value and the unit of the Reference Elevation are shown on the display.
3. Edit the "<- Reference Elevation" as required. Do one of the following:
to reset the reference elevation to 0.000.
b. Press the "ESC/left reset" button and the "OK/right reset" button simultaneously in order
to reset the "<- Reference Elevation" to 0.000.
c. Press the "cursor scroll" button in order to move the cursor to the right. Highlight the
order to change the sign from positive to negative. The cursor must be to the left of the
number.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to save the setting and return to the "Configuration"
menu.
"Guidance" mode.
Right Reference Elevation

The "Reference Elevation -> " menu allows you to set the reference elevation for the cutting edge that
is located under the right mast. You can set the elevation in the selected units.
1. Inside the "Reference Elevation -> " menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll"
switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Reference Elevation -> " is
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. The following screen appears on the display:
Note: The current value and the unit of the reference elevation are shown on the display.
3. Edit the "Reference Elevation -> " as required. Use the steps that are listed below:
to reset the "Reference Elevation -> " to 0.000.
b. Press the "cursor scroll" button in order to move the cursor to the right. Highlight the
order to change the sign from positive to negative. The cursor must be to the left of the
number that is entered.
4. Press the "OK" button in order to save the setting and return to the "Configuration" menu.
"Guidance" mode.
Valve Speed
The "valve speed" menu for the dual mast system has three options that are available in order to allow
automatic blade movement. The menu options are listed below:
valve.
"<- Valve Speed" - This option allows you to set the speed for the Lift valve only. Single Mast
System and Dual Mast System
"Valve Speed ->" - This option allows you to set the speed for the Tilt valve only.
NOTICE

Increase the "<- Valve Speed ->" if both the lift valve LED's and the tilt valve LED's remain in the
Decrease the "<- Valve Speed ->" if both the lift valve LED's and the tilt valve LED's pass through
the green on grade and go into the amber color and both the lift and tilt functions are erratic.
fast.
Increase the "<- Valve Speed" if the lift LED's remain in the raise or lower amber color for a long
Decrease the "<- Valve Speed" if the lift LED's pass through the green on grade and go into the amber
fast.
Increase the "Valve Speed ->" if the tilt LED's remain in the raise or lower amber color for a long
Decrease the "Valve Speed ->" if the tilt LED's pass through the green on grade and go into the amber
In order to customize the valve speed, perform the following procedure:
Note: This procedure will be used for any of the options that are selected from the "valve speed"
menu.
Elevation Valve Speed

1. Place the "power/setup" switch in the "i (Information)" position.
scroll" switch until "Valve Speed" is highlighted on the display.
A menu that is similar to Illustration 6 appears for a dual mast system.

4. Use the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll"
switch in order to select "Elevation" on the display.
5. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to confirm your selection. A screen that is similar to
Illustration 7 appears on the display.
6. Select the valve speed options with either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the
"left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch.
7. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to confirm your selection. A screen that is similar to
Illustration 8 appears on the display.
Note: The valve speed range is 1 percent to 200 percent. 1 percent is the slowest valve speed
and 200 percent is the highest valve speed. The number that is shown in the middle of the
screen is the current valve speed setting.
8. In order to set the valve speed, do one of the following:
◦ Toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu
scroll" switch to the UP in order to increase the speed.
◦ Toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu
scroll" switch to the DOWN in order to decrease the speed.
◦ The default setting for the valve speed is "100". In order to reset the valve speed to this
default setting, press the "ESC/left reset" button and the "OK/right reset" button
simultaneously.
9. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to accept the value and exit to the "Valve Speed"
menu.
Slope Valve Speed

"Slope Valve" Speed is not supported by the Track-Type Tractor.
Customize Menu
The "Customize" menu allows you to customize the following settings:
• Operating mode
• Offset
• Audio volume
• Brightness
• Contrast
In order to change the settings under "Customize", complete the following steps:
1. Turn the "power/setup" switch to the "i" position.
scroll" switch until "Customize" is highlighted on the display.
3. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to enter the "Customize" menu.
Operating Mode
The "Operating Mode" menu allows you to select one of the operator modes.
The following operator modes are available on machines that are equipped with a dual mast system.
• Linked elevation mode
• Dual Cut/Fill
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left
mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Operating Mode" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to select "Operating Mode".

scroll" switch until the proper operating mode is highlighted on the display.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to select the required operating mode. Press the
"OK/right reset" button in order to store the required operating mode.
5. Turn the "power/setup"switch to the "ON" position in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Offset
The "Offset" menu allows the user to set the amount that each toggle of the remote offset switch
increases or decreases the reference elevation.
Note: Pressing the "Arrow" Keys (1) when in Guidance Mode always changes the elevation offset by
1.00 mm (0.04 inch).
In order to customize the "elevation offset increment", perform the following procedure.
Elevation Offset
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the
"left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Offset" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 11 will appear.
3. Inside the "Offset" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left
mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Elevation" is highlighted on the display.
5. In order to edit the "elevation offset increment", perform the following procedure.
to reset the elevation offset to 0.030 m (0.1 ft), (1.18in).
b. Press the "cursor scroll" button in order to move the cursor to the right and highlight the
Toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu
scroll" switch to the UP in order to increase the highlighted value.
Toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu
scroll" switch to the DOWN in order to decrease the highlighted value.
6. When the required elevation offset is entered, press the "OK/right reset" button in order to
return to the "Offset" menu.
7. Turn the "power/setup" switch to the "ON" position in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Slope Offset
Slope offset is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
On Grade Deadband
The "On Grade Deadband" menu allows you to change the "display deadband" settings and the
"control valve deadband" settings on the display.
In order to customize the "On Grade Deadband" settings, perform the procedure that is listed here:
Elevation On Grade Deadband
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the
"left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "On Grade Deadband" is highlighted on the
display.
3. Inside the "On Grade Deadband" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll"
switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Elevation" is highlighted on the
display.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 14 will appear on the
display.
Note: The default setting is 5/3 mm. This provides a 5 mm display deadband for the on-grade
LED indicators and a 3 mm control deadband for the automatic hydraulic valve control. This
setting suits most applications.
scroll" switch until the required display and control deadband is highlighted.
Note: Smaller valve deadband values increase the sensitivity of the valve movement. This can
cause unstable system performance.
6. Press the "OK" button in order to save the setting and return to the "On Grade Deadband"
menu.
7. When the required elevation offset is entered, press the "OK/right reset" button in order to
return to the "Offset" menu.
Slope On Grade Deadband
Slope On Grade Deadband is not supported for the TracK-Type Tractor
Units of Measure
The "Units of Measure" allows you to select one of the units that are listed here:
The following units are available in "Elevation".
• Feet
• Meters
• Inches
In order to select the "Units of Measure", perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the "Customize" menu, toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left
mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Units of Measure" is highlighted on the display.
scroll" switch until "Elevation" is highlighted on the display.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to select the required mode. A screen that is similar to
Illustration 16 for "Elevation" appears.
5. Press the "OK" button in order to save the setting and return to the "Units of Measure" menu.
6. Turn the "power/setup"switch to the "ON" position in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Audio
The "Audio Volume" menu allows you to change the volume level of the audio alert. The audio alert
sounds when a button is pressed or a system warning is given.
Audio Volume
1. Inside the "Audio" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left
mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Audio Volume" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 17 appears on the
display:
current setting for the audio volume.
scroll" switch to the UP in order to increase the volume. The percentage and the length of the
bar graph increase and a pulsed audible tone sounds. Toggle either the "right mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch to the DOWN in
order to decrease the volume. The percentage and the length of the bar graph decrease and a
pulsed audible tone sounds.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to store the audio volume level and return to the
"Audio" menu.
5. Toggle the "power/setup" switch to the ON position in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Elevation Alert
The "Elevation Alert" provides an audible alert when the system is off grade.
In order to customize the "elevation alert", perform the following procedure:
1. Inside the "Audio" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left
mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Elevation Alert" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 18 appears on the
display:
3. Use the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll"
switch in order to turn the "Elevation Alert" on and off.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to store the setting and return to the "Audio" menu.
5. Turn the"power/setup" switch to the ON position in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Slope Alert
Slope Alert is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
ST300 Configuration
ST300 Configuration is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
Linked Elevation Adjustment for the Dual Mast System Only

The "Linked Elevation Adjustment" menu allows the user to adjust the blade tilt. This adjustment
error is entered into the "Linked Elevation Adjustment" menu in order to solve the problem. A blade
tilt error can be caused by uneven wear on the blade.
Note: Ensure that the laser transmitter is set up for a flat level plane before the following procedure is
performed.
Perform the following steps in order to complete the Linked Elevation Adjustment.
1. Raise the blade so that there is enough room in order to use a level under the edge of the blade.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button or the "ESC/left reset" button in order to perform a search for
the laser beam so that the laser receivers locate the plane of the laser beam.
3. Once the search has been completed, switch the system into automatic mode.
The system will now attempt to level the blade.

occur.
4. When the blade movement stops, switch the system back into manual mode.
Note: Do not move the blade.
5. Place blocks under the blade before checking the blade level.
6. Use a level in order to check that the cutting edge of the blade is level.
7. If the blade is not level, determine if the left side of the blade is high or low.
8. Enter the "Configuration" menu.
scroll" switch until "Linked Elevation Adjustment" is highlighted on the display.
10. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to enter the "Linked Elevation Adjustment" menu. A
screen that is similar to Illustration 20 appears.
Note: The number is always zero when you enter this screen. The maximum value that may be
added to the screen is plus 0.1 or minus 0.1.
11. Enter a positive value in order to lift the left side of the blade. Enter a negative value in order to
lower the left side of the blade.
Use the steps that are outlined below:
a. Press the "cursor scroll" switch in order to move the cursor to the right. Move the cursor
until the digit is highlighted.
b. After the digit in Step 11.a is highlighted, do one of the following:
■ Toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the UP in order to increase the "elevation offset"
adjustment to the required value.
■ Toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the DOWN in order to decrease the "elevation
offset" adjustment to the required value.
12. After the required value in Step 11.b has been entered, do one of the following:
◦ Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to save the changes and exit to the
◦ Press the "ESC/left reset" button in order to cancel the changes and exit to the
Sensor Calibration
Sensor Calibration is not supported for the Track-Type Tractor.
Diagnostics
The "diagnostics menu" allows you to choose from the diagnostic items that are listed below.
• "Test valves"
• "Hour Meter"
• "Sensor Data"
• "Fault History"
In order to enter the "Diagnostics" menu, complete the procedure that is listed here:
1. Turn the "power/setup" switch to the "i" position.

scroll" switch until "Diagnostics" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 21 appears.
scroll" switch in order to select a "Diagnostics" menu item to access.
Test Valves
The "Test Valves" menu allows the hydraulic control valves to be driven manually in order to verify
correct operation of the display, and the hydraulic control valve. In order to access the "Test Valves"
menu, perform the procedure that is listed here:
1. Inside the "Diagnostics" menu, toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left
mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Test Valves" is highlighted.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to select this item. A screen that is similar to
Illustration 22 appears:
3. Press the "cursor scroll" button in order to change the percentage of power that will drive the
valves.

occur.
4. Toggle the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch to the UP in order to move the Lift valve
UP. Similarly, toggle the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch to the DOWN in order to
move the Lift valve DOWN.
5. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to return to the "Diagnostics" menu.
6. Turn the "power/setup" switch to the "ON" position in order to return to the Guidance mode.
Hour Meter
The "Hour Meter" menu shows the length of time that the Display has been operating. The "Hour
Meter" menu also shows the length of time that the automatic controls have been used with the
display.
In order to access the "Hour Meter" menu, perform the procedure that is listed here:
1. Inside the "Diagnostics" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or
the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Hour Meter" is highlighted.
3. Observe the "Operating Hours" and the "Control Hours" times.
5. Turn the "power/setup" switch to the ON position in order to return to the "Guidance" mode.
Software Versions
The "Software Versions" menu identifies which AccuGrade - Laser System system components are
currently connected. The "Software Versions" menu also shows the versions of software that are
loaded into the AccuGrade - Laser System components.
In order to access the "Software Versions" menu, perform the procedure that is listed here:
the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Software Versions" is highlighted on the
display.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 24 appears for a single mast system.
The devices that are connected
The arrow shows whether the device is the left device or the right device. A "0" means that the
device is neither left nor right.
The version of application software for each device
The version of loader software for each device

"Software Versions" menu
Sensor Data
Use the "Sensor Data" menu in order to view the current sensor data that is generated by the system.
the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Sensor Data" is highlighted.
The "Sensor Data" Screen shows each device that is detected. The "Sensor Data" Screen also
shows the measurement for each device and the update rate for each measurement. If and
EM400 is connected, position data is shown.
3. Observe the measurements for each sensor.

4. Press the "ESC/left reset" button in order to return to the "Diagnostics" menu.
Fault History
The "Fault History" menu shows the AccuGrade - Laser System faults.
In order to observe the "Fault History", perform the following procedure:
the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Fault History" is highlighted on the Display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. A screen that is similar to Illustration 26 appears:
scroll" switch in order to scroll through the list of recorded system faults.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to access additional information about the highlighted
fault. A screen that is similar to Illustration 27 appears:
"Fault History" screen
(1) The device that caused the fault
(2) The fault code
(3) The fault count
The fault count is the number of occurrences that a fault has been received from a device.
(4) The time that the last fault condition occurred.
(5) A description of the problem
5. Press the "ESC/left reset" button in order to return to the previous menu.
6. Press the "ESC/left reset" button in order to return to the Diagnostics menu.
Machine Voltage
The "Machine Voltage" menu shows the voltage for the system. In order to access the "Machine
Voltage" menu, complete the following steps.
the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Machine Voltage" is highlighted.
3. Observe the measured machine voltage. The machine voltage is shown in volts.
Test Box Control
The "Test Control Box" menu allows you to test the switches configured in the display for proper
operation. The "Test Control Box" menu also allows you to test the display for proper operation. The
switches that are available for testing include the switches on the display and the remote switches. All
switches are available for testing except for the "Power/Setup" switch, the "ESC/Left Reset" button,
and the "OK/right reset" button.
the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Test Control Box" is highlighted on the
display.
Note: When you enter the "Test Control Box" menu, all LED indicators on the Display are
checked in order to ensure that the LED indicators are functioning properly.
3. Test each switch that is configured in the display. Remote switches are identified as "A", "B",
"C", "D", and "E". Panel switches are identified as "P1", "P2", "P3", "P4", "P5", "P6", and "P7".
The arrow shown next to a "Remote" switch identifier determines which switch is pressed and
whether the switch is up or down.
A Remote switch that has a short to power is represented by a flashing identifier and the "+"
symbol.
A Remote switch that has a short to ground is represented by a flashing identifier and the "-"
symbol.
A Remote switch that is not detected by the system is represented by a flashing identifier and
the "?" symbol.
4. Test that the complete display is working by performing the following steps:
a. Simultaneously toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch and the "left mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the UP in order to turn on all the pixels on the LCD. The
display should turn black.
b. Simultaneously toggle the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch and the "left mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the DOWN in order to turn off all the pixels on the
LCD. The display should turn green.
Advanced Option Menu

Use the "Advanced Option" Menu in order to view the serial number on the Display, to enter a
password to upgrade to a higher level of functionality, or to enter a password to extend software
support.
The following options are available from the "Advanced Option" menu:
• Serial Number
• Option Password
• Service Agreement Password
In order to access the "Advanced Option" menu, complete the following steps.
the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Advanced Option" is highlighted on the
display.
scroll" switch until the required option is highlighted on the display.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to enter the menu.

Serial Number
The "Serial Number" option allows the user to vies the serial number of the display, the software
level, and the expiration date of the Service Agreement.
In order to access the "Serial Number" menu, complete the following procedure.
1. Inside the "Advanced Option" menu, toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch
or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Serial Number" is highlighted on the
display.
3. Press the "ESC/left reset" button in order to return to the "Advanced Option" menu.
Option Password
The "Option Password" option allows the user to enter a password to upgrade to a higher level of
system functionality.
In order to access the "Option Password" menu, complete the following steps.
or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Option Password" is highlighted on the
display.

scroll" switch in order to enter the first character of the password. When the correct character is
displayed press the "Cursor Scroll" button.
4. Once you have entered the 24 character password, press the "OK/right reset" button. If the
password is accepted, the software will return to the "Advanced Option" menu.
Service Agreement Password
The "Service Agreement Password" menu allows the user to enter a password in order to extend your
Service Agreement for this product. A Service Agreement lets you upgrade to newer versions of
CB420 software or device firmware. If you try to upgrade a device that has a newer date than your
service agreement expiration date, then that device will not be recognized.
or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch until "Service Agreement Password" is
scroll" switch in order to enter the first character of the password. When the correct character is
displayed press the "Cursor Scroll" button.
4. Once you have entered the 24 character password, press the "OK/right reset" button. If the
password is accepted, the software will return to the "Advanced Option" menu.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768442
Installation Menu
SMCS - 7220
Menu Selections
Language
The "Language" menu allows you to choose a language from the languages that are supported by the
software.
• "English"
• "Spanish"
• "German"
• "French"
• "Italian"
• "Dutch"
• "Portuguese"
• "Finnish"
• "Swedish"
• "Norwegian"
Valve Calibration
The "Valve Calibration" menu allows you to set the following by manually adjusting the blade.
• lower limits of the lift valve
• upper limits of the lift valve
• lower limits of the tilt valve
• upper limits of the tilt valve
This calibration wizard will guide the user through the required actions for performing an automatic
valve calibration. The following menus are used.
• "Set Lower Limit"
• "Set Upper Limit"
• "Confirm Start"
• "Calibration Status"
• "Exit-Success"
• "Exit-Error"
The "Exit-Success" screen will be displayed after a successful automatic calibration of the valve has
been completed. The "Exit-Error" screen will show a description of the error that occurred during the
automatic calibration of the valve.
Format of the Screen

(5) "Laser Strike Indicator"
(6) "Laser Strike Window"
(7) "Laser Strike Limit Range"
(9) "Success Indicator"
(10) "Number of screens"
The screen will show the text that is listed below.
"<- Auto Valve Cal" - This message is displayed when the lift valve is calibrated. (dual mast system
and single mast system)
"Auto Valve Cal ->" - This message is displayed when the tilt valve is calibrated. (dual mast system
only)
The information that is displayed is for the sensor that is used during calibration. After selection, both
the upper calibration and the lower calibration limits are displayed.
The "OK / right reset" button is used to continue the process of calibration.
The "ESC / left reset" button is used in order to abort the calibration process.
The activity indicator is activated in order to convey to the user that a sensor signal is available, and
that the calibration is in progress even if you do not observe any blade motion.
Press the "ESC / left reset" button from any screen of the Automatic Valve Calibration Wizard in
order to terminate the calibration in progress. If the user is in the "Calibration Status" screen, this
action shows the "Exit-Error" Screen, with the text Abort. In all other screens, the user is returned to
the "Auto Valve Cal" screen.
Linked Elevation Calibration (Dual Mast System Only)

The "Linked Elevation Calibration" menu allows for the height difference (offset) between the mounts
for the electric masts .
Linked Elevation Calibration is necessary in order to measure the difference between the right mast
mount and the left mast mount. Linked elevation calibration is also necessary in order to record the
difference of the elevation between the right mast mount and the left mast mount. The AccuGrade
Laser System uses this measurement in order to compensate for the height difference between the
mast mounts.
The Linked Elevation Calibration menu is available only when the Linked Elevation operating mode
is active.
Note: A laser transmitter and a carpenter's level are required in order to complete the Linked
Elevation Calibration.
Remote Switches
The "Remote Switches" menu is not operational. This menu is reserved for future use.
Reset to Defaults
The "Reset to Defaults" menu allows the user to reset all of the factory settings to the default value
except for valve calibration, manual tune, and linked elevation calibration.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768453
System Setup
SMCS - 7220
Language Selection
• "English"
• "Spanish"
• "German"
• "French"
• "Italian"
• "Dutch"
• "Portuguese"
• "Finnish"
• "Swedish"
• "Norwegian"

1. Place the "power/setup" switch in the ON position.
A self test will be initiated, When the system is powered on. During the self test, the CAT
trademark and information for the software version will be shown on the display. Refer to
Illustration 1.
2. While the self test is running, simultaneously press and then release both the "ESC/left reset"
button and the "OK/right reset" button .
The "language" menu will be shown on the display. Refer to Illustration 2.
Note: The "language selection" menu is found in the "Installation" menu. The language
selections are shown in the untranslated form.
scroll" switch until the preferred language is highlighted.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to select the highlighted language.

NOTICE
If different icons are observed on the Display, the system may be using
an older version of software. Contact your dealership's Technical
Communicator for a possible consultation with Caterpillar.
NOTICE
single mast system.
1. In order to access the "Setup" mode, move the "power/setup" switch to the "i" position.
Valve Calibration
calibrated.
If the valve calibration has been previously completed, toggle the "right mast elevation/menu
scroll"switch or the "left mast elevation/menu scroll" switch in order to scroll to the next menu.

The "Customize" menu is contained within the "Configuration" menu. The "Customize" menu allows
the user to customize the AccuGrade Laser System with the following items.
scroll" switch until "Customize" is highlighted on the Display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to access the "Customize" menu. The "Operating
Mode" is highlighted as the default setting. A screen that is similar to Illustration 4 appears.

3. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to access the "Operating Mode" menu.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 5 appears for the Dual Mast System.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 6 appears for the Single Mast System.
scroll" switch until the mode that is required is highlighted on the "Display".
5. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to save the changes and exit back to the "Customize"
menu.
reset" button.
The "Elevation Offset" menu allows the user to set the amount that each toggle of the "Elevation
Offset" switch increases or decreases the elevation offset.
scroll" switch until "Elevation Offset" is highlighted on the display.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to access the "Elevation Offset" menu. A screen that
is similar to Illustration 7 appears.
3. Press the "cursor scroll" button in order to move the cursor to the right and highlight the digit.
◦ Toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the UP in order to increase the highlighted value.
◦ Toggle either the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch or the "left mast
elevation/menu scroll" switch to the DOWN in order to decrease the highlighted value.
◦ Press the "OK/right reset" button and the "ESC/left reset" button simultaneously in order
to set the elevation offset to the default value of "0.030m".
Repeat step 3 and step 4 until the elevation offset is set to the desired value.
5. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to save the changes and exit to the "Customize"
menu.
reset" button.

6. Move the "power/setup" switch to ON position. This causes the guidance screen to be shown on
the Display.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 8 will be shown for the Dual Mast system.
A screen that is similar to Illustration 9 will be shown for the Single Mast system.
Configure the Display for Single Mast Operation
1. Use the "right mast elevation/menu" scroll switch in order to toggle through the "Installation"
menu until "Control Mode" is selected.
2. Press the "OK/right reset" button. This will bring up the "Control Mode" menu.
3. Use the "right mast elevation/menu scroll" switch in order to select "Single" from the "Control
Mode" menu.
4. Press the "OK/right reset" button in order to save the changes and exit back to the "Installation"
menu.
procedure.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768489
Display
SMCS - 7220
Display
Display
(2) "Left Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll" switch
(3) "Right Mast Elevation/ Menu Scroll" switch
(4) "Auto/Manual" Light Emitting Diodes (LED)
(5) "Elevation Select" switch
(6) "Cursor Scroll" button
(7) "Power/Setup" switch
(8) "ESC/Left Reset/Left Bench" button
(9) "OK/Right Reset/Right Bench" button

cab of the machine.

grade indicators, toggle switches, and buttons. Refer to Illustration 1 for the layout of the display.
Table 1
Callout
Feature Description

1
"Left Mast
2 Elevation/ Menu
Scroll" switch
"Right Mast
3 Elevation/ Menu
Scroll" switch
"Auto/Manual" These indicators show the operator which control mode the
4 Light Emitting system is in.
Diodes (LED) Automatic (green) or Manual (amber).
"Elevation Select" and Tilt", or "Tilt" only. The Elevation Select switch is functional
5
switch only on a dual mast system with the Operation Mode set to
"Cursor scroll" This button advances the cursor horizontally through numeric
6
button values.
"Power/Setup" Switches the Display on or off.
7
switch Accesses the setup menu when the switch is in the "i" position.
"ESC/Left receiver.
8 Reset/Left Bench" Allows changes made in the setup menu to be rejected.
button When the ESC key and the OK key are pressed simultaneously,
Allows you step back one level in the setup menu.
"OK/Right Permits the right laser receiver, when connected to an electric

9 Reset/Right Bench" mast, to search for and lock onto the center of the laser beam.
button With the electric mast, the on-grade location is always at the
center of the receiver.
Allows changes made in the setup menu to be accepted.
When the ESC key and the OK key are pressed simultaneously,
Allows you step forward one level in the setup menu.
under the left mast is above or below grade. The arrows show the
Left Grade direction the cutting edge needs to move. A green line indicates
10
indicators that the cutting edge under the left mast is on-grade. Note: The
LED grade indicators on the Display are easily visible when
illuminated.
under the right mast is above or below grade. The arrows show
Right Grade the direction the cutting edge needs to move. A green line
11
indicators indicates that the cutting edge is on-grade under the right mast.
Note: The LED grade indicators on the Display are easily visible
when illuminated.
12
light) brightness of the LEDs for optimal viewing.

6 socket remote switch connector - Connects the display to optional, programmable remote
switches.

operation. The display receives the hydraulic control status from the transmission ECM.
There are three hydraulic lockout functions that are utilized by the AccuGrade Laser system. The
hydraulic lockout functions are listed below:
Auto Not Allowed (Icon Flashing) - The machine's Hydrostatic Transmission ECM monitors the
status of the machine's park brake switch. When the ECM determines that the park brake switch has
been placed in the ON position, the status of the switch is broadcast to the Display. The icon indicates
the parking brake is ON. The flashing icon also indicates a possible fault condition that has disabled
the hydraulics.
No Operator Detected - The machine's Hydrostatic Transmission ECM broadcasts the status of the
transmission to the display when the machine is in neutral. If the Display has not detected operator
interaction for a period of 60 seconds the system will be deactivated. The display will allow the
system to reactivate when the transmission is in neutral, unless the park brake switch is in the ON
position.
Service Mode - If the machine's Hydrostatic Transmission ECM detects a failure in the park brake or
the gear sensing circuits, the system will be deactivated. The system will not be allowed to reactivate
until the failures have been resolved.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02768495
Data Link
SMCS - 7220
Data Link
• The Display
• The Lift/Tilt Control Valve
All of the components send information through the CAN data link. All of the components receive
information through the CAN data link.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02771129
Related Components
SMCS - 7220
Hydrostatic Transmission ECM

The hydrostatic transmission electronic control module is used to send the status of the parking brake
switch to the display. The ECM receives a signal from the switch. The ECM uses this signal in order
to determine neutral status. The ECM then broadcasts the status of the switch to the display. The
display then uses this signal in order to control the lockout functions and the icon for the parking
brake.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
Air Conditioning and Heating R134a for All Caterpillar Machines

i02978729
Pressure Switch (Refrigerant)

SMCS - 1435-PX; 7320-QW
Air Conditioning High Low Pressure Switch
Schematic symbol and drawing for the high low pressure switch
The High Low pressure switch is used in order to monitor the refrigerant pressure that is coming out
of the discharge side of the refrigerant compressor. The pressure switch prevents the compressor from
operating when the pressure in the discharge line exceeds a specific pressure range or when the
pressure in the discharge line fails to maintain a specific pressure range. This switch is electrically
connected in series with the magnetic clutch for the refrigerant compressor, and the evaporator coil
thermostat. Similarly to the thermostat switch, the compressor will not operate when the High-Low
pressure switch is OPEN. When the High-Low pressure switch is CLOSED, the current moves
through the switch and through the coil assembly in the magnetic clutch. This causes the compressor
to operate.
The High-Low pressure switch has two pressure set points that will cause the switch contacts to
OPEN. For a low pressure condition, the switch contacts will move OPEN whenever the pressure
value for the discharge line decreases to less than 170 kPa (25 psi). The switch contacts will remain in
the OPEN position until the pressure value increases to 275 kPa (40 psi) or more. For the high
pressure condition, the switch contacts will move OPEN whenever the pressure value for the
discharge line exceeds 2800 kPa (405 psi). The switch contacts will remain in the OPEN position
until the pressure value decreases to 1750 kPa (255 psi) or less.
Air Conditioning Low Pressure Switch
Schematic symbol and drawing for the low pressure switch
The Low pressure switch is used only in applications for the machine that also use the compressor
protection time delay relay. The Low pressure switch is used to monitor the refrigerant pressure that
comes into the suction side of the refrigerant compressor. The pressure switch prevents the
compressor from operating when the pressure for the suction line fails to maintain a specific pressure
range. This switch is electrically connected in series with the compressor protection time delay relay,
the high low pressure switch, and the thermostat for the evaporator coil. The compressor will not
operate when the Low pressure switch is OPEN. When the Low pressure switch is CLOSED, a
ground signal is sent to the compressor protection time delay relay. A CLOSED low pressure switch
indicates that the pressure for the suction line is high enough to allow the refrigerant compressor to
operate. The compressor protection time delay relay will then turn on causing the compressor to
operate.
The switch contacts on the low pressure switch will move OPEN whenever the pressure value for the
suction line decreases to less than 34 kPa (5 psi). The switch contacts will remain in the OPEN
position until the pressure value increases to 104 kPa (15 psi) or more.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
Alternator - Delco 21SI

i01258630
General Information
SMCS - 1405
21-SI Alternator
The alternator is an electronic component that is belt driven. The alternator is used to charge the
storage battery during engine operation. The alternators that are covered by this manual are cooled by
air that is drawn through the alternator by the external fan. Air is drawn through baffles that are
located in the rear cover. The air then exits from the drive end frame behind the fan.
The alternator converts a combination of mechanical energy and magnetic energy to alternating
current and voltage. This is done by rotating a direct current electromagnetic field on the inside of the
three-phase stator. The alternating current and voltage are generated by the stator. The current and the
voltage are changed to direct current by the three-phase full wave rectifier. The rectifier uses six
silicon rectifier diodes. The alternator also has a diode assembly which rectifies field current. The
field current is necessary for alternator output.
Voltage regulation is accomplished by the regulator that is located in the back of the alternator. The
regulator controls current flow to the field coil on the rotor. The current passes from the regulator to
the field coil through two brushes that contact two slip rings. The two slip rings that are located on the
rotor shaft are electrically connected to the field coil.
The capacitor that is located in the back of the alternator protects the rectifier and diode assembly
from high voltages. The capacitor also suppresses electrical noise.
An "I" terminal is located on the end of the following alternators.
• 117-1379 Alternator Gp
The "I" terminal is connected internally to the field circuit. An indicator light that is connected in
series with the terminal will glow when there is a difference between the terminal voltage and the
battery voltage. When the system is charging properly, the light is off.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01673732
Normal Operation
SMCS - 1405
(2) Rotor
(3) Slip rings
(6) Rectifier
(7) Stator
(9) Capacitor
(10) Regulator
(11) Diode assembly
(12) Brushes
The 21-SI series alternator is an integral charging system. The alternator has a built-in diode rectifier
and a voltage regulator. The system produces DC current for electrical systems.
The solid-state voltage regulator that is built into the 21-SI alternator limits the system voltage by
switching the ground circuit for the field coil at a rate between 10 hertz and 7000 hertz. When the
ground circuit is on, field current passes from the diode assembly through the field coil. Nominal
regulated voltages of 13.5 to 14.5 volts are available for 12 volt systems. The nominal regulated
voltage for the 24 volt system is between 27.0 and 29.0 volts.
If the alternator has an "I" terminal, the terminal may be used in order to supply excitation current.
The current flows from the keyswitch to the "I" terminal. The "I" terminal must have an indicator light
in series between the keyswitch and the "I" terminal. The indicator light provides a verification of
alternator excitation. This maintains the field current around 0.17 amperes. Once the alternator begins
charging, the field current is supplied from the diode trio. Current stops flowing through the "I"
terminal and the indicator lamp turns OFF.
The initial voltages at start-up are generated by residual magnetism in the rotor. As the speed
increases and the output increases, the voltage that is available at the diode assembly begins to supply
field current for normal operation. When output voltage exceeds battery voltage, the alternator begins
to drive the system voltage.
While the alternator output voltage is below the setting of the voltage regulator, the regulator turns on
the field current. This allows the alternator to produce the maximum output. When the voltage setting
is reached, the regulator turns off the field current. When the field current is off, the magnetic field in
the rotor decreases and the alternator output voltage begins to fall. The falling voltage causes the
regulator to turn on the field current and the current rebuilds the magnetic field. This cycle continues
at a rate between 10 hertz and 7000 hertz. The rate of the cycle is dependent on the system load. The
cycle keeps the output and the system voltage very close to the voltage setting. The cycle will
continue unless the electrical demands of the system cause the system voltage to fall below the
voltage setting. If the system voltage falls below the voltage setting, the regulator will allow
continuous field current to enable the alternator's maximum output.
Terminal Locations of the Alternator

(1) "B+" terminal (output)
(2) Ground terminal
(3) "R" terminal
(4) Location for "I" terminal
External connections to the 21-SI alternator are made to the terminals shown in illustration 2. The
"B+" terminal (1) on the 24 V alternator is a 1/4 inch stud. The 12 V alternator has a 5/16 inch stud.
A threaded 1/4-20 hole in the rear frame is provided as the ground terminal (2) .
The "R" terminal (3) is a #10 stud.
The "I" terminal (4) is also a #10 stud. This terminal is only available on the following alternators.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01258976
SMCS - 1405
21-SI Sectional view
Components
(1) Brush holder
(2) Rotor
(3) Slip rings
(4) Fan
(5) Rear frame
(6) Rectifier
(7) Stator
(8) Drive end frame

21-SI inside view of rear frame
Components
(1) Brush holder
(5) Rear frame
(6) Rectifier
(7) Stator
(9) Capacitor
(10) Regulator
(11) Diode assembly

Rotor
(2) Rotor
(3) Slip rings
The rotor (2) consists of a core, a field winding, and a shaft. The rotor provides the magnetic field
between the rotor field winding and the stator. The slip rings (3) provide the surfaces for the brushes
(12) to contact.
Stator
(7) Stator
The stator (7) consists of a stator core and windings. As the rotor turns, a varying magnetic field
causes the stator coil to produce three-phase AC voltage.
Brush Holder
(1) Brush holder
(12) Brushes
The brush holder (1) contains two brushes (12). The two brushes contact the two slip rings that are
located on the rotor shaft. Current flows to the rotor coil through the contact between the brushes (12)
and the slip rings (3). One brush is positive, and one brush is negative. The brush material is graphite.
Rectifier
(6) Rectifier
The rectifier (6) contains three positive diodes and three negative diodes. The six diodes form the
three-phase full wave rectifier that is connected to the stator. The rectifier (6) changes the AC voltage
that is produced by the stator to DC voltage.
Capacitor
(9) Capacitor
The capacitor (9) performs the following tasks:
• The capacitor protects the rectifier from high transient voltages.
• The capacitor protects the diode assembly from high transient voltages.
• The capacitor smooths the output of the rectifier.
• The capacitor reduces electrical noise.
The capacitor (9) is mounted in the back of the alternator on the rectifier.
Diode Assembly
(11) Diode Assembly

The diode assembly (11) contains three diodes. The diode assembly rectifies the output of the stator.
The rectified output of the stator is used to energize the field coil. The diode assembly (11) is located
on the rectifier.
Regulator
(10) Regulator
The regulator (10) limits the output of the alternator to a preset value by controlling the current
through the field coil. The regulator electronically switches the connection between the field coil and
ground. The switching occurs at rates between 10 hertz and 7000 hertz.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01761531
General Information
SMCS - 1405
27-SI Alternator
The alternator is an electromechanical component that converts mechanical energy into electrical
energy. The alternator charges the storage battery during engine operation and the alternator supplies
power for the machine electrical systems. The alternator is brushless.
The alternator is divided into a front frame and a rear frame. The alternator contains parts that are
inside of the frames. The following parts are stationary: the stator, the field winding, the rectifier, the
diode assembly, the regulator and the capacitor. The stationary parts are bolted to the frames. The
rotor is a moving part. The rotor is mounted to the frames by ball bearings or by roller bearings.
The field winding uses DC voltage to create a magnetic field. The magnetic field magnetizes the
rotor. The rotor rotates the magnetic field on the inside of the stator. The stator generates AC voltage.
The rectifier changes the AC voltage into DC voltage. Part of the DC voltage returns to the field
winding in order to maintain the magnetic field. The remainder of the DC voltage is supplied to the
battery and to the electrical components through battery terminals. The regulator limits the DC
voltage at the battery terminals by controlling the current in the field winding.
The alternator also contains parts that are outside of the frames. The removable rear cover provides
easy access to many of the internal components for troubleshooting and for repair. A belt (not shown)
provides the mechanical energy. The belt is attached to the shaft of the rotor. The fan cools the inside
of the alternator. Air is drawn through holes that are located on the side of the rear frame. The air exits
from the front frame behind the fan.
The battery terminals provide the alternator output. "B+" terminal (1) is a threaded stud. A nut, a
washer, and a lockwasher are installed onto the stud. The "B+" terminal is connected to the rectifier.
"B-" terminal (3) is a threaded hole. A screw and a lockwasher are installed into the hole. The "B-"
terminal is connected to the case.
"R" terminal (2) is a threaded stud that is located between the battery terminals. The "R" terminal is
used to restore the residual magnetism of the alternator. This terminal may be used to operate one of
the following components:
• A Charge Indicator
• A Tachometer
• An Hour Meter
• VIMS, CMS, EMS, or a similar device
The "R" terminal supplies the components with a number of voltage pulses for each revolution of the
alternator. The components that are connected to the "R" terminal must not draw excessive current.
A paper tag identifies the "B-" terminal on a replacement alternator. Remove the tag and discard the
tag. Install the screw and the lockwasher in the housing in order to prevent the entry of dirt and water.
The alternator requires a connection to the positive terminal of the battery for operation. The
alternator also requires a path to ground. The alternator's case is grounded. However, do not operate
the unit without an external path to ground. The "B-" terminal is provided in order to connect a
ground lead. The ground path should run between the alternator housing and the negative terminal of
the battery. Otherwise, the ground path is through the mounting hardware and the brackets to the
engine.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01761843
Normal Operation
SMCS - 1405
The field winding uses DC voltage to create a magnetic field. The magnetic field magnetizes the
rotor. The rotor rotates the magnetic field on the inside of the stator. The stator generates AC voltage.
The rectifier changes the AC voltage into DC voltage. Part of the DC voltage returns to the field
winding in order to maintain the magnetic field. The remainder of the DC voltage is supplied to the
battery and to the electrical systems through battery terminals.
Alternator Operation Schematic

Electrical Schematic of the 27-SI Series Alternator
(1) Field Winding (Exciter)
(3) Stator Windings
(4) Regulator
(5) Rectifier
(6) Capacitor
(7) Diode Assembly
The illustrations above show the electrical schematics for the alternators.
The alternator has two circuits: the charging circuit and the excitation circuit. The charging circuit
functions during normal operation. The excitation circuit functions during normal operation and
during start-up.
Charging Circuit
The charging circuit supplies current to the battery and to the electrical systems. The stator windings
generate three-phase AC voltage. The positive diodes and the negative diodes change the AC voltage
into DC voltage. The DC voltage allows current to flow to the battery terminals.
Excitation Circuit (Normal)

The excitation circuit supplies current to the field winding (exciter) during normal operation. The
alternator is self-excited. The rotor contains a core that acts as a rotating magnet. The rotating
magnetic field induces voltages in the stator windings. The stator windings generate three-phase AC
voltage. The exciter diodes and the negative diodes change the AC voltage into DC voltage. The DC
voltage allows current to flow in the field winding. The current induces a stationary magnetic field in
the field winding. The stationary magnetic field keeps the rotor core magnetized. The process
continues as the rotor operates normally.
Excitation Circuit (Start-up)

The excitation circuit also supplies current to the field winding (exciter) during start-up. The
alternator depends on the residual magnetism in the rotor core in order to achieve normal operation.
Once the rotor begins to move, the residual magnetism induces weak voltages in the stator windings.
The voltages cause a weak current to flow through the excitation circuit. The current produces a
stationary magnetic field in the field winding. The stationary magnetic field strengthens the
magnetism in the rotor core. The voltage in the stator windings increases. The effect is cumulative.
The voltage continues to rise until the regulator controls the output voltage. The regulator controls the
output voltage by varying the current in the field winding (exciter).
The alternator functions normally when the excitation circuit produces the breakdown voltage of two
diodes in series. The diodes are one exciter diode and one negative diode. The rotor generates the
breakdown voltage at the turn-on speed (2000 rpm). When the rotor reaches 2000 rpm, the alternator
generates an output.
Regulator Operation
The alternator charges the battery. The alternator also supplies power to the electrical systems. In
order to prevent overcharging the battery or damaging the systems, the voltage regulator keeps the
output voltage at a constant level. For 24 volt systems, the voltage is regulated to 28 ± 1 volts. For 12
volt systems, the voltage is regulated to 14 ± .5 volts. The regulator maintains the voltage regardless
of variations in load or variations in rotor speed.
The alternator output voltage is directly related to exciting current. For example, increasing the
exciting current increases the output voltage. By controlling the exciting current, the regulator
compensates for variations in load. As a result, the output voltage remains constant up to the
maximum current output.
The output voltage is regulated to 28 ± 1 volts (14 ± .5 volts) by periodically increasing and
decreasing the exciting current. If the output of the alternator is below 29 volts (14.5 volts), the
exciting current rises and the voltage rises. If the voltage exceeds 29 volts (14.5 volts), the regulator
turns off the exciting current. The drop in current reduces the output voltage. When the voltage drops
below 27 volts (13.5 volts), the regulator turns on the exciting current. The rise in current increases
output voltage to 29 volts (14.5 volts). The cycle is repeated. The cycles occur quickly, so that the
output voltage remains constant.
The alternator output voltage is directly related to rotor speed for a given electrical load. For example,
increasing the rotor speed increases the output voltage. By controlling the exciting current, the
regulator compensates for variations in rotor speed. At low speeds, a higher average exciting current
results. At high speeds, a lower average exciting current results.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i01761884
SMCS - 1405
27-SI Alternator
(1) Field Winding
(2) Rotor
(3) Stator
(4) Regulator
(5) Rectifier
(6) Capacitor
(7) Diode Assembly
Field Winding
Field winding (1) is a stationary coil that provides a magnetic field for the rotor.
Rotor
Rotor (2) consists of a magnetic core that is mounted on a shaft. The rotor rotates on the shaft. The
rotor is magnetized by the field winding, and the rotor provides a magnetic field for the stator.
The core is divided into two poles that are separated by an insulated ring. When current flows in the
field winding, the core is magnetized. One side becomes the "N" pole, and the other side becomes the
"S" pole.
When the current in the field winding stops, the core does not lose the magnetism completely. The
core still contains some residual magnetism.
Stator
Stator (3) consists of a stator core and three independent windings. As the rotor turns, a varying
magnetic field causes the stator windings to produce three-phase AC voltage. The stator is supported
by the front frame and by the rear frame.
Rectifier
Rectifier (5) is a three-phase full wave rectifier. The rectifier changes the AC voltage that is produced
by the stator to DC voltage. The rectifier contains positive diodes and negative diodes. The DC
voltage from the positive diodes and from the negative diodes is delivered to the battery terminals.
Diode Assembly
Diode assembly (7) contains three exciter diodes. The negative diodes from rectifier (5) and the
exciter diodes change the AC voltage from the stator to DC voltage. The DC voltage from the exciter
diodes and from the negative diodes energizes the field winding.
Capacitor
Capacitor (6) performs the following tasks:
• The capacitor protects the rectifier diodes from high transient voltages.
• The capacitor protects the diode assembly from high transient voltages.
• The capacitor smooths the output of the rectifier.
• The capacitor suppresses radio interference.
• The capacitor reduces electrical noise.
The capacitor is mounted inside the rear frame. The capacitor is connected to the rectifier.
Regulator
Regulator (4) limits the output voltage of the alternator to a preset value by controlling the current
through the field winding. The regulator electronically switches the connection between the field coil
and ground. The switching occurs at variable rates. The regulator is mounted inside the rear frame.
The regulator is totally enclosed. The regulator cannot be adjusted.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
C-9 Engines for Caterpillar Built Machines

i03652750
Electronic Control System Components

SMCS - 1900
(1) Coolant temperature sensor
(2) Injection actuation pressure sensor
(3) Fuel pressure sensor
(4) Boost pressure sensor
(5) Inlet air temperature sensor
(6) Atmospheric pressure sensor
(7) Timing calibration connector
(8) High pressure oil temperature sensor
(9) Speed/timing sensors
(10) Engine oil pressure sensor
(11) ECM
The electronic control system is integrally designed into the engine's fuel system and the engine's air
inlet and exhaust system in order to electronically control the fuel delivery and the injection timing.
The electronic control system provides increased timing control and fuel air ratio control in
comparison to conventional mechanical engines. Injection timing is achieved by precisely controlling
the injector firing time. Engine rpm is controlled by adjusting the injection duration. The Electronic
Control Module (ECM) energizes the unit injector solenoids in order to start the injection of fuel.
Also, the Electronic Control Module (ECM) de-energizes the unit injector solenoids in order to stop
the injection of fuel.
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) is the ADEM III version. The ADEM III is the third
generation of Electronic Control Module (ECM) in a series. The Electronic Control Module has two
70 pin connectors.
The personality module is used by the ECM to store all the rated information for a particular
application. The personality module can not be replaced physically. The personality module must be
flashed programmed with a PC. Refer to Systems Operation/Testing And Adjusting, "Fuel System"
for a complete explanation of the fuel injection process.
The engine uses the following three types of electronic components:
• Input component
• Control component
• Output component
An input component is one that sends an electrical signal to the ECM of the system. The signal that is
sent varies in either of the following ways:
• Voltage
• Frequency
• Pulse width
The variation of the signal is in response to a change in some specific system of the vehicle. Some
specific examples of an input component are the engine speed-timing sensors, the coolant temperature
sensor, and the cruise control switches. The ECM interprets the signal from the input component as
information about the condition, environment, or operation of the engine.
A control component (ECM) receives the input signals from the input components. Electronic circuits
inside the control component evaluate the signals from the input components. These electronic
circuits also supply electrical energy to the output components of the system. The electrical energy
that is supplied to the output components is based on predetermined combinations of input signal
values.
An output component is one that is operated by a control module. The output component receives
electrical energy from the control group. The output component uses that electrical energy in one of
two ways. The output component can use that electrical energy in order to perform work. The output
component can use that electrical energy in order to provide information.
As an example, a moving solenoid plunger will perform work. By performing work, the component
has functioned in order to regulate the engine.
As an example, a dash panel light or an alarm will provide information to the operator of the engine.
These electronic components provide the ability to electronically control the engine operation.
Engines with electronic controls offer the following advantages:
• Improvement in performance
• Improvement in fuel consumption
• Reduction in emissions levels
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
C-9 Engines for Caterpillar Built Machines

i01836935
Electrical System
SMCS - 1400; 1550; 1900
Grounding Practices
Proper grounding for the vehicle electrical system and the engine electrical systems is necessary for
proper vehicle performance and reliability. Improper grounding will result in unreliable electrical
circuit paths and uncontrolled electrical circuit paths.
Uncontrolled engine electrical circuit paths can result in damage to main bearings, crankshaft bearing
journal surfaces, and aluminum components.
Uncontrolled electrical circuit paths can cause electrical noise which may degrade the vehicle and
radio performance.
To ensure proper functioning of the engine electrical system, an engine-to-frame ground strap with a
direct path to the battery must be used. This may be provided by a starting motor ground, by a frame
to starting motor ground, or by a direct frame to engine ground. An engine-to-frame ground strap
must be used in order to connect the grounding stud of the engine to the frame and to the negative
battery post.
Typical example
Grounding stud to battery ground ("-")
Typical example
Alternate grounding stud to battery ground ("-")
The engine must have a wire ground to the battery.
Ground wires or ground straps should be combined at ground studs that are only for ground use. All
of the grounds should be tight and free of corrosion.
The engine alternator should be battery ground with a wire size that is capable of managing the full
charging current of the alternator.
NOTICE
When boost starting an engine, the instructions in Systems Operation,

"Engine Starting" should be followed in order to properly start the
engine.
This engine may be equipped with a 12 volt starting system or a 24 volt
starting system. Only equal voltage for boost starting should be used.
The use of a higher voltage will damage the electrical system.
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) must be disconnected at the

"J1/P1" and "J2/P2" locations before welding on the vehicle.
Engine Electrical System

The electrical system has three separate circuits:
• Charging
• Starting
• Low amperage accessories
Some of the electrical system components are used in more than one circuit. The following
components are common in more than one circuit:
• Battery or batteries
• Circuit breakers
• Ammeter
• Battery cables
The charging circuit is in operation when the engine is running. An alternator generates electricity for
the charging circuit. A voltage regulator in the circuit controls the electrical output in order to keep
the battery at full charge.
NOTICE
The disconnect switch, if equipped, must be in the ON position in order

to let the electrical system function. There will be damage to some of
the charging circuit components if the engine is running with the
disconnect switch in the OFF position.
If the engine has a disconnect switch, the starting circuit can operate only after the disconnect switch
is put in the ON position.
The starting circuit is in operation only when the start switch is activated.
Both the low amperage circuit and the charging circuit are connected to the same side of the ammeter.
The starting circuit is connected to the opposite side of the ammeter.
NOTICE
Never operate the alternator without the battery in the circuit. Making
or breaking an alternator connection with heavy load on the circuit can
cause damage to the regulator.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
Caterpillar Monitoring System

i02510655
General Information
SMCS - 7490
Introduction
Caterpillar Monitoring System Display Components
(1) Quad gauge module. (2) Speedometer/tachometer module. (3) Main display module. (4) Alert indicators. (5) Gauges.
(6) Tachometer. (7) Speed readout. (8) Gear readout. (9) Display area.

(1) Quad gauge module. (2) Lamp/Gear module. (3) Alert indicators. (4) Main display module. (5) Alert indicators. (6)
Gauges. (7) Mode indicators. (8) Tach/Gear display. (9) Display area.
The Caterpillar Monitoring System is an electronic monitoring system that continuously watches
machine systems. The system is a flexible modular monitoring system that includes the following
devices: a main display module, various switches and sensors, an action lamp, an action alarm, a
speedometer/tachometer module, a lamp/gear module and a quad gauge module.
The main display module is the brain of the system. This module receives information from the
switches, the sensors and other electronic controls. The information is sent via the CAT data link. The
main display module processes all of the information. The main display module will then activate the
various outputs for the following displays:
• display area of the main display module
• the quad gauge module
• the speedometer/tachometer module
• the lamp/gear module
• the action lamp
• the action alarm
The display components show the condition of the machine systems. The operator can also obtain
system diagnostic information.
The three modules which constitute the Caterpillar Monitoring System have the following
characteristics:
Main Display Module

• The ten alert indicators (4) show abnormal conditions of the machine.
• A six digit display area (9) is provided. The display shows the following modes: machine
operational hours (service meter), engine speed (tachometer), machine distance (odometer) and
diagnostic codes. The information for the speedometer/tachometer module and the quad gauge
module can be shown on the display. The display area contains seven unit indicators and a
service indicator. The operator selects the system information that is shown in the display area.
• Seven different unit indicators can be shown in the display area. The unit indicators that can be
shown are "°C", "kPa", "MILES", "KM", "RPM", "LITERS" and "HOURMETER" symbol.
These indicators show the units of measurement for the data on the six digit display area. The
indicators are turned ON and OFF in order to correspond with the information on the six digit
display area.
• In order to indicate a current fault, a service code indicator is used. The service code indicator is
used in service mode and in diagnostic scrolling mode.
Speedometer/Tachometer Module
• One tachometer gauge (6) shows the information on the engine speed (RPM).
• One three digit display area (7) shows the information on the ground speed. The speed is
displayed in "MPH" and "km/h".
• Information on the transmission gear and the direction are shown on a two digit gear readout
(8).
Lamp/Gear Module
• The five alert indicators show abnormal conditions of the machine.
• The five mode indicators show the functions for the power train that are currently activated.
• The first four digits of the Tach/Gear display shows the engine rpm. The last two digits of the
Tach/Gear display shows the gear and the direction.
Quad Gauge Module

• The four electronic gauges (5) show the condition of the machine. The following conditions are
typical: engine coolant temperature, transmission oil temperature, hydraulic oil temperature and
fuel level.
Variations will exist from one machine to another machine. An external action lamp and an action
alarm indicate the severity (warning category) of a problem.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02713314
Modes of Operation
SMCS - 7490
This is a typical example of the Display Area (Mode 2).
The Caterpillar Monitoring System has 12 different possible modes of operation. Five of the modes
are operator modes and seven of the modes are service modes. Each mode provides important
information regarding the condition of the machine. Each mode also provides information regarding
the setup of the monitoring system. All modes are not available on all machines. The system that is
installed on the machine determines the modes that are available. All 12 modes are given names and
the modes are referenced in this manual. The mode is shown as a number on each display area on the
main display module. This number is assigned by the software in the main display module.
The seven service modes can be changed by using the service switch and clear switch on the main
display. The five operator modes are accessible by using the selector switch for the operator mode
that is located in the operator's compartment. The following table shows the available modes. See the
Operation and Maintenance Manual of the machine that is being serviced for specific information on
the operator mode.
When power is applied, the Caterpillar Monitoring System performs the self test. After the self test is
complete the Caterpillar Monitoring System enters the Normal Mode. To enter the other modes, the
service inputs and the clear inputs are grounded at the same time. This action causes the mode
numbers to scroll sequentially on the six digit display area of the main display module. When the
ground is removed from the service inputs and the clear inputs, the monitoring system enters the
mode which corresponds to the number that is presently shown. The following situation is an
example. When you see the mode number "- 1-" on the readout, remove the ground. This action
causes the monitoring system to enter harness code mode.
Note: The following situation will occur when the key start switch is in the ON position and the
service inputs and the clear inputs are grounded. The monitoring system performs the self test when
the power is applied. The mode numbers immediately scroll after the self test.
The service inputs and the clear inputs are provided with access by the service connector or the
service switch. The service connector or the service switches are located within the operator
compartment. Information on the location of the service connector is in the Electrical System
Schematic for the machine that is being serviced.
The mode of operation is variable at any time. Closing the service switch and the clear switch at the
same time initiates the scrolling of the mode numbers. Opening the switches causes the monitoring
system to enter the operating mode that is shown on the display. The mode number that is shown will
correspond to the operating mode. When you are scrolling through the modes, mode 0 (normal mode)
is not shown on the display area as a number. When you reach mode 0, the display area begins
showing the information for mode 0 (normal mode).
Table 1
Medium Track-Type Tractors
Operator Modes
Operator PSDD D5M PSDD D6R D6M D7R D7R D8R (1)
Mode D5M D6R C/B D/S
Gear Display 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Service Meter 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1
Tachometer 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Odometer 2
(1)
6YZ and , AKA
Table 2
Operator Modes
D5N D6N C/B D6N D/S
Operator Mode
Service Meter 0 0 0
Odometer
1 1 1
(total distance)
3rd Gear Odometer (forward and reverse distance in 3rd gear)
2 2 2
Scrolling 3 3 3
Table 3
Operator Modes
Operator Mode D6RIII D7RII D/S (1) D6T
Service Meter 0 0 0
Odometer (forward, reverse, and total) 1 1 1
Scrolling 2 2 2
(1)
For serial numbers AEC1500-UP, AGN1500-UP, ABJ1500-UP
Table 4
Service Modes
Service Mode PSDD D5M PSDD D6R D5/ D7R D7R D8R (1)
D5M D6R D6M C/B D/S
Operator Mode 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
Sequence
Harness Code 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Numeric Readout 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
2
Service 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Digital Tattletale 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
Odometer Units
5
(Km to Miles)
Calibration 1 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
(XMSN Control) 6
(XMSN Control) 7
(XMSN Control) 8
Charging System 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
9
Display
(1)
6YZ and , AKA
Table 5
Service Modes
Service Mode D6RIII D7RII (1) D6T
Operator Mode Sequence 0 0 0
Harness Code 1 1 1
Numeric Readout 2 2 2
Service 3 3 3
Digital Tattletale 4 4 4
Odometer Units (km to miles) 5 5 5
Configuration 6 6 6
Calibration 1 (Xmsn) 7 7 7
Calibration 2 (Impl) 8 8 8
Limp Home 9 9 9
Component Status Display 10 10 10
Charging System Display 11 11 11
(1)
For Serial Numbers 1500 and higher
Note: The Operator Modes for D7R D/S are applicable to D7R D/S machines with serial numbers of
1500 and higher.
Table 6
Service Modes
Service Mode D5N D6N C/B D6N D/S
Operator Mode Sequence 0 0 0
Harness Code 1 1 1
Numeric Readout 2 2 2
Service 3 3 3
Digital Tattletale 4 4 4
Odometer Units (Km to Miles) 5 5 5
Calibration 1 (Transmission Control) 6 6 6
Charging System Display 9 9 9
Table 7
Large Track-Type Tractors
Operator Modes
Operator Mode D9R D9R (1) D10R D11R
Service Meter 1 1 1 1
Odometer 4 2 2
Tachometer 2 2 3 3
Engine Oil Pressure 3 3 4 4
Scrolling (Diagnostic) 4 5 5 5
(1)
ACL and , ABK
Table 8
Service Modes
Service Mode D9R (1) D9R (except Steel D9R (Steel D10R D11R
Mill) Mill)
Operator Mode Sequence 0 0 0 0 0
Harness Code 1 1 1 1 1
Numeric Readout 2 2 2 2 2
Service 3 3 3 3 3
Digital Tattletale 4 4 4 4 4
Units 5 5 5
Calibration 1 (Transmission 6 6
Control)
Control)
Control)
Charging System Display 6 5 9 9
(1)
ACL and, ABK
Table 9
Track-Type Loaders and Pipelayers
Operator Modes
Operator Mode 572R 953C 963C 953C 963C 973C 572RII
561N 973C
(BBX) (BBD) (BCP) (DSC302-
UP)
Gear Display 0
Service Meter 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Tachometer 2
Scrolling 3 2 2
3 2 2 2 2 2
(Diagnostic)
Digital
1 1 1 1 1 1
Tachometer
Odometer 1 3 3 3 1
3rd Gear
Odometer
(forward and 2
reverse distance
in 3rd gear)
Table 10
Service Modes
Service Mode 572RII 953C 963C 953C 963C 973C
561N 572RII (1) 973C
(BBX) (BBD) (BCP)
Operator Mode 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0
Sequence
Harness Code 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Numeric 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
Readout
Service 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Tattletale 4
Digital Tattletale 4 4
4 4 4 4 4 4
Odometer Units
5 5
(Km to Miles)
Calibration 1 5
(Transmission 6 7
Control)
Calibration 2 6
(Transmission 7
Control)
Calibration 3 7
(Transmission 8
Control)
Calibration 5 5
(Hydrostatic
5
Transmission
Control)
Charging 8
System Display 9 10 8 8 8
Units 7 7 7
Calibration 5 5 5
Component
6 6 6
Status Display
(1)
This applies to serial number prefix DSC (302 and higher)
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510419
Normal Mode
SMCS - 7490
(6) Tachometer. (7) Ground speed readout. (8) Transmission gear readout. (9) Display area.
Normal mode is used during normal machine operation. When you are in normal mode, the
Caterpillar Monitoring System performs the following operations.
• A monitoring system that is operating properly will perform a self test whenever the keyswitch
is turned to the ON position. The outputs also operate for a brief instant. See Testing and
Adjusting, "System Self Test ".
• The main display module continuously watches machine systems. If the gauges are available,
the gauges in the quad gauge module show a value in a normal range. Ground speed readout (7)
is shown as a numeric value and the transmission gear readout (8) on the module shows
numeric values. The value for a condition may also be shown in the display area.
• The main display can show a problem with the machine. The main display module continuously
monitors machine systems. When an abnormal condition (problem) exists, the corresponding
alert indicator (4) FLASHES. As the severity of the problem increases, the action lamp
FLASHES and the action alarm SOUNDS. See System Operation, "Warning Operation".
• Machines that are equipped with the lamp/gear module will also show a problem with the
machine by a red alert indicator that is FLASHING. A special operating status of the machine is
indicated by an amber indicator. The display for the lamp/gear module shows the tachometer
(1), gear (2), and direction (3) .
Display for the Lamp/Gear module
(1) Tachometer
(2) Gear
(3) Direction
Note: The main display module may notify the operator when a problem exists in other electronic
systems. This is done in different ways. The following example is of a problem that occurs in the
engine electronic system. The service code indicator will show "SERV CODE" and the alert indicator
for "check engine" FLASHES. See the Operation And Maintenance Manual for the machine that is
being serviced for more specific information on the machine.
Operator Modes
Table 1
Medium Tractor-Type Tractors
Operator Modes
Operator PSDD D5M PSDD D6R D6M D7R D7R D8R (1)
Mode D5M D6R C/B D/S
Gear Display 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
Service Meter 2 2 2 1 1 1 1
1
Tachometer 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
Odometer 2
Scrolling 4 4 4 3 3 3 3 3
(1)
6YZ and, AKA
Table 2
Operator Modes
D5N D6N C/B D6N D/S
Operator Mode
Service Meter 0 0 0
Odometer
1 1 1
(total distance)
3rd Gear Odometer (forward and reverse distance in 3rd gear)
2 2 2
Scrolling 3 3 3
Table 3
Operator Modes
Operator Mode D9R D9R (1) D10R D11R
Service Meter 1 1 1 1
Odometer 2 2 2
Tachometer 2 3 3 3
Engine Oil Pressure 3 4 4 4
Scrolling 4 5 5 5
(1)
ACL and, ABK
Table 4
Operator Modes
Operator Mode 572R 953C 963C 953C 963C 973C
561N 973C
(BBX) (BBD) (BCP)
Gear Display 0
Service Meter 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
Odometer
1
(total distance)
3rd Gear Odometer
(forward and reverse 2
distance in 3rd gear)
Tachometer 2
Scrolling 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2
Digital Tachometer 1 1 1 1 1 1
Odometer 3 3 3
The six digit display area (9) is used to show various conditions of the machine system to the operator
(Operator Modes). Operator modes that are available to the operator are dependent to the monitoring
system that is installed on the machine. The table above lists the operator modes by the machine.
The default condition is shown on the six digit display area when the main display module enters
normal mode. This condition is normally the service meter. See System Operation, "Service Meter
Mode" for more information.
The six digit display area scrolls through the available operator modes when the operator switch input
is grounded. Opening the switch input will stop the scrolling on the currently shown mode. Mode
numbers are not displayed when operator modes are scrolling.
See the topic with the corresponding name on the following pages for a more detailed explanation of
each mode.
Optional Machine Conditions
Note: The optional machine conditions are not applicable to D8R.
The display area may be used to show other information on the condition of the machine. For
example, the display area may be used as a gear readout when the speedometer/tachometer module is
not used. The following situation occurs in order to function as a gear readout. The six digit display
area changes from the default condition to the gear readout when the parking brake is
DISENGAGED. The symbol for the service meter turns OFF and the information on the transmission
gear is shown on the six digit display area.
The display area may also be used when ether is being injected with a flashing "E". A flashing "P" in
the display area may be used when the engine is being prelubed. The following display modes are also
available: the load count, the engine oil pressure and the charge pressure. See the table for the
Monitoring System Mode on the Electrical System Schematic in order to determine the mode number
for the corresponding machine.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510422
Service Meter Mode

SMCS - 7490
Display Area
The main display module keeps track of the total number of engine hours. The total machine
operating hours are shown on the six digit display area when you are in service meter mode. The
symbol for the service meter is ON in order to indicate when the display is functioning as a service
meter. The value is continuously updated when the engine is operating.
The main display module monitors the following electrical inputs in order to determine when the
machine engine is operating: engine speed, terminal for altenator "R", engine oil pressure, and sends
engine speed over the datalink for hours to accumulate. The main display module starts the service
meter for the machine when one of these inputs is in the normal range.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510654
Gear Display Mode

SMCS - 7490
The following information describes a system that does not have a lamp/gear module.
When the engine is not running and the key is on, the default display in the operator mode depends on
the parking brake status. When the parking brake is applied, the display will show the current hour
meter. If the parking brake is released, then the display will show the current gear information.
When the engine is running, the default display in the operator mode will be the gear indicator. The
operator can scroll through operator modes by pressing and holding the operator switch. Once you are
in the desired operator mode, release the operator switch. The display will stay in that desired operator
mode for 15 seconds. Then, the display will return to the default display.
Note: The current gear will be displayed, when there is a change in the parking brake status or the
gear status. The display will change regardless of the 15 second wait period.
In order to extend the current display, press the operator switch. Press the switch before the display
scrolls to the next operator mode. This action will allow the operator to begin another display period
of 15 seconds. The display period will not lengthen, when the operator switch is pressed multiple
times.
When the display is in any of the service modes, any change in the condition of the parking brake will
force the display to indicate the default gear. The previous service mode may be resumed by pressing
and releasing the mode switch once.
Note: Whenever the gear information is not available, the display area will show "--".
The following information describes a system that has a lamp/gear module.
The engine operating hours is the default display for the lamp/gear module. The operator can scroll
through operator modes by pressing and holding the operator switch. When the operator releases the
operator switch, the display will remain in the current operator mode. The display will remain in the
desired operator mode until the user presses the operator switch again. The main display module will
not show the current gear because the current gear is shown on the lamp/gear display.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510647
Charging System Display Mode

SMCS - 7490
Display Area
The charging system display mode shows the current system voltage. The voltage is measured
between the contacts for the power supply of the main display module (contacts 1 and 2). In addition,
the status of the alternator "R" terminal is shown on the far left digit of the six digit display area. If the
frequency of alternator "R" is less than 90 Hz, the display will be "-". When the frequency is above 90
Hz and the alternator is operating normally, the display will be "A".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510650
Charge Pressure Display Mode

SMCS - 7490
Display Area
When the main display module is in the charge pressure display mode, the charge pressure is
displayed on the six digit display area. The indicator for units shows "kPa". The main display module
receives the charge pressure from the hydrostatic transmission control via the CAT data link.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510657
Engine Oil Pressure Display Mode

SMCS - 7490
Display Area
Note: This mode is used as an operator mode on the D9R, D10R, and D11R.
When the main display module is in the engine oil pressure display mode, the engine oil pressure is
displayed on the six digit display area. The indicator for the units shows "kPa". The main display
module may receive the oil pressure from a sensor. The main display area may also receive the
information from another electronic control module via the CAT data link.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510643
Odometer Mode
SMCS - 7490
Display Area
Note: This mode is used as an operator mode on D10R, D11R, and machines that are equipped with
the lamp/gear module.
When the main display module is in the odometer mode, the total distance for both the forward gear
and the reverse gear is shown on the six digit display area. The indicator for the units shows "MILES"
or "KM". This depends on the setting for units of measure of the main display module. The display
will automatically scroll between forward "F" and reverse "R". The main display module receives
information from the frequency sensor from the transmission electronic control module. This is done
by using the CAT data link. The unit of measure can be set by using the units mode. See System
Operation, "Units Mode" for more information.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02511544
Tachometer Mode
SMCS - 7490
Display Area
The engine RPM is shown on the six digit display area when the main display module is in
tachometer mode. The indicator for the units shows "RPM". The main display module receives
information from a frequency sensor from another electronic control module. This can be done by
way of the CAT data link.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02713329
Scrolling Mode
SMCS - 7490
(1) First display. (2) Second display. (3) Module identifier (MID). (4) Service code indicator "SERV CODE". (5)
Component identifier (CID). (6) Failure mode identifier (FMI).
Scrolling mode allows service personnel or an operator to see diagnostic codes that were stored by the
main display module. The diagnostic code in this mode can not be cleared. The diagnostic code can
also not be placed on hold.
The diagnostic codes momentarily scroll on the display area upon entering the scrolling mode. The
MID is shown first as each diagnostic code is shown for about one second. The corresponding CID
and the corresponding FMI is shown second for about two seconds. "End" appears when the last
diagnostic code has been shown. The diagnostic codes are then shown. The display shows "- - -" when
the main display module has no diagnostic codes.
The "SERV CODE" functions as a diagnostic present indicator in scrolling mode. The diagnostic that
has caused a diagnostic code to be shown currently is present when "SERV CODE" is ON. "SERV
CODE" is OFF when the fault is not present, but the fault has previously occurred.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i04930133
Harness Code Mode

SMCS - 7490
Display area
Harness code mode is always mode 1. The machine code is shown on the six-digit display area when
the main display module is in harness code mode. The machine code must correspond with the
monitoring system that is installed on the machine sales model. See Table 1 for machine codes. The
machine code is a two-digit representation of the harness code.
Note: An incorrect harness code is one that does not match the machine. Incorrect monitoring system
operation will be caused by an erroneous harness code. Excessive diagnostic service codes could be
recorded as a result of this situation.
Table 1
Machine Codes
Sales Model Machine Code
561N 06
572R 30
572RII 52 (1)
953C 09, 08 (2)
963C 10, 11 (3)
973C 12, 13 (4)
D5M 17
D5M PSDD 16
D5N 06
D6N C/B 23
D6N D/S 41
D6R PSDD 19
D6R 18
D6R III 42, 44
D6T 42, 44
D6M 20
D7R C/B 30
D7R D/S 24
D7R D/S 53, 54 (5)
D8R 15 (6)
D9R C/B HEUI 21, 20 (6)
D9R C/B MECH 31, 40 (6)
D9R D/S HEUI 36, 19 (7)
D9R D/S MECH 37, 39 (7)
D9R (WATER GLYCOL) 50, 49 (7)
D9R 57 (8)
D9T 57, 58 (9)
D10R 27
D11R-A 29
D11R-B 28
(1)
DSC302-UP
(2)
BBX
(3)
BBD
(4)
BCP
(5)
AEC1500-UP, AGN1500-UP, ABJ1500-UP
(6)
6YZ and AKA
(7)
ACL and ABK
(8)
HWH
(9)
Steel Mill
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02627274
Numeric Readout Mode

SMCS - 7490
Display Area
Numeric readout mode is an operator mode. Numeric readout mode assists service personnel with
troubleshooting of sensor inputs. The inputs supply information for the gauges in the quad gauge
modules. Numeric readout mode more accurately shows the same information that is shown on the
gauges in normal mode. The system identifier and the numeric value for the system scrolls on the six
digit display area. The system identifier identifies the system that is currently shown on the six digit
display area. See table 1 for "System Identification" and illustration 2 in order to match the system
identifier to the appropriate gauge.
Note: Custom applications on some machine models will scroll to system identifiers GA-5 and GA-6.
These system identifiers represent machine system information that is only displayed in the six digit
display area and is not represented by a gauge.
Quad gauge modules
This is an illustration of the display area on the Main Display Module that is showing an example of a system identifier.
Table 1
System Identification
System Identifier Gauge (System)
GA-1 Coolant Temperature
GA-2 Torque Converter Temperature
GA-3 (1) Air Pressure
GA-4 Fuel
GA-5 Engine Oil Pressure
GA-6 Inlet Air Temperature
(1)
In D6III and D7RII D/S models and 572RII, GA-3 is Hydraulic Oil Temperature
Table 2
Units
Condition Units of Measurement
Temperature °C
Pressure kPa
Voltage 0.1 volts
Level % full
Only the gauge for the system that is shown on the six digit display area is operational. All other
gauges in the quad gauge module are shut off. The gauge needles will move to the far left position.
When you enter the numeric readout mode, the six digit display area is showing information for
system GA-1. The display momentarily shows the system identifier. The display then shows the value
for the corresponding system on the six digit display area. Scroll through the gauges by momentarily
pressing the operator mode switch. Toggle the operator mode switch quickly. When the service input
is grounded, all of the systems will scroll on the display. This will show the system identifiers.
Removing ground from the service input stops the scrolling, when the desired system is shown. The
six digit display area continues to show the system identifier momentarily. The six digit display area
then shows the value of the system. The system is now shown on hold. While the system is on hold,
the numeric value of the system is continuously updated.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02713333
Component Status Mode

SMCS - 7490
Component status mode is mode 6. This mode is used in order to display information about the status
of components that are on the machine. The components are displayed sequentially by the component
identifier (CID). You can scroll through the components with the increment position and the
decrement position of the calibrate switch. The CID is displayed for two seconds before the data is
displayed. The following table lists all of the components that are available for display and shows the
format that the data is displayed in.
Table 1
CID Display Values/Range
Data Format/Units
Description
Left Character = N.O.
Contact 01 = Park
Right Character = N.C. 10 = Not Park
70
Contact 11 = Invalid State
0 or C = Contact Closed 00 = Invalid State
Parking Brake Switch 1 or O = Contact Open
132 Override Pressure Sensor Kpa 0 to 3770 kpa
000 = 0 Amps
133 Current (0 to 255 scale)
Override Solenoid 255 = 1.25 Amps
136 Right Motor Pilot Pressure Kpa 0 to 3160 kpa
137 Left Motor Pilot Pressure Kpa 0 to 3160 kpa
168 System Voltage Volts 0 to 39.9 DCV
Application Dependent
177 Deg C
Trans Oil Temp Sensor
190 Engine Speed Sensor RPM 0 to 4000 RPM
269 8 Volt Sensor Supply Voltage Volts 0 to11 DCV
O = Open O = Pedal Released
298
Brake Pedal Switch C = Closed C = Pedal Pressed
Left Character = N.C CO = Not Reverse
Contact Right Character = OC = Reverse
299
Trans. Lever Pos. Sensor with N.O. Contact < 50 = reverse
Reverse Sw. FNR % Duty Cycle >50 = forward
Character = Solenoid 0 = Solenoid Off
349
Synchronization Solenoid Command 1 = Solenoid On
Contact Right Character =
OC = Button Released
368 N.C. Contact
CO = Button Pressed
Bi-Directional Shift Sw. Left Character = N.O.
Impl. Dual Relief Pressure Character = Solenoid 0 = Solenoid Off
463
Solenoid Command 1 = Solenoid On
Character = N.O. contact
0= High Pressure
464 Impl. Dual Relief Pressure 0 = Contact Closed
1 = Low Pressure
Switch 1 = Contact Open
466 Left Steering Pedal Sensor % Duty Cycle 0 to 100%
467 Right Steering Pedal Sensor % Duty Cycle 0 to 100%
468 Service Brake Pedal Sensor % Duty Cycle 0 to 100%
Left Forward Hystat Control 000 = 0 Amps
Solenoid 255= 1 Amp
Left Reverse Hystat Control 000 = 0 Amps
Solenoid 255 = 1 Amp
Right Forward Hystat Control 000 = 0 Amps
Solenoid 255 = 1 Amp
Right Reverse Hystat Control 000 = 0 Amps
Solenoid 255= 1 Amp
OC = Implements
O = Open Locked
490
C = Closed CO = Implements
Implement Lockout Sw. Unlocked
497 Current (mA)
Tilt Right Solenoid
498 Current (mA)
Tilt Left Solenoid
01 = Work Mode
10 = Travel Mode
589 N.C.
11 = Invalid State
Contact 0 = Contact Closed
00 = Invalid State
Travel Speed Range Switch 1 = Contact Open
621 Contact Right
CO = Button Pressed
Downshift Sw. Character = N.C. Contact
622 Contact Right
CO = Button Pressed
Upshift Sw. Character = N.C. Contact
Transmission Output Speed
671 RPM 0 - 3000
Sensor
Torque Converter Output Speed
672 RPM 0 - 3000
Sensor
Transmission Output Speed
673 RPM 0 - 3000
Sensor #2
Character = Solenoid 0 = Solenoid Off
681
Parking Brake Solenoid Command 1 = Solenoid On
689 Current (mA)
Left Brake Solenoid
0 = Solenoid Off
722 Solenoid Command
Secondary Brake Solenoid 1 = Solenoid On
Duty Cycle < 50 =
1078 Raise
% Duty Cycle
Blade Control Handle Lift Duty Cycle > 50 =
Position Sensor Lower
Duty Cycle < 50 = Left
1079
Blade Control Handle Tilt % Duty Cycle Duty Cycle > 50 =
Position Sensor Right
1197 Application Dependent
Current (mA)
Blade Lower Solenoid
Current (mA)
Blade Raise Solenoid
Current (mA)
Transmission Solenoid #1
Current (mA)
Current (mA)
Current (mA)
Current (mA)
1488 Implement Lever Float Detent Character = Solenoid 0 = Solenoid Off
Electromagnet Command 1 = Solenoid On
1582 Transmission Lube Oil Temp Application Dependent
Deg C
Sensor
01 = Park
1868 10 = Not Park
N.C.
11 = Invalid State
Speed/Direction Lever Park Contact 0 = Contact Closed
00 = Invalid State
Position Switch 1 = Contact Open
1869
% Duty Cycle 0 to 100%
Speed/Direction Lever Sensor
Duty Cycle < 50 =
1870 Rocker Left
% Duty Cycle
Blade Ctrl. Thumb Rocker Duty Cycle > 50 =
Position Sensor Rocker Rt
Current (mA)
Blade Angle Left Solenoid
Current (mA)
Blade Angle Right Solenoid
2114 OC = Button Released
Blade Ctrl. Handle Trigger Sw. Contact Right
CO = Button Pressed
Character = N.C. Contact
Left Character = N.C.
2122 CO = Not Reverse
Transmission Selector Reverse Contact Right
OC = Reverse
Direction Sw. Character = N.O. Contact
LTS
0 to 327.7 KPH
Left Track Speed
RTS
0 to 327.7 KPH
Right Track Speed
SPN Scrolls Through Values
Software
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510509
Service Mode
SMCS - 7490
Diagnostic Example
(1) First display. (2) Second display. (3) Module identifier (MID). (4) Service code indicator (SERV CODE). (5)
Component identifier (CID). (6) Failure Mode identifier (FMI).
Service mode is mode 3 on all machines except shovels. The service mode for shovels is mode 2. The
main display module detects faults that occur with sensor inputs, sender inputs, and main display
module outputs while the main display module is in normal mode. The signal is at the contact of the
main display module. A diagnostic code is detected when the signal is outside a valid range. The main
display module then records the diagnostic code. The diagnostic code remains stored for future
reference when the CID FMI is not present.
The main display module detects diagnostic codes and the main display module diagnoses problems
in the following circuits:
• Display output modules
• Action alarm output
• Action lamp output
• Sensor inputs
• Harness code
Note: The main display module does not detect a diagnostic code for the switch inputs.
Service personnel can see the diagnostic codes and service personnel can troubleshoot the diagnostic
codes when the main display module has detected a CID FMI. All detected problems are shown in the
display area as a diagnostic code. The diagnostic codes can be placed on hold and the diagnostic
codes can be cleared while the main display module is in service mode.
Note: Diagnostic codes from other machine systems under electronic control are shown in the display
area of the main display module when the main display module is in Service Mode. The Cat Data
Link allows the transfer of diagnostic information from other electronic control modules to the main
display module. This diagnostic information is then shown when the main display module is in
service mode. The diagnostic code for faults from other electronic control modules has a MID that is
unique to the control. These diagnostic codes can scroll similarly to the diagnostic codes from the
Caterpillar Monitoring System. See the following description of Module Identifier (MID).
The diagnostics of the Caterpillar Monitoring System are available to assist with the troubleshooting
of diagnostic codes when the main display module is placed in service mode. A diagnostic code is
used to specify each CID FMI. The diagnostic code is made up of three identifiers (MID, CID and
FMI). These identifiers are shown in the display area. The display area continuously changes between
the following identifiers when the diagnostic code is on hold:
Module Identifier (MID) - The MID is a three-digit code that is shown on the display area. The MID
is shown for approximately one second before the diagnostic code that is shown in the same area. The
electronic control module that has diagnosed the problem is logged by the MID. The following
examples are of some MID.
Caterpillar Monitoring System ... 030

Engine Control (ADEM) ... 036
Hydrostatic Electronic Control System ... 079
Machine Control System ... 039
See the table for the Module Identifier (MID) on the Electrical System Schematic for the machine that
is being serviced for the most complete list. To troubleshoot diagnostic codes, use the service manual
for the control that detected the CID FMI.
Component Identifier (CID) - The components that are faulty are noted by the CID. These
components are examples: transmission oil temperature sensor, speed sensor, action lamp and boost
pressure sensor. The CID is a four digit code that is shown on the six digit display area. The CID and
the FMI are shown together after the MID has been displayed. See the table for "Diagnostic Codes
For The Caterpillar Monitoring System" in the Troubleshooting, " Diagnostic Code List". This will
show a list of component identifiers for the main display module.
Failure Mode Identifier (FMI) - The FMI tells the type of failure that has occurred. The following
situations are examples: voltage above normal, current below normal and abnormal frequency. The
FMI is a two digit code that is shown on the six digit display area. The CID and the FMI are shown
after the MID is displayed. The CID and the FMI are separated by a decimal point ".". See the table
for "Detected Faults" in Troubleshooting, "Diagnostic Code List". This table will show a list of failure
mode identifiers for the main display module.
When the main display module enters the service mode, the MID, the CID, and the FMI are shown.
At this time, the diagnostic code that is shown is on hold. The display area continuously changes
between the following identifiers when the diagnostic code is on hold: MID, CID and FMI. This is
maintained as long as the service and clear inputs remain open. Troubleshooting is performed while
the diagnostic code is on hold.
Note: The display shows "- - -" when the main display module has no diagnostic codes.
All diagnostic codes are shown one at a time in the display area when the diagnostic codes are
scrolling. Grounding the service input causes the display to scroll when the main display module is in
service mode. This will momentarily show the MID. The display will show the CID and the FMI that
corresponds. Removing ground from the service input stops the scrolling when the diagnostic code
that is desired is shown. The diagnostic code that is shown is now on hold.
Note: The diagnostic codes from other electronic control modules can be shown on the display. Use
the same procedure in order to place the diagnostic codes on hold.
Troubleshooting Intermittent Diagnostic Codes
Diagnostics are provided in order to assist service personnel during troubleshooting of intermittent
problems. The service code indicator (SERV CODE) is shown when the diagnostic code is present.
This can aid in troubleshooting of an intermittent CID FMI. Gently shaking the harness connectors
will aid the checking of intermittent diagnostic codes. The service code indicator changes from
"SERV CODE" that is OFF to "SERV CODE" that is ON. This will occur when the CID FMI changes
status. The action alarm SOUNDS briefly during the change of status when the diagnostic code is on
hold for a CID FMI. These diagnostics signal the service personnel while inspections are performed.
These diagnostics assist in troubleshooting intermittent problems by one service person.
A diagnostic code is removed from the memory of the main display module when the diagnostic code
has been cleared. When a CID FMI is corrected, it is necessary to remove the corresponding
diagnostic code from the memory of the main display module. In order to remove the diagnostic code
from the memory, place the diagnostic code on hold and ground the clear input. The memory of the
main display module saves a diagnostic code until the code is cleared. The main display module does
not allow clearing of a diagnostic code that corresponds to a CID FMI which is present.
Note: The diagnostic codes from other electronic control modules can be cleared by using the main
display module.
Note: ET can also be used to clear events.

Diagnostic Example
Component identifier (CID). (6) Failure Mode identifier (FMI).
Note: Illustration 2 shows the display from current production machines. The CID is now displayed
as four digits. A decimal point "." has replaced the "F" in the display. The "F" was used to separate
the CID from the FMI. An example of the display is shown in illustration 3.
Diagnostic Example
Component identifier (CID). (6) Failure mode identifier (FMI).
Brief Explanation
Illustration 2 shows a main display module that is currently receiving a signal. This signal is from the
transmission oil temperature sensor and the signal is out of range.
Detailed Explanation
MID (3) - " 030". This code concerns the Caterpillar Monitoring System. The Caterpillar Monitoring
System service manual should be used to troubleshoot the diagnostic code. If the MID that was shown
was "081", the diagnostic code would concern the power train electronic control. The service module
for the power train electronic control should be used to troubleshoot the diagnostic code.
CID (5) - " 0110". This code means that a problem has occurred in the sensor circuit for the engine
coolant temperature of MID "030". See the table "Diagnostic Codes For Caterpillar Monitoring
System" in Troubleshooting, " Diagnostic Code List". This will show a list of the component
identifiers for the Caterpillar Monitoring System.
FMI (6) - " 08". This identifier means that a signal of abnormal frequency, pulse width or period is
being received concerning CID "0110". See the table "Diagnostic Codes For Caterpillar Monitoring
System" in Troubleshooting, " Diagnostic Code List". This table will show a list of failure mode
identifiers for the Caterpillar Monitoring System.
Service code indicator (4) is ON in Illustration 1. When the main display module is in service mode,
the service code indicator (4) functions as a fault present indicator. Therefore, the CID "0110"
diagnostic code is present. The service code indicator changes from ON to OFF when the CID "0110"
diagnostic code changes status. Also, the action alarm sounds when the CID "0110" diagnostic code
changes status. This action will take place while the main display module is in service mode.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510430
Tattletale Mode
SMCS - 7490
Display Area For Tattletale Mode

(6) Tachometer. (7) Speed readout. (8) Transmission gear readout. (9) Display area.
(1) Quad gauge module. (2) Lamp/Gear module. (3) Alert indicators. (4) Main display module. (5) Alert indicators. (6)
Gauges. (7) Mode indicators. (8) Tachometer and Gear display. (9) Display area.
Note: See the table for the Monitoring System Mode. The table is located in the Electrical System
Schematic. Use the table in order to determine the mode number for the machine that is being
serviced.
Tattletale Mode is a tool for management and maintenance. The history of the machine can be
recorded by this mode. The main display module records the extreme value for each condition of the
machine that is monitored. The values come from sensor inputs, switch inputs and the CAT data link.
Tattletale values are updated whenever a value occurs with more importance than the previous value.
These values are ignored for a short period of time after each start-up. This allows the machine
systems to stabilize before the recording of information.
Gauges (5) show the highest reading or lowest reading that has been attained by the corresponding
machine system. The gauges show the highest reading for systems with increasing abnormal values.
The gauges also show the lowest reading for systems with decreasing abnormal values. The gauge
alternates between the highest reading and lowest reading. This will occur for the gauges that are
double ended.
Tachometer (8) shows the highest reading that has been obtained on machines that are equipped with
a lamp/gear module.
Tachometer (6) and speed readout (7) show the highest reading that has been obtained.
Alert indicators (4) turn on when an abnormal condition has existed.
Information from the tattletale is retained until the information is cleared. Grounding the clear input
erases the information. After clearing, all information is reset to a nominal value and the recording of
new extreme values begins.
Note: The date, time or duration of the extreme value that has occurred is not recorded.
Example
This example explains the information that is shown in the illustration for the Tattletale Mode.
• Gauge (5) for the engine coolant temperature has a pointer that indicates a value above the
normal temperature range. Therefore, a high abnormal value has existed in this system.
• Gauge (5) for the brake air pressure has a pointer that indicates a value below the normal
pressure range. Therefore, a low abnormal value has existed in this system.
• Gauge (5) for the brake oil temperature has a pointer that indicates a value in the normal range.
Therefore, no abnormal value has existed in these systems.
• Gauge (5) for the fuel level has a pointer that indicates a level of 50%. Therefore, the lowest
amount of fuel that has existed is 50%.
• The pointer on tachometer (6) indicates a maximum value (2100 RPM). Therefore, an engine
speed of 2100 rpm has existed.
• Speed readout (7) shows "13 MPH". Therefore, 13 MPH is the highest ground speed that has
been attained.
• Alert indicator (4) is ON. Therefore, an abnormal condition has existed in this system.
• All other alert indicators (4) are OFF. Therefore, no abnormal values have existed in these
systems.
Note: No information from the tattletale mode is stored for the highest transmission gear or lowest
transmission gear that has been selected.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510658
Digital Tattletale Mode

SMCS - 7490
Display Area
Digital tattletale mode is a management and a maintenance tool. This mode is useful for the tracking
of the history of the machine. The main display module records the extreme value for each condition
of the machine that is being monitored. The values come from sensor inputs, switch inputs and the
CAT data link. The digital tattletale values are updated when an extreme value occurs and the value is
a more extreme value. These values are ignored for sixty seconds after each start-up. This allows the
machine systems to stabilize before the recording of information.
In this mode, the worst case conditions that have taken place are displayed. Use the "CLEAR" switch
to reset all of the information in this mode.
Display Area
Example Of A Display
To look at the digital gauge data, use the "SCROLL" switch. The scrolling feature is similar to the
numeric readout mode. The description has two outside dashes on the display. The scrolling will
follow this pattern: Gauge 1, Gauge 2, Gauge 3, Gauge 4 and tachometer.
Machines that are equipped with the lamp/gear module have a different pattern for scrolling. The
scrolling will follow this pattern: Gauge 1, Gauge 2, Gauge 3, Gauge 4, Gauge 5, Gauge 6 and engine
speed on lamp/gear module.
The value that is displayed is the worst reading since the mode has been cleared last. When you are
looking at a single gauge none of the indicators will be on. Only that one gauge will be on. The clear
switch will only clear the value that is being viewed. When the value is cleared, the display will then
flash a value outside the expected range.
Note: When an extreme value occurs, the date and time is not recorded.
Note: No information is stored for the highest gear or the lowest gear that has been selected.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02511542
Units Mode
SMCS - 7490
(1) Speedometer/tachometer module. (2) Main display module. (3) Odometer units. (4) Speed readout. (5) Speedometer
units. (6) Display area. (7) Six digit display area.
The units mode is used to toggle the displays of the monitoring system between US and Metric units
of measure. When the main display module enters units mode, six digit display area (7) shows the
current setting. The display reads "US" when the mode is set to US units. The display reads "SI" when
the mode is set to Metric units.
When the units mode is set to US units, the main display module shows "MILES" on display area (6)
when the main display module is in odometer mode. The display for the speedometer/tachometer
module shows "MPH". The display area (6) shows "KM" when the main display module is set to
Metric units. The display for the speedometer/tachometer module shows "km/h".
In order to toggle the units, ground the clear input while the service input is open. The units
continuously toggle when the clear input is grounded. In order to set the main display module, open
both of the inputs.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02713330
Calibration Mode
SMCS - 7490
Calibration mode is used on some machines in order to perform special functions of calibration. The
operation of calibration mode will vary depending on the machine and the system that is being
calibrated. There can be more than one calibration mode per application. The Service Manual Module
for the controls that require calibration mode should be used to determine the operation. Refer to
Table 1 for EMS Calibration Error Codes.
Table 1
EMS Calibration Error Codes
Error Code Description
E01 Active Clutch Solenoid or Speed Sensor Fault
E02 Engine Speed Not Zero
E03 Sensor Calibration failure
E04 Transmission Direction Lever is Not In Neutral
E05 Transmission Oil Temp Below Threshold (60C)
E06 Engine RPM Incorrect
E07 Parking Brake is not On
E08 Active Sensor CID 299 Fault
E09 Machine Speed Not Zero
E10 Service Brake Pedal Pressed
E11 Hydraulic Oil Temp Not within limits
E12 Engine Speed Not at High Idle (>1800 RPM)
E13 Engine Speed Not at Low Idle (<1000 RPM)
E14 Implement Lockout Switch Not in the Locked Position.
E15 Implement Lockout Switch Not in the Not Locked Position
E16 Transmission Direction Lever Not in Forward
E17 EMS Calibration Aborted
E18 Parking Brake Engaged
E19 Engine RPM Incorrect
E21 Transmission Clutch 1 At A Limit
E26 Another Calibration is active
E27 Calibration active by another ECM
E28 Calibration aborted by tool/monitor
E29 Transmission oil temp too high
E30 Torque converter output speed too low
E31 Torque converter ratio unstable
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i06181716
Warning Operation
SMCS - 7490
Table 1
WARNING OPERATION
Warning Indications (1)
Alert Action Action
Warning Indicator Lamp Alarm Required Operator
Category Flashes (3) Flashes Sounds Action Possible Result (2)
1 X No immediate action No harmful or
required. The system damaging effects.
needs attention soon.
2 X X Change machine Severe damage to
operation or perform components.
maintenance to the
system.
Immediately change Severe damage to
2-S X X X (4) the machine machine
operation. components.
3 X X X (5) None. Engine will Operator injury or
immediately perform severe damage to
a safe shutdown. components.
(1)
The warning indications which are active, are marked with an "X".
(2)
This is the possible result if no operator action is taken.
(3)
At a 10 Hz rate.
(4)
The alarm is on continuously.
(5)
Pulsating alarm.
Quad Gauge Module
(1) Gauge warning area.
(2) Pictograph symbol.
Speedometer/Tachometer Module
(3) Tachometer.
(4) Pictograph symbol.
(5) Ground speed readout.
(6) Transmission gear readout.
Main Display Module
(7) Alert indicator.
(8) Display area.
Lamp/Gear Module
(9) Pictograph symbols.
(10) Tachometer.
(11) Transmission gear readout and direction.
The Caterpillar Monitoring System notifies the operator of an immediate problem with a machine
system or an impending problem with a machine system. Warning operation begins, when the main
display module receives a problem signal. The problem signal reflects an abnormal condition of the
machine . Warning operation also begins, when the main display module detects a problem with the
control system. Switches, sensors and other electronic control modules on the machine provide
signals to the main display module. The problem signals are the following conditions:
• An open switch. When a condition exceeds the trip point of the switch, the switch opens.
• A sensor signal exceeds the limits. The main display module determines the limits.
• Another condition is an abnormal condition that is detected by another electronic control

module. The abnormal condition is then communicated over the Cat Data Link to the main
display module.
The main display module analyzes the problem signals. In order to notify the operator of a warning,
the display components on the main display module activate the appropriate warning indication. The
following warning indications will notify the operator:
• The alert indicator FLASHES approximately nine times per second.
• The action lamp FLASHES for one second and the action lamp is OFF for two seconds.
• The action alarm SOUNDS for one second and the action alarm is OFF for two seconds.
• The action alarm SOUNDS continuously when the highest warning level is 2-S.
Note: In order to activate warning indications, more than one input is required. The main display
module decides when the warning indications are activated.
Problems from the machine system are classified into three warning categories. The categories are
based on the severity of the problem. The categories also dictate the required response of the operator.
Warning category 1 represents the least severe problem and warning category 3 represents the most
severe problem. The warning categories are identified for the operator according to the combination
of warning indications that are active. See the table for Warning Operation.
Note: See the Operation And Maintenance Manual for complete information on the Warning
Operation.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02713322
Alert Indicator Description

SMCS - 7490
Alert indicators are used to notify the operator of an abnormal condition. The following illustrations
show the arrangement of the alert indicators for each specified model.
Alert Indicators For D5M, PSDD D5M, and D6M
(3) Low Fuel Level
Alert Indicators For D6R, PSDD D6R, D7R D/S, D7R C/B And 572R (S/N: 2HZ)
(3) Low Fuel Level

Alert Indicators For D8R
(4) Starting Aid
(6) Braking System
(8) Engine Status

(9) Not Used
Lamp/Gear Alert Indicators For D8R And 572R (S/N: DSC)
(1) Engine Oil Pressure
(2) Charging System
(3) High Inlet Manifold Temperature
(4) Fuel Level
(9) Auto Kickdown Switch

Alert Indicators For D9R HEUI C/B (ACL)

Alert Indicators For D9R HEUI C/B

Alert Indicators For D9R HEUI D/S (ABK)

Alert Indicators For D9R HEUI D/S

Alert Indicators For D9R MECH D/S

Alert Indicators For D9R MECH C/B

Alert Indicators For D10R and D11R

Alert Indicators For 953C and 963C
(1) High Engine Coolant Temperature
(4) Charge Pressure Status
(5) High Gear Box Oil Temperature
(6) High Hydraulic Oil Temperature
(8) Transmission System Status
(9) Low Fuel Level

Alert Indicators For 973C
(1) Engine coolant temperature
(2) Power train oil temperature
(3) Engine oil pressure
(4) Air inlet heater
(5) Charge pressure
(6) Gearbox oil temperature
(7) Implement oil temperature
(8) Charging system
(9) Transmission system
(10) Fuel level

Lamp/Gear Alert Indicators For D5N, D6N C/B, And D6N D/S
(1) Low Fuel Level
(2) Engine Coolant Level Status
(7) Auto Kick-Down

Alert Indicators For D6N D/S
(1) Low & High Fuel Pressure
(3) Power Train Oil Filter Pressure Restriction
(4) Power train Oil Temperature
(5) Charging System
(6) Hydraulic Oil Filter Restriction
(7) Braking System Check
(10) Parking Brake

Alert Indicators For D6N C/B And D5N
(1) Low & High Fuel Pressure
(4) Power Train Oil Temperature
(5) Charging System
(6) Steering System Check
(7) Braking System Check
(10) Parking Brake

Alert Indicators for the 953C (S/N: BBX), 963C (S/N: BBD).
(1) Low Fuel Pressure
(2) Low Fuel Level
(4) Low Engine Coolant Level
(5) Charge Pressure
(8) Charging System

Alert Indicators for the 973C (S/N: BCP)
(2) Low Fuel Level
(4) Gearbox Oil Temperature
(5) Charge Pressure
(8) Charging System

(1) Low Fuel Level
(2) Starting Aid
(9) Auto Kick-Down

Alert Indicators For The 572RIIDSC302-UP
(2) Power Train Oil Filter Restriction
(3) Starting Aid
(8) Implement Lockout Stratus

Additional Alert Indicators That Are Located On The Dash For 953C (BBX), 963C (BBD), And 973C (BCP)
(11) Fuel Level
(12) Engine Coolant Level
Alert Indicators for the D6RIII and D6T EMS Overlay
(3) Powertrain Oil Filter Restriction
(4) Wait to Start

(5) High Transmission Lube Oil Temperature
(8) Engine Status
(9) Implement System Status
Alert Indicators for the D7RII
(2) Powertrain Oil Filter Restriction
(5) Engine Status
(6) Implement System Status

Charging System Status - The light
indicates that battery voltage is outside
the range of 24.8 to 29.5 VDC. While
the engine is running, the light also turns
on when the alternator frequency is
below 90 Hz. In addition to this
indicator lighting, the action alarm will
also activate when the battery voltage
falls below 23 DCV or the battery
voltage rises above 32 DCV.
Starting Aid - During the time this

lamp is active, the injector solenoids are
bing activated in order to warm the oil
that is in the injectors. The rapid
actuation of the solenoids will produce
a buzzing noise that can be heard
outside the engine. This is a normal
condition. The lamp will run for 20
seconds at −9 °C (15.8 °F) and 30
seconds at −18 °C (−0.4 °F). During
this time it is better to wait for the lamp
to deactivate before attempting to start
the engine though no damage will be
done if cranking is performed.
Low Engine Coolant Flow - The light

indicates that the engine coolant is not
flowing. The status is determined by the
coolant flow switch on machines with
mechanically governed engines.
Engine Coolant Level Status - This

light indicates the status of the engine
coolant level.
High Inlet Manifold Temperature -

The light indicates that the Engine ECM
has detected a condition for high inlet
manifold temperature. This information
is received from the engine ECM.
Low Engine Oil Pressure - This light

indicates that the engine oil pressure is
low. This is determined by the engine
oil pressure switch. The indicator lights
when the switch voltage is high or the
switch voltage is floating.
High Engine Coolant Temperature -
This light indicates that the coolant
temperature has risen above 107 °C. The
indicator turns off when the temperature
drops below 104 °C. This information is
received from the hydrostatic
transmission control via the CAT data
link.
Air Filter Restriction - This application

is used with HEUI engines. The light
indicates that the air filter is restricted.
The status is received from the engine
ECM via the CAT data link.
Check Engine Status - This application

is used with HEUI engines. The light
indicates that the engine system requires
service. The status is received from the
engine ECM via the CAT data link.
Air Inlet Heater - This light

indicates whether the heater is
on or off. If the light is
flashing, the heater is on.
Charging System Status - The light

indicates that the battery voltage is
outside the range of 24.8 to 29.5 VDC.
While the engine is running, the light
also turns on when the alternator
frequency is below 90 Hz. In addition to
this indicator lighting, the action alarm
will also activate when battery voltage
falls below 23 DCV or the battery
voltage rises above 32 DCV.
Gearbox Oil Temperature - 973C

BCP This light indicates that the
gearbox oil temperature is greater than
115 °C. The temperature is received
from the gearbox oil temperature sensor.
High Power Train Oil Temperature -

973C "top row" This light indicates
that the power train oil temperature is
greater than 95 °C. The temperature is
received from the power train oil
temperature sensor.
High Implement Oil Temperature -
973C "bottom row" This light
indicates that the implement oil
temperature is greater than 102 °C. The
temperature is received from the
implement oil temperature sensor.
Transmission System Status - This

light indicates the warning level of the
transmission system. The status is
received from the hydrostatic
transmission control via the CAT data
link.
Power Train Filter

Restriction - This light
indicates that the power train
filter is restricted. The power
train filter switch and the power
train oil temperature sensor
control this indicator. The
warning light will come on
when the oil temperature is
greater than 52 °C and the
switch indicates that the filter is
plugged.
High Hydraulic Oil

Temperature - This light
indicates that the hydraulic oil
temperature is greater than 100
°C. The temperature is received
from the hydraulic oil
temperature sensor.
Hydraulic
Oil Filter
Restriction
- This light
indicates
that the
hydraulic
oil filter is
restricted.
The
hydraulic
oil
temperature
sensor
controls
this
indicator.
The
warning
light will
come on
when the
oil
temperature
is greater
than 38°C.
Parking Brake Engaged - The light

indicates that the parking brake is
engaged. Parking brake status is
received over the data link. The
information is used to modify the
warning level of this indicator. If the
machine is in neutral, only the indicator
lights. If the machine is in a forward
gear or a reverse gear, the action lamp
activates and the action alarm activates.
Braking
System
Status -
This
light
indicates
the
warning
level of
the
braking
system.
The
status is
received
via the
CAT
data
link.
Low Fuel Level - This light indicates

low fuel.
Low & High Fuel Pressure - This

light indicates that the fuel pressure is
high. This light also indicates that the
fuel pressure is low.
Bidirectional shift switch 1 - The light
indicates that the "bidirectional shift
switch 1" is active. The information is
received by the Caterpillar Monitoring
system from the Transmission ECM via
the CAT data link. The indicator lights
remain ON. The indicator light does not
flash.

flash.

flash.
Auto Kickdown Switch - The light

indicates that the Auto kickdown switch
is active. The light will come ON when
the switch voltage is high or floating.
The information is received by the
Caterpillar Monitoring system from the
Transmission ECM via the CAT data
link. The indicator lights remain ON.
The indicator light does not flash.
Auto Kick-Down Switch - The light

indicates that the Auto kickdown switch
is active. The light will come ON when
the switch voltage is high or floating.
The information is received by the
Caterpillar Monitoring system from the
Transmission ECM via the CAT data
link. The indicator lights remain ON.
The indicator light does not flash.
Implement Lockout Switch - The light

indicates that the Implement Lockout
switch is active. The information is
flash.
Transmission System Status - The

light indicates that one or more of the
functions for the power train is not
working properly. The information is
flash.
Steering System Status - This light

indicates the warning level of the
steering system. The status is received
via the CAT data link.
Charge Pressure Status - This

light indicates the warning
level of the hydrostatic
transmission control. The
warning light will come on in
three different situations. The
first situation has the following
conditions: The hydraulic oil
temperature is below −2 °C
(28°F). The speed/direction
control lever is in the
NEUTRAL position. The
charge pressure is below 150
kPa (22 psi). The warning will
be cleared when the charge
pressure rises above 220 kPa
(32 psi). The second situation
has the following conditions:
The hydraulic oil temperature
is above −2 °C (28°F). The
speed/direction control lever is
in the NEUTRAL position. The
(55 psi). The third situation has
the following conditions: The
speed/direction control lever is
in the NEUTRAL position. The
(233 psi).
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510648
SMCS - 7490
Three modules constitute the Caterpillar Monitoring System: main display module, quad gauge
module and speedometer/tachometer module. All of the following electrical components are not
present on every machine. The main display module recognizes the machine and the components that
are present. For the location of the electrical components, see the Electrical System Schematic in the
Service Manual for the machine.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510640
Main Display Module

SMCS - 7490
Main Display Module
(1) Alert Indicators. (2) Display area.
The main display module continuously monitors all machine systems. The main display module
makes decisions that are based upon the input from the machine systems or other electronic control
modules. The main display module sends information to other electronic controls on the machine. The
input and output of this information takes place over the CAT data link. The outputs on the main
display module notify the operator and the service person of the status of the machine systems. The
following outputs are on the Caterpillar Monitoring System: the quad gauge, the
speedometer/tachometer electronic module, the main display module, the action lamp and the action
alarm. A connector with 40 contacts is located on the rear of the module. This connector connects the
necessary harness wiring to the inputs and outputs. For a complete description of the connector, see
Testing And Adjusting, "Connector Contact Description of Main Display Module".
Input/Output
CAT Data Link
The CAT data link (connector contacts 5 and 14) is used to communicate with other electronic control
modules on the machine. The CAT data link is bidirectional. This allows the modules to input the
information. Also, the modules can output the information. This permits sharing of information such
as engine oil pressure, harness codes and diagnostics.
Display Data Link

The display data link (connector contacts 15, 25 and 35) provides the electrical signals in order to
operate the speedometer/tachometer module and the quad guage module. These display modules
provide information about the machine systems to the operator. Each module and each display
indicator is identified by an identifier or an address. Data is continuously output from the main
display module to the other display modules. The module that is addressed returns the data to the
main display module. This confirms the receipt of the data.
Inputs
The operation and the status of the machine is transferred from the inputs to the main display module.
Three types of inputs exist: switch type input, sensor type input and sender type input. Switches and
harness wiring provide a ground or an open signal to the switch inputs. Sensors provide a changing
signal to the sensor inputs of the main display module. Senders provide a changing resistance to the
sender inputs of the main display module.
Some of the inputs are multipurpose. The inputs can be used for switches, sensors, or senders. The
following examples are of multipurpose inputs: Connector contacts 7, 17, 27 and 37 may be either
switch inputs or PWM sensor inputs., Connector contacts 9 and 18 may be either switch inputs or 0 to
240 ohm sender inputs. and Connector contacts 8, 10, 28 and 38 may be switch inputs, PWM sensor
inputs, or 70 to 800 ohm sender inputs. These inputs are programmed at the time of installation in
order to define the components that are monitored. In order to determine the inputs on the main
display module that are programmed, see the Electrical System Schematic in the Service Manual.
Uncommitted Switch Inputs

The uncommitted switch inputs (connector contacts 11, 19, 20, 21, 29, 32, 39, and 40) provide the
information that is used in order to operate the ten alert indicators. The alert indicators are part of the
outputs on the main display module. These switch inputs may be programmed at the time of
installation to work independently. The switch inputs may be programmed with other switch inputs
and/or sensor inputs. The switch inputs will operate an alarm indicator. The input will determine the
appropriate warning category (1, 2 or 3). During normal operation, these switch inputs are closed to
ground. The grounded inputs tell the main display module that the conditions of the system are
normal and no alert indicators should be ON. These inputs receive information from the following
switches that are located within the machine systems: pressure, temperature, flow, level and
mechanical.
Other inputs for the main display module may be programmed at the time of installation in order to
function as uncommitted switch inputs. For more information, see the topics "PWM Sensor Inputs ",
"Sender Inputs 0 to 240 ohm" and "Sender Inputs 70 to 800 ohm".
Any one of the switch inputs may be programmed to operate from an operator switch that is used to
operate the display area on the main display module. For the location of this switch input, see the
wiring diagram for the machine. For information on the operation of this switch, see System
Operation, "Normal Mode".
Note: The alert indicators may also be programmed to operate from sensor inputs. One of the ten alert
indicators is normally dedicated to the charging system. The system uses the input for the battery
power and the input for the alternator terminal "R".
Programming Switch Inputs

The operation of the main display module is determined by the programming of the switch inputs
(connector pins 3, 6, 12, 16, 22 and 31). The main display module operates in a manner that
corresponds to the open state or the grounded state of the programming switch inputs. These inputs
receive information from a permanent connection or a harness code connector within the harness
wiring. The inputs for the programming switch consist of the information from the harness code.
The inputs from the harness code switch tell the main display module the machine model. Information
of the model is necessary because of the differences in the machines. Information from the machine is
necessary for the main display module to make decisions.
Service Switch Inputs

The inputs from the service switch (connector contacts 23 and 33) control the setup, the mode of
operation, and certain diagnostic functions. Grounding the service input (connector contact 23) and
clearing the input (connector contact 33) at the same time will initiate a change in the monitoring
system mode of operation. Removing ground from these two inputs locks the main display module in
the selected mode. Other diagnostic functions are also performed when the service inputs are
grounded and/or opened at the proper time. For more information, see System Operation, "Modes Of
Operation".
PWM Sensor Inputs

Each PWM sensor input (connector contacts 7, 17, 27 and 37) may be programmed in order to operate
as either a sensor input or a switch input.
A PWM signal is present when the sensor input is programmed to operate as a PWM sensor input. A
PWM signal represents the condition of a machine system. As the condition of the machine changes,
the duty cycle of the signal changes. The duty cycle is determined by comparing the time period when
the signal is ON to the time period for the OFF signal. The frequency of the signal is constant. The
following examples are conditions that are monitored: temperature, pressure and level. The main
display module measures the duty cycle of the output for the PWM sensor. The information is then
sent to the quad gauge in order to be shown on one of the gauges.
Note: See "Uncommitted Switch Input " for the proper operation for switch inputs when the PWM
sensor input is programmed to operate as a switch input. Use the Electrical System Schematic of the
machine that is being serviced in order to determine the inputs that are programmed.
Note: The input from the PWM sensor may be programmed to operate a gauge or an alarm indicator.
The sensor can also be programmed to operate both a gauge and an alarm indicator.
Frequency Sensor Input
At each frequency sensor input (connector contacts 26, 30 and 36), an AC signal is present. The signal
represents the speed of a machine system. Frequency sensors for engine speed and machine speed
provide an AC signal to the main display module. The main display module measures the frequency
(Hz) of the AC signals. The information is then sent to the speedometer/tachometer electronic
module.
At the input for the alternator terminal "R" (connector contact 30), the terminal "R" of the alternator
provides an AC signal to the main display module. The main display module determines the speed of
the alternator by measuring the frequency (Hz) of the AC signal. The alternator R terminal helps
determine the condition of the electrical charging system. Harness wiring directly connects the
alternator terminal "R" to the sensor input for the alternator "R". The information on the alternator
terminal "R" is used with other inputs (engine oil pressure, engine speed, etc) in order to determine
when the engine is running.
Sender Input 0 to 240 Ohm

Each 0 to 240 ohm sender input (connector contacts 9 and 18) may be programmed in order to operate
as either a sender input or a switch input.
A sender input measures a resistance value in order to determine the condition of the system. The fuel
level sender or a component with a similar output signal provides this information. The output
resistance of the fuel level sender corresponds to the depth of fuel within the tank. The main display
module measures the resistance value. The information is then sent to the quad gauge in order to be
shown on one of the gauges.
Note: See "Uncommitted Switch Input " for the proper operation for the inputs when the 0 to 240
ohm sender input is programmed to operate as a switch input. Use the Electrical System Schematic of
the machine that is being serviced in order to determine the inputs that are programmed.
Note: The 0 to 240 ohm sender input may be programmed to operate as a gauge or the sender input
can be programmed to operate as an alarm indicator. The sensor can also be programmed to operate
both a gauge and an alarm indicator.
Sender Input 70 to 800 Ohm

Each 70 to 800 ohm sender input (connector contacts 8, 10, 28 and 38) may be programmed in order
to operate as a sender input, a PWM sensor input or a switch input.
The 70 to 800 ohm sender input measures a resistance value in order to read the condition of the
system. The temperature sender or a component with a similar output signal provides this information.
The output resistance of the temperature sender corresponds to the temperature of the fluid that is
being measured. Oil, coolant and hydraulic temperature are examples of fluid temperatures that are
measured. The main display module measures the resistance value. The information is then sent to the
quad gauge in order to be shown on one of the gauges.
Note: The 70 to 800 ohm sender input may be programmed to operate as a gauge or the sender input
can be programmed to operate as an alarm indicator. The sensor can also be programmed to operate
both a gauge and an alarm indicator.
Note: See "PWM Sensor Inputs " for the proper operation for the inputs when the 70 to 800 ohm
sender input is programmed to operate as a PWM sensor input. Use the Electrical System Schematic
of the machine that is being serviced in order to determine the inputs that are programmed.
Note: See "Uncommitted Switch Input " for the proper operation for the inputs when the 70 to 800
ohm sender input is programmed to operate as a switch input. Use the Electrical System Schematic of
the machine that is being serviced in order to determine the inputs that are programmed.
Input Voltage
The input for battery voltage (connector contact 1 and 2) provides the main display module with
power. The voltage input is also used by the main display module to monitor the machine electrical
system. This information from the voltage helps determine the condition of the electrical system.
When an alert indicator is used in order to indicate the voltage of the machine system, the battery
signal is combined with the signal for the terminal "R" within the main display module. When an
electrical system fault occurs, there are two possible warning categories. The category is set by the
type of fault.
Category 1 - The frequency for the terminal "R" from the alternator is less than 90 Hz or the system
voltage is greater than 29.5 volts for at least 2 seconds. The system voltage is less than 24.8 volts for 2
seconds or more.
Category 3 - The system voltage is less than 23.0 volts for 2 seconds or more. The system voltage is
greater than 32.0 volts for at least 2 seconds.
Outputs
Main Display Module
(1) Alert Indicators. (2) Display area.

Lamp/Gear Module
(9) Operation mode and Alert indicators
(10) Tachometer
(11) Transmission gear readout and direction
The outputs of the Caterpillar Monitoring System notify the operator of the status of the machine
systems. The main display module provides electrical power for the other display modules and
sensors.
The following outputs are on the Caterpillar Monitoring System: the display for the main display
module, the display data link, the alert indicators, the action lamp, the action alarm, the sensor power
supply and the power supply for the main display module.
The outputs on the main display module are the alert indicators (1) and the display area (2) .
The alert indicators notify the operator of abnormal conditions with the machine. The main display
module uses the status of the uncommitted switch inputs, sender inputs and/or sensor inputs in order
to determine when an abnormal condition is present. The main display module then FLASHES the
appropriate alert indicator. The symbol of the FLASHING alert indicator identifies the responsible
machine system. When an alert indicator FLASHES, an abnormal condition exists. For more
information, see System Operation, "Warning Operation".
Note: The main display module may use a combination of inputs in order to determine abnormal
conditions. For example, engine oil pressure and engine rpm may be used to enable the alert indicator
for the machine electrical system. The alert indicator for the machine electrical system will FLASH if
an abnormal condition exists on the input for the terminal "R" or the input for +battery.
The display area has various symbols that show the condition of the machine systems. The symbols
also show information for service and setup. The type of information that is shown on the display
depends on the operating mode. For more information about the display area, see System Operation,
"Modes of Operation".
Action Lamp
When a serious abnormal condition exists, the main display module activates the output for the action
lamp (connector contact 13) and the action lamp FLASHES. For more information, see System
Operation, "Warning Operation".
Action Alarm
When a critical abnormal condition exists, the main display module activates the output for the action
alarm (connector contact 4) and the action alarm SOUNDS. For more information, see System
Operation, "Warning Operation".
Output for the Sensor Power Supply

The output for the sensor power supply (connector contact 24) provides 8 DCV for the PWM sensors
that are connected to the inputs of the main display module.
Power Supply Output for the Display Modules

The output for the power supply to the display module (connector contact 34) provides 9 DCV for the
display modules. The quad gauge module and the speedometer/tachometer module cannot function
without this power output.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510644
Switches
SMCS - 1435; 7332
Switches provide information (input) to the main display module. Switches are two state devices. The
two states of the switches are open and closed.
Closed - The switch connects the control input to frame ground.
Open - The switch connects the control input to nothing. (The input is floating.)
During normal operation, all the switches are closed to ground. When a condition exceeds the trip
point of the switch, the switch opens. This tells the main display module of the abnormal condition.
The main display module then begins the warning operation and the module notifies the operator of
the abnormal condition (problem).
Note: For specifications on the switches, see the Electrical System Schematic for that particular
machine.
Pressure Switch (Engine Oil)

Pressure Switch (Engine Oil)
(1) Switch. (2) Schematic symbol.
During normal operation, engine oil pressure switch (1) is closed to ground. The switch opens when
the engine oil pressure is less than the specified value for the switch. The open switch tells the main
display module that there is low engine oil pressure. Then, the module tells the operator that there is
low engine oil pressure. The switch is open when the switch is off the machine.
Pressure Switch (Filter)
Pressure Switch (Filter)
Filter pressure switch (1) has a plunger within the switch that closes the contacts with an acceptable
pressure drop across the filter. During normal operation, the switch grounds the signal circuit. When
the pressure across the filter is greater than the specified value, the switch plunger moves and the
switch plunger allows the switch contacts to open. The open switch tells the main display module that
the filter is dirty. The switch is open when the switch is off the machine.
Note: The main display module also considers the fluid temperature before notifying the operator.
Cold fluid has a higher viscosity which causes a higher differential pressure than fluid at a normal
temperature. The operator is not notified when a filter bypass occurs with a cold fluid. Temperature
inhibits are not used with the fuel filter.
Rocker Switch (Operator Mode Selector)

Grounding the operator mode selector switch causes the main display module to scroll through the
available operator modes for the machine. Opening the selector switch places the Caterpillar
Monitoring System in the currently displayed operator mode. A list of possible operator modes is
shown at the beginning of the Modes of Operation section. See the Operation And Maintenance
Manual in order to determine the "Operator Modes" that are available for the machine that is being
serviced.
Temperature Switch
Temperature Switch
A machine may have more than one temperature switch. During normal operation, temperature switch
(1) is closed to ground. The switch opens when the temperature of the fluid system is greater than the
specified value. The open switch tells the main display module that there is a high temperature. The
switch is closed when the switch is off the machine.
Level Switch (Coolant)
Level Switch (Coolant)
(1) Switch. (2) Schematic symbol. (3) Plastic sleeve. (See the note.)
The coolant level switch is an electronic switch that is activated by coolant. During normal operation,
coolant level switch (1) is closed to ground. The switch opens when the coolant level is too low. The
open switch tells the main display module that there is a low coolant level in the cooling system. The
switch has a connector with three contacts. Contact "A" connects to the +8 DCV sensor power from
the main display module. Contact "B" connects to ground and contact "C" (switch output) connects to
an input on the main display module. The switch is open when the switch is off the machine. The
switch cannot be tested when the switch is off the machine. See Testing And Adjusting for more
information.
Note: DO NOT remove the plastic sleeve (3) from the probe. The plastic sleeve is required for proper
operation of the switch.
Pressure Switch (Brake Oil)

Pressure Switch (Brake Oil)
During normal operation, brake oil pressure switch (1) is closed to ground. The switch opens when
the brake oil pressure is less than the specified value for the switch. The open switch tells the main
display module that there is low brake oil pressure. Then, the module tells the operator that there is
low brake oil pressure. The switch is open when the switch is off the machine.
Pressure Switch (Steering)
Pressure Switch (Steering)
During normal operation, steering pressure switch (1) is closed to ground. The switch opens when the
pressure in the steering system is less than the specified value for the switch. The open switch tells the
main display module that there is low steering oil pressure. Then, the module tells the operator that
there is low steering oil pressure. The switch is open when the switch is off the machine.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510499
Senders
SMCS - 1408-UN
Level Sender (Fuel)
Level Sender (Fuel)
(1) Sender. (2) Schematic symbol.
Fuel level sender (1) provides fuel level sensing. A resistive signal which corresponds to the depth of
fuel within the fuel tank is sent from the sender to the main display module. Typically, there are two
possible types of senders: 0 to 90 ohms and 33 to 240 ohms. The main display module measures the
resistance value in order to determine the fuel that is remaining in the tank. Typical gauge readings for
the fuel level:
• When the fuel tank is at 4% of capacity, the gauge shows that the tank is empty.
• When the fuel tank is at 14% of capacity, the gauge shows the needle at the red zone on the
gauge.
• When the fuel tank is at 77% of capacity, the gauge shows that the tank is full.
Temperature Sender
Temperature Sender
(1) Schematic symbol. (2) Sender.
Temperature sender (2) provides a method for sensing fluid temperature. The temperature sender
produces a resistive signal which corresponds to the temperature of the fluid that is being monitored.
Typically, the resistance range of the sender is from 70 ohms at 110°C (230°F) to 3000 ohms at 25°C
(77°F). The main display module measures the resistance value in order to determine the fluid
temperature.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510500
Sensors
SMCS - 1408-NS
General Information
Sensors provide information (input) to the main display module about changing conditions. The
sensor signal changes in a proportional manner in order to reflect the changing condition. The main
display module shows the sensor information on the gauges. The main display module recognizes two
types of sensor signals.
Frequency - The sensor produces an AC signal. The frequency (Hz) will vary as the condition
changes.
Pulse width modulated - The sensor produces a digital signal. The duty cycle will vary as the
condition changes. The frequency of this signal is constant.
Frequency Sensors
Frequency sensors produce an AC signal. The frequency (Hz) will vary as the condition changes.
Speed Sensor
Speed Sensor
(1) Sensor. (2) Schematic symbol.
Speed sensor (1) is a frequency sensor. Speed sensors are used in order to measure engine RPM. The
Speed sensors are also used in order to measure the machine MPH (km/h). The sensor will generate
an AC signal. The sensor recognizes the gear teeth as the teeth are passing. The signal is sent to the
main display module. The main display module measures the sensor frequency (one pulse per gear
tooth). The main display module then determines the signal that is being processed. The main display
module displays either the engine speed or the machine speed.
The engine speed sensor is located on the flywheel housing. The machine speed sensor is located at
the output end of the transmission housing.
Pulse Width Modulated Sensors (PWM Sensors)

Pulse Width Modulated Signal
Typical PWM Sensor Schematic
A PWM sensor produces a digital signal. The duty cycle of the signal varies as the condition changes.
The frequency remains constant.
Temperature Sensor
Temperature Sensor
(1) Schematic symbol. (2) Sensor.
Temperature sensor (2) reacts to the temperature of the fluids. Examples of the fluids are hydraulic
oil, power train oil, and engine coolant. The sensor receives operating power from the main display
module (8 DCV) or from the battery (24 DCV). The main display module receives a PWM signal
from the sensor. The PWM signal will change as the fluid temperature changes. The main display
module measures the duty cycle of the sensor signal in order to determine the fluid temperature.
Fuel Level Sensor (Ultrasonic Type)
Fuel Level Sensor (Ultrasonic Type)
(1) Schematic symbol. (2) Float. (3) Guide tube. (4) Sensor.
The fuel level sensor (4) reacts to the level of the fuel in the fuel tank. The fuel level sensor (4) emits
an ultrasonic signal. The signal is emitted up the guide tube (3). The ultrasonic signal is reflected off a
metal disk on the bottom of float (2) and the signal returns to the sensor. The sensor measures the time
that is required for the ultrasonic signal to travel from the sensor to the float and then back to the
sensor. The sensor also measures the level of the fuel. The open status or the grounded status of
contact 3 tells the sensor whether the sensor is installed in a deep tank or the sensor is installed in a
shallow tank. Contact 3 is open if the maximum depth of the tank is 2286 mm (90 inch). Contact 3 is
grounded if the maximum depth of the tank is 1150 mm (45 inch). The sensor receives the operating
power from the machine electrical system. The main display module receives a PWM signal from the
sensor. The signal will change as the fuel level changes. The main display module measures the duty
cycle of the sensor signal in order to determine the fuel level.
Note: The fuel level sensor cannot be bench tested. The sensor must have fuel in the guide tube (3) in
order to operate properly. The sensor can only be tested while the sensor is installed on the machine.
For specifications and test procedures, see Diagnostic Function, "Pulse Width Modulated Sensor".
Pressure Sensor
Pressure Sensor
The pressure sensor reacts to the pressure of the fluids. The sensor receives operating power from the
main display module (8 DCV) or from the battery (24 DCV). The main display module receives a
PWM signal from the sensor. The signal changes as the fluid pressure changes. The main display
module measures the duty cycle of the sensor signal in order to determine the fluid pressure.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510635
Action Lamp
SMCS - 1408-LMP; 7400-LMP
Action Lamp Symbol
The action lamp connects to an output of the main display module. The action lamp is an LED that is
located within the operator's viewing area. The FLASHING of the action lamp tells the operator that a
condition exists. The condition will require changing the operation of the machine. The action lamp is
located on the main display module. The action lamp will FLASH whenever a warning category 2, a
warning category "2S", or a warning category 3 problem exists.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510637
Action Alarm
SMCS - 7407
Action Alarm
(1) Schematic symbol. (2) Action alarm.
The action alarm connects to an output of the main display module. When the action alarm is audible,
the machine needs immediate attention. A safe machine shutdown is required. The main display
module will sound the action alarm whenever a warning category 3 problem exists. An alarm for a
warning category 3 is a pulsating sound. The alarm for a warning category 2S is a continuous tone.
The action alarm does not operate when the engine is stopped. The main display module uses
functions in order to determine when the engine is running. The following functions are examples:
engine oil pressure, alternator speed and engine speed. If necessary, the action alarm SOUNDS when
the main display module decides that the engine is running.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02510502
Related Components
SMCS - 1408; 7450
Alternator
The R terminal of the alternator is connected to an input of the main display module. The main
display module monitors the frequency at the R terminal of the alternator. This tells the main display
module if the alternator is rotating.
Other Electronic Controls

Some machines have electronic control modules that communicate with the main display module. The
Cat Data Link connects these electronic controls together. This connection allows the sharing of
information. The following information is an example of the information that is shared: engine oil
pressure, harness codes and diagnostic information. For example, an electronic engine control sends
the engine speed information to the main display module over the Cat Data Link. In this situation, the
engine speed sensor is not a Caterpillar Monitoring System component. If there is a problem with the
engine speed sensor, the electronic engine control service manual would be used to troubleshoot the
speed sensor circuit.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
EquipmentManager Dealer Administrator Manual

i03319401
General Information
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Use of this Manual

EquipmentManager provides valuable information that allows remote monitoring of either a single
machine or a fleet of machines. Customers can perform the following tasks if the customer can
provide the location of the machine, Service Meter Unit (SMU), and information about the health of
the machine:
• Manage the location and the basic usage of engines and machines.
• Schedule maintenance that is planned and schedule major repairs.
• Manage fault codes or diagnostic codes.
• Detect problems before problems cause a major component failure.
• Increase the availability and the productivity for the machines by avoiding unexpected
downtime for repairs.
• Identify the need for training in order to improve the efficiency of the operator.
EquipmentManager is part of Dealer Web site and works with other applications such as PartStore
and EquipmentManager. EquipmentManager enables customers to remotely manage fleets. The
customer is alerted to only those machines that need immediate attention.
The "EquipmentManager Dealer Administrator Manual" includes the following information:
• Setting up Product Link Modules (PLM)
• Registering PLM
• Setting up and maintaining the accounts of the customer
• Customizing EquipmentManager for optimum use
• Managing EquipmentManager functions

This manual also provides suggestions for using the features of EquipmentManager.
Assumptions
The "EquipmentManager Dealer Administrator Manual" assumes that the user is a Dealer
Administrator. The"EquipmentManager Dealer Administrator Manual" also assumes the following:
• The user is familiar with Dealer Web site and related applications.
• The user is able to access the dealership's Dealer Web site.
• The user is familiar with using and entering information in forms that are found in web sites,
performing searches on the web, and submitting information via the web.
Terms and Definitions

Table 1 defines common acronyms and terms that are used throughout this manual.
Table 1
Term or
Definition
Acronym
Dealer Web Dealer Web site is an application on the internet that is used to access
site EquipmentManager.
ECM Electronic Control Module
I/O Input/Output
Product Link Module
This on board hardware communicates with any ECM that is on the machine.
PLM
Additionally, the hardware sends information to the satellites and from the
satellites.
PM Preventive Maintenance
SMU Service Meter Units
Scheduled Oil Sampling
This is a program that analyzes samples of fluid. This program is designed to be an
S·O·S
easy way to monitor the impact of maintenance programs, applications, and
operational factors on machine health.
UCID Universal Customer ID
CWS Corporate Web Security
Related Documentation
ReferenceRefer to the following documents for additional EquipmentManager information and
related applications.
• Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting, RENR7911, "Product Link

121SR/321SR"
• Special Instruction, REHS2365, "Product Link PL121SR and PL300 Installation Guide"
• Systems Operation, KENR6303, "EquipmentManager User Manual"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02940596
Getting Started
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
The following provides an overview of EquipmentManager. This overview instructs you on the steps
that are necessary to begin using EquipmentManager in order to manage the life cycle of your
equipment and the equipment of your customers.
There are five steps:
1. Enable EquipmentManager.
2. Verify the records for the machine and the ownership of the machine.
3. Manage the users.
4. Install Product Link Modules.
5. Set up the subscriptions.
Some of the steps that are outlined in this section may be completed in a different order. Following
the steps in the order that is suggested here is recommended strongly by the Caterpillar Dealer
Solution Network (DSN).
Note: Use your web browser to select your preferred language.
Note: Caterpillar does not recommend using software to block popup software while
EquipmentManager is active.
EquipmentManager and the Product Link System

EquipmentManager is an upgrade of a previous application that was known as Product Link Web.
Many of the features of EquipmentManager are similar to this application.
EquipmentManager is an application that is used on the Internet. This application allows you to better
manage the maintenance, health, and utilization of your machines. EquipmentManager uses a
combination of Product Link hardware, satellites, wireless technology, a Caterpillar database, and a
Caterpillar server in order to manage the machines.
Illustration 1 illustrates the EquipmentManager and the Product Link System.
EquipmentManager and Product Link System
Each piece of machinery is equipped with Product Link hardware. Each machine can be managed by
using EquipmentManager. Information is sent to the machine and information is received from the
machine via a Product Link Module (PLM) through a wireless network.
Note: For more information about the available PLMs and installation of the PLMs, refer to Systems
Operation, "Install Product Link Modules".
The location of the machine is determined by using a Global Positioning System (GPS). Wireless
networks send the information that is received from the PLMs to a central database for Product Link
that is provided by Caterpillar. This information can then be viewed with EquipmentManager.
If you are using the Caterpillar Dealer Business System you will have the option of receiving daily
updates from Product Link Service Meter Units (SMU). EquipmentManager can store these updates
in your DBS database.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02780289
Enable Program
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Access Requirements
Equipment Data
Equipment Data acts as the equipment database for EquipmentManager. Caterpillar recommends that
the Administrator for EquipmentManager is provided with administrative access to Equipment Data.
Consult with the Web site Administrator at your dealership.
Service Information System (SIS)

EquipmentManager links to or accesses Service Information System (SIS) from within the
application. Caterpillar recommends that EquipmentManager Administrators are provided with access
to SIS. Consult with the SIS Administrator at your dealership.
PartStoreTM
EquipmentManager links to or accesses the PartStoreTM System from within the application.
Caterpillar recommends that EquipmentManager Administrators are provided with access to the
PartStoreTM System. Consult with the Web site Administrator at your dealership.
Dealer Web Site

In order to access your Dealer's Web site, you need a dealership username and a password. Record
this information in a secure location.
UCID Tool
The Universal Customer ID Tool (UCID Tool) is the application that is used to add, edit, and delete
customer information and UCIDs. This tool is accessed through Dealer Maintenance. Caterpillar
recommends that administrators for EquipmentManager are provided with access to the UCID Tool.
Consult with Web site Administrator at your dealership.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03355413
Verify Machine Records and Ownership

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Verify Machines in Equipment Data

Verify that the machines exist in Equipment Data before you install Product Link Modules (PLM) on
machines. After you install PLM, configure PLM and register PLM in order to communicate with the
EquipmentManager application. If the machines do not already exist in Equipment Data (ED), you
must add the machines.
Note: Equipment Data allows customers to manage the customer's equipment across dealerships.
Equipment Data provides a central equipment database for use in Caterpillar developed applications.
Equipment Data is delivered through Caterpillar Dealer Web sites.
The following features are included in Equipment Data:
• Automatic updates of the Equipment Data equipment record from the Dealer's Business System
(DBS)
• Updates that are sent to the DBS/DBSi when changes are made in the Equipment Data
• Equipment grouping functionality
The PartStore System and EquipmentManager users will often have access to Equipment Data.
Caterpillar recommends that the Dealer Administrator for EquipmentManager is provided with access
to the Equipment Data application.
"Equipment Data Home" screen
In order to search for machines in the existing equipment population within Equipment Data, access
the home page of Equipment Data and then click on "Search Equipment". If no existing equipment
population can be found, then use Add Equipment to add the machine to the equipment population.
Note: Refer to Caterpillar Equipment Data Dealer Manual Release 2.0 for complete instructions on
the Equipment Data Application.
UCID Conflict Management

Once you have verified that the necessary machines exist in Equipment Data, you must then resolve
any ownership conflicts that may exist on that machine. Ownership conflicts arise when a single serial
number within Equipment Data has been associated with two or more Universal Customer ID's
(UCID). Within EquipmentManager, detailed information about a single serial number is not
displayed if the ownership data for that equipment has a UCID conflict.
In order to resolve an ownership conflict by consolidating UCIDs, complete the following procedure:
"Univeral Customer ID Tool" main screen
(1) "UCID Consolidate" link
1. From the "Univeral Customer ID Tool" main screen in Equipment Data, click on the "UCID
Consolidate" link. The "UCID Consolidation" screen will be displayed.
"UCID Consolidation" screen
(2) "Submit" button
2. In the "From UCID" field, enter the UCID location of the data.
3. In the "To UCID" field, enter the UCID of the new location for the data.
4. Click on the "Submit" button.
Message for a UCID tha is "not Valid".
If one of the UCID that was entered into either the "From UCID" field or the "To UCID" field is not a
valid UCID a red alert message will appear at the top of the screen. Refer to Illustration 4.
UCID alert message

If you created the original From UCID, then the From UCID will be deleted after the information
from one UCID is consolidated into another UCID. However, if you did not create the original From
UCID, then the From UCID will not be deleted. If you consolidate a UCID that you did not create the
meesage shown in Illustration 4 wil appear. If the message in Illustration 5 appears, contact the other
dealer and ask the dealer to delete the UCID.
Once you have resolved all ownership conflicts, you can proceed to setting up the users, installing the
PLM, and setting up subscriptions.
Note: Refer to Caterpillar Equipment Data Dealer Manual Release 2.0 and Caterpillar Universal
Customer Identification Recommended Practices for more information about Equipment Data and the
UCID.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03319640
Manage Users
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Set Up New Users

There are four different types of user roles that are available in EquipmentManager. The tables below
list the four types of roles. Under each of the roles the permissions that are available for that role are
listed.
Table 1
Customer User Permissions
Features Administration
Hours and Location Groups
Map Create Groups
Start/Stop Times Modify Groups
View SMU history Delete Groups
View Location History Assign Groups (to user level)
View Status History Assign Groups (to user level)
Time & Geo Fence Manage Hardware
Update Status View General Registry
Setup Fence View Digital Registry
Enable/Disable View Transmission Registry
View Alarm History Product Link Module Search
View Status History Event Tracking
Planned Maintenance None
Request quote Upload Data
View Planner Repair History
Enter PM Notes Refueling History
Mark PM Complete Manage Exiting User
View Checklists Limited to Customer User Level
View Parts lists Time and Geo. Fence Descriptions
Major Repair Inclusive / Exclusive Descriptions
Request Quote Time Based Descriptions
View Planner Manage Planned Maintenance
Mark Repair Complete Customize PM Intervals
View History Details Edit PM Check List
Fuel Information Customize PM Schedule
View Fuel Level History General
View Fuel Level Graph Search
View Fuel History Export
View Status History Preferences
Update Fuel Level Status Equipment Details
Fault Codes Registration Details
View Fault Code History Optional Permissions
Update Fault Code Status Order Parts (1)
View Status History OTA Configuration
View Troubleshooting Procedures (2) Send Commands
Reports Address Book
View Product Usage Report Event Reactions
View Product Monitoring Report
View OM&M
View Equipment Usage Summary
(1)
Contingent on Partstore access
(2)
Contingent on SIS access
Table 2
Customer Administrator Permissions
Hours & Location Groups
Map Create Groups
View Status History Delete Group Assignments
View Status History Over the Air Commands
Planned Maintenance Send Commands
Request quote Event Tracking
View Planner Address Book
Enter PM Notes Event Reactions
Mark PM Complete Upload Data
View Checklists Repair History
View Parts lists Refueling History
Order Parts (1) Manage Exiting User
Major Repair Customer User or Admin Level
Request Quote Time and Geo. Fence Descriptions
View Planner Inclusive / Exclusive Descriptions
Mark Repair Complete Time Based Descriptions
View History Details Manage Planned Maintenance
Fuel Information Customize PM Intervals
View Fuel Level History Edit PM Check List
View Fuel Level Graph Customize PM Schedule
View Fuel History General
View Status History Search
Update Fuel Level Status Export
Fault Codes Preferences
View Fault Code History Equipment Details
Update Fault Code Status Registration Details
View Status History Manage Subscriptions
View Troubleshooting Procedures (2)
Reports
View Product Usage Report
View OM&M (2)
(1)
(2)
Table 3
Dealer User Permissions
Map Create Groups
Limited to Dealer User or Customer User or Admin Level
View Checklists

Send Commands

View OM&M (2)
(1)
(2)
Table 4
Dealer Administrator Permissions
Map Create Groups
Major Repair Dealer User or Admin Level
Request Quote Customer User or Admin Level
View Planner Time and Geo. Fence Descriptions
Mark Repair Complete Inclusive / Exclusive Descriptions
View History Details Time Based Descriptions
Fuel Information Manage Planned Maintenance
View Fuel Level History Customize PM Intervals
View Fuel Level Graph Edit PM Check List
View Fuel History Customize PM Schedule
View Status History General
Update Fuel Level Status Search
Fault Codes Export
View Fault Code History Preferences
Update Fault Code Status Equipment Details
View Status History Registration Details
View Troubleshooting Procedures (2) Manage Subscriptions
Reports
View OM&M (2)
(1)
(2)
A user role may only be given to another user by a user that is equal or higher than the user that is
being assigned. For example, a Dealer Administrator may create another Dealer Administrator, but a
dealer user cannot create a "Dealer Administrator".
Use the following procedure in order to create a new user:

The Dealer Web site with the "Applications" drop-down menu
(1) "Applications" drop-down menu
1. Log in to your Dealer Web site. The home screen of Dealer Web site appears.
"End User License Agreement"
Note: If this is your first time to log in to EquipmentManager, then an "End User License
Agreement" (EULA) appears. Refer to Illustration 2. Scroll to the bottom of the EULA and
click "Accept". The screen for setting the user preferences will appear. Refer to Systems
Operation, "Preferences".
2. Select "EquipmentManager" from the "Applications" drop-down menu (1) . Refer to Illustration
2. The home page of EquipmentManager will appear.
EquipmentManager home page
(2) "Administration" tab
3. From the left navigation, click the "Administration" tab (2) . The "Administration" screen will
be displayed.
"Administration" screen
(3) "View" drop-down menu
(4) "Manage User"
(5) "Setup a New User" link
4. Select "Set Up New User" (5) under "Manage User" (4) . The "Setup a New User" screen will
be displayed.
Note: "View" drop-down menu (3) contains same links that appear on the "Administration"
page.
"Setup a New User" screen
(6) "Enter a:" field
5. In the "Enter a:" field (6) , enter a last name or login ID.
6. Click on the "Display Accounts" button.
"Display accounts" on the "Setup a New User" screen
(7) "Login Id" of a user

7. Select the "Login Id" of a user (7) to setup from the list of users that appear below the "Display
Accounts" button. The "User Permission" screen will be displayed.
"User Permissions" screen
(8) "Enable" radio button
(9) "User Role" drop-down menu
8. Select the "enabled" radio button (8) next to "Status" in the "Account Information" section.
Select the check box next to the permissions in order to apply the change.
9. In the "Permissions" section, select a user role for the user from the "User Role" drop-down
menu (9) .
Note: If you selected "Dealer Administrator" or "Customer Administrator", all of the check
boxes next to the available permissions that can be granted to these two users will be selected
because an administrator is automatically given all permissions. You will not be able to
unselect particular permissions. If you selected "Dealer User" or "Customer User", the check
boxes next to "Manage Group" and "Manage Assignments" will be selected and unavailable.
The remaining check boxes will be available for selection.
10. Click the "Update Permissions" button. The "Do you want to proceed with the assignments?"
dialog box will be displayed.
Proceed with the "Assignments" dialog box.
11. Click on "OK". The "Confirmation – User Permission" screen will be displayed.
"Confirmation: User Permissions" screen
(10) "The user permission(s) have been successfullu updated" message
(11) Check boxes
12. The "The user permission(s) have been successfullu updated" message (10) will appear. Also,
green check marks in the check boxes (11) will appear in order to indicate that the user was
given that specific authorization. Select "OK". The "Setup a New User" screen will be
displayed.
"Setup a New User" with a "No results found for the search" message
(12) "No results found for the search" message
The last name or login id that was entered in Step 5 will appear again in the "Enter a:" field. Below
the "Display Accounts" button, a message will appear that reads "No results found for the
search" (12) . This is because the user that you added no longer appears in the list of users that are not
registered with the EquipmentManager application. Your newly created user now appears in the list of
existing users.
Manage Existing Users

In addition to adding new users, as a Dealer Administrator you may edit the user roles and
permissions of existing users.
In order to manage an existing user, use the following procedure.
1. From the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Manage Existing
User". The "Manage Existing User" screen will be displayed.
"Manage Existing User" screen
(13) "Display Accounts" button
2. Enter a last name or login id in the "Enter a:" field (6) . Select the "Display Accounts" button
(13) .
The system searches for the last name or login id among the list of registered
EquipmentManager users. The system will display a list of all the available matches.
Manage Existing Users : User List
3. Click on the login id of a user (7) you wish to edit. The "User Permission" screen will be
displayed.
Existing "User Permission" screen
(8) Enable radio button
(11) Check boxes
4. Update the "User Role" in the "Status" by clicking one of the buttons highlighted in Ilustration
13.
a. Select the enable radio button (8) .
b. Select a different role from the "User Role" drop-down menu (9) .
c. Update permissions by selecting or clearing the available check boxes (11) next to the
permissions.
5. When you have finished making your changes, click the "Update Permissions" button at the
bottom. The "Confirmation – User Permission" screen will be displayed.
(10) Confirmation message
(11) Check boxes
6. Click on "OK". You have successfully updated the existing user and will be returned to the
"Manage Existing User" screen.
Note: Check marks in the check boxes (11) indicate permissions that are granted to the user.
Permissions that display the letter "X" over the check mark indicate that these permissions are
not granted to the user.
Manage Existing User : List by UCID
(12) "Select a UCID (Optional)" drop-down menu
An existing user can be search for from the "Manage Existing User" screen. Select a UCID from the
"Select a UCID (optional)" menu (12) . EquipmentManager will return a list of users associated with
that UCID.
Click the login id of a user (7) for editing. Repeat steps 2 through 5.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02941638
Product Link Installation

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Modules
The Product Link Modules are the systems onboard hardware components. These components allow
data to be transmitted over a secure Caterpillar wireless network. Data is sent to machines and data is
received from machines. The Product Link hardware consists of: antenna, data module and
interconnecting wire harness. The antenna consists of two separate components. One component is for
receiving location information from the Global Positioning satellite (GPS) system. The second
component is for receiving and transmitting signals from and to a wireless network. The second
component also has a taller whip antenna.
The GPS signal provides data about the location of the machine. This data is sent to the Product Link
data module from the GPS antenna. The signal is processed by the Product Link data module. After
the signal is processed, it is transmitted to the wireless network through the whip antenna.
The Service Meter Unit (SMU) is data captured from the "R" terminal on the alternator. The SMU
represents the number of hours that the engine has run. Some data drift from meters in the cab or
SMU accumulation on other modules is possible. Product Link PL321 systems conform to onboard
SYNC clock strategies. This strategy will synchronize the SMU with the designated master Electronic
Control Module (ECM).
Date and time stamps are captured onboard with Product Link using Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
The SMU data will be displayed according to users preference for the time zone. Refer to Systems
Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting, RENR7911, "Product Link 121/321" for details.
Product Link Module Types

The table shows the Product Link Modules that are available.
Table 1
Module Capabilities Watch Coverage
PL121SR Hours Asset Watch

Location
Time & Geographic
Fencing
Hours
Location
Time and Geographic Asset Watch
PL321SR
Fencing Health Watch
I/O Switch Channels
Events and Diagnostic codes
PL121SR
PL321SR
Installation
Once you have purchased a Product Link Module, you must install the module on the machine. A
comprehensive Installation Guide comes with your Product Link Module. Refer to Special
Instruction, REHS2365, "An Installation Guide for the Product Link PL121SR and for the PL300".
Note: The instructions that are mentioned above are for installing the PL121SR and PL300. The
PL321SR is the combination of the PL121SR Radio and PL300 ECM.
Configure and Register

Product Link modules are configured and registered by using Caterpillar Electronic Technician (CAT
ET). After installing the Product Link module on the machine, a laptop computer with Cat ET
software is connected to the module. The Dealer technician uses Cat ET to set up the module for that
specific machine. Included with each Product Link is a Special Instructions that explain the product
installation and product registration procedures.
For additional information on configuration and registration of your Product Link Module, refer to
Systems Operation Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting:, RENR7911, "Product Link 121/321".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03322221
Setup Subscriptions
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Activating and Deactivating Subscriptions

Once the installation, the configuration and the registrations of the Product Link Module (PLM) has
been performed, the subscriptions must be activated in order to view the data from the machine or
from the engine. The following subscriptions are available. Refer to Table 1.
Table 1
Subscription Features
Machine Location
Machine Location Mapping
Machine Location History
Non-reporting Machine Identification
Asset Watch
Machine Service Meter Hour Reading
Machine Service Meter Hour Report History
Time and Geo-fencing
Time and Geo-fence Alerts
Planned Maintenance (PM) History
PM Notes
Next PM Due (date and hour based)
PM Alerts
PM Checklist
PM Parts List
Maintenance Watch
Customized PM Checklist
PM and Repair Planner
On-line Parts Ordering
Manage Major Repairs
Repair History
PM or Repair Request for Quote
Health Watch Event and Diagnostic Codes

(Requires Asset Watch) Event and Diagnostic Code Troubleshooting Procedures
Event and Diagnostic Code Alerts
Event and Diagnostic Code History
Fuel Level
Fuel Used
Fuel Level Alert
Fuel Used History and Graphic Display
Fuel Level History
Refueling History
4 Digital Switch Channels
Note: Health Watch information is dependent upon the machine model, the year of production, and
the PLM that is installed. Machines that were produced with electronic engines and transmissions that
are equipped with Product Link Module PL321SR normally can provide this information.
Only the dealer administrator and/or a customer administrator can upgrade subscriptions or
downgrade subscriptions for equipment. Subscriptions are upgraded and downgraded through the
"Edit Subscriptions" option in EquipmentManager.
Note: "Automatic Subscription" option may also be available.
Automatic Subscriptions
The "Automatic Subscription" feature will automatically activate a subscription to
EquipmentManager when a PLM is registered. Subscriptions will initially be activated at the dealer
subscription level. In order to process new subscriptions, the "Automatic Subscription" option in
EquipmentManager must be accessed.
Automatic Activation of Subscriptions

Initial page of EquipmentManager
(1) "Automatic Subscriptions" link
1. In order to access the "Automatic Subscription" page, click the arrow next to "Subscriptions",
and then click "Automatic Subscription" link (1) . The "Automatic Subscription" screen will
appear.
"Automatic Subscription" Screen
2. This screen displays a list of equipment with new, successful PLM registrations. In order to
process a subscription, select the check box that corresponds to the piece of equipment that
applies to the subscription. A green check mark will appear in the appropriate "Watch" column
for the items that are appropriate for the PLM that has been installed and registered.
3. In order to accept the new subscription at the dealer level, click "Retain as Dealer
Subscription".
4. In order to transfer the subscription to the customer or UCID, click "Transfer Subscription to
UCID".
5. Click "Edit Subscription" in order to split the activations for the subscriptions between the
dealer and the customer. This will also activate the Maintenance Watch subscription or the
Health Watch subscription for either the dealer or the customer.
If the customer information is not displayed, select the "Equipment Data" link. This link will
alllow you to quickly access the equipment data in order to make the ownership association.
After the equipment data updates are complete, select the "Refresh Ownership" button in order
to display the new customer information.
A link to Universal Customer ID Tool (UCID) is also provided at the top of the page for quick
access in order to create the UCID for the customer.
Note: If the customer id or UCID displayed in "Automatic Subscription" is not the correct
customer, then exit "Automatic Subscription" and update the machine ownership in "Equipment
Data". When "Automatic Subscription" is accessed again, the correct ownership will be
displayed.
Once the subscription is processed or accepted from "Automatic Subscription", the subscription is no
longer displayed on the "Automatic Subscription" screen. Any changes to subscriptions after the
initial registration must be made through the "Edit Subscription" button.
Rules for Automatic Subscription

The following rules apply to "Automatic Subscription":
• When purchasing subscriptions on machines that are equipped with PLM, Maintenance Watch
and Health Watch cannot be purchased without a subscription to Asset Watch.
• "Automatic Subscription" will only activate Asset Watch. Maintenance Watch and Health
Watch will not be subscribed automatically.
• If a module is registered and subscriptions already exist, "EXISTING" will be displayed in the
Asset Watch, the Maintenance Watch, or the Health Watch column. Move the pointer over the
word "EXISTING" in order to display the UCID number for the customer with an active
subscription. "Automatic Subscription" will not change existing subscriptions.
• If a new subscription is activated and a UCID conflict exists, the check box will be disabled.
The UCID conflict must be resolved before the subscription can be processed.
• Occasionally, equipment is associated with multiple UCIDs but is not in UCID conflict. For
example, this is common with dealer rental fleets. In this case, all customers will be displayed.
Move the pointer over the customer name or UCID number in order to reveal if the customer is
internal or external, and select the option button for the appropriate customer. Next, click the
"Transfer Subscription to UCID" button.
• If PLM registration is successful and equipment does not exist in equipment data or is not
associated with a Customer or UCID, the customer field will be blank. Caterpillar recommends
to create the equipment record in equipment data and complete the UCID association before
accepting the subscription in "Automatic Subscription".
• The "Automatic Subscription" feature will not activate a subscription if it has been previously
downgraded. In this case, the manual downgrade flag is retained and accepted.
• When a subscription is purchased at a customer level, the customer will see the data from the
purchase date of the subscription. The dealer view of subscriptions at either the customer or the
dealer level allows the view of data from registration date.
Rules for Automatic Downgrade

The following rules apply to automatic downgrades:
• Automatic downgrades occur to existing subscriptions if customer (UCID) ownership changes

between registrations.
Note: The subscription will be downgraded for the previous customer (UCID), and the "Automatic
Subscription" screen will display the new customer (UCID).
• Automatic downgrades occur to existing subscriptions if a module is registered again under a

new dealer code.
Note: The subscriptions will be downgraded for the previous customer (UCID) and/or dealer as
applicable. The subscriptions will be displayed on the "Automatic Subscription" screen for the new
dealer that is registering.
Note: EquipmentManager history is associated with the previous customer will not be viewable by
the new customer.
Edit Subscriptions
Edit Dealer or Customer Subscriptions
In order to upgrade or downgrade a dealer subscription, complete the following procedure:
Note: Only the dealer administrator and the customer administrator can upgrade or downgrade
subscriptions for equipment, which is done through the "Edit Subscription" option in
EquipmentManager.
"Edit Subscription for" on the "Billing Search" screen
(2) "Subscriptions" tab
(3) "Edit Subscription for"
1. Click on the "Subscriptions" tab (2) on the left navigation bar. The "Edit Subscription for" (3)
on the "Billing Search" screen will be displayed.
2. Select either "Dealer" or "Customer". The screen will load again and a find equipment form
will appear.
Note: A customer administrator or a customer user is not given the option of searching the
dealer subscriptions. The customer administrator or the customer user skip Step 3 and go
directly to Step 4.
"Billing Search" screen for finding the equipment
(4) "Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu
(5) "Display Equipment" button
3. Select a UCID from the "Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu (4) . If the UCID that was
selected has multiple customer numbers, an additional drop-down menu with the customer
numbers will appear below the UCID drop-down menu. If this is the case, proceed to Step 4. If
this is not the case, proceed to Step 5.
Note: Selecting a UCID from the drop-down menu is required. In order to find all of the
machines from your dealership regardless of the customer of that machine, select "All Dealer
Machines" from the drop-down menu.
Note: If the UCID select has multiple customer numbers, an additional drop-down menu that
contains all customer numbers will appear below the UCID drop-down menu. If this is
applicable, select a customer number in the "Customer Number" drop-down menu.
4. Complete the following fields:"Equipment Group", "Equipment ID", "Manufacturer", "Model"

and "Serial Number"
5. The "Search Results" Screen will be displayed.

"Search Results" screen for editing a subscription
(6) Current status of the subscriptions
(7) "Update Checked" button
6. Check the box next to all the machines in the "Search Results" for editing the subscriptions.
In the "Search Results" table, there are columns that represent Asset Watch, Maintenance
Watch, and Health Watch. An icon is displayed in each of these columns for each individual
piece of equipment that is listed in the results from the search. These icons represent the status
of the subscription on that machine. If there has been no subscription at any time during the
current billing cycle, (if the PLM is newly installed for example) then no icon will appear.
Refer to Illustration 9 for the other possible icons that may appear in these columns.
7. Click the "Update Checked" button. The "Update Your Billing" screen will be displayed.
"Update Your Billing" screen
(8) "Update" button
(9) Check box for a subscription
8. In order to activate a subscription, check the box that corresponds to the subscription that is
desired and for the piece of equipment.
In order to activate a subscription for a piece of equipment, select the corresponding check box
for the subscription (9) of choice. In order to deactivate a subscription, unselect the appropriate
box.
Note: Maintenance Watch and Health Watch cannot be purchased without a subscription to
Asset Watch, this rule and prerequisite apply to the purchase of subscriptions on machines that
are equipped with PLM.
Note: Asset Watch and Health Watch cannot be purchased. Also, Maintenance Watch can be
purchased but machine hours must be entered manually by the user. These rules and
prerequisites apply to the purchase of subscriptions on machines that are not equipped with
PLM.
9. Click on the "Update" button (8) . A "Confirmation" screen will be displayed with the changes
that were made to the subscription or subscriptions.
10. Click on "OK" in order to complete the update.

Subscription Messages
As subscriptions are created or as subscriptions are edited, a message may appear. This message
indicates that your actions were incomplete or that more input may be required. These messages occur
under the following conditions:
• Subscription message for manual equipment
• Subscription message for prerequisite
• Subscription message for downgrading a prerequisite
Subscription message for manual equipment
If an attempt is made to activate a subscription to either Asset Watch or Health Watch on a machine
that does not have a PLM, the message in Illustration 11 will appear.
Click on "OK" and no subscription will be added. The only way to add this subscription is to equip
the machine with a PLM.
Subscription message for prerequisite
If an attempt is made to activate a subscription for Maintenance Watch or Health Watch on a machine
with a PLM without a subscription to Asset Watch, the message in Illustration 12 will appear.
Click on "OK" in order to check the Asset Watch check box. This will also add a subscription to
Asset Watch in addition to the other subscriptions activated. If you click on "Cancel", no
subscriptions will be added.
Subscription message for downgrading a prerequisite
If an attempt is made to deactivate a subscription for Asset Watch while subscriptions to Maintenance
Watch and/or Health Watch still exist, the message in Illustration 13 will appear.
Click on "OK" in order to automatically unselect the Health Watch and/or Maintenance Watch check
boxes. This will also deactivate the subscriptions and the Asset Watch subscription. If you click on
"Cancel" no subscriptions will be changed.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03322229
Administration
SMCS - 7600; 7606
You can customize EquipmentManager in the "Administration" section of EquipmentManager in

order to enable the most effective use of the tool, productive use of the tool, and efficient use of the
tool. While the "Preferences" primarily affect the way information is displayed in
EquipmentManager, the "Administration" functions are where you will group equipment, set up and
assign event reactions, manage the registry parameters of the Product Link Modules (PLM), upload
repair and refueling history, set up fences, manage planned maintenance, and so on. These functions,
once configured, should not need to be changed on a daily basis.
(1) "Administration" link
To reach the "Administration" screen, click on the "Administration" link (1) in the left navigation.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03355415
Manage Equipment Groups

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Introduction
Being able to create predetermined groupings of equipment is particularly useful when managing large
numbers of equipment through EquipmentManager. These groups that you create will allow you to work
more efficiently because you can quickly select one of your predefined groups upon which to perform any
of the asset watch, maintenance watch or health watch tasks rather than entering individual serial numbers
or performing advanced searches each time.
Equipment Groups
Equipment groups can be created. Existing equipment groups can be modified or deleted.
Create Equipment Group

Use the following procedure in order to create an equipment group:
1. From either the "Equipment Groups" section of the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-
down menu, select "Create Equipment Group". The "Equipment Search" screen will be displayed.
"Create Equipment Group" - "Equipment Search"
2. Enter your search criteria in the "Equipment Search" fields and click the "Display Equipment" button
(1) . The "Create Equipment Group" screen will be displayed. The results of the search will be
displayed in the "Equipment List" section of this screen.
"Create Equipment Group" - "Group Information" and "Equipment List"
(2) Check box
(3) "Group Name" field
(4) "Group Description" field
(5) "Create Group" button
3. In the "Group Information" section, enter a name for the new equipment group in the "Group Name"
field (3) .
4. In the "Group Information" section, enter a description of the new equipment group in the "Group
Description" field (4) .
5. In the "Equipment List" section, select the check box (2) next to each piece of equipment that you
wish to add to the new equipment group.
"Create Equipment Group Confirmation" screen
6. Click the "Create Group" button (5) at the bottom. The selected equipment is added to the new group
and the "Create Equipment Group Confirmation" screen will be displayed.
Modify Equipment Group

Once you have created an equipment group, you may decide to add or remove equipment from the group or
change the name and/or description of the group.
In order to modify an existing equipment group, use the following procedure:

"Modify Equipment Group"
(6) "Group Name" drop-down menu
1. From either the "Equipment Groups" drop-down menu section of the "Administration" screen or the
"View" drop-down menu, select "Modify Equipment Group". The "Modify Equipment Group"
screen will be displayed.
2. Select the name of the group from the "Group Name" drop-down menu (6) in order to modify the
group. The "Group Information" and "Equipment List" sections appear on the "Modify Equipment
Group" screen for the selected equipment group.
"Modify Equipment Group" - "Group Information" and "Equipment List"
(7) "Administrative Search" button
3. If you wish to add equipment to the equipment group, click on the "Administrative Search" button
(7) , or else skip to Step 5. The "Equipment Search" screen will be displayed.
"Equipment Search"
4. Enter your search criteria in the search fields and click the "Display Equipment" button (1) . The
"Modify Equipment Group" screen will be displayed with the equipment in the existing group. The
equipment list is also displayed in the "Equipment List" section of the screen.
Updating" Equipment List"
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
5. In the "Group Information" section, edit the name in the "Group Name" field (3) .
6. In the "Group Information" section, edit the description in the "Group Description" field (4) .
7. In the "Equipment List", select the check box (2) for the equipment you want to add to the group.
Clear the check box for the equipment that you want to remove from the group.
"Modify Equipment Group Detail"
8. Click the "Next" button (8) . The "Modify Equipment Group Detail" screen will be displayed.
Delete Equipment Group

Just as you may create and modify groupings of equipment, you may also delete equipment groups
completely.
In order to delete an equipment group, use the following procedure:

"Delete Equipment Group" screen
1. Either from the "Equipment Groups" section of the "Administration" screen or from the "View" drop-
down menu, select "Delete Equipment Group". The "Delete Equipment Group" screen will be
displayed.
2. Select the name of the equipment group you wish to delete from the "Group Name" drop-down menu
(6) . The "Delete Equipment Group" screen is displayed with the details of the equipment group that
you selected.
"Delete Equipment Group" details
(9) "Delete Group" button
3. Click the "Delete Group" button (9) . A window will appear with a "Delete" confirmation message.
"Delete" confirmation message
4. Click "OK". The equipment group is deleted.
Equipment Subgroups
In addition to creating groupings of equipment, you can use these equipment groups to create subgroups.
Equipment subgroups are subsets of existing equipment groups that are given a name and description, and
then saved. For example, a dealer could create an equipment group of all the equipment. The Dealer could
then create a subgroup that contains all of the equipment from multiple locations.
Similar to equipment groups, equipment subgroups can be selected on the EquipmentManager search
screens in order to save time entering search criteria into the search and advanced search fields. The
procedures to create, modify, and delete an equipment subgroup are similar to those you performed when
you created, modified, and deleted an equipment group
Create Equipment Subgroup

In order to create an equipment sub group, use the following procedure:
down menu, select "Create Equipment Sub Group". The "Create Equipment Subgroup" screen will be
displayed.
"Create Equipment Subgroup" screen

2. Select the name of the equipment group from which you wish to create a subgroup from the "Group
Name" drop-down menu (6) . The "Create Equipment Subgroup" screen is displayed with the
"Subgroup Information" section and the "Equipment List".
(2) Check box
(10) "Subgroup Name" field
(11) "Subgroup Description" field
(12) "Create Subgroup" button
3. In the "Subgroup Information" section, enter a name for the new subgroup in the "Subgroup Name"
field (10) .
4. In the "Subgroup Information" section, enter a description for the new subgroup in the "Subgroup
5. In the "Equipment List" section, select the check box (2) next to each piece of equipment in the
group that you wish to be added to the new subgroup.
6. Click the "Create Subgroup" button (12) . The "Create Equipment Subgroup Confirmation" screen
will be displayed.
"Create Equipment Subgroup" confirmation
7. Click the "Done" button. The new subgroup has been created.
Modify Equipment Subgroup

You have the ability to change the name and/or the description of an equipment subgroup as well as add or
remove pieces of equipment from the subgroup.
In order to modify an equipment subgroup, use the following procedure:
"Modify Equipment Subgroup"

1. From either the "Equipment Groups" section of the "Administration" screen, or from the "View" drop
-down menu, select "Modify Equipment Sub Group". The "Modify Equipment Sub Group" screen
will be displayed.
2. Select the name of the group for the subgroup that you wish to modify from the "Group Name" drop-
down menu (6) . The subgroups that pertain to the selected group will be populated in the "Subgroup
Name" drop-down menu.
(13) "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu
3. Select the name of the subgroup you wish to modify from the "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu
(13) . The "Modify Equipment Subgroup" screen will be displayed with the "Subgroup Information"
and "Equipment List" sections.
Editing "Subgroup Information" and "Equipment List"
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
4. In the "Subgroup Information" section, edit the name in the "Subgroup Name" field (10) .
5. In the "Subgroup Information" section, edit the description in the "Subgroup Description" field (11) .
6. In the "Equipment List" section, select the check box (2) for the equipment you want to add to the
subgroup. Clear the check box for the equipment that you want to remove from the subgroup.
7. Click the "Next" button (8) . The subgroup is modified and the "Modify Equipment Subgroup Detail"
"Modify Equipment Subgroup Detail"
Delete Equipment Subgroup

In order to delete an equipment subgroup, use the following procedure:
down menu, select "Delete Equipment Sub Group". The "Delete Equipment Subgroup" screen will be
displayed.
"Delete Equipment Subgroup"
2. Select the name of the group for the subgroup you wish to delete from the "Group Name" drop-down
menu (6) . The "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu is populated with all the subgroup names that
match the selected group.
3. Select the name of the subgroup you want to delete from the "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu
(13) . The "Delete Equipment Subgroup Details" screen will be displayed.
"Delete Equipment Subgroup" details
(14) "Delete Subgroup" button
4. Click the "Delete Subgroup" button (14) . A window will appear with a "Delete" confirmation
message.
5. Click "OK". The equipment subgroup is deleted.

Equipment Group Assignment
As an EquipmentManager dealer administrator, you have the ability to assign other dealers, customers, and
users to equipment groups and equipment subgroups. Those groups that you assign will appear in the
"Equipment Group" drop-down menu of the related search screens. You can share equipment groups with
users that would not otherwise have access. You can assign also the management of groups of equipment to
individual employees.
Assign Equipment Group to Dealer

In order to assign an equipment group to a dealer, use the following procedure:
down menu, select "Create Equipment Group Assignment". The "Create Equipment Group
Assignment" screen will be displayed.
"Create Equipment Group Assignment" for the dealer
(15) "Group Assignment" drop-down menu
(16) "Dealer" drop-down menu
(17) "Start Date" field
(18) "End Date" field
(8) "Next" button
2. Select the name of the group you wish to assign to a dealer from the "Group Name" drop-down menu
(6) .
3. Select "Dealer" from the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu (15) . The "Dealer" drop-down menu
(16) will appear below the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu.
4. Select the name of the dealer you wish to assign the group to from the "Dealer" drop-down menu
(16) . Every dealer level user from the assigned dealership will have access to this group in the
"Group Name" drop-down menu (6) .
5. Enter the timeframe for this assignment by clicking the calendar icons next to the "Start Date" field
(17) and "End Date" (18) field and selecting a date.
If you wish the assignment to be indefinite, do not complete this step.
"Create Equipment Group Assignment Detail" for the dealer
6. Click the "Next" button (8) . The assignment is created and the "Create Equipment Group
Assignment Detail" screen will be displayed.
Assign Equipment Group to Customer

In order to assign an equipment group to a customer, use the following procedure:
"Create Equipment Group Assignment" for the customer

(8) "Next" button
2. Select the name of the group you wish to assign to a customer from the "Group Name" drop-down
menu (6) .
3. Select "Customer" from the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu (15) . The "Universal Customer
ID" drop-down menu (19) will appear below the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu.
4. Select the "Universal Customer ID" of the customer you wish to assign the equipment group from the
"Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu (19) .
5. Enter the timeframe for this assignment to last by clicking the calendar icons next to the "Start Date"
field (17) and "End Date" (18) field and selecting a date.
"Create Equipment Group Assignment Detail" for the customer
Assign Equipment Group to User

In order to assign an equipment group to a user, use the following procedure:
"Create Equipment Group Assignment" for the user
(20) "Login ID" field and "Select From User List" link
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
2. Select the name of the group you wish to assign to a user from the "Group Name" drop-down menu
(6) .
3. Select "User" from the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu (15) . The "Login ID" field and "Select
FromUser List" link (20) will appear below the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu.
4. Enter a valid CWS-ID in the "Login ID" field or click the "Select From User List" (20) .
If you entered a CWS-ID, skip to Step 6. If you clicked "Select From User List", a "Universal
Customer ID" drop-down menu (19) will appear below the "Login ID" field.
5. From the "Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu (19) , select the UCID for which the user you
wish to assign the equipment group pertains.
The users that pertain to the selected UCID appear in the "User List" section
6. Enter the timeframe for the assignment to last by clicking the calendar icons next to the "Start Date"
field and "End Date" field and selecting a date.
7. Select the check box (2) next to all users in the "User List" section that you wish to assign the
equipment group.
8. Click the "Next" button (8) . The "Create Equipment Group Assignment Detail" screen will be
displayed.
"Create Equipment Group Assignment Detail" for the user
9. Click the "Create Equipment Group Assignment" button. The equipment group assignment is
created.
Delete Equipment Group Assignment

You can delete an indefinite equipment group assignment or an assignment before the assignment is set to
expire by using the "Delete Equipment Group Assignment" functionality.
In order to delete an equipment group assignment, use the following procedure:

"Delete Equipment Group Assignment"
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
down menu, select "Delete Equipment Group Assignment". The "Delete Equipment Group
2. In the "Group Name" drop-down menu (6) , select the name of the group from which you wish to
delete an assignment.
The "Select assignments to delete" section is populated with a list of all assignments made to the
selected group.
3. Select the check box (2) next to all of the assignments you wish to delete.
4. Click the "Next" button (8) . The "Delete Equipment Group Assignment Detail" screen will be
displayed.
"Delete Equipment Group Assignment Detail"
5. Click the "Delete Equipment Group Assignment" button. The equipment group assignments are
deleted.
Equipment Subgroup Assignment

Assign Equipment Subgroup to Dealer
Equipment subgroup assignments are subsets of existing equipment group assignments. As with equipment
group assignments, you can assign these subgroups to Dealers, customers, and users.
"Create Equipment Subgroup Assignment" for a dealer
(16) "Dealer" drop-down menu
(8) "Next" button
down menu, select "Create Equipment Sub Group Assignment". The "Create Equipment Subgroup
2. Select the name of the group for the subgroup you wish to assign to a dealer from the "Group Name"
drop-down menu (6) .
3. Select the name of the subgroup you wish to assign to a dealer from the "Subgroup Name" drop-
down menu (13) .
4. Select "Dealer" from the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu (15) . The "Dealer" drop-down menu
(16) will appear below the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu.
5. Select the name of the Dealer you wish to assign the group to from the "Dealer" drop-down menu
(16) .
6. Enter the timeframe in which you wish this assignment to last by clicking the calendar icons next to
the "Start Date" field (17) and "End Date" (18) field and selecting a date.
"Create Equipment Subgroup Assignment Detail" for a dealer
Assign Equipment Subgroup to Customer

In order to assign a subgroup to a customer, use the following procedure:
"Create Equipment Subgroup Assignment" for the customer
(8) "Next" button
2. Select the name of the Group for the Subgroup you wish to assign to a customer from the "Group
Name" drop-down menu (6) .
3. Select the name of the subgroup you wish to assign to a customer from the "Subgroup Name" drop-
down menu (13) .
4. Select "Customer" from the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu (15) . The "Universal Customer
ID" drop-down menu (19) will appear below the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu.
5. Select the Universal Customer ID of the customer you wish to assign the equipment group from the
"Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu (19) .
"Create Equipment Subgroup Assignment Detail" for the customer
Assign Equipment Subgroup to User

In order to assign a subgroup to a user, use the following procedure:
"Create Equipment Subgroup Assignment" for a user
(20) "Login ID" field and "Select From User List" link
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
2. Select the name of the Group for the Subgroup you wish to assign to a user from the "Group Name"
drop-down menu (6) .
3. Select the name of the subgroup you wish to assign to a user from the "Subgroup Name" drop-down
menu (13) .
4. Select "User" from the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu (15) . The "Login ID" field and "Select
FromUser List" link (20) appear below the "Group Assignment" drop-down menu.
5. Enter a valid CWS-ID in the "Login ID" field or click the "Select From User List" link (20) .
If you entered a CWS-ID, skip to Step 7. If you clicked "Select From User List", a "Universal
Customer ID" drop-down menu (19) will appear below the "Login ID" field.
6. From the "Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu (19) , select the UCID for which the user you
wish to assign the equipment group pertains. The users that pertain to the selected UCID appear in
the "User List" section.
8. Select the check box (2) next to all users in the "User List" section that you wish to assign the
equipment group.
9. Click the "Next" button (8) . The "Create Equipment Group Assignment Detail" screen will be
displayed.
"Create Equipment Subgroup Assignment Detail" for a user
(21) "Create Equipment Group Assignment" button
10. Click the "Create Equipment Group Assignment" button (21) . The equipment group assignment is
created.
Delete Equipment Subgroup Assignment

You can delete an indefinite equipment subgroup assignment or an assignment before the assignment is set
to expire by using the "Delete Equipment Sub Group Assignment" functionality.
In order to delete an equipment subgroup assignment, use the following procedure:

"Delete Equipment Subgroup Assignmen"
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
1. From either the "Equipment Groups" section of the "Administration" screen or from the "View" drop
-down menu, select "Delete Equipment Subgroup Assignment". The "Delete Equipment Subgroup
2. In the "Group Name" drop-down menu (6) , select the name of the Group for the Subgroup from
which you wish to delete an assignment.
3. In the "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu (13) , select the name of the subgroup from which you
wish to delete an assignment.
The "Select assignments to delete" section is populated with a list of all assignments made to the
selected subgroup.
4. Select the check box (2) next to all of the assignments you wish to delete.
5. Click the "Next" button (8) . The "Delete Equipment Subgroup Assignment Detail" screen will be
displayed.
"Delete Equipment Subgroup Assignment Detail"
(22) "Delete Equipment Subgroup Assignment" button
6. Click the "Delete Equipment Subgroup Assignment" button (22) . The selected equipment subgroup
assignments are deleted.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03337469
Manage Hardware
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Introduction
The technician registers the Product Link Modules (PLM) when the modules are installed on a piece
of equipment for the first time. The technician then sets the parameters of the configuration that can
be viewed and can be changed by using the "Over the Air Configuration" feature from
EquipmentManager. Caterpillar recommends providing these parameters to the technician before the
installation process begins.
The "Administration" screens of EquipmentManager display the details for the registry of your
equipment in the following categories:
• "General Registry"
• "Digital Registry"
• " "Transmission Registry""
• "Send Commands"
• ""Product Link Module Status Report""
"General Registry"
"General Registry" screen
Once one or more of the equipment has been selected and the "General Registry" has been selected
from either "View" drop-down menu or the"Administration" screen the "General Registry" screen will
appear. Refer to Illustration 1.
Table 1 lists the fields that appear on the "General Registry" screen.
Table 1
The fields on the "General Registry" Screen
Field Description Sample Values
This is the ID of the equipment that has the installed
"Eqpt ID" UNIT 4
PLM.
"Manufacturer" This is the manufacturer of the equipment. CAT
"Model" This is the name of the model of the equipment. D8R
This is the serial number of the equipment. The "Serial
"Serial Number"
Number" is a link. Clicking the link takes you to the 6YZ#####
"Equipment Registration Detail" screen.
"Last Reg/Admin This is the date and time that the last registration or 07/15/2002
Date & Time" administration message was received. 02:43:16 AM
This indicates that the PLM has been installed and
registered. If PLM is not registered, the "Subscriptions
"Status" Registered
not available. Contact Administrator" message will
appear across remaining fields.
"First Report This indicates the first time for each day the PLM
06:19 AM
Time" reports.
This is the indicates the type of report that is sent from
PLM. Choices are "Position", "SMU", or both. Position
Position
"Report Type" reports contain information about the location of the
SMU
equipment. "SMU" reports contain the data about the
Service Meter Units that are used.
This indicates the number of reports for each day that are
"Frequency" (0-4)/Day
sent by the PLM.
"Global Grams" are used in areas of the world that have
no ground stations. If the machine will operate in areas
that have no ground stations, select "Enabled". Enabled
"Global Gram"
Otherwise, leave the parameter set to the default of Disabled
"Disabled". If you have any questions about "Global
Gram", contact your Technical Communicator.
DQ0000######Q1
"PLM ID" This is the ID number of the Product Link Module.
PL201
"Module Type" This is the type of the PLM.
PL321
This field describes the type of data link that is used. CDL
"Data Link Type"
Most Product Link Modules use the CDL or the Cat Data SAE 1708
Link (CDL). SAE 1939
"Block Data Transfer" is a technology that is used to pull
"Block Data large blocks of data from a machine. "Block Data Disabled
Transfer" Transfer" exists for future use. Leave this parameter set Enabled
to "Disabled".
"Software This is the version of the software for Product Link that 1.6
Revision" is onboard at the time of last registration message. 2.1
From the "General Registry" screen, you can select the check box next to a piece of equipment. Then,
click the "Configuration" button. The "Over the Air Configuration" screen will appear. On this screen,
you can edit the "General Registry" parameters, the "Digital Registry" parameters, and the
"Transmission Registry" parameters. Refer to ""Over the Air Configuration"" for more details.
"Equipment Details"
The "Equipment Details" screen provides all the details about the selected equipment.
In order to view the "Equipment Details" of a machine, select the serial number for the equipment
from the "Serial Number" column on the "General Registry" screen. The "Equipment Details" screen
will be displayed.
"Equipment Details" screen
Click the "Back" button in order to return to the "General Registry" screen. Table 2 describes the
fields that are found on the "Equipment Details" screen.
Table 2
"Equipment Details" Screen
Field Description Sample Value
Customer Information
"Universal Acme Aggregate
UCID Name – UCID Number
Customer ID:"
1234567890
Acme SW Quarry
"Customer Account
Customer Name – Dealer Customer Number
Number"
1234567
"Customer 100 Any Street

Street, City, State, Zip
Address" Any Town, USA
Dealer Information
"Last Dealer Primary Dealer Name Demo Dealer

Update" Date of last Equipment Record Maintenance 9/27/2006
"Other Assigned Other Dealer
Other Dealers associated with selected equipment
Dealer" Name
Dealer Specific Equipment Information
The ID of the equipment upon which the PLM is
"Equipment ID" UNIT 4
installed
"Location/Jobsite" Southeast Quarry
Equipment's assigned location or jobsite
"Purchase Date" Equipment Purchase Date for current owner 1-Sep-02

Owned
"Ownership Status"
Current ownership status of the equipment Leased
Rented
Equipment Details – Product Link/EquipmentManager Information
The "ID" number of the Product Link Module. The
"PLM ID" "PLM ID" is a link. Clicking the link will display the DQ0000012345
PL201
"Module Type" The type of PLM
PL321
Global Grams are used in geographical areas that have
no ground stations. If the machine will operate in areas Enabled
without ground stations, select "Enabled". Otherwise,
"Global Gram"
leave the parameter set to the default Disabled. If you
have questions about "Global Gram", contact your Disabled
Marketing Company.
Dealer through which the subscriptions are purchased
"Dealer" Dealer Name
Indicates that the PLM has been installed and has been Registered
"Status"
registered. Deregistered
The table shows the subscriptions that are active and
"Subscription
for whom they are purchased. Includes link to "Edit AW, MW, HW
Level"
Subscriptions"
Equipment Information
"Serial Number" The serial number of the equipment 6YZ#####
CATERPILLAR,
"Manufacturer" The manufacturer of the equipment
INC.
"Product Industry" Industry in which the selected equipment is primarily Quarry +
used Aggregates
"Product Use" Describes for what the equipment is used Sand & Gravel
Light
"Application" Describes the machine application Medium
Heavy
Hours
"Meter Indicator" Unit of measure for equipment usage meter Miles
Kilometers
Vehicle Identification Number if the equipment is an 2BR#####,

engine, or related serial numbers and descriptions if Engine
"Related Serial
machine. Related serial numbers may be the engine,
Number(s)" 1YS#####
transmission, etc. Four related serial numbers can be
listed Transmission
Attachment
"Equipment Type" Engine/Power
Describes the type for the selected equipment
System
Machine
"Product Model" The model name of the equipment D8R
"Model Year" The year of the equipment was manufactured 2001
"Meter Reading
Date of last meter reading update 27-Sep-06
Date"
"Meter Reading" Last service meter reading value 214
"Arrangement
Equipment arrangement or configuration number 157-0818
Number"
Equipment Groups
"Equipment Names of group(s) in which selected equipment is
Sample Group
Groups" included
"Group Owner" Login ID of the group owner smithxx
"Equipment Registration Details"

The "Equipment Registration Detail" screen provides details about the current configuration of the
onboard PLM.
In order to view the details of the registration, click the "PLM ID" of a machine in the "PLM ID"
column on the "General Registry" screen. The "Equipment Registration Detail" screen will be
displayed.
"Equipment Registration Details" screen
Table 3 describes the fields that are found on the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen. Click the
"Back" button in order to return to the "General Registry" screen.
Table 3
"Equipment Registration Detail" Screen
Equipment Details
The ID of the equipment upon which the PLM
"Equipment Id" UNIT 4
is installed
"Manufacturer" The Manufacturer of the equipment CAT
"Model" The model name of the equipment D8R
The serial number of the equipment. The serial
"Serial Number" number is a link. Clicking the link will display 6YZ#####
the Equipment Detail screen.
"PLModule Type" PL201

The type of Product Link Module
PL321
"Radio Software On-board Product Link software part number.
1234567-01
Part Number"
"PLM ID" The ID number of the Product Link Module DQ000012345
Communications Configuration
"First Report Time" Indicates the first time each day the PLM
12:00 AM
reports.
"Position Report
Frequency of which location is reported 4/Day
Frequency"
"SMU Report Frequency of which service meter units are
1/Day
Frequency" reported
Fuel Only
Defines whether the SMU or Fuel
"SMU/Fuel
consumption report is sent as part of the daily SMU Only
Reporting"
standard message.
Alternate SMU/Fuel
A technology that is used to pull large blocks Disabled
"Block Data of data from a machine. Block Data Transfer
Transfer" exists for future use. Leave this parameter set
to Disabled. Enabled
The type of data link that is used. Most CDL

"Data Link Type"
PLMsuse Caterpillar Data Link (CDL). SAE 1708
SAE 1939
"Global Grams" are used in geographical areas
that have no ground stations. If the machine Enabled
will operate in areas without ground stations,
"Global Gram" select "Enabled". Otherwise, leave the
parameter set to the default "Disabled". If you
have questions about "Global Gram", contact Disabled
your Technical Communicator.
"Diagnostics and Event Configuration"
Defines when to send messages from the
"Diagnostic Event Immediate: sends a
Product Link system when a diagnostic event
Reporting message when an event
is reported from other ECMs on the machine.
Frequency" occurs.
Next: queues messages

about events and sends the
"Level 1 Event Defines when to send messages from the messages in a batch based
Reporting Product Link system when a level 1 event is on the next scheduled
Frequency" reported from other ECMs on the machine. interval that is calculated
from the report start time.
"Level 2 Event Defines when to send messages from the Never: Never log messages
Reporting Product Link system when a level 2 event is or send messages about the
Frequency" reported from other ECMs on the machine. events.
"Level 3 Event Defines when to send messages from the
Reporting Product Link system when a level 3 event is
Frequency" reported from other ECMs on the machine.
Determines when the Product Link will report
a recurrence of an event or a diagnostic code,
measured in units of machine operating hours.
Minimum value: 4 hours
All events and diagnostics are recorded and
may be viewed with the Electronic
Technician.
"Immediate The default value of 20 hours means that an
Interval" event or diagnostic update message will not be
present for a specific event or diagnostic
update until the machine has operated for 20
Default value: 20 hours
hours after the last transmitted occurrence of
that event or diagnostic update. At the next
event or diagnostic occurrence after the time
period elapses, another message will be sent.
Sets the time period before an event or
diagnostic message update is sent, measured
"Event/Diagnostic Minimum value: 24 hours
in units of real time or clock hours. This time
Interval"
period is calculated from the Report Start
Time.
The default value of 168 hours or 1 week is
Default value: 168 hours or
only valid if the event or diagnostic report
1 week
intervals are set to Next.
Registration and Subscription Details
This indicates that the PLM has been installed
Registered
and registered. If PLM is not registered, the
"Status" "Subscriptions not available. Contact
Administrator" message will appear across Deregistered
remaining fields.
"Last Reg/Admin The Date and Time of the last time of
##########
Date & Time" registration of the PLM
Defines the Dealer code for which
"Dealer Code" TD00
subscriptions are purchased
"Dealer Defines which subscriptions are owned at
AW, MW, HW
Subscription" Dealer Level
Defines the Universal Customer ID for which
"UCID" 1234567890
"UCID Defines which subscriptions are owned at
AW, MW, HW
Subscription" customer level
On Board Electronic System Information
"ECM Module ID" Lists all Electronic Control Modules detected Engine, Transmission,
on the data link of the machine. Product Link PL300
Indicates serial numbers for all Electronic
"ECM S/N" Control Modules detected on the data link of XXX12345
the machine.
Indicates the software part number for all
"ECM Software
Electronic Control modules detected on the 1234567-00
P/N"
data link of the machine.
Indicates Sync Clock enabled on each
"Sync Clock
Electronic Control Module detected on the Yes, No
Enabled"
Indicated the Sync Clock Level for each
"SC Level" Electronic Control Module that is Sync Clock Slave, Master
Enabled
Displays the diagnostic protocol for each
"Diag Protocol" 0
Electronic Control Module
Displays the event protocol for each
"Event Protocol" 0
Fencing Configuration
Inclusive, Exclusive, Time
"Fence Type" Lists all Geographic and Time Fence Types
"Fence Status" Indicates fence type is enabled or disabled enabled, disabled
"Fence Description" Equipment Yard, Working
Displays user defined fence descriptions
Hours
"Center Lat/Long" Indicates the latitude and longitude center N1234.0000/ E1234.0000
point for configured fence
"Radius" Indicates the radius of configured fence 20.0, 5.0
"Days" Indicates working days of configured fence M,T,W,TH,F,
Indicates start time and end time of configured
"Hours" 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM
fence
Switched Input Configuration
"Digital Input" Sensor identification Sensor #1
Defines whether the Digital Input Sensor is Configured,

"Input Status"
configured. Not Configured
"Input Description" Describes the condition that the switch is Track Tension Switch
monitoring. Maximum of 24 characters
Defines whether a switch is attached. If the Not Configured

switch is attached, the defines the state of the
"Type" Normally Closed
switch contacts under normal operating
conditions. Normally Open
Defines the delay time before an alarm
condition is recorded. If the normal condition 30.0 sec (default)
of the switch is open and the delay time is set
"Delay Time"
to the default time of 30.0 sec, an alarm
condition will be sent when the switch is 0.1 sec - 1200 sec
closed for 30.0 sec.
"Status History"
"Status History" screen
The "Status History" is a record of all the status reports that are sent by the PLM. The status report
contains information about the status of the actual PLM.
In order to view the "Status History" of a PLM, click the "Status History" button that is on the
Top of the "Status History" screen

In order to change the range of the date to reflect an appropriate time period for the status history,
click the "Calendar" icon next to the "Start Date" and "End Date" boxes, respectively. Then, select a
desired date from the applicable calendar.
Bottom of the "Status History" screen
When you are done, click the "Change Date Range" button. The "Status History" table will again load
the date in order to reflect the updated range of the date. Click the "Back" button in order to return to
the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen.
Note: The "Change Date Range" function works similarly in many views or screens throughout the
application.
Table 4 describes fields that are found on the "Status History" screen. Click the "Back" button in
order to return to the "General Registry" screen.
Table 4
"Status History" Screen
Field Description Values
Displays the date and time of the status report. If the PLM is set to
"Date/Time" send status once per day, these values should be approximately
one day apart each time.
"Power
Indicates that the PLM experienced a loss of power or low voltage
Loss" (Low Yes, No
sometime between this status report and the last status report.
Voltage)
"Satellite Indicates that the PLM was blocked from the satellite sometime
Yes, No
Blocked" between this status report and the last status report.
Yes, No,
"PW Active" Indicates that "Time and Geographic Fencing" is active.
N/A
Indicates that a "PW Alarm" has occurred sometime between this Yes, No,
"PW Alarms"
status report and the last. N/A
Indicates the "Power Mode" of the PLM. Power mode has the
following "Status" levels:
Active (1)
Active (1) – The machine has operated in the last 48 hours.
Sleep (2) – The machine has not operated for greater than 48 hours
"Power Mode" but less than one week. The PLM will wake up every six hours to Sleep (2)
send and receive messages. Position messages will only be sent if
the unit has changed position by greater than 200 meters.
Hibernate (3) – The machine has not operated for more than one
week. The PLM will wake up every 24 hours to send and receive Hibernate
messages. Position messages will only be sent if the unit has (3)
changed position by greater than 200 meters.
"Event Pending" Indicates that an event was recorded and will be sent (PL321
Yes, No
system only).
"Digital #
Indicates that the digital switch is active (PL321 system only). Yes, No
Active"
"Digital Registry"
The Product Link system uses up to four digital switches in order to monitor the equipment status. By
installing switches and configuring the state during normal operating conditions, which are open or
closed, you can be alerted when this normal state has changed.
"Digital Registry" screen
When some equipment has been selected and the " Digital Registry" from the "View" drop-down
menu has been selected, the "Digital Registry" screen will appear. Notice that the fields in the
"Equipment Information" section of this screen are the same fields that are on the "General Registry"
screen. Table 5 describes the information that is found on the "Digital Registry" screen.
Table 5
"Digital Registry" Screen
Sample
Field Description
Values
Not
Configured
Defines whether a switch is attached. If the switch is attached,
Normally
"Type" defines the state of the switch contacts under normal operating
Closed
conditions.
Normally Open
Defines the delay time before an alarm condition is recorded. 30.0 sec
If the normal condition of the switch is open and the delay (default)
"Delay"
time is set to the default time of 30.0 sec, an alarm condition 0.1 sec - 1200
will be sent when the switch is closed for 30.0 sec. sec
Track Tension
Switch
Field used to describe the condition that the switch is
"Description" Maximum of
monitoring.
24 characters.
All Conditions
(default)
Key
"Monitoring Defines the monitoring condition for the digital input. When Off/Engine Off
Condition" will the switch be monitored? Key On/Engine
Off
Key On/Engine
On
On the "Digital Registry" screen, you can select the check box next to a piece of equipment. Then,
"Transmission Registry" parameters. Refer to the "Over the Air Configuration" topic for more details.
"Transmission Registry"
"Transmission Registry" screen
The "Transmission Registry" screen will display the parameters for the registration that have been set
for determining the types of information that are transmitted from the PLM and the frequency that the
information is transmitted. Notice that the fields in the "Equipment Information" section of the screen
are the same fields that are on the "General Registry" screen and "Digital Registry" screen. Table 6
describes the information that is found on the "Transmission Registry" screen.
Table 6
"Transmission Registry" Screen
Defines when to send messages
"Event Reporting" from the Product Link system Immediate: sends a message when an event
"Frequency: Level when a level 1 event is reported occurs.
1" from other ECMs on the Next: queues messages about events and
machine. sends the messages in a batch based on the
Defines when to send messages next scheduled interval that is calculated
"Event Reporting" from the Product Link system from the report start time.
"Frequency: Level when a level 2 event is reported Never: never log messages or send
2" from other ECMs on the messages about the events.
machine.
"Event Reporting" from the Product Link system
"Frequency: Level when a level 3 event is reported
3" from other ECMs on the
machine.
"Frequency: when a diagnostic event is
Diagnostic" reported from other ECMs on
the machine.
Minimum value is 4 hours. The default is
Determines when the Product 20 hours, meaning that an event or
Link will report a recurrence of diagnostic update message will not be
an event or a diagnostic code, present for a specific event or diagnostic
"Event/Diagnostic measured in units of machine update until the machine has operated for
Interval" operating hours. All events and 20 hours after the last transmitted
diagnostics are recorded and occurrence of that event or diagnostic
may be viewed with the update. At the next event or diagnostic
Electronic Technician. occurrence after the time period elapses,
another message will be sent.
Sets the time period before an
event or diagnostic message Minimum value is 24 hours. Default value
update is sent, measured in is 168 hours or 1 week.
"Next Scheduled
units of real time or clock This value is only valid if the event or
Interval"
hours. This time period is diagnostic report intervals are set to
calculated from the "Report "Next".
Start Time".
Defines whether the SMU or
Fuel Only
"SMU/Fuel Fuel consumption report is sent
SMU Only
Reporting" as part of the daily standard
Alternate SMU/Fuel
message.
From the "Transmission Registry" screen, you can select the check box next to a piece of equipment.
Then, click the "Configuration" button. The "Over the Air Configuration" screen will appear. On this
screen, you can edit the "General Registry" parameters, the "Digital Registry" parameters, and the
"Transmission Registry" parameters. Refer to ""Over the Air Configuration"".
"Over the Air Configuration"

You can use EquipmentManager over the air in order to change the configurable parameters for the
registration of the PLM. This screen can be reached from the following screens by selecting the
"Configuration button" that appears on each screen:
• "Equipment Registration Detail"
• "Transmission Registry"
Refer to the following procedure in order to configure parameters for the registration over the air from
the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen:
1. In order for the "Over The Air Configuration" screen to appear , select the "Configuration" on
the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen. The "Over The Air Configuration" screen will
appear.
"Over the Air Configuration" screen
(1) Green check mark
(2) "Send" button

2. Change the desired parameters of the configuration by either typing new values into the text
fields or selecting new values from the drop-down menus that appear in the "New Value"
column of the table.
A green check mark (1) will appear in the "Change" column next to any parameter that has been
changed.
ReferenceRefer to Systems Operation, "General Registry", Systems Operation, "Digital

Registry", and Systems Operation, "Transmission Registry" for more information about the
parameters and values.
Note: Machine "Start Time" and "Stop Time" are supported by PL321 systems with the current
software version. This configuration can only be set by using the "Over the Air Configuration"
feature. When the "Start Time" and "Stop Time" feature is available, the "Start Time" and the
"Stop Time" parameters will appear and the parameters can be set to "On" or "Off".
Note: In some cases, the parameter name on the "Over the Air Configuration" screen is
different from the parameter name that appears on the "Transmission Registry" screen.
The following list shows the parameter name on the "Over the Air Configuration" screen and
the equivalent parameter name on the "Transmission Registry" screen:
◦ Event Internal = Event/Diagnostic Interval Next Message
◦ Interval = Next Scheduled Interval
3. Click the "Send" button (2) . A popup window for a confirmation will appear.
Successful message for sending of the configuration parameters
4. Click the "OK" button. The parameters are updated and the "Configuration Parameters Sent
Successfully" screen will be displayed.
The "Over the Air Configuration" screen due to selecting multiple equipment
(3) "Manufacturer" parameter and "Serial Number" parameter
Note: If you select more than one piece of equipment for configuration at the same time, you must set
all the parameters to the same value. Only the "Manufacturer" parameter and "Serial Number"
parameter (3) can be set separately. These fields can not be edited on the "Over The Air
Configuration" screen if multiple machines have been selected.
"Send Commands"
The "Send Commands" feature enables you to force the PLM to immediately send messages rather
than waiting for the next interval of transmission. This could be useful if you needed to know
information such as the immediate location or SMU of the machine. "Send Commands" is also where
you can register and deregister the PLM for purposes of moving the module from one machine to
another.
In order to send commands, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Send Commands".
The "Equipment Search" screen will appear.
2. Select the criteria of your search and/or type the criteria of your search. Then click "Display
Equipment". The "Send Commands" screen will appear and the screen will display the results
of the search.
"Send Commands"
(4) Check boxes
(5) "Status" check box
(6) "Event" check box
(7) "Send" button
3. In order to send commands, select the check box that corresponds to the machine from the most
left column. In the remaining columns, select the check box that corresponds to the type of
command.
Note: Selecting the check box (4) in the first column of the "Send Commands" table
automatically selects the "Status" check box (5) and "Event" check box (6) for that selected
item. Because the "Status" command returns reports about "Location", "SMU" and "Fuel", there
is no reason to send any of these three commands if "Status" is selected.
Table 7 describes the type of commands that can be sent.
Table 7
"Send Commands" Options
Subscriptions
Asset Maint. Health Command
Description
Watch Watch Watch
Sends report with location information of
X Location
machine.
Sends report with information about current
X SMU
Service Meter Units.
Sends report with information about fuel
X Fuel
consumption.
Sends report with information about Location,
X Status
SMU, and Fuel.
Sends report with Level 1, 2 and 3 event
X Event messages that have been collected from ECMs
on machine since last transmission.
Reg Request that a new registration message be
X X X
Request sent.
The "Forced Deregistration" is useful if you
know that a module has been removed without
Forced
X X X being de-registered from the old machine. The
DegReg
"Forced Deregistration" will remove the
registration from EquipmentManager.
Use the "Deregistration" command when you
X X X DegReg are removing a PLM from a machine.
(1)
Send this command in order to clear all of the

Clear event messages that have been logged and are
X X X
Events waiting until the next transmission interval to
be sent.
(1)
Deregistering the PLM does not affect the billing status. You must deactivate billing separately.
4. Click the "Send" button (7) . The "Send Commands" confirmation message will be displayed.
Note: The configuration message is sent over the air via a satellite to the onboard PLM. The
PLM will return a status message when the command has been successfully received at the
module. This two-way communication will take a few minutes. Communication can be
completed assuming that the machine is running or the master switch is open.
"Send Commands" confirmation message
5. Click "OK". The "Send Commands" page will display a successful message.
"Send Commands" with a successful message
6. Click"OK".
"Product Link Module Status Report"

The "PLM Status Report" will display the "Product Link Module Details". In order to display these
details perform the following procedure:
"Product Link Module Details" screens
1. Select "Product Link Module Statue Report" from the "Administration" menu.
2. Enter the "Product Link Module ID" in the "Search" field.
3. Click "Display Details"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03369021
Manage Event Tracking

SMCS - 7600; 7606
There are many events that EquipmentManager reports that may be time sensitive, such as "Time and Geo
Fence Alarms" and some "Fault Codes". EquipmentManager enables you to configure these event alerts to
be sent to an e-mail account or text messaging device. This enables immediate notification of these events
so the events can be addressed in a timely manner.
By establishing an "Address Book" and telling EquipmentManager the specific events to track
("Reactions"), you can be sure that the correct person is notified when certain alarms, planned maintenance,
diagnostic, events, and levels occur.
Address Book
Before you can assign reactions to individuals, you must enter the individual in the EquipmentManager
"Address Book".
Add an Address
In order to add a person to the address book, use the following procedure:
"Add Address" screen
1. On the "Administration" screen, in the "View" box, select "Address Book". The "Address Book"
screen will appear.
2. In the "Description" box, type a description of the address. In the "Address" box, type a valid e-mail
address.
3. Click "Add Address". The address appears in the upper area of the screen.
Edit an Address
In order to edit an existing address, use the following procedure:
The "Address Book" screen while editing an address
(1) Pencil and paper icon
1. From the "Address Book" screen, click the pencil and paper icon (1) next to the address to be edited.
The "Edit Address" section is displayed at the bottom of the screen.
2. Edit the description in the "Description" field.
3. Edit the address in the "Address" field.
4. Click the "Save" button. The updated address appears in the list of addresses at the top of the screen.
Delete an Address
In order to delete an existing address from the address book, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Address Book" screen, select the check box next to the address you wish to delete.
2. Click the "Delete Addresses" button. The "Delete Address" confirmation window will appear.
Address Book - Delete Address
3. Click "OK".
If there are currently no "Event Reactions" that are ready to be sent to the address that is selected, the
"Confirm Deletion of Targets" screen is displayed with a corresponding message.
If there are "Event Reactions" that are ready to be sent to the address that is selected, the "Confirm
Deletion of Targets" screen contains a table that lists these reactions.
Confirm message for deleting address without "Event Reactions"
(2) "Delete Addresses"

Confirm message for deleting address with "Event Reactions"
4. Click "Delete Addresses" (2) . The address is deleted from the address book.
"Reactions"
Once you have addresses in the EquipmentManager "Address Book", you can configure
EquipmentManager to send e-mail messages to those addresses when alarms, events, diagnostics, planned
maintenance notifications, and warnings are received.
Note: Event reactions that are delivered to email are provided in English only.
Add or Edit "Event Reactions"

In order to add or edit an "Event Reactions", perform the following procedure:
"Reactions" screen
(3) check box
(4) "Add Reactions" button
1. From the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Reactions".
If you have equipment that is already selected, the "Reactions" screen will be displayed.
If you have not already selected equipment, complete the "Equipment Search" fields and click
"Display Equipment" before proceeding to Step 2.
2. Select the check box (3) of the machine that you want to add or edit reactions.
3. Click the "Add Reactions" button (4) . The "Add/Edit Reactions" screen will be displayed.
"Add/Edit Reactions" screen
(5) "Reaction Types" drop-down menu
4. From the "Reaction Types" drop-down menu (5) , select a reaction type. The left of the "Description"
list box is populated with the available reactions for the type that is selected.
5. Select the events that are to be tracked from the left "Description" list box.
6. Click the "Add" button. The event is moved from the left "Description" list box to the right box.
7. If there are events that are to be removed from the reaction, select the events in the right list box.
8. Click the "Remove" button. The event is moved from the right list box to the left list box.
9. From the "Addresses" list box, select the address you wish an email message to be sent to when the
selected events occurs.
10. Click the "Add" button. The address is moved from the "Addresses" list box to the "Add New
Addresses" list box.
11. If there are addresses that are to be removed from the reaction, select the addresses from the "Add
New Addresses" list box.
12. Click the "Remove" button. The address is moved from the "Add New Addresses" list box to the
"Addresses" list box.
13. Click the "Save Reactions" button. The reaction is saved.
Alarm Reaction Types
The Alarm "Reaction Types" menu is used for defining the parameters for Time and Geo Fence alarm
notification.
In order to receive notification of a fence violation you must select the type of violation you wish to alarm.
Select one of the following types of fence violation alarms:
• "Geo. Fence Exclusive Alarm"
• "Geo. Fence Inclusive Alarm"
• "Time Alarm"
In order to receive notification of fence configuration failure you must select one of the following fence
configuaration alarms:
• "Geo. Fence Inclusive Initialization Failure"
• "Time and Geo. Fence Application Not Enabled"
• "Time and Geo. Fence Invalid Command Length"
• "Time and Geo. Fence Invalid Configuration Alarm"
• "Time and Geo. Fence Invalid End Time"
• "Time and Geo. Fence Invalid Location Flag"
• "Time and Geo. Fence Invalid Start Time"
• "Time and Geo. Fence Password Failure"
In order to receive notification when equipment returns to inclusive boundary select "Geo. Fence Inclusive
Return Alert".
Note: AID: 0 is not supported.
Level "Reaction Types"

One of the "Reaction Types" that can be added or edited is the "Level" reaction type. The the "Add/Edit
Reactions" screen has the following "Reaction Types" levels:"Derate", "Severe", "Unknown Severity" and
"Warning".
"Reaction Type" with levels
The "Level" reaction types correspond to the Electronic Technician (ET) defined diagnostic severity levels.
Note that the "Add/Edit Reactions" screen is the only place that these levels are given alternate names. On
the "Transmission Registry", these levels are still referred to by the Electronic Technician names. The
following table lists the "Event Reactions" term and the corresponding ET diagnostic severity level.
Table 1
Corresponding "ET Diagnostic" Severity Level for "Reactions"
"Reaction Type" Level "ET Diagnostic" Severity Level
Derate Level 2
Severe Level 3
Unknown Level 0
Severity No Level
Warning Level 1
"Delete Reactions"
In order to delete an "Event Reactions", use the following procedure:
1. From the "Reactions" screen , select the check box next to the machine(s) with the reactions you wish
to delete.
2. Click the "Delete Reactions" button. The "Delete Reactions" screen will be displayed in a new
window.
"Delete Reactions"
(5) Check box
3. Select the check box (5) in the far right column that corresponds with the reaction you wish to delete.
4. Click the "OK" button. The reaction is deleted.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03365020
Upload Data
SMCS - 7600; 7606
The Caterpillar EquipmentManager database only begins storing information about a machine when
the Product Link Module (PLM) has been installed and registered, subscriptions have been purchased
and the PLM has begun submitting reports.
"Repair History"
There are two methods for uploading the repair history for a machine. The first method is by entering
the information about each individual service by using a form. Refer to "Upload "Repair History"
Using Form". The second method is by uploading a file that contains information about one or more
services that were performed on one or more machines. Refer to "Upload "Repair History" by
Importing From a File". Both of these methods are available on the "Repair History Upload" screen.
Upload "Repair History" Using Form

In order to upload the repair history by using the form, use the following procedure:
"Repair History Upload" screenusing a form
(1) "Submit information on a form" radio button
(2) Radio button
(3) Continue
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" menu, select "Repair History".
If equipment has already been selected, the "Repair History Upload" screen is displayed.
If you have not already selected equipment, the "Equipment Search" screen is displayed.
Perform your search, and then click the "Display Equipment" button. The "Repair History
Upload" screen will appear.
2. Select the "Submit information on a form" radio button (1) if "Submit information on a form" is
not already selected.
3. Select the radio button (2) that is next to the desired machine in order to upload the repair
history.
4. Click the "Continue" button (3) .
The "Report Service" screen will be displayed.

"Report Service" screen
5. In the "Service Report Common Info" section, select the appropriate checkbox for the service
that was performed.
If you selected "Dealer", a dropdown appears below the radio buttons. Select the name of the
"Dealer" that serviced the equipment and proceed to Step 7.
If you selected "Others", a text field appears below the radio buttons. Type the name of the
person or entity that serviced the equipment and proceed to Step 7.
6. Enter the work order number in the "Work Order" text field.
7. Enter the segment number in the "Segment" text field.
8. Enter the date that the service was performed by clicking the calendar icon that is next to the
"Repair Date" field. Select the date from the popup calendar.
9. Enter the Service Meter Units in the "Service Meter" text field. If the units were measured in
hours, select the "H" radio button. If the units were measured in miles, select the "M" radio
button. If the units were measured in kilometers, select the "KM" radio button.
10. Enter a description of the repair in the "Repair Description" text field.
11. Enter the time in hours that the machine was unavailable while being serviced in the
"Downtime Labor" text field.
12. Enter Information about faulty parts in the "Part Causing Failure" table including the part name,
manufacturer, quantity, defect code, and group number.
Click the "Add Part" button in order to create a new row in the table for additional parts. Select
the checkbox that is next to a part. Click the "Delete Part" button in order to remove the part
from the list.
13. Click the "Save" button. The repair history is uploaded.
Upload "Repair History" by Importing From a File

In order to import the repair history from a file, use the following procedur:
"Repair History Upload" screen by importing from a file
(4) "Import from a file" radio button
(5) Check box
(6) "Import From File" button
1. From the "Repair History Upload" screen, select the "Import from a file" radio button (4) .
2. Select the check box (5) next to the pieces of equipment to which you wish to upload repair
history.
3. Click the "Import From File" button (6) . The "Import From File" screen is displayed in a new
window.
"Import From File" screen browsing for a file
4. Click the "Browse" button. Navigate to the file that contains the repair history to be added.
Click the "Open" button. The name of the file that was selected appears in the "File" text field.
5. Click "OK". The repair history is uploaded.
Preparing a Repair History Upload File
Sample of a MicrosoftR Excel file using "Repair History Upload"

In order for a "Repair History Upload" file to be successfully uploaded, the file must contain the
correct fields and files. Also, the files must be formatted in a specific way. Illustration 5 is an example
of a spreadsheet that was used to create an upload file.
In order to create a "Repair History Upload" file, use the following procedure:
1. Open a new MicrosoftR Excel spreadsheet.
"Repair History Upload" Microsoft Excel - Columns A through F
(6) Column headers

"Repair History Upload" Microsoft Excel - Columns G through L
(6) Column headers
"Repair History Upload" Microsoft Excel - Columns M through S
(6) Column headers
2. Enter the repairs in the spreadsheet one repair per row. Refer to Illustrations 6 through 8 as
examples of the columns and values that should appear in the spreadsheet. Items that are
displayed in red indicate mandatory items.
3. Once you have finished entering data, delete the column headers (6) .
4. Go to "File", "Save As" and pick "CSV (Comma Delimited)" and save the file.
"Refueling History"
For "Repair History", information can be submitted as a form or an upload from a file. However, there
is only one method to upload the refueling history.
Import Refueling History from File

In order to import refueling history from a file, use the following procedure:
"Import Refuel History from File" screen
(5) Check box
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" menu, select "Refueling History".
If equipment has already been selected, the "Import Refuel History from File" screen is
displayed.
"Display Equipment" before proceeding to the next step.
2. Select the check box () next to the pieces of equipment to which you wish to upload refueling
history.
3. Click the "Import from File" button () . The "Import from File" screen opens in a new window.
4. Click the "Browse" button. Navigate to the file that contains the refueling history that is to be
added. Click the "Open" button. The name of the file that was selected will appear in the "File"
text field.
5. Click "OK". The refueling history is uploaded.
Preparing a Refueling History Upload File

In order for a "Refuel History Upload" file to be successfully uploaded, use the following procedure:
1. Open a new Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Sample of a Microsoft Excel file using "Refuel History" with headings
2. Enter the refuelings in the spreadsheet one refueling per row. Refer to Illustration 10 as an
example of the columns and values that should appear in the spreadsheet. Items that are
3. After you have finished entering data, delete the column headers.
4. Go to "File", "Save As" and pick "CVS (Comma Delimited)" and save the file.
Sample or a Microsoft Excel file using "Refuel History" without headings
Illustration 11 shows the final file without the headers.
".cvs" alert message

If you attempt to upload a file that is not of the ".csv " file type, you will get the message displayed in
Illustration 12.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03365163
Manage Major Repair Tracking

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Track Major Repairs

EquipmentManager can track major repairs in the same way that EquipmentManager can track planned
maintenance schedules. You must configure EquipmentManager to track major repairs through the
Administration screens.
In order to add or remove the tracking of major repairs, use the following procedure:
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" dropdown, select "Track Major Repairs".
If equipment has already been selected, the "Track Major Repairs Results" screen is displayed.
2. Select the radio button next to the pieces of equipment for which major repairs are to be tracked.
3. Click the "Track Major Repairs" button. The "Track Major Repairs" screen will be displayed.
"Track Major Repairs"
(1) "Add" button
4. From the "Select Repairs to track" list box, select all major repairs you wish to add to the repair
tracking.
Note: Multiple repairs can be selected by holding down the "Ctrl" key and clicking on the items you
wish to select.
5. Click the "Add" button (1). The repair is moved from the "Select Repairs to track" list box to the
"Repairs selected to track" list box.
6. From the "Repairs selected to track" list box, select all repairs you wish to remove from the repair
tracking.
7. Click the "Remove" button. The repair is moved from the "Repairs selected to track" list box to the
"Select Repairs to track" list box.
8. Click the "Continue" button.
The "Configure Repair Tracking intervals" screen will be displayed.

"Configure Repair Tracking intervals" screen
(2) "Save" button
(3) "Start tracking repair from" text field
(4) "Configured Interval" text field
9. In the "Configured Interval" text field (4), enter the number of hours that represents the interval for
each repair.
10. In the "Start tracking repair from" text field (3), enter the SMU hours you wish the repair to begin
being tracked.
11. Click the "Save" button (2). The "Confirmation – Configure Repair Tracking Intervals" screen will
be displayed.
"Confirmation – Configure Repair Tracking Intervals" screen
12. Click "OK". The major repair tracking is saved.

"Configure Repair Tracking intervals" screen if repairs have been deleted from "Track Major Repair" details
(2) "Save" button
If you removed any events or major repairs, clicking the "Save" button (2) will result in Illustration 4.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03365722
Manage Time Fence and Geographic Fence

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Geographic Fences and Time Fences

During normal working conditions, machines can move in and out of yards. Machines can also move
to different job sites. A machine will not normally travel beyond a designated work area. The
EquipmentManager software will record the location of a machine as history, unless the machine
travels beyond the normal work area.
The EquipmentManager software uses the following features in order to track the machines:
Inclusive Geographic Fencing and Exclusive Geographic Fencing - The ability to be alerted when
one of your machines is either inside or outside of a particular geographical area
Time Fencing - The ability to be alerted when one of your machines is operating either outside or
inside of a designated time of the day
In the "Administration" section of EquipmentManager you use Asset Watch in order to set up the
fences that can be applied to individual machines or to groups of machines. Refer to the Systems
Operation, "Time Fence and Geographic Fence" for detailed descriptions.
Inclusive and Exclusive Descriptions

Inclusive and exclusive descriptions are descriptions of the geographical areas that make up the
geographic fences. You can create as many descriptions as desired. Creating and storing these
descriptions in advance, so that you can apply them to your equipment when needed, will save you
time.
When creating the descriptions, inclusive and exclusive are the same. When assigning a machine to a
geographic fence, you must choose whether the fence is inclusive or exclusive.
Note: The information in the Systems Operation, "Time Fence and Geographic Fence" describes
some practical scenarios where previously created geographic and time fences can be assigned to
machines. In this module, you will focus on creating these descriptions.
Add Descriptions
In order to add descriptions by using a map, use the following procedure:
1. In the "View" box, select "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions". The "Inclusive/Exclusive

Descriptions" screen will appear.
2. Click "Map Lat/Long". The "Internet Map" screen will appear.

3. In the "Description" box, type a description for the new fence.
4. Define the center of a geographic fence by using one of the following methods:
◦ In the "Latitude/Longitude" boxes, type the desired values.
◦ Click a point on the map. In order to help establish the desired location, you can use the
zoom in button and zoom out button to the right of the map. You can also use the
"North", "South", "East", and "West" buttons on the borders of the map.
◦ Select the icon of a magnifying glass. This enables you to enter a street address, city,
state, and/or zip code.
Note: The options for entering a street address, city, state, and/or zip code are only available in
North America.
5. Configure the radius of the fence by dragging the "Fence Radius" slider to the appropriate
location.
Note: The fence radius values will display in whole kilometers. If your units of measure
preference is miles, the fence will be configured in kilometers, converted to miles, and then
displayed in miles.
6. Click "OK". The "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen displays the new values in the "Add
New Description" section.
7. Click "Add Location". A confirmation message will appear.
"Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen with the added location

8. Click "OK". The location is added to the list of descriptions at the top of the
"Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen. Refer to Illustration 4.
Edit "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions"

In order to edit an inclusive/exclusive description on the "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen,
click the pencil and paper icon (1) to the right of the description that you want to edit. Refer to
Illustration 4. The "Edit Description" section appears. Use the procedure described earlier for
changing the parameters using the map. When the changes have been made, click "Save".
Delete "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions"

In order to delete an inclusive/exclusive description, use the following procedure:
"Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen for deleting
1. On the "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen, select the check box for the description that
you want to delete.
2. Click "Delete Location Descriptions". A confirmation window will appear.

3. Click "OK". The description is deleted.
Time Based Descriptions

In order to create a "Time Based Description", use the following procedure:
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop down menu, select "Time Based
Descriptions". The "Time Based Descriptions" screen will be displayed.
"Time Based Descriptions" with "Add New Description"

2. In the "Add New Description" section, enter a description of the new time fence in the
"Description" text field.
3. In the "Working Hours" section, select an hour from the "Start Time" drop down menu.
4. Select the radio button next to the "Start Time" "AM" or "PM".
"End Time greater than Start Time" alert message
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the End Time.
Note: If you enter an "End Time" that is less than the S"tart Time" the window in Illustration 8
will appear.
6. In the "Working Days" section, select the checkbox next to the days of the week to which you
want the fence to apply.
7. Click the "Add" button. The new description is added to the list at the top of the screen.
Edit a Time Based Description

In order to edit a time based description, use the following procedure:
Editing "Time Based Description"
1. From the "Time Based Descriptions" screen, click the pencil and paper icon (1) next to the
description you wish to edit. The "Edit Description" section will be displayed.
2. In the "Edit Description" section, edit the description of the time fence in the "Description"
field.
3. Edit the "Start Time" and "End Time" hours and "AM" or "PM".
4. Edit the selected "Working Days".
5. Click the "Save" button. A confirmation window will appear.

Confirmation message for editing "Time Based Description"
6. Click "OK". The updated description appears in the list at the top of the screen.
Delete a Time Based Description

In order to delete a time based description, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Time Based Descriptions" screen, select the checkbox next to the description you
wish to delete. Refer to Illustration 10.
2. Click the "Delete Location Descriptions" button. Refer to Illustration 10. A confirmation
window will appear.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03371424
Manage Planned Maintenance

SMCS - 7600; 7606
One of the ways that EquipmentManager helps you manage your equipment is by organizing the often
complex task of managing planned maintenance for your equipment. Through the administration section of
EquipmentManager, you can customize the intervals at which planned maintenance is performed, edit the
checklists that are used to guide the planned maintenance, and customize the scheduling of the planned
maintenance for individual or groups of equipment.
Customize PM Intervals
For each piece of equipment you are managing, default planned maintenance intervals exist. These default
intervals are defined in the Operation Maintenance Manual specific to each Caterpillar models. Default
intervals are applied to a manufactures models other than Caterpillar. The intervals indicate the Service
Meter Unit (SMU) that when reached by the machine, should trigger a planned maintenance. You have the
option of setting these intervals to values other than the defaults.
In order to customize PM Intervals, use the following procedure:
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Customize PM
Intervals".
"Customize PM Intervals - Select Results" screen
(1) Radio buttons
(2) "Customize" button
2. Select the radio button (1) next to the piece of equipment in order to customize the "PM Interval" for
the equipment.
Warning for trusting the applet

3. Click the "Customize" button (2) . A warning for trusting the applet will appear. Refer to Illustration
2.
4. Click "Yes". The "Customize PM Intervals" screen will be displayed.
"Customize PM Intervals"
(3) Gray slider
(4) Text field
5. In order to change the " PM Interval", drag the gray slider (3) to the desired value (measured in
SMUs) or edit the value in the text field (4) that appears below the PM.
The "Successful" message for "Customize PM Intervals"
6. Click the "Save" button. A successful message will be displayed. Refer to Illustration 4.
7. Click "OK". The PM Intervals have been customized.
"Reset All PM Intervals" confirmation message
If you choose to click the "Reset to Default" button on the "Customize PM Intervals" screen, the window as
shown in Illustration 5 will appear.
No "PM Interval" changes message
If you click the "Save" button on the "Customize PM Intervals" screen and have not changed from the
defaults, the window as shown in Illustration 6 will appear.
Edit PM Check List
The PM Checklist is a description of the steps that should be taken when performing a planned
maintenance. The steps can include everything from checking fluid levels to replacing parts. Through
EquipmentManager you can edit these checklists to add, edit, or remove steps.
Note: Complete checklists that are applied for Caterpillar models and serial numbers from model year 2000
or newer. Generic checklists that are applied for Caterpillar models and serial numbers older than 2000 as
well as other manufacture models.
"Edit PM Check List"

In order to edit a step in a check list, use the following procedure:
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Edit PM Check
List".
If you have equipment already selected, the "Edit PM Check List - Search Results" screen will be
displayed.
"Edit PM Checklist - Select Results" screen
(1) Radio button

(5) "Edit PM Checklist" button
2. Select the radio button (1) next to the piece of equipment for which you wish to edit a PM Checklist.
3. Click the "Edit PM Checklist" button (5) . The "Edit PM Check List" screen will be displayed.
"Edit PM Check List" screen with the "Parts" collapsed
(6) "Expand all Parts" link
(7) "Select PM to edit" drop-down menu
(8) "Parts" link
4. Select the planned maintenance you wish to edit from the "Select PM to edit" drop-down menu (7) .
5. In order to view the parts associated with a step, click the blue triangle icon or the "Parts" link (8) . In
order to view all parts in the checklist click the blue triangle icon or the "Expand all Parts" link (6) .
The expanded checklist will be displayed.
"Edit PM Check List" screen with the "Parts" expanded
(9) " Collapse all Parts"
(10) "editStep" button
6. Click the "editStep" button (10) next to the step that you wish to edit. The "Edit Step" window will
be displayed.
Note: In order to collapse all the parts in the checklist click the blue triangle icon or the " Collapse all
Parts" link (9) .
"Edit Step" window
(11) "Description" field
(12) "Additional Parts" button
7. Edit the description of the step in the "Description" field (11) .
8. Edit the number of hours in the "Down Time" text field.
9. Edit the number of hours in the "Labor" text field.
10. If you wish to add a part to the step, click the "Additional Parts" button (12) . A row with part fields
will appear below the step description.
"Edit Step" window with additional parts options
11. Enter a quantity in the "Quantity" text field.
"Enter Part Quantity" alert message
Note: If you fail to enter a part quantity, the message in Illustration 12 will appear
12. Enter a part number in the "Part Number" field.
13. Select either the "Solid" or "Fluid" radio button.
14. Enter a description of the part in the "Description" text field.
15. Enter notes in the "Notes" text field.
16. Repeat Steps 9 through 14 until you have added all the desired parts.
17. If you wish to remove a part from the step, select the check box next to the part you wish to delete.
18. Click the blue "Delete Parts" button.
19. Repeat Steps 17 and 18 until you have removed all desired parts.
20. Click the "Save" button. The edited checklist step is saved.
Add New Step to Checklist

In order to add a new step to a checklist, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Edit PM Checklist" screen, click the "Add New Steps" button. Refer to Figure 8. The
"Add New Steps" window will be displayed.
"Add New Step(s)" screen
(13) "Add New Steps" button
(14) "Delete Parts" button

2. Complete the fields on the "Add New Steps" screen. The fields are the same as the fields that are in
the "Edit Step" window.
3. If you wish to add more than one step, click the "Add New Steps" button (13) and repeat Step 2.
Note: If you need to delete parts, click the blue "Delete Parts" button (14) .
Attaching a new step to a PM
(15) Check box
(16) "Save" button
4. Once you have added all desired steps and parts, click the "Save" button (16) . The "Higher PM
details" window will be displayed.
5. The new steps you added will be added to the planned maintenance that you selected from the drop-
down menu, but you can also add these steps to other PMs. Select the check box (15) next to all of
the PMs to which you wish to add the new steps.
6. Click the "Save" button. The new steps are added to the planned maintenance.
Confirmation message for no additional PM's being attached
Note: If you did not select any additional PMs to add the step to, the confirmation window in Illustration 15
will appear. Click the "OK" button.
"Customize PM Schedule"
You can customize the interval at which planned maintenances are scheduled. PM schedule intervals can be
hour based or date based. You can also apply an offset to the schedule if desired (default is no offset
applied). Each interval and its description follows:
"Hour based" - Interval schedule based on hour (SMU) accumulation of the equipment.
"Date based" - Interval schedule based on calendar days.
"Offset" - Next scheduled service calculated from previous service details. If offset is not applied
(default), the schedule will ignore previous service details and adhere to fixed" PM Intervals".
Configuring Equipment for Hour Based PM Scheduling

In order to configure equipment for hour based PM scheduling, use the following procedure:
Schedule".
If you have equipment already selected, the "Customize PM Schedule - Select Equipment" screen
will be displayed.
"Customize PM Schedule - Select Equipment"
(1) Radio buttons
2. Select the radio button (1) next to the piece of equipment you wish to configure for hour based
scheduling.
3. Click the "Customize" button (2) . The "Customize PM Schedule" screen will be displayed.
"Hour Based PM Scheduling"
(17) "Follow Offset" check box
(18) "Select a PM Schedule type" drop-down menu
(19) "Save" button
4. If not already selected, select "Hour Based Scheduling" from the "Select a PM Schedule type" drop-
down menu (18) .
5. In order for the PM Schedule to follow offset, select the "Follow Offset" check box (17) .
Note: If you select Follow Offset, the next planned maintenance will be scheduled at the interval
starting from when the last planned maintenance was performed. For example, if a planned
maintenance is scheduled for every 500 SMUs and the first PM is performed after 600 SMUs, the
next PM will be scheduled for 1100 SMUs rather than 1000.
If you do not select Follow Offset, the next planned maintenance will be scheduled at a fixed
interval. For example, if the PM is scheduled for every 500 SMUs and the first PM is performed after
600 SMUs, the next PM will still be scheduled for 1000 SMUs.
6. Click the "Save" button (19) . The "Hour based PM Schedule Success" screen will be displayed.
"Hour based PM Schedule" configuration successful message
(20) "OK" button
7. Click the "OK" button. The equipment has been configured for hour based PM scheduling.
Configuring Equipment for Date Based PM Scheduling

Date based PM schedules are available for equipment that do not apply to an hour based schedule. One
example would be a standby generator set. In order to configure equipment for date based PM Scheduling,
use the following procedure:
1. From the "Customize PM Schedule - Select Equipment" screen, select the radio button next to the
piece of equipment you wish to configure for date based PM scheduling. Refer to Figure 16.
2. Click the "Customize" button. Refer to Figure 16. The "Customize PM Schedule" screen will be
displayed.
Customizing the "Date based PM Schedule"
(21) "User Interval" text fields
(19) "Save" button
3. If not already selected, select "Date Based Scheduling" from the "Select a PM Schedule type:" drop-
down menu.
4. Select whether or not you wish the "PM Schedule" to follow offset or not by selecting or deselecting
the "Follow Offset" check box.
5. If you want the scheduling interval to be different than the default interval, enter the number of days
in the "User Interval" text fields (21) .
Confirmation message for change "PM Schedule" from hour based to date based
6. Click the "Save" button (19) . If you changed the scheduling type from hour based to date based, the
"Date based" confirmation message will appear. If not, skip to Step 8.
7. Click "OK". The "Date based PM Schedule Success" screen will be displayed.
"Date based PM Schedule" configuration successful message
(20) "OK" button
8. Click "OK". The equipment has been successfully configured for date based PM scheduling.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03332823
Preferences
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
Each person that uses EquipmentManager to manage equipment may use EquipmentManager in slightly
different ways. For this reason, each EquipmentManager user can set the preferences in order to utilize the
application more efficiently and effectively. This provides individual levels of customization of the
application that will fulfill individual process needs.
"Set Your Preferences"

Complete the following procedure, in order to set your preferences for the first time or change your
preferences:
"Set Your Preferences" screen
1. From the left navigation, click the "Preferences" tab. The "Set Your Preferences" screen will be
displayed.
2. Set the preferences or edit the preferences by changing values in the drop-down menus, input boxes,
and list boxes that appear next to the names of the preference.
3. Click "Update Preferences". The "Confirmation – Set Your Preferences" screen will be displayed.
"Confirmation - Set Your Preferences" screen

4. Click the "OK" button at the very bottom of the screen. Your preferences will be saved and the "Set
Your Preferences" screen will be displayed.
Available Preference Values

The following table lists the available values for each of the preferences that appear on the "Set Your
Preferences" screen.
Table 1
Name of Preference Available Values
"All Equipment"
"Default Group In Event Summary Page" (Equipment Groups you created)
(Equipment Groups you have been assigned)
"MM/DD/YYYY "
"DD/MM/YYYY"
"Date Format" "DD-MON-YY"
"DD-MON-YYYY"
"MON-DD,YYYY"
"12 Hr Format"
"Time Format" "24 Hour (Military Time)"
"12 Hr with AM/PM"
(A list of all time zones appears in the drop-down
"Time Zone"
menu)
"Observe Daylight Savings Time"
"Daylight Savings"
"Ignore Daylight Savings Time"
"Nearest City"
"Location Display" "Latitude/Longitude (Deg/Min/Sec)"
"Latitude/Longitude (Delorme Decimal)"
"10 records"
"20 records"
"Records Per Page"
"50 records"
"100 records"
"3 Months"
"6 Months"
"9 Months"
"History Details Shown" "1 Year"
"2 Years"
"3 Years"
"5 Years"
"Miles"
"Distance Unit"
"Kilometers"
"Gallons"
"Fuel Unit"
"Liters"
"Unit ID"
"Unit ID Display"
"Equipment ID"
(A list of over 240 countries appears in the list box)
"Country"
"Weekly"
"Notify Manual Service Meter Maintenance "Monthly"
Update" "Never"
"6 Weeks"
"Event Summary Results Page"
"S· O· S Results Page"
"Remote Monitoring Report"
"Utilization Monitoring Report"
"Display Search Results In"
"Planned Maintenance Page"
"Fault Code Results Page"
"Time and Geographic Fencing Alarms Page"
"Location/SMU Page"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03323941
Preference Detail
SMCS - 7600; 7606
"Default Group In Event Summary Page"
Setting the preference for the default for "Select a Group"
(1) "Select a Group" drop-down menu
The default preference is "All Equipment" for the "Select a Group" drop-down menu (1). Other
options will appear in this drop-down menu only when groups of documents have been created or you
have been given access to groups of documents that were created by other users.
If you select a group from the drop-down menu and you update your preferences, from that time
forward the value in the "Select a Group" drop-down menu (1) in the "Event Summary" section of the
"EquipmentManager Home" screen will default to the group that was selected on the "Set Your
Preferences" screen. For example, if the preferences of "DocGrp" was chosen, Illustration 1 is an
example of the "Event Summary" section of the "EquipmentManager Home" screen that will appear
after the initial time.
Also, EquipmentManager allows you to manage your equipment by an exception. There are three
"Status" levels of events.
Action (red) - The "Action" status indicates an event that is deemed of the highest importance.
"Action" events should be given the most attention and "Action" events should be resolved first.
Monitor (yellow) - The "Monitor" status indicates an event that should have attention, but this event
does not require immediate resolution.
Normal (green) - The "Normal" status indicates an event that is deemed least important of the actions
that require attention or resolution.
"Date Format" and "Time Format" Preferences

The "Date Format" and the "Time Format" that are used to display all dates and times throughout
EquipmentManager may be set to your preference.
In the "Time Zone" drop-down menu, the time may be set to the time zone of your dealership, the
time zone of the location of your equipment, or any other time zone.
In the "Time Format" drop-down menu, the time may be viewed with the following options: "12 Hr
Format", "12 Hr with AM/PM" and "24 Hour (Military Time)".
In the "Daylight Savings" drop-down menu, the daylight savings time may be chosen.
Example of the "Date Format" and the "Time Format"
(2) "Date/Time"
The "Planned Maintenance" screen is an example that displays "Date/Time" (2) within
EquipmentManager. Refer to Illustration 2.
"Location Display"
EquipmentManager uses GPS to determine the location (3) of your equipment. On the "Set Your
Preferences" screen, you can choose to display the location in any one of the following three formats:
• "Nearest City"
Format for the "Nearest City"
(3) Location
• "Latitude/Longitude (Deg/Min/Sec)"
Format for the "Latitude/Longitude (Deg/Min/Sec)"
(3) Location
• "Latitude/Longitude (DeLorme Decimal)"
Format for the" Latitude/Longitude (DeLorme Decimal)"
(3) Location
"Records Per Page"
The preference of 10 records for the records per page
The number of records that are displayed per page may be set for the list of information of the
equipment that is returned from EquipmentManager. Illustration 6 indicates an "Event Summary" list
with 68 machines that have been divided into 10 results per page. If the same list was divided into 50
records per page, there would be only two pages instead of seven pages.
"History Details Shown"
"History Details Shown" preference
(4) "Start Date"
(5) "End Date"
When the page for the "Repair & Maintenance History" of a machine is being viewed, a "Start
Date" (4) and an "End Date" (5) may be entered in order to indicate the span of history for viewing.
By setting a "History Details Shown" preference, you are setting the default values that will appear in
the "Start Date" and "End Date" fields. For example, if you set a "History Details Shown" preference
of three months, the "End Date" field will default to the current date and the "Start Date" will default
to a date that is exactly three months prior to the current date.
Units
There are two types of preferences for units that can be set:
• "Distance Unit"
• "Fuel Unit"
The first type of preference is the "Distance Unit".
"Distance Unit" preference

(6) "Miles"
(7) "Kilometers"
You may select either "Miles" (6) or "Kilometers" (7) .
The second type of preference that can be set is the "Fuel Unit".
"Fuel Units" preference
(8) Liters
"Fuel Unit" preference
(9) Gallons
You may select either "Liters" (8) or "Gallons" (9) .
Country
"Product Link Module Details" section of the "Advanced Search" screen
(10) "Location: State/Province" drop-down menu
From the "Set Your Preferences" screen in the "Country" drop-down menu, a country or multiple
countries may be selected. The preference for the country or countries will determine the states or
provinces that will appear in the "Location: State/Province" drop-down menu (10) on the "Advanced
Search" screen. For example, if the preference for a country is set to "Canada", the "Location:
State/Province" field will be filled with the Canadian provinces on the "Advanced Search" screen.
"Notify Manual Service Meter Maintenance Update"

EquipmentManager can be used to manage "Planned Maintenance" on equipment that does not
contain a Product Link Module (PLM). In this case, the dealer or the customer subscribes to
Maintenance Watch. With Maintenance Watch and no PLM on the equipment, you must enter the
"Service Meter Update" manually. From the "Set Your Preferences" screen in the "Notify Manual
Service Meter Maintenance Update" drop-down menu, you may indicate the frequency of notification
from EquipmentManager. This frequency will be used for the entry of data of service meter units for
equipment with Maintenance Watch subscriptions. The following values are available: "Weekly",
"Monthly", "6 Weeks" and "Never".
The "Planned Maintenance" screen with "Load SMU"
(11) "Load SMU" link
Illustration 13 above displays the "Planned Maintenance" screen for a piece of equipment that has no
PLM and a Maintenance Watch subscription. Notice that "Load SMU" link (11) is present in the
"Current" column. In order to update the SMU manually, select this link. After clicking this link, the
"Manual Maintenance – Service Meter Update" window will be displayed.
"SMU Update" window
(12) Radio buttons
In the "SMU Update" window, the frequency of notification for updating the service meter units can
be changed by selecting one of the radio button (12) .

When you perform a search for EquipmentManager data about a given set of equipment, the display
of the results for the search default to the "Event Summary Results Page". By using the "Set Your
Preferences" screen, you may change the page of the results from the search that are first displayed.
For example, if you use EquipmentManager most often to check the location of your equipment, you
can change your "Display Search Results In" preference to "Location/SMU Page". Then, when you
perform the next search, the results will be displayed first in "Location/SMU Page".
The following values for the "Display Search Results In" preferences are available:
• "Event Summary Results Page"
• "S·O·S Results Page"
• "Remote Monitoring Report"

• "Utilization Monitoring Report"
• "Planned Maintenance Page"
• "Fault Code Results Page"
• "Time and Geographic Fencing Alarms Page"
• "Location/SMU Page"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03333061
Asset Watch
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
The Asset Watch subscription is used for monitoring and managing the usage and the location of your
equipment.
"Exception Dashboard"
(1) "Event Summary" section
(2) "Status" levels
(3) "Equipment Search" section
The default home screen of EquipmentManager is known as the "Exception Dashboard". Refer to
Illustration 1. This screen features the following two sections:
• "Event Summary" section (1)
• "Equipment Search" section (3)
"Event Summary"
EquipmentManager allows you to manage your equipment by an exception. There are three "Status"
levels (2) of events:
Normal (green) - The "Normal" status indicates an event that is deemed of the least importance of the
actions that require attention or resolution.
Search Using "Event Summary"
"Event Summary" search with popup text
(5) "Equipment" column
(6) "Incidents" column
(7) "S·O·S Incident Refresh" button
(8) "View Checked" button
Perform the following procedure in order to use "Event Summary" section (1) to search for issues and
view issues that need to be resolved:
1. Select a group of equipment from the "Select a Group" drop-down menu (4) or select a
customer from the "Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu. Once a selection has been made,
the "Equipment" column (5) and the "Incidents" column (6) for each "Status" level will be filled
with the number of machines and incidents that are outstanding. Refer to Illustration 2.
2. Point to any of the "Incidents" fields for more information of the events that are outstanding and
for a count for each level. For example, when you point to the number of incidents in the
"Incidents" column (6) , a boxof text will be displayed with a breakdown of the events by
category and by quantity.
3. In order to view the detail of the machines with outstanding events, select the check box next to
the "Status" level or "Status" levels. Any of the check boxes or all of the check boxes can be
selected. Then, click "View Checked" button (8) in order to display results. Results appear on
the "Event Summary" screen. Refer to ""Event Summary" Screen" for more information.
Note: In order to perform a refresh of the S·O·S alerts, press the "S·O·S Incident Refresh"
button (7) .
Search Using "Equipment Search"
"Equipment Search"
The lower section of the default EquipmentManager home screen is the "Equipment Search" section
(3) . This provides another way to narrow the search of the equipment. This is the same "Equipment
Search" form that is used throughout EquipmentManager. Complete at least one of the fields on the
form and click "Display Equipment".
"Event Summary" Screen

"Event Summary"
(9) Check boxes for the equipment
(10) "View:" drop-down menu
of the results default to the "Event Summary" screen. The "Event Summary" table contains the
following columns: "Eqpt Id" ("Equipment Id"), "Manufacturer", "Model", "Serial Number", "Events"
and "Status".
If a machine has multiple events of the same category, the information can be expanded by clicking
the icon that is a blue triangle. This icon will show a brief description of each of the events in that
category.
Clicking on the hyperlink of the name of the event will move you to the appropriate detailed screen in
EquipmentManager. This screen may be an "Event History" screen, a "Planned Maintenance" screen,
a "S·O·S" screen, or another screen.
Select the check box for the equipment (9) in order to update the status. Then, select the "Update
Status" button.
Change the view of the results by selecting a option from the "View:" drop-down menu (10) .
Location and Service Meters

On the"Event Summary" screen, select "Location and Service Meters" from the "View" drop-down
menu (10) . The "Location and Service Meters" screen will be displayed.
(11) "Serial Number" column
(12) "Last Update Date/Time" column
The links in the "Serial Number" column (11) are linked to the "Equipment Details" screen and the
links in the "Last Update Date/Time" column (12) are linked to the "Status History" screen.
"Status History"
The "Status History" is a record of all the status reports that were sent by a Product Link ModulePLM.
The "Status" report contains the information about the status of the actual PLM.
To view the "Status History" screen, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Location and Service Meters" screen, click the date of one of the pieces of equipment
in the "Last Update Date/Time" column. The "Status History" screen will be displayed.
"Status History"
2. The range of the date is set by your preferences. In order to temporarily change the range of the
date, click the icon of a calendar that is next to the "Start Date" field (13) and "End Date" field
(14) . Then, select a date for indicating a time period for the "Status History".
3. Click the "Change Date Range" button. The "Status History" table will perform a refresh in
order to reflect the updated range of the date.
4. Click the "Back" button in order to return to the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
The following table describes the fields that are found on the "Status History" screen.
Table 1
The date and time of the status report are displayed if the PLM is
"Date/Time" set to send status once per day. These values should be different by
approximately one day for each time.
"Power
Loss" (Low Yes, No
somewhere between this status report and the last status report.
Voltage)
Yes, No
Yes, No,
N/A
"PW Alarms"
Active (1)
"Active" (1) – The machine has operated in the last 48 hours.
"Sleep" (2) – The machine has not operated for greater than 48
"Power Mode" hours but less than one week. The PLM will activate every 6 hours
Sleep (2)
in order to send the messages every 6 hours. Position messages
will only be sent if the unit has changed position by greater than
200 meters.
"Hibernate" (3) – The machine has not operated for more than one
"Event Indicates that an event was recorded and will be sent (PL321
Yes, No
Pending" system only).
"Digital #
Active"
"Service Meter History"

Use the following procedure in order to view the "Service Meter History":
1. In order to view the "Service Meter History" for a machine, select a service meter reading for a
machine from the "Service Meter (hours)" column on the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
2. Change the range of the date, if necessary. Click "Back" in order to return to the "Location and
Service Meters" screen.
"Location History"
Use the following procedure to view the "Location History" of a machine.
1. In order to view the "Location History" for a machine, select the location of a machine from the
"Service Meter (hours)" column on the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
"Location History"
2. The "Location History" screen will appear. Change the range of the date, if necessary. Click
"Back" in order to return to the "Location and Service Meter" screen.
"Location Report Frequency"

Product Link is configured to a maximum of four reports of the location per day. The first location
report is sent at the Report Start Time. The Position Report Minimum Location Change configuration
defines the minimum distance the machine must move since the last report in order for a position
report to be sent. If the minimum configured distance has not been met, Product Link will not send a
position report. The minimum distance that is permitted is zero meters and the maximum distance is
200 meters. If the parameter is set to zero meters, then the PLM will send a position report 4 times a
day regardless of movement. Refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting,
RENR7911, "Manage Hardware", and to Special Instruction, REHS2365, "Product Link
PL121SRPL121SR and PL300PL300 Installation Guide".
Last Known Location

If a valid location from the GPS is not obtained in the given time, the last known location will be
displayed in EquipmentManager. This "stale" location will be identified with "(Last Known)" in the
"Location and Service Meter" view. Refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and
Adjusting, RENR7911, "Installation Parameters Conifgure" for more information about the GPS Fix
Validity Time Duration parameter.
"Map Locations"
There are two options for creating the map of the location of your machine. The machine can be
plotted on a map from either the "Location and Service Meters" screen or from the "Location History"
screen.
1. In order to view the location of a machine on the map from the "Location and Service Meters"
screen that is in the "Equipment Information" section, select the check box next to the machine.
2. Click the "Map Locations" button. The "Equipment Location Map" screen will be displayed.
"Equipment Location Map"
(15) Marker for the equipment
3. The location of the machine is plotted on a map with identification of a landmark and a city
street. Use the "Zoom In" and "Zoom Out" buttons to change your view of the map. Click near
the marker of the equipment (15) that is being viewed in order to center the marker in the
window of the map. When you are done, click the "Back" button in the upper left hand corner
in order to return to the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
Note: The information of the location will be displayed per user preference. The display for the
"Nearest City" will show the location of a machine relative to public landmarks or city centers.
The location can also be displayed with the latitude and the longitude. These coordinates can be
entered into routing software in order to provide driving directions.
The other way to create the map of the location is from the "Location History" screen.
"Service Meter (hours)" column on the "Location and Service Meters" screen. Refer to
Illustration 5. The "Location History" screen will be displayed. Refer to Illustration 8.
2. Click the "Map the latest location" button. The "Equipment Location Map" screen will be
displayed. Refer to Illustration 9.
Note: Click "Map the latest location" button in order to start the EquipmentManager software for
maps that is being used currently. Click "Map the latest location 2" in order to start the new software
that is being considered by Caterpillar as a replacement to option 1. Click on the "here" link in order
to send your comments to Caterpillar about the mapping software.
"Start/Stop Time History"

"Start/Stop Time History" is available if the PLM is configured to record the history. "Start Time" and
"Stop Time" details are available when the equipment "Serial Number" will be displayed in bold
print.
1. In order to view the "Start/Stop Time History" screen for a machine, select the check box next
to the machine. Refer to Illustration 10.
2. Click the "Start/Stop Time" button. The "Start/Stop Time History" screen will be displayed.
Note: If Machine Security System is installed, the "Key ID" will be displayed in the "Operator
Id" column in EquipmentManager.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02943044
Time Fence and Geographic Fence

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Types of Fences
The EquipmentManager software uses time fencing and geographic fencing to trigger some action if a
machine travels beyond a designated work area. Time fencing and geographic fencing use inclusive
geographic functions, exclusive geographic functions, and functions that are based on time.
Inclusive Geographic Fencing

By applying an inclusive geographic fence to your equipment, any movement of the equipment
beyond a predetermined geographical boundary can trigger an alarm. The alarm will indicate when a
machine moves beyond a predetermined geographical area.
Exclusive Geographic Fencing

By applying an exclusive geographic fence to your equipment, any movement of the equipment
within a predetermined geographical boundary can trigger an alarm. The alarm will indicate that the
equipment is inside of a predetermined geographical area.
Time Fencing
By applying a time fence to your equipment, any operation of the equipment beyond a predetermined
period of time can trigger an alarm. The alarm will indicate that the equipment is operating beyond a
predetermined period of time.
"Time and Geographic Fencing" Screen

Access the "Time and Geographic Fencing" Screen
Use the following procedure to access the "Time and Geographic Fencing" configuration screen.
1. Search for equipment and view the results in the "Event Summary" screen.
2. In the "View" box, select "Time and Geographic Fencing". The "Time and Geographic
Fencing" screenwill appear.
View "Time and Geo. Fence Alarm History"

To view a history of time fencing and geographic fencing alarms for a machine, use the following
procedure:
1. Access the "Time and Geographic Fencing" screen.
2. View the "Latest Time and Geo. Fence Alarms" column. Select one of the following links in
order to view the information for that machine:
"view history details" - This link displays previous alarms that have been resolved. The data
from the alarm is now stored for historical reference.
"Time and Geo Fence Alarms" - This link displays data for a current alarm. This link will
also show the status of an alarm that has been resolved if the alarm has not been updated.
3. Click on a link in the "Fence Description" column in order to view details of the configuration
of the fence. The map on the screen will include the fence as well as the location of a machine
at the time of an alarm.
Note: Product Link sends an alarm message immediately when the radius of a fence is violated.
However, the speed of a machine may cause the machine to appear closer to the radius of a fence in
the map view. For example, a machine traveling at normal road speeds of 40 mph or more may
display a fence violation at a location as far as a couple of city blocks from the actual point of the
fence violation. After the initial alarm, a subsequent alarm will be sent each day that the equipment
remains outside of the radius of the fence. This subsequent message is sent with the first message of
each day.
"Update Status"
The EquipmentManager software enables you to update the status of an alarm for time fencing and
geographic fencing. If you update the status of the alarm to "Resolved", the status will no longer
appear on the "Event Summary "screen. Also, the status will no longer appear on the
EquipmentManager home screen. The EquipmentManager home screen is also referred to as the
"Exception Dashboard".
To update the status of an alarm in time fencing and geographic fencing, use the following procedure:
1. Navigate to the "Time and Geographic Fencing" screen. Locate the row with the information
about your equipment. Click in the box to the left of the equipment.
Note: You can also update the status of an alarm for time fencing and geographic fencing from
the "Time and Geo. Fence Alarm History" screen.
2. Click the "Update Status" button at the bottom of your screen. The "Update Status" window
will appear. In the "Update Status" menu, select the status for your equipment. Refer to Table 1
for a list of the "Update Status" options.
Note: "Resolved" will not be displayed on the "Event Summary" screen or on the "Exception
Dashboard" screen. However, the details of the alarm are stored in History.
Table 1
"Status" "Color" "Importance"
"Action" "Red" "Highest"
"Monitor" "Yellow" "Medium"
"Normal" "Green" "Lowest"
"Resolved"
Note: The Status can be changed to any value. A status of "Action", "Monitor", or "Normal"
enables the event to remain outstanding. This state will be reflected on the "Exception
Dashboard" screen and on the "Event Summary" screen.
3. Click in the box under the "Notes/Comments" column.
4. Type a message in order to describe the reason for the update. The message should describe
actions that were taken in order to address the event.
5. Click "Save" in order to update the status of the alarm .

"Setup Fence"
The "Setup Fence" screen allows you to configure the following: inclusive parameters for the fence,
exclusive parameters for the fence and parameters for time for the fence. The procedures that follow
will demonstrate the features of the "Setup Fence" screen.
Preliminary Steps
1. Navigate to the "Time and Geographic Fencing" screen. Locate your machine from the list of
machines. Click in the box in the left hand column next to your machine in order to configure
the fence for that machine.
2. Click the "Setup Fence" button. The "Setup Fence " configuration screen will appear. This
screen will allow you to add fences for the selected machine. Determine the type of fence
required for the application. Follow the procedure for the type of fence selected in order to
configure the fence for the machine.
Add Inclusive Geographic Fence

To create an inclusive geographic fence in a map, use the procedure that follows.
1. View the "Inclusive" section of the "Setup Fence" configuration screen. Select the radio button
next to the fence that is to be to configured.
Note: The color on the "Fence Radius" slider coincides with the selected fence.
2. Type a description for the new fence in the "Description" field.
3. Use one of the following methods in order to define the center of a geographic fence:
◦ Click a point on the map. To help establish the desired location, you can use the
"Zoom" tool to the right of the map. You can also use the "North", "South", "East", and
"West" buttons. These buttons are located on the borders of the map.
◦ Click on the icon of the magnifying glass. This method enables you to enter a street
address, city, state, and/or zip code. Note that this option is only available in North
America.
4. In order to configure the radius of the fence, drag the "Fence Radius" slider to the appropriate
location.
Note: The radius of the fence is displayed in kilometers. If your "Units of Measure" preference
is miles, the fence will be configured in kilometers, converted to miles, and then displayed in
miles.
"Show/Hide Fence" Button
The radius of the fence will be drawn on the map in order to provide a visual reference for the
parameters of the fence. Click the "Show/Hide Fence" button in order to hide a fence. Also click the
"Show/Hide Fence" button in order to show a fence. This button is located to the left of the
"Description" box.
Load Description Button
You can load an existing fence with the load fence button. This button is located to the right of the
"Description" field.
Configure Exclusive Geographic Fence

To configure an exclusive geographic fence with a map, use the following procedure:
1. View the "Exclusive" section of the "Setup Fence" screen. Click the radio button in the
exclusive section.
Note: The color on the indicator for the "Fence Radius" bar will be the same color as the
selected fence.
3. Use one of the following methods in order to define the center of the geographic fence:
◦ Click a point on the map. To help establish the desired location, you can use the "Zoom
In" and the "Zoom Out " buttons to the right of the map. You can also use the "North",
"South", "East", and "West" buttons on the borders of the map.
◦ Click on the icon for the magnifying glass. This method enables you to enter a street
address, city, state, and/or zip code. Note: This option is only available in North America.
4. Configure the radius of the fence. Drag the "Fence Radius" slider to the appropriate location.
is miles, then the fence will be configured in kilometers, converted to miles, and then displayed
in miles.
5. You can configure up to five exclusive geographic fences. To add additional fence
configurations, click the "Add Fence" button. Repeat the previous steps in order to configure
the parameters of each additional fence.
Note: You can also add existing fences with the load description button.
Configure a Time Fence

To configure a time fence, use the following procedure:
1. At the top of the "Setup Fence" screen, click the "Time" tab.
2. In the row for "Days", select the days of the week for which you want the fence to apply.
3. In the "Description" field, enter a description of the time fence.
4. Click "Save".
You can also add existing time fences using the "Load Descriptions" button. For detailed instructions
for using this function, refer to Systems Operation, KENR6302, "EquipmentManager User Guide",
"Time Fence and Geographic Fence" .
Time and Geographic Fencing Setup Confirmation
To confirm your settings for the time fences, use the following procedure:
1. Click "Save" on the "Time and Geographic Fencing Setup - Edit" screen. A confirmation
message appears.
2. Click "OK". The Time and Geo Fence Setup Confirmation screen appears. This screen displays
the details of all the fences that you have added. This screen also notifies you that these details
will be updated in the database.
3. Click "OK". The Time and Geo Fence Setup Confirmation screen displays a red success
message.
Configuration History
Once a fence is configured with Setup Fence, the fence configuration is sent via satellite to the
Product Link module on the machine. The fence state is "Pending" until the onboard configuration
completes and a confirmation is received in the EquipmentManager software.
The state of recently configured fences is displayed as an icon in the "Config History" field. The type
of icon indicates one of the following states:
Yellow Hour Glass - Pending
Green Check Mark - Successful
Grey Stop Watch - No new activity
The Pending or the Successful icons will be viewable for seven days after the configuration
parameters have been sent to the Product Link module. After seven days, the "Successful" status will
revert to the grey stop watch icon. If a pending configuration is not confirmed within the seven day
time period, then Caterpillar recommends that a new configuration be sent.
To view details of the configuration history, click the icon in the "Config History" column. The Time
and Geographic Fencing Configuration History screen appears.
Table 2 lists the descriptions of each of the fields that are in this screen.
Table 2
Field Description
The type of fence that had been configured. Click the link to view
Request Type
configuration details.
Fence Description
The description provided for the fence configured fence.
The date of the configuration:

Configuration Date Bold Date – Date the fence was configured in the EquipmentManager
software.
Normal Date – Date Product Link accepted the fence configuration.
The state of the configuration request:
Pending – Yellow hour glass
State
Successful within the last 7 days – Green check mark
Successful but older than 7 days – Grey stop watch
A configuration will remain in the "Pending" state if the machine cannot be reached via satellite. If
this condition occurs, ensure that the master switch is closed and that the machine has a clear view to
the sky.
If Product Link is not able to receive the message, then the satellite network will continue to try to
resend the message for up to one hour. If the message is not received within one hour, then the
satellite network will retain the message for five additional days.
The message delivery will be attempted again once Product Link is detected on the network and is
sending and receiving messages. After five days, the configuration will no longer be retained and
there will be no further attempts to deliver the message to the Product Link module.
Enable and Disable
Once you have configured a machine to use time or geographic fences, remember that those fences
are enabled by default. By opening the Enable/Disable screen, you can enable or disable the applied
fences.
In order to enable or to disable a time or geographic fence, use the following procedure:
1. Locate the "Equipment Information" section on the Time and Geographic Fencing screen.
2. Select the check box that is adjacent to the machine you wish to enable or to disable.
3. Click "Enable/Disable". The "Enable/Disable" screen appears.
4. Perform the desired action to the Inclusive, Exclusive, or Time fences that are applied to this
machine:
Click on the actions listed below in the appropriate column:
Enable - This option sends an active fence command to the Product Link module that is on the
identified machine.
Disable - This option sends a command to disable an active fence to the Product Link module
on the identified machine.
No Change - Select this option if you do not want to send a status change for the chosen fence
to the Product Link module on the identified machine.
5. Click "OK" when you have completed all of the appropriate actions. The Enable/Disable
Confirmation screen appears. This screen confirms that your changes will be sent to the
machine's Product Link module. The changes will be sent as soon as communications with the
satellite network can be completed.
Note: Communication can be completed assuming the machine is running or that the master
switch is closed.
6. Click "OK" on the "Enable/Disable Confirmation" screen.
The Enable/Disable Confirmation screen displays a red success message. This message
confirms that the changes will be reflected in the Enable/Disable screen. This screen will list the
changes when the confirmation message is returned to the EquipmentManager software from
the machine's Product Link module.
Fence Alarm Messages

After the fences have been set, the alarm for the associated fence is triggered. The alarm will occur
when the machine crosses the defined fence.
Initial Alarm Message

This message is sent at the time of the fence violation by all supported Product Link modules
regardless of the type of module. The supported modules include PL151, PL201, PL121, and PL321.
PL121 only - The EquipmentManager software will not display an alarm on consecutive days
(regardless of active status) unless the machine leaves the work site or the machine enters a restricted
area again.
PL321 only - If the alarm is still active on consecutive days, the EquipmentManager software will
display a new Product Watch Event. The EquipmentManager software will send the appropriate event
reaction once with the daily standard message. The EquipmentManager software will send the
appropriate event reaction the next time the alarm is activated.
Refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting, RENR7911, "Product Link
121/321", for more information about the PL121 and PL321 alarms.
Subsequent Alarm Message

A subsequent alarm message may be sent while the Product Link module remains in the alarm state.
The following conditions will cause a subsequent alarm message. The type of message that is sent
will depend on the type of Product Link module and the version of software that is on the module.
• Daily – The alarm message will be included in the Daily Status Message.
• Accumulative – If multiple fences are configured, and a fence is in an alarm state, then all
fence alarms will be sent with any alarm message.
• Machine Start – While the modules remain in an alarm state, subsequent alarm messages are
sent each time that a machine is started.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02786572
Maintenance Watch
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
Maintenance Watch provides many features that will aid in a proactive maintenance program for your
equipment. With a Maintenance Watch subscription, EquipmentManager applies to a machine, the
Caterpillar recommended Preventative Maintenance Schedule including intervals, checklists, and part
lists. The Maintenance Watch subscription offers the following feature.
• Reports the last PM date and the adherence to the PM schedule
• Builds reference history for use in future repairs
• Schedules the next PM in on-line calendar automatically
• Sends alerts for missed PMs
• Provides PM checklist access
• Contains checklists of predefined PM procedures
• Generates list of parts that are required to complete the PM
• Enables ordering PM parts through the PartStore
Note: Maintenance Watch can be purchased without purchasing Asset Watch.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03947896
Planned Maintenance
SMCS - 7600; 7606
In order to access the "Planned Maintenance" screen, use the following procedure:
1. Search for equipment and view results on the "Event Summary" screen.
2. Select the "Planned Maintenance" option from the "View:" drop-down menu.
The "Planned Maintenance" screen will then appear.
PM History
By using Maintenance Watch, you can view a record of all previous procedures for the PM that were
performed on the equipment and the procedures that were entered through EquipmentManager. In
order to view the PM history, use the following procedure:
"Planned Maintenance" screen
(1) Check box
(2) "Performed @" column
1. From the "Planned Maintenance" screen, click the number in the "Performed @" column (2)
under the "Last PM" column if the number is available.
The "Planned Maintenance (PM) History" screen will be displayed.

"Planned Maintenance (PM) History"
(3) "Change Date Range" button
(4) Icon of an envelope in a circle
2. Click the icon of a calendar next to the "Start Date" and "End Date" fields. Select a date in
order to indicate a time period for the PM history.
3. Click the "Change Date Range" button (3) . The table for the PM history will be loaded again in
order to reflect the updated range for the date. The "Change Date Range" function works
similarly in many views or screens throughout the application.
"PM Notes"
When a "Planned Maintenance" is completed in EquipmentManager, a field is provided in order to
enter notes that pertain to the performed maintenance. On the "Planned Maintenance" screen, the
notes for the last "Planned Maintenance" can be viewed.
Use the following procedure in order to view the "PM Notes" and/or update the "PM Notes":
1. From the "Planned Maintenance (PM) History" screen, click the icon of an envelope in a circle
(4) that is in the "Notes/Comments" column. The icon will be either red or yellow. Refer to
Illustration 2. The "PM Notes" window will appear.
PM Notes
2. If you wish to update the notes, edit notes or add notes in the "PM Notes" text field.
3. Click the "Save" button.
Note: If the icon for the PM note is yellow, the "PM Notes" window does not currently contain notes.
If the icon for the PM note is red, the "PM Notes" window contains notes.
Note: The "PM Notes" will attach to the bottom of the checklists for the next "PM Due".
"Past Due" PM
EquipmentManager can be set to send an alert if EquipmentManager schedules a "Planned
Maintenance" that is based upon the SMU or the date and that PM passes without being performed.
The past due PM details can be accessed from the "Planned Maintenance" screen.
In order to view the procedures for the PM that have been missed, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planned Maintenance" screen, click "Past Due" in the "Next PM: Due @" column.
Refer to Illustration 1. The "Past Due" window will appear.
"Past Due" window
2. In order to close the window, click the "Close Window" button.
PM Checklist
With a Maintenance Watch subscription, a "Planned Maintenance Checklist" can be displayed.
In order to view a PM checklist, use the following procedure:
1. In order to view a PM, click the PM in the "Next PM: Name" column from the "Planned
Maintenance" screen. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Planned Maintenance (PM) Checklist" screen
will be displayed.
"PM Checklist"
(5) "Expand all Parts List" icon
(6) Icon of a triangle
(7) "View Part List" button
2. In order to view all of the parts list, click the "Expand all Parts List" icon (5) . This action will
expand all of the parts lists for all of the steps.
"PM Checklist" with an example of expanded parts
3. To expand the parts list for a single step, click the icon of a triangle (6) below the individual
step of that part. The step will expand in order to display the parts that are required to complete
the step.
"View Part List"

To assist the technician during a "planned maintenance", a list of all parts that are required for
completing the PM can be displayed and exported for printing. In addition, this list of parts can be
sent to the PartStore system for ordering.
Parts List for PM
(8) "Customer Qty" text fields
(9) "Order Entry" button
In order to view the "Parts List Summary", select the "View Part List" button (7) from the "PM
Checklist" screen. Refer to Illustration 5. The "Parts List for PM" screen will be displayed. Refer to
Illustration 7.
In order to order the parts through the PartStore system, click the "Order Entry" button (9) . The
quantities for the parts in the "Customer Qty" text fields (8) can be edited before placing an order.
"View Planner"
"Planner"
Maintenance Watch schedules the procedures for the PM in the "Planner" from EquipmentManager.
The "View Planner" screen displays the date that is estimated for the next PM. This approximation of
the dates that are chosen for the repairs is based on the average daily usage of the equipment. The
dates adjust dynamically depending on the future usage unless the repair is manually changed by the
"Pencil In Event".
In order to view the "View Planner" page, use the following procedure:
1. Select the check box (1) that is next to the equipment from the list on the "Planned
Maintenance" screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "View Planner" button. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Planner" window will appear.
The "Planner" displays the items of information for the PM, with the first PM that is due at the
beginning for the equipment that has been selected. To view the other PM due dates for this
equipment, use the options that are in the calendar to search by a date, a month, or a year. To view the
days between the PM due dates for a piece of equipment, you can use the "Back" and "Next" arrows
that are located in the upper right-hand corner of the window.
"Pencil In Events"
In order to change the date of the next PM on the "Planner", use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planner" window, click the "Pencil In Events" button. The "Pencil In Events" screen
will be displayed.
"Pencil In PM Events" screen
(10) "Pencil In Date" field
(11) "Save" button
2. Click the icon of a calendar next to the "Pencil In Date" field (10) and select a date from the
popup window.
3. Click the "Save" button (11) .
Note: Once a "Pencil In Date" has been performed for the PM, the system will no longer adjust the
date for the PM dynamically. Once that PM is complete the subsequent schedules for the PM revert to
dynamic scheduling again.
Request Quote
A useful feature of Maintenance Watch is the ability to request a note for a PM directly from
EquipmentManager. EquipmentManager will send an e-mail to the Dealer Administrator of the web
site for your dealer. In order to request a quote, use the following procedure:
1. In order to request a note for a piece of machine, select the check box (1) for the equipment
from the list on the "Planned Maintenance" screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "Request Quote" button. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Quotation Details" window will
appear.
Requesting a PM Quote
(12) Check boxes
(13) "Send" button
3. In order to send a request to multiple Dealer Administrators, select the check boxes (12) next to
any of the Dealer Administrator.
4. In order to send a comment to the selected Dealer Administrator, enter the comments in the
"Comments" text field.
5. Click the "Send" button (13) . The "Mail Successfully Delivered" screen will be displayed.
"Message Delivered Successfully" screen
6. Click the "OK" button. Refer to Illustration 11.
"Mark PM Completed"
Once you have used the "PM Checklist" to complete a PM, mark the PM as completed so that the PM
will no longer appear as an event in EquipmentManager. If you do not mark a PM as completed, the
note will appear as PM that has been missed.
In order to mark a PM as completed, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planned Maintenance" screen, select the check box (1) next to the equipment of the
PM that is to be marked as a note completed. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "Mark PM Complete" button. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Mark Planned Maintenance
(PM) Completed" window will appear.
"Mark Planned Maintenance (PM) Completed" screen
3. If the PM was missed, select the check box in the "Not Performed" column.
4. Enter the SMU of the equipment at the time the PM was performed in the "@ Service Meter"
text field.
5. Click the icon of a calendar next to the "Date" field and select a date from the popup window.
6. Enter notes in the "Notes/Comments" text field.
Note: "Notes/Comments" entered at the time a PM is marked as completed, append to the

checklists for the next "PM Due". If the last "PM Due" is marked missed, the offset will revert
to the defined fixed schedule.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03368451
Major Repair
SMCS - 7600; 7606
"Major Repair" screen
(1) Check box
In addition to a planned maintenance, a Maintenance Watch subscription gives you the ability to
schedule and track major repairs. On the "Event Summary" screen, select the check box (1) next to the
equipment you wish to view major repairs and then select "Major Repair" from the "View" drop-
down menu (2) . The "Major Repair" screen will be displayed. Refer to Illusrtation 1.
"Repair and Maintenance History"

Using Maintenance Watch, you can view a record of all previous major repairs that were performed
on the equipment and entered through EquipmentManager.
In order view the major repair history, use the following procedure:
"Repair & Maintenance History" screen
(3) "Expand All Parts" link/icon
(4) "Service Meters" column
(5) Calendar icon
(6) Icon of and envelope
(7) "Parts Causing Failure" link/icon
1. On the "Major Repair" screen, in the "Service Meters" column (4) , click the value in the field.
Refer to Illustration 2. The "Repair & Maintenance History" screen will be displayed.
2. Click the calendar icon (5) next to the "Start Date" and "End Date" fields and select a date to
indicate a time period for the PM history.
3. In order view the parts causing failure for the major repair, click either the "Expand All Parts"
link/icon (3) or the "Parts Causing Failure" link/icon (7) .
4. In order view the comments, click the icon of and envelope (6) in the "Notes/Comments"
column.
Request Quote
You can request a quote for the next major repair directly from EquipmentManager.
EquipmentManager will send an e-mail to the Dealer Administrator of the Dealer's Web site that you
are logged in.
In order request a quote, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Major Repair" screen, select the equipment for which you wish to request a quote.
2. Click the "Request Quote" button. The "Quotation Details" screen will be displayed.
"Quotation Details" screen for requesting a quote
(1) Check box
(8) "Notes/Comments" text field
(9) "Send" button
3. Select the check box (1) next to the dealership personnel to whom you want to send the request.
4. In the "Notes/Comments" text field (8) , enter the comments you wish to send to the recipients.
"Mail Successfully Delivered " message for a MR quote
6. Click the "OK" button. The details about the machine and the service event are included in the e
-mail message.
View Planner
EquipmentManager places major repairs in the EquipmentManager planner. The planner displays the
date that the repair should be performed if all conditions remain the same. The dates that are chosen
for the repairs are estimated based on the average daily usage of the equipment. The dates adjust
dynamically based on usage, unless the repair is manually penciled in.
1. From the "Major Repair" screen, select the check box next to the equipment for which you wish
to view the planner. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "View Planner" button. Refer to Illustration 5. The "View Planner" window appears.
"View Planner" window
3. In order view other major repair due dates for this equipment, you can use the calendar's
options to search by date, month, or year.
4. In order view days between equipment major repair due dates, you can use the back and next
arrows in the upper-right corner of the window.
Pencil In Dates
If you wish to change the date of the next major repair on the planner, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planner" window, click the "Pencil In Date" button. The "Pencil In Date" screen will
be displayed.
"Pencil In Date" screen for a major repair
(10) "Save" button
(5) Calendar icon
2. Click the calendar icon (5) next to the "Pencil In Date" field and select a date from the popup
window.
Note: Once you pencil in a major repair date, the system no longer dynamically adjusts that major
repairs date. Once that major repair is complete, the subsequent major repairs revert back to dynamic
scheduling.
Mark Repair Complete

Once you have completed a major repair, you need to mark the repair completed.
In order mark a major repair completed, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Major Repair" screen, select the check box next to the equipment with the repair you
wish to mark completed. Refer to Illustration 7.
2. Click the "Mark Repair Complete" button. Refer to Illustration 7. The "Mark Repair Complete"
screen appears.
"Mark Repair Complete" screen
(10) "Save" button
(11) "Repair Performed @ Service Meter (hours)" text field
(5) Calendar icon
3. Enter the SMU of the equipment at the time the repair was performed in the "Repair Performed
@ Service Meter (hours)" text field (11) .
4. Click the calendar icon (5) next to the "Date of completion" field and select a date from the
popup window.
5. Enter notes in the "Notes/Comments" text field (8) .
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02951552
Health Watch
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
A subscription to Health Watch offers the following features:
• Displays the fuel results, fuel level history, fuel used history and refueling history.
• Identifies the onboard logged events and diagnostic codes and retains the events and codes in
EquipmentManager machine history.
• Relays available troubleshooting procedures, enabled by SIS Web subscription.
By using these features you can quickly and easily monitor your entire fleet. You can detect trends
which will help to improve fleet owning and operating costs.
Note: Diagnostic Codes are frequently referred to as Fault Codes or Event Codes.
Note: Health Watch information is dependent upon the machine model, year of production and
Product Link model installed. Machines produced with electronic engines and transmissions equipped
with Product Link model PL321SR normally can provide this information.
S·O·S Service Manager (S·O·S)

S·O·S alerts for fluid analysis may be provided in EquipmentManager if your dealership uses S·O·S
Service Manager software in the dealership laboratory. S·O·S alerts will be displayed in the
Exception Dashboard in the "Event Summary" display.
The S·O·S Service Manager is a software program that is available through your dealers web site. To
view S·O·S details or reports for a sample, use the tool for viewing the S·O·S application on the web.
Also, you may contact your Caterpillar dealer S·O·S services laboratory for your results. The report
from the S·O·S services laboratory may be obtained from a fax or from e-mail. A paper copy of the
report can be mailed as well.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03370084
Fuel Results
SMCS - 7600; 7606
The EquipmentManager software is able to collect data regarding the fuel consumption of your
equipment. This data includes the following: fuel level, fuel usage and the history for refueling.
Note: The results that are displayed using "Fuel Results" are not results that are measured. The
information that is viewed on the "Fuel Results" screen is calculated information. The calculations are
based on the performance maps of the machine. The performance maps define specific performance
characteristics of the machine. These characteristics determine the calculated fuel usage at different
loading conditions. The result is the cumulative fuel consumption.
In order to view the fuel information for a specific machine, use the following procedure:
"Event Summary" screen
(1) Check box
1. Navigate to the "Event Summary" screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Search for the specific machine in the "Equipment Information" column.
3. Click in the check box (1) to the left of the machine in order to select the machine.
"Fuel Information" screen
4. Select "Fuel Results" from the "View" drop-down menu (2) .
The "Fuel Information" screen will appear. Refer to Illustration 2. This screen will display the
information for the selected machine.
Click link (3) in order to view the "Fuel Level History" screen. Refer to ""Fuel Level History"".
Click link (4) in order to view the "Fuel Used History" screen. Refer to ""Fuel Used History"".
Click link (5) in order to view the "Refuel History" screen. Refer to ""Refuel History"".
"Fuel Level History"

"Fuel Level History" screen
(6) Icon of the calendar
In order to view the "Fuel Level History" screen, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Fuel Information" screen, click on the number in the "Fuel Remaining (gallons)"
column. The "Fuel Level History" screen is displayed. Refer to Illustration 3.
2. The start and the end date for the history must be selected. Click the icon of the calendar (6)
next to the "Start Date". Input the desired start date.
3. Click the icon of the calendar (6) next to the "End Date". Input the desired end date.
4. Click "Change Date Range". The information on the "Fuel Level History" screen will now
reflect the selected date range.
5. Click the "Back" button in order to return to the "Fuel Information" screen.
Graph of the Fuel Level
Graph of the existing fuel level
In order to view a graph of the existing fuel level of a machine, use the following procedure:
1. Navigate to the "Fuel Information" screen. Locate the "Fuel Remaining (gallons)" column.
2. Find the row which displays the information for your specific machine.
3. Click on the icon of a machine in the "Fuel Remaining" column. A graph will appear in a popup
window. Refer to Illustration 4. This graph will display information for the selected machine.
4. Click the "Close Window" button or click the "X" in the upper right corner in order to return to
the "Fuel Information" screen.
"Fuel Used History"

"Fuel Used History" screen
The "Fuel Used History" screen displays the history of fuel usage for a specific machine. Refer to
Illustration 5. This amount of fuel usage is calculated by the engine Electronic Control Module
(ECM).
In order to view the "Fuel Used History" screen, use the following procedure:
1. Navigate to the "Fuel Information" screen. Locate the row with the information about your
machine. Locate the "Total Fuel Consumed (gallons)" column. Click the number in the "Total
Fuel Consumed (gallons)" column for your machine. The "Fuel Used History" screen will
appear.
information that is viewed on the "Fuel Results" screen is calculated information. The
calculations are based on the performance maps of the machine. The performance maps define
specific performance characteristics of the machine. These characteristics determine the
calculated fuel usage at different loading conditions. The result is the cumulative fuel
consumption.
4. Click "Change Date Range". The information on the "Fuel Used History" screen will now
"Refuel History"
"Refuel History" screen

The "Refuel History" screen displays the history of refueling for a specific machine. Refer to
Illustration 6.
In order to view the "Refuel History" screen, use the following procedure:
machine. Locate the "Last Refill Qty. (gallons)" column. Click the number in the "Last Refill
Qty. (gallons)" column for your machine. The "Refuel History" screen will appear.
Note: The information about refueling is not provided by Product Link. This is a manual
function in the "Administration" menu.
4. Click "Change Date Range". The information on the "Refuel History" screen will now reflect
the selected date range.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03367182
Fault Codes
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Diagnostic codes are frequently referred to as fault codes or event codes. The fault codes that are
provided by the EquipmentManager software provide valuable information. This information can be
used to make decisions concerning the maintenance of your machine. Use the "Search Equipment"
button in order to access the fault codes for your . The "Search Equipment" button is located on the
EquipmentManager home screen. Select the check box (1) for the equipment from the "Equipment
Summary" screen. Then, select "Fault Codes" from the "View" drop-down menu.
"Fault Codes" screen
(1) Check box
(2) "Fault Codes" link
View "Fault Code History" (Event code and Diagnostic Code)

By using Health Watch, you can view a record of all previous fault codes that were recorded through
EquipmentManager software.
In order to view the "Fault Code History" screen, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Fault Codes" screen, click the "Fault Codes" link (2) or the "view history details"
link in the "Latest Fault Codes" column. The "Fault Code History" screen will be displayed.
"Fault Code History"
(3) "Start Date" field and "End Date" field
(4) "Fault Codes" column
(5) "Update Status" button
2. Click on the icon for the calendar next to the "Start Date" field and "End Date" field (3) . Select
a date in order to indicate a time period for the history of the fault code.
3. Click the "Change Date Range" button. The "Fault Code History" table will be updated to using
the new date range.
Note: The history of the fault code that is viewed in the EquipmentManager software will
display all faults that are reported by Product Link. A machine Electronic Control Module
(ECM) will automatically erase a diagnostic code after 100 hours of operation if the diagnostic
code does not reappear within that period of time. If the machine ECM erases a diagnostic code
automatically, the history of the fault code that is displayed by the EquipmentManager software
may not match the history that is displayed by Caterpillar Electronic Technician software.
"Service Information for Fault Codes (SIS Web)"
In order to view detailed information about a particular code, EquipmentManager software interfaces
with Service Information System (SIS). The link to SIS will provide troubleshooting procedures in
order to resolve fault codes. For this link to work, a valid subscription to SIS is required.
In order to obtain service information for specific fault codes, complete the following precedure:
1. On the "Fault Code History " screen, locate the "Fault Codes" column (4) . Click on the fault
code in order to view the service information for the fault code. The "Service Information for
Fault Codes" screen will now display the information for your specific fault code. The
troubleshooting procedure for the selected fault code will appear if there is a proper link in SIS.
"Service Information for Fault Codes" troubleshooting
2. The "Service Information for Fault Codes" screen for troubleshooting will display fault codes in
the left column. Click on the hyperlink that applies to your fault code. The "Service Information
for Fault Codes" will appear. This screen will display information about your fault code.
3. View the information in the "Information Types" and "Sections" columns. Click on the links
that apply to your fault code. Click the "Close" button in order to return to the "Fault Code
History" screen.
"Service Information for Fault Codes" information
"Update Status" for the Fault Code

EquipmentManager software enables you to update the status of a fault code. If the status of a fault
code is updated to "Resolved", the fault code will no longer appear in the "Event Summary". The
"Event Summary" screen is located on the home page. The home page may also be referred to as the
Exception Dashboard.
In order to update the status of a fault code, use the following procedure:
1. View the "Fault Code" screen, or the "Fault Code History" screen. Click in the check box (1)
that is next to the fault code in order to update the fault code. Then, click the "Update Status"
button (5) . The "Update Status" window will appear.
Fault code "Update Status"
(6) "Update Status" field
(7) "Comments" field
2. In the "Update Status" field (6) , select a new status. The following table displays the different
possible selections for "Update Status":
Table 1
Status Color Importance
Action RED Highest
Monitor YELLOW Medium
Normal GREEN Lowest
Resolved -- --
3. In the "Comments" field (7) , type your comments.
4. Click "Save". The status of the fault code is now updated.
Note: Once the status of an event is changed to "Resolved", the event will no longer be displayed in
the "Exception Dashboard".
S·O·S Service Manager Software

Service Manager software in the dealership's laboratory. S·O·S alerts will be displayed in the
The S·O·S Service Manager tool is a software program that is available through your dealer's web
site. In order to view S·O·S details or reports for a sample, use the tool for viewing the S·O·S
application on the web. Also, you may contact your Caterpillar dealer's S·O·S laboratory for your
results. The report from the S·O·S laboratory may be obtained from a fax or from e-mail. A paper
copy of the report can be mailed as well.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03347780
Reports
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
EquipmentManager can also assists you in managing your equipment by generating reports can be
saved or printed. The following types of reports are available:
• Product Usage
• Product Monitoring
• Operating and Maintenance Manual (OMM) (no PDF format, viewed on-line)
• Equipment Usage (no PDF format, viewed on-line and exported to save or to print)
• Active Fleet Report
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03352506
Product Usage
SMCS - 7600; 7606
"Product Usage Report"

The "Product Usage Report" provides information on the "Product Usage" and "Fuel Usage". The "Product
Usage" report may be displayed for a period of time that can span for multiple months and that can include
the current day. So, the period for reviewing the history of the report can be selected to the preference of
the user.
In order to generate a "Product Usage Report", use the following procedure:

"Product Usage Report" screen
(1) Radio button
(3) "View Reports" button
1. Search for equipment and view the results on the "Event Summary" screen. In the "View" drop-down
menu (2), select "Product Usage Report". The "Product Usage Report" screen will appear.
2. Select the radio button (1) that corresponds with the equipment in order to generate a report for the
equipment.
3. Select "View Reports" (3). The "Product Usage" report appears as an MicrosoftR Excel file in a new
window. You can save the report locally and you can print the report. Also, you can send an e-mail of
the report.
Note: The "Product Usage Report" is the calculated comparison of the percentage of operational
hours and the total available hours. Total available hours are calculated as 24 hours times the number
of days in the range of the date. In order to adjust the total available hours to represent planned hours
of operation, type the daily hours in "Daily Product Usage Hours" field before generating the report.
Table 1
Field Description
Header
"Equipment ID" The id of the equipment
"Manufacture" The manufacturer of the equipment
"Model" The model of the equipment
"Serial Number" The serial number of the equipment
"Start Date" The start date for the range of data
"End Date" The end date for the range of data
"Usage Summary"
"Average Daily The average of daily hours for the dates that are within the range of the defined
Usage" date
"Total Usage
The total hours for the dates that are within the range of the defined date
Hours"
"Total Available The total hours of available work for the machine that are within the range of the
Hours" defined date
The percentage of the operational time for the equipment as compared to the total
"Usage %"
available hours
The percentage of time the equipment was not in operation as compared to the
"NonUse %"
total usage hours
The percentage of time the equipment was in operation but engine speed was
"Idle %"
lower than 1150 rpm
"Usage" pie chart
A pie chart that displays the "Usage %" and the "NonUse %"
The Utilization of the machine during hours of operation displayed in a pie chart
"Utilization" pie with "Usage %" indicating the percentage of time the machine operated at an
chart engine speed greater than 1150 rpm and "Idle %" indicating the percentage of time
the machine operated at an engine speed lower than 1150 rpm
A bar chart that displays the daily used hours and idle hours with the Y-axis
"Daily Use/Idle
representing the date and time and with the X-axis representing the number of
Hours" bar chart
hours of operation for the machine
Table 2
Field Description
Table
"# of rows to graph"
The number of rows to display in the "Daily Use/Idle Hours" bar chart
The date and time of the Service Meter Hours and Idle Hours as reported by the
"Date/Time"
Product Link Module (PLM)
"Service Meter
The "Service Meter (hours)" that are reported by the PLM
(hours)"
"Idle Hours" The "Idle Hours" that are reported by the PLM
"Total Daily Hours" The number of operational hours of the equipment from the report from the
previous day
The number of operational hours of the equipment at a higher rpm than 1150
"Daily use Hours"
rpm
The number of operational hours of the equipment at 1150 rpm or below 1150
"Daily Idle Hours"
rpm
In order to access "Fuel Details", click the "FuelUsage" tab on the bottom of the Microsoft Excel file.
Table 3
Field Description
Header
"Start Date" The start date for the range of data
"End Date" The end date for the range of data
"Units of Measure" The units (liters, gallons) of measurement that are defined by the preferences of
the user
"Fuel Usage Summary"
"Average Daily The daily average of fuel that is burned for the dates that are within the range of
Fuel" the defined date
"Total Fuel Used" The total volume of fuel that is burned for the dates that are within the range of
the defined date
The total volume of fuel that is burned at idle for the dates that are within the
"Total Idle Fuel"
range of the defined date
"Average Fuel Per The comparison of the percentage of operational hours and the total available
Hour" hours
A bar chart that displays the fuel that is burned daily were the X-axis represents
"Fuel Usage" bar
the volume of fuel burned. displayed in the units of measurement preferred by the
chart
user
Note: "Service Meter (hours)", "Idle Hours", Fuel and Idle Fuel used for this report are values received
during the scheduled updates. The time of the day for these scheduled reports is defined by the "First
Report Time" value and the value can be viewed in the "General Registry". The schedule report time can be
changed over the air. Refer to theSystems Operation, "Manage Hardware" for more information.
Table 4
Field Description
Table
"# of rows to
The number of rows to display in the "Daily Use/Idle Hours" bar chart
graph"
The date and time of the "Service Meter (hours)" and "Idle Hours" as reported by
"Date/Time"
the PLM
"Daily Fuel Displaying the volume of fuel consumed by the equipment from the report from the
Usage" previous day in the units of measurment preferred by the user
"Daily Idle Fuel" The volume of fuel consumed during idle operation report from the previous day.
Displayed in the user preference for units of measure
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03366743
Product Monitoring
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Product Monitoring Report

This report provides a listing of hours, location, cumulative fuel burned and diagnostic codes sent by the
Product Link Module (PLM). The " Product Monitoring Report" may be displayed for a period of time that
spans multiple months and can include the current day. So, the report history period can be selected to the
user preference for period of review.
In order to generate a" Product Monitoring Report", use the following procedure:
1. Search for equipment and view the results on the "Event Summary" screen. In the "View " box, select
"Product Monitoring Report". The "Product Monitoring Report" screen appears.
Product Monitoring Report
(1) Radio button
(2) "Start Date" and the "End Date"
2. Select the "Start Date" and the "End Date" (2) that corresponds with the period for the "Product
Monitoring Report". Refer to Illustration 1.
3. Select the radio button (1) that corresponds with the equipment for which you wish to generate a
"Product Monitoring Report".
4. Click the "View Reports" button (3) . The "Product Monitoring Peport" appears as a PDF file in a
new window. You can save the report locally, print the report, and e-mail the report.
"Product Monitoring Report" PDF
Product Monitoring Report Cover Page

"Product Monitoring Report" cover page
The following table lists the fields that are found on the "Product Monitoring Report" cover page. Refer to
Illustration 3.
Table 1
Field Field Description
Equipment ID The Equipment ID of the machine for which the report is being generated.
Manufacturer The Manufacturer of the machine for which the report is being generated.
Model The Model of the machine for which the report is being generated.
Serial Number The Serial Number of the machine for which the report is being generated.
The name of the Principal Dealer of the machine for which the report is being
Principal Dealer
generated.
The type of report that you are viewing. In this case the type is "Product
Type
Usage Report".
Report for the Month The month and year of the data that is being displayed in this report in the
Of form MON-YYYY.
Report Generated Date
The date that the report was generated in the form DD-MON-YYYY.
"Product Monitoring Report" and Details
"Product Monitoring Report" details
(4) Event status
After the cover page, the "Product Monitoring Report" displays a table that lists all the events reported by
the PLM for the selected time period. Table 2 lists the fieldsthat are in this table. Refer to Illustration 4.
Table 2
Field Description
The events are numbered sequentially and this number is displayed in the "No"
No
column.
Date The date the event was recorded in MM/DD/YYYY format.
Time The time the event was recorded in Hr:Min:Sec AM/PM format.
The type of event that was recorded. Possible values include: Fault Code, SMU, Fuel
Event Type
Usage, etc.
Event A description of the event. This field is color coded by the event status (4) :
Description "Normal", "Monitor", "Action", and "Resolved".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03366262
Operation and Maintenance Manual

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Operation and Maintenance Manual Report

The Operation and Maintenance Manual (O & MM) report provides a link to the Service Information
System (SIS) Web site. You can access O & MM information for a specific Caterpillar machine through
EquipmentManager. In order to use this feature, you must have access to the SIS Web site.
In order to view an O & MM report, use the following procedure.

"O & MM Search Results" screen
(1) Radio button
1. Search for equipment and view the results on the Event Summary screen. In the "View" box, select
"O & MM Report". The "O & MM Search Results" screen appears. Select the radio button (1) for the
equipment for which you wish to generate an O & MM report.
Selecting an O & MM for configuration from SIS Web
2. Click "View Reports" button (2) . The Service Information System (SIS) Web site appears in a new
window. If there is more than one O & MM available for the machine, a message for selcting a
configuration will appear. Refer to Illustration 2.
SIS Web – O & MM
3. Click the hyperlink for one of the listed O & MM configurations. A web page displays the manual
for the selected configuration. Refer to Illustration 3.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02789552
Equipment Usage
SMCS - 7600; 7606
The Equipment Usage report will calculate the usage of selected machines in hours for a selected period of
days, weeks, months, or years. This report also displays the last location reported during the selected
period.
To view a summary of the Equipment Usage on a machine, use the following procedure.
1. From the "Event Summary" screen, select the checkbox next to the equipment for which you wish to
view equipment usage.
2. From the "View" drop down menu, select "Equipment Usage Summary". The "Equipment Usage
Summary" screen is displayed.
Equipment Usage Summary Screen

3. To change the date of the summary, click the calendar icons next to the "Start Date" and/or "End
Date" fields and select a date from the pop up calendar, then click "Change Date Range". A new
Equipment Usage Summary is displayed.
Note: The accuracy of the SMU value could be impacted by manual SMU adjustments.
Exports
The Export function enables you to export your current view to multiple file formats. The data can then be
sorted, filtered, charted, manipulated, and shared with others.
In order to export data to an Excel spreadsheet, perform the following steps:
1. On the "Equipment Usage Summary" screen, click Export. The "Export" window appears.
Export Window
Note: You can export data to other file formats. Lotus 1, 2, 3 works similarly to Excel. Tab
Delimited Text enables easy import into other applications like Access.
2. Select "MS Excel Spreadsheet", and then click "OK".
The "File Download" dialog box appears.
3. Click "Save" to save the file as a spreadsheet on your hard drive, where you can manipulate the file
using standard Excel spreadsheet functions such as "Average and Chart", or share the file
electronically.
Note: You can export to the Maintenance Control System (MCS) (location and SMU page export only).
This export creates a fixed width .txt file that can be imported into the MCS.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03348523
Active Fleet
SMCS - 7600; 7606
This report provides information of the customer and the equipment, the details from the last report, and
Product Link details. This report can be run at the Universal Customer ID (UCID) level or the dealership
level. While feature level search results are limited to the 999 equipment, this report has no limit and can be
generated to aid in audits, maintenance, and administration of the customer or dealers Product Link
population.
In order to generate the "Active Fleet Report", refer to the following procedure:
1. From either the "Reports" section of the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu,
select "Active Fleet Report". The "Active Fleet Report" screen will be displayed.
"Active Fleet Report" screen
2. Select a customer from the "UCID" drop-down menu in order to create a report for the customer or
allow "All Dealer Machines" to remain selected in the "UCID" drop-down menu in order to generate
the report for all equipment and customers for your dealership. Select "Export". Refer to Illustration
1.
"Export" screen
3. Select "MS Excel Spreadsheet", and then click "OK". The "File Download" dialog box will appear.
Note: You can export data to other formats for a file. "Lotus 1, 2, 3 SpreadSheet" works similarly to
MircosoftR Excel. "Tab Delimited Text" enables files to be imported easily into other applications.
4. Click "Save" in order to save the file as a spreadsheet on your hard drive. This will enable you to
manipulate the file by using the standard functions in the Mircosoft Excel spreadsheet such as
"Average and Chart", or you can share the file electronically.
"Active Fleet Report"

Table 1
Field Description
Header
"Dealer" The name of the dealer and dealer code for the generated report
"Customer Name" The name of the customer for generated report
"Date Report The date and time of the generated report which is displayed in the preferred
Requested" format of the user
"Fleet Count" The number of machines in the respective fleet
Customer Information and Equipment Information
"UCID" Customer name and "UCID"
"Last Reported" information of the "Active Fleet Report"
Table 2
Field Description
"Last Reported" Information
"Last Reported The date and time of the last report on service meter or location which is
Date/Time" displayed in the preferred format of the user
"Current Service
The last report for the service meter units
Meter"
The last report for location which is displayed in preferred format for the user
"Location"
Product Link information of the "Active Fleet Report"
Table 3
Field Description
Product Link Information
"PL Module Type" The type of Product Link Module
"Radio Software Part Number" The part number of the onboard Product Link Radio software
( PL121)
The part number of the onboard Product Link ECM software ( PL300)
"PL ECM S/W Part Number"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation
EquipmentManager User Guide

i03319401
General Information
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Use of this Manual

EquipmentManager provides valuable information that allows remote monitoring of either a single
machine or a fleet of machines. Customers can perform the following tasks if the customer can
provide the location of the machine, Service Meter Unit (SMU), and information about the health of
the machine:
• Manage the location and the basic usage of engines and machines.
• Schedule maintenance that is planned and schedule major repairs.
• Manage fault codes or diagnostic codes.
• Detect problems before problems cause a major component failure.
• Increase the availability and the productivity for the machines by avoiding unexpected
downtime for repairs.
• Identify the need for training in order to improve the efficiency of the operator.
EquipmentManager is part of Dealer Web site and works with other applications such as PartStore
and EquipmentManager. EquipmentManager enables customers to remotely manage fleets. The
customer is alerted to only those machines that need immediate attention.
The "EquipmentManager Dealer Administrator Manual" includes the following information:
• Setting up Product Link Modules (PLM)
• Registering PLM
• Setting up and maintaining the accounts of the customer
• Customizing EquipmentManager for optimum use
• Managing EquipmentManager functions

This manual also provides suggestions for using the features of EquipmentManager.
Assumptions
The "EquipmentManager Dealer Administrator Manual" assumes that the user is a Dealer
Administrator. The"EquipmentManager Dealer Administrator Manual" also assumes the following:
• The user is familiar with Dealer Web site and related applications.
• The user is able to access the dealership's Dealer Web site.
• The user is familiar with using and entering information in forms that are found in web sites,
performing searches on the web, and submitting information via the web.
Terms and Definitions

Table 1 defines common acronyms and terms that are used throughout this manual.
Table 1
Term or
Definition
Acronym
Dealer Web Dealer Web site is an application on the internet that is used to access
site EquipmentManager.
ECM Electronic Control Module
I/O Input/Output
Product Link Module
This on board hardware communicates with any ECM that is on the machine.
PLM
Additionally, the hardware sends information to the satellites and from the
satellites.
PM Preventive Maintenance
SMU Service Meter Units
Scheduled Oil Sampling
This is a program that analyzes samples of fluid. This program is designed to be an
S·O·S
easy way to monitor the impact of maintenance programs, applications, and
operational factors on machine health.
UCID Universal Customer ID
CWS Corporate Web Security
Related Documentation
ReferenceRefer to the following documents for additional EquipmentManager information and
related applications.
• Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting, RENR7911, "Product Link

121SR/321SR"
• Special Instruction, REHS2365, "Product Link PL121SR and PL300 Installation Guide"
• Systems Operation, KENR6303, "EquipmentManager User Manual"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02940596
Getting Started
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
The following provides an overview of EquipmentManager. This overview instructs you on the steps
that are necessary to begin using EquipmentManager in order to manage the life cycle of your
equipment and the equipment of your customers.
There are five steps:
1. Enable EquipmentManager.
2. Verify the records for the machine and the ownership of the machine.
3. Manage the users.
4. Install Product Link Modules.
5. Set up the subscriptions.
Some of the steps that are outlined in this section may be completed in a different order. Following
the steps in the order that is suggested here is recommended strongly by the Caterpillar Dealer
Solution Network (DSN).
Note: Use your web browser to select your preferred language.
Note: Caterpillar does not recommend using software to block popup software while
EquipmentManager is active.
EquipmentManager and the Product Link System

EquipmentManager is an upgrade of a previous application that was known as Product Link Web.
Many of the features of EquipmentManager are similar to this application.
EquipmentManager is an application that is used on the Internet. This application allows you to better
manage the maintenance, health, and utilization of your machines. EquipmentManager uses a
combination of Product Link hardware, satellites, wireless technology, a Caterpillar database, and a
Caterpillar server in order to manage the machines.
Illustration 1 illustrates the EquipmentManager and the Product Link System.
EquipmentManager and Product Link System
Each piece of machinery is equipped with Product Link hardware. Each machine can be managed by
using EquipmentManager. Information is sent to the machine and information is received from the
machine via a Product Link Module (PLM) through a wireless network.
Note: For more information about the available PLMs and installation of the PLMs, refer to Systems
Operation, "Install Product Link Modules".
The location of the machine is determined by using a Global Positioning System (GPS). Wireless
networks send the information that is received from the PLMs to a central database for Product Link
that is provided by Caterpillar. This information can then be viewed with EquipmentManager.
If you are using the Caterpillar Dealer Business System you will have the option of receiving daily
updates from Product Link Service Meter Units (SMU). EquipmentManager can store these updates
in your DBS database.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03368383
Verify Machine Records and Ownership

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Verify Machines in Equipment Data

Verify that the machines exist in Equipment Data before you install Product Link Modules (PLM) on
machines. After you install PLM, configure PLM and register PLM in order to communicate with the
EquipmentManager application. If the machines do not already exist in Equipment Data (ED), you
must add the machines.
Note: Equipment Data allows customers to manage the customer's equipment across dealerships.
Equipment Data provides a central equipment database for use in Caterpillar developed applications.
Equipment Data is delivered through CaterpillarDealer Web sites.
The following features are included in Equipment Data:
• Automatic updates of the Equipment Data equipment record from the Dealer's Business System
(DBS)
• Updates that are sent to the DBS/DBSi when changes are made in the Equipment Data
• Equipment grouping functionality
The PartStore System and EquipmentManager users will often have access to Equipment Data.
Caterpillar recommends that the Dealer Administrator for EquipmentManager is provided with access
to the Equipment Data application.
If you do not have access to the Equipment Data application in order to add machines, contact your
Technical communicator.
Note: Refer to Caterpillar Equipment Data Dealer Manual Release 2.0 for complete instructions on
the Equipment Data Application.
UCID Conflict Management

Once you have verified that the necessary machines exist in Equipment Data, you must then resolve
any ownership conflicts that may exist on that machine. Ownership conflicts arise when a single serial
number within Equipment Data has been associated with two or more Universal Customer ID's
(UCID). Within EquipmentManager, detailed information about a single serial number is not
displayed if the ownership data for that equipment has a UCID conflict.
In order to resolve an ownership conflict by consolidating UCID's, contact your Technical

Communicator.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03319640
Manage Users
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Set Up New Users

There are four different types of user roles that are available in EquipmentManager. The tables below
list the four types of roles. Under each of the roles the permissions that are available for that role are
listed.
Table 1
Customer User Permissions
Hours and Location Groups
Map Create Groups
View Status History Assign Groups (to user level)
View Checklists Limited to Customer User Level
View Troubleshooting Procedures (2) Send Commands
View OM&M
(1)
(2)
Table 2
Customer Administrator Permissions
Map Create Groups
Major Repair Customer User or Admin Level
Request Quote Time and Geo. Fence Descriptions
View Planner Inclusive / Exclusive Descriptions
Mark Repair Complete Time Based Descriptions
View History Details Manage Planned Maintenance
Fuel Information Customize PM Intervals
View Fuel Level History Edit PM Check List
View Fuel Level Graph Customize PM Schedule
View Fuel History General
View Status History Search
Update Fuel Level Status Export
Fault Codes Preferences
View Fault Code History Equipment Details
Update Fault Code Status Registration Details
View Status History Manage Subscriptions
Reports
View OM&M (2)
(1)
(2)
Table 3
Dealer User Permissions
Map Create Groups
Limited to Dealer User or Customer User or Admin Level
View Checklists

Send Commands

View OM&M (2)
(1)
(2)
Table 4
Dealer Administrator Permissions
Map Create Groups
Major Repair Dealer User or Admin Level
Request Quote Customer User or Admin Level
View Planner Time and Geo. Fence Descriptions
Mark Repair Complete Inclusive / Exclusive Descriptions
View History Details Time Based Descriptions
Fuel Information Manage Planned Maintenance
View Fuel Level History Customize PM Intervals
View Fuel Level Graph Edit PM Check List
View Fuel History Customize PM Schedule
View Status History General
Update Fuel Level Status Search
Fault Codes Export
View Fault Code History Preferences
Update Fault Code Status Equipment Details
View Status History Registration Details
View Troubleshooting Procedures (2) Manage Subscriptions
Reports
View OM&M (2)
(1)
(2)
A user role may only be given to another user by a user that is equal or higher than the user that is
being assigned. For example, a Dealer Administrator may create another Dealer Administrator, but a
dealer user cannot create a "Dealer Administrator".
Use the following procedure in order to create a new user:

The Dealer Web site with the "Applications" drop-down menu
(1) "Applications" drop-down menu
1. Log in to your Dealer Web site. The home screen of Dealer Web site appears.
"End User License Agreement"
Note: If this is your first time to log in to EquipmentManager, then an "End User License
Agreement" (EULA) appears. Refer to Illustration 2. Scroll to the bottom of the EULA and
click "Accept". The screen for setting the user preferences will appear. Refer to Systems
Operation, "Preferences".
2. Select "EquipmentManager" from the "Applications" drop-down menu (1) . Refer to Illustration
2. The home page of EquipmentManager will appear.
EquipmentManager home page
(2) "Administration" tab
3. From the left navigation, click the "Administration" tab (2) . The "Administration" screen will
be displayed.
(4) "Manage User"
(5) "Setup a New User" link
4. Select "Set Up New User" (5) under "Manage User" (4) . The "Setup a New User" screen will
be displayed.
Note: "View" drop-down menu (3) contains same links that appear on the "Administration"
page.
"Setup a New User" screen
5. In the "Enter a:" field (6) , enter a last name or login ID.
6. Click on the "Display Accounts" button.
"Display accounts" on the "Setup a New User" screen

7. Select the "Login Id" of a user (7) to setup from the list of users that appear below the "Display
Accounts" button. The "User Permission" screen will be displayed.
"User Permissions" screen
(8) "Enable" radio button
8. Select the "enabled" radio button (8) next to "Status" in the "Account Information" section.
Select the check box next to the permissions in order to apply the change.
9. In the "Permissions" section, select a user role for the user from the "User Role" drop-down
menu (9) .
Note: If you selected "Dealer Administrator" or "Customer Administrator", all of the check
boxes next to the available permissions that can be granted to these two users will be selected
because an administrator is automatically given all permissions. You will not be able to
unselect particular permissions. If you selected "Dealer User" or "Customer User", the check
boxes next to "Manage Group" and "Manage Assignments" will be selected and unavailable.
The remaining check boxes will be available for selection.
10. Click the "Update Permissions" button. The "Do you want to proceed with the assignments?"
dialog box will be displayed.
Proceed with the "Assignments" dialog box.
11. Click on "OK". The "Confirmation – User Permission" screen will be displayed.
(10) "The user permission(s) have been successfullu updated" message
(11) Check boxes
12. The "The user permission(s) have been successfullu updated" message (10) will appear. Also,
green check marks in the check boxes (11) will appear in order to indicate that the user was
given that specific authorization. Select "OK". The "Setup a New User" screen will be
displayed.
"Setup a New User" with a "No results found for the search" message
(12) "No results found for the search" message
The last name or login id that was entered in Step 5 will appear again in the "Enter a:" field. Below
the "Display Accounts" button, a message will appear that reads "No results found for the
search" (12) . This is because the user that you added no longer appears in the list of users that are not
registered with the EquipmentManager application. Your newly created user now appears in the list of
existing users.
Manage Existing Users

In addition to adding new users, as a Dealer Administrator you may edit the user roles and
permissions of existing users.
In order to manage an existing user, use the following procedure.
1. From the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Manage Existing
User". The "Manage Existing User" screen will be displayed.
"Manage Existing User" screen
(13) "Display Accounts" button
2. Enter a last name or login id in the "Enter a:" field (6) . Select the "Display Accounts" button
(13) .
The system searches for the last name or login id among the list of registered
EquipmentManager users. The system will display a list of all the available matches.
Manage Existing Users : User List
3. Click on the login id of a user (7) you wish to edit. The "User Permission" screen will be
displayed.
Existing "User Permission" screen
(8) Enable radio button
(11) Check boxes
4. Update the "User Role" in the "Status" by clicking one of the buttons highlighted in Ilustration
13.
a. Select the enable radio button (8) .
b. Select a different role from the "User Role" drop-down menu (9) .
c. Update permissions by selecting or clearing the available check boxes (11) next to the
permissions.
5. When you have finished making your changes, click the "Update Permissions" button at the
bottom. The "Confirmation – User Permission" screen will be displayed.
(10) Confirmation message
(11) Check boxes
6. Click on "OK". You have successfully updated the existing user and will be returned to the
"Manage Existing User" screen.
Note: Check marks in the check boxes (11) indicate permissions that are granted to the user.
Permissions that display the letter "X" over the check mark indicate that these permissions are
not granted to the user.
Manage Existing User : List by UCID
(12) "Select a UCID (Optional)" drop-down menu
An existing user can be search for from the "Manage Existing User" screen. Select a UCID from the
"Select a UCID (optional)" menu (12) . EquipmentManager will return a list of users associated with
that UCID.
Click the login id of a user (7) for editing. Repeat steps 2 through 5.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02941638
Product Link Installation

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Modules
The Product Link Modules are the systems onboard hardware components. These components allow
data to be transmitted over a secure Caterpillar wireless network. Data is sent to machines and data is
received from machines. The Product Link hardware consists of: antenna, data module and
interconnecting wire harness. The antenna consists of two separate components. One component is for
receiving location information from the Global Positioning satellite (GPS) system. The second
component is for receiving and transmitting signals from and to a wireless network. The second
component also has a taller whip antenna.
The GPS signal provides data about the location of the machine. This data is sent to the Product Link
data module from the GPS antenna. The signal is processed by the Product Link data module. After
the signal is processed, it is transmitted to the wireless network through the whip antenna.
The Service Meter Unit (SMU) is data captured from the "R" terminal on the alternator. The SMU
represents the number of hours that the engine has run. Some data drift from meters in the cab or
SMU accumulation on other modules is possible. Product Link PL321 systems conform to onboard
SYNC clock strategies. This strategy will synchronize the SMU with the designated master Electronic
Control Module (ECM).
Date and time stamps are captured onboard with Product Link using Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
The SMU data will be displayed according to users preference for the time zone. Refer to Systems
Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting, RENR7911, "Product Link 121/321" for details.
Product Link Module Types

The table shows the Product Link Modules that are available.
Table 1
Module Capabilities Watch Coverage
PL121SR Hours Asset Watch

Location
Time & Geographic
Fencing
Hours
Location
Time and Geographic Asset Watch
PL321SR
Fencing Health Watch
I/O Switch Channels
Events and Diagnostic codes
PL121SR
PL321SR
Installation
Once you have purchased a Product Link Module, you must install the module on the machine. A
comprehensive Installation Guide comes with your Product Link Module. Refer to Special
Instruction, REHS2365, "An Installation Guide for the Product Link PL121SR and for the PL300".
Note: The instructions that are mentioned above are for installing the PL121SR and PL300. The
PL321SR is the combination of the PL121SR Radio and PL300 ECM.
Configure and Register

Product Link modules are configured and registered by using Caterpillar Electronic Technician (CAT
ET). After installing the Product Link module on the machine, a laptop computer with Cat ET
software is connected to the module. The Dealer technician uses Cat ET to set up the module for that
specific machine. Included with each Product Link is a Special Instructions that explain the product
installation and product registration procedures.
For additional information on configuration and registration of your Product Link Module, refer to
Systems Operation Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting:, RENR7911, "Product Link 121/321".
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03322229
Administration
SMCS - 7600; 7606

Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03322229
Administration
SMCS - 7600; 7606

Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03361360
Manage Equipment Groups

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Introduction
Being able to create predetermined groupings of equipment is particularly useful when managing large
numbers of equipment through EquipmentManager. These groups that you create will allow you to work
more efficiently because you can quickly select one of your predefined groups upon which to perform any
of the asset watch, maintenance watch or health watch tasks rather than entering individual serial numbers
or performing advanced searches each time.
Equipment Groups
Equipment groups can be created. Existing equipment groups can be modified or deleted.
Create Equipment Group

Use the following procedure in order to create an equipment group:
down menu, select "Create Equipment Group". The "Equipment Search" screen will be displayed.
"Create Equipment Group" - "Equipment Search"
2. Enter your search criteria in the "Equipment Search" fields and click the "Display Equipment" button
(1) . The "Create Equipment Group" screen will be displayed. The results of the search will be
displayed in the "Equipment List" section of this screen.
"Create Equipment Group" - "Group Information" and "Equipment List"
(2) Check box
(5) "Create Group" button
3. In the "Group Information" section, enter a name for the new equipment group in the "Group Name"
field (3) .
4. In the "Group Information" section, enter a description of the new equipment group in the "Group
5. In the "Equipment List" section, select the check box (2) next to each piece of equipment that you
wish to add to the new equipment group.
"Create Equipment Group Confirmation" screen
6. Click the "Create Group" button (5) at the bottom. The selected equipment is added to the new group
and the "Create Equipment Group Confirmation" screen will be displayed.
Modify Equipment Group

Once you have created an equipment group, you may decide to add or remove equipment from the group or
change the name and/or description of the group.
In order to modify an existing equipment group, use the following procedure:

"Modify Equipment Group"
1. From either the "Equipment Groups" drop-down menu section of the "Administration" screen or the
"View" drop-down menu, select "Modify Equipment Group". The "Modify Equipment Group"
2. Select the name of the group from the "Group Name" drop-down menu (6) in order to modify the
group. The "Group Information" and "Equipment List" sections appear on the "Modify Equipment
Group" screen for the selected equipment group.
"Modify Equipment Group" - "Group Information" and "Equipment List"
(7) "Administrative Search" button
3. If you wish to add equipment to the equipment group, click on the "Administrative Search" button
(7) , or else skip to Step 5. The "Equipment Search" screen will be displayed.
"Equipment Search"
4. Enter your search criteria in the search fields and click the "Display Equipment" button (1) . The
"Modify Equipment Group" screen will be displayed with the equipment in the existing group. The
equipment list is also displayed in the "Equipment List" section of the screen.
Updating" Equipment List"
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
5. In the "Group Information" section, edit the name in the "Group Name" field (3) .
6. In the "Group Information" section, edit the description in the "Group Description" field (4) .
7. In the "Equipment List", select the check box (2) for the equipment you want to add to the group.
Clear the check box for the equipment that you want to remove from the group.
"Modify Equipment Group Detail"
8. Click the "Next" button (8) . The "Modify Equipment Group Detail" screen will be displayed.
Delete Equipment Group

Just as you may create and modify groupings of equipment, you may also delete equipment groups
completely.
In order to delete an equipment group, use the following procedure:

"Delete Equipment Group" screen
1. Either from the "Equipment Groups" section of the "Administration" screen or from the "View" drop-
down menu, select "Delete Equipment Group". The "Delete Equipment Group" screen will be
displayed.
2. Select the name of the equipment group you wish to delete from the "Group Name" drop-down menu
(6) . The "Delete Equipment Group" screen is displayed with the details of the equipment group that
you selected.
"Delete Equipment Group" details
(9) "Delete Group" button
3. Click the "Delete Group" button (9) . A window will appear with a "Delete" confirmation message.
4. Click "OK". The equipment group is deleted.
Equipment Subgroups
In addition to creating groupings of equipment, you can use these equipment groups to create subgroups.
Equipment subgroups are subsets of existing equipment groups that are given a name and description, and
then saved. For example, a dealer could create an equipment group of all the equipment. The Dealer could
then create a subgroup that contains all of the equipment from multiple locations.
Similar to equipment groups, equipment subgroups can be selected on the EquipmentManager search
screens in order to save time entering search criteria into the search and advanced search fields. The
procedures to create, modify, and delete an equipment subgroup are similar to those you performed when
you created, modified, and deleted an equipment group
Create Equipment Subgroup

In order to create an equipment sub group, use the following procedure:
down menu, select "Create Equipment Sub Group". The "Create Equipment Subgroup" screen will be
displayed.

2. Select the name of the equipment group from which you wish to create a subgroup from the "Group
Name" drop-down menu (6) . The "Create Equipment Subgroup" screen is displayed with the
"Subgroup Information" section and the "Equipment List".
(2) Check box
(12) "Create Subgroup" button
3. In the "Subgroup Information" section, enter a name for the new subgroup in the "Subgroup Name"
field (10) .
4. In the "Subgroup Information" section, enter a description for the new subgroup in the "Subgroup
5. In the "Equipment List" section, select the check box (2) next to each piece of equipment in the
group that you wish to be added to the new subgroup.
6. Click the "Create Subgroup" button (12) . The "Create Equipment Subgroup Confirmation" screen
will be displayed.
"Create Equipment Subgroup" confirmation
7. Click the "Done" button. The new subgroup has been created.
Modify Equipment Subgroup

You have the ability to change the name and/or the description of an equipment subgroup as well as add or
remove pieces of equipment from the subgroup.
In order to modify an equipment subgroup, use the following procedure:

1. From either the "Equipment Groups" section of the "Administration" screen, or from the "View" drop
-down menu, select "Modify Equipment Sub Group". The "Modify Equipment Sub Group" screen
will be displayed.
2. Select the name of the group for the subgroup that you wish to modify from the "Group Name" drop-
down menu (6) . The subgroups that pertain to the selected group will be populated in the "Subgroup
Name" drop-down menu.
3. Select the name of the subgroup you wish to modify from the "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu
(13) . The "Modify Equipment Subgroup" screen will be displayed with the "Subgroup Information"
and "Equipment List" sections.
Editing "Subgroup Information" and "Equipment List"
(2) Check box
(8) "Next" button
4. In the "Subgroup Information" section, edit the name in the "Subgroup Name" field (10) .
5. In the "Subgroup Information" section, edit the description in the "Subgroup Description" field (11) .
6. In the "Equipment List" section, select the check box (2) for the equipment you want to add to the
subgroup. Clear the check box for the equipment that you want to remove from the subgroup.
7. Click the "Next" button (8) . The subgroup is modified and the "Modify Equipment Subgroup Detail"
"Modify Equipment Subgroup Detail"
Delete Equipment Subgroup

In order to delete an equipment subgroup, use the following procedure:
down menu, select "Delete Equipment Sub Group". The "Delete Equipment Subgroup" screen will be
displayed.
2. Select the name of the group for the subgroup you wish to delete from the "Group Name" drop-down
menu (6) . The "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu is populated with all the subgroup names that
match the selected group.
3. Select the name of the subgroup you want to delete from the "Subgroup Name" drop-down menu
(13) . The "Delete Equipment Subgroup Details" screen will be displayed.
"Delete Equipment Subgroup" details
(14) "Delete Subgroup" button
4. Click the "Delete Subgroup" button (14) . A window will appear with a "Delete" confirmation
message.
5. Click "OK". The equipment subgroup is deleted.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03337469
Manage Hardware
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Introduction
The technician registers the Product Link Modules (PLM) when the modules are installed on a piece
of equipment for the first time. The technician then sets the parameters of the configuration that can
be viewed and can be changed by using the "Over the Air Configuration" feature from
EquipmentManager. Caterpillar recommends providing these parameters to the technician before the
installation process begins.
The "Administration" screens of EquipmentManager display the details for the registry of your
equipment in the following categories:
• " "Transmission Registry""
• "Send Commands"
• ""Product Link Module Status Report""
"General Registry"
"General Registry" screen
Once one or more of the equipment has been selected and the "General Registry" has been selected
from either "View" drop-down menu or the"Administration" screen the "General Registry" screen will
appear. Refer to Illustration 1.
Table 1 lists the fields that appear on the "General Registry" screen.
Table 1
The fields on the "General Registry" Screen
This is the ID of the equipment that has the installed
"Eqpt ID" UNIT 4
PLM.
"Manufacturer" This is the manufacturer of the equipment. CAT
"Model" This is the name of the model of the equipment. D8R
This is the serial number of the equipment. The "Serial
"Serial Number"
Number" is a link. Clicking the link takes you to the 6YZ#####
"Last Reg/Admin This is the date and time that the last registration or 07/15/2002
Date & Time" administration message was received. 02:43:16 AM
This indicates that the PLM has been installed and
registered. If PLM is not registered, the "Subscriptions
"Status" Registered
not available. Contact Administrator" message will
appear across remaining fields.
"First Report This indicates the first time for each day the PLM
06:19 AM
Time" reports.
This is the indicates the type of report that is sent from
PLM. Choices are "Position", "SMU", or both. Position
Position
"Report Type" reports contain information about the location of the
SMU
equipment. "SMU" reports contain the data about the
Service Meter Units that are used.
This indicates the number of reports for each day that are
"Frequency" (0-4)/Day
sent by the PLM.
"Global Grams" are used in areas of the world that have
no ground stations. If the machine will operate in areas
that have no ground stations, select "Enabled". Enabled
"Global Gram"
Otherwise, leave the parameter set to the default of Disabled
"Disabled". If you have any questions about "Global
Gram", contact your Technical Communicator.
DQ0000######Q1
"PLM ID" This is the ID number of the Product Link Module.
PL201
"Module Type" This is the type of the PLM.
PL321
This field describes the type of data link that is used. CDL
"Data Link Type"
Most Product Link Modules use the CDL or the Cat Data SAE 1708
Link (CDL). SAE 1939
"Block Data Transfer" is a technology that is used to pull
"Block Data large blocks of data from a machine. "Block Data Disabled
Transfer" Transfer" exists for future use. Leave this parameter set Enabled
to "Disabled".
"Software This is the version of the software for Product Link that 1.6
Revision" is onboard at the time of last registration message. 2.1
From the "General Registry" screen, you can select the check box next to a piece of equipment. Then,
"Transmission Registry" parameters. Refer to ""Over the Air Configuration"" for more details.
"Equipment Details"
The "Equipment Details" screen provides all the details about the selected equipment.
In order to view the "Equipment Details" of a machine, select the serial number for the equipment
from the "Serial Number" column on the "General Registry" screen. The "Equipment Details" screen
will be displayed.
"Equipment Details" screen
Click the "Back" button in order to return to the "General Registry" screen. Table 2 describes the
fields that are found on the "Equipment Details" screen.
Table 2
"Equipment Details" Screen
Customer Information
"Universal Acme Aggregate
UCID Name – UCID Number
Customer ID:"
1234567890
Acme SW Quarry
"Customer Account
Customer Name – Dealer Customer Number
Number"
1234567
"Customer 100 Any Street

Street, City, State, Zip
Address" Any Town, USA
Dealer Information
"Last Dealer Primary Dealer Name Demo Dealer

Update" Date of last Equipment Record Maintenance 9/27/2006
"Other Assigned Other Dealer
Other Dealers associated with selected equipment
Dealer" Name
Dealer Specific Equipment Information
The ID of the equipment upon which the PLM is
"Equipment ID" UNIT 4
installed
"Location/Jobsite" Southeast Quarry
Equipment's assigned location or jobsite
"Purchase Date" Equipment Purchase Date for current owner 1-Sep-02

Owned
"Ownership Status"
Current ownership status of the equipment Leased
Rented
Equipment Details – Product Link/EquipmentManager Information
The "ID" number of the Product Link Module. The
"PLM ID" "PLM ID" is a link. Clicking the link will display the DQ0000012345
PL201
"Module Type" The type of PLM
PL321
Global Grams are used in geographical areas that have
no ground stations. If the machine will operate in areas Enabled
without ground stations, select "Enabled". Otherwise,
"Global Gram"
leave the parameter set to the default Disabled. If you
have questions about "Global Gram", contact your Disabled
Marketing Company.
Dealer through which the subscriptions are purchased
"Dealer" Dealer Name
Indicates that the PLM has been installed and has been Registered
"Status"
registered. Deregistered
The table shows the subscriptions that are active and
"Subscription
for whom they are purchased. Includes link to "Edit AW, MW, HW
Level"
Subscriptions"
Equipment Information
"Serial Number" The serial number of the equipment 6YZ#####
CATERPILLAR,
"Manufacturer" The manufacturer of the equipment
INC.
"Product Industry" Industry in which the selected equipment is primarily Quarry +
used Aggregates
"Product Use" Describes for what the equipment is used Sand & Gravel
Light
"Application" Describes the machine application Medium
Heavy
Hours
"Meter Indicator" Unit of measure for equipment usage meter Miles
Kilometers
Vehicle Identification Number if the equipment is an 2BR#####,

engine, or related serial numbers and descriptions if Engine
"Related Serial
machine. Related serial numbers may be the engine,
Number(s)" 1YS#####
transmission, etc. Four related serial numbers can be
listed Transmission
Attachment
"Equipment Type" Engine/Power
Describes the type for the selected equipment
System
Machine
"Product Model" The model name of the equipment D8R
"Model Year" The year of the equipment was manufactured 2001
"Meter Reading
Date of last meter reading update 27-Sep-06
Date"
"Meter Reading" Last service meter reading value 214
"Arrangement
Equipment arrangement or configuration number 157-0818
Number"
Equipment Groups
"Equipment Names of group(s) in which selected equipment is
Sample Group
Groups" included
"Group Owner" Login ID of the group owner smithxx
"Equipment Registration Details"

The "Equipment Registration Detail" screen provides details about the current configuration of the
onboard PLM.
In order to view the details of the registration, click the "PLM ID" of a machine in the "PLM ID"
column on the "General Registry" screen. The "Equipment Registration Detail" screen will be
displayed.
"Equipment Registration Details" screen
Table 3 describes the fields that are found on the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen. Click the
"Back" button in order to return to the "General Registry" screen.
Table 3
"Equipment Registration Detail" Screen
Equipment Details
The ID of the equipment upon which the PLM
"Equipment Id" UNIT 4
is installed
"Manufacturer" The Manufacturer of the equipment CAT
"Model" The model name of the equipment D8R
The serial number of the equipment. The serial
"Serial Number" number is a link. Clicking the link will display 6YZ#####
the Equipment Detail screen.
"PLModule Type" PL201

The type of Product Link Module
PL321
"Radio Software On-board Product Link software part number.
1234567-01
Part Number"
"PLM ID" The ID number of the Product Link Module DQ000012345
Communications Configuration
"First Report Time" Indicates the first time each day the PLM
12:00 AM
reports.
"Position Report
Frequency of which location is reported 4/Day
Frequency"
"SMU Report Frequency of which service meter units are
1/Day
Frequency" reported
Fuel Only
Defines whether the SMU or Fuel
"SMU/Fuel
consumption report is sent as part of the daily SMU Only
Reporting"
standard message.
Alternate SMU/Fuel
A technology that is used to pull large blocks Disabled
"Block Data of data from a machine. Block Data Transfer
Transfer" exists for future use. Leave this parameter set
to Disabled. Enabled
The type of data link that is used. Most CDL

"Data Link Type"
PLMsuse Caterpillar Data Link (CDL). SAE 1708
SAE 1939
"Global Grams" are used in geographical areas
that have no ground stations. If the machine Enabled
will operate in areas without ground stations,
"Global Gram" select "Enabled". Otherwise, leave the
parameter set to the default "Disabled". If you
have questions about "Global Gram", contact Disabled
your Technical Communicator.
"Diagnostics and Event Configuration"
Defines when to send messages from the
"Diagnostic Event Immediate: sends a
Product Link system when a diagnostic event
Reporting message when an event
is reported from other ECMs on the machine.
Frequency" occurs.
Next: queues messages

about events and sends the
"Level 1 Event Defines when to send messages from the messages in a batch based
Reporting Product Link system when a level 1 event is on the next scheduled
Frequency" reported from other ECMs on the machine. interval that is calculated
from the report start time.
"Level 2 Event Defines when to send messages from the Never: Never log messages
Reporting Product Link system when a level 2 event is or send messages about the
Frequency" reported from other ECMs on the machine. events.
"Level 3 Event Defines when to send messages from the
Reporting Product Link system when a level 3 event is
Frequency" reported from other ECMs on the machine.
Determines when the Product Link will report
a recurrence of an event or a diagnostic code,
measured in units of machine operating hours.
Minimum value: 4 hours
All events and diagnostics are recorded and
may be viewed with the Electronic
Technician.
"Immediate The default value of 20 hours means that an
Interval" event or diagnostic update message will not be
present for a specific event or diagnostic
update until the machine has operated for 20
Default value: 20 hours
hours after the last transmitted occurrence of
that event or diagnostic update. At the next
event or diagnostic occurrence after the time
period elapses, another message will be sent.
Sets the time period before an event or
diagnostic message update is sent, measured
"Event/Diagnostic Minimum value: 24 hours
in units of real time or clock hours. This time
Interval"
period is calculated from the Report Start
Time.
The default value of 168 hours or 1 week is
Default value: 168 hours or
only valid if the event or diagnostic report
1 week
intervals are set to Next.
Registration and Subscription Details
This indicates that the PLM has been installed
Registered
and registered. If PLM is not registered, the
"Status" "Subscriptions not available. Contact
Administrator" message will appear across Deregistered
remaining fields.
"Last Reg/Admin The Date and Time of the last time of
##########
Date & Time" registration of the PLM
Defines the Dealer code for which
"Dealer Code" TD00
"Dealer Defines which subscriptions are owned at
AW, MW, HW
Subscription" Dealer Level
Defines the Universal Customer ID for which
"UCID" 1234567890
"UCID Defines which subscriptions are owned at
AW, MW, HW
Subscription" customer level
On Board Electronic System Information
"ECM Module ID" Lists all Electronic Control Modules detected Engine, Transmission,
on the data link of the machine. Product Link PL300
Indicates serial numbers for all Electronic
"ECM S/N" Control Modules detected on the data link of XXX12345
the machine.
Indicates the software part number for all
"ECM Software
Electronic Control modules detected on the 1234567-00
P/N"
Indicates Sync Clock enabled on each
"Sync Clock
Electronic Control Module detected on the Yes, No
Enabled"
Indicated the Sync Clock Level for each
"SC Level" Electronic Control Module that is Sync Clock Slave, Master
Enabled
Displays the diagnostic protocol for each
"Diag Protocol" 0
Displays the event protocol for each
"Event Protocol" 0
Fencing Configuration
Inclusive, Exclusive, Time
"Fence Type" Lists all Geographic and Time Fence Types
"Fence Status" Indicates fence type is enabled or disabled enabled, disabled
"Fence Description" Equipment Yard, Working
Displays user defined fence descriptions
Hours
"Center Lat/Long" Indicates the latitude and longitude center N1234.0000/ E1234.0000
point for configured fence
"Radius" Indicates the radius of configured fence 20.0, 5.0
"Days" Indicates working days of configured fence M,T,W,TH,F,
Indicates start time and end time of configured
"Hours" 6:00 AM to 6:00 PM
fence
Switched Input Configuration
"Digital Input" Sensor identification Sensor #1
Defines whether the Digital Input Sensor is Configured,

"Input Status"
configured. Not Configured
"Input Description" Describes the condition that the switch is Track Tension Switch
monitoring. Maximum of 24 characters
Defines whether a switch is attached. If the Not Configured

switch is attached, the defines the state of the
"Type" Normally Closed
switch contacts under normal operating
conditions. Normally Open
Defines the delay time before an alarm
condition is recorded. If the normal condition 30.0 sec (default)
of the switch is open and the delay time is set
"Delay Time"
to the default time of 30.0 sec, an alarm
condition will be sent when the switch is 0.1 sec - 1200 sec
closed for 30.0 sec.
"Status History"
The "Status History" is a record of all the status reports that are sent by the PLM. The status report
contains information about the status of the actual PLM.
In order to view the "Status History" of a PLM, click the "Status History" button that is on the
Top of the "Status History" screen

In order to change the range of the date to reflect an appropriate time period for the status history,
click the "Calendar" icon next to the "Start Date" and "End Date" boxes, respectively. Then, select a
desired date from the applicable calendar.
Bottom of the "Status History" screen
When you are done, click the "Change Date Range" button. The "Status History" table will again load
the date in order to reflect the updated range of the date. Click the "Back" button in order to return to
the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen.
Note: The "Change Date Range" function works similarly in many views or screens throughout the
application.
Table 4 describes fields that are found on the "Status History" screen. Click the "Back" button in
order to return to the "General Registry" screen.
Table 4
"Status History" Screen
Displays the date and time of the status report. If the PLM is set to
"Date/Time" send status once per day, these values should be approximately
one day apart each time.
"Power
Loss" (Low Yes, No
sometime between this status report and the last status report.
Voltage)
Yes, No
Yes, No,
N/A
"PW Alarms"
Active (1)
Active (1) – The machine has operated in the last 48 hours.
Sleep (2) – The machine has not operated for greater than 48 hours
"Power Mode" but less than one week. The PLM will wake up every six hours to Sleep (2)
send and receive messages. Position messages will only be sent if
the unit has changed position by greater than 200 meters.
Hibernate (3) – The machine has not operated for more than one
"Event Pending" Indicates that an event was recorded and will be sent (PL321
Yes, No
system only).
"Digital #
Active"
"Digital Registry"
The Product Link system uses up to four digital switches in order to monitor the equipment status. By
installing switches and configuring the state during normal operating conditions, which are open or
closed, you can be alerted when this normal state has changed.
"Digital Registry" screen
When some equipment has been selected and the " Digital Registry" from the "View" drop-down
menu has been selected, the "Digital Registry" screen will appear. Notice that the fields in the
"Equipment Information" section of this screen are the same fields that are on the "General Registry"
screen. Table 5 describes the information that is found on the "Digital Registry" screen.
Table 5
"Digital Registry" Screen
Sample
Field Description
Values
Not
Configured
Defines whether a switch is attached. If the switch is attached,
Normally
"Type" defines the state of the switch contacts under normal operating
Closed
conditions.
Normally Open
Defines the delay time before an alarm condition is recorded. 30.0 sec
If the normal condition of the switch is open and the delay (default)
"Delay"
time is set to the default time of 30.0 sec, an alarm condition 0.1 sec - 1200
will be sent when the switch is closed for 30.0 sec. sec
Track Tension
Switch
Field used to describe the condition that the switch is
"Description" Maximum of
monitoring.
24 characters.
All Conditions
(default)
Key
"Monitoring Defines the monitoring condition for the digital input. When Off/Engine Off
Condition" will the switch be monitored? Key On/Engine
Off
Key On/Engine
On
On the "Digital Registry" screen, you can select the check box next to a piece of equipment. Then,
"Transmission Registry" parameters. Refer to the "Over the Air Configuration" topic for more details.
"Transmission Registry"
"Transmission Registry" screen
The "Transmission Registry" screen will display the parameters for the registration that have been set
for determining the types of information that are transmitted from the PLM and the frequency that the
information is transmitted. Notice that the fields in the "Equipment Information" section of the screen
are the same fields that are on the "General Registry" screen and "Digital Registry" screen. Table 6
describes the information that is found on the "Transmission Registry" screen.
Table 6
"Transmission Registry" Screen
"Event Reporting" from the Product Link system Immediate: sends a message when an event
"Frequency: Level when a level 1 event is reported occurs.
1" from other ECMs on the Next: queues messages about events and
machine. sends the messages in a batch based on the
Defines when to send messages next scheduled interval that is calculated
"Event Reporting" from the Product Link system from the report start time.
"Frequency: Level when a level 2 event is reported Never: never log messages or send
2" from other ECMs on the messages about the events.
machine.
"Frequency: Level when a level 3 event is reported
3" from other ECMs on the
machine.
"Frequency: when a diagnostic event is
Diagnostic" reported from other ECMs on
the machine.
Minimum value is 4 hours. The default is
Determines when the Product 20 hours, meaning that an event or
Link will report a recurrence of diagnostic update message will not be
an event or a diagnostic code, present for a specific event or diagnostic
"Event/Diagnostic measured in units of machine update until the machine has operated for
Interval" operating hours. All events and 20 hours after the last transmitted
diagnostics are recorded and occurrence of that event or diagnostic
may be viewed with the update. At the next event or diagnostic
Electronic Technician. occurrence after the time period elapses,
another message will be sent.
Sets the time period before an
event or diagnostic message Minimum value is 24 hours. Default value
update is sent, measured in is 168 hours or 1 week.
"Next Scheduled
units of real time or clock This value is only valid if the event or
Interval"
hours. This time period is diagnostic report intervals are set to
calculated from the "Report "Next".
Start Time".
Defines whether the SMU or
Fuel Only
"SMU/Fuel Fuel consumption report is sent
SMU Only
Reporting" as part of the daily standard
Alternate SMU/Fuel
message.
From the "Transmission Registry" screen, you can select the check box next to a piece of equipment.
Then, click the "Configuration" button. The "Over the Air Configuration" screen will appear. On this
screen, you can edit the "General Registry" parameters, the "Digital Registry" parameters, and the
"Transmission Registry" parameters. Refer to ""Over the Air Configuration"".
"Over the Air Configuration"

You can use EquipmentManager over the air in order to change the configurable parameters for the
registration of the PLM. This screen can be reached from the following screens by selecting the
"Configuration button" that appears on each screen:
• "Equipment Registration Detail"
• "Transmission Registry"
Refer to the following procedure in order to configure parameters for the registration over the air from
the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen:
1. In order for the "Over The Air Configuration" screen to appear , select the "Configuration" on
the "Equipment Registration Detail" screen. The "Over The Air Configuration" screen will
appear.
"Over the Air Configuration" screen
(1) Green check mark
(2) "Send" button

2. Change the desired parameters of the configuration by either typing new values into the text
fields or selecting new values from the drop-down menus that appear in the "New Value"
column of the table.
A green check mark (1) will appear in the "Change" column next to any parameter that has been
changed.
ReferenceRefer to Systems Operation, "General Registry", Systems Operation, "Digital

Registry", and Systems Operation, "Transmission Registry" for more information about the
parameters and values.
Note: Machine "Start Time" and "Stop Time" are supported by PL321 systems with the current
software version. This configuration can only be set by using the "Over the Air Configuration"
feature. When the "Start Time" and "Stop Time" feature is available, the "Start Time" and the
"Stop Time" parameters will appear and the parameters can be set to "On" or "Off".
Note: In some cases, the parameter name on the "Over the Air Configuration" screen is
different from the parameter name that appears on the "Transmission Registry" screen.
The following list shows the parameter name on the "Over the Air Configuration" screen and
the equivalent parameter name on the "Transmission Registry" screen:
◦ Event Internal = Event/Diagnostic Interval Next Message
◦ Interval = Next Scheduled Interval
3. Click the "Send" button (2) . A popup window for a confirmation will appear.
Successful message for sending of the configuration parameters
4. Click the "OK" button. The parameters are updated and the "Configuration Parameters Sent
Successfully" screen will be displayed.
The "Over the Air Configuration" screen due to selecting multiple equipment
(3) "Manufacturer" parameter and "Serial Number" parameter
Note: If you select more than one piece of equipment for configuration at the same time, you must set
all the parameters to the same value. Only the "Manufacturer" parameter and "Serial Number"
parameter (3) can be set separately. These fields can not be edited on the "Over The Air
Configuration" screen if multiple machines have been selected.
"Send Commands"
The "Send Commands" feature enables you to force the PLM to immediately send messages rather
than waiting for the next interval of transmission. This could be useful if you needed to know
information such as the immediate location or SMU of the machine. "Send Commands" is also where
you can register and deregister the PLM for purposes of moving the module from one machine to
another.
In order to send commands, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Send Commands".
The "Equipment Search" screen will appear.
2. Select the criteria of your search and/or type the criteria of your search. Then click "Display
Equipment". The "Send Commands" screen will appear and the screen will display the results
of the search.
"Send Commands"
(4) Check boxes
(5) "Status" check box
(6) "Event" check box
(7) "Send" button
3. In order to send commands, select the check box that corresponds to the machine from the most
left column. In the remaining columns, select the check box that corresponds to the type of
command.
Note: Selecting the check box (4) in the first column of the "Send Commands" table
automatically selects the "Status" check box (5) and "Event" check box (6) for that selected
item. Because the "Status" command returns reports about "Location", "SMU" and "Fuel", there
is no reason to send any of these three commands if "Status" is selected.
Table 7 describes the type of commands that can be sent.
Table 7
"Send Commands" Options
Subscriptions
Asset Maint. Health Command
Description
Watch Watch Watch
Sends report with location information of
X Location
machine.
Sends report with information about current
X SMU
Service Meter Units.
Sends report with information about fuel
X Fuel
consumption.
Sends report with information about Location,
X Status
SMU, and Fuel.
Sends report with Level 1, 2 and 3 event
X Event messages that have been collected from ECMs
on machine since last transmission.
Reg Request that a new registration message be
X X X
Request sent.
The "Forced Deregistration" is useful if you
know that a module has been removed without
Forced
X X X being de-registered from the old machine. The
DegReg
"Forced Deregistration" will remove the
registration from EquipmentManager.
Use the "Deregistration" command when you
X X X DegReg are removing a PLM from a machine.
(1)
Send this command in order to clear all of the

Clear event messages that have been logged and are
X X X
Events waiting until the next transmission interval to
be sent.
(1)
Deregistering the PLM does not affect the billing status. You must deactivate billing separately.
4. Click the "Send" button (7) . The "Send Commands" confirmation message will be displayed.
Note: The configuration message is sent over the air via a satellite to the onboard PLM. The
PLM will return a status message when the command has been successfully received at the
module. This two-way communication will take a few minutes. Communication can be
completed assuming that the machine is running or the master switch is open.
"Send Commands" confirmation message
5. Click "OK". The "Send Commands" page will display a successful message.
"Send Commands" with a successful message
6. Click"OK".
"Product Link Module Status Report"

The "PLM Status Report" will display the "Product Link Module Details". In order to display these
details perform the following procedure:
"Product Link Module Details" screens
1. Select "Product Link Module Statue Report" from the "Administration" menu.
2. Enter the "Product Link Module ID" in the "Search" field.
3. Click "Display Details"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03369021

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Address Book
"Address Book".
Add an Address
screen will appear.
address.
Edit an Address
Delete an Address
3. Click "OK".

"Reactions"

"Reactions" screen
(3) check box
notification.
• "Time Alarm"
Return Alert".

"Warning".
Table 1
Derate Level 2
Severe Level 3
Unknown Level 0
Severity No Level
Warning Level 1
"Delete Reactions"
to delete.
window.
"Delete Reactions"
(5) Check box
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03369021

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Address Book
"Address Book".
Add an Address
screen will appear.
address.
Edit an Address
Delete an Address
3. Click "OK".

"Reactions"

"Reactions" screen
(3) check box
notification.
• "Time Alarm"
Return Alert".

"Warning".
Table 1
Derate Level 2
Severe Level 3
Unknown Level 0
Severity No Level
Warning Level 1
"Delete Reactions"
to delete.
window.
"Delete Reactions"
(5) Check box
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03365020
Upload Data
SMCS - 7600; 7606
The Caterpillar EquipmentManager database only begins storing information about a machine when
the Product Link Module (PLM) has been installed and registered, subscriptions have been purchased
and the PLM has begun submitting reports.
"Repair History"
There are two methods for uploading the repair history for a machine. The first method is by entering
the information about each individual service by using a form. Refer to "Upload "Repair History"
Using Form". The second method is by uploading a file that contains information about one or more
services that were performed on one or more machines. Refer to "Upload "Repair History" by
Importing From a File". Both of these methods are available on the "Repair History Upload" screen.
Upload "Repair History" Using Form

In order to upload the repair history by using the form, use the following procedure:
"Repair History Upload" screenusing a form
(1) "Submit information on a form" radio button
(2) Radio button
(3) Continue
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" menu, select "Repair History".
If equipment has already been selected, the "Repair History Upload" screen is displayed.
If you have not already selected equipment, the "Equipment Search" screen is displayed.
Perform your search, and then click the "Display Equipment" button. The "Repair History
Upload" screen will appear.
2. Select the "Submit information on a form" radio button (1) if "Submit information on a form" is
not already selected.
3. Select the radio button (2) that is next to the desired machine in order to upload the repair
history.
4. Click the "Continue" button (3) .
The "Report Service" screen will be displayed.

"Report Service" screen
5. In the "Service Report Common Info" section, select the appropriate checkbox for the service
that was performed.
If you selected "Dealer", a dropdown appears below the radio buttons. Select the name of the
"Dealer" that serviced the equipment and proceed to Step 7.
If you selected "Others", a text field appears below the radio buttons. Type the name of the
person or entity that serviced the equipment and proceed to Step 7.
6. Enter the work order number in the "Work Order" text field.
7. Enter the segment number in the "Segment" text field.
8. Enter the date that the service was performed by clicking the calendar icon that is next to the
"Repair Date" field. Select the date from the popup calendar.
9. Enter the Service Meter Units in the "Service Meter" text field. If the units were measured in
hours, select the "H" radio button. If the units were measured in miles, select the "M" radio
button. If the units were measured in kilometers, select the "KM" radio button.
10. Enter a description of the repair in the "Repair Description" text field.
11. Enter the time in hours that the machine was unavailable while being serviced in the
"Downtime Labor" text field.
12. Enter Information about faulty parts in the "Part Causing Failure" table including the part name,
manufacturer, quantity, defect code, and group number.
Click the "Add Part" button in order to create a new row in the table for additional parts. Select
the checkbox that is next to a part. Click the "Delete Part" button in order to remove the part
from the list.
13. Click the "Save" button. The repair history is uploaded.
Upload "Repair History" by Importing From a File

In order to import the repair history from a file, use the following procedur:
"Repair History Upload" screen by importing from a file
(4) "Import from a file" radio button
(5) Check box
1. From the "Repair History Upload" screen, select the "Import from a file" radio button (4) .
2. Select the check box (5) next to the pieces of equipment to which you wish to upload repair
history.
3. Click the "Import From File" button (6) . The "Import From File" screen is displayed in a new
window.
"Import From File" screen browsing for a file
4. Click the "Browse" button. Navigate to the file that contains the repair history to be added.
Click the "Open" button. The name of the file that was selected appears in the "File" text field.
5. Click "OK". The repair history is uploaded.
Preparing a Repair History Upload File
Sample of a MicrosoftR Excel file using "Repair History Upload"

In order for a "Repair History Upload" file to be successfully uploaded, the file must contain the
correct fields and files. Also, the files must be formatted in a specific way. Illustration 5 is an example
of a spreadsheet that was used to create an upload file.
In order to create a "Repair History Upload" file, use the following procedure:
1. Open a new MicrosoftR Excel spreadsheet.
"Repair History Upload" Microsoft Excel - Columns A through F
(6) Column headers

"Repair History Upload" Microsoft Excel - Columns G through L
(6) Column headers
"Repair History Upload" Microsoft Excel - Columns M through S
(6) Column headers
2. Enter the repairs in the spreadsheet one repair per row. Refer to Illustrations 6 through 8 as
examples of the columns and values that should appear in the spreadsheet. Items that are
3. Once you have finished entering data, delete the column headers (6) .
4. Go to "File", "Save As" and pick "CSV (Comma Delimited)" and save the file.
"Refueling History"
For "Repair History", information can be submitted as a form or an upload from a file. However, there
is only one method to upload the refueling history.
Import Refueling History from File

In order to import refueling history from a file, use the following procedure:
"Import Refuel History from File" screen
(5) Check box
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" menu, select "Refueling History".
If equipment has already been selected, the "Import Refuel History from File" screen is
displayed.
2. Select the check box () next to the pieces of equipment to which you wish to upload refueling
history.
3. Click the "Import from File" button () . The "Import from File" screen opens in a new window.
4. Click the "Browse" button. Navigate to the file that contains the refueling history that is to be
added. Click the "Open" button. The name of the file that was selected will appear in the "File"
text field.
5. Click "OK". The refueling history is uploaded.
Preparing a Refueling History Upload File

In order for a "Refuel History Upload" file to be successfully uploaded, use the following procedure:
1. Open a new Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.

Sample of a Microsoft Excel file using "Refuel History" with headings
2. Enter the refuelings in the spreadsheet one refueling per row. Refer to Illustration 10 as an
example of the columns and values that should appear in the spreadsheet. Items that are
3. After you have finished entering data, delete the column headers.
4. Go to "File", "Save As" and pick "CVS (Comma Delimited)" and save the file.
Sample or a Microsoft Excel file using "Refuel History" without headings
Illustration 11 shows the final file without the headers.
".cvs" alert message

If you attempt to upload a file that is not of the ".csv " file type, you will get the message displayed in
Illustration 12.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03365163
Manage Major Repair Tracking

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Track Major Repairs

EquipmentManager can track major repairs in the same way that EquipmentManager can track planned
maintenance schedules. You must configure EquipmentManager to track major repairs through the
Administration screens.
In order to add or remove the tracking of major repairs, use the following procedure:
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" dropdown, select "Track Major Repairs".
If equipment has already been selected, the "Track Major Repairs Results" screen is displayed.
2. Select the radio button next to the pieces of equipment for which major repairs are to be tracked.
3. Click the "Track Major Repairs" button. The "Track Major Repairs" screen will be displayed.
"Track Major Repairs"
(1) "Add" button
4. From the "Select Repairs to track" list box, select all major repairs you wish to add to the repair
tracking.
Note: Multiple repairs can be selected by holding down the "Ctrl" key and clicking on the items you
wish to select.
5. Click the "Add" button (1). The repair is moved from the "Select Repairs to track" list box to the
"Repairs selected to track" list box.
6. From the "Repairs selected to track" list box, select all repairs you wish to remove from the repair
tracking.
7. Click the "Remove" button. The repair is moved from the "Repairs selected to track" list box to the
"Select Repairs to track" list box.
8. Click the "Continue" button.
The "Configure Repair Tracking intervals" screen will be displayed.

"Configure Repair Tracking intervals" screen
(2) "Save" button
(3) "Start tracking repair from" text field
(4) "Configured Interval" text field
9. In the "Configured Interval" text field (4), enter the number of hours that represents the interval for
each repair.
10. In the "Start tracking repair from" text field (3), enter the SMU hours you wish the repair to begin
being tracked.
11. Click the "Save" button (2). The "Confirmation – Configure Repair Tracking Intervals" screen will
be displayed.
"Confirmation – Configure Repair Tracking Intervals" screen
12. Click "OK". The major repair tracking is saved.

"Configure Repair Tracking intervals" screen if repairs have been deleted from "Track Major Repair" details
(2) "Save" button
If you removed any events or major repairs, clicking the "Save" button (2) will result in Illustration 4.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03365722
Manage Time Fence and Geographic Fence

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Geographic Fences and Time Fences

The EquipmentManager software uses the following features in order to track the machines:
Inclusive Geographic Fencing and Exclusive Geographic Fencing - The ability to be alerted when
one of your machines is either inside or outside of a particular geographical area
Time Fencing - The ability to be alerted when one of your machines is operating either outside or
inside of a designated time of the day
In the "Administration" section of EquipmentManager you use Asset Watch in order to set up the
fences that can be applied to individual machines or to groups of machines. Refer to the Systems
Operation, "Time Fence and Geographic Fence" for detailed descriptions.
Inclusive and Exclusive Descriptions

Inclusive and exclusive descriptions are descriptions of the geographical areas that make up the
geographic fences. You can create as many descriptions as desired. Creating and storing these
descriptions in advance, so that you can apply them to your equipment when needed, will save you
time.
When creating the descriptions, inclusive and exclusive are the same. When assigning a machine to a
geographic fence, you must choose whether the fence is inclusive or exclusive.
Note: The information in the Systems Operation, "Time Fence and Geographic Fence" describes
some practical scenarios where previously created geographic and time fences can be assigned to
machines. In this module, you will focus on creating these descriptions.
Add Descriptions
In order to add descriptions by using a map, use the following procedure:
1. In the "View" box, select "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions". The "Inclusive/Exclusive

Descriptions" screen will appear.
2. Click "Map Lat/Long". The "Internet Map" screen will appear.

3. In the "Description" box, type a description for the new fence.
4. Define the center of a geographic fence by using one of the following methods:
◦ In the "Latitude/Longitude" boxes, type the desired values.
◦ Click a point on the map. In order to help establish the desired location, you can use the
zoom in button and zoom out button to the right of the map. You can also use the
"North", "South", "East", and "West" buttons on the borders of the map.
◦ Select the icon of a magnifying glass. This enables you to enter a street address, city,
state, and/or zip code.
Note: The options for entering a street address, city, state, and/or zip code are only available in
North America.
5. Configure the radius of the fence by dragging the "Fence Radius" slider to the appropriate
location.
Note: The fence radius values will display in whole kilometers. If your units of measure
preference is miles, the fence will be configured in kilometers, converted to miles, and then
displayed in miles.
6. Click "OK". The "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen displays the new values in the "Add
New Description" section.
7. Click "Add Location". A confirmation message will appear.
"Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen with the added location

8. Click "OK". The location is added to the list of descriptions at the top of the
"Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen. Refer to Illustration 4.
Edit "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions"

In order to edit an inclusive/exclusive description on the "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen,
click the pencil and paper icon (1) to the right of the description that you want to edit. Refer to
Illustration 4. The "Edit Description" section appears. Use the procedure described earlier for
changing the parameters using the map. When the changes have been made, click "Save".
Delete "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions"

In order to delete an inclusive/exclusive description, use the following procedure:
"Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen for deleting
1. On the "Inclusive/Exclusive Descriptions" screen, select the check box for the description that
you want to delete.
2. Click "Delete Location Descriptions". A confirmation window will appear.

Time Based Descriptions

In order to create a "Time Based Description", use the following procedure:
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop down menu, select "Time Based
Descriptions". The "Time Based Descriptions" screen will be displayed.
"Time Based Descriptions" with "Add New Description"

2. In the "Add New Description" section, enter a description of the new time fence in the
"Description" text field.
3. In the "Working Hours" section, select an hour from the "Start Time" drop down menu.
4. Select the radio button next to the "Start Time" "AM" or "PM".
"End Time greater than Start Time" alert message
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the End Time.
Note: If you enter an "End Time" that is less than the S"tart Time" the window in Illustration 8
will appear.
6. In the "Working Days" section, select the checkbox next to the days of the week to which you
want the fence to apply.
7. Click the "Add" button. The new description is added to the list at the top of the screen.
Edit a Time Based Description

In order to edit a time based description, use the following procedure:
Editing "Time Based Description"
1. From the "Time Based Descriptions" screen, click the pencil and paper icon (1) next to the
description you wish to edit. The "Edit Description" section will be displayed.
2. In the "Edit Description" section, edit the description of the time fence in the "Description"
field.
3. Edit the "Start Time" and "End Time" hours and "AM" or "PM".
4. Edit the selected "Working Days".
5. Click the "Save" button. A confirmation window will appear.

Confirmation message for editing "Time Based Description"
6. Click "OK". The updated description appears in the list at the top of the screen.
Delete a Time Based Description

In order to delete a time based description, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Time Based Descriptions" screen, select the checkbox next to the description you
wish to delete. Refer to Illustration 10.
2. Click the "Delete Location Descriptions" button. Refer to Illustration 10. A confirmation
window will appear.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03359362
Manage Planned Maintenance

SMCS - 7600; 7606
One of the ways that EquipmentManager helps you manage your equipment is by organizing the often
complex task of managing planned maintenance for your equipment. Through the administration section of
EquipmentManager, you can customize the intervals at which planned maintenance is performed, edit the
checklists that are used to guide the planned maintenance, and customize the scheduling of the planned
maintenance for individual or groups of equipment.
Customize PM Intervals
For each piece of equipment you are managing, default planned maintenance intervals exist. These default
intervals are defined in the Operation Maintenance Manual specific to each Caterpillar models. Default
intervals are applied to a manufactures models other than Caterpillar. The intervals indicate the Service
Meter Unit (SMU) that when reached by the machine, should trigger a planned maintenance. You have the
option of setting these intervals to values other than the defaults.
In order to customize PM Intervals, use the following procedure:
Intervals".
"Customize PM Intervals - Select Results" screen
(1) Radio buttons
2. Select the radio button (1) next to the piece of equipment in order to customize the "PM Interval" for
the equipment.
Warning for trusting the applet

3. Click the "Customize" button (2) . A warning for trusting the applet will appear. Refer to Illustration
2.
4. Click "Yes". The "Customize PM Intervals" screen will be displayed.
"Customize PM Intervals"
(3) Gray slider
(4) Text field
5. In order to change the " PM Interval", drag the gray slider (3) to the desired value (measured in
SMUs) or edit the value in the text field (4) that appears below the PM.
The "Successful" message for "Customize PM Intervals"
6. Click the "Save" button. A successful message will be displayed. Refer to Illustration 4.
7. Click "OK". The PM Intervals have been customized.
"Reset All PM Intervals" confirmation message
If you choose to click the "Reset to Default" button on the "Customize PM Intervals" screen, the window as
shown in Illustration 5 will appear.
No "PM Interval" changes message
If you click the "Save" button on the "Customize PM Intervals" screen and have not changed from the
defaults, the window as shown in Illustration 6 will appear.
Edit PM Check List
The PM Checklist is a description of the steps that should be taken when performing a planned
maintenance. The steps can include everything from checking fluid levels to replacing parts. Through
EquipmentManager you can edit these checklists to add, edit, or remove steps.
Note: Complete checklists that are applied for Caterpillar models and serial numbers from model year 2000
or newer. Generic checklists that are applied for Caterpillar models and serial numbers older than 2000 as
well as other manufacture models.
"Edit PM Check List"

In order to edit a step in a check list, use the following procedure:
1. From either the "Administration" screen or the "View" drop-down menu, select "Edit PM Check
List".
If you have equipment already selected, the "Edit PM Check List - Search Results" screen will be
displayed.
"Edit PM Checklist - Select Results" screen
(1) Radio button

(5) "Edit PM Checklist" button
2. Select the radio button (1) next to the piece of equipment for which you wish to edit a PM Checklist.
3. Click the "Edit PM Checklist" button (5) . The "Edit PM Check List" screen will be displayed.
"Edit PM Check List" screen with the "Parts" collapsed
(6) "Expand all Parts" link
(7) "Select PM to edit" drop-down menu
(8) "Parts" link
4. Select the planned maintenance you wish to edit from the "Select PM to edit" drop-down menu (7) .
5. In order to view the parts associated with a step, click the blue triangle icon or the "Parts" link (8) . In
order to view all parts in the checklist click the blue triangle icon or the "Expand all Parts" link (6) .
The expanded checklist will be displayed.
"Edit PM Check List" screen with the "Parts" expanded
(9) " Collapse all Parts"
(10) "editStep" button
6. Click the "editStep" button (10) next to the step that you wish to edit. The "Edit Step" window will
be displayed.
Note: In order to collapse all the parts in the checklist click the blue triangle icon or the " Collapse all
Parts" link (9) .
"Edit Step" window
(11) "Description" field
(12) "Additional Parts" button
7. Edit the description of the step in the "Description" field (11) .
8. Edit the number of hours in the "Down Time" text field.
9. Edit the number of hours in the "Labor" text field.
10. If you wish to add a part to the step, click the "Additional Parts" button (12) . A row with part fields
will appear below the step description.
"Edit Step" window with additional parts options
11. Enter a quantity in the "Quantity" text field.
"Enter Part Quantity" alert message
Note: If you fail to enter a part quantity, the message in Illustration 12 will appear
12. Enter a part number in the "Part Number" field.
13. Select either the "Solid" or "Fluid" radio button.
14. Enter a description of the part in the "Description" text field.
15. Enter notes in the "Notes" text field.
16. Repeat Steps 9 through 14 until you have added all the desired parts.
17. If you wish to remove a part from the step, select the check box next to the part you wish to delete.
18. Click the blue "Delete Parts" button.
19. Repeat Steps 17 and 18 until you have removed all desired parts.
20. Click the "Save" button. The edited checklist step is saved.
Add New Step to Checklist

In order to add a new step to a checklist, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Edit PM Checklist" screen, click the "Add New Steps" button. Refer to Figure 8. The
"Add New Steps" window will be displayed.
"Add New Step(s)" screen
(13) "Add New Steps" button
(14) "Delete Parts" button

2. Complete the fields on the "Add New Steps" screen. The fields are the same as the fields that are in
the "Edit Step" window.
3. If you wish to add more than one step, click the "Add New Steps" button (13) and repeat Step 2.
Note: If you need to delete parts, click the blue "Delete Parts" button (14) .
Attaching a new step to a PM
(15) Check box
(16) "Save" button
4. Once you have added all desired steps and parts, click the "Save" button (16) . The "Higher PM
details" window will be displayed.
5. The new steps you added will be added to the planned maintenance that you selected from the drop-
down menu, but you can also add these steps to other PMs. Select the check box (15) next to all of
the PMs to which you wish to add the new steps.
6. Click the "Save" button. The new steps are added to the planned maintenance.
Confirmation message for no additional PM's being attached
Note: If you did not select any additional PMs to add the step to, the confirmation window in Illustration 15
will appear. Click the "OK" button.
"Customize PM Schedule"
You can customize the interval at which planned maintenances are scheduled. PM schedule intervals can be
hour based or date based. You can also apply an offset to the schedule if desired (default is no offset
applied). Each interval and its description follows:
"Hour based" - Interval schedule based on hour (SMU) accumulation of the equipment.
"Date based" - Interval schedule based on calendar days.
"Offset" - Next scheduled service calculated from previous service details. If offset is not applied
(default), the schedule will ignore previous service details and adhere to fixed" PM Intervals".
Configuring Equipment for Hour Based PM Scheduling

In order to configure equipment for hour based PM scheduling, use the following procedure:
Schedule".
If you have equipment already selected, the "Customize PM Schedule - Select Equipment" screen
will be displayed.
"Customize PM Schedule - Select Equipment"
(1) Radio buttons
2. Select the radio button (1) next to the piece of equipment you wish to configure for hour based
scheduling.
3. Click the "Customize" button (2) . The "Customize PM Schedule" screen will be displayed.
"Hour Based PM Scheduling"
(17) "Follow Offset" check box
(18) "Select a PM Schedule type" drop-down menu
(19) "Save" button
4. If not already selected, select "Hour Based Scheduling" from the "Select a PM Schedule type" drop-
down menu (18) .
5. In order for the PM Schedule to follow offset, select the "Follow Offset" check box (17) .
Note: If you select Follow Offset, the next planned maintenance will be scheduled at the interval
starting from when the last planned maintenance was performed. For example, if a planned
maintenance is scheduled for every 500 SMUs and the first PM is performed after 600 SMUs, the
next PM will be scheduled for 1100 SMUs rather than 1000.
If you do not select Follow Offset, the next planned maintenance will be scheduled at a fixed
interval. For example, if the PM is scheduled for every 500 SMUs and the first PM is performed after
600 SMUs, the next PM will still be scheduled for 1000 SMUs.
6. Click the "Save" button (19) . The "Hour based PM Schedule Success" screen will be displayed.
"Hour based PM Schedule" configuration successful message
(20) "OK" button
7. Click the "OK" button. The equipment has been configured for hour based PM scheduling.
Configuring Equipment for Date Based PM Scheduling

Date based PM schedules are available for equipment that do not apply to an hour based schedule. One
example would be a standby generator set. In order to configure equipment for date based PM Scheduling,
use the following procedure:
1. From the "Customize PM Schedule - Select Equipment" screen, select the radio button next to the
piece of equipment you wish to configure for date based PM scheduling. Refer to Figure 16.
2. Click the "Customize" button. Refer to Figure 16. The "Customize PM Schedule" screen will be
displayed.
Customizing the "Date based PM Schedule"
(21) "User Interval" text fields
(19) "Save" button
3. If not already selected, select "Date Based Scheduling" from the "Select a PM Schedule type:" drop-
down menu.
4. Select whether or not you wish the "PM Schedule" to follow offset or not by selecting or deselecting
the "Follow Offset" check box.
5. If you want the scheduling interval to be different than the default interval, enter the number of days
in the "User Interval" text fields (21) .
Confirmation message for change "PM Schedule" from hour based to date based
6. Click the "Save" button (19) . If you changed the scheduling type from hour based to date based, the
"Date based" confirmation message will appear. If not, skip to Step 8.
7. Click "OK". The "Date based PM Schedule Success" screen will be displayed.
"Date based PM Schedule" configuration successful message
(20) "OK" button
8. Click "OK". The equipment has been successfully configured for date based PM scheduling.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03332823
Preferences
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
Each person that uses EquipmentManager to manage equipment may use EquipmentManager in slightly
different ways. For this reason, each EquipmentManager user can set the preferences in order to utilize the
application more efficiently and effectively. This provides individual levels of customization of the
application that will fulfill individual process needs.
"Set Your Preferences"

Complete the following procedure, in order to set your preferences for the first time or change your
preferences:
"Set Your Preferences" screen
1. From the left navigation, click the "Preferences" tab. The "Set Your Preferences" screen will be
displayed.
2. Set the preferences or edit the preferences by changing values in the drop-down menus, input boxes,
and list boxes that appear next to the names of the preference.
3. Click "Update Preferences". The "Confirmation – Set Your Preferences" screen will be displayed.
"Confirmation - Set Your Preferences" screen

4. Click the "OK" button at the very bottom of the screen. Your preferences will be saved and the "Set
Your Preferences" screen will be displayed.
Available Preference Values

The following table lists the available values for each of the preferences that appear on the "Set Your
Preferences" screen.
Table 1
Name of Preference Available Values
"All Equipment"
"Default Group In Event Summary Page" (Equipment Groups you created)
(Equipment Groups you have been assigned)
"MM/DD/YYYY "
"DD/MM/YYYY"
"Date Format" "DD-MON-YY"
"DD-MON-YYYY"
"MON-DD,YYYY"
"12 Hr Format"
"Time Format" "24 Hour (Military Time)"
"12 Hr with AM/PM"
(A list of all time zones appears in the drop-down
"Time Zone"
menu)
"Observe Daylight Savings Time"
"Daylight Savings"
"Ignore Daylight Savings Time"
"Nearest City"
"Location Display" "Latitude/Longitude (Deg/Min/Sec)"
"Latitude/Longitude (Delorme Decimal)"
"10 records"
"20 records"
"Records Per Page"
"50 records"
"100 records"
"3 Months"
"6 Months"
"9 Months"
"History Details Shown" "1 Year"
"2 Years"
"3 Years"
"5 Years"
"Miles"
"Distance Unit"
"Kilometers"
"Gallons"
"Fuel Unit"
"Liters"
"Unit ID"
"Unit ID Display"
"Equipment ID"
(A list of over 240 countries appears in the list box)
"Country"
"Weekly"
"Notify Manual Service Meter Maintenance "Monthly"
Update" "Never"
"6 Weeks"
"Event Summary Results Page"
"S· O· S Results Page"
"Remote Monitoring Report"
"Utilization Monitoring Report"
"Planned Maintenance Page"
"Fault Code Results Page"
"Time and Geographic Fencing Alarms Page"
"Location/SMU Page"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03323941
Preference Detail
SMCS - 7600; 7606
"Default Group In Event Summary Page"
Setting the preference for the default for "Select a Group"
The default preference is "All Equipment" for the "Select a Group" drop-down menu (1). Other
options will appear in this drop-down menu only when groups of documents have been created or you
have been given access to groups of documents that were created by other users.
If you select a group from the drop-down menu and you update your preferences, from that time
forward the value in the "Select a Group" drop-down menu (1) in the "Event Summary" section of the
"EquipmentManager Home" screen will default to the group that was selected on the "Set Your
Preferences" screen. For example, if the preferences of "DocGrp" was chosen, Illustration 1 is an
example of the "Event Summary" section of the "EquipmentManager Home" screen that will appear
after the initial time.
Also, EquipmentManager allows you to manage your equipment by an exception. There are three
"Status" levels of events.
Normal (green) - The "Normal" status indicates an event that is deemed least important of the actions
that require attention or resolution.
"Date Format" and "Time Format" Preferences

The "Date Format" and the "Time Format" that are used to display all dates and times throughout
EquipmentManager may be set to your preference.
In the "Time Zone" drop-down menu, the time may be set to the time zone of your dealership, the
time zone of the location of your equipment, or any other time zone.
In the "Time Format" drop-down menu, the time may be viewed with the following options: "12 Hr
Format", "12 Hr with AM/PM" and "24 Hour (Military Time)".
In the "Daylight Savings" drop-down menu, the daylight savings time may be chosen.
Example of the "Date Format" and the "Time Format"
(2) "Date/Time"
The "Planned Maintenance" screen is an example that displays "Date/Time" (2) within
EquipmentManager. Refer to Illustration 2.
"Location Display"
EquipmentManager uses GPS to determine the location (3) of your equipment. On the "Set Your
Preferences" screen, you can choose to display the location in any one of the following three formats:
• "Nearest City"
Format for the "Nearest City"
(3) Location
• "Latitude/Longitude (Deg/Min/Sec)"
Format for the "Latitude/Longitude (Deg/Min/Sec)"
(3) Location
• "Latitude/Longitude (DeLorme Decimal)"
Format for the" Latitude/Longitude (DeLorme Decimal)"
(3) Location
"Records Per Page"
The preference of 10 records for the records per page
The number of records that are displayed per page may be set for the list of information of the
equipment that is returned from EquipmentManager. Illustration 6 indicates an "Event Summary" list
with 68 machines that have been divided into 10 results per page. If the same list was divided into 50
records per page, there would be only two pages instead of seven pages.
"History Details Shown"
"History Details Shown" preference
(4) "Start Date"
(5) "End Date"
When the page for the "Repair & Maintenance History" of a machine is being viewed, a "Start
Date" (4) and an "End Date" (5) may be entered in order to indicate the span of history for viewing.
By setting a "History Details Shown" preference, you are setting the default values that will appear in
the "Start Date" and "End Date" fields. For example, if you set a "History Details Shown" preference
of three months, the "End Date" field will default to the current date and the "Start Date" will default
to a date that is exactly three months prior to the current date.
Units
There are two types of preferences for units that can be set:
• "Distance Unit"
• "Fuel Unit"
The first type of preference is the "Distance Unit".

(6) "Miles"
(7) "Kilometers"
You may select either "Miles" (6) or "Kilometers" (7) .
The second type of preference that can be set is the "Fuel Unit".
"Fuel Units" preference
(8) Liters
"Fuel Unit" preference
(9) Gallons
You may select either "Liters" (8) or "Gallons" (9) .
Country
"Product Link Module Details" section of the "Advanced Search" screen
(10) "Location: State/Province" drop-down menu
From the "Set Your Preferences" screen in the "Country" drop-down menu, a country or multiple
countries may be selected. The preference for the country or countries will determine the states or
provinces that will appear in the "Location: State/Province" drop-down menu (10) on the "Advanced
Search" screen. For example, if the preference for a country is set to "Canada", the "Location:
State/Province" field will be filled with the Canadian provinces on the "Advanced Search" screen.
"Notify Manual Service Meter Maintenance Update"

EquipmentManager can be used to manage "Planned Maintenance" on equipment that does not
contain a Product Link Module (PLM). In this case, the dealer or the customer subscribes to
Maintenance Watch. With Maintenance Watch and no PLM on the equipment, you must enter the
"Service Meter Update" manually. From the "Set Your Preferences" screen in the "Notify Manual
Service Meter Maintenance Update" drop-down menu, you may indicate the frequency of notification
from EquipmentManager. This frequency will be used for the entry of data of service meter units for
equipment with Maintenance Watch subscriptions. The following values are available: "Weekly",
"Monthly", "6 Weeks" and "Never".
The "Planned Maintenance" screen with "Load SMU"
(11) "Load SMU" link
Illustration 13 above displays the "Planned Maintenance" screen for a piece of equipment that has no
PLM and a Maintenance Watch subscription. Notice that "Load SMU" link (11) is present in the
"Current" column. In order to update the SMU manually, select this link. After clicking this link, the
"Manual Maintenance – Service Meter Update" window will be displayed.
"SMU Update" window
(12) Radio buttons
In the "SMU Update" window, the frequency of notification for updating the service meter units can
be changed by selecting one of the radio button (12) .

of the results for the search default to the "Event Summary Results Page". By using the "Set Your
Preferences" screen, you may change the page of the results from the search that are first displayed.
For example, if you use EquipmentManager most often to check the location of your equipment, you
can change your "Display Search Results In" preference to "Location/SMU Page". Then, when you
perform the next search, the results will be displayed first in "Location/SMU Page".
The following values for the "Display Search Results In" preferences are available:
• "Event Summary Results Page"
• "S·O·S Results Page"
• "Remote Monitoring Report"

• "Utilization Monitoring Report"
• "Planned Maintenance Page"
• "Fault Code Results Page"
• "Time and Geographic Fencing Alarms Page"
• "Location/SMU Page"
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03333061
Asset Watch
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
The Asset Watch subscription is used for monitoring and managing the usage and the location of your
equipment.
"Exception Dashboard"
(1) "Event Summary" section
(2) "Status" levels
(3) "Equipment Search" section
The default home screen of EquipmentManager is known as the "Exception Dashboard". Refer to
Illustration 1. This screen features the following two sections:
• "Event Summary" section (1)
• "Equipment Search" section (3)
"Event Summary"
EquipmentManager allows you to manage your equipment by an exception. There are three "Status"
levels (2) of events:
Normal (green) - The "Normal" status indicates an event that is deemed of the least importance of the
actions that require attention or resolution.
Search Using "Event Summary"
"Event Summary" search with popup text
(5) "Equipment" column
(6) "Incidents" column
(7) "S·O·S Incident Refresh" button
(8) "View Checked" button
Perform the following procedure in order to use "Event Summary" section (1) to search for issues and
view issues that need to be resolved:
1. Select a group of equipment from the "Select a Group" drop-down menu (4) or select a
customer from the "Universal Customer ID" drop-down menu. Once a selection has been made,
the "Equipment" column (5) and the "Incidents" column (6) for each "Status" level will be filled
with the number of machines and incidents that are outstanding. Refer to Illustration 2.
2. Point to any of the "Incidents" fields for more information of the events that are outstanding and
for a count for each level. For example, when you point to the number of incidents in the
"Incidents" column (6) , a boxof text will be displayed with a breakdown of the events by
category and by quantity.
3. In order to view the detail of the machines with outstanding events, select the check box next to
the "Status" level or "Status" levels. Any of the check boxes or all of the check boxes can be
selected. Then, click "View Checked" button (8) in order to display results. Results appear on
the "Event Summary" screen. Refer to ""Event Summary" Screen" for more information.
Note: In order to perform a refresh of the S·O·S alerts, press the "S·O·S Incident Refresh"
button (7) .
Search Using "Equipment Search"
"Equipment Search"
The lower section of the default EquipmentManager home screen is the "Equipment Search" section
(3) . This provides another way to narrow the search of the equipment. This is the same "Equipment
Search" form that is used throughout EquipmentManager. Complete at least one of the fields on the
form and click "Display Equipment".
"Event Summary" Screen

"Event Summary"
(9) Check boxes for the equipment
(10) "View:" drop-down menu
of the results default to the "Event Summary" screen. The "Event Summary" table contains the
following columns: "Eqpt Id" ("Equipment Id"), "Manufacturer", "Model", "Serial Number", "Events"
and "Status".
If a machine has multiple events of the same category, the information can be expanded by clicking
the icon that is a blue triangle. This icon will show a brief description of each of the events in that
category.
Clicking on the hyperlink of the name of the event will move you to the appropriate detailed screen in
EquipmentManager. This screen may be an "Event History" screen, a "Planned Maintenance" screen,
a "S·O·S" screen, or another screen.
Select the check box for the equipment (9) in order to update the status. Then, select the "Update
Status" button.
Change the view of the results by selecting a option from the "View:" drop-down menu (10) .

On the"Event Summary" screen, select "Location and Service Meters" from the "View" drop-down
menu (10) . The "Location and Service Meters" screen will be displayed.
(11) "Serial Number" column
(12) "Last Update Date/Time" column
The links in the "Serial Number" column (11) are linked to the "Equipment Details" screen and the
links in the "Last Update Date/Time" column (12) are linked to the "Status History" screen.
"Status History"
The "Status History" is a record of all the status reports that were sent by a Product Link ModulePLM.
The "Status" report contains the information about the status of the actual PLM.
To view the "Status History" screen, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Location and Service Meters" screen, click the date of one of the pieces of equipment
in the "Last Update Date/Time" column. The "Status History" screen will be displayed.
"Status History"
2. The range of the date is set by your preferences. In order to temporarily change the range of the
date, click the icon of a calendar that is next to the "Start Date" field (13) and "End Date" field
(14) . Then, select a date for indicating a time period for the "Status History".
3. Click the "Change Date Range" button. The "Status History" table will perform a refresh in
order to reflect the updated range of the date.
4. Click the "Back" button in order to return to the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
The following table describes the fields that are found on the "Status History" screen.
Table 1
The date and time of the status report are displayed if the PLM is
"Date/Time" set to send status once per day. These values should be different by
approximately one day for each time.
"Power
Loss" (Low Yes, No
somewhere between this status report and the last status report.
Voltage)
Yes, No
Yes, No,
N/A
"PW Alarms"
Active (1)
"Active" (1) – The machine has operated in the last 48 hours.
"Sleep" (2) – The machine has not operated for greater than 48
"Power Mode" hours but less than one week. The PLM will activate every 6 hours
Sleep (2)
in order to send the messages every 6 hours. Position messages
will only be sent if the unit has changed position by greater than
200 meters.
"Hibernate" (3) – The machine has not operated for more than one
"Event Indicates that an event was recorded and will be sent (PL321
Yes, No
Pending" system only).
"Digital #
Active"

Use the following procedure in order to view the "Service Meter History":
1. In order to view the "Service Meter History" for a machine, select a service meter reading for a
machine from the "Service Meter (hours)" column on the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
2. Change the range of the date, if necessary. Click "Back" in order to return to the "Location and
Service Meters" screen.
"Location History"
Use the following procedure to view the "Location History" of a machine.
"Service Meter (hours)" column on the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
"Location History"
2. The "Location History" screen will appear. Change the range of the date, if necessary. Click
"Back" in order to return to the "Location and Service Meter" screen.
"Location Report Frequency"

Product Link is configured to a maximum of four reports of the location per day. The first location
report is sent at the Report Start Time. The Position Report Minimum Location Change configuration
defines the minimum distance the machine must move since the last report in order for a position
report to be sent. If the minimum configured distance has not been met, Product Link will not send a
position report. The minimum distance that is permitted is zero meters and the maximum distance is
200 meters. If the parameter is set to zero meters, then the PLM will send a position report 4 times a
day regardless of movement. Refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting,
RENR7911, "Manage Hardware", and to Special Instruction, REHS2365, "Product Link
PL121SRPL121SR and PL300PL300 Installation Guide".
Last Known Location

If a valid location from the GPS is not obtained in the given time, the last known location will be
displayed in EquipmentManager. This "stale" location will be identified with "(Last Known)" in the
"Location and Service Meter" view. Refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and
Adjusting, RENR7911, "Installation Parameters Conifgure" for more information about the GPS Fix
Validity Time Duration parameter.
"Map Locations"
There are two options for creating the map of the location of your machine. The machine can be
plotted on a map from either the "Location and Service Meters" screen or from the "Location History"
screen.
1. In order to view the location of a machine on the map from the "Location and Service Meters"
screen that is in the "Equipment Information" section, select the check box next to the machine.
2. Click the "Map Locations" button. The "Equipment Location Map" screen will be displayed.
"Equipment Location Map"
(15) Marker for the equipment
3. The location of the machine is plotted on a map with identification of a landmark and a city
street. Use the "Zoom In" and "Zoom Out" buttons to change your view of the map. Click near
the marker of the equipment (15) that is being viewed in order to center the marker in the
window of the map. When you are done, click the "Back" button in the upper left hand corner
in order to return to the "Location and Service Meters" screen.
Note: The information of the location will be displayed per user preference. The display for the
"Nearest City" will show the location of a machine relative to public landmarks or city centers.
The location can also be displayed with the latitude and the longitude. These coordinates can be
entered into routing software in order to provide driving directions.
The other way to create the map of the location is from the "Location History" screen.
"Service Meter (hours)" column on the "Location and Service Meters" screen. Refer to
Illustration 5. The "Location History" screen will be displayed. Refer to Illustration 8.
2. Click the "Map the latest location" button. The "Equipment Location Map" screen will be
displayed. Refer to Illustration 9.
Note: Click "Map the latest location" button in order to start the EquipmentManager software for
maps that is being used currently. Click "Map the latest location 2" in order to start the new software
that is being considered by Caterpillar as a replacement to option 1. Click on the "here" link in order
to send your comments to Caterpillar about the mapping software.
"Start/Stop Time History"

"Start/Stop Time History" is available if the PLM is configured to record the history. "Start Time" and
"Stop Time" details are available when the equipment "Serial Number" will be displayed in bold
print.
1. In order to view the "Start/Stop Time History" screen for a machine, select the check box next
to the machine. Refer to Illustration 10.
2. Click the "Start/Stop Time" button. The "Start/Stop Time History" screen will be displayed.
Note: If Machine Security System is installed, the "Key ID" will be displayed in the "Operator
Id" column in EquipmentManager.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02943044
Time Fence and Geographic Fence

SMCS - 7600; 7606
Types of Fences
The EquipmentManager software uses time fencing and geographic fencing to trigger some action if a
machine travels beyond a designated work area. Time fencing and geographic fencing use inclusive
geographic functions, exclusive geographic functions, and functions that are based on time.
Inclusive Geographic Fencing

By applying an inclusive geographic fence to your equipment, any movement of the equipment
beyond a predetermined geographical boundary can trigger an alarm. The alarm will indicate when a
machine moves beyond a predetermined geographical area.
Exclusive Geographic Fencing

By applying an exclusive geographic fence to your equipment, any movement of the equipment
within a predetermined geographical boundary can trigger an alarm. The alarm will indicate that the
equipment is inside of a predetermined geographical area.
Time Fencing
By applying a time fence to your equipment, any operation of the equipment beyond a predetermined
period of time can trigger an alarm. The alarm will indicate that the equipment is operating beyond a
predetermined period of time.
"Time and Geographic Fencing" Screen

Access the "Time and Geographic Fencing" Screen
Use the following procedure to access the "Time and Geographic Fencing" configuration screen.
1. Search for equipment and view the results in the "Event Summary" screen.
2. In the "View" box, select "Time and Geographic Fencing". The "Time and Geographic
Fencing" screenwill appear.
View "Time and Geo. Fence Alarm History"

To view a history of time fencing and geographic fencing alarms for a machine, use the following
procedure:
1. Access the "Time and Geographic Fencing" screen.
2. View the "Latest Time and Geo. Fence Alarms" column. Select one of the following links in
order to view the information for that machine:
"view history details" - This link displays previous alarms that have been resolved. The data
from the alarm is now stored for historical reference.
"Time and Geo Fence Alarms" - This link displays data for a current alarm. This link will
also show the status of an alarm that has been resolved if the alarm has not been updated.
3. Click on a link in the "Fence Description" column in order to view details of the configuration
of the fence. The map on the screen will include the fence as well as the location of a machine
at the time of an alarm.
Note: Product Link sends an alarm message immediately when the radius of a fence is violated.
However, the speed of a machine may cause the machine to appear closer to the radius of a fence in
the map view. For example, a machine traveling at normal road speeds of 40 mph or more may
display a fence violation at a location as far as a couple of city blocks from the actual point of the
fence violation. After the initial alarm, a subsequent alarm will be sent each day that the equipment
remains outside of the radius of the fence. This subsequent message is sent with the first message of
each day.
"Update Status"
The EquipmentManager software enables you to update the status of an alarm for time fencing and
geographic fencing. If you update the status of the alarm to "Resolved", the status will no longer
appear on the "Event Summary "screen. Also, the status will no longer appear on the
EquipmentManager home screen. The EquipmentManager home screen is also referred to as the
"Exception Dashboard".
To update the status of an alarm in time fencing and geographic fencing, use the following procedure:
1. Navigate to the "Time and Geographic Fencing" screen. Locate the row with the information
about your equipment. Click in the box to the left of the equipment.
Note: You can also update the status of an alarm for time fencing and geographic fencing from
the "Time and Geo. Fence Alarm History" screen.
2. Click the "Update Status" button at the bottom of your screen. The "Update Status" window
will appear. In the "Update Status" menu, select the status for your equipment. Refer to Table 1
for a list of the "Update Status" options.
Note: "Resolved" will not be displayed on the "Event Summary" screen or on the "Exception
Dashboard" screen. However, the details of the alarm are stored in History.
Table 1
"Status" "Color" "Importance"
"Action" "Red" "Highest"
"Monitor" "Yellow" "Medium"
"Normal" "Green" "Lowest"
"Resolved"
Note: The Status can be changed to any value. A status of "Action", "Monitor", or "Normal"
enables the event to remain outstanding. This state will be reflected on the "Exception
Dashboard" screen and on the "Event Summary" screen.
3. Click in the box under the "Notes/Comments" column.
4. Type a message in order to describe the reason for the update. The message should describe
actions that were taken in order to address the event.
5. Click "Save" in order to update the status of the alarm .

"Setup Fence"
The "Setup Fence" screen allows you to configure the following: inclusive parameters for the fence,
exclusive parameters for the fence and parameters for time for the fence. The procedures that follow
will demonstrate the features of the "Setup Fence" screen.
Preliminary Steps
1. Navigate to the "Time and Geographic Fencing" screen. Locate your machine from the list of
machines. Click in the box in the left hand column next to your machine in order to configure
the fence for that machine.
2. Click the "Setup Fence" button. The "Setup Fence " configuration screen will appear. This
screen will allow you to add fences for the selected machine. Determine the type of fence
required for the application. Follow the procedure for the type of fence selected in order to
configure the fence for the machine.
Add Inclusive Geographic Fence

To create an inclusive geographic fence in a map, use the procedure that follows.
1. View the "Inclusive" section of the "Setup Fence" configuration screen. Select the radio button
next to the fence that is to be to configured.
Note: The color on the "Fence Radius" slider coincides with the selected fence.
3. Use one of the following methods in order to define the center of a geographic fence:
◦ Click a point on the map. To help establish the desired location, you can use the
"Zoom" tool to the right of the map. You can also use the "North", "South", "East", and
"West" buttons. These buttons are located on the borders of the map.
◦ Click on the icon of the magnifying glass. This method enables you to enter a street
address, city, state, and/or zip code. Note that this option is only available in North
America.
4. In order to configure the radius of the fence, drag the "Fence Radius" slider to the appropriate
location.
is miles, the fence will be configured in kilometers, converted to miles, and then displayed in
miles.
"Show/Hide Fence" Button
The radius of the fence will be drawn on the map in order to provide a visual reference for the
parameters of the fence. Click the "Show/Hide Fence" button in order to hide a fence. Also click the
"Show/Hide Fence" button in order to show a fence. This button is located to the left of the
"Description" box.
Load Description Button
You can load an existing fence with the load fence button. This button is located to the right of the
"Description" field.
Configure Exclusive Geographic Fence

To configure an exclusive geographic fence with a map, use the following procedure:
1. View the "Exclusive" section of the "Setup Fence" screen. Click the radio button in the
exclusive section.
Note: The color on the indicator for the "Fence Radius" bar will be the same color as the
selected fence.
3. Use one of the following methods in order to define the center of the geographic fence:
◦ Click a point on the map. To help establish the desired location, you can use the "Zoom
In" and the "Zoom Out " buttons to the right of the map. You can also use the "North",
"South", "East", and "West" buttons on the borders of the map.
◦ Click on the icon for the magnifying glass. This method enables you to enter a street
address, city, state, and/or zip code. Note: This option is only available in North America.
4. Configure the radius of the fence. Drag the "Fence Radius" slider to the appropriate location.
is miles, then the fence will be configured in kilometers, converted to miles, and then displayed
in miles.
5. You can configure up to five exclusive geographic fences. To add additional fence
configurations, click the "Add Fence" button. Repeat the previous steps in order to configure
the parameters of each additional fence.
Note: You can also add existing fences with the load description button.
Configure a Time Fence

To configure a time fence, use the following procedure:
1. At the top of the "Setup Fence" screen, click the "Time" tab.
2. In the row for "Days", select the days of the week for which you want the fence to apply.
3. In the "Description" field, enter a description of the time fence.
4. Click "Save".
You can also add existing time fences using the "Load Descriptions" button. For detailed instructions
for using this function, refer to Systems Operation, KENR6302, "EquipmentManager User Guide",
"Time Fence and Geographic Fence" .
Time and Geographic Fencing Setup Confirmation
To confirm your settings for the time fences, use the following procedure:
1. Click "Save" on the "Time and Geographic Fencing Setup - Edit" screen. A confirmation
message appears.
2. Click "OK". The Time and Geo Fence Setup Confirmation screen appears. This screen displays
the details of all the fences that you have added. This screen also notifies you that these details
will be updated in the database.
3. Click "OK". The Time and Geo Fence Setup Confirmation screen displays a red success
message.
Configuration History
Once a fence is configured with Setup Fence, the fence configuration is sent via satellite to the
Product Link module on the machine. The fence state is "Pending" until the onboard configuration
completes and a confirmation is received in the EquipmentManager software.
The state of recently configured fences is displayed as an icon in the "Config History" field. The type
of icon indicates one of the following states:
Yellow Hour Glass - Pending
Green Check Mark - Successful
Grey Stop Watch - No new activity
The Pending or the Successful icons will be viewable for seven days after the configuration
parameters have been sent to the Product Link module. After seven days, the "Successful" status will
revert to the grey stop watch icon. If a pending configuration is not confirmed within the seven day
time period, then Caterpillar recommends that a new configuration be sent.
To view details of the configuration history, click the icon in the "Config History" column. The Time
and Geographic Fencing Configuration History screen appears.
Table 2 lists the descriptions of each of the fields that are in this screen.
Table 2
Field Description
The type of fence that had been configured. Click the link to view
Request Type
configuration details.
Fence Description
The description provided for the fence configured fence.
The date of the configuration:

Configuration Date Bold Date – Date the fence was configured in the EquipmentManager
software.
Normal Date – Date Product Link accepted the fence configuration.
The state of the configuration request:
Pending – Yellow hour glass
State
Successful within the last 7 days – Green check mark
Successful but older than 7 days – Grey stop watch
A configuration will remain in the "Pending" state if the machine cannot be reached via satellite. If
this condition occurs, ensure that the master switch is closed and that the machine has a clear view to
the sky.
If Product Link is not able to receive the message, then the satellite network will continue to try to
resend the message for up to one hour. If the message is not received within one hour, then the
satellite network will retain the message for five additional days.
The message delivery will be attempted again once Product Link is detected on the network and is
sending and receiving messages. After five days, the configuration will no longer be retained and
there will be no further attempts to deliver the message to the Product Link module.
Enable and Disable
Once you have configured a machine to use time or geographic fences, remember that those fences
are enabled by default. By opening the Enable/Disable screen, you can enable or disable the applied
fences.
In order to enable or to disable a time or geographic fence, use the following procedure:
1. Locate the "Equipment Information" section on the Time and Geographic Fencing screen.
2. Select the check box that is adjacent to the machine you wish to enable or to disable.
3. Click "Enable/Disable". The "Enable/Disable" screen appears.
4. Perform the desired action to the Inclusive, Exclusive, or Time fences that are applied to this
machine:
Click on the actions listed below in the appropriate column:
Enable - This option sends an active fence command to the Product Link module that is on the
identified machine.
Disable - This option sends a command to disable an active fence to the Product Link module
on the identified machine.
No Change - Select this option if you do not want to send a status change for the chosen fence
to the Product Link module on the identified machine.
5. Click "OK" when you have completed all of the appropriate actions. The Enable/Disable
Confirmation screen appears. This screen confirms that your changes will be sent to the
machine's Product Link module. The changes will be sent as soon as communications with the
satellite network can be completed.
Note: Communication can be completed assuming the machine is running or that the master
switch is closed.
6. Click "OK" on the "Enable/Disable Confirmation" screen.
The Enable/Disable Confirmation screen displays a red success message. This message
confirms that the changes will be reflected in the Enable/Disable screen. This screen will list the
changes when the confirmation message is returned to the EquipmentManager software from
the machine's Product Link module.
Fence Alarm Messages

After the fences have been set, the alarm for the associated fence is triggered. The alarm will occur
when the machine crosses the defined fence.
Initial Alarm Message

This message is sent at the time of the fence violation by all supported Product Link modules
regardless of the type of module. The supported modules include PL151, PL201, PL121, and PL321.
PL121 only - The EquipmentManager software will not display an alarm on consecutive days
(regardless of active status) unless the machine leaves the work site or the machine enters a restricted
area again.
PL321 only - If the alarm is still active on consecutive days, the EquipmentManager software will
display a new Product Watch Event. The EquipmentManager software will send the appropriate event
reaction once with the daily standard message. The EquipmentManager software will send the
appropriate event reaction the next time the alarm is activated.
Refer to Systems Operation, Troubleshooting, Testing and Adjusting, RENR7911, "Product Link
121/321", for more information about the PL121 and PL321 alarms.
Subsequent Alarm Message

A subsequent alarm message may be sent while the Product Link module remains in the alarm state.
The following conditions will cause a subsequent alarm message. The type of message that is sent
will depend on the type of Product Link module and the version of software that is on the module.
• Daily – The alarm message will be included in the Daily Status Message.
• Accumulative – If multiple fences are configured, and a fence is in an alarm state, then all
fence alarms will be sent with any alarm message.
• Machine Start – While the modules remain in an alarm state, subsequent alarm messages are
sent each time that a machine is started.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02786572
Maintenance Watch
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
Maintenance Watch provides many features that will aid in a proactive maintenance program for your
equipment. With a Maintenance Watch subscription, EquipmentManager applies to a machine, the
Caterpillar recommended Preventative Maintenance Schedule including intervals, checklists, and part
lists. The Maintenance Watch subscription offers the following feature.
• Reports the last PM date and the adherence to the PM schedule
• Builds reference history for use in future repairs
• Schedules the next PM in on-line calendar automatically
• Sends alerts for missed PMs
• Provides PM checklist access
• Contains checklists of predefined PM procedures
• Generates list of parts that are required to complete the PM
• Enables ordering PM parts through the PartStore
Note: Maintenance Watch can be purchased without purchasing Asset Watch.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03947896
Planned Maintenance
SMCS - 7600; 7606
In order to access the "Planned Maintenance" screen, use the following procedure:
1. Search for equipment and view results on the "Event Summary" screen.
2. Select the "Planned Maintenance" option from the "View:" drop-down menu.
The "Planned Maintenance" screen will then appear.
PM History
By using Maintenance Watch, you can view a record of all previous procedures for the PM that were
performed on the equipment and the procedures that were entered through EquipmentManager. In
order to view the PM history, use the following procedure:
"Planned Maintenance" screen
(1) Check box
(2) "Performed @" column
1. From the "Planned Maintenance" screen, click the number in the "Performed @" column (2)
under the "Last PM" column if the number is available.
The "Planned Maintenance (PM) History" screen will be displayed.

"Planned Maintenance (PM) History"
(3) "Change Date Range" button
(4) Icon of an envelope in a circle
2. Click the icon of a calendar next to the "Start Date" and "End Date" fields. Select a date in
order to indicate a time period for the PM history.
3. Click the "Change Date Range" button (3) . The table for the PM history will be loaded again in
order to reflect the updated range for the date. The "Change Date Range" function works
similarly in many views or screens throughout the application.
"PM Notes"
When a "Planned Maintenance" is completed in EquipmentManager, a field is provided in order to
enter notes that pertain to the performed maintenance. On the "Planned Maintenance" screen, the
notes for the last "Planned Maintenance" can be viewed.
Use the following procedure in order to view the "PM Notes" and/or update the "PM Notes":
1. From the "Planned Maintenance (PM) History" screen, click the icon of an envelope in a circle
(4) that is in the "Notes/Comments" column. The icon will be either red or yellow. Refer to
Illustration 2. The "PM Notes" window will appear.
PM Notes
2. If you wish to update the notes, edit notes or add notes in the "PM Notes" text field.
3. Click the "Save" button.
Note: If the icon for the PM note is yellow, the "PM Notes" window does not currently contain notes.
If the icon for the PM note is red, the "PM Notes" window contains notes.
Note: The "PM Notes" will attach to the bottom of the checklists for the next "PM Due".
"Past Due" PM
EquipmentManager can be set to send an alert if EquipmentManager schedules a "Planned
Maintenance" that is based upon the SMU or the date and that PM passes without being performed.
The past due PM details can be accessed from the "Planned Maintenance" screen.
In order to view the procedures for the PM that have been missed, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planned Maintenance" screen, click "Past Due" in the "Next PM: Due @" column.
Refer to Illustration 1. The "Past Due" window will appear.
"Past Due" window
2. In order to close the window, click the "Close Window" button.
PM Checklist
With a Maintenance Watch subscription, a "Planned Maintenance Checklist" can be displayed.
In order to view a PM checklist, use the following procedure:
1. In order to view a PM, click the PM in the "Next PM: Name" column from the "Planned
Maintenance" screen. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Planned Maintenance (PM) Checklist" screen
will be displayed.
"PM Checklist"
(5) "Expand all Parts List" icon
(6) Icon of a triangle
(7) "View Part List" button
2. In order to view all of the parts list, click the "Expand all Parts List" icon (5) . This action will
expand all of the parts lists for all of the steps.
"PM Checklist" with an example of expanded parts
3. To expand the parts list for a single step, click the icon of a triangle (6) below the individual
step of that part. The step will expand in order to display the parts that are required to complete
the step.
"View Part List"

To assist the technician during a "planned maintenance", a list of all parts that are required for
completing the PM can be displayed and exported for printing. In addition, this list of parts can be
sent to the PartStore system for ordering.
Parts List for PM
(8) "Customer Qty" text fields
(9) "Order Entry" button
In order to view the "Parts List Summary", select the "View Part List" button (7) from the "PM
Checklist" screen. Refer to Illustration 5. The "Parts List for PM" screen will be displayed. Refer to
Illustration 7.
In order to order the parts through the PartStore system, click the "Order Entry" button (9) . The
quantities for the parts in the "Customer Qty" text fields (8) can be edited before placing an order.
"View Planner"
"Planner"
Maintenance Watch schedules the procedures for the PM in the "Planner" from EquipmentManager.
The "View Planner" screen displays the date that is estimated for the next PM. This approximation of
the dates that are chosen for the repairs is based on the average daily usage of the equipment. The
dates adjust dynamically depending on the future usage unless the repair is manually changed by the
"Pencil In Event".
In order to view the "View Planner" page, use the following procedure:
1. Select the check box (1) that is next to the equipment from the list on the "Planned
Maintenance" screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "View Planner" button. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Planner" window will appear.
The "Planner" displays the items of information for the PM, with the first PM that is due at the
beginning for the equipment that has been selected. To view the other PM due dates for this
equipment, use the options that are in the calendar to search by a date, a month, or a year. To view the
days between the PM due dates for a piece of equipment, you can use the "Back" and "Next" arrows
that are located in the upper right-hand corner of the window.
"Pencil In Events"
In order to change the date of the next PM on the "Planner", use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planner" window, click the "Pencil In Events" button. The "Pencil In Events" screen
will be displayed.
"Pencil In PM Events" screen
(10) "Pencil In Date" field
(11) "Save" button
2. Click the icon of a calendar next to the "Pencil In Date" field (10) and select a date from the
popup window.
Note: Once a "Pencil In Date" has been performed for the PM, the system will no longer adjust the
date for the PM dynamically. Once that PM is complete the subsequent schedules for the PM revert to
dynamic scheduling again.
Request Quote
A useful feature of Maintenance Watch is the ability to request a note for a PM directly from
EquipmentManager. EquipmentManager will send an e-mail to the Dealer Administrator of the web
site for your dealer. In order to request a quote, use the following procedure:
1. In order to request a note for a piece of machine, select the check box (1) for the equipment
from the list on the "Planned Maintenance" screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "Request Quote" button. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Quotation Details" window will
appear.
Requesting a PM Quote
(12) Check boxes
(13) "Send" button
3. In order to send a request to multiple Dealer Administrators, select the check boxes (12) next to
any of the Dealer Administrator.
4. In order to send a comment to the selected Dealer Administrator, enter the comments in the
"Comments" text field.
"Message Delivered Successfully" screen
6. Click the "OK" button. Refer to Illustration 11.
"Mark PM Completed"
Once you have used the "PM Checklist" to complete a PM, mark the PM as completed so that the PM
will no longer appear as an event in EquipmentManager. If you do not mark a PM as completed, the
note will appear as PM that has been missed.
In order to mark a PM as completed, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planned Maintenance" screen, select the check box (1) next to the equipment of the
PM that is to be marked as a note completed. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "Mark PM Complete" button. Refer to Illustration 1. The "Mark Planned Maintenance
(PM) Completed" window will appear.
"Mark Planned Maintenance (PM) Completed" screen
3. If the PM was missed, select the check box in the "Not Performed" column.
4. Enter the SMU of the equipment at the time the PM was performed in the "@ Service Meter"
text field.
5. Click the icon of a calendar next to the "Date" field and select a date from the popup window.
6. Enter notes in the "Notes/Comments" text field.
Note: "Notes/Comments" entered at the time a PM is marked as completed, append to the

checklists for the next "PM Due". If the last "PM Due" is marked missed, the offset will revert
to the defined fixed schedule.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03368451
Major Repair
SMCS - 7600; 7606
"Major Repair" screen
(1) Check box
In addition to a planned maintenance, a Maintenance Watch subscription gives you the ability to
schedule and track major repairs. On the "Event Summary" screen, select the check box (1) next to the
equipment you wish to view major repairs and then select "Major Repair" from the "View" drop-
down menu (2) . The "Major Repair" screen will be displayed. Refer to Illusrtation 1.
"Repair and Maintenance History"

Using Maintenance Watch, you can view a record of all previous major repairs that were performed
on the equipment and entered through EquipmentManager.
In order view the major repair history, use the following procedure:
"Repair & Maintenance History" screen
(3) "Expand All Parts" link/icon
(4) "Service Meters" column
(5) Calendar icon
(6) Icon of and envelope
(7) "Parts Causing Failure" link/icon
1. On the "Major Repair" screen, in the "Service Meters" column (4) , click the value in the field.
Refer to Illustration 2. The "Repair & Maintenance History" screen will be displayed.
2. Click the calendar icon (5) next to the "Start Date" and "End Date" fields and select a date to
indicate a time period for the PM history.
3. In order view the parts causing failure for the major repair, click either the "Expand All Parts"
link/icon (3) or the "Parts Causing Failure" link/icon (7) .
4. In order view the comments, click the icon of and envelope (6) in the "Notes/Comments"
column.
Request Quote
You can request a quote for the next major repair directly from EquipmentManager.
EquipmentManager will send an e-mail to the Dealer Administrator of the Dealer's Web site that you
are logged in.
In order request a quote, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Major Repair" screen, select the equipment for which you wish to request a quote.
2. Click the "Request Quote" button. The "Quotation Details" screen will be displayed.
"Quotation Details" screen for requesting a quote
(1) Check box
(9) "Send" button
3. Select the check box (1) next to the dealership personnel to whom you want to send the request.
4. In the "Notes/Comments" text field (8) , enter the comments you wish to send to the recipients.
"Mail Successfully Delivered " message for a MR quote
6. Click the "OK" button. The details about the machine and the service event are included in the e
-mail message.
View Planner
EquipmentManager places major repairs in the EquipmentManager planner. The planner displays the
date that the repair should be performed if all conditions remain the same. The dates that are chosen
for the repairs are estimated based on the average daily usage of the equipment. The dates adjust
dynamically based on usage, unless the repair is manually penciled in.
1. From the "Major Repair" screen, select the check box next to the equipment for which you wish
to view the planner. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Click the "View Planner" button. Refer to Illustration 5. The "View Planner" window appears.
"View Planner" window
3. In order view other major repair due dates for this equipment, you can use the calendar's
options to search by date, month, or year.
4. In order view days between equipment major repair due dates, you can use the back and next
arrows in the upper-right corner of the window.
Pencil In Dates
If you wish to change the date of the next major repair on the planner, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Planner" window, click the "Pencil In Date" button. The "Pencil In Date" screen will
be displayed.
"Pencil In Date" screen for a major repair
(10) "Save" button
(5) Calendar icon
2. Click the calendar icon (5) next to the "Pencil In Date" field and select a date from the popup
window.
Note: Once you pencil in a major repair date, the system no longer dynamically adjusts that major
repairs date. Once that major repair is complete, the subsequent major repairs revert back to dynamic
scheduling.
Mark Repair Complete

Once you have completed a major repair, you need to mark the repair completed.
In order mark a major repair completed, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Major Repair" screen, select the check box next to the equipment with the repair you
wish to mark completed. Refer to Illustration 7.
2. Click the "Mark Repair Complete" button. Refer to Illustration 7. The "Mark Repair Complete"
screen appears.
"Mark Repair Complete" screen
(10) "Save" button
(11) "Repair Performed @ Service Meter (hours)" text field
(5) Calendar icon
3. Enter the SMU of the equipment at the time the repair was performed in the "Repair Performed
@ Service Meter (hours)" text field (11) .
4. Click the calendar icon (5) next to the "Date of completion" field and select a date from the
popup window.
5. Enter notes in the "Notes/Comments" text field (8) .
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i02951552
Health Watch
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Overview
A subscription to Health Watch offers the following features:
• Displays the fuel results, fuel level history, fuel used history and refueling history.
• Identifies the onboard logged events and diagnostic codes and retains the events and codes in
EquipmentManager machine history.
• Relays available troubleshooting procedures, enabled by SIS Web subscription.
By using these features you can quickly and easily monitor your entire fleet. You can detect trends
which will help to improve fleet owning and operating costs.
Note: Diagnostic Codes are frequently referred to as Fault Codes or Event Codes.
Note: Health Watch information is dependent upon the machine model, year of production and
Product Link model installed. Machines produced with electronic engines and transmissions equipped
with Product Link model PL321SR normally can provide this information.
S·O·S Service Manager (S·O·S)

Service Manager software in the dealership laboratory. S·O·S alerts will be displayed in the
The S·O·S Service Manager is a software program that is available through your dealers web site. To
view S·O·S details or reports for a sample, use the tool for viewing the S·O·S application on the web.
Also, you may contact your Caterpillar dealer S·O·S services laboratory for your results. The report
from the S·O·S services laboratory may be obtained from a fax or from e-mail. A paper copy of the
report can be mailed as well.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03370084
Fuel Results
SMCS - 7600; 7606
The EquipmentManager software is able to collect data regarding the fuel consumption of your
equipment. This data includes the following: fuel level, fuel usage and the history for refueling.
information that is viewed on the "Fuel Results" screen is calculated information. The calculations are
based on the performance maps of the machine. The performance maps define specific performance
characteristics of the machine. These characteristics determine the calculated fuel usage at different
loading conditions. The result is the cumulative fuel consumption.
In order to view the fuel information for a specific machine, use the following procedure:
"Event Summary" screen
(1) Check box
1. Navigate to the "Event Summary" screen. Refer to Illustration 1.
2. Search for the specific machine in the "Equipment Information" column.
3. Click in the check box (1) to the left of the machine in order to select the machine.
"Fuel Information" screen
4. Select "Fuel Results" from the "View" drop-down menu (2) .
The "Fuel Information" screen will appear. Refer to Illustration 2. This screen will display the
information for the selected machine.
Click link (3) in order to view the "Fuel Level History" screen. Refer to ""Fuel Level History"".
Click link (4) in order to view the "Fuel Used History" screen. Refer to ""Fuel Used History"".
Click link (5) in order to view the "Refuel History" screen. Refer to ""Refuel History"".
"Fuel Level History"

"Fuel Level History" screen
In order to view the "Fuel Level History" screen, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Fuel Information" screen, click on the number in the "Fuel Remaining (gallons)"
column. The "Fuel Level History" screen is displayed. Refer to Illustration 3.
4. Click "Change Date Range". The information on the "Fuel Level History" screen will now
Graph of the Fuel Level
Graph of the existing fuel level
In order to view a graph of the existing fuel level of a machine, use the following procedure:
1. Navigate to the "Fuel Information" screen. Locate the "Fuel Remaining (gallons)" column.
2. Find the row which displays the information for your specific machine.
3. Click on the icon of a machine in the "Fuel Remaining" column. A graph will appear in a popup
window. Refer to Illustration 4. This graph will display information for the selected machine.
4. Click the "Close Window" button or click the "X" in the upper right corner in order to return to
the "Fuel Information" screen.
"Fuel Used History"

"Fuel Used History" screen
The "Fuel Used History" screen displays the history of fuel usage for a specific machine. Refer to
Illustration 5. This amount of fuel usage is calculated by the engine Electronic Control Module
(ECM).
In order to view the "Fuel Used History" screen, use the following procedure:
machine. Locate the "Total Fuel Consumed (gallons)" column. Click the number in the "Total
Fuel Consumed (gallons)" column for your machine. The "Fuel Used History" screen will
appear.
information that is viewed on the "Fuel Results" screen is calculated information. The
calculations are based on the performance maps of the machine. The performance maps define
specific performance characteristics of the machine. These characteristics determine the
calculated fuel usage at different loading conditions. The result is the cumulative fuel
consumption.
4. Click "Change Date Range". The information on the "Fuel Used History" screen will now
"Refuel History"
"Refuel History" screen

The "Refuel History" screen displays the history of refueling for a specific machine. Refer to
Illustration 6.
In order to view the "Refuel History" screen, use the following procedure:
machine. Locate the "Last Refill Qty. (gallons)" column. Click the number in the "Last Refill
Qty. (gallons)" column for your machine. The "Refuel History" screen will appear.
Note: The information about refueling is not provided by Product Link. This is a manual
function in the "Administration" menu.
4. Click "Change Date Range". The information on the "Refuel History" screen will now reflect
the selected date range.
Shutdown SIS
Previous Screen
Systems Operation

i03367182
Fault Codes
SMCS - 7600; 7606
Diagnostic codes are frequently referred to as fault codes or event codes. The fault codes that are
provided by the EquipmentManager software provide valuable information. This information can be
used to make decisions concerning the maintenance of your machine. Use the "Search Equipment"
button in order to access the fault codes for your . The "Search Equipment" button is located on the
EquipmentManager home screen. Select the check box (1) for the equipment from the "Equipment
Summary" screen. Then, select "Fault Codes" from the "View" drop-down menu.
"Fault Codes" screen
(1) Check box
(2) "Fault Codes" link
View "Fault Code History" (Event code and Diagnostic Code)

By using Health Watch, you can view a record of all previous fault codes that were recorded through
EquipmentManager software.
In order to view the "Fault Code History" screen, use the following procedure:
1. From the "Fault Codes" screen, click the "Fault Codes" link (2) or the "view history details"
link in the "Latest Fault Codes" column. The "Fault Code History" screen will be displayed.
"Fault Code History"
(3) "Start Date" field and "End Date" field
(4) "Fault Codes" column
(5) "Update Status" button
2. Click on the icon for the calendar next to the "Start Date" field and "End Date" field (3) . Select
a date in order to indicate a time period for the history of the fault code.
3. Click the "Change Date Range" button. The "Fault Code History" table will be updated to using
the new date range.
Note: The history of the fault code that is viewed in the EquipmentManager software will
display all faults that are reported by Product Link. A machine Electronic Control Module
(ECM) will automatically erase a diagnostic code after 100 hours of operation if the diagnostic
code does not reappear within that period of time. If the machine ECM erases a diagnostic code
automatically, the history of the fault code that is displayed by the EquipmentManager software
may not match the history that is displayed by Caterpillar Electronic Technician software.
"Service Information for Fault Codes (SIS Web)"
In order to view detailed information about a particular code, EquipmentManager software interfaces
with Service Information System (SIS). The link to SIS will provide troubleshooting procedures in
order to resolve fault codes. For this link to work, a valid subscription to SIS is required.
In order to obtain service information for specific fault codes, complete the following precedure:
1. On the "Fault Code History " screen, locate the "Fault Codes" column (4) . Click on the fault
code in order to view the service information for the fault code. The "Service Information for
Fault Codes" screen will now display the information for your specific fault code. The
troubleshooting procedure for the selected fault code will appear if there is a proper link in SIS.
"Service Information for Fault Codes" troubleshooting
2. The "Service Information for Fault Codes" screen for troubleshooting will display fault codes in
the left column. Click on the hyperlink that applies to your fault code. The "Service Information
for Fault Codes" will appear. This screen will display information about your fault code.
3. View the information in the "Information Types" and "Sections" columns. Click on the links
that apply to your fault code. Click the "Close" button in order to return to the "Fault Code
History" screen.
"Service Information for Fault Codes" information
"Update Status" for the Fault Code

EquipmentManager software enables you to update the status of a fault code. If the status of a fault
code is updated to "Resolved", the fault code will no longer appear in the "Event Summary". The
"Event Summary" screen is located on the home page. The home page may also be referred to as the
Exception Dashboard.
In order to update the status of a fault code, use the following procedure:
1. View the "Fault Code" screen, or the "Fault Code History" screen. Click in the check box (1)
that is next to the fault code in order to update the fault code. Then, click the "Update Status"
button (5) . The "Update Status" window will appear.
Fault code "Update Status"
(6) "Update Status" field
(7) "Comments" field
2. In the "Update Status" field (6) , select a new status. The following table displays the different
possible selections for "Update Status":
Table 1
Status Color Importance
Action RED Highest
Monitor YELLOW Medium
Normal GREEN Lowest
Resolved -- --
3. In the "Comments" field (7) , type your comments.
4. Click "Save". The status of the fault code is now updated.
Note: Once the status of an event is changed to "Resolved", the event will no longer be displayed in
the "Exception Dashboard".
S·O·S Service Manager Software

Service Manager software in the dealership's laboratory. S·O·S alerts will be displayed in the
The S·O·S Service Manager tool is a software program that is available through your dealer's web
site. In order to view S·O·S details or reports for a sample, use the tool for viewing the S·O·S
application on the web. Also, you may contact your Caterpillar dealer's S·O·S laboratory for your
results. The report from the S·O·S laboratory may be obtained from a fax or from e-mail. A paper
copy of the report can be mailed as well.

4 01 Electrical and Starting System

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

4 01 Electrical and Starting System

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shutdown SIS

• VIMS, CMS, EMS, etc.

(1) Alternator Case Ground

(2) Internal Ground

(3) "I" Terminal

(4) "R" Terminal

(5) Output Terminal

(1) Output Terminal

(2) "R" Terminal

(3) Alternator Case Ground

Rectifier Bridge 30-SI

42-MT Starting Motor

(1) Rear Housing

(4) Shift Lever Housing

(5) Shift Lever

(6) Drive Housing

(9) Brush Holder

(10) Pole shoes

(11) Field Winding (Coil)

(13) Starting Motor Housing

• Starting motor housing (13)

• Field winding (coil) (11)

• Pole shoes (10)

• Brush holder (9)

• Pinion drive (7)

• Shift lever (5)

• Housings (1), (4), and (6)

Field Winding and Starting Motor Housing

(11) Field Winding (Coil)

(13) Starting Motor Housing

(9) Brush Holder

(14) Brush Springs

37-MT Pinion Drive

(7) Pinion Drive

(15) Pinion Gear

41-MT and 42-MT Pinion Drive

(7) Pinion Drive

(15) Pinion Gear

(5) Shift Lever

(17) Solenoid Contacts

(18) Return Spring

(1) Return Spring

(3) Pull-In Winding

(4) Start (S) Terminal

(5) Hold-In Winding

(6) Battery (Bat) Terminal

(7) Key Start Switch

(8) Solenoid Contacts

(9) Motor (Mtr) Terminal

(10) Shift Lever

(11) Field Winding

(12) Pinion Drive

37-MT And 41-MT Operation

(1) Return Spring

(3) Pull-In Winding

(4) Start (S) Terminal

(5) Hold-In Winding

(6) Battery (Bat) Terminal

(7) Key Start Switch

(8) Solenoid Contacts

(9) Motor (Mtr) Terminal

(10) Shift Lever

(11) Field Winding

(12) Pinion Drive